First Floor Expansion Specifications

REQUEST
FOR
PROPOSAL
PROJECT: IDIQ FOR R&A
"RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION"
CHET HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING
LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA
ISSUE DATE: APRIL 19, 2010
PROPOSAL DUE DATE MAY 11, 2010

AND TIME : 2:00 PM (PDT)
SUBMIT TO : GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION

LOS ANGELES SERVICE CENTER
ATTN: HEATHER CANEY
300 NORTH LOS ANGELES ST., ROOM 4100
LOS ANGELES, CA 90012
TASK ORDER RFP NO.: 9P3PSLC101037
GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED

PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT
COPYING, DISSEMINATION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THESE DRAWINGS, PLANS OR SPECIFICATIONS
TO UNAUTHORIZED USERS IS PROHIBITED
Do not remove this notice - Properly destroy documents when no longer needed
IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A PBS - REG 9
“RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION”
LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA TASK ORDER RFP # 9P3PSLC101037
TASK ORDER REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

TIER 2, ZONE 5 TASK ORDER NO.: 9P3PSLC101037
PROJECT TITLE: “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION”
LOCATION OF WORK:
24000 AVILA ROAD, LAGUNA NIGUEL, CA 92677
SECURITY/WORK HOURS RESTRICTIONS:

SEE VOLUME III
ADDITIONAL REFERERENCES/CODES/STANDARDS:
SEE VOLUME III
SITE VISIT DATE(S)/INSTRUCTIONS: 04/22/2010, 10 A.M. (PDT)

SEE VOLUME II FOR DETAILS
DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF QUESTIONS: 04/27/2010, 2:00 P.M. (PDT)
DEADLINE FOR PROPOSAL SUBMISSION: 05/11/2010, 2:00 P.M. (PDT)
SOURCE SELECTION FACTORS:

1. Price
2. Non-Price Factors. If none checked, selection is by price only. If non-price factors are checked, non-price
factors will be considered to be roughly equal in weight to price in evaluating the contractor's proposal. Proposals
must contain material described in Volume I pertinent to each checked factor.
Past Performance
Specialized Experience
Quality of Equipment and Materials
Systems Schematic and Description. List equipment/systems:

_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Other (Specify Non-Price Factor)
PAGE 0 - 1
SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU)
FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
Do not remove this notice
Properly destroy or return documents when no longer needed
ANTICIPATED WORK START DATE: TBD
ANTICIPATED REQUIRED COMPLETION TIME: 90 days from NTP
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AMOUNT (PER DAY): $755.33
RFP VOLUMES AND ATTACHMENTS:
RFP VOLUMES
VOLUME I: OFFER FORMS

VOLUME II: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
VOLUME III : TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - WRITTEN SPECS & DRAWINGS
STANDARD FORM 24 - BID BOND
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS:
Installation Plan
Commissioning Plan
O&M Manuals
As-Built Drawings
DESCRIPTION/STATEMENT OF WORK/PERFORMANCE STANDARDS (REFERENCE ATTACHMENTS AS APPROPRIATE):
WARNING : DO NOT QUALIFY YOUR PROPOSAL
ONE LUMP SUM OFFER IS REQUIRED ON “TASK ORDER OFFER FORM” (VOLUME I).
A BID GUARANTEE IS REQUIRED WITH YOUR PROPOSAL. SEE REQUIREMENTS IN VOLUME I

AND STANDARD FORM 24.
ESTIMATED COST RANGE OF THIS PROJECT IS BETWEEN $500,000 AND $1,000,000.
ORDERING OFFICIAL:
HEATHER CANEY, CONTRACTING OFFICER

GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION
LOS ANGELES SERVICE CENTER, CONSTRUCTION SERVICES BRANCH
PAGE 0 - 2
“PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT.

Copying, dissemination, or distribution of these drawings, plans, or specifications to
unauthorized persons is prohibited.”
NOTE: Unauthorized persons are those who do not have a need to know of the contents of the document. Those with a need to know
would include contractors, sub-contractors, suppliers, and others that the contractor deems necessary in order to submit and offer or
bid, or to complete the work or contract.
NOTICE CONCERNING
TASK ORDER REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL
ATTENTION OFFEROR: You are cautioned to carefully read the entire solicitation in order to be
fully aware of all requirements, provisions and clauses. Fill-ins should
be properly completed and verified. All copies should contain the same
information. Verify calculations before signing your offer.
Bid Guarantee/Bid Bond

Information on the bid guarantee can be found in Volume I - Offer Forms.
Liquidated Damages
Information on liquidated damages can be found in Volume II – Supplementary Conditions.
Site Visit
Information on site visits can be found in Volume II – Supplementary Conditions.
Questions
The deadline for submission of questions regarding this solicitation is Tuesday, April 27, 2010, 2:00 PM
(PDT). No questions will be accepted or answered after this time.
Questions must be in written format and emailed to Heather Caney, Contracting Officer at
[email protected].
Offer Submission
The following documents must be submitted with your offer:
1. Task Order Offer Form

2. Standard Form 24 – Bid Bond
3. Specialized Experience/Past Performance Reference Sheets (Minimum of 3 for each)
Project References must meet the Similar Work definition stated in Volume I
4. Acknowledgement of Amendment(s), if any
NOTE: Electronic Commerce IS a permitted method of submission, modification, revision,

and withdrawal of proposals for this solicitation. Electronic submissions must be sent to Heather Caney,
PAGE 0 - 3
Contracting Officer, at [email protected], followed up with submission of the original documents

in sealed envelopes and/ or packages to:
U.S. General Services Administration

Los Angeles Service Center, Construction Services Branch
Attn: Heather Caney
300 North Los Angeles St., Suite 4100
Los Angeles, CA 90012
Be sure to reference the RFP Number, Project Title, and Proposal Closing Date on the envelope
containing your offer.
PAGE 0 - 4
VOLUME I
OFFER FORMS
PAGE I - 0
1. FAR 52.228-1 BID GUARANTEE (SEP 1996)
(a) Failure to furnish a bid guarantee in the proper form and amount, by the time set for opening of bids,
may be cause for rejection of the bid.
(b) The bidder shall furnish a bid guarantee in the form of a firm commitment, e.g., bid bond supported by
good and sufficient surety or sureties acceptable to the Government, postal money order, certified check,
cashier's check, irrevocable letter of credit, or, under Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or
notes of the United States. The Contracting Officer will return bid guarantees, other than bid bonds, (1) to
unsuccessful bidders as soon as practicable after the opening of bids, and (2) to the successful bidder upon
execution of contractual documents and bonds (including any necessary coinsurance or reinsurance
agreements), as required by the bid as accepted.
(c) The amount of the bid guarantee shall be twenty percent of the bid price or $3 Million, whichever is
less.
(d) If the successful bidder, upon acceptance of its bid by the Government within the period specified for
acceptance, fails to execute all contractual documents or give a bond(s) within ten days after receipt of the
forms by the bidder, the Contracting Officer may terminate the contract for default.
(e) In the event the contract is terminated for default, the bidder is liable for any cost of acquiring the work
that exceeds the amount of its bid, and the bid guarantee is available to offset the difference.
2. FAR 52.204-8 ANNUAL REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS (FEB 2009)
(a) (1) The North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code for this acquisition is 236220.
(2) The small business size standard is $33.5 million.
(3) The small business size standard for a concern which submits an offer in its own name, other than
on a construction or service contract, but which proposes to furnish a product which it did not itself
manufacture, is 500 employees.
(b)(1) If the clause at 52.204-7, Central Contractor Registration, is included in this solicitation,
paragraph (d) of this provision applies.
(2) If the clause at 52.204-7 is not included in this solicitation, and the offeror is currently registered in
CCR, and has completed the ORCA electronically, the offeror may choose to use paragraph (d) of this
provision instead of completing the corresponding individual representations and certifications in the
solicitation. The offeror shall indicate which option applies by checking one of the following boxes:
[ ] (i) Paragraph (d) applies.
[ ] (ii) Paragraph (d) does not apply and the offeror has completed the individual representations
and certifications in the solicitation.
(c) Not used.
(d) The offeror has completed the annual representations and certifications electronically via the Online
Representations and Certifications Application (ORCA) website at http://orca.bpn.gov. After reviewing the
ORCA database information, the offeror verifies by submission of the offer that the representations and
certifications currently posted electronically that apply to this solicitation as indicated in paragraph (c) of
this provision have been entered or updated within the last 12 months, are current, accurate, complete, and
applicable to this solicitation (including the business size standard applicable to the NAICS code
referenced for this solicitation), as of the date of this offer and are incorporated in this offer by reference
(see FAR 4.1201); except for the changes identified below [offeror to insert changes, identifying change by
PAGE I - 1
clause number, title, date]. These amended representation(s) and/or certification(s) are also incorporated in
this offer and are current, accurate, and complete as of the date of this offer.
FAR CLAUSE # TITLE DATE CHANGE

____________ _________ _____ ______
_
____________ _________ _____ ______
_
____________ _________ _____ ______
_
Any changes provided by the offeror are applicable to this solicitation only, and do not result in an update
to the representations and certifications posted on ORCA.
(End of provision)
3. METHOD FOR AWARD
The Government will make award to the responsive, responsible Offeror that conforms to all the
submission requirements and is considered to be most advantageous to the Government, price and other
factors considered. For purposes of the evaluation, price is roughly equal in weight and importance to the
weight of the technical factor. As technical proposals become more equal in their technical merit, price
becomes more important.
Technical factors that Offerors will be evaluated on are: 1) Specialized Experience 2) Past Performance.
In the case of an Offeror without a record of past performance, or for whom information on past
performance is not available, that Offeror will be given neither a favorable nor an unfavorable evaluation
regarding past performance.
4. EVALUATION FACTORS
A. PRICE EVALUATION
(1) Price Evaluation consists of (1) the base bid (consisting of the lump sum bid and any associated unit
price bids extended by the applicable number of units shown on the offer form) plus (2) all alternates
designated to be evaluated. The evaluation of alternates will not obligate the Government to accept the
alternates.
(2) An offer may be rejected as nonresponsive if the offer is materially unbalanced as to offer prices. An
offer is unbalanced when the offer is based on prices significantly less than cost for some work and
significantly overstated for other work.
PAGE I - 2
B. TECHNICAL EVALUATION
For purposes of the technical evaluation, the Government will only evaluate projects that meet the
Similar Work definition. Similar Work is defined as: a repair & alteration project with a
minimum dollar value of $750,000; completed within the last 5 years; and involving new
construction, improvements and/or expansion of commercial buildings.
(1) SPECIALIZED EXPERIENCE
This factor considers the extent of the Offeror’s experience within the last 5 years on contracts of Similar
Work. Experience will be evaluated by analysis of information provided by the offeror and by interviews
with the Offeror's past and/or current customers. The standard is met when Offerors submit a minimum of
three contracts for Similar Work, completed within the last 5 years.
(2) PAST PERFORMANCE
This factor considers the Offeror’s past performance, within the last 5 years, in performing contracts for Similar
Work. This past performance evaluation may include an evaluation of the Offeror's quality of workmanship,
timeliness of delivery, responsiveness of management and cooperation with customer, adherence to contract
requirements, and overall quality of Offeror’s performance and customer satisfaction. Evaluation of past
performance is a subjective assessment based on consideration of all relevant facts and circumstances. It will
not be based on absolute standards of acceptable performance. The standard is met when an Offeror’s
references indicate that the Offer’s past performance was good.
Additionally, the Contracting Officer may identify and analyze the past performance of the Offeror on any other
contract that they currently have or have completed. In the case of an Offeror without a record of past
performance, or for whom information on past performance is not available, that Offeror will be given neither a
favorable nor an unfavorable evaluation regarding past performance.
While Offerors must provide a minimum of 3 references for the past performance evaluations, they may
provide more. However, the Government is not required to conduct or complete past performance
evaluations on more than 3 contracts, although it may choose to do so. Additionally, if more than 3
references are provided, the Government reserves the right to choose which references to include in its past
performance evaluation.
5. SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Each Offeror must provide a minimum of three (3) customer references for both technical evaluation
factors. It is the Offeror’s responsibility to provide sufficient information regarding their reference projects
for the Government to determine if a project meets the Similar Work definition as stated in the Evaluation
Factor section above. Offerors are cautioned to verify the accuracy of the contact information for
references for the past performance evaluation. If GSA is unable to contact a submitted Past Performance
reference, then that Offeror will be given neither a favorable nor unfavorable evaluation for that reference.
References shall only pertain to the Offeror entity itself, not prospective subcontractors.
In addition to those references provided directly by the Offeror, the Government may identify and analyze
such relevant past performance or experience of the Offeror on any other contract that the Offeror currently
PAGE I - 3
has or had of which the Government has knowledge or obtains knowledge of, including but not limited to
projects listed in the Past Performance Retrieval System (PPIRS).
6. FAR 52.215-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS-COMPETITIVE ACQUISITION (JAN 2004)
(a) Definitions. As used in this provision-

"Discussions" are negotiations that occur after establishment of the competitive range that may, at the
Contracting Officer's discretion, result in the offeror being allowed to revise its proposal.
"In writing," "writing," or "written" means any worded or numbered expression that can be read,
reproduced, and later communicated, and includes electronically transmitted and stored information.
"Proposal modification" is a change made to a proposal before the solicitation's closing date and time, or
made in response to an amendment, or made to correct a mistake at any time before award.
"Proposal revision" is a change to a proposal made after the solicitation closing date, at the request of or as
allowed by a Contracting Officer as the result of negotiations.
"Time," if stated as a number of days, is calculated using calendar days, unless otherwise specified, and
will include Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays. However, if the last day falls on a Saturday, Sunday,
or legal holiday, then the period shall include the next working day.
(b) Amendments to solicitations. If this solicitation is amended, all terms and conditions that are not
amended remain unchanged. Offerors shall acknowledge receipt of any amendment to this solicitation by
the date and time specified in the amendment(s).
(c) Submission, modification, revision, and withdrawal of proposals.
(1) Unless other methods (e.g., electronic commerce or facsimile) are permitted in the solicitation,
proposals and modifications to proposals shall be submitted in paper media in sealed envelopes or
packages (i) addressed to the office specified in the solicitation, and (ii) showing the time and date
specified for receipt, the solicitation number, and the name and address of the offeror. Offerors
using commercial carriers should ensure that the proposal is marked on the outermost wrapper
with the information in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (c)(1)(ii) of this provision.
(2) The first page of the proposal must show-
(i) The solicitation number;
(ii) The name, address, and telephone and facsimile numbers of the offeror (and
electronic address if available);
(iii) A statement specifying the extent of agreement with all terms, conditions, and
provisions included in the solicitation and agreement to furnish any or all items upon
which prices are offered at the price set opposite each item;
(iv) Names, titles, and telephone and facsimile numbers (and electronic addresses if
available) of persons authorized to negotiate on the offeror's behalf with the Government
in connection with this solicitation; and
(v) Name, title, and signature of person authorized to sign the proposal. Proposals signed
by an agent shall be accompanied by evidence of that agent's authority, unless that
evidence has been previously furnished to the issuing office.
(3) Submission, modification, revision, and withdrawal of proposals.
(i) Offerors are responsible for submitting proposals, and any modifications or revisions,
so as to reach the Government office designated in the solicitation by the time specified
in the solicitation. If no time is specified in the solicitation, the time for receipt is 4:30
PAGE I - 4
p.m., local time, for the designated Government office on the date that proposal or
revision is due.
(ii)(A) Any proposal, modification, or revision received at the Government office
designated in the solicitation after the exact time specified for receipt of offers is "late"
and will not be considered unless it is received before award is made, the Contracting
Officer determines that accepting the late offer would not unduly delay the acquisition;
and-
(1) If it was transmitted through an electronic commerce method authorized by
the solicitation, it was received at the initial point of entry to the Government
infrastructure not later than 5:00 p.m. one working day prior to the date
specified for receipt of proposals; or
(2) There is acceptable evidence to establish that it was received at the
Government installation designated for receipt of offers and was under the
Government's control prior to the time set for receipt of offers; or
(3) It is the only proposal received.
(B) However, a late modification of an otherwise successful proposal that makes its
terms more favorable to the Government will be considered at any time it is received and
may be accepted.
(iii) Acceptable evidence to establish the time of receipt at the Government installation
includes the time/date stamp of that installation on the proposal wrapper, other
documentary evidence of receipt maintained by the installation, or oral testimony or
statements of Government personnel.
(iv) If an emergency or unanticipated event interrupts normal Government processes so
that proposals cannot be received at the office designated for receipt of proposals by the
exact time specified in the solicitation, and urgent Government requirements preclude
amendment of the solicitation, the time specified for receipt of proposals will be deemed
to be extended to the same time of day specified in the solicitation on the first work day
on which normal Government processes resume.
(v) Proposals may be withdrawn by written notice received at any time before award.
Oral proposals in response to oral solicitations may be withdrawn orally. If the
solicitation authorizes facsimile proposals, proposals may be withdrawn via facsimile
received at any time before award, subject to the conditions specified in the provision at
52.215-5, Facsimile Proposals. Proposals may be withdrawn in person by an offeror or
an authorized representative, if the identity of the person requesting withdrawal is
established and the person signs a receipt for the proposal before award.
(4) Unless otherwise specified in the solicitation, the offeror may propose to provide any item or
combination of items.
(5) Offerors shall submit proposals in response to this solicitation in English, unless otherwise
permitted by the solicitation, and in U.S. dollars, unless the provision at FAR 52.225-17,
Evaluation of Foreign Currency Offers, is included in the solicitation.
(6) Offerors may submit modifications to their proposals at any time before the solicitation closing
date and time, and may submit modifications in response to an amendment, or to correct a mistake
at any time before award.
(7) Offerors may submit revised proposals only if requested or allowed by the Contracting
Officer.
(8) Proposals may be withdrawn at any time before award. Withdrawals are effective upon receipt
of notice by the Contracting Officer.
(d) Offer expiration date. Proposals in response to this solicitation will be valid for the number of days
specified on the solicitation cover sheet (unless a different period is proposed by the offeror).
PAGE I - 5
(e) Restriction on disclosure and use of data. Offerors that include in their proposals data that they do not
want disclosed to the public for any purpose, or used by the Government except for evaluation purposes,
shall-
(1) Mark the title page with the following legend:
This proposal includes data that shall not be disclosed outside the Government and shall not be
duplicated, used, or disclosed-in whole or in part-for any purpose other than to evaluate this
proposal. If, however, a contract is awarded to this offeror as a result of-or in connection with-the
submission of this data, the Government shall have the right to duplicate, use, or disclose the data
to the extent provided in the resulting contract. This restriction does not limit the Government's
right to use information contained in this data if it is obtained from another source without
restriction. The data subject to this restriction are contained in sheets [insert numbers or other
identification of sheets]; and
(2) Mark each sheet of data it wishes to restrict with the following legend:
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of
this proposal.
(f) Contract award.
(1) The Government intends to award a contract or contracts resulting from this solicitation to the
responsible offeror(s) whose proposal(s) represents the best value after evaluation in accordance
with the factors and sub-factors in the solicitation.
(2) The Government may reject any or all proposals if such action is in the Government's interest.
(3) The Government may waive informalities and minor irregularities in proposals received.
(4) The Government intends to evaluate proposals and award a contract without discussions with
offerors (except clarifications as described in FAR 15.306(a)). Therefore, the offeror's initial
proposal should contain the offeror's best terms from a cost or price and technical standpoint. The
Government reserves the right to conduct discussions if the Contracting Officer later determines
them to be necessary. If the Contracting Officer determines that the number of proposals that
would otherwise be in the competitive range exceeds the number at which an efficient competition
can be conducted, the Contracting Officer may limit the number of proposals in the competitive
range to the greatest number that will permit an efficient competition among the most highly rated
proposals.
(5) The Government reserves the right to make an award on any item for a quantity less than the
quantity offered, at the unit cost or prices offered, unless the offeror specifies otherwise in the
proposal.
(6) The Government reserves the right to make multiple awards if, after considering the additional
administrative costs, it is in the Government's best interest to do so.
(7) Exchanges with offerors after receipt of a proposal do not constitute a rejection or counteroffer
by the Government.
(8) The Government may determine that a proposal is unacceptable if the prices proposed are
materially unbalanced between line items or sub-line items. Unbalanced pricing exists when,
despite an acceptable total evaluated price, the price of one or more contract line items is
significantly overstated or understated as indicated by the application of cost or price analysis
techniques. A proposal may be rejected if the Contracting Officer determines that the lack of
balance poses an unacceptable risk to the Government.
(9) If a cost realism analysis is performed, cost realism may be considered by the source selection
authority in evaluating performance or schedule risk.
(10) A written award or acceptance of proposal mailed or otherwise furnished to the successful
offeror within the time specified in the proposal shall result in a binding contract without further
action by either party.
PAGE I - 6
(11) If a post-award debriefing is given to requesting offerors, the Government shall disclose the
following information, if applicable:
(i) The agency's evaluation of the significant weak or deficient factors in the debriefed
offeror's offer.
(ii) The overall evaluated cost or price and technical rating of the successful and the
debriefed offeror and past performance information on the debriefed offeror.
(iii) The overall ranking of all offerors, when any ranking was developed by the agency
during source selection.
(iv) A summary of the rationale for award.
(v) For acquisitions of commercial items, the make and model of the item to be delivered
by the successful offeror.
(vi) Reasonable responses to relevant questions posed by the debriefed offeror as to
whether source-selection procedures set forth in the solicitation, applicable regulations,
and other applicable authorities were followed by the agency.
(End of provision)
PAGE I - 7
SPECIALIZED EXPERIENCE / PAST PERFORMANCE REFERENCE
Note: The offeror shall complete this form in its entirety and submit as part of their proposal. Make additional copies as
necessary and complete one form for each reference. See "Similar Work" Definition on Page I-3.
ALL INFORMATION REQUESTED ON THE FORM MUST BE COMPLETED.
1. OFFEROR (COMPANY NAME)
3. PROJECT STATUS AND TYPE 4. PROJECT NAME AND LOCATION (CITY, STATE)
CURRENT GOVERNMENT
PREVIOUS NON-GOVERNMENT
REFERENCE TYPE (PAST PERFORMANCE, SPECIALIZED EXPERIENCE, OR BOTH COMBINED)
5A. REFERENCE CONTACT PERSON/PROJECT MANAGER 5B. REFERENCE CONTACT PHONE NUMBER
5C. REFERENCE CONTACT FAX NUMBER 5D. REFERENCE CONTACT E-MAIL ADDRESS
6. CONTRACT NUMBER (IF FEDERAL GOVERNMENT CONTRACT) 7. VALUE OF CONTRACT 7B. PERCENTAGE OF WORK
PERFORMED BY OFFEROR
$
8. TYPE OF FACILITY (office, hospital, manufacturing, school, etc.) 9. SIZE OF PROJECT (SQUARE FOOTAGE)
10A. IS SERVICE COMPLETE? 10B. START DATE 10C. COMPLETION DATE 10D. NUMBER OF DAYS
YES NO
21 DESCRIPTION OF WORK, PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN
PAGE I - 8
TASK ORDER OFFER FORM

TIER 2, ZONE 5 TASK ORDER NO.: 9P3PSLC101037
PROJECT TITLE: “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION”

1. ISSUED BY 2. ADDRESS OFFER TO
General Services Administration General Services Administration

Los Angeles Service Center, Const. Services Branch Los Angeles Service Center, Const. Services Branch
300 N. Los Angeles Street, Suite 4100 Attn: Heather Caney
Los Angeles, CA 90012 300 N. Los Angeles Street, Suite 4100
3. OFFEROR (Company Name)
4. OFFEROR PHONE NUMBER 5. OFFEROR FAX NUMBER
6. OFFEROR DUNS NUMBER 7. OFFEROR TAX ID NUMBER
PRICES ARE REQUIRED BELOW FOR ALL ITEMS OF WORK INDICATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS,
DRAWINGS, AND AMENDMENT(S) (IF APPLICABLE).
0001 LUMP SUM BID $___________________________
Write in Price for Lump Sum Bid work:
8. The offeror agrees to perform the work required at the prices specified above in strict accordance with the terms of this task order request for proposal,
if this offer is accepted by the Government in writing within ________ calendar days after the date offers are due. (Insert any number equal to or
greater than the minimum requirement stated below. Failure to insert any number means the offeror accepts the minimum stated below.)
9. A. Sealed offers in original and 1 copies to perform the work required are due at the place specified in Item 2 by
02:00PM local time TUESDAY, MAY 11, 2010. Sealed envelopes containing offers shall be marked to show the
offeror’s name and address, the RFP number, and the date and time offers are due.
B. An offer guarantee is, is not required.
C. All offers are subject to the (1) work requirements, and (2) other provisions and clauses incorporated in the
solicitation in full text or by reference.
D. Offers providing less than 60 calendar days for Government acceptance after the date offers are due
will not be considered and will be rejected.
10. NAME AND TITLE OF CONTRACTOR OR PERSON AUTHORIZED TO SIGN OFFER (Type or print)
11. SIGNATURE 12. DATE
PAGE I - 9
VOLUME II
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PAGE II - 0
1. GENERAL CONDITIONS
Whenever the term “General Conditions” is used in the specification, it refers to the original IDIQ contract
section entitled “Construction Contract Clauses (Fixed Price).”
2. FAR 52.211-12 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - CONSTRUCTION (Apr 1984)
(a) If the contractor fails to complete the work within the time specified in the contract, or any extension,
the Contractor shall pay to the Government as liquidated damages, the sum of $755.33 for each day of
delay.
(b) If the Government terminates the Contractor's right to proceed, the resulting damage will consist of
liquidated damages until such reasonable time as may be required for final completion of the work together
with any increased costs occasioned the Government in completing the work.
(c) If the Government does not terminate the Contractor's right to proceed, the resulting damage will
consist of liquidated damages until the work is completed or accepted.
3. FAR 52.236-27 SITE VISIT (CONSTRUCTION) (Feb 1995)
(a) The clauses at 52.236-2, Differing Site Conditions, and 52.236-3, Site Investigations and Conditions
Affecting the Work, will be included in any contract awarded as a result of this solicitation.
Accordingly, offerors or quoters are urged and expected to inspect the site where the work will be
performed.
(b) The organized site visit has been scheduled for—

Thursday, April 22, 2010
10:00 - 11:30 A.M.

This will be the only site visit scheduled for this project. Please make sure a representative from your firm
is in attendance if you are interested in submitting a proposal in response to this solicitation.
(c) Participants will meet at—

Meet Project Manager, Rebecca Martinez, in the lobby area outside of the GSA Laguna Niguel
Field Office, Suite 4100, Chet Holifield Federal Building promptly at 10:00 am
Chet Holifield Federal Building
24000 Avila Road, Suite 4100
Laguna Niguel, CA 92677

(d) Please contact the Project Manager, Rebecca Martinez if more information is needed regarding the
organized site visit. Ms. Martinez can be reached at (213) 894-0315 (office) or
(213) 219-0793 (cell).
(End of provision)
PAGE II - 1
4. FAR 52.211-13 TIME EXTENSIONS (Apr 1984)
Notwithstanding any other provisions of this contract, it is mutually understood that the time extensions for
changes in the work will depend upon the extent, if any, by which the changes cause delay in the
completion of the various elements of construction. The change order granting the time extension may
provide that the contract completion date will be extended only for those specific elements so delayed and
that the remaining contract completion dates for all other portions of the work will not be altered and may
further provide for an equitable readjustment of liquidated damages under the new completion schedule.
5. FAR 52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR

1984)
The Contractor shall be required to:
(a) Commence work under this contract as stated in the task/delivery order after the Contractor receives
the Notice to Proceed. (The phrases "commence work" may, but need not, involve on-site activity by
construction tradesmen. Diligent ordering/delivery of materials and equipment, preparation and
submission of documents to the government for approval are also included.)
(b) Prosecute the work diligently, and
(c) Complete the entire work ready for use not later than 90 calendar days after receipt of Notice To
Proceed. The time stated for completion shall include final cleanup of the premises.
6. Note: The contractor shall furnish the required performance and payment bonds within 10
calendar days after award.
FAR 52.228-15 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS-CONSTRUCTION (NOV 2006)
(a) Definitions. As used in this clause—

“Original contract price” means the award price of the contract; or, for requirements contracts, the price
payable for the estimated total quantity; or, for indefinite-quantity contracts, the price payable for the
specified minimum quantity. Original contract price does not include the price of any options, except those
options exercised at the time of contract award.
(b) Amount of required bonds. Unless the resulting contract price is $100,000 or less, the successful offeror
shall furnish performance and payment bonds to the Contracting Officer as follows:
(1) Performance bonds (Standard Form 25). The penal amount of performance bonds at the time of
contract award shall be 100 percent of the original contract price.
(2) Payment Bonds (Standard Form 25A). The penal amount of payment bonds at the time of contract
award shall be 100 percent of the original contract price.
(3) Additional bond protection.
(i) The Government may require additional performance and payment bond protection if the contract price
is increased. The increase in protection generally will equal 100 percent of the increase in contract price.
(ii) The Government may secure the additional protection by directing the Contractor to increase the penal
amount of the existing bond or to obtain an additional bond.
PAGE II - 2
(c) Furnishing executed bonds. The Contractor shall furnish all executed bonds, including any necessary
reinsurance agreements, to the Contracting Officer, within the time period specified in the Bid Guarantee
provision of the solicitation, or otherwise specified by the Contracting Officer, but in any event, before
starting work.
(d) Surety or other security for bonds. The bonds shall be in the form of firm commitment, supported by
corporate sureties whose names appear on the list contained in Treasury Department Circular 570,
individual sureties, or by other acceptable security such as postal money order, certified check, cashier's
check, irrevocable letter of credit, or, in accordance with Treasury Department regulations, certain bonds or
notes of the United States. Treasury Circular 570 is published in the Federal Register or may be obtained
from the:
U.S. Department of the Treasury

Financial Management Service
Surety Bond Branch
3700 East West Highway, Room 6F01
Hyattsville, MD 20782.
Or via the internet at http://www.fms.treas.gov/c570/.
(e) Notice of subcontractor waiver of protection (40 U.S.C. 3133(c)). Any waiver of the right to sue on the
payment bond is void unless it is in writing, signed by the person whose right is waived, and executed after
such person has first furnished labor or material for use in the performance of the contract.
(End of clause)
7. F AR 52.204-9 PERSONAL IDENTITY VERIFICATION OF CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL (Sept

2007)
(a) The Contractor shall comply with agency personal identity verification procedures identified in the
contract that implement Homeland Security Presidential Directive-12 (HSPD-12), Office of Management
and Budget (OMB) guidance M-05-24 and Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS
PUB) Number 201.
(b) The Contractor shall insert this clause in all subcontracts when the subcontractor is required to have
routine physical access to a Federally-controlled facility and/or routine access to a Federally-controlled
information system.
(End of clause)
PAGE II - 3
8. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
The contractor must refer to the clauses FAR 52.228-5 INSURANCE – WORK ON A GOVERNMENT
INSTALLATION (Jan 1997) and GSAR 552.228-70 WORKERS COMPENSATION LAWS (Sep 1999),
which can be found in the Construction Contract Clauses, located in the Master IDIQ contract. The
coverage specified below, pursuant to Subpart 28.307-2 of the Federal Acquisition Regulation, are the
minimums required:
(1) Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability

Contractors are required to comply with applicable Federal and State Workers' compensation and
occupational disease statutes. If occupational diseases are not compensable under those statutes, they shall
be covered under the employer's liability section of the insurance policy, except when contract operations
are so commingled with a contractor's commercial operations that it would not be practical to require this
coverage. Employer's liability coverage of at least $100,000, shall be required, except in States with
exclusive or monopolistic funds that do not permit workers' compensation to be written by private carriers
(2) General Liability

Bodily injury liability insurance coverage written on the comprehensive form of policy of at least $500,000
per occurrence
(3) Property Damage

$50,000 per occurrence
(4) Automobile Liability

The contractor shall provide automobile liability insurance written on the comprehensive form of the
policy. The policy shall provide for bodily injury and property damage liability covering the operation of
all automobiles used in connection with performing the contract. Policies covering automobiles operated in
the United States shall provide coverage of at least $200,000 per person and $500,000 per occurrence for
bodily injury and $20,000 per occurrence for property damage. The amount of liability coverage on other
policies shall be commensurate with any legal requirements of the locality and sufficient to meet normal
and customary claims.
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH APPLIES ONLY IF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ARE TO BE REMOVED, TRANSPORTED
OR DISPOSED OF
(5) Hazardous Material Liability

Any subcontractor (or contractor) performing asbestos work, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) work, or
other hazardous materials work, shall provide bodily injury liability insurance policy of at least $1,000,000
per occurrence covering the work to be performed. If an occurrence policy is unavailable, contractor shall
provide proof of a current claims made policy also covering this same work, with an extended endorsement
period of not less than 10 years. The Government will not indemnify against such risks. Furthermore, the
subcontractor (or contractor) will advise GSA in writing where this coverage and any related endorsements
can be found in the policy.
PAGE II - 4
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SUBMITTING CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE
(a) Following award of the contract and as a condition of the issuance of notice to proceed, the contractor must
furnish a Certificate of Insurance executed by the insurance provider. The contractor is to convey the enclosed
Certificate of Insurance to the insurance provider for execution. A Certificate of Insurance may be submitted in
any format provided that the certificate addresses all of the items indicated on the enclosed certificate, subject to
the specific insurance requirements stated in the contract documents.
(b) The insurance coverage obtained must satisfy the requirements of the contract in terms of:
(1) Types of insurance

(2) Minimum coverage amounts
(3) Any required endorsements
(c) Particular requirements include:
(1) The policy or policies of insurance must stipulate that the Government is to be notified 30 days
prior to any cancellation of the policy or any material change adversely affecting the Government's
interest. (See FAR 52.228-5--INSURANCE--WORKS ON A GOVERNMENT INSTALLATION).
(2) For contracts involving the abatement of asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB's), and/or other
hazardous materials, or contracts which are likely to involve the handling of such materials: If the
contract insurance requirements stipulate, coverage for liabilities for bodily injury arising out of such
work under this contract must be provided with limits no less than those specified for general liability
insurance. Coverage for property damage associated with the hazardous materials will be required if it
is specified in the contract documents.
PAGE II - 5
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE:
PRODUCER:
INSURED:
IDIQ CONTRACT/ DELIVERY ORDER NUMBER:
LIABILITY LIMITS
TYPE OF POLICY NO. POLICY POLICY (000’s)
INSURANCE EFFECTIVE EXPIRATION Each Aggregate
DATE DATE Occurrence
General Liability Bod.
Inj.
Prop.
Dam.
BI/PD
Comb.
Pers.
Inj.
Hazardous Mat. Liab. Bod.
(if req.-see specs) Inj.
Prop.
Dam.
Automobile Liability Bod. Per
Inj. Person
Bod. Per
Inj. Accident
Prop.
Dam.
BI/PD
Comb.
Excess Liability BI/PD
Comb.
Workmen’s Comp. & Statutory
Employer’s Liability Ea. Accident
Disease-PL
Disease-Ea. Employee
Other Coverage (if
required)
ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS:
Any cancellation or any material change adversely affecting the Government’s interest shall not be effective: (1) For such period as
the laws of the State in which this contract is to be performed prescribe, or (2) Until 30 days after the insurer or the Contractor gives
written notice to the Contracting Officer, whichever period is longer.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER: General Services Administration
Los Angeles Service Center, Construction Services Branch
300 North Los Angeles St. Room: 4100
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE:
SIGNATURE: DATE:
PAGE II - 6
9. FAR 52.223-1 BIOBASED PRODUCT CERTIFICATION (DEC 2007)
As required by the Farm Security and Rural Investment Act of 2002 and the Energy Policy Act of 2005 (7
U.S.C. 8102(c)(3)), the offeror certifies, by signing this offer, that biobased products (within categories of
products listed by the United States Department of Agriculture in 7 CFR part 2902, subpart B) to be used
or delivered in the performance of the contract, other than biobased products that are not purchased by the
offeror as a direct result of this contract, will comply with the applicable specifications or other contractual
requirements.
(End of provision)
10. FAR 52.223-2 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT OF BIOBASED PRODUCTS UNDER SERVICE

AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (DEC 2007)
(a) In the performance of this contract, the contractor shall make maximum use of biobased products that
are United States Department of Agriculture (USDA)-designated items unless—
(1) The product cannot be acquired—
(i) Competitively within a time frame providing for compliance with the contract
performance schedule;
(ii) Meeting contract performance requirements; or
(iii) At a reasonable price.
(2) The product is to be used in an application covered by a USDA categorical exemption (see 7
CFR 2902.10 et seq.). For example, some USDA-designated items such as mobile equipment
hydraulic fluids, diesel fuel additives, and penetrating lubricants are excluded from the preferred
procurement requirement for the application of the USDA-designated item to one or both of the
following:
(i) Spacecraft system and launch support equipment.
(ii) Military equipment, i.e., a product or system designed or procured for combat or
combat-related missions.
(b) Information about this requirement and these products is available at http://www.usda.gov/biopreferred.
(End of clause)
11. FAR 52.223-4 RECOVERED MATERATIAL CERTIFICATION (MAY 2008)
As required by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (42 U.S.C. 6962(c)(3)(A)(i)), the
offeror certifies, by signing this offer, that the percentage of recovered materials content for EPA-
designated items to be delivered or used in the performance of the contract will be at least the amount
required by the applicable contract specifications or other contractual requirements.
(End of Provision)
12. FAR 52.223-9 ESTIMATE OF PERCENTAGE OF RECOVERED MATERIAL CONTENT FOR

EPA-DESIGNATED ITEMS (MAY 2008)
“Postconsumer material” means a material or finished product that has served its intended use and has been
discarded for disposal or recovery, having completed its life as a consumer item. Postconsumer material is
a part of the broader category of “recovered material.”
“Recovered material” means waste materials and by-products recovered or diverted from solid waste, but
the term does not include those materials and by-products generated from, and commonly reused within, an
original manufacturing process.
PAGE II - 7
(b) The Contractor, on completion of this contract, shall—

(1) Estimate the percentage of the total recovered material content for EPA-designated item(s)
delivered and/or used in contract performance, including, if applicable, the percentage of
postconsumer material content; and
(2) Submit this estimate to ___________ [Contracting Officer complete in accordance with
agency procedures].
(End of clause)
13. FAR 52.223-17 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT OF EPA-DESIGNATED ITEMS IN SERVICE
AND CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS (MAY 2008)
(a) In the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall make maximum use of products containing
recovered materials that are EPA-designated items unless the product cannot be acquired—
(1) Competitively within a timeframe providing for compliance with the contract performance
schedule;
(2) Meeting contract performance requirements; or
(3) At a reasonable price.
(b) Information about this requirement is available at EPA’s Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines web
site, http://www.epa.gov/cpg/ . The list of EPA-designate items is available at
http://www.epa.gov/cpg/products.htm .
(End of clause)
14. FAR 52.222-54 EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY VERIFICATION (JAN 2009)

“Commercially available off-the-shelf (COTS) item”—
(1) Means any item of supply that is—
(i) A commercial item (as defined in paragraph (1) of the definition at 2.101);
(ii) Sold in substantial quantities in the commercial marketplace; and
(iii) Offered to the Government, without modification, in the same form in which it is
sold in the commercial marketplace; and
(2) Does not include bulk cargo, as defined in section 3 of the Shipping Act of 1984 (46 U.S.C.
App. 1702), such as agricultural products and petroleum products. Per 46 CFR 525.1(c)(2), “bulk
cargo” means cargo that is loaded and carried in bulk onboard ship without mark or count, in a
loose unpackaged form, having homogenous characteristics. Bulk cargo loaded into intermodal
equipment, except LASH or Seabee barges, is subject to mark and count and, therefore, ceases to
be bulk cargo.
“Employee assigned to the contract” means an employee who was hired after November 6, 1986,
who is directly performing work, in the United States, under a contract that is required to include
the clause prescribed at 22.1803. An employee is not considered to be directly performing work
under a contract if the employee—
(1) Normally performs support work, such as indirect or overhead functions; and
(2) Does not perform any substantial duties applicable to the contract.
“Subcontract” means any contract, as defined in 2.101, entered into by a subcontractor to furnish supplies
or services for performance of a prime contract or a subcontract. It includes but is not limited to purchase
orders, and changes and modifications to purchase orders.
“Subcontractor” means any supplier, distributor, vendor, or firm that furnishes supplies or services to or for
a prime Contractor or another subcontractor.
PAGE II - 8
“United States,” as defined in 8 U.S.C. 1101(a)(38), means the 50 States, the District of Columbia, Puerto
Rico, Guam, and the U.S. Virgin Islands.
(b) Enrollment and verification requirements.

(1) If the Contractor is not enrolled as a Federal Contractor in E-Verify at time of contract award,
the Contractor shall—
(i) Enroll. Enroll as a Federal Contractor in the E-Verify program within 30 calendar
days of contract award;
(ii) Verify all new employees. Within 90 calendar days of enrollment in the E-Verify
program, begin to use E-Verify to initiate verification of employment eligibility of all
new hires of the Contractor, who are working in the United States, whether or not
assigned to the contract, within 3 business days after the date of hire (but see paragraph
(b)(3) of this section); and
(iii) Verify employees assigned to the contract. For each employee assigned to the
contract, initiate verification within 90 calendar days after date of enrollment or within
30 calendar days of the employee’s assignment to the contract, whichever date is later
(but see paragraph (b)(4) of this section).
(2) If the Contractor is enrolled as a Federal Contractor in E-Verify at time of contract award, the
Contractor shall use E-Verify to initiate verification of employment eligibility of—
(i) All new employees.
(A) Enrolled 90 calendar days or more. The Contractor shall initiate
verification of all new hires of the Contractor, who are working in the United
States, whether or not assigned to the contract within 3 business days after the
date of hire (but see paragraph (b)(3) of this section); or
(B) Enrolled less than 90 calendar days. Within 90 calendar days after
enrollment as a Federal Contractor in E-Verify, the Contractor shall initiate
verification of all new hires of the Contractor, who are working in the United
States, whether or not assigned to the contract, within 3 business days after the
date of hire (but see paragraph (b)(3) of this section ); or
(ii) Employees assigned to the contract. For each employee assigned to the
contract, the Contractor shall initiate verification within 90 calendar days after
date of contract award or within 30 days after assignment to the contract,
whichever date is later (but see paragraph (b)(4) of this section).
(3) If the Contractor is an institution of higher education (as defined at 20 U.S.C. 1001(a)); a State
or local government or the government of a Federally recognized Indian tribe; or a surety
performing under a takeover agreement entered into with a Federal agency pursuant to a
performance bond, the Contractor may choose to verify only employees assigned to the contract,
whether existing employees or new hires. The Contractor shall follow the applicable verification
requirements at (b)(1) or (b)(2), respectively, except that any requirement for verification of new
employees applies only t new employees assigned to the contract.
(4) Option to verify employment eligibility of all employees. The Contractor may elect to verify all
existing employees hired after November 6, 1986, rather than just those employees assigned to the
contract. The Contractor shall initiate verification for each existing employee working in the
United States who was hired after November 6, 1986, within 180 calendar days of—
(i) Enrollment in the E-Verify program; or
(ii) Notification to E-Verify Operations of the Contractor’s decision to exercise this
option, using the contact information provided in the E-Verify program Memorandum of
Understanding (MOU).
(5) The Contractor shall comply, for the period of performance of this contract, with the
requirement of the E-Verify program MOU.
PAGE II - 9
(i) The Department of Homeland Security (DHS) or the Social Security Administration
(SSA) may terminate the Contractor’s MOU and deny access to the E-Verify system in
accordance with the terms of the MOU. In such case, the Contractor will be referred to a
suspension or debarment official.
(ii) During the period between termination of the MOU and a decision by the suspension
or debarment official whether to suspend or debar, the Contractor is excused from its
obligations under paragraph (b) of this clause. If the suspension or debarment official
determines not to suspend or debar the Contractor, then the Contractor must reenroll in
E-Verify.
(c) Web site. Information on registration for and use of the E-Verify program can be obtained via the
Internet at the Department of Homeland Security Web site: http://www.dhs.gov/E-Verify .
(d) Individuals previously verified. The Contractor is not required by this clause to perform additional
employment verification using E-Verify for any employee—
(1) Whose employment eligibility was previously verified by the Contractor through the E-Verify
program;
(2) Who has been granted and holds an active U.S. Government security clearance for access to
confidential, secret, or top secret information in accordance with the National Industrial Security
Program Operating Manual; or
(3) Who has undergone a completed background investigation and been issued credentials
pursuant to Homeland Security Presidential Directive (HSPD) -12, Policy for a Common
Identification Standard for Federal Employees and Contractors.
(e) Subcontracts. The contractor shall include the requirements of this clause, including this paragraph (e)
(appropriately modified for identification of the parties), in each subcontract that—
(1) Is for—
(i) Commercial or noncommercial services (except for commercial services that are part
of the purchase of a COTS item (or an item that would be a COTS item, but for minor
modifications), performed by the COTS provider, and are normally provided for that
COTS item); or
(ii) Construction;
(2) Has a value of more than $3,000; and
(3) Includes work performed in the United States.
(End of Clause)
15. SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED BUILDING INFORMATION (SBU)
PBS’s policy on SBU building information (GSA Order No. PBS 3490.1A (dated June 1, 2009)) has two
principal objectives to reduce exposure to possible attacks or threats to GSA-controlled space:
a. To diminish the potential that sensitive information about a building will be available for use by a
person or persons with an interest in causing harm to persons or property.
b. To respect GSA’s legitimate business needs to allow access to this information to those authorized
recipients who have a need to know such information.
Sensitive But Unclassified (SBU) building information is contained in any document with information that
is sufficiently sensitive to warrant some level of protection from disclosure but that does not warrant
classification.
Based on the above, the contractor will take necessary precautions as outlined in the subject order to ensure
that SBU documents, including, but not limited to, building designs (floor plans), construction plans and
specifications, renovation/alteration plans, equipment plans and locations, building operating plans,
information used for building service contracts and/or contract guard services or any other information
PAGE II - 10
considered a security risk, shall be disseminated ONLY upon a determination that the recipients are
authorized to receive said information. Furthermore, at the conclusion of the project, the Project Manager
will coordinate with the contractor for the return of copies of building plans/specifications, solicitation
documents, and other SBU electronic or hardcopy information, to the Government.
A copy of this Order is available from the Contracting Officer upon request.
SAFEGUARDING AND DISSEMINATION OF SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED (SBU)

BUILDING INFORMATION
This clause applies to all recipients of SBU building information, including offerors, bidders, awardees,
contractors, subcontractors, lessors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
(a) Marking SBU. Contractor-generated documents that contain building information must be reviewed by
GSA to identify any SBU content, before the original or any copies are disseminated to any other parties.
If SBU content is identified, the contracting officer may direct the contractor, as specified elsewhere in
this contract, to imprint or affix SBU document markings to the original documents and all copies, before
any dissemination.
(b) Authorized recipients. Building information considered SBU must be protected with access strictly
controlled and limited to those individuals having a need to know such information. Those with a need to
know may include Federal, State, and local government entities, and nongovernment entities engaged in
the conduct of business on behalf of or with GSA. Nongovernment entities may include architects,
engineers, consultants, contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, and others submitting an offer or bid to GSA
or performing work under a GSA contract or subcontract. Contractors must provide SBU building
information when needed for the performance of official Federal, State, and local government functions,
such as for code compliance reviews and for the issuance of building permits. Public safety entities such
as fire and utility departments may require access to SBU building information on a need to know basis.
This clause must not prevent or encumber the dissemination of SBU building information to public safety
entities.
(c) Dissemination of SBU building information:

(1) By electronic transmission. Electronic transmission of SBU information outside of the GSA
firewall and network must use session (or alternatively file encryption). Sessions (or files) must be
encrypted with an approved NIST algorithm, such as Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) or Triple
Data Encryption Standard (3DES), in accordance with Federal Information Processing Standards
Publication (FIPS PUB) 140-2, Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules. Encryption tools
that meet FIPS 140-2 are referenced on the NIST web page found at the following URL:
http://csrc.nist.gov/groups/STM/cmvp/documents/140-1/1401vend.htm . All encryption products used
to satisfy the FIPS 140-2 requirement should have a validation certificate that can be verified at the
following URL: http://csrc.nist.gov/groups/STM/cmvp/validation.html#02. (Not all vendors of
security products that claim conformance with FIPS 140-2 have validation certificates.) Contractors
must provide SBU building information only to authorized representatives of State, Federal, and local
government entities and firms currently registered as “active” in the Central Contractor Registration
(CCR) database at www.ccr.gov that have a need to know such information. If a subcontractor is not
registered in the CCR and has a need to possess SBU building information, the subcontractor shall
provide to the contractor its DUNS number or its tax ID number and a copy of its business license.
(2) By nonelectronic form or on portable electronic data storage devices.

Portable electronic data storage devices include but are not limited to CDs, DVDs, and USB drives.
Nonelectronic forms of SBU building information include paper documents.
PAGE II - 11
(i) By mail. Utilize only methods of shipping that provide services for monitoring receipt such as
track and confirm, proof of delivery, signature confirmation, or return receipt.
(ii) In person. Contractors must provide SBU building information only to authorized
representatives of State, Federal, and local government entities and firms currently registered as
“active” in the CCR database that have a need to know such information.
(3) Record keeping. Contractors must maintain a list of the State, Federal, and local government
entities and the firms to which SBU is disseminated under sections (c) (1) and (c) (2) of this clause.
This list must include at a minimum (1) the name of the State, Federal, or local government entity or
firm to which SBU has been disseminated; (2) the name of the individual at the entity or firm who is
responsible for protecting the SBU building information, with access strictly controlled and limited to
those individuals having a need to know such information; (3) contact information for the named
individual; and (4) a description of the SBU building information provided. Once work is completed,
or for leased space with the submission of the “as built” drawings, the contractor must collect all lists
maintained in accordance with this clause, including those maintained by any subcontractors and/or
suppliers, and submit them to the contracting officer. For federal buildings, final payment may be
withheld until the lists are received.
(d) Retaining SBU documents. SBU building information (both electronic and paper formats) must be
protected, with access strictly controlled and limited to those individuals having a need to know such
information.
(e) Destroying SBU building information. SBU building information must be destroyed such that the
marked information is rendered unreadable and incapable of being restored, or returned to the contracting
officer, when no longer needed, in accordance with guidelines provided for media sanitization within
Appendix A of NIST Special Publication 800-88, Guidelines for Media Sanitization, available at
http://csrc.nist.gov/publications/nistpubs/800-88/NISTSP800-8_rev1.pdf. If SBU building information is
not returned to the contracting officer, examples of acceptable destruction methods for SBU building
information are burning or shredding hardcopy; physically destroying portable electronic storage devices
such as CDs, DVDs, and USB drives; deleting and removing files from electronic recycling bins; and
removing material from computer hard drives using a permanent-erase utility such as bit wiping software
or disk crushers.
(f) Notice of disposal. The contractor must notify the Contracting Officer that all SBU building information
has been destroyed, or returned to the Contracting Officer, by the contractor and its subcontractors or
suppliers in accordance with section (e) of this clause, with the exception of the contractor's record copy.
This notice must be submitted to the contracting officer at the completion of the contract in order to
receive final payment. For leases, this notice must be submitted to the Contracting Officer at the
completion of the lease term.
(g) Incidents. All improper disclosures of SBU building information must be immediately reported to the
contracting officer at:
U.S. General Services Administration

Los Angeles Service Center
Attn: Heather Caney
300 N. Los Angeles St., Suite 4100
(213) 894-4145
If the contract provides for progress payments, the contracting officer may withhold approval of progress
payments until the contractor provides a corrective action plan explaining how the contractor will prevent
future improper disclosures of SBU building information. Progress payments may also be withheld for
PAGE II - 12
failure to comply with any provision in this clause until the contractor provides a corrective action plan
explaining how the contractor will rectify any noncompliance and comply with the clause in the future.
(h) Subcontracts. The Contractor must insert the substance of this clause in all subcontracts.
[End of clause]
PAGE II - 13
APPLICABLE MINIMUM HOURLY RATES OF WAGES
1. The attached wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor specifies the minimum hourly rates of wages
which shall be paid to laborers and mechanics employed or working directly upon the site of the work. The
rates have been determined by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with the provisions of the Davis-Bacon Act,
as amended, to be the prevailing rates for the corresponding classes of laborers and mechanics employed on
contracts of a similar character in the locality where this work is to be performed. THESE MINIMUM
HOURLY RATES OF WAGES SHALL APPLY ONLY IF THE CONTRACT IS IN EXCESS OF $2,000 IN
AMOUNT.
2. While the wage rates given in the attached decision are the minimum rates required to be paid during the life of
the contract, it is the responsibility of bidders to inform themselves as to local labor conditions such as the
prevailing wage rates, the length of the work day and work week, overtime compensation, fringe benefit
payments, available labor supply, and prospective changes or adjustments of wage rates. The Contractor shall
abide by and conform to all applicable laws, Executive Orders, and rules, regulations and orders of the Secretary
of Labor. No increase in the contract price shall be allowed or authorized on account of the payment of wage
rates in excess of those listed in the attached decision.
3. The wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor is attached solely for the purpose of setting forth the
minimum hourly wage rates required to be paid during the life of the contract and is not to be accepted as a
guarantee, warranty or representation as to the wage rates indicated. Under no circumstances shall any mistake
in attaching the appropriate wage determination decision of the Secretary of Labor and in the wage rates set
forth entitle the successful bidder to cancellation of his bid or contract or to an increase in the contract price or
other additional payment or recovery.
PAGE II - 14
GENERAL DECISION: CA20100035 04/16/2010 CA35

Date: April 16, 2010
General Decision Number: CA20100035 04/16/2010
Superseded General Decision Number: CA20080035
State: California
Construction Types: Building, Heavy (Heavy and Dredging) and

Highway
County: Orange County in California.
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS; DREDGING PROJECTS (does not

include hopper dredge work); HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does
not include water well drilling); HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
Modification Number Publication Date

0 03/12/2010
1 03/26/2010
2 04/02/2010
3 04/16/2010
ASBE0005-002 01/01/2010
Rates Fringes
Asbestos Workers/Insulator
(Includes the application of
all insulating materials,
protective coverings,
coatings, and finishes to all
types of mechanical systems).....$ 32.93 15.32
Fire Stop Technician
(Application of Firestopping
Materials for wall openings
and penetrations in walls,
floors, ceilings and curtain
walls)...........................$ 24.21 13.76
----------------------------------------------------------------
ASBE0005-004 01/01/2010
Rates Fringes
Asbestos Removal
worker/hazardous material
handler (Includes
preparation, wetting,
stripping, removal,
scrapping, vacuuming, bagging
and disposing of all
insulation materials from
mechanical systems, whether
they contain asbestos or not)....$ 18.85 8.03
PAGE II - 15
----------------------------------------------------------------
BRCA0004-010 05/01/2009
Rates Fringes
BRICKLAYER; MARBLE SETTER........$ 34.55 11.56

----------------------------------------------------------------
BRCA0018-004 06/01/2008
Rates Fringes
MARBLE FINISHER..................$ 25.52 9.08

TILE FINISHER....................$ 21.07 7.88
TILE LAYER.......................$ 32.05 11.99
----------------------------------------------------------------
BRCA0018-010 09/01/2009
Rates Fringes
TERRAZZO FINISHER................$ 26.59 9.62

TERRAZZO WORKER/SETTER...........$ 33.63 10.46
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0409-001 07/01/2009
Rates Fringes
CARPENTER
(1) Carpenter, Cabinet
Installer, Insulation
Installer, Hardwood Floor
Worker and acoustical
installer...................$ 37.35 10.58
(2) Millwright..............$ 37.85 10.58
(3) Piledriver/Derrick
Bargeman, Bridge or Dock
Carpenter, Heavy Framer,
Rock Bargeman or Scowman,
Rockslinger, Shingler
(Commercial)................$ 37.48 10.58
(4) Pneumatic Nailer,
Power Stapler...............$ 37.60 10.58
(5) Sawfiler...............$ 37.44 10.58
(6) Scaffold Builder.......$ 28.55 10.58
(7) Table Power Saw
Operator....................$ 37.45 10.58
FOOTNOTE: Work of forming in the construction of open cut

sewers or storm drains, on operations in which horizontal
lagging is used in conjunction with steel H-Beams driven or
placed in pre- drilled holes, for that portion of a lagged
trench against which concrete is poured, namely, as a
substitute for back forms (which work is performed by
piledrivers): $0.13 per hour additional. Certified Welder
- $1.00 per hour premium.
----------------------------------------------------------------
CARP0409-005 07/01/2009
PAGE II - 16
Rates Fringes
Drywall
DRYWALL INSTALLER/LATHER....$ 37.35 10.58
STOCKER/SCRAPPER............$ 10.00 6.67
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0011-002 02/01/2010
COMMUNICATIONS AND SYSTEMS WORK
Rates Fringes
Communications System
Installer...................$ 26.99 3%+8.64
Technician..................$ 28.79 3%+8.64
SCOPE OF WORK:
Installation, testing, service and maintenance of systems
utilizing the transmission and/or transference of voice,
sound, vision and digital for commercial, educational,
security and entertainment purposes for the following: TV
monitoring and surveillance, background-foreground music,
intercom and telephone interconnect, inventory control
systems, microwave transmission, multi-media, multiplex,
nurse call systems, radio page, school intercom and sound,
burglar alarms, fire alarm (see last paragraph below) and
low voltage master clock systems in commercial buildings.
Communication Systems that transmit or receive information
and/or control systems that are intrinsic to the above
listed systems; inclusion or exclusion of terminations and
testings of conductors determined by their function;
excluding all other data systems or multiple systems which
include control function or power supply; excluding
installation of raceway systems, conduit systems, line
voltage work, and energy management systems. Does not
cover work performed at China Lake Naval Ordnance Test
Station. Fire alarm work shall be performed at the current
inside wireman total cost package.
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0441-001 08/27/2009
Rates Fringes
CABLE SPLICER....................$ 41.36 3%+11.90

ELECTRICIAN......................$ 39.54 3%+11.90
----------------------------------------------------------------
* ELEC0441-003 11/30/2009
COMMUNICATIONS & SYSTEMS WORK (excludes any work on Intelligent

Transportation Systems or CCTV highway systems)
Rates Fringes
Communications System
Installer...................$ 27.03 3%+8.60
PAGE II - 17
Technician..................$ 28.83 3%+8.60
SCOPE OF WORK The work covered shall include the

installation, testing, service and maintenance, of the
following systems that utilize the transmission and/or
transference of voice, sound, vision and digital for
commercial, education, security and entertainment purposes
for TV monitoring and surveillance, background foreground
music, intercom and telephone interconnect, inventory
control systems, microwave transmission, multi-media,
multiplex, nurse call system, radio page, school intercom
and sound, burglar alarms and low voltage master clock
systems.
A. Communication systems that transmit or receive information

and/or control systems that are intrinsic to the above
listed systems SCADA (Supervisory control/data acquisition
PCM (Pulse code modulation) Inventory control systems
Digital data systems Broadband & baseband and carriers
Point of sale systems VSAT data systems Data communication
systems RF and remote control systems Fiber optic data
systems
B. Sound and Voice Transmission/Transference Systems

Background-Foreground Music Intercom and Telephone
Interconnect Systems Sound and Musical Entertainment
Systems Nurse Call Systems Radio Page Systems School
Intercom and Sound Systems Burglar Alarm Systems
Low-Voltage Master Clock Systems Multi-Media/Multiplex
Systems Telephone Systems RF Systems and Antennas and Wave
Guide
C. *Fire Alarm Systems-installation, wire pulling and

testing.
D. Television and Video Systems Television Monitoring and

Surveillance Systems Video Security Systems Video
Entertainment Systems Video Educational Systems CATV and
CCTV
E. Security Systems, Perimeter Security Systems, Vibration

Sensor Systems
Sonar/Infrared Monitoring Equipment, Access Control Systems,
Card Access Systems
*Fire Alarm Systems

1. Fire Alarms-In Raceways: Wire and cable pulling in
raceways performed at the current electrician wage rate and
fringe benefits. Installation and termination of devices,
panels, startup, testing and programmming performed by the
Technician.
2. Fire Alarms-Open Wire Systems: installed by the Technician.
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC0441-004 08/27/2009
Rates Fringes
PAGE II - 18
ELECTRICIAN (TRANSPORTATION
SYSTEMS, TRAFFIC SIGNALS &
STREET LIGHTING)
Cable Splicer/Fiber Optic
Splicer.....................$ 40.14 3%+11.90
Electrician.................$ 39.54 3%+11.90
Technician..................$ 29.66 3%+11.90
SCOPE OF WORK: Electrical work on public streets, freeways,

toll-ways, etc, above or below ground. All work necessary
for the installation, renovation, repair or removal of
Intelligent Transportation Systems, Video Surveilance
Systems (CCTV), Street Lighting and and Traffic Signal work
or systems whether underground or on bridges. Includes
dusk to dawn lighting installations and ramps for access to
or egress from freeways, toll-ways, etc.
Intelligent Transportation Systems shall include all systems
and components to control, monitor, and communicate with
pedestrian or vehicular traffic, included but not limited
to: installation, modification, removal of all Fiber optic
Video System, Fiber Optic Data Systems, Direct interconnect
and Communications Systems, Microwave Data and Video
Systems, Infrared and Sonic Detection Systems, Solar Power
Systems, Highway Advisory Radio Systems, highway Weight and
Motion Systems, etc.
Any and all work required to install and maintain any
specialized or newly developed systems. All cutting,
fitting and bandaging of ducts, raceways, and conduits.
The cleaning, rodding and installation of "fish and pull
wires". The excavation, setting, leveling and grouting of
precast manholes, vaults, and pull boxes including ground
rods or grounding systems, rock necessary for leveling and
drainagae as well as pouring of a concrete envelope if
needed.
JOURNEYMAN TRANSPORTATION ELECTRICIAN shall perform all tasks

necessary toinstall the complete transportation system.
JOURNEYMAN TECHNICIAN duties shall consist of: Distribution
of material at job site, manual excavation and backfill,
installation of system conduits and raceways for
electrical, telephone, cable television and comnmunication
systems. Pulling, terminating and splicing of traffic
signal and street lighting conductors and electrical
systems including interconnect, dector loop, fiber optic
cable and video/data.
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEC1245-001 06/01/2009
Rates Fringes
LINE CONSTRUCTION
(1) Lineman; Cable splicer..$ 44.47 13.11
(2) Equipment specialist
(operates crawler
tractors, commercial motor
PAGE II - 19
vehicles, backhoes,
trenchers, cranes (50 tons
and below), overhead &
underground distribution
line equipment)...........$ 35.52 12.07
(3) Groundman...............$ 27.17 11.82
(4) Powderman...............$ 39.71 12.23
HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day, M.L. King Day, Memorial Day,

Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day
and day after Thanksgiving, Christmas Day
----------------------------------------------------------------
ELEV0018-001 01/01/2010
Rates Fringes
ELEVATOR MECHANIC................$ 45.33 20.035
FOOTNOTE:
PAID VACATION: Employer contributes 8% of regular hourly
rate as vacation pay credit for employees with more than 5
years of service, and 6% for 6 months to 5 years of service.
PAID HOLIDAYS: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day,
Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after
Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day.
----------------------------------------------------------------
ENGI0012-003 07/01/2009
Rates Fringes
OPERATOR: Power Equipment

(All Other Work)
GROUP 1....................$ 36.83 17.22
GROUP 2....................$ 37.61 17.22
GROUP 3....................$ 37.90 17.22
GROUP 4....................$ 39.39 17.22
GROUP 5....................$ 40.49 17.22
GROUP 6....................$ 39.61 17.22
GROUP 7....................$ 40.71 17.22
GROUP 8....................$ 39.72 17.22
GROUP 9....................$ 40.82 17.22
GROUP 10....................$ 39.84 17.22
GROUP 11....................$ 40.94 17.22
GROUP 12....................$ 40.01 17.22
GROUP 13....................$ 40.11 17.22
GROUP 14....................$ 40.14 17.22
GROUP 15....................$ 40.22 17.22
GROUP 16....................$ 40.34 17.22
GROUP 17....................$ 40.51 17.22
GROUP 18....................$ 40.61 17.22
GROUP 19....................$ 40.72 17.22
GROUP 20....................$ 40.84 17.22
GROUP 21....................$ 41.01 17.22
GROUP 22....................$ 41.11 17.22
GROUP 23....................$ 41.22 17.22
GROUP 24....................$ 41.34 17.22
PAGE II - 20
GROUP 25....................$ 41.51 17.22

(Cranes, Piledriving &
Hoisting)
GROUP 1....................$ 38.18 17.22
GROUP 2....................$ 38.96 17.22
GROUP 3....................$ 39.25 17.22
GROUP 4....................$ 39.39 17.22
GROUP 5....................$ 39.61 17.22
GROUP 6....................$ 39.72 17.22
GROUP 7....................$ 39.84 17.22
GROUP 8....................$ 40.01 17.22
GROUP 9....................$ 40.18 17.22
GROUP 10....................$ 41.18 17.22
GROUP 11....................$ 42.18 17.22
GROUP 12....................$ 43.18 17.22
GROUP 13....................$ 44.18 17.22
(Tunnel Work)
GROUP 1....................$ 38.68 17.22
GROUP 2....................$ 39.46 17.22
GROUP 3....................$ 39.75 17.22
GROUP 4....................$ 39.89 17.22
GROUP 5....................$ 40.11 17.22
GROUP 6....................$ 40.22 17.22
GROUP 7....................$ 40.34 17.22
PREMIUM PAY:
$3.75 per hour shall be paid on all Power Equipment Operator
work on the followng Military Bases: China Lake Naval
Reserve, Vandenberg AFB, Point Arguello, Seely Naval Base,
Fort Irwin, Nebo Annex Marine Base, Marine Corp Logistics
Base Yermo, Edwards AFB, 29 Palms Marine Base and Camp
Pendleton
Workers required to suit up and work in a hazardous material

environment: $2.00 per hour additional. Combination mixer
and compressor operator on gunite work shall be classified
as a concrete mobile mixer operator.
SEE ZONE DEFINITIONS AFTER CLASSIFICATIONS
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Bargeman; Brakeman; Compressor operator; Ditch

Witch, with seat or similar type equipment; Elevator
operator-inside; Engineer Oiler; Forklift operator
(includes loed, lull or similar types under 5 tons;
Generator operator; Generator, pump or compressor plant
operator; Pump operator; Signalman; Switchman
GROUP 2: Asphalt-rubber plant operator (nurse tank operator);

Concrete mixer operator-skip type; Conveyor operator;
Fireman; Forklift operator (includes loed, lull or similar
types over 5 tons; Hydrostatic pump operator; oiler crusher
(asphalt or concrete plant); Petromat laydown machine; PJU
PAGE II - 21
side dum jack; Screening and conveyor machine operator (or

similar types); Skiploader (wheel type up to 3/4 yd.
without attachment); Tar pot fireman; Temporary heating
plant operator; Trenching machine oiler
GROUP 3: Asphalt-rubber blend operator; Bobcat or similar

type (Skid steer); Equipment greaser (rack); Ford Ferguson
(with dragtype attachments); Helicopter radioman (ground);
Stationary pipe wrapping and cleaning machine operator
GROUP 4: Asphalt plant fireman; Backhoe operator (mini-max or

similar type); Boring machine operator; Boxman or mixerman
(asphalt or concrete); Chip spreading machine operator;
Concrete cleaning decontamination machine operator;
Concrete Pump Operator (small portable); Drilling machine
operator, small auger types (Texoma super economatic or
similar types - Hughes 100 or 200 or similar types -
drilling depth of 30' maximum); Equipment greaser (grease
truck); Guard rail post driver operator; Highline cableway
signalman; Horizontal Directional Drilling Machine;
Hydra-hammer-aero stomper; Micro Tunneling (above ground
tunnel); Power concrete curing machine operator; Power
concrete saw operator; Power-driven jumbo form setter
operator; Power sweeper operator; Rock Wheel Saw/Trencher;
Roller operator (compacting); Screed operator (asphalt or
concrete); Trenching machine operator (up to 6 ft.); Vacuum
or much truck
GROUP 5: Equipment Greaser (Grease Truck/Multi Shift).
GROUP 6: Articulating material hauler; Asphalt plant

engineer; Batch plant operator; Bit sharpener; Concrete
joint machine operator (canal and similar type); Concrete
planer operator; Dandy digger; Deck engine operator;
Derrickman (oilfield type); Drilling machine operator,
bucket or auger types (Calweld 100 bucket or similar types
- Watson 1000 auger or similar types - Texoma 330, 500 or
600 auger or similar types - drilling depth of 45'
maximum); Drilling machine operator; Hydrographic seeder
machine operator (straw, pulp or seed), Jackson track
maintainer, or similar type; Kalamazoo Switch tamper, or
similar type; Machine tool operator; Maginnis internal full
slab vibrator, Mechanical berm, curb or gutter(concrete or
asphalt); Mechanical finisher operator (concrete,
Clary-Johnson-Bidwell or similar); Micro tunnel system
(below ground); Pavement breaker operator (truck mounted);
Road oil mixing machine operator; Roller operator (asphalt
or finish), rubber-tired earth moving equipment (single
engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck); Self-propelled
tar pipelining machine operator; Skiploader operator
(crawler and wheel type, over 3/4 yd. and up to and
including 1-1/2 yds.); Slip form pump operator (power
driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms);
Tractor operator-bulldozer, tamper-scraper (single engine,
up to 100 h.p. flywheel and similar types, up to and
including D-5 and similar types); Tugger hoist operator (1
PAGE II - 22
drum); Ultra high pressure waterjet cutting tool system

operator; Vacuum blasting machine operator
GROUP 7: Welder - General
GROUP 8: Asphalt or concrete spreading operator (tamping or

finishing); Asphalt paving machine operator (Barber Greene
or similar type); Asphalt-rubber distribution operator;
Backhoe operator (up to and including 3/4 yd.), small ford,
Case or similar; Cast-in-place pipe laying machine
operator; Combination mixer and compressor operator (gunite
work); Compactor operator (self-propelled); Concrete mixer
operator (paving); Crushing plant operator; Drill Doctor;
Drilling machine operator, Bucket or auger types (Calweld
150 bucket or similar types - Watson 1500, 2000 2500 auger
or similar types - Texoma 700, 800 auger or similar types -
drilling depth of 60' maximum); Elevating grader operator;
Grade checker; Gradall operator; Grouting machine operator;
Heavy-duty repairman; Heavy equipment robotics operator;
Kalamazoo balliste regulator or similar type; Kolman belt
loader and similar type; Le Tourneau blob compactor or
similar type; Loader operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and
similar types); Mobark Chipper or similar; Ozzie padder or
similar types; P.C. slot saw; Pneumatic concrete placing
machine operator (Hackley-Presswell or similar type);
Pumpcrete gun operator; Rock Drill or similar types; Rotary
drill operator (excluding caisson type); Rubber-tired
earth-moving equipment operator (single engine,
caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any
and all attachments over 25 yds. up to and including 50 cu.
yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator
(multiple engine up to and including 25 yds. struck);
Rubber-tired scraper operator (self-loading paddle wheel
type-John Deere, 1040 and similar single unit); Self-
propelled curb and gutter machine operator; Shuttle buggy;
Skiploader operator (crawler and wheel type over 1-1/2 yds.
up to and including 6-1/2 yds.); Soil remediation plant
operator; Surface heaters and planer operator; Tractor
compressor drill combination operator; Tractor operator
(any type larger than D-5 - 100 flywheel h.p. and over, or
similar-bulldozer, tamper, scraper and push tractor single
engine); Tractor operator (boom attachments), Traveling
pipe wrapping, cleaning and bendng machine operator;
Trenching machine operator (over 6 ft. depth capacity,
manufacturer's rating); trenching Machine with Road Miner
attachment (over 6 ft depth capacity): Ultra high pressure
waterjet cutting tool system mechanic; Water pull
(compaction) operator
GROUP 9: Heavy Duty Repairman
GROUP 10: Drilling machine operator, Bucket or auger types

(Calweld 200 B bucket or similar types-Watson 3000 or 5000
auger or similar types-Texoma 900 auger or similar
types-drilling depth of 105' maximum); Dual drum mixer,
dynamic compactor LDC350 (or similar types); Monorail
PAGE II - 23
locomotive operator (diesel, gas or electric); Motor

patrol-blade operator (single engine); Multiple engine
tractor operator (Euclid and similar type-except Quad 9
cat.); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (single
engine, over 50 yds. struck); Pneumatic pipe ramming tool
and similar types; Prestressed wrapping machine operator;
Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator (single
engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber tired earth moving
equipment operator (multiple engine, Euclid, caterpillar
and similar over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck), Tower
crane repairman; Tractor loader operator (crawler and wheel
type over 6-1/2 yds.); Woods mixer operator (and similar
Pugmill equipment)
GROUP 11: Heavy Duty Repairman - Welder Combination, Welder -

Certified.
GROUP 12: Auto grader operator; Automatic slip form operator;

Drilling machine operator, bucket or auger types (Calweld,
auger 200 CA or similar types - Watson, auger 6000 or
similar types - Hughes Super Duty, auger 200 or similar
types - drilling depth of 175' maximum); Hoe ram or similar
with compressor; Mass excavator operator less tha 750 cu.
yards; Mechanical finishing machine operator; Mobile form
traveler operator; Motor patrol operator (multi-engine);
Pipe mobile machine operator; Rubber-tired earth- moving
equipment operator (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar
and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck); Rubber-tired
self- loading scraper operator (paddle-wheel-auger type
self-loading - two (2) or more units)
GROUP 13: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator

operating equipment with push-pull system (single engine,
up to and including 25 yds. struck)
GROUP 14: Canal liner operator; Canal trimmer operator;

Remote- control earth-moving equipment operator (operating
a second piece of equipment: $1.00 per hour additional);
Wheel excavator operator (over 750 cu. yds.)
GROUP 15: Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator,

Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any
and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50
yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator,
operating equipment with push-pull system (multiple
engine-up to and including 25 yds. struck)

over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment
operator, operating equipment with push-pull system
(multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25
yds. and up to 50 yds. struck)

PAGE II - 24
operating equipment with push-pull system (multiple engine,

Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 50 cu. yds. struck);
Tandem tractor operator (operating crawler type tractors in
tandem - Quad 9 and similar type)

operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar
types in any combination, excluding compaction units -
single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck)
GROUP 19: Rotex concrete belt operator (or similar types);

Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment operator, operating in
tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and similar types in any
combination, excluding compaction units - single engine,
Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and similar types with any
and all attachments over 25 yds.and up to and including 50
cu. yds. struck); Rubber-tired earth-moving equipment
operator, operating in tandem (scrapers, belly dumps and
similar types in any combination, excluding compaction
units - multiple engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck)

single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired
earth-moving equipment operator, operating in tandem
(scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any
combination, excluding compaction units - multiple engine,
Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50
yds. struck)

multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over
50 cu. yds. struck)

operating equipment with the tandem push-pull system
(single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck)

(single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon and
similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and
up to and including 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired
earth-moving equipment operator, operating with the tandem
push-pull system (multiple engine, up to and including 25
yds. struck)

(single engine, over 50 yds. struck); Rubber-tired
earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with
the tandem push-pull system (multiple engine, Euclid,
Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds.
PAGE II - 25
struck)
GROUP 25: Concrete pump operator-truck mounted; Rubber-tired

earth-moving equipment operator, operating equipment with
the tandem push-pull system (multiple engine, Euclid,
Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck)
CRANES, PILEDRIVING AND HOISTING EQUIPMENT CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Engineer oiler; Fork lift operator (includes loed,

lull or similar types)
GROUP 2: Truck crane oiler
GROUP 3: A-frame or winch truck operator; Ross carrier

operator (jobsite)
GROUP 4: Bridge-type unloader and turntable operator;

Helicopter hoist operator
GROUP 5: Hydraulic boom truck; Stinger crane (Austin-Western

or similar type); Tugger hoist operator (1 drum)
GROUP 6: Bridge crane operator; Cretor crane operator; Hoist

operator (Chicago boom and similar type); Lift mobile
operator; Lift slab machine operator (Vagtborg and similar
types); Material hoist and/or manlift operator; Polar
gantry crane operator; Self Climbing scaffold (or similar
type); Shovel, backhoe, dragline, clamshell operator (over
3/4 yd. and up to 5 cu. yds. mrc); Tugger hoist operator
GROUP 7: Pedestal crane operator; Shovel, backhoe, dragline,

clamshell operator (over 5 cu. yds. mrc); Tower crane
repair; Tugger hoist operator (3 drum)
GROUP 8: Crane operator (up to and including 25 ton

capacity); Crawler transporter operator; Derrick barge
operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity); Hoist
operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (up to
and including 25 ton capacity); Shovel, backhoe, dragline,
clamshell operator (over 7 cu. yds., M.R.C.)
GROUP 9: Crane operator (over 25 tons and up to and including

50 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 25 tons up to
and including 50 tons mrc); Highline cableway operator;
Hoist operator, stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type
(over 25 tons up to and including 50 tons mrc); K-crane
operator; Polar crane operator; Self erecting tower crane
operator maximum lifting capacity ten tons
GROUP 10: Crane operator (over 50 tons and up to and

including 100 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 50
tons up to and including 100 tons mrc); Hoist operator,
stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 50 tons up to
and including 100 tons mrc), Mobile tower crane operator
(over 50 tons, up to and including 100 tons M.R.C.); Tower
PAGE II - 26
crane operator and tower gantry
GROUP 11: Crane operator (over 100 tons and up to and

including 200 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 100
tons up to and including 200 tons mrc); Hoist operator,
stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 100 tons up
to and including 200 tons mrc); Mobile tower crane operator
(over 100 tons up to and including 200 tons mrc)
GROUP 12: Crane operator (over 200 tons up to and including

300 tons mrc); Derrick barge operator (over 200 tons up to
and including 300 tons mrc); Hoist operator, stiff legs,
Guy derrick or similar type (over 200 tons, up to and
including 300 tons mrc); Mobile tower crane operator (over
200 tons, up to and including 300 tons mrc)
GROUP 13: Crane operator (over 300 tons); Derrick barge

operator (over 300 tons); Helicopter pilot; Hoist operator,
stiff legs, Guy derrick or similar type (over 300 tons);
Mobile tower crane operator (over 300 tons)
TUNNEL CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Skiploader (wheel type up to 3/4 yd. without

attachment)
GROUP 2: Power-driven jumbo form setter operator
GROUP 3: Dinkey locomotive or motorperson (up to and

including 10 tons)
GROUP 4: Bit sharpener; Equipment greaser (grease truck);

Slip form pump operator (power-driven hydraulic lifting
device for concrete forms); Tugger hoist operator (1 drum);
Tunnel locomotive operator (over 10 and up to and including
30 tons)
GROUP 5: Backhoe operator (up to and including 3/4 yd.);

Small Ford, Case or similar; Drill doctor; Grouting machine
operator; Heading shield operator; Heavy-duty repairperson;
Loader operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and similar types);
Mucking machine operator (1/4 yd., rubber-tired, rail or
track type); Pneumatic concrete placing machine operator
(Hackley-Presswell or similar type); Pneumatic heading
shield (tunnel); Pumpcrete gun operator; Tractor compressor
drill combination operator; Tugger hoist operator (2 drum);
Tunnel locomotive operator (over 30 tons)
GROUP 6: Heavy Duty Repairman
GROUP 7: Tunnel mole boring machine operator
ENGINEERS ZONES
$1.00 additional per hour for all of IMPERIAL County and the
portions of KERN, RIVERSIDE & SAN BERNARDINO Counties as
PAGE II - 27
defined below:
That area within the following Boundary: Begin in San

Bernardino County, approximately 3 miles NE of the intersection
of I-15 and the California State line at that point which is
the NW corner of Section 1, T17N,m R14E, San Bernardino
Meridian. Continue W in a straight line to that point which is
the SW corner of the NW ¼ of Section 6, T27S, R42E, Mt. Diablo
Meridian. Continue North to the intersection with the Inyo
County Boundary at that point which is the NE corner of the W ½
of the N ¼ of Section 6, T25S, R42E, MDM. Continue W along the
Inyo and San Bernardino County boundary until the intersection
with Kern County, as that point which is the SE corner of
Section 34, T24S, R40E, MDM. Continue W along the Inyo and
Kern County boundary until the intersection with Tulare County,
at that point which is the SW corner of the SE ¼ of Section 32,
T24S, R37E, MDM. Continue W along the Kern and Tulare County
boundary, until that point which is the NW corner of T25S,
R32E, MDM. Continue S following R32E lines to the NW corner of
T31S, R32E, MDM. Continue W to the NW corner of T31S, R31E,
MDM. Continue S to the SW corner of T32S, R31E, MDM. Continue
W to SW corner of SE ¼ of Section 34, T32S, R30E, MDM.
Continue S to SW corner of T11N, R17W, SBM. Continue E along
south boundary of T11N, SBM to SW corner of T11N, R7W, SBM.
Continue S to SW corner of T9N, R7W, SBM. Continue E along
south boundary of T9N, SBM to SW corner of T9N, R1E, SBM.
Continue S along west boundary of R1E, SMB to Riverside County
line at the SW corner of T1S, R1E, SBM. Continue E along south
boundary of T1s, SBM (Riverside County Line) to SW corner of
T1S, R10E, SBM. Continue S along west boundary of R10E, SBM to
Imperial County line at the SW corner of T8S, R10E, SBM.
Continue W along Imperial and Riverside county line to NW
corner of T9S, R9E, SBM. Continue S along the boundary between
Imperial and San Diego Counties, along the west edge of R9E,
SBM to the south boundary of Imperial County/California state
line. Follow the California state line west to Arizona state
line, then north to Nevada state line, then continuing NW back
to start at the point which is the NW corner of Section 1,
T17N, R14E, SBM
$1.00 additional per hour for portions of SAN LUIS OBISPO,

KERN, SANTA BARBARA & VENTURA as defined below:
That area within the following Boundary: Begin approximately 5

miles north of the community of Cholame, on the Monterey County
and San Luis Obispo County boundary at the NW corner of T25S,
R16E, Mt. Diablo Meridian. Continue south along the west side
of R16E to the SW corner of T30S, R16E, MDM. Continue E to SW
corner of T30S, R17E, MDM. Continue S to SW corner of T31S,
R17E, MDM. Continue E to SW corner of T31S, R18E, MDM.
Continue S along West side of R18E, MDM as it crosses into San
Bernardino Meridian numbering area and becomes R30W. Follow
the west side of R30W, SBM to the SW corner of T9N, R30W, SBM.
Continue E along the south edge of T9N, SBM to the Santa
Barbara County and Ventura County boundary at that point whch
is the SW corner of Section 34.T9N, R24W, SBM, continue S along
PAGE II - 28
the Ventura County line to that point which is the SW corner of

the SE ¼ of Section 32, T7N, R24W, SBM. Continue E along the
south edge of T7N, SBM to the SE corner to T7N, R21W, SBM.
Continue N along East side of R21W, SBM to Ventura County and
Kern County boundary at the NE corner of T8N, R21W. Continue W
along the Ventura County and Kern County boundary to the SE
corner of T9N, R21W. Continue North along the East edge of
R21W, SBM to the NE corner of T12N, R21W, SBM. Continue West
along the north edge of T12N, SBM to the SE corner of T32S,
R21E, MDM. [T12N SBM is a think strip between T11N SBM and T32S
MDM]. Continue North along the East side of R21E, MDM to the
Kings County and Kern County border at the NE corner of T25S,
R21E, MDM, continue West along the Kings County and Kern County
Boundary until the intersection of San Luis Obispo County.
Continue west along the Kings County and San Luis Obispo County
boundary until the intersection with Monterey County. Continue
West along the Monterey County and San Luis Obispo County
boundary to the beginning point at the NW corner of T25S, R16E,
MDM.
$2.00 additional per hour for INYO and MONO Counties and the
Northern portion of SAN BERNARDINO County as defined below:
That area within the following Boundary: Begin at the

intersection of the northern boundary of Mono County and the
California state line at the point which is the center of
Section 17, T10N, R22E, Mt. Diablo Meridian. Continue S then
SE along the entire western boundary of Mono County, until it
reaches Inyo County at the point which is the NE corner of the
W ½ of the NW ¼ of Section 2, T8S, R29E, MDM. Continue SSE
along the entire western boundary of Inyo County, until the
intersection with Kern County at the point which is the SW
corner of the SE ¼ of Section 32, T24S, R37E, MDM. Continue E
along the Inyo and Kern County boundary until the intersection
with San Bernardino County at that point which is the SE corner
of section 34, T24S, R40E, MDM. Continue E along the Inyo and
San Bernardino County boundary until the point which is the NE
corner of the W ½ of the NW ¼ of Section 6, T25S, R42E, MDM.
Continue S to that point which is the SW corner of the NW ¼ of
Section 6, T27S, R42E, MDM. Continue E in a straight line to
the California and Nevada state border at the point which is
the NW corner of Section 1, T17N, R14E, San Bernardino
Meridian. Then continue NW along the state line to the
starting point, which is the center of Section 18, T10N, R22E,
MDM.
REMAINING AREA NOT DEFINED ABOVE RECIEVES BASE RATE
----------------------------------------------------------------
ENGI0012-004 08/01/2009
Rates Fringes

(DREDGING)
PAGE II - 29
(1) Leverman................$ 44.83 17.22

(2) Dredge dozer............$ 40.36 17.22
(3) Deckmate................$ 40.25 17.22
(4) Winch operator (stern
winch on dredge)............$ 39.70 17.22
(5) Fireman-Oiler,
Deckhand, Bargeman,
Leveehand...................$ 39.16 17.22
(6) Barge Mate..............$ 39.77 17.22
----------------------------------------------------------------
IRON0002-004 07/01/2009
Rates Fringes
Ironworkers:
Fence Erector...............$ 26.58 15.24
Ornamental, Reinforcing
and Structural..............$ 33.00 23.71
PREMIUM PAY:
$6.00 additional per hour at the following locations:
China Lake Naval Test Station, Chocolate Mountains Naval

Reserve-Niland,
Edwards AFB, Fort Irwin Military Station, Fort Irwin Training
Center-Goldstone, San Clemente Island, San Nicholas Island,
Susanville Federal Prison, 29 Palms - Marine Corps, U.S. Marine
Base - Barstow, U.S. Naval Air Facility - Sealey, Vandenberg AFB
Army Defense Language Institute - Monterey, Fallon Air Base,

Naval Post Graduate School - Monterey, Yermo Marine Corps
Logistics Center
Port Hueneme, Port Mugu, U.S. Coast Guard Station - Two Rock
----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO0300-001 07/01/2008
Rates Fringes
Brick Tender.....................$ 27.17 13.75

----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO0300-003 01/01/2010
Rates Fringes
LABORER (GUNITE)
GROUP 1.....................$ 30.04 17.37
GROUP 2.....................$ 29.09 17.37
GROUP 3.....................$ 25.55 17.37
LABORER (TUNNEL)
PAGE II - 30
GROUP 1.....................$ 31.24 15.04

GROUP 2.....................$ 31.56 15.04
GROUP 3.....................$ 32.02 15.04
GROUP 4.....................$ 32.71 15.04
LABORER
GROUP 1.....................$ 26.33 14.75
GROUP 2.....................$ 26.88 14.75
GROUP 3.....................$ 27.43 14.75
GROUP 4.....................$ 28.98 14.75
GROUP 5.....................$ 29.33 14.75
FOOTNOTE: GUNITE PREMIUM PAY: Workers working from a

Bosn'n's Chair or suspended from a rope or cable shall
receive 40 cents per hour above the foregoing applicable
classification rates. Workers doing gunite and/or
shotcrete work in a tunnel shall receive 35 cents per hour
above the foregoing applicable classification rates, paid
on a portal-to-portal basis. Any work performed on, in or
above any smoke stack, silo, storage elevator or similar
type of structure, when such structure is in excess of
75'-0" above base level and which work must be performed in
whole or in part more than 75'-0" above base level, that
work performed above the 75'-0" level shall be compensated
for at 35 cents per hour above the applicable
classification wage rate.
LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Cleaning and handling of panel forms; Concrete

screeding for rough strike-off; Concrete, water curing;
Demolition laborer, the cleaning of brick if performed by a
worker performing any other phase of demolition work, and
the cleaning of lumber; Fire watcher, limber, brush loader,
piler and debris handler; Flag person; Gas, oil and/or
water pipeline laborer; Laborer, asphalt-rubber material
loader; Laborer, general or construction; Laborer, general
clean-up; Laborer, landscaping; Laborer, jetting; Laborer,
temporary water and air lines; Material hose operator
(walls, slabs, floors and decks); Plugging, filling of shee
bolt holes; Dry packing of concrete; Railroad maintenance,
repair track person and road beds; Streetcar and railroad
construction track laborers; Rigging and signaling; Scaler;
Slip form raiser; Tar and mortar; Tool crib or tool house
laborer; Traffic control by any method; Window cleaner;
Wire mesh pulling - all concrete pouring operations
GROUP 2: Asphalt shoveler; Cement dumper (on 1 yd. or larger

mixer and handling bulk cement); Cesspool digger and
installer; Chucktender; Chute handler, pouring concrete,
the handling of the chute from readymix trucks, such as
walls, slabs, decks, floors, foundation, footings, curbs,
gutters and sidewalks; Concrete curer, impervious membrane
and form oiler; Cutting torch operator (demolition); Fine
grader, highways and street paving, airport, runways and
similar type heavy construction; Gas, oil and/or water
pipeline wrapper - pot tender and form person; Guinea
PAGE II - 31
chaser; Headerboard person - asphalt; Laborer, packing rod

steel and pans; Membrane vapor barrier installer; Power
broom sweeper (small); Riprap stonepaver, placing stone or
wet sacked concrete; Roto scraper and tiller; Sandblaster
(pot tender); Septic tank digger and installer(lead); Tank
scaler and cleaner; Tree climber, faller, chain saw
operator, Pittsburgh chipper and similar type brush
shredder; Underground laborer, including caisson bellower
GROUP 3: Buggymobile person; Concrete cutting torch; Concrete

pile cutter; Driller, jackhammer, 2-1/2 ft. drill steel or
longer; Dri-pak-it machine; Gas, oil and/or water pipeline
wrapper, 6-in. pipe and over, by any method, inside and
out; High scaler (including drilling of same); Hydro seeder
and similar type; Impact wrench multi-plate; Kettle person,
pot person and workers applying asphalt, lay-kold,
creosote, lime caustic and similar type materials
("applying" means applying, dipping, brushing or handling
of such materials for pipe wrapping and waterproofing);
Operator of pneumatic, gas, electric tools, vibrating
machine, pavement breaker, air blasting, come-alongs, and
similar mechanical tools not separately classified herein;
Pipelayer's backup person, coating, grouting, making of
joints, sealing, caulking, diapering and including rubber
gasket joints, pointing and any and all other services;
Rock slinger; Rotary scarifier or multiple head concrete
chipping scarifier; Steel headerboard and guideline setter;
Tamper, Barko, Wacker and similar type; Trenching machine,
hand-propelled
GROUP 4: Asphalt raker, lute person, ironer, asphalt dump

person, and asphalt spreader boxes (all types); Concrete
core cutter (walls, floors or ceilings), grinder or sander;
Concrete saw person, cutting walls or flat work, scoring
old or new concrete; Cribber, shorer, lagging, sheeting and
trench bracing, hand-guided lagging hammer; Head rock
slinger; Laborer, asphalt- rubber distributor boot person;
Laser beam in connection with laborers' work; Oversize
concrete vibrator operator, 70 lbs. and over; Pipelayer
performing all services in the laying and installation of
pipe from the point of receiving pipe in the ditch until
completion of operation, including any and all forms of
tubular material, whether pipe, metallic or non-metallic,
conduit and any other stationary type of tubular device
used for the conveying of any substance or element, whether
water, sewage, solid gas, air, or other product whatsoever
and without regard to the nature of material from which the
tubular material is fabricated; No-joint pipe and stripping
of same; Prefabricated manhole installer; Sandblaster
(nozzle person), water blasting, Porta Shot-Blast
GROUP 5: Blaster powder, all work of loading holes, placing

and blasting of all powder and explosives of whatever type,
regardless of method used for such loading and placing;
Driller: All power drills, excluding jackhammer, whether
core, diamond, wagon, track, multiple unit, and any and all
PAGE II - 32
other types of mechanical drills without regard to the form

of motive power; Toxic waste removal
TUNNEL LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Batch plant laborer; Bull gang mucker, track person;

Changehouse person; Concrete crew, including rodder and
spreader; Dump person; Dump person (outside); Swamper
(brake person and switch person on tunnel work); Tunnel
materials handling person
GROUP 2: Chucktender, cabletender; Loading and unloading

agitator cars; Nipper; Pot tender, using mastic or other
materials (for example, but not by way of limitation,
shotcrete, etc.); Vibrator person, jack hammer, pneumatic
tools (except driller)
GROUP 3: Blaster, driller, powder person; Chemical grout jet

person; Cherry picker person; Grout gun person; Grout mixer
person; Grout pump person; Jackleg miner; Jumbo person;
Kemper and other pneumatic concrete placer operator; Miner,
tunnel (hand or machine); Nozzle person; Operating of
troweling and/or grouting machines; Powder person (primer
house); Primer person; Sandblaster; Shotcrete person; Steel
form raiser and setter; Timber person, retimber person,
wood or steel; Tunnel Concrete finisher
GROUP 4: Diamond driller; Sandblaster; Shaft and raise work
GUNITE LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Rodmen, Nozzlemen
GROUP 2: Gunmen
GROUP 3: Reboundmen
----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO0300-005 08/05/2009
Rates Fringes
LABORER
PLASTER CLEAN-UP LABORER....$ 26.65 14.70
PLASTER TENDER..............$ 29.20 14.70
----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO0882-002 01/01/2010
Rates Fringes
Asbestos Removal Laborer.........$ 26.15 14.25
SCOPE OF WORK: Includes site mobilization, initial site

cleanup, site preparation, removal of asbestos-containing
material and toxic waste, encapsulation, enclosure and
disposal of asbestos- containing materials and toxic waste
PAGE II - 33
by hand or with equipment or machinery; scaffolding,

fabrication of temporary wooden barriers and assembly of
decontamination stations.
----------------------------------------------------------------
LABO1184-001 07/01/2009
Rates Fringes
Laborers: (HORIZONTAL
DIRECTIONAL DRILLING)
(1) Drilling Crew Laborer...$ 27.05 10.40
(2) Vehicle Operator/Hauler.$ 27.22 10.40
(3) Horizontal Directional
Drill Operator..............$ 29.07 10.40
(4) Electronic Tracking
Locator.....................$ 31.07 10.40
Laborers: (STRIPING/SLURRY
SEAL)
GROUP 1.....................$ 28.50 13.56
GROUP 2.....................$ 29.80 13.56
GROUP 3.....................$ 31.81 13.56
GROUP 4.....................$ 33.55 13.56
LABORERS - STRIPING CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Protective coating, pavement sealing, including

repair and filling of cracks by any method on any surface
in parking lots, game courts and playgrounds; carstops;
operation of all related machinery and equipment; equipment
repair technician
GROUP 2: Traffic surface abrasive blaster; pot tender -

removal of all traffic lines and markings by any method
(sandblasting, waterblasting, grinding, etc.) and
preparation of surface for coatings. Traffic control
person: controlling and directing traffic through both
conventional and moving lane closures; operation of all
related machinery and equipment
GROUP 3: Traffic delineating device applicator: Layout and

application of pavement markers, delineating signs, rumble
and traffic bars, adhesives, guide markers, other traffic
delineating devices including traffic control. This
category includes all traffic related surface preparation
(sandblasting, waterblasting, grinding) as part of the
application process. Traffic protective delineating system
installer: removes, relocates, installs, permanently
affixed roadside and parking delineation barricades,
fencing, cable anchor, guard rail, reference signs,
monument markers; operation of all related machinery and
equipment; power broom sweeper
GROUP 4: Striper: layout and application of traffic stripes

and markings; hot thermo plastic; tape traffic stripes and
markings, including traffic control; operation of all
related machinery and equipment
PAGE II - 34
----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN0036-001 01/01/2010
Rates Fringes
Painters: (Including Lead

Abatement)
(1) Repaint.................$ 26.05 9.41
(2) All Other Work..........$ 29.32 9.41
REPAINT of any previously painted structure. Exceptions:

work involving the aerospace industry, breweries,
commercial recreational facilities, hotels which operate
commercial establishments as part of hotel service, and
sports facilities.
----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN0036-008 01/06/2010
Rates Fringes
DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER...........$ 33.22 12.19

----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN0036-015 01/01/2010
Rates Fringes
GLAZIER..........................$ 36.90 18.71
FOOTNOTE: Additional $1.25 per hour for work in a condor,

from the third (3rd) floor and up Additional $1.25 per
hour for work on the outside of the building from a swing
stage or any suspended contrivance, from the ground up
----------------------------------------------------------------
PAIN1247-002 01/01/2010
Rates Fringes
SOFT FLOOR LAYER.................$ 30.85 10.54

----------------------------------------------------------------
PLAS0200-009 08/05/2009
Rates Fringes
PLASTERER........................$ 35.41 9.88

----------------------------------------------------------------
PLAS0500-002 07/01/2009
Rates Fringes
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 29.50 18.40

----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0016-001 07/01/2009
Rates Fringes
PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER
PAGE II - 35
(1) Work on strip malls,

light commercial, tenant
improvement and remodel
work........................$ 28.84 14.47
(2) Work on new additions
and remodeling of bars,
restaurant, stores and
commercial buildings not
to exceed 5,000 sq. ft. of
floor space.................$ 35.97 15.86
(3) All other work..........$ 37.10 16.84
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0250-002 01/02/2006
Rates Fringes
REFRIGERATION MECHANIC
Refrigeration Fitter........$ 33.30 13.95
----------------------------------------------------------------
PLUM0345-001 07/01/2009
Rates Fringes
PLUMBER
Landscape/Irrigation Fitter.$ 26.70 13.84
Sewer & Storm Drain Work....$ 25.18 15.67
----------------------------------------------------------------
ROOF0036-002 08/01/2009
Rates Fringes
ROOFER...........................$ 33.15 8.47
FOOTNOTE: Pitch premium: Work on which employees are exposed

to pitch fumes or required to handle pitch, pitch base or
pitch impregnated products, or any material containing coal
tar pitch, the entire roofing crew shall receive $1.75 per
hour "pitch premium" pay.
----------------------------------------------------------------
SFCA0669-008 01/01/2009
DOES NOT INCLUDE SAN CLEMENTE ISLAND, THE CITY OF SANTA ANA,
AND THAT PART OF ORANGE COUNTY WITHIN 25 MILES OF THE CITY
LIMITS OF LOS ANGELES:
Rates Fringes
SPRINKLER FITTER.................$ 32.85 16.05

----------------------------------------------------------------
SFCA0709-003 01/01/2010
SAN CLEMENTE ISLAND, THE CITY OF SANTA ANA, AND THAT PART OF
ORANGE COUNTY WITHIN 25 MILES BEYOND THE CITY LIMITS OF LOS
ANGELES:
Rates Fringes
PAGE II - 36
SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire)..........$ 39.08 21.95

----------------------------------------------------------------
SHEE0105-003 01/01/2010
LOS ANGELES (South of a straight line drawn between Gorman and

Big Pines)and Catalina Island, INYO, KERN (Northeast part, East
of Hwy 395), MONO ORANGE, RIVERSIDE, AND SAN BERNARDINO COUNTIES
Rates Fringes
SHEET METAL WORKER

(1) Commercial - New
Construction and Remodel
work........................$ 40.86 17.40
(2) Industrial work
including air pollution
control systems, noise
abatement, hand rails,
guard rails, excluding
aritechtural sheet metal
work, excluding A-C,
heating, ventilating
systems for human comfort...$ 35.56 22.90
----------------------------------------------------------------
* TEAM0011-002 07/01/2008
Rates Fringes
TRUCK DRIVER
GROUP 1....................$ 26.44 18.24
GROUP 2....................$ 26.59 18.24
GROUP 3....................$ 26.72 18.24
GROUP 4....................$ 26.91 18.24
GROUP 5....................$ 26.94 18.24
GROUP 6....................$ 26.97 18.24
GROUP 7....................$ 27.22 18.24
GROUP 8....................$ 27.47 18.24
GROUP 9....................$ 27.67 18.24
GROUP 10....................$ 27.97 18.24
GROUP 11....................$ 28.47 18.24
GROUP 12....................$ 28.90 18.24
WORK ON ALL MILITARY BASES:

PREMIUM PAY: $3.00 per hour additional.
[29 palms Marine Base, Camp Roberts, China Lake, Edwards AFB,
El Centro Naval Facility, Fort Irwin, Marine Corps
Logistics Base at Nebo & Yermo, Mountain Warfare Training
Center, Bridgeport, Point Arguello, Point Conception,
Vandenberg AFB]
TRUCK DRIVERS CLASSIFICATIONS
GROUP 1: Truck driver
GROUP 2: Driver of vehicle or combination of vehicles - 2

PAGE II - 37
axles; Traffic control pilot car excluding moving heavy

equipment permit load; Truck mounted broom
GROUP 3: Driver of vehicle or combination of vehicles - 3

axles; Boot person; Cement mason distribution truck; Fuel
truck driver; Water truck - 2 axle; Dump truck, less than
16 yds. water level; Erosion control driver
GROUP 4: Driver of transit mix truck, under 3 yds.; Dumpcrete

truck, less than 6-1/2 yds. water level
GROUP 5: Water truck, 3 or more axles; Truck greaser and tire

person ($0.50 additional for tire person); Pipeline and
utility working truck driver, including winch truck and
plastic fusion, limited to pipeline and utility work;
Slurry truck driver
GROUP 6: Transit mix truck, 3 yds. or more; Dumpcrete truck,

6-1/2 yds. water level and over; Vehicle or combination of
vehicles - 4 or more axles; Oil spreader truck; Dump truck,
16 yds. to 25 yds. water level
GROUP 7: A Frame, Swedish crane or similar; Forklift driver;

Ross carrier driver
GROUP 8: Dump truck, 25 yds. to 49 yds. water level; Truck

repair person; Water pull - single engine; Welder
GROUP 9: Truck repair person/welder; Low bed driver, 9 axles

or over
GROUP 10: Dump truck - 50 yds. or more water level; Water

pull - single engine with attachment
GROUP 11: Water pull - twin engine; Water pull - twin engine
with attachments; Winch truck driver - $1.25 additional
when operating winch or similar special attachments
GROUP 12: Boom Truck 17K and above

----------------------------------------------------------------
WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing

operation to which welding is incidental.
================================================================
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within

the scope of the classifications listed may be added after
award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses
(29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
----------------------------------------------------------------
In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates

listed under the identifier do not reflect collectively
bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations
indicate unions whose rates have been determined to be
PAGE II - 38
prevailing.
----------------------------------------------------------------
WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS
1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can
be:
* an existing published wage determination

* a survey underlying a wage determination
* a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on
a wage determination matter
* a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests

for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour
Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted
because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the
Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial
contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)
and 3.) should be followed.
With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal
process described here, initial contact should be with the
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to:
Branch of Construction Wage Determinations

Wage and Hour Division
U.S. Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, N.W.
Washington, DC 20210
2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an

interested party (those affected by the action) can request
review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator
(See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:
Wage and Hour Administrator

The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the

interested party's position and by any information (wage
payment data, project description, area practice material,
etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.
3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an

interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative
Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to:
Administrative Review Board

PAGE II - 39
4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final.
================================================================
END OF GENERAL DECISION
PAGE II - 40
VOLUME III
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS, PAGE III - 0

NOTE: ANY SECTIONS REFERENCED IN THIS TASK ORDER RFP BUT NOT INCLUDED HERE CAN BE
FOUND IN THE MASTER IDIQ CONTRACT FOR R&A.
VOLUME III - WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK

01 12 00 SECURITY PROVISIONS
01 25 13 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
01 31 13 PROJECT COORDINATION
01 31 20 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
01 32 17 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - CPM
01 33 00 SUBMITTALS
01 35 30 SAFETY AND HEALTH
01 35 54 GSA SECURITY REGULATIONS
01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS
01 45 24 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
01 50 10 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01 57 20 DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
01 68 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING
01 74 10 CLEANING
01 77 04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 13 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
02 42 10 SALVAGEABLE PROPERTY
02 82 13 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02 84 18 HANDLING OF HAZARDOUS LAMPS AND SIMILAR MATERIALS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 53 73 CONCRETE INFILL OF PENETRATIONS
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
05 70 08 ALUMINUM INSET MOLDINGS

DIVISION 06 - WOODS & PLASTIC
06 05 74 FIRE-RETARDANT PLYWOOD BACK PANELS

06 06 20 FINISH CARPENTRY AND TRIM
06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING
07 92 10 SEALANTS AND CAULKING
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 10 73 HOLLOW STEEL ACOUSTICAL DOOR FRAMES

08 14 00 WOOD DOORS
08 71 10 FINISH HARDWARE
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 22 10 GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL FRAMING

09 22 16 METAL FRAMING (NON-STRUCTURAL)
09 50 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
09 65 14 RUBBER BASE
09 65 21 VINYL COMPOSITON TILE FLOORING
09 68 04 CARPET TILE
09 81 17 SOUND INSULATION
09 84 37 ENCAPSULATED CEILING SOUND INSULATION
09 91 00 PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 14 10 SIGNAGE
10 22 15 SECURITY MESH WITHIN PARTITIONS
10 44 12 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND BRACKETS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPINKLER SYSTEMS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 00.10 COMMON WORK REQUIREFMENTS FOR MECHANICAL

23 05 16 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION
23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
23 09 23 DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC

23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
23 21 13 HYDRONIC PIPING
23 21 24 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVERS
23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING
23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
23 36 00 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
23 81 26 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 05 01 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 22 00 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
26 24 16 PANELBOARDS
26 27 16 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES
26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION

27 20 00 & 27 30 00 DATA COMMUNICATIONS / VOICE COMMUNICATIONS
27 51 16 PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEMS
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROLS
28 16 00 INTRUSION DETECTION
28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
VOLUME III - APPENDICES
Appendix 1 - STRUCTURED CABLE PLANT SCOPE OF WORK
Appendix 2 - COMPUTER ROOM LAYOUT

VOLUME III - SPECIFICATION DRAWINGS

VOLUME III
WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS
Replace the current header on all pages of the Written

Specifications, "Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006 RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR
EXPANSION SPACE 24000 AVILA ROAD", with the following:

Add the following footer to all pages of the Written

Specifications:

WRITTEN SPECS, PAGE III - 0

Order No. GS-P-09-09-NP-5006
RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF THE WORK

COPYING, DISSEMINATION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THESE DRAWINGS,
PLANS, OR SPECIFICATIONS TO UNAUTHORIZED USERS IS PROHIBITED
Properly destroy documents when no longer needed.
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and conditions of the construction contract, including

but not limited to General Conditions, and the Special Conditions
listed below, apply to work of this section.
1.2 BUILDING STANDARDS
A. Suspension System for Acoustical Panel Ceiling: Provide

acoustical panel ceiling suspension system.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system with seismic

Restraint.
B. Ceiling Tile: Armstrong - 755B 2x4 Fissured.
C. Doors 7’-0” x 3’-0” solid core doors with birch clear finish.
1. Corridors and interior fire rated doors: 1-Hour minimum

(Note: Confirm per existing conditions).
D. Door Frames: Heavy-duty welded hollow metal frame.
E. Door Hardware: “Falcon” Locksets, C-key way - 7 pin core.
F. Fire Sprinkler Heads: Tyco 155 degree SSP quik response heads
with Heiter Industries No. 501 inverted white escutcheon.
1. Renovations within an existing space having standard

response heads are an acceptable replacement.
G. Light Fixtures: Agency Space: 2x4 - 3 lamp fixture, 18 cell

parabolic T8 (no reflectors).
H. Floor tile, paint colors and cove base are agency specific.
1.3 PROJECT AND WORK IDENTIFICATION
A. Project Name and Location: RVS DHS/CIS 1ST FLOOR EXPANSION SPACE,
CHEF HOLIFIELD FEDERAL BUILDING, 2400 Avila Road, Laguna Niguel,
California.
SECTION 01 11 00 PAGE 1
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4 GOVERNMENT REPRESENTATIVES
A. The work will be under the general direction of a representative

of the General Services Administration, Public Buildings Service,
Design and Construction Division or another designated
representative of the Government, referred to as the "Contracting
Officer."
1. Where the reference to the "Contracting Officer" is made

throughout the technical specification sections it refers
to the Contracting Officer or any other authorized
representative of Contracting Officer, acting within the
limits of their authority as delegated by the Contracting
Officer.
B. The provisions of this paragraph or provisions elsewhere in this

contract regarding supervision, approval, or direction by the
Contracting Officer or taken pursuant thereto, are not intended
to and will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the
accomplishment of the work, either as regards sufficiency or the
time of performance, except as expressly otherwise provided for
in this contract.
1.5 GOVERNMENT CODES AND REGULATIONS
A. Work under this Contract is subject to compliance with the

following codes and regulations:
1. International Code Council (ICC), 2006 building, fire,

mechanical and plumbing codes.
2. National Association of Plumbing-Heating-Cooling

Contractors (NAPHCC) "National Standard Plumbing Code."
1999 Edition.
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Handbook, 1999

edition, including the following:
a. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code, 2009 Edition
b. NFPA 90A - 2009 Edition
c. NFPA 101 - 2009 Edition
4. UFAS - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards, 1987

Edition. Where state and local codes are more stringent,
those particular elements shall apply.
5. ADAAG - ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities.
6. Other governing regulations are indicated in the sections

of these specifications that specify the individual
elements of the work and in the general conditions.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. With respect to seismic safety, the following codes shall govern.
1. 2006 California Building Code (CBC)
2. 2006 California Mechanical Code – PART 4, TITLE 24, CCR.
3. 2006 California Electrical Code – PART 3, TITLE 24, CCR.
4. 2006 California Plumbing Code - Part 5, TITLE 24, CCR.
5. 2006 California Fire Code – PART 9, TITLE 24, CCR.
1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: The Contractor shall limit his use of the premises to

the work indicated so as to allow for Government occupancy and
use.
1. Use of the Site: Confine operations to the particular

areas of the work involved and permitted under the
Contract. Portions of the site beyond the areas involved
are not to be disturbed. Conform to site rules and
regulations affecting the work while engaged in project
construction. The Contractor shall not allow areas outside
of the immediate areas to be dirty. They shall be kept
clean at all times.
a. Work shall be performed during normal business hours

(6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. Monday through Friday).
However, should work become disruptive to the
tenants, then work will be shifted to after hours at
no additional cost to the Government.
b. When work is required to be carried on outside of

normal business hours (6:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m.) it
shall be performed, with the approval of the
Contracting Officer, between the hours of 6 pm to 6
am Monday through Friday, or all day Saturday and
Sunday and Federal Holidays or as otherwise directed
by the Contracting Officer.
2. Contractor Use of the Existing Building: Maintain the

existing building in a safe and neat condition throughout
the construction period.
a. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
b. Take all precautions necessary to protect the

building and its occupants during the construction
period.
c. Contractor shall coordinate with the Contracting

Officer regarding the use of existing toilets during
the construction period. The Contractor will be
required to maintain in clean and sanitary condition
24000 AVILA ROAD
any toilet facilities he may be privileged to use.
If permission is granted to use existing toilet
facilities, the Contractor will be required to repair
or replace damaged fixtures, refurbish surfaces and
where damage occurred as a result of the Contractors
use; and in general restore the facilities to a
condition that existed prior to the Contractor’s use;
all at no added expense to the Government.
1.7 PARTIAL GOVERNMENT OCCUPANCY
A. The Government will occupy the existing building throughout the

entire period of construction.
B. Cooperate fully with the Government representative during

construction operations to arrange for access to Government
occupied areas.
1. Conduct work in Government occupied areas to minimize

conflicts with business operations and to facilitate
Government usage.
C. The Government reserves the right to place and install equipment

as necessary in completed areas of the building and to occupy
such completed areas prior to substantial completion.
D. The Government's occupancy will be such that it will not

substantially interfere with completion of the work. Such
placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute
acceptance of the work or any part of the work.
1.8 INSPECTION BY FIRE REGULATORY AUTHORITIES
A. This project is subject to inspection by the General Services

Administration.
B. Notify Contracting Officer when any inspections take place. The

decision as to action to be taken as a result of inspections by
GSA's Safety and Environmental Management Branch will be made by
the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MATERIALS OR EQUIPMENT TO BE SALVAGED
A. Existing materials or equipment to be removed but to remain the

property of the Government shall be considered "salvageable."
B. Remove and handle such material and equipment without damaging

it, and deliver same into storage on the site at a temporary
storage place designated by the Contracting Officer; or, if such
salvageable material or equipment is indicated to be reinstalled,
24000 AVILA ROAD
it may be reinstalled directly from its original location without
being delivered to a temporary storage place, when practicable.
C. Comply with requirements of Section 02 40 10 - Salvageable

Property.
3.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FIRE PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
A. All interior finishes (wall covering, ceiling tile, etc.) shall

comply with GSA criteria for flame spread and smoke development
ratings and shall meet GSA requirements or the IBC’s Interior
Finishes requirements.
B. All special locking hardware (cipher, key card, etc.) must comply
with NFPA 101,7-2.1.6 and be operable with no more than one
releasing operation from the direction of egress. Product data
and catalog cut sheets of the special locking hardware shall be
submitted to GSA’s, Safety and Environmental Management Branch
(9PMSF) for review and approval prior to installation.
C. All equipment and wiring (communication, power, fire alarm, etc.)

installed in a plenum shall be listed for installation in such
areas.
D. All flexible air ducts shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A,
2-3.2 in construction and installation.
-- End of Section --
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 12 00
SECURITY PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECURITY CLAUSES
A. The Contractor shall agree to insert terms that conform

substantially to the language of this clause, including the
following, in all subcontracts. This clause applies to all
contract workers, including cleaning service personnel.
1. The Tenant security approval process is approximately 21

days.
B. The Owner of the space occupied by the Tenant and members of the
property management company who may be responsible for oversight
of the maintenance of the space, SHALL NOT be allowed to maintain
keys to Tenant space or permitted to have access to Tenant space
without the approval of the Tenant, Physical Security Unit.
C. Upon award of the contract, the Contractor, all subcontractor,

key supervisory personnel and/or any other contract individuals
designated by the Tenant who require access to any existing or
proposed Tenant facility, property or information, must
accurately complete the following forms and furnish them to the
Tenant at least 45 work days prior to the arrival of contract
individual to the site of the work under contract.
D. Forms for cleaning personnel proposed for the facility shall be

submitted sat least 90 days but preferably 180 days prior to the
arrival of the contract individual to the site of the work under
contract.
1. SF-86, “Questionnaire for National Security Positions “OR.
2. SF-85, Questionnaire for Public Trust Positions.
3. Two copies of form FD-258 (fingerprint card).
E. All other contract individuals designated by the Tenant who

require access to any Tenant facility, property or information,
must accurately complete the following forms and furnish them to
the Tenant at least 25 work days prior to the arrival of contract
1. FD-816 (Background Data information Form), two copies of.
2. FD-258 (fingerprint card), and two copies of FD-484

(Privacy Act)
3. Forms can be obtained from the local Tenant Ofice.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure all
contractor personnel are in full compliance with applicable
Immigration and Naturalization Service. US Department of Justice,
Employee Eligibility Verification requirements, such as those set
forth in Title 8, U.S. Code, Section 274a.
G. A background investigation, the scope of which will be at the

discretion of the Tenant, will be conducted on these individuals.
At the discretion the Tenant contract individuals may also be
interviewed by the Tenant (or Tenant contract investigator)
regarding foreign travel, associates, residences or other matters
of concern to the Tenant in deciding whether to grant access to
its facilities, property, or information, and may be requested to
undergo a polygraph examination to fully resolve any security
concerns. Refusal or failure to accurately complete the forms,
to be interviewed, or to undergo a polygraph examination to
resolve any questionable matters will be deemed reasonable cause
for denial of access to Tenant facilities, property or
information Lack of candor may also be a strong factor for denial
of access.
H. Access to Tenant facilities, property or information, will be

granted only where such access is clearly consistent with the
mission and responsibilities of the Tenant. If, for any reason,
a contract individual is denied access to any Tenant facility,
property or information, the Tenant will not disclose to the
Contractor the reason for denial and will only make such
disclosure to the affected Contractor employee pursuant to the
provisions of the Freedom of Information or Privacy Acts. The
Tenant will not be liable for any expense in the replacement of
the individual or any costs incurred by the Contractor as a
result of such denial. It is the policy of the Tenant that these
individuals already employed by the contracting organization/
individual (i.e., that the individual’s employment not hinge upon
an access or security clearance determination by the Tenant) and
the Tenant will assume no liability between the contracting
organization and its employees as a result of this procedure.
I. The Tenant reserves the right to revoke any contract individual’s

access to its facilities, property or information, where such
access is no longer clearly consistent with the Tenant mission
and responsibilities, and the Contractor agrees to immediately
remove that individual from the work site in such circumstances.
In cases of access revocation, the Tenant will inform the
individual of the basis for the revocation unless to do so would
reveal classified or sensitive information; and, give the
individual and opportunity to explain, rebut or refute such basis
in writing. Access will remain revoked pending prompt review of
any such submission by the individual.
J. The Tenant reserves the right to reinvestigate contract

individuals on a periodic basis (usually every five years) or
where facts or information indicate the continued access may no
longer be clearly consistent with the Tenant’s mission and
responsibilities. The scope of any reinvestigation will be at
24000 AVILA ROAD
the sole discretion of the Tenant. Refusal or failure to
accurately complete any necessary forms, to be interviewed, or to
undergo a polygraph examination to resolve any questionable
matters during a reinvestigation will be deemed reasonable cause
for revocation of access to Tenant facilities, property or
information.
K. Appropriate badges may be furnished by the Tenant authorizing

escorted or unescorted access to Tenant facilities and property.
The badge, if furnished, will be kept at a location to be
determined by the Tenant and shall be picked up by the contract
individual granted access upon arrival at Tenant premises. It
shall be worn at all times on the upper part of the body so as to
be clearly visible and will be returned to the Tenant whenever
the wearer leaves Tenant premises for any reason or any length of
time. The Tenant may require all contract and subcontract
individuals to execute a security awareness briefing form, FD-
835, Security Acknowledge Form.
L. Upon request, the Contractor shall provide, for approval by the

Tenant, written physical security procedures and policies to be
followed by contract individuals for access to the project as
well security measures taken by the Contractor to prevent
unauthorized entry by contract individuals during off-duty hours.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL DATA
A. Due to the sensitive occupancy of the building, foreign nationals

from dissident political areas may be excluded and denied entry
approval. In general, foreign nationals may be used, even those
from dissident areas. The Contractor agrees to dismiss from the
site, when directed by the Tenant, any individual whose continued
employment is deemed to be contrary to the public interest or
inconsistent with the best interest of the national security.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing the personnel

required, with the necessary skills and qualifications, to
perform the work as described. Additionally, the Contractor
shall provide an individual on-site, who is authorized to
negotiate and financially commit change orders for the Principal.
C. The Contractor shall store materials only in places where

directed by the Tenant. No fire-hazardous materials or flammable
liquids shall be stored or otherwise maintained within a building
or structure, except as approved, in accordance with the local
fire regulations.
D. The Contractor and employees shall refrain from the use of

hallways, corridors, stairways, elevators, grounds, or other
facilities which have not been specifically authorized for his
use.
E. Contractor personnel may eat at the public food outlets, or at

other open food service facilities on a cash basis at current
prices.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. The illegal possession and use of drugs and paraphernalia by the

Contractor and contract employees will not be permitted.
Implicit with the acceptance of this contract is the Contractor's
agreement to comply with Federal statutes, laws, and regulations,
including those regulations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 25 13
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements

for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the
Contract.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or

modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.
B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials,

equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract
Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract
are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are
not considered substitutions:
1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding

period, and accepted prior to award of Contract, are
considered as included in the Contract Documents and are
not subject to requirements specified in this Section for
substitutions.
2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Government

or Architect.
3. Specified options of products and construction methods

included in Contract Documents.
4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with

governing regulations and orders issued by governing
authorities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will

be considered if received within 60 days after commencement of
the Work. Requests received more than 60 days after commencement
of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of
the Architect.
1. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for

consideration. Submit requests in the form and in
accordance with procedures required for Change Order
proposals.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation
method to be replaced in each request. Include related
Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide
complete documentation showing compliance with the
requirements for substitutions, and the following
information, as appropriate:
a. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of

products, fabrication and installation procedures.
b. Samples, where applicable or requested.
c. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the

proposed substitution with those of the Work
specified. Significant qualities may include
elements such as size, weight, durability,
performance and visual effect.
d. Coordination information, including a list of changes

or modifications needed to other parts of the Work
and to construction performed by the Government and
separate Contractors, that will become necessary to
accommodate the proposed substitution.
e. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on

the Contractor's Construction Schedule compared to
the schedule without approval of the substitution.
Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on
overall Contract Time.
f. Cost information, including a proposal of the net

change, if any in the Contract Sum.
g. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution

proposed is equal-to or better in every significant
respect to that required by the Contract Documents,
and that it will perform adequately in the
application indicated. Include the Contractor's
waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that
may subsequently become necessary because of the
failure of the substitution to perform adequately.
3. Architect's Action: Within one week of receipt of the

request for substitution, the Architect may request
additional information or documentation necessary for
evaluation of the request. Within 2 weeks of receipt of
the request, or one week of receipt of the additional
information or documentation, which ever is later, the
Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or
rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on
use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained
within the time allocated, use the product specified by
name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be

received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the
following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the
Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action
except to record noncompliance with these requirements.
1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of

Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly

submitted.
4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or

similar language in the Contract Documents.
5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be

provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be
considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a
result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate
activities properly.
6. The specified product or method of construction cannot

receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and
the requested substitution can be approved.
7. A substantial advantage is offered the Government, in terms

of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations
of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the
Government may be required to bear. Additional
responsibilities for the Government may include additional
compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation
services, increased cost of other construction by the
Government or separate Contractors, and similar
considerations.

provided in a manner that is compatible with other
materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the
substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor
certifies that the proposed substitution can be
coordinated.
10. The specified product or method of construction cannot

provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and
where the Contractor certifies that the proposed
substitution provide the required warranty.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop
Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction
activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not
constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor
does it constitute approval.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 31 13
PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements

necessary for coordinating construction operations including, but
not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Coordinating of construction operations.
2. Submittals of coordination drawings and staff names.
3. Work in occupied facilities, including work sequence, noise

and vibration control, dust control.
4. HVAC systems and utilities shutdown.
5. Damage and restorations.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements

that relate to this Section:
1. Division 1 Section “Coordination and Meetings” for progress

meetings, coordination meetings, and preinstallation
conferences.
2. Division 1 Section “Construction Schedules - CPM” for

preparing and submitting the Contractor’s Construction
Schedule.
3. Division 1 Section “Temporary Facilities” for requirements

for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security
and protection.
4. Division 1 Section “ Materials and Equipment” for

coordinating general installation.
5. Division 1 Section “Project Closeout” for coordinating

contract closeout.
6. Section 01 12 00: Security Provisions.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections

of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly
installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction
operations included under different Sections that depend on each
other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required
to obtain the best results where installation of one part
of the Work depends on installation of other components,
before or after is own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure

maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service,
and repair.
3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later

installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved,

outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include
such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at
meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Government and separate

contractors where coordination of their work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of

required administrative procedures with other construction
activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the
Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited
to, the following:
1. Preparation of schedules.
2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progressing meetings.
5. Project closeout activities.
6. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of,

but not actually incorporated in, the Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: prepare coordination drawings where

coordination is needed for installation of products and materials
fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings
where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization
of space for efficient installation of different components.
Prepare coordination drawings where there is limited access due
to hard, non-accessible ceiling construction, in order to adjust
location of components requiring access to areas above accessible
ceilings.
1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop

Drawings.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Indicate required installation sequences and access
requirements.
B. Staff Names: Within 10 days after issuance of Notice to Proceed,

submit a list of the Contractor’s principal staff assignments,
including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at
the Project Site. Identify individuals and their duties and
responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers.
Provide their 24-hour emergency access numbers for all key
persons.
C. Work Plan: Submit work plan fully describing:
1. Means of protection of occupied areas from Work within and

adjacent to occupied areas.
2. Noise Mitigation Plan, as specified in Division One

section, “Demolition and Construction Noise and Vibration
Control”.
3. Dust Control Plan, including layout, location, and type of

machines, ducting, removal and treatment of windows, power
requirements, filters, etc.
4. Security Plan and Tracking of Construction Traffic: Submit

samples of the following:
a. Security Clearances and Badges Tracking Log
b. Daily Log
c. Sub-Contractor Daily Activity Report
d. Weekly Job Inspection Report
e. List of Required Notifications to GSA
D. All submittals required in this Section shall comply with

requirements contained in Division One Section “Submittals”.
1.4 WORK IN OCCUPIED FACILITIES
A. General Requirements. Sequence work to avoid interference with

operation of occupied facilities. Any work, which will cause
disruptive or intrusive noise in any occupied area, shall be
performed outside normal business hours. All work in occupied
areas shall be performed outside the building’s normal business
hours. Normal business hours of building are 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM,
Monday through Friday. Prior to demolition or construction work,
submit for Contracting Officer approval a construction schedule and
specific work plan which will permit the existing user to function
in the space during construction. Such plan and schedule shall
provide for mitigation of all potential interruptions or
disruptions, including, but not limited to, noise intrusion, dust,
soil, or debris, interruptions of any service or utility, and the
24000 AVILA ROAD
like. Notify the Contracting Officer in writing a minimum of 1 week
in advance of anticipated work, which may, because of noise,
disturbances, or other causes, which require advance operational
planning. See Section 01 57 20 for list of prohibited operations.
1. Maintain uninterrupted mechanical, telephone security,

data, electrical, fire protection, or other service to
portions of the building not included in the work of this
Contract. Responsibility will be limited to specific work
areas and those utilities leading to and from specific work
areas within the limits of this project.
2. Any work required within occupied areas shall be included

and clearly identified in the Progress Schedule specified
in Division 1 Section “Schedules and Reports”. Contractor
shall Schedule the work and provide protective measures so
as to allow user-occupied areas to function without
interruption. Notify the Contacting Officer a minimum of 1
week in advance of any work within occupied areas. Obtain
Contracting Officer’s approval of complete protective
measures prior to commencement of actual work.
B. Provide noise mitigation measures as specified in Division 1

Section “ Demolition and Construction Noise and Vibration
Control”.
C. Provide dust control mitigation measures as specified herein to

prevent dust from migrating to adjacent occupied areas during
construction. Negative pressure of approximately 0.05” w.c. shall
be maintained between the construction area and adjoining
occupied areas. The existing air conditioning system shall not be
used for this purpose. Provide temporary ventilation system to
create the required negative pressure whenever dust is being
created or is present. Comply with the requirements of the South
Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), with the
requirements of the City of Laguna Nigel Noise Ordinance. The
system shall be designed to minimize noise and vibration. Fresh
air intake and system exhaust may be taken from exterior window
openings, designed to mitigate appearance on exterior of
building, and subject to the written approval of the Contracting
Officer. Within 10 days of the notice to proceed, Contractor
shall submit the design drawings, showing aspects and features of
the proposed dust control mitigation system, to the Contracting
Officer for review and approval. Allow two weeks for Government
approval. Upon completion of installation of dust control system,
Contractor shall demonstrate the effectiveness of ventilation
system and other dust control measures and obtain approval of the
Contracting Officer prior to commencement of demolition work.
D. Maintain and protect all services to the existing Telecom and

electrical rooms. Such protection shall include protection of
room and equipment from dust, and services shall include
lighting, power, emergency and uninterruptible power, and
cooling.
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. Maintain ingress and egress to and from existing building for
purpose of fire and emergency entrance and escape, loading and
delivery, and building maintenance. Methods shall be approved by
F. Protect electrical, water, gas, sewerage, telephone utilities,

data lines, and fiber optic cables against interruption, damage,
or contamination during construction. Install temporary utilities
it necessary to maintain continuous utility service.
G. Provide temporary walls as indicated on drawings to separate

occupied areas from work areas. Seal vertical joints and joints
at the floors, walls, and ceilings to create dustproof enclosures
with an STC rating of 45. Paint temporary partition on the
occupied side in a white color.
H. Limit equipment and vehicles in ingress and egress and the use of
service areas.
1.5 EXISTING HVAC SYSTEMS AND UTILITIES SHUT-DOWN AND START UP
A. The existing HVAC, plumbing, electrical, security, data,

telephone, and fire protection systems shall remain in operation
throughout all occupied portions of the building during the
course of construction. System shut down and start up will be
permitted only during designated periods. Notify the Contracting
Officer in writing of dates, times, and duration of system shut
downs a minimum of 1 week in advance of shut down periods. Make
connections to existing piping, ductwork, and wiring during shut
down periods.
B. Provide temporary by-pass piping, ductwork and blank-off plates,

and wiring as required to keep systems in continuous operation at
times other than the shutdown period.
C. No system shutdown shall be permitted without the written

approval from the Contracting Officer. Furnish requests for each
shutdown to the Contracting Officer. Indicate systems to be shut
down, areas affected, shutdown duration, and contingency plan if
the work cannot be completed within the specified time.
D. Shut down and start up times needs to be coordinated with GSA.

The ventilation system for the Tenant is on 24/7. A portable
power unit will be required when power interruption is required
during construction.
E. Work to be performed in or around duct shafts including but not

limited to cutting shaft walls, cutting and welding steel inside
the shafts, and cutting and connecting new ducts to existing duct
risers that require stopping the central fans be done in off-
hours. Work shall be planned and scheduled to be completed within
the available time.
F. When working in or around shafts, protect the shafts with

temporary sheet metal floors and ceilings around the work area,
24000 AVILA ROAD
to prevent debris from falling into or dust migrating into the
shafts where metal floor grates occur.
G. Construct temporary partitions and plenums of sheet metal panels

as specified in Division 23. Partitions and plenums shall be
airtight, dust-tight, substantially constructed, and securely
bolted to the shaft walls, floors, and overhead structure.
H. Provide temporary closures for new and existing openings and

open-ended ducts through shaft walls until they are connected.
I. Provide protective measures and temporary facilities as required

to prevent construction debris, dust, and fumes from entering
duct shafts. If contaminants enter duct shafts, purge the duct
shafts until dust and fumes are removed before the start of he
next day’s business hours.
J. Remove debris from duct shafts at the end of each shift and at
completion of work. Duct shafts shall be left clean and in an
undamaged condition.
1.6 DAMAGE AND RESTORATIONS
A. Immediately restore and replace damage to existing and new

facilities caused by equipment or other operations as directed by
B. Restoration shall be equal to the original work, and finishes

shall match the appearance of similar existing adjacent work, as
approved by the Contracting Officer, at no added expense to the
Government.
C. Remove and replace work not properly restored or not capable of

being restored as directed by the Contracting Officer, at no
added cost to the Government.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major

component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under
which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable
manner.
B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and

tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed
construction for that purpose.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Maintain uninterrupted mechanical and electrical service to
portions of the building not included in the work of this
Contract.
D. Cooperate with Government so that completion of work may proceed

in a timely manner. Furnish other contractors, whose work is
fitted to this work, detail and erection drawings giving full
information regarding the fabrication and assembly of this work.
Drawings shall indicate verified field measurements. Cooperate in
timing work to join with the work of other contractors or the
Government.
E. Check the drawings of other contracts for interferences with this

work and promptly report in writing any such interference to the
Contracting Officer. Submit complete information, including
drawings, descriptions, sketches, marked prints, as required for
the Contracting Officer’s coordination of drawings by others
which are a part of this work.
F. To insure the proper evaluation of subsequent work of this

Contract, measure work already in place and report to the
Contracting any discrepancy between the executed work and the
Contract Documents.
G. Do cutting and fitting of this work and of other work that may be
required to properly fit this work to receive, or be received by,
the work of other contractors as indicated or reasonably implied
by the contract Documents. Properly finish and complete this work
after other contractors have finished. Costs for additional
cutting and fitting caused by defective work shall be borne by
the party responsible. Do not endanger any work by cutting,
fitting, or otherwise, and do not alter the work of any other
contractor without the Contracting Officer’s approval.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 31 20
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section specifies general administrative procedures and

performance requirements.
1.2 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
A. General: Prepare and distribute to each entity performing work

at project site, a written memorandum of instructions on required
coordination activities, including required notices, reports and
attendance at meetings. Prepare similar memorandum for separate
contractors where interfacing of work is required.
B. Coordination of Trades: Coordinate work of different trades so

that interference between mechanical, electrical, architectural,
and structural work, including existing services, will be avoided
and within limits indicated the maximum practical space for
operation, repair, removal, and testing of equipment is provided.
C. Weekly Coordination Meeting: In addition to specific

preinstallation meetings and coordination meetings for each major
element of work, and regular project meetings for other purposes
(as indicated elsewhere in contract documents), hold weekly
general project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled
times which are convenient for everyone involved.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE/SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. General: In addition to a General Superintendent and other

administrative personnel required for performance of the work,
provide specific coordinating personnel as specified herein.
B. Environmental Control Officer: The Contractor shall designate an

"Environmental Control Officer" whose duties shall include the
responsibility for enforcing the environmental protection
provisions of these specifications including safety and health; the
requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act; and other
applicable Federal, state and local standards.
C. Project Coordinator: Provide a full-time Project Coordinator, who

is experienced in administration and supervision of building
construction including plumbing, mechanical and electrical work,
and who is hereby authorized to act as the general coordinator of
interfaces between units of work.
1.4 LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF SITE
A. General: In addition to site utilization limitations and

requirements shown on drawings, and indicated by other contract
SECTION 01 31 20 - PAGE 1
24000 AVILA ROAD
documents, administer allocation of available space equitably
among entities needing access and space, so as to produce best
overall efficiency in performance of total work of project.
B. Partial Occupancy of Premises: The parts of premises will be

occupied during phases of the performance of work under the
contract. Where the exclusive occupancy of part of the premises
is required for the performance of the work, the Government will
vacate the areas involved.
C. Loading Dock Facilities: The loading dock is available on a

first come, first serve basis. Morning hours are the busiest
with lighter usage during and after lunch. Parking is available
after hours and weekends. One week in advance of on site parking
need, Contractor shall provide a list of Contractor and sub-
contractor vehicles (one per Contractor or sub-contractor).
D. Storage or Sale of Equipment Prohibited: Storage or sale of

excess demolished material on the site is not permitted. Remove
demolished materials from site.
1.5 SPECIAL REPORTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, submit special reports

to the Contracting Officer within one day of occurrence requiring
special report, with copy to others affected by occurrence.
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of unusual and

significant nature occurs at site (example: visit by news
media), prepare and submit a special report listing chain of
events, persons participating, response by Contractor's
personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar
pertinent information.
1. When such events are known or predictable in advance,

advise the Contracting Officer in advance at earliest
possible date.
1.6 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND REPORTS
A. General: Required inspection and testing services are intended

to assist in determination of probable compliances of work with
requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
those compliances, or for general fulfillment of requirements of
contract documents.
B. Qualification of Testing Agencies: Except as otherwise indicated

and except where manufacturer's testing facilities are indicated
as acceptable, engage independent testing laboratories
specializing in required services and acceptable to the
Contracting Officer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.7 TRADEPERSONS AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
A. Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons

performing work at site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods
and craftsmanship needed to produce required quality-levels for
workmanship in completed work.
B. Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship
standards as specified and as recognized in the construction
industry for applications indicated. Remove and replace other
work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its
replacement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A. Pre-Installation Conferences: Where pre-installation conferences

are specified in technical sections, well in advance of
installation meet at project site with installers and
representatives of manufacturers and fabricators who are involved
in or affected by unit of work, and in its coordination or
integration with other work which has preceded or will follow.
Advise the Contracting Officer of scheduled meeting dates.
B. Installer's Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each

major unit of work to inspect substrate to receive work, and
conditions under which work will be performed, and to report (in
writing to Contractor) unsatisfactory conditions.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include

manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's applicable
instructions and recommendations for installation, to the extent
these are more explicit or more stringent than requirements
indicated in contract documents.
D. Coordinate enclosure (closing-in) of work with required

inspections and tests, so as to minimize necessity of uncovering
work.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. General: During handling and installation of work at project

site clean and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a
basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective
covering on newly installed work where reasonably required to
ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at time of
substantial completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance
on newly installed work as frequently as necessary through
remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
A. Solid, Liquid, and Gaseous Contaminants: Contractor shall be

responsible for the proper disposal of all solid, liquid, and
gaseous contaminants in accordance with all local codes.
B. Disposal of Refuse: Remove refuse resulting from construction

operations from the site.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 32 17
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE - CPM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Prepare and submit construction schedules (CPM) as specified and

required for orderly and timely completion of the project.
1.2 PROCEDURES
A. Within sixty 60 calendar days after award of contract, but not

more than thirty 30 calendar days after notice to proceed, the
Contractor shall submit, for review, to the GSA Project Manager,
a detailed Construction Schedule setting forth all requirements
for complete execution of the work.
B. The GSA will review and return the Contractor's Construction

Schedule, with summary comments, within fourteen 14 calendar
days. If revisions are required, the contractor shall resubmit
the Construction Schedule within fourteen 14 calendar days.
C. Changes to Construction Schedule will be mutually agreed upon by

the GSA and the Contractor.
D. Include in the initial schedule a written summary narrative

sufficiently comprehensive to explain basis of Contractor's
approach to the work.
E. If a Construction Schedule is considered by the GSA Project

manager to be NOT in compliance with any requirement of the
Contract, the Contractor will be notified to review and revise
the Construction Schedule and bring it into compliance. Failure
of the Contractor to submit a Construction Schedule in full
compliance with the Contract may result in a delay in the
processing progress payments, since Construction Schedule will be
used in evaluating progress for payment approval.
F. Simultaneously with each submittal of Progress Payment Request,

Contractor shall deliver to the GSA Project Manager an updated
Construction Schedule reflecting work progress as of the end of
previous reporting period. Each such Construction Schedule
reflecting work progress as of the end of previous reporting
period. Each such Construction Schedule shall show actual
progress to date in execution of the work, together with a
projected schedule for completion of the work. No changes in
logic will be permitted unless agreed upon with GSA Project
Manager.
G. All scheduled submittals are subject to review and acceptance by

the GSA. The GSA retains the right to withhold progress payments
until the Contractor submits a Construction Schedule acceptable
to the GSA Project Manager.
24000 AVILA ROAD
H. Concurrent with the acceptance of the Contractor's submitted

Construction Schedule by GSA Project manager, shall be
Contractor's signature of acceptance.
1.3 PREPARATION GUIDELINES
A. Construction Schedule shall be prepared using Microsoft Project

software and the Critical Path Method (CPM) of scheduling, unless
an alternate method is approved in advance by GSA Project Manager.
B. Construction Schedule shall be computer-based, in a format

acceptable to GSA Project manager. The level of detail shown in
the schedule shall be equal to, or greater than, that outlined in
the Table of Contents of the Contract Technical Specifications,
including any addenda.
C. The durations and events shown on the schedule shall conform to

the timeframe set forth in the Contract. The schedule shall
indicate all contract "milestone events" and other milestones
agreed to y the GSA; no other manually-imposed dates will be
accepted unless approved.
D. Construction Schedule shall represent a practical plan to

complete work within the time requirements of the contract.
1. A schedule extending beyond contract time will not be

acceptable.
2. A schedule showing work completed in less than contract

time will be unacceptable. Contractor shall indicate any
"float" (plus or minus).
3. A schedule found unacceptable by the GSA Project Manager

shall be revised by Contractor and resubmitted.
E. Construction schedule shall clearly show sequence of construction

activities and specifically indicate:
1. Start and completion of all items of work, their major

components, and interim milestone completion dates as
determined by Contractor and the GSA.
2. Activities for procurement, delivery, installation of

equipment, materials and other supplies, including:
a. Time for submittals, resubmittals, and reviews.

Include decision dates for selection of finishes.
b. Time for fabrication and delivery of manufactured

products for work.
c. Interdependence of procurement and construction

activities.
24000 AVILA ROAD
d. Dates for testing and balancing equipment, and final
inspection.
F. Schedule shall be in sufficient detail to assure adequate

planning and execution of work.
1. Each activity shall range in duration from 1 to 15 work

days, with the exception of fabrication and procurement
activities, unless directed otherwise by GSA. Activity
durations shall be the total of actual days required to
perform and complete that activity.
2. Schedule shall be designed, in the judgement of the GSA

Project Manager, to allow monitoring and evaluation of
progress in performance of work; it shall be calendar time-
scaled.
3. Activities shall include:
a. Description; what is to be accomplished and where.
b. Workday duration.
c. Responsibility code; identifying who performs each

individual activity.
4. Network shall show continuous flow from left to right.
5. Identify days per week and shifts per day worked; also,
non-work days and holidays.
6. Identify activities which constitute controlling

operations, i.e., milestones or critical path.
G. Failure to include any element of work required for performance

of this contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing
work required to comply with the Contract Documents,
notwithstanding acceptance of Construction Schedule.
H. Submittal of the construction Schedule shall be interpreted as

Contractor's confirmation that schedule meets requirements of the
Contract Documents, and that the work will be executed in
sequence indicated in the schedule.
1.4 REVIEWS, UPDATES, AND REVISIONS
A. The GSA Project Manager will review and return the Contractor's
Construction Schedule, with summary comments, within fourteen 14
calendar days.
1. If revisions are required, the Contractor shall resubmit

the construction schedule within fourteen 14 calendar days
following receipt of the GSA's comments.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. After Contractor and the GSA agree to a final schedule, it will
become the Project Construction Schedule and considered part of
the contract documents.
C. The Contractor shall submit to the GSA Project Manager a letter

confirming the acceptance of the Project Construction Schedule by
both the GSA and Contractor.
D. The Contractor shall analyze and update the Construction

Schedule:
1. Once each month, or as deemed necessary by the GSA, or upon

a major change order affecting the work, the Contractor
shall participate with the GSA in a schedule review to
include:
a. Actual completion dates for work items completed

during report period.
b. Actual commencement dates for work items started

during report period.
c. Estimated remaining duration for work items in

progress are always to be less than the original
duration, unless modified by change order.
d. Estimated commencement dates for work items scheduled

to start during month following report period.
e. Changes in duration of work items.
f. of current and most crucial critical paths to

required completion dates.
2. In the case of a schedule change, Contractor shall include

a narrative report with the updated progress analysis,
which shall include, but not be limited to, a description
of the problem areas, current and anticipated delaying
factors, and any proposed revisions for a recovery plan.
3. All change orders affecting the schedule shall be clearly

identified as separate, new activities.
4. Review of the Construction Schedule shall not relieve the

Contractor of the responsibility for accomplishing all work
in accordance with the Contract documents.
E. Updates: The Contractor shall submit to the GSA Project Manager,

with each monthly payment application, an up-to-date Construction
Schedule to include the following:
1. Work Item Report: Detailing work items and dependencies as

indicated on network diagram, listed in order of ascending
work item number.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Separate listing of activities completed during reporting
period.
3. Separate listing of activities which are currently in

progress, indicating their remaining duration and
percentages completed.
4. Separate listing of activities which are causing delay in

work progress.
5. All reports shall be arranged based on areas (secure and

non-secure).
6. Narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated

delays, and impact on Construction Schedule. Report
corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect,
including effect of changes on schedules of individual
contractors.
F. If, according to the current updated Construction Schedule, the

GSA determines the Contractor is behind the contract completion
date or any interim milestone completion dates, taking into
account all time extensions to which Contractor is entitled,
Contractor shall submit a revised schedule, showing a workable
plan and a narrative description to complete the project on time.
1. The GSA may withhold progress payments until a revised

Schedule, acceptable to the GSA, is submitted by
Contractor.
G. Scheduling of change or extra work orders is the responsibility

of Contractor.
1. Contractor shall revise Construction Schedule to

incorporate all activities involved in completing change
orders, or extra work orders, and submit it to the GSA
Project Manager for review.
2. With concurrence of the GSA Project Manager, change orders

or extra work orders of less than $15,000.00, and less than
three 3 work days duration, do not need to be scheduled,
unless change order affects current critical path or other
outside schedules.
H. If the GSA finds the Contractor is entitled to extension of any

completion date under provisions of the Contract, the GSA Project
manager's determination of total number of days extension will be
based upon current analysis of Construction Schedule and upon
data relevant to extension.
I. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the

GSA Project Manager not more than seven 7 days after the
commencement of the delay; otherwise, it shall be deemed finally
waived for all purposes. The Contractor shall provide an
24000 AVILA ROAD
estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress of
the work as part of the claim.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
A. Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be an usurpation

of Contractor's authority and responsibility to plan and schedule
work as the Contractor sees fit, subject to all other
requirements of contract documents.
B. The Contractor shall provide at all times sufficient competent

labor, materials, and equipment to properly carry on the work and
to insure completion of each part in accordance with the
construction Schedule and within the time agreed.
1.6 SUSPENSION OF PAYMENTS
A. Initial Submittal: The GSA has the right to withhold progress

payments until the Construction Schedule is accepted by the GSA
Project Manager.
B. Monthly Submittals: The GSA has the right to withhold progress

payments if Contractor fails to update and submit the
Construction Schedule and reports as specified.
1.7 RECORD COPY
A. At completion of work items, submit as-built report and time-

scaled network diagram reflecting project as-built critical
paths.
1.8 FORM OF SUBMITTAL
A. All Construction Schedule submittals shall be transmitted with a

Letter of Transmittal and shall include six copies and one
reproducible copy.
1.9 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS FOR SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Selective demolition shall comply with Section 02 41 13

following:
B. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the

following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work,

with starting and ending dates for each activity.
2. Interruption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of

utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
24000 AVILA ROAD
5. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work
to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner’s on-site
operations.
6. Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of portions of

existing building and of Owner’s partial occupancy of
completed Work.
7. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The types of submittal requirements specified in this section

include shop drawings, product data, samples, certificates of
conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection reports,
and miscellaneous work-related submittals. Individual submittal
requirements are specified in applicable sections for each unit
of work.
1.2 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. All submittals shall be made to the Contracting Officer or

to an individual designated by the Contracting Officer.
2. Only the Contracting Officer or an individual designated by

him in writing can approve or disapprove submittals.
Deviations and variations from the contract requirements
contained in the submittal can be approved only by the
Contracting Officer or an individual delegated such
authority in writing by the Contracting Officer.
3. Submittals shall be made in the quantity of 7 individual

packages, unless a greater quantity is requested.
4. Failure on the part of the Contractor to indicate approval

on submittals prior to submission to Contracting Officer
will result in their being returned to the Contractor
without being acted upon.
5. No delays in construction occasioned by the Contractor's

failure to submit material for approval in accordance with
the approved schedule will be excused.
6. Issue A Submittal Log indicating, what Submittal are

require for entire Project.
7. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials,

equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract
Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the
Contract are considered requests for "substitutions".
B. Scheduling: Develop schedule for submissions requiring approval

and include in the network plan required by section "Critical
Path Method of Scheduling."
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Coordination and Sequencing: Coordinate preparation and
processing of submittals with performance of the work so that
work will not be delayed by submittals. Coordinate and sequence
different categories of submittals for same work, and for
interfacing units of work, so that one will not be delayed for
coordination of the Contracting Officer's review with another.
D. Preparation of Submittals: Provide permanent marking on each

submittal to identify project, date, Contractor, subcontractor,
submittal name and similar information to distinguish it from
other submittals.
E. Show Contractor's executed review and approval marking and

provide space for the Contracting Officer's action marking.
Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Submittals, which are received from sources other than
through Contractor's office, will be returned without action.
F. No Partial Submittals will be reviewed.
1.3 SPECIFIC-CATEGORY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated in individual work

sections, comply with requirements specified herein for each
indicated category of submittal. Provide and process
intermediate submittals, where required between initial and
final, similar to initial submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Refer to clause "Shop Drawings, Coordination

Drawings, and Schedules" of the General Conditions. Provide
newly-prepared information, on reproducible sheets, with graphic
information at accurate scale (except as otherwise indicated),
with name of preparer indicated (firm name). Show dimensions and
note which are based on field measurement. Identify materials
and products in the work shown. Indicate compliance with
standards, and special coordination requirements. Do not allow
shop drawing copies without stamp indicating approval by the
Contracting Officer to be used in connection with the work.
1. Submittal: Seven prints, plus 3 additional prints where

required for maintenance manuals; 4 will be retained and
remainder will be returned, one of which is to be marked-up
and maintained by Contractor as "Record Document".
2. Equipment and Systems: Shop drawings for equipment and

systems shall show ratings (where applicable), and how
components are assembled, function together, and how they will
be installed. Shop drawings, product data, certificate of
conformance or compliance, certified test or inspection
reports, and other submittals for equipment, systems, and
their component parts shall be coordinated and submitted as a
unit. Multiple or piecemeal submissions are not acceptable
except where prior approval is obtained from the Contracting
Officer, in which case a list of data to be submitted later
shall be included with the first submission.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Coordination Drawings: Prior to installation of sleeves

and inserts for equipment, and/or the performance of work
in spaces in which two or more trades are involved and in
which the probability of interference exists as determined
by either the Contractor or the Contracting Officer, submit
composite coordination drawings for the work. Show the
work of all involved trades in a scale not less than 1/2"
(12.7mm) = 1'-0" (304.8mm) larger if required by the
Contracting Officer. Any work installed prior to approval
of coordination drawings shall be at the Contractor's risk,
and subsequent relocations required to avoid interference
shall be made at no cost to the Government.
a. In case interference develops, the Contracting

Officer will decide which work shall be relocated,
regardless of which was installed first.
C. Product Data: Collect required data into one submittal for each
unit of work or system; and mark each copy to show which choices and
options are applicable to project. Include manufacturer's standard
printed recommendations for application and use, compliance with
standards, application of labels and seals, notation of field
measurements which have been checked, and special coordination
requirements. Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal)
at project site, available for reference.
1. Submittals: Contractor shall not submit product data, or

allow its use on the project, until he has confirmed
compliance with requirements of contract documents.
Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise
indicated. Initial submittal is final submittal unless
returned by the Contracting Officer, marked with an action
which indicates an observed noncompliance. Submit 10
copies, two of which will be returned. GSA may request
additional copies when they need them.
a. Provide a preliminary single-copy submittal where

required (or desired by Contractor) for selection of
options by the Contracting Officer.
b. Installer's Copy: Do not proceed with installation of

materials, products or systems until final copy of
applicable product data is in possession of Installer.
D. Warranties:
1. Submit written warranties to the Contracting Officer prior

to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the
Contracting Officer's Certificate of Substantial Completion
designates a commencement date for warranties other than
the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a
designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties
upon request of the Contracting Officer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the
Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier
or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution
by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Government
through the Contracting Officer for approval prior to final
execution.
a. Refer to individual Section of Division-2 through -31

for specific content requirements, and requirements
for submittal of special warranties.
3. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial

quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized
to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper.
a. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered

tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to
identify the product or installation. Provide a
typed description of the product or installation,
including the name of the product, and the name,
address and telephone number of the installer.
b. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the
typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS," the
Project title or name, ant the name of the Contractor.
E. Samples: (Refer to clause "Samples" of General Conditions.) Provide

units identical with final condition of proposed materials or
products for the work. Include "range" samples (not less than 3
units) where unavoidable variations must be expected, and describe
or identify variations between units of each set. Provide full set
of optional samples where the Contracting Officer's selection is
required. Prepare samples to match the Government-furnished sample
where so indicated. Include information with each sample to show
generic description, source or product name and manufacturer,
limitations, and compliance with standards.
1. Sizes of Samples: Samples shall be furnished in the sizes

that are customary and standard in the particular industry
involved, or in the fabricator's typical commercial sample
sizes; except, samples shall not be smaller than the sizes
indicated below:
a. Sample of Equipment or Device: full size.
b. Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches: Built

up to 8 1/2 by 11 inches.
c. Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches and

adequate to indicate color, texture, and materials
variations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
d. Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10-inch
length or length to be supplied, if less than 10
inches. Examples of linear devices or materials are
conduit and handrails.
e. Sample of Non-Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of

non-solid materials are sand and paint.
f. Color Selection Samples: 2 inches by 4 inches.
g. Sample Panel: 4 feet by 4 feet.
h. Sample Installation: 100 square feet.
2. Submittal: At Contractor's option, provide preliminary

submittal of a single set of samples for review and action.
Otherwise, initial submittal is final submittal unless
returned with action which requires resubmittal. Submit 3
sets of samples in final submittal; one set will be returned.
3. Quality Control Set: Maintain returned final Contracting

Officer approved set of samples at project site, in suitable
condition and available for quality control comparisons.
E. Certificates of Conformance or Compliance: Follow same procedure

as for product data. Where feasible, and/or where required by
other sections of specification indicate compliance with the
specified standard by means of a label on the container, or on an
inconspicuous place on the product.
F. Certified Test and Inspection Reports: Process each as either

"shop drawing" or "product data", depending upon whether report
is uniquely prepared for project or a standard publication of
workmanship control testing at point of production; process
accordingly.
G. Warranties (Guarantees): In addition to copies desired for

Contractor's use, furnish 4 executed copies, except furnish
additional (conformed) copies where required for maintenance
manuals.
H. Record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, spare parts

lists and warranties are to be noted as submittals.
1.4 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS
A. Contracting Officer's Action: Except when no action is required as

in submittal for the record, or information only, the Contracting
Officer will take appropriate action. Where action and return is
required or requested, the Contracting Officer will review each
submittal, mark with Action, and where possible return within 2
weeks of receipt. Where submittal must be held for coordination,
Contractor will be so advised.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it
complies with contract documents, when submittal is returned
marked "Approved." Any deviation from the Contract shall be
specifically identified by the Contractor in writing.
2. Final-But-Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided

it complies with notations and corrections on submittal and
with contract documents, when submittal is returned marked
"Approved as Noted."
3. Returned for Resubmittal: Do not proceed with work. Revise

submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit
without delay to obtain a different action marking. Do not
allow submittals marked "Disapproved, Resubmit" (or unmarked
submittals where a marking is required) to be used in
connection with performance of the work.
4. Other Action: Where submittal is returned for other

reasons, with the Contracting Officer's explanation
included, it will be marked "Action Not Required."
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 35 30
SAFETY AND HEALTH
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Safety Meeting: Representatives of the Contractor shall meet

with the Contracting Officer prior to the start of work under
this contract for the purpose of reviewing the Contractor's
safety and health programs and discussing implementation of all
safety and health provisions pertinent to the work to be
performed under the contract. The Contractor shall be prepared
to discuss, in detail, the measures he/she intends to take in
order to control any unsafe or unhealthy conditions associated
with the work to be performed under the contract. If directed by
the Contracting Officer, this meeting may be held in conjunction
with other meetings which are scheduled to take place prior to
start of work under this contract. The level of detail for the
safety meeting is dependent upon the nature of the work and the
potential inherent hazards. The Contractor's principal on-site
representatives, the general superintendent and his/her safety
representatives shall attend this meeting.
B. Compliance With Regulations: All work, including contact with

and handling of hazardous materials, the disturbance or
dismantling of structures containing hazardous materials and/or
the disposal of hazardous materials shall comply with the
applicable requirements of 29 CFR and 40 CFR, latest edition.
Work involving the disturbance, dismantling of asbestos or
asbestos containing materials; the demolition of structures
containing asbestos; and/or the disposal and removal of asbestos,
shall also comply with the requirements of 40 CFR latest edition.
All work shall comply with applicable state and municipal safety
and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between
applicable regulations, the most stringent shall apply.
C. The following CFR apply:
29 CFR 1910, Occupational Health and Environmental Control
29 CFR 1926, Construction Safety
40 CFR 261, Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 262, Generators of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263, Transporters of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264, Owners and Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage, and Disposal Facilities
49 CFR 178, Shipping Container Specification
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Contractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall assume full
responsibility and liability for compliance with all applicable
regulations pertaining to the health and safety of personnel
during the execution of work, and shall hold the Government
harmless for any action on his/her part or that of his/her
employees or subcontractors, which results in illness, injury or
death.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Accident Reporting: A copy of each accident report, which the

Contractor or subcontractors submit to their insurance carriers,
shall be forwarded to the Contracting Officer as soon as
possible, but in no event later than 24 hours after the accident
occurred.
B. Permits: If hazardous materials are disposed of off site, submit

copies of permits from applicable, Federal, state, or municipal
authorities and necessary certificates that the material has been
disposed of as per regulations.
1.3 AIR QUALITY
A. Comply with Federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to

the air pollution, particularly the restrictions of the
California Air Resources Board (HARB).
1.4 DUST CONTROL
A. Keep dust down at all times, including during nonworking periods.

Use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet sweeping, or wet power brooming.
Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Special facilities, devices, equipment, clothing, and similar

items used by the Contractor in the execution of work shall
comply with the applicable regulations.
2.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Contracting

Officer any material suspected of being hazardous which he/she
encounters during execution of the work.
B. A determination will be made by the Contracting Officer as to

whether the Contractor shall Perform tests to determine if the
material is hazardous. If the Contracting Officer directs the
Contractor to perform tests, and/or if the material is found
hazardous and additional protective measures are needed, a
contract change may be required.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent

injury to the public, building occupants, or damage to property
of others. For the purposes of this contract, the public or
building occupants shall include all persons not employed by the
Contractor or a subcontractor working under his/her direction.
B. Storing, positioning or use of equipment, tools, materials,

scraps, and trash in a manner likely to present a hazard to
building occupants by its accidental shifting, ignition, or other
hazardous.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 35 54
GSA SECURITY REGULATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A. Clearances: Bidders will be required to comply with security

regulations imposed by the GSA, including any necessary
clearances.
1. The GSA security approval process is approximately 60 days.
B. Notification: Notify the Contracting Officer, or his designated

representative, not less than 7 calendar days prior to performing
work in a security area. Include the following:
1. Names: Names of individuals who are to work.

2. Time: The exact time, date, and hours of work.
1.2 GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA) SECURITY REGULATIONS
A. All persons employed within the boundaries of the property or

restricted-access areas therein, and all persons permitted to
enter such property and areas shall comply with the security
regulations that have been established for this contract.
B. The Contractor agrees on behalf of himself and all subcontractors

that the following security regulations will be observed by
Contractor personnel on the property. The Contractor shall make
it a specific provision of his subcontracts that these
regulations be accepted.
C. The Government reserves the right to exclude or remove from the

site or building any employee of the Contractor or Subcontractor
whom the Government deems incompetent, careless, insubordinate,
or otherwise objectionable or whose continued employment on the
work is deemed by the Government to be contrary to the public
interests. The Government further reserves the right to complete
processing of security documentation for Contractor personnel
assigned to work within restricted access areas prior to access
to such areas by Contractor personnel.
D. For overtime work the Contractor shall give the Contracting

Officer or his designated representative seventy-two (72) hours
notice. This notice is required so that security escorts may be
provided and is separate and distinct from any notices required
for outages. Also notify the Government if personnel will not
report to the job site on a particular day so that the security
escort would be released for other duties.
E. Contractor and all subcontractors must submit to the security

check and badging requirements. They will be issued temporary
badges with their pictures on it. These and/or visitor badges
must be worn by personnel on-site at all times. GSA security
clearance is currently taking 30-60 days
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.3 TENANT SPECIFIC SECURITY REGULATIONS
A. The Owner or Lessor of the space occupied by the Tenant and

members of the property management company who may be responsible
for oversight of the maintenance of the space, SHALL NOT be
allowed to maintain keys to Tenant space or permitted to have
access to Tenant space without the approval of the Tenant
Physical Security Unit.
B. Upon award of the contract, the contractor, all subcontractors,

key supervisory personnel and/or any other contract individuals
designated by the Tenant who require access to any existing or
proposed Tenant facility, property or information, must
accurately complete the following forms and furnish them to the
Tenant at least 45 work days prior to the arrival of contract
C. Forms for clearing personnel proposed for the facility shall be

submitted at least 90 days but preferably 180 days prior to the
arrival of the contract individuals to the site of the work under
contract.
1. SF-86, "Questionnaire for National Security Positions" OR
2. SF-85P, Questionnaire for Public Trust Positions, and
3. Two copies of form FD-258 (fingerprint card)
D. All other contract individuals designated by the Tenant who

require access to any Tenant facility, property or information
must accurately complete the following forms and furnish them to
the Tenant at least 25 work days prior to the arrival of contract
1. FD-816 (Background Data Information Form), two copies of
2. FD-258 (fingerprint card), and two copies of FD-484

(Privacy Act).
E. Forms can be obtained from the local Tenant Office, free of

charge.
F. It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure all

contractor personnel are in full compliance with applicable
Immigration and Naturalization Service, US Department of Justice,
Employee Eligibility Verification requirements, such as those set
forth in Title 8, U.S. Code, Section 274a.
G. A background investigation, the scope of which will be at the

discretion of the Tenant, will be conducted on these individuals.
At the discretion of the Tenant, contract individuals may also be
interviewed by the Tenant (or Tenant contract investigators)
regarding foreign travel, associates, residences or other matters
of concern to the Tenant in deciding whether to grant access to
its facilities, property, or information, and may be requested to
undergo a polygraph examination to fully resolve any security
24000 AVILA ROAD
concerns. Refusal or failure to accurately complete the forms,
to be interviewed, or to undergo a polygraph examination to
resolve any questionable matters will be deemed reasonable cause
for denial of access to Tenant facilities, property or
information. Lack of candor may also be a strong factor for
denial of access.
H. Access to Tenant facilities, property or information, will be

granted only where such access is clearly consistent with the
mission and responsibilities of the Tenant. If, for any reason,
a contract individual is denied access to any Tenant facility,
property or information, the Tenant will not disclose to the
contractor the reason for denial and will only make such
disclosure to the affected contractor employee pursuant to the
provisions of the Freedom of Information or Privacy Acts. The
Tenant will not be liable for any expense in the replacement of
the individual or any costs incurred by the contractor as a
result of such denial. It is the policy of the Tenant that these
individuals already employed by the contracting organization/
individual (i.e., that the individual’s employment not hinge upon
an access or security clearance determination by the Tenant) and
the Tenant will assume no liability between the contracting
organization and its employees as a result of this procedure.
I. The Tenant reserves the right to revoke any contract individual's

access to its facilities, property or information, where such
access is no longer clearly consistent with the Tenant’s mission
and responsibilities, and the contractor agrees to immediately
remove that individual from the work site in such circumstances.
In cases of access revocation, the Tenant will inform the
individual of the basis for the revocation unless to do so would
reveal classified or sensitive information; and, give the
individual an opportunity to explain, rebut or refute such basis
in writing. Access will remain revoked pending prompt review of
any such submission by the individual.
J. The Tenant reserves the right to reinvestigate contract

individuals on a periodic basis (usually every five years) or
where facts or information indicate the continued access may no
longer be clearly consistent with the Tenant ‘s mission and
responsibilities. The scope of any reinvestigation will be at
the sole discretion of the Tenant. Refusal or failure to
accurately complete any necessary forms, to be interviewed, or to
undergo a polygraph examination to resolve any questionable
matters during a reinvestigation will be deemed reasonable cause
for revocation of access to Tenant facilities, property or
information.
K. Appropriate badges may be furnished by the Tenant authorizing

escorted or unescorted access to Tenant facilities and property.
The badge, if furnished, will be kept at a location to be
determined by the Tenant and shall be picked up by the contract
individual granted access upon arrival at Tenant premises. It
shall be worn at all times on the upper part of the body so as to
be clearly visible and will be returned to the Tenant whenever
the wearer leaves Tenant premises for any reason or any length of
time. The Tenant may require all contract and subcontract
24000 AVILA ROAD
individuals to execute a security awareness briefing form, FD-
835, Security Acknowledgment Form.
L. Upon request, the contractor shall provide, for approval by the

Tenant, written physical security procedures and policies to be
followed by contract individuals for access to the project as
well as security measures taken by the contractor to prevent
unauthorized entry by contract individuals during off-duty hours.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 42 19
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents

include more stringent requirements, applicable construction
industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or
copied directly into the Contract Documents. Such standards are
made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Where the date of issue of a referenced

standard is not specified, comply with the standard in effect as
of date of Contract Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more

standards is specified, and the standards establish different or
conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, refer requirements that are different, but apparently
equal, and uncertainties to the Contracting Officer for a
decision before proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or

quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum
provided or performed. The actual installation may comply
exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or
it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. In
complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values
are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for the context of
the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Contracting
Officer for a decision before proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the

Project is required to be familiar with industry standards
applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of
applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a

required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain
copies directly from the publication source.
E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of

general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such
acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade
association, standards generating organization, authority having
jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the
text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations,"
published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries.
24000 AVILA ROAD
AA Aluminum Association
900 19th St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 862-5100
AABC Associated Air Balance Council

1518 K St., NW, Suite 503
Washington, DC 20005 (202) 737-0202
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturer's Association

2700 River Rd., Suite 118
Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312) 699-7310
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists

P.O. Box 12215 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8141
ACI American Concrete Institute

P.O. Box 19150 Detroit, MI 48219 (313) 532-2600
ACIL American Council of Independent Laboratories

1725 K St., NW Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887-5872
ADC Air Diffusion Council

230 N. Michigan Ave., Suite 1200
Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 372-9800
AGA American Gas Association

1515 Wilson Blvd.
Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 841-8400
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers

20 N. Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60606 (312) 984-5800
AIA American Institute of Architects

1735 New York Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300
A.I.A. American Insurance Association

1130 Connecticut Avenue, NW
Washington, DC 20036 (202) 828-7100
AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association

475 Wolf Ledges Parkway
Akron, OH 44311 (216) 762-7294
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction

400 N. Michigan Ave., 8th Floor
Chicago, IL 60611 (312) 670-2400
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute

1133 Fifteenth St., NW
Washington, DC 20005 (202) 452-7100
24000 AVILA ROAD
ALI Associated Laboratories

641 S. Vermont St.
Palatine, IL 60067 (312) 358-7400
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association

30 W. University Drive
Arlington Heights, IL 60004 (312) 394-0150
ANSI American National Standards Institute

1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 (212) 354-3300
AOAC Association of Official Analytical Chemists

1111 19th Street North, Suite 210
Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 522-3032
APA American Plywood Association

P.O. Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 (206) 565-6600
API American Petroleum Institute

1220 L St., NW Washington, DC 20005 (202) 682-8000
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute

1501 Wilson Blvd., 6th Floor
Arlington, VA 22209 (703) 524-8800
ASA Acoustical Society of America

500 Sunnyside Blvd.
Woodbury, NY 11797 (516) 349-7800
ASC Adhesive and Sealant Council

1627 K Street, NW., Suite 1000
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 452-1500
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-

Conditioning Engineers
1791 Tullie Circle, NE
Atlanta, GA 30329 (404) 636-8400
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

345 East 47th St.
New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7722
ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers

3617 Thousand Oaks Blvd., Suite 210
Westlake, CA 91362 (805) 495-7120
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering

P.O. Box 40362 Bay Village, OH 44140 (216) 835-3040
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

1916 Race St. Philadelphia, PA 19103 (215) 299-5400
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute

46179 Westlake Drive, Potomac Falls, VA 20165, (571) 323-3636
24000 AVILA ROAD
Arlington, VA 22206 (703) 671-9100
AWS American Welding Society

P.O. Box 351040 550 LeJeune Road, NW
Miami, FL 33135 (305) 443-9353
AWWA American Water Works Association

6666 W. Quincy Ave.
Denver, CO 80235 (303) 794-7711
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

355 Lexington Ave., 17th Floor
New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261
BIFMA Business and Institutional Furniture

Manufacturers Association
2335 Burton St., SE
Grand Rapids, MI 49506 (616) 243-1681
CAUS Color Association of the United States

343 Lexington Ave.
New York, NY 10016 (212) 683-9531
CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association

1422 Euclid Ave.
Hanna Building, Suite 772
Cleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-0711
CDA Copper Development Association

Box 1840, Greenwich Office Park 2
Greenwich, CT 06836 (203) 625-8210
CISCA Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association

104 Wilmot Road, Suite 201
Deerfield, IL 60015 (312) 940-8800
CRI Carpet and Rug Institute

Box 2048 Dalton, GA 30722 (404) 278-3176
CTI Ceramic Tile Institute of America

700 N. Virgil Ave.
Los Angeles, CA 90029 (213) 660-1911
DHI Door and Hardware Institute

7711 Old Springhouse Rd.
McLean, VA 22102 (703) 556-3990
DLPA Decorative Laminate Products Association

600 S. Federal St., Suite 400
Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222
EIA Electronic Industries Association

1722 Eye Street, NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20006 (202) 457-4900
24000 AVILA ROAD
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association
25 N. Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 (914) 332-0040
ETL ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.

P.O. Box 2040 Route 11, Industrial Park
Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711
FCI Fluid Controls Institute

P.O. Box 9036 Morristown, NJ 07960 (201) 829-0990
FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association

White Lakes Professional Bldg.
3310 Harrison Topeka, KS 66611 (913) 266-7013
FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Organization

1151 Boston - Providence Turnpike
Norwood, MA 02062 (617) 762-4300
GA Gypsum Association
1603 Orrington Ave.
Evanston, IL 60201 (312) 491-1744
HEI Heat Exchange Institute

c/o Thomas Associates, Inc.
1230 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333
H.I. Hydraulic Institute

712 Lakewood Center North
14600 Detroit Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44107 (216) 226-7700
HMA Hardwood Manufacturers Association

2831 Airways Blvd., Suite 205, Bldg. B
Memphis, TN 38132 (901) 346-2222
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association Inc.

P.O. Box 440
South Yarmouth, MA 02664 (617) 394-4424
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

(Available from ANSI)
1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 (212) 354-3300
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

345 E. 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7900
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

345 E. 47th St. New York, NY 10017 (212) 705-7926
IMSA International Municipal Signal Association

P.O. Box 539 1115 N. Main St.
Newark, NY 14513 (315) 331-2182
IRI Industrial Risk Insurers
24000 AVILA ROAD
85 Woodland St. Hartford, CT 06102 (203) 520-7300
ISA Instrument Society of America

67 Alexander Drive
P.O. Box 12277 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 (919) 549-8411
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association

1230 Keith Building
Cleveland, OH 44115 (216) 241-7333
MCAA Mechanical Contractors Association of America

5410 Grosvenor Lane, Suite 120
Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 897-0770
ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association

(A Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal
Manufacturers)
Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society ofthe Valve and Fittings

Industry
127 Park St., NE
Vienna, VA 22180 (703) 281-6613
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222
NBHA National Builders Hardware Association (Now DHI)
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association

7315 Wisconsin Ave.
Bethesda, MD 20814 (301) 657-3110
NEII National Elevator Industry, Inc.

630 Third Ave. New York, NY 10017 (212) 986-1545
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

2101 L St., NW, Suite 300
Washington, DC 20037 (202) 457-8400
NFPA National Fire Protection Association

Batterymarch Park
Quincy, MA 02169 (617) 770-3000
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association

P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38184 (901) 377-1818
NPCA National Paint and Coatings Association

1500 Rhode Island Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20005 (202) 462-6272
NSF National Sanitation Foundation
24000 AVILA ROAD
P.O. Box 1468 3475 Plymouth Rd.
Ann Arbor, MI 48106 (313) 769-8010
NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association

(Formerly NWMA) 1400 E. Touhy Ave., #G54
Des Plaines, IL 60018 (312) 299-5200
PCA Portland Cement Association

5420 Old Orchard Road
Skokie, IL 60077 (312) 966-6200
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute

(c/o Saul Baker)
1106 W. 77th St., South Dr.
Indianapolis, IN 46260 (317) 251-6970
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute

966 Hungerford Drive, Suite 12-B
Rockville, MD 20805 (301) 340-8580
S.D.I. Steel Door Institute

712 Lakewood Center North
14600 Detroit Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44107 (216) 226-7700
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council

(c/o ETL Testing Laboratories)
Route 11, Industrial Park
Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711
SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association

111 E. Wacker Drive
Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 644-6610
SJI Steel Joist Institute

1205 48th Street North, Suite A
Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 (803) 449-0487
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning

Contractors National Association
P.O. Box 70 Merrifield, VA 22116 (703) 790-9890
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

4400 Fifth Ave. Pittsburgh, PA 15213 (412) 268-3327
TCA Tile Council of America

P.O. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08542 (609) 921-7050
TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association

29 Bank Street Stamford, CT 06901 (203) 324-7533
UL Underwriters Laboratories
333 Pfingsten Rd.
Northbrook, IL 60062 (312) 272-8800
24000 AVILA ROAD
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
P.O. Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 (503) 639-0651
WCMA Wallcovering Manufacturers Association

355 Lexington Ave.
New York, NY 10017 (212) 661-4261
WIC Woodwork Institute of California

P.O. Box 11428 Fresno, CA 93773 (209) 233-9035
WLPDIA Western Lath Plaster Drywall Industries Association

(Formerly California Lath & Plaster Association)
8635 Navajo Road
San Diego, CA 92119 (619) 466-9070
WSC Water Systems Council

Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222
WWPA Western Wood Products Association

522 SW. 5th Avenue, Yeon Building
Portland, OR 97204-2122 (503) 224-3930
W.W.P.A. Woven Wire Products Association

2515 N. Nordica Ave.
Chicago, IL 60635 (312) 637-1359
F. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal

government standard- or Specification-producing agencies are
often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations
referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standard-
or Specification-producing agencies of the federal government.
Names and addresses are subject to change; they are believed to
be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of the
date of the Contract Documents.
CE Corps of Engineers
(U.S. Department of the Army)
Chief of Engineers - Referral
Washington, DC 20314 (202) 272-0660
CFR Code of Federal Regulations

Available from the Government Printing Office
N. Capitol St. between G and H St., NW
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238
(Material is usually first published in the Federal Register)
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission

5401 Westbard Ave.
Bethesda, MD 20816 (800) 638-2772
CS Commercial Standard
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 377-2000
24000 AVILA ROAD
DOC Department of Commerce

14th St. and Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20230 (202) 377-2000
DOT Department of Transportation

400 Seventh St., SW
Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4000
EPA Environmental Protection Agency

401 M St., SW Washington, DC 20460 (202) 382-2090
FAA Federal Aviation Administration

(U.S. Department of Transportation)
800 Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4000
FCC Federal Communications Commission

1919 M St., NW Washington, DC 20554 (202) 632-7000
FHA Federal Housing Administration

(U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development)
Director Manufactured Housing and Construction Standards Division
451 Seventh St., SW, Room 9158
Washington, DC 20201 (202) 755-5210
FS Federal Specification (from GSA)

Specifications Unit (WFSIS)
7th and D St., SW
Washington, DC 20406 (202) 472-2205 or 472-2140
GSA General Services Administration

F St. and 18th St., NW
Washington, DC 20405 (202) 472-1082
MIL Military Standardization Documents

(U.S. Department of Defense)
Naval Publications and Forms Center
5801 Tabor Ave. Philadelphia, PA 19120
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology

Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-2000
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(U.S. Department of Labor)
Washington, DC 20402 (202) 523-6091
PS Product Standard of NBS

Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238
REA Rural Electrification Administration
24000 AVILA ROAD
(U.S. Department of Agriculture)
14th St. and Independence Ave., SW
Washington, DC 20250 (202) 447-8732
USDA U.S. Department of Agriculture

Independence Ave. between 12th and 14th St., SW
Washington, DC 20250 (202) 447-8732
USPS U.S. Postal Service

475 L'Enfant Plaza, SW
Washington, DC 20260 (202) 268-2000
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 45 24
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

for quality control services.
B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and

related actions including reports, performed by independent
agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not
include Contract enforcement activities performed by the
C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance

with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and

installation procedures, not production of standard products.
1. Specific quality control requirements for individual

construction activities are specified in the Sections that
specify those activities. Those requirements, including
inspections and tests, cover production of standard
products as well as customized fabrication and installation
procedures.
2. Inspections, test and related actions specified are not

intended to limit the Contractor's quality control
procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract
Document requirements.
3. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control

services required by the Contracting Officer, Government,
or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide

inspections, tests and similar quality control services,
specified in individual Specification Sections and required by
governing authorities, except where they are specifically
indicated to be the Government's responsibility, or are provided
by another identified entity; these services include those
specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the
Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the
Contract Sum.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. The Contractor shall employ and pay an independent agency,
to perform specified quality control services.
2. The Government will engage and pay for the services of an

independent agency to perform inspections and tests
specified as the Government's responsibility.
3. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting

where results of required inspections, tests or similar
services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate
compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless
of whether the original test was the Contractor's
responsibility.
a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by

the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility,
where required tests were performed on original
construction.
B. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency

engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials
and construction specified in individual Specification Sections
shall cooperate with the Contracting Officer and Contractor in
performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel
to perform required inspections and tests.
C. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform

inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate their
services and activities to accommodate the phasing of the work.
The Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to
avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to
accommodate inspections and tests.
1.3 INSPECTION LOG AND SUBMITTALS
A. Daily as inspections are performed, the Contractor shall record

on the "Inspection Log" the date the inspection was made,
remarks, and signature of the person responsible for making the
inspection. The inspection log shall be submitted to the
Contracting Officer on a weekly basis.
B. The Contractor shall maintain a list of work that was inspected

and does not comply with the Contract, identifying what items
need to be reworked, the date the item was originally inspected,
and the date the item was to be corrected. Attach a copy of the
rework items list to the "Inspection Log" of each week. The
Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items
needing rework including those identified by the Contracting
Officer.
A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and

testing service agencies, including independent testing
laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with
24000 AVILA ROAD
"Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory
Qualification" by the American Council of Independent
Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections
and tests to be performed.
B. Coordinate with the Tenant and as directed by Tenant perform

inspection of security related construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking

and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore
substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including
deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply
with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching."
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 50 10
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions

are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in
other contract documents. These requirements have been included
for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is
intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required,
and no omission from this section will be recognized as an
indication that such temporary activity is not required for
successful completion of the work and compliance with
requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section
are applicable to, but are not limited to, utility services,
construction facilities, security and protection provisions, and
support facilities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES
A. The types of services required include, but are not limited to,
water, electrical power and telephones. When connecting to
existing utilities for required services, comply with GSA
recommendations as to methods to install services. Locate and
relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with
construction operations.
B. Water and electric power: Premises are supplied with water and
electrical services which may be used in this work, subject to
regulations of the GSA. Water and electric power will be
available free of charge. However, the Contractor shall provide
his own connections, conduits, and other means for receiving the
water and electric power. Contractor shall make arrangements for
obtaining access to water and electric power through the
1. Ground-Fault Protection: Provide ground-fault circuit

interrupter features, 20-amp or less rating.
C. Temporary Telephone service: The Contractor shall provide

telephone service to his field office for the duration of the
construction time. Telephone service shall be obtained directly
from the serving Telephone Company. The Contractor shall pay all
costs for installation and use of telephones. Make arrangements
for payment to the Telephone Company.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
A. The types of temporary construction facilities required include,

but are not limited to, water, enclosure of work, ventilation,
electrical power, distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities,
and ladders. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform
construction operations properly and adequately.
B. Enclosures: When temporary enclosures are required to ensure

adequate workmanship, dust abatement, weather protection and
ambient conditions required for the work, provide fire-retardant
treated lumber and plywood; provide tarpaulins with UL label and
flame spread of 15 or less; provide translucent type (nylon
reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space
would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary
lighting.
C. Electrical Facilities: Provide all temporary electrical

facilities, including lamps, required for the operation of power
tools, construction and safety operations. Remove all such
equipment when permanent connections have been completed. Where
it is determined, during construction, that the temporary
facilities, as installed, interfere with Government operations or
other construction operations and, when notified by the
Contracting Officer, relocate said facilities in an approved
manner at no cost to the Government. No wire, bus or electrical
equipment which is part of any of the permanent electrical
systems may be used for temporary electrical service for
construction operations, unless specifically approved by the
Contracting Officer. Temporary connections shall be in
accordance with NEC and OSHA requirements. The Contractor shall
be responsible for any damage or injury to equipment, materials,
or personnel caused by improperly protected temporary
installations. All costs for materials and installation for
temporary electrical facilities and energy for their operation
shall be at the expense of the Contractor. The hours of
operation, level of illumination and coverage for safety of
personnel shall meet the minimum requirements of the Contracting
Officer.
1. If welding is required, the Contractor shall coordinate

with the GSA Property Management to secure the Fire Alarm
protection systems prior to commencement of work.
2. Obtain welding permit from the Building Manager.
3. Provide electrical welders used in the erection and

fabrication of the building and its equipment with an
independent grounding cable connected directly to the
structure on which the weld is being made rather than to
adjacent conduit or piping.
D. Access Provisions: Provide ladders and similar temporary access

elements as reasonably required to perform the work and
facilitate its inspection during installation.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. When existing stairs are available for access during

construction, cover finished surfaces with sufficient
protection to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration
at time of substantial completion.
3.3 SECURITY PROVISIONS
A. General: GSA will provide security services and systems such as

to achieve 24-hour, 7 days per week protection from theft,
vandalism, personal injury and property damage for the building.
Contractor shall be responsible for security at the job site upon
execution of the Contract.
1. Permanent Fire Protection: Complete the fire protection

system at earliest reasonable date, and make ready for
emergency use, and instruct personnel at site on
availability and proper use.
2. Building Security and Lockup: At earliest possible date,

secure building against unauthorized entrance at times when
personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary
enclosures at ground floor and other locations of possible
entry, with locked entrances.
3. A weekly list of the Contractor's personnel authorized to

work on the 1st floor shall be submitted to the building
management.
3.4 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES
A. General: The types of temporary support facilities required

include, but are not limited to, Contractor's field offices,
temporary toilet facilities, storage sheds, fabrication sheds,
drinking water, first aid facilities, bulletin board, private and
public telephones, clocks, thermometer, project identification
signs, cleanup facilities, waste disposal service, rodent/pest
control and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be
reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and
accommodation of personnel at the site. Discontinue and remove
temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of
permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized
by the Contracting Officer and, if not otherwise indicated,
immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate
temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for
minimum interference with construction activities.
B. After hours staging area locations shall be coordinated with GSA.

Material storage space availability will be verified immediately
prior to start of construction.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.5 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE
A. The Contractor shall establish and maintain an office for himself

at the site. Contractor shall coordinate with GSA for available
space.
1. The allocation of the specific area or areas to be used for

office space will be made by the Contracting Officer, after
consultation with the representatives of the Contractor.
B. Contractor shall provide commercial bottled water in each office.
C. The office equipment and the furniture shall remain the

Contractor's property.
D. Fire Extinguishers: Provide ABC fire extinguishers, the number,

and extinguisher rating and location of which is in accordance
with NFPA No. 10. However, the minimum extinguisher rating shall
be 2ABC, and in no case shall the area covered per extinguisher
be greater than 3000 square feet (278.7 square meter), or travel
distance to extinguishers to exceed 50 (15,240mm) feet. See NFPA
No. 241. Provide fire extinguisher rated not less than 1OB
within 50 feet (15,240mm) of wherever more than 5 gallons
(18.93l) of flammable or combustible liquids or 5 pounds (1.87kg)
of flammable gas are being used. This requirement does not apply
to the integral fuel tanks of motor vehicles. Use fire
extinguishers which have been listed or approved by Underwriters
Laboratories.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 57 20
DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section includes requirements for the control of noise and

vibration produced by all demolition and construction processes
and equipment, including those associated with abatement of
hazardous material removal; all such activities are hereinafter
referred to as “construction”.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that noise

and vibration from construction operations do not at any time:
1. Interfere with building occupants during business hours;
2. Exceed the external noise limits prescribed by the City;
3. Cause employees to be exposed to excessive and unsafe noise

levels.
C. The Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Office within 10

days of notice to proceed a noise and vibration mitigation plan,
which details proposals for control of noise and vibration during
construction.
1.2 NOISE AND VIBRATION WITHIN THE BUILDING
A. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate potentially

disruptive operations so the building occupants can operate at
their normal efficiency during the period from 6:00 AM to 6:00
PM, Monday through Friday, hereafter referred to as “normal
business hours”. Due to the sensitive nature of the operations
and functions in the existing occupied spaces, demolition or
construction noise will generally be considered disruptive (and
therefore unacceptable) if it can be perceived in any occupied
space. The practical difficulties of limiting demolition and
construction noise to levels below the threshold of
perceptibility must be fully understood by the Contractor.
Therefore, all potentially disruptive operations shall be
conducted during other than normal business hours, unless
measures are taken, with the specific prior approval of the
Contracting Officer, to ensure that there will be no interference
with or disruption of building occupants and functions. In the
event of a complaint about noise from a building occupant, the
Contractor shall be required, at the discretion of the
Contracting Officer, to stop and desist the disruptive work.
B. Construction noise intrusion to occupied spaces above or below

will tend to be structure borne rather than airborne. Vibration
of the floor produced by a construction operation (such as floor
finish removal, or drilling) or equipment (compressor, negative
air machine, waste vacuum system, etc.) or impact (dropped tool
24000 AVILA ROAD
or material) will be reradiated as noise in the space below.
Similarly, the use of impact and/or power tools on the ceiling
deck will transmit noise directly to the space above.
Construction work which involves vibrating or impacting
structural columns will cause structure borne noise transfer to
both above and below.
C. Acoustical excitation of the building structure will also

transmit noise to adjacent occupied spaces on the same floor.
Airborne noise transfer to horizontal adjacencies is likely to be
less significant, assuming that slab-to-slab constructions exist
between the construction area and occupied space.
D. Excessive airborne noise levels within the construction area will

at best disrupt speech communication, and at worst represent a
hearing damage risk to the Contractor’s employees. It is
Contractor’s responsibility to take all practicable steps to
reduce construction noise levels at source and to comply with the
requirements of Cal/OSHA General Industry Safety Orders, Title 8,
Article 105 “Control of Noise Exposure”.
E. The Contractor’s noise mitigation plan shall, in addition to

covering all construction operations and equipment, including
proposals for reducing impact and airborne noise from
construction material handling systems, including carts, chutes,
hoists, etc. used during business hours.
1.3 PROHIBITED OPERATIONS
A. In addition to the noise and vibration control requirements

specified in Paragraph 1.2 specific types of construction
operations, on floors directly above or adjacent to occupied
space, on ceiling slabs directly below adjacent to occupied
space, and on structural columns, are “prohibited” during normal
business hours, and other operations are considered “marginal”
during normal business hours, and not allowed unless specific
prior approval to conduct such operations is given by the
Contracting Officer. The following Table 1 presents the
prohibited and marginal operations:
TABLE 1
CONSTRUCTION NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
RESTRICTED CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS IN AREAS
ADJACENT TO OCCUPIED SPACE
OPERATION TYPE
Powder Actuated Fastening P
Percussive Hammer Drilling P
Diamond Core Drilling M
Grinding P
Cutting/Sawing – Structural P
Cutting/Sawing Existing Pipes or Ducts M
Powered Equipment (Paint Sprayers, Negative Air Machines, M
Waste Vacuum Systems, Compressors, Generators)
Bead Blasting (if required to remove floor finish) P
Hammering P
24000 AVILA ROAD
OPERATION TYPE
Sheet Rock Hanging P
Any required core drilling and installation of new M
plumbing or electrical work that may effect the Tenant’s
day to day operation
P = Prohibited during normal business hours
(6:00 am to 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday)
M = Marginal
Operation subject to approval of Contracting Officer
B. Violation of these restrictions or any of the other noise

limitations required elsewhere in this Section during business
hours shall cause for penalizing the Contractor by requiring that
all construction operations be immediately halted and/or
conducted outside of business hours. The Contracting Officer will
make the final decision regarding the scheduling and interruption
of “restricted” noise generating operations adjacent to occupied
space.
C. The Contractor’s representative shall supervise and be

responsible for enforcing all provisions of the Specifications
concerning construction noise and vibration control.
D. The use of hammers or other impact tools on floors, structural

members, ductwork, plumbing and sprinkler systems, ceiling
systems, partitions, etc. is expressly prohibited during daytime
hours in construction areas adjacent to occupied space.
E. On floors over occupied space, no noise or vibration generating

work shall be carried out during business hours.
1.4 NOISE EMISSIONS TO SURROUNDING EXTERNAL AREAS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all

construction operations and activities, including the movement
and loading of trucks around the building, comply with the City
Noise Ordinance. The Ordinance requires that the noise sources
associated with construction operations and activities do not
exceed 55dBA between 8pm and 10pm, and 50dBA between 10:00 p.m.
and 7:00 a.m. on weekdays, including Saturday, or at any time on
Sunday or a federal holiday.
B. Particular caution shall be exercised on the part of the

Contractor to ensure that negative air machines are selected,
distributed, and acoustically treated to achieve the fixed
equipment noise limits prescribed by the City Noise Ordinance.
1.5 NOISE MITIGATION PLAN
A. Before commencing any work, the Contractor shall submit for the
review and approval of the Contracting Officer a detailed plan
for achieving the noise and vibration requirements specified in
this Section. The plan shall outline work programs and methods
which demonstrate consistency with the construction noise
philosophy for the Project and shall include a schedule of
noise/vibration producing equipment items with the Contractor’s
24000 AVILA ROAD
proposals for noise and vibration control in each case.
Contractor’s plan shall coordinate with Contractor’s Construction
Schedule, indicating all work sequences to be conducted outside
normal business hours, and any work sequences planned to be
conducted during business hours.
B. As part of the plan, the Contractor shall present his proposals

for “policing” the jobsite to ensure that all employees are
abiding by the prescribed work restrictions and noise mitigation
practice, including the wearing of hearing protectors. The
Contractor shall also initiate a liaison procedure with the
building occupants, providing a mechanism for any complaints of
noise disturbance to be dealt with promptly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ladders: Provide ladders and other climbing accessories with

padded legs and resilient feet to minimize impact and scraping
noise as the ladders are moved around. Resilient foot systems and
leg paddings are subject to approval of the Contracting Officer
and shall be designed so as not to compromise safety
requirements.
B. Sound Traps: Noise producing air movement equipment, including,

but not limited to negative air machines, waste vacuum systems,
ventilation fans, etc., shall be fitted with inlet and/or
discharge sound traps if needed to meet the interior noise limits
specified in this Section as well as those exterior noise limits
prescribed by the City Noise Ordinance.
C. Mufflers: Noise producing mobile or semi-fixed equipment

including, but not limited to, generators, compressors, etc.
shall be fitted with exhaust mufflers in order to meet the noise
limit requirements of this Section and those prescribed by the
City Noise Ordinance.
D. Vibration Isolators: All fixed or semi-fixed mechanical

equipment, in particular the negative air machines, which is to
operate within the building during daytime hours (6am to 6pm,
Monday through Friday) shall be supported on properly selected
and installed vibration isolators. Where vibration isolated
equipment is to be ducted or piped, duct and pipe connections
shall be made via flexible elements to eliminate short circuits.
E. Acoustical Enclosures: In addition to sound traps or mufflers,

acoustical enclosure/screening shall be provided for negative air
machines and as required for any other fixed or mobile noise
producing equipment in order to comply with the noise control
standards referred to in this Section.
F. Soft Wheeled Carts: Rolling carts used within the building shall
be fitted with pneumatic tires to minimize impact and movement
noise. No other carts will be allowed.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the construction program to

minimize impact noise produced by construction work conducted
over occupied space.
3.2 GENERAL RESTRICTIONS
A. Transportation and handling of construction materials or

demolition debris on floors over occupied space shall be
restricted to out of daytime hours, unless Contractor uses
techniques that do not transmit noise or vibration to the
building structure. Such techniques include the use of rolling
carts, dollies and moveable scaffolds that are equipped with
fully pneumatic tires.
3.3 UNNECESSARY NOISE
A. The Contractor shall not permit any construction personnel to

generate unnecessary structure borne noise during daytime hours
in areas adjacent to occupied space. Unnecessary structure borne
noise includes jumping from scaffolds, throwing or dropping
tools, equipment or materials.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 68 00
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY

governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the
Project.
1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will
prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft.
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site

and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure

minimum holding time for items that are flammable,
hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration,
theft and other losses.
3. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with
labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,
protecting and installing.
4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with

the Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are
undamaged and properly protected.
5. Store products at the site in a manner that will facilitate

inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of
units.
6. Store products subject to damage by the elements above

ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with
ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain
temperature and humidity within range required by
manufacturer's instructions.
1.3 PRODUCT SELECTION
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with

the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise
indicated, unused at the time of installation.
1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim,

finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed
for a complete installation and for the intended use and
effect.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard
products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where

Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing
exact characteristics required, with or without use of a
brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that
provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with
Contract requirements.
4. Performance Specification Requirements: Where

Specifications require compliance with performance
requirements, provide products that comply with these
requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for
the application indicated. General overall performance of
a product is implied where the product is specified for a
specific application.
5. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the

Specifications only require compliance with an imposed
code, standard or regulation, select a product that
complies with the standards, codes or regulations
specified.
6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an

established Sample, the Contracting Officer's decision will
be final on whether a proposed product matches
satisfactorily.
a. Where no product available within the specified

category matches satisfactorily and also complies
with other specified requirements, comply with
provisions of the Contract Documents concerning
"substitutions" for selection of a matching product
in another product category, or for noncompliance
with specified requirements.
7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements

include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's
standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar
phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies
with other specified requirements. The Contracting Officer
will select the color, pattern and texture from the product
line selected.
1.4 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for

installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor
each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned
with other Work.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 73 29
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS
A. Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into

existing construction to provide for the installation or
performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching
required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B. Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific

cutting and patching requirements and limitations applicable to
individual units of work.
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch

structural work in a manner that would result in a reduction of
load-carrying capacity or of load-deflection ratio. Prior to
such work, obtain approval of project's structural engineer.
B. Safety: Do not cut-and-patch operational safety-related

components in a manner resulting in reduction of capacities to
perform in manner intended or resulting in decreased operational
life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety.
C. Before cutting and patching structural elements obtain the

Contracting Officer's approval to proceed.
D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch work exposed on the

building's exterior or in its occupied spaces, in a manner that
would, in the Contracting Officer's opinion, result in lessening
the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch work in
a manner that would result in substantial visual evidence of cut
and patch work. Remove and replace work judged by the
Contracting Officer to be cut and patched in a visually
unsatisfactory manner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Procedural Proposal for Cutting and Patching: Where prior

approval of cutting and patching is required, submit proposed
procedures for this work well in advance of the time work will be
performed and request approval to proceed. Include the following
information, as applicable, in the submittal:
1. Samples: Submit examples of materials to be used in

cutting and patching. Include samples of textures, colors,
and patterns of finishes.
2. Describe nature of the work and how it is to be performed,

indicating why cutting and patching cannot be avoided.
24000 AVILA ROAD
Describe anticipated results of the work in terms of
changes to existing work, including structural, operational
and visual changes as well as other significant elements.
3. List utilities that will be disturbed or otherwise be

affected by work, including those that will be relocated
and those that will be out-of-service temporarily.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, or as directed by the

Contracting Officer, use materials for cutting and patching that
are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are
not available, or cannot be used, use materials that match
existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with
regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching
that will result in equal-or-better performance characteristics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: To prevent structural failure or collapse,

provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to

prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather
conditions of that part of the project that may be exposed during
cutting and patching operations. Take precaution not to cut
existing pipe, conduit or duct serving the building but scheduled
to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.
3.2 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching

work. Except as otherwise indicated or as approved by the
Contracting Officer, proceed with cutting and patching at the
earliest feasible time and complete work without delay.
B. Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to
damage work to be retained or adjoining work. Where possible
review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply
with original installer's recommendations.
C. Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as inconspicuous

as practicable. Comply with specified tolerances for the work.
D. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where work is performed

or used as access to work. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils,
putty and items of similar nature. Do not allow debris to
accumulate outside of work areas. Clean and mop floors.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 74 10
CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Maintain premises and public properties free from accumulations

of waste, debris, and rubbish caused by operations.
B. At completion of work, remove waste materials, rubbish, tools,

equipment, machinery and surplus materials, and vacuum clean all
sight-exposed surfaces. Damp mop hard surface flooring.
Leave project clean and ready for occupancy.
1.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Hazards Control:
1. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and

remove from premises daily.
2. Prevent accumulation of waste and do not create hazardous

conditions.
3. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or

noxious substance.
B. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local

ordinances and anti-pollution laws.
1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste material on project

site.
2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits,

oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains.
3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use only cleaning materials and methods recommended by

manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.
B. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning

material manufacturer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Execute cleaning to ensure that building, grounds, and public

properties are maintained free from accumulations of waste
materials and rubbish.
B. Wet down dry materials, debris, and rubbish to allay dust, and
prevent blowing dust.
C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and legally
dispose of it at public or private dumping areas off the
property.
D. Vacuum clean interior building areas when surfaces are ready to

receive finish painting.
E. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handling as

possible. Do not drop or throw materials from overhead heights.
F. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants

resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet newly
painted surfaces.
G. Broom clean paved surfaces.
H. Replace air conditioning filters if HVAC units were operated

during construction.
I. Clean, ducts, blowers and coils, if air conditioning units were

operated without filters during construction.
J. Maintain clean conditions until project is occupied by Owner.
K. Clean flooring in occupied areas and flooring in elevators.
L. The entire "path of travel" for construction needs to be kept

clean. Heavy equipment should have rubberzied wheels when going
over existing flooring.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 77 04
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: This section includes general requirements near end of

Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final
payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy and similar
actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific requirements
for individual units of work are specified in sections of
Division 02 through 31. Time of closeout is directly related to
"Substantial Completion", and therefore may be a single time
period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual
parts of the work which have been noted as substantially complete
at different dates.
1.2 PREREQUISITES TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Upon receipt of Contractor's request, the Contracting Officer

will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of
prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, the
Contracting Officer will note substantial completion, or advise
Contractor of work which must be performed and repeat inspection
when requested and assured that work has been substantially
completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial
"punch-list" for final acceptance.
1.3 PREREQUISITES TO FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been

completed, including punch-list items resulting from earlier
inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of
acceptable circumstances, the Contracting Officer will reinspect
the work. Upon completion of reinspection, the Contracting
Officer will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or
advise Contractor of work not completed as required for final
acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated.
1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: As work progresses, prepare and maintain record

documents as specified herein. Each record shall be certified by
the Contractor. Do not use record documents for construction
purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-
resistive location accessible to the Contracting Officer for
reference during normal working hours. Record documents shall be
verified monthly to the Contracting Officer with each monthly
payment application.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a white-print set (blue-line or black-

line) of contract drawings (including amendment and change order
drawings) and shop drawings in clean, undamaged condition, with
24000 AVILA ROAD
mark-up of actual installations which vary from the work as
originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of
showing "field" condition fully and accurately; however, where
shop drawings are used for markup, record a cross-reference at
corresponding location on working drawings. Mark with red
erasable pencil and, where feasible, use other colors to
distinguish between variations in separate categories of work.
Mark-up new information which is recognized to be of importance,
but was for some reason not shown on either contract drawings or
shop drawings. Give particular attention to concealed work,
which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
Note related change order numbers where applicable. Organize
record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable
paper cover sheets, and print titles, dates and other
identification on cover of each set. Maintain record drawings on
a monthly basis. Verification will be made in conjunction with
payment request.
C. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of specifications,

including amendments, change orders and similar modifications
issued in printed form during construction, and mark-up
variations in actual work in comparison with text of
specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular
attention to substitutions, selection of options, and similar
information on work where it is concealed or cannot otherwise be
readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note
related record drawing information and product data, where
applicable.
D. Record Shop Drawing, Product Data, Certifications and Laboratory

Test Reports: Maintain one copy of each approved shop drawing
and product data submittal, product certification, and laboratory
test report and mark-up significant variations in actual work in
comparison with submitted information. Include both variations
in product as delivered to site, and variations from
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation.
Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of
the work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later
date by direct observation. Note related change orders and mark-
up of record drawings and specifications.
E. Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to date(s) of

substantial completion, the Contracting Officer or his designated
representative will meet with Contractor at site, and will
determine which (if any) of submitted samples maintained by
Contractor during progress of the work are to be retained by the
Government. Comply with the Contracting Officer's instructions
for packaging, identification marking, and delivery.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of
these specifications for requirements of miscellaneous record-
keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of
the work. Immediately prior to date(s) of substantial
completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good
order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for
continued use and reference. Turn over to the Contracting
Officer prior to final acceptance.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 78 23
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General

and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Submit operating and maintenance manuals as specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
2. Operating Instructions
3. Parts List
4. Posted Instructions
5. Spare Parts Data
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Operations and maintenance manuals shall be consistent with

manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed
instructions, general operating procedures, and safety
precautions. The information shall be bound in manual format and
grouped by technical sections.
B. Procedures for preventative maintenance, inspection, adjustment,

lubrication and cleaning necessary to minimize corrective
maintenance and repair shall be delineated. Load limits, speed
of operation, environmental criteria and personnel safety
precautions shall be listed.
C. Repair requirements shall inform operators how to check out,

troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system.
Instructions shall include electrical and mechanical schematics
and diagrams and diagnostic techniques necessary for trouble
shooting the system.
D. As-built drawing submittals shall be prepared on translucent,

reproducible sheets, not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, nor larger
than 30 by 42 inches, except for full size patterns or templates.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Data shall be updated and resubmitted for final approval not

later than 30 days prior to contract completion. Test data shall
be legible and of good quality. Light-sensitive reproduction
techniques are acceptable provided finished pages are clear,
legible, and not subject to fading. Pages for vendor data and
manuals shall have 3/8-inch holes and be bound in 3-ring, loose
leaf binders. Data shall be organized by separate index and
tabbed sheets, in a looseleaf binder. The binder shall lie flat
with sheets printed so as to be readily readable. Caution and
warning indications shall be clear and well-labeled.
B. The Contractor shall provide field instructions in operation and

maintenance of systems equipment where required by the technical
provisions. These services shall be directed by the Contractor,
using the manufacturer's factory trained personnel or qualified
representatives. The Contracting Officer shall be given 7 days
written notice of scheduled instructional services.
3.3 SPARE PARTS LIST
A. The Contractor shall submit a list of parts and components for

the system. Listing shall indicate manufacturer's name, part
number, nomenclature, and stock level required for maintenance
and repair. List those items that may be standard to the normal
maintenance of the system.
3.4 POSTED INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Contractor shall provide labels, signs, and operating

instructions mounted on or near the product for normal, safe
operation.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 01 78 36
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural

requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract
Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on
products and special warranties.
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the

Contractor's special warranty of workmanship and materials.
B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and

limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor
of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor
does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors
required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.2 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that

has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged
as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced
to provide access for correction of warranted Work.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has

failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate
the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty
shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable
adjustment for depreciation.
C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a

warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable
condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The
Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding
defective Work regardless of whether the Government has benefited
from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful
service life.
D. Government's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Government

are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the
duties, obligations, right and remedies otherwise available under
the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations
on time in which the Government can enforce such other duties,
obligations, rights, or remedies.
1. Rejection of Warranties: The Government reserves the right

to reject warranties and to limit selections to products
with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. The Government reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for
the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar
commitment is required on such Work or part of the Work, until
evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such
commitments are willing to do so.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 02 41 13
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Selective demolition and removal of non-structural portions

of the existing building as indicated and required to
perform the new Work.
2. Patching and repairs.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements

that relate to this Section:
1. Division 01 Section “Summary of Work” for use of the

building and phasing requirements.
2. Division 01 Section “Cutting and Patching” for cutting and

patching procedures for selective demolition operations.
3. Division 01 Section “Schedules and Reports” for selective

demolition schedule requirements.
4. Division 01 Section “Demolition and Construction Noise and

Vibration Control.”
5. Division 01 Section “Construction Facilities and Temporary

Controls” for temporary utilities, temporary construction
and support facilities, temporary security and protection
facilities, and environmental protection measures for
selective demolition operations.
6. Division 01 Section “Contract Closeout” for record document

requirements.
7. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies” for material

and construction requirements for temporary enclosures.
8. Division 23 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating

mechanical items.
9. Division 26 Sections for cutting, patching, or relocating

electrical items.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those

indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner’s
property.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged
remain the Owner’s property. Remove, clean, and pack or crate
items to protect against damage. Identify contents of containers
and deliver to Owner’s designated storage area.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and

otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against
damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations
indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain

against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When
permitted by the Contracting Officer, items may be removed to a
suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition
and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged,

reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner’s
property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor’s
property and shall be removed from the site with further
disposition at the Contractor’s option.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the

Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections,
for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Proposed noise-control measures shall comply with Section 01 57

20.
C. Schedule of selective demolition activities indicating the

following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work,

with starting and ending dates for each activity.
2. Interruption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of

utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work

to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner’s on-site
operations.
6. Coordination of Owner’s continuing occupancy of portions of

existing building and of Owner’s partial occupancy of
completed Work.
7. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing
conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that
might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition
operations.
E. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 01

Section “Contract Closeout.”
1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other

subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical
conditions.
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification

regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with
hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to

comply with preinstallation conference requirements of Division 1
Section “Project Meetings.”
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent

to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so
that Owner’s operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less
than 1 week notice to Owner of activities that will affect
Owner’s operations.
B. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be

permitted.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with

Owner’s on-site operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used

for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match
existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or

surpasses that of existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements

indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the conditions of items to be removed and

reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements

that conflict with the intended function or design are
encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the
conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Contracting
Offer.
E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards

resulting from selective demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and

protect them against damage during selective demolition
operations.
1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or

operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by
the Contracting Officer and authorities having
jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to the
Contracting Officer and to governing authorities.
a. Provide not less than 1 week notice to Contracting

Officer if shutdown of service is required during
changeover.
B. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or

cap off indicated utility services serving building to be
selectively demolished.
1. The Contracting Officer will arrange to shut off indicated

utilities when requested by Contractor.
2. Where utility services are required to be removed,

relocated, or abandoned, provide bypass connections to
maintain continuity of service to other parts of the
building before proceeding with selective demolition.
3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion
of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of

chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other
dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition
operations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent

occupied or used facilities without permission from the
Contracting Officer and authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed
traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
C. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people damage

to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe
passage of people around selective demolition area.
1. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences,

railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and

landscaping remain.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, ad other existing finish

work that are to remain and are exposed during selective
demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment

that have not been removed.
D. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures

to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes
and noise.
E. The Contractor shall propose a temporary enclosures and dust-

proof partition plan coordinated with the phasing for GSA
approval.
1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 4-

inch (100-mm) studs, 5/8-inch (16-mm) gypsum wallboard with
joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch (13-mm) fire
retardant plywood on the demolition side.
2. Insulate partition to provide noise protection to occupied

areas.
3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof

doors and security locks.
4. Protect air-handling equipment.
5. Weather strip openings.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit the

spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental
protection regulations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent
spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
C. Clean adjacent structures and improvement of dust, dirt, and

debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent
areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent

required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods
required to complete Work within limitations of governing
regulations and as follows:
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true

dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to
damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To
minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or
small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed

surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of

flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and
pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space
before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable
fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
4. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
5. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or

unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.
6. Locate selective demolition equipment throughout the

structure and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or
framing.
7. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On-site

storage or sale of removal items is prohibited.
8. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to

condition existing before start of selective demolition
operations.
B. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to

remain, using power-driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use
power-driven impact tools.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to

adjacent construction by selective demolition operations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section “Cutting and
Patching”.
C. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish

restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner
that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
D. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where
demolished walls or partitions extend one finished area into
another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and
appearance.
1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent

surface.
2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

Comply with specified tolerances.
3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint

coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch
after the surface has received primer and second coat.
4. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with

new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
5. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of

the installation, where feasible.
E. Patch repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide

an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow

demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
B. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner’s property and

legally dispose of them.
C. Contractor shall coordinate with GSA regarding the availability

of dumpsters, staging area for dumpsters and building regulations
concerning disposal of demolished materials.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Vacuum building areas clean on completion of demolition

operation. Clean by whatever means necessary and appropriate
which meets manufacturer's recommended cleaning procedures.
B. Change filters on air-handling equipment on completion of

selective demolition operations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 02 42 10
SALVAGEABLE PROPERTY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall perform salvage of property as indicated on

the drawings and as specified herein.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate with GSA the identification of

all items to be salvaged and procedures for packing, and return
to GSA.
C. Remove salvageable materials carefully to avoid damages.

Materials indicated to be retained for reuse on this project and
be incorporated into new work shall be located as indicated on
the drawings. Except for items indicated to be retained as the
Government's property, other removed and salvaged materials not
indicated for reuse shall become Contractor's property when
approved by the Government and removed from site with further
disposition at Contractor's option.
D. Do not begin salvage of materials and equipment until

authorization is received from the Contracting Officer.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit proposed salvage plans, and removal procedures to the

Contracting Officer for approval before work is started. List the
materials and equipment to be salvaged. If any unsafe conditions could
develop due to the salvage work, notify the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Protect salvageable property and existing work which is to remain in

place, be reused, or remain the property of the Government. Repair
items that are to be salvaged and that are damaged during performance
of the work to their original condition, or replace items with new
articles. Repairs and replacement shall be subject to approval by the
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REUSE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Demount, remove and store materials and equipment indicated to be

remain the property of the Government, salvaged, reused or
relocated carefully to prevent damage, and reinstall them in the
proper sequence, or as the work progresses.
B. All materials handling and transportation equipment, including

pallets, for salvaging property shall be provided and paid for by
24000 AVILA ROAD
the Contractor. Deliver materials or equipment to a storage
place on the premises as directed by the Contracting Officer.
C. Retained items that are to remain property of the Government will

be identified by the Contracting Officer or noted on drawings, or
described in the specifications as items to be salvaged. Items
that remain property of the Government shall be removed or
dislodged from present locations in such a manner as to prevent
damage that would be detrimental to re-installation and reuse.
Store such items where directed by the Contracting Officer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 02 82 13
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Contractor shall furnish all labor, services,

materials, permits, insurance (specifically covering the handling
and transportation of Asbestos Materials) and equipment which is
specified, shown or reasonably implied for Asbestos Abatement
activities, as specified in the preceeding pages and identified as
Scope of Work to these Specifications.
B. Contractor shall be requested to provide testing if asbestos is

suspected during demolition or new construction. There is
potential for asbestos in existing telephone closets.
C. Related Work:
1. Documents affecting Work of this Section include but are not

necessarily limited to Sections in Divisions 0 through 31 of
the Project Manual for the facility.
D. Applicable Publications: The work conducted shall comply with all

applicable federal, state and local regulations. Applicable
guidelines and standards listed in this Scope of Work include, but
are not necessarily limited to:
1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Publications:
29 CFR 1910.1001..Occupational Exposure to Asbestos,

Tremolite, Anthophyllite and Actinolite
29 CFR 1910.1101..Asbestos
29 CFR 1910.1200..Hazard Communication
29 CFR 1910.134...Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1910.145...Specifications for Accident Prevention

Signs & Tags
29 CFR 1910.20....Access to Employee Exposure & Medical

Records
29 CFR 1926.1101..Asbestos
29 CFR 1926.200...Signs, Signals & Barricades
29 CFR 1926.55....Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts & Mists
40 CFR 61 ........Subpart A - General Provisions

..................Subpart M - National Emission Standards
for Asbestos
24000 AVILA ROAD
40 CFR 61.152.....Standard for Waste Manufacturing,
Demolition, Spraying and Fabricating
Operations
40 CFR 241........Guidelines for the Land Disposal of Solid
Wastes
40 CFR 257........Criteria for Classification of Solid Waste
40 CFR 261 & 262..Waste Disposal Facilities & Practices
40 CFR 763........AHERA
2. California Code of Regulations - General Industry Safety

Orders (GISO)
Title 8 CCR Section 5208 Asbestos Regulations
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
Z88.2-80 .........Practices for Respiratory Protection
Z87.1 ............Eye Protection
4. National Institute of Occupational Safety & Health (NIOSH)
5. RGA Emvironmental Limited Asbestos Survey Report dated

October 23, 2009.
6 Other federal, state and local regulations having authority

over Asbestos-related activities.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language

constitutes definitions for terms found in other contract documents.
Certain terms used in the Specifications are defined in this article.
A. Abatement: Procedures to control fiber release from Asbestos-

containing building materials. Includes removal, encapsulation 1
and enclosure.
B. Action Level: (REPLACED BY “PEL” VIA 29 CFR 1926.1101.)
C. Air Lock: A system for permitting ingress and egress with minimum
air movement between a contaminated area and an uncontaminated
area.
D. Air Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content of a

specific volume of air in a stated period of time.
E. Air Sampling Professional: The professional contracted or employed

to supervise air monitoring and analysis schemes This individual
is also responsible for recognition of technical deficiencies in
Worker protection equipment and procedures during both planning
and on-site phases of an Abatement Project. Acceptable Air
Sampling Professionals include State of California Certified Site
Surveillance Technicians and Certified Asbestos Consultants.
F. Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added.
24000 AVILA ROAD
G. Area Monitoring: Sampling of airborne fiber concentrations within

the Asbestos Work Area and outside the Asbestos Work Area which
are representative of the airborne concentrations of Asbestos
fibers which may reach the breathing zone.
H. Asbestos: (29 CFR 1926.1101 Definitions) Includes Chrysotile,

Amosite, Crocidolite, Tremolite asbestos, and any of these
minerals that has been chemically treated and/or altered.
I. Asbestos: Means fibrous forms of various hydrated minerals

including Chrysotile, (fibrous serpentine) Crocidolite (fibrous
fliebeckite), Amosite (fibrous Cummintonite-Grunerite), Fibrous
Tremolite, fibrous Actinolite, and fibrous Anthophyllite.
J Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM) EPA definition: Material

composed of asbestos of any type in an amount greater than 1
percent and by weight, either alone or mixed with other fibrous or
nonfibrous materials.
K. Asbestos- Containing Construction Material: Means any

manufactured construction material which contains more than 1/10th
of 1% asbestos by weight.
L. Asbestos- Containing Waste Material: Means friable asbestos waste

and asbestos waste from control devices (Pollution Control
Devices).
M. Asbestos Fibers: Asbestos fibers having an aspect ratio of at

least 3:1 and 5 micrometers in length.
N. Authorized Visitor: The Government Project Team members 1 the

Governments Representative, Consultant and any representative of a
regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over the Project.
O. Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room which is a part of the

Worker Decontamination Enclosure with provisions for storage of
Workers' street clothes and protective equipment.
P. Consultant (Also known as Environmental Consultant, and/or

Observation Service): The agent of the Government or the
Government's Representative who shall observe the Work, perform
tests, verify that abatement methods and procedures specified by
the Specifications are being complied with, and reports all
observations and test results to the Government or the
Government’s Representative.
Q. Contained Work Area: A Work Area which has been Isolated,

Plasticized, and equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
R. Curtained Doorway: A device to allow ingress or egress from one

area to another while permitting minimal air movement between the
areas, typically constructed by placing three overlapping sheets
of plastic over an existing or temporarily framed doorway,
securing each along the top of the doorway. and securing the
vertical edge of the outer two sheets along the opposite vertical
side of the doorway.
S. Decontamination Enclosure System: A series of connected rooms.
24000 AVILA ROAD
with Air Locks or Curtained Doorways between any two adjacent
rooms, for the decontamination of Workers and of materials and
equipment. A Decontamination Enclosure System always contains at
least one Air Lock to the Work Area.
T. Encapsulant (sealant): A liquid material which can be applied to

Asbestos-Containing material and which controls the possible
release of Asbestos fibers from the material either by creating a
membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating
into the material and binding its components together (penetrating
encapsulant).
U. Encapsulation: All herein-specified procedures necessary to apply

an encapsulant to Asbestos-Containing building materials to
control the possible release of Asbestos fibers into the ambient
air.
V. Enclosure: All herein-specified procedures necessary to enclose

completely Asbestos-Containing Material behind airtight,
impermeable, permanent barriers.
W. Excursion Limit: An exposure of airborne concentrations of

Asbestos fibers of one fiber per cubic centimeter of air (1 f/cc)
as averaged over a sampling period of thirty (30) minute period.
X. Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room which is part of the

Worker Decontamination Enclosure with provisions for storage of
contaminated clothing and equipment.
Y. Equipment Decontamination Enclosure: That portion of a

Decontamination Enclosure System designed for controlled transfer
of materials, waste containers and equipment, typically consisting
of a Washroom and a Holding Area.
Z. Friable Asbestos Material (40 CFR, Subpart M): Material that

contains more than one percent (1%) Asbestos by weight and that
can be broken 1 crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand
pressure when dry.
AA. Fixed Object: A unit of equipment or furniture or other building

component which cannot be detached from the building or can only
be detached by destructive methods resulting in irreparable damage
to the item.
AB. Glovebag Method: A method with limited applications for removing

small amounts of friable Asbestos-Containing material from HVAC
ducts, short piping runs, valves, joints, elbows, and other
nonplanar surfaces In an isolated (noncontained) Work Area The
glovebag (typically constructed of six [6] mil transparent
Regulite plastic) has two inward-projecting longsleeve rubber
gloves, one inward-projecting waterwand sleeve, an internal tool
pouch, and an attached, labeled receptacle for Asbestos waste. The
glovebag is constructed and installed In such a manner that it
surrounds the object or area to be decontaminated and contains all
Asbestos fibers released during the removal process. All Workers
who are permitted to use the Glovebag Method must be highly
trained, experienced, and skilled in this method.
AC. HEPA Filter: A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter
24000 AVILA ROAD
capable of trapping and retaining 99.97 percent of all
monodispersed particles (Asbestos fibers) equal to or greater than
0.3 microns in mass median aerodynamic equivalent diameter.
AD. HEPA Vacuum Equipment: Vacuuming equipment with a HEPA filter

system.
AE. Holding Area: A room in the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure

located between the Washroom and an uncontaminated area. The
Holding Area comprises an Air Look.
AF. Isolation: The sealing of all openings into a Work Area.
AG. Isolated (noncontalned) Work Area: A Work Area which is Isolated,

but has not been Plasticized and may or may not be equipped with a
Decontamination Enclosure System.
AH. Maximum Acceptable Level: An exposure of airborne concentrations

of fibers of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of air at any time.
This level is a contractual standard for this Project.
AI. Moveable object: A unit of equipment, furniture or other building

component which is detached or can be detached from the building
without destructive methods or results.
AJ. Negative Air Pressure Equipment: A portable local exhaust system

equipped with HEPA filtration and capable of maintaining a
constant, low velocity air flow into contaminated areas from
adjacent uncontaminated areas.
AK. Nonfriable Asbestos-Containing Material: Material that contains

more than one (1) percent Asbestos by weight in which the fibers
have been locked in by a bonding agent, coating, binder, or other
material so that the Asbestos swell bound and will not release
fibers during any appropriate end-use, handling, demolition 1
storage, transportation, processing, or disposal.
AL. Observation Service (Also known as Consultant and/or Environmental

Consultant): The agent of the Government or the Government's
Representative who shall observe the Work, perform tests, verify
that abatement methods and procedures specified by the
Specifications are being complied with, and reports all
observations and test results to the Government or the Governments
Representative.
AM. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): An airborne concentration of

asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, Actinolite, or a combination
of these minerals in excess of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter of
air as an eight (8) hour time-weighted average (TWA).
AN. Personal Monitoring: Sampling of Asbestos fiber concentrations

within the breathing zone of an Asbestos Worker.
AO. Plasticize: To cover floors, walls and other structural elements

of a Work Area with plastic sheeting as herein specified with all
seams securely taped.
AP. Removal: All herein-specified procedures necessary to remove

Asbestos-Containing materials from the designated areas and to
24000 AVILA ROAD
dispose of these materials at an acceptable site.
AQ. Shower Room: A room between the Clean Room and the Equipment Room
in the Worker Decontamination Enclosure with hot and cold or warm
running water, and suitably arranged for complete showering during
decontamination. The Shower Room includes an Air Lock between
contaminated and clean areas.
AR. Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to reduce

surface tension and improve penetration.
AS. Washroom: A room between the Work Area and the Holding Area in the
Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System where equipment and
waste containers are decontaminated. The Washroom comprises an Air
Lock.
AT. Wet Cleaning: The process of eliminating Asbestos contamination

from building surfaces and objects by using cloths, mops. or other
cleaning tools which have been dampened with water, and by
afterwards disposing of these cleaning tools as Asbestos-
contaminated waste.
AU. Work Area (Also known as "Regulated Area”): Designated rooms,

spaces, or areas of the Project in which Asbestos Abatement
actions are to be undertaken or which may become contaminated as a
result of such abatement actions. A Contained Work Area is a Work
Area which has been Isolated, Plasticized, and equipped with a
Decontamination Enclosure System. An Isolated Work Area is a Work
Area which is Isolated, but has not been Plasticized and may or
may not be equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
AV. Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: That portion of a

Decontamination Enclosure System designed for controlled passage
of Workers, and other personnel and Authorized Visitors, typically
consIsting of a Clean Room. a Shower Room, and an Equipment Room.
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Safety Compliance: In addition to detailed requirements of this

Specification. comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and
regulations of federal, state, regional, and local authorities and
publications regarding handling, storing, transporting, and
disposing of Asbestos Waste materials. Submit matters of
Interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative
agency for resolution before starting the Work. Where the
requirements of this Specification and referenced documents vary,
the most stringent requirement shall apply. When requirements of
reference documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall
apply.
B. Contractor shall have at least one copy each of 29 CFR Part 1910 -
Occupational Safety and Health Standards, 29 CFR 1926.1101,40 GFR
Part 61, Subparts A & M, and all pertinent state and local
regulations at his office and at the job site.
C. Before the commencement of any work at the site, the Contractor

shall post bilingual (as appropriate) EPA and OSHA caution signs
In and around the Work Area to comply with EPA and OSHA
regulations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Area Monitoring shall be performed by the observation Service,

which will conduct air sampling of the Abatement Project (1)
outside the building, (2) immediately outside the Work Area, (3)
In the Work Area. and (4) for Work Area Clearance Testing after
decontamination operations.
E. Personal Monitoring and other monitoring, which are required by

law, or considered necessary by the Contractor for Worker
protection shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
F. Job Walk: The Contractor must attend the Job Walk to qualify to
bid on any or all portions of this project.
1.4 SUBMITTALS AND NOTIFICATIONS (ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE AS

SUBMITTAL FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE START OF WORK.)
A. Copies of permits and/or notifications, as required by applicable

rules and regulations.
B. Copies of appropriate AHERA training certificates (current) for

each employee from their respective training agency or
organization.
C. Copies of appropriate AHERA training certificates (current) for

each employee from their respective training agency or
organization.
D. Copies of registration (current) with the Office of Public School

Construction (OPSC) for each employee from their respective
training agency or organization.
E. Submit proof that all persons providing labor and/or professional

services who will be entering contaminated areas have had current
(less than one year prior to start of the Project) medical
examinations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101. Furnish
physician’s interpretation of said examinations including the
declaration that the worker can wear a negative pressure
respirator while performing their work.
F. Record of successful fit testing performed by a qualified

individual within the previous six months, for each employee to be
used on this project with the employee's name and social security
number with each record.
G. Proposed respiratory protection program for employees throughout

all phases of the job, including make, model and NIOSH approval
number of the respirators to be used.
H. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on potentially hazardous

materials to be used on the project.
I. Proof of Contractor’s License and Asbestos Certification from the

Contractors Licensing Board, and proof of registration with the
Division of Occupational Safety and Health in accordance with
California Labor Code, Section 6501.
24000 AVILA ROAD
J. Copy of appropriate General Liability Insurance Certificate naming
the Government as well as the designated Environmental Consultant
as additionally insured.
K. List of proposed environmental laboratories to be used by the

Contactor, including copies of pertinent licenses, certifications
and registrations.
L. List of proposed subcontractors to be used by the Contractor, if

any.
M. List of proposed waste transporters to be used by the Contractor,

including copies of pertinent licenses, certifications and
registrations.
N. List of proposed waste disposal facilities to be used by

Contractor, including copies of pertinent licenses, certifications
and registrations.
O. List of product substitutions proposed by Contractor to be

considered for approval by the Government and/or designated
Environmental Consultant.
P. Written abatement plan by Contractor, as required by 8CCR, Sec.

5208.
Q. Detailed work schedule including, but not necessarily limited to,

specific dates of proposed work, number and hours of each shift
per day, number of workers/supervisors for each shift, and the
proposed completion date.
R. Provide manufacturer’s certification that vacuums, differential

pressure equipment filters, and other local exhaust ventilation
equipment conform to ANSI Z9.2.
1.5 REIMBURSEMENT OF COSTS OF THE GOVERNMENT AND THE CONSULTANT
A. In The event that reviews and/or Clearance Testing by the

Consultant or regulatory agencies shows that the Work Area or any
portion of the Work Area is not decontaminated or If the Work is
not in conformance with the Specifications, the Government,
Consultant and his Consultants will record all time, tests and
project related expenses expended to monitor the Work until the
work in compliance. All time and expenses recorded by the
Government Consultant and his Consultants to monitor the above
work, and all time, tests and project related expenses incurred by
the Government and Consultant and his Consultants outside the
Project Work Days, Work Hours or Contract Time shall, at the
discretion of the Government, be paid for by the Contractor. The
Contractor, promptly upon receipt of the billing from the
Government, or the Consultant shall reimburse the Government at
the normal billing rate of the Government or the Consultant and
his Consultants, or the Government is authorized to withhold funds
from the Contract Sum, for all time spent by the Government,
Consultant and his Consultants for reviews, testing and other
project related expenses when any of the above conditions occur.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Overtime work by the Contractor shall be requested in writing at
least 48 hours in advance to allow for scheduling of appropriate
Government Personnel and the Consultant.
1. In the event the Consultant is required to work overtime,

either at the request of or because of the Contractor, the
Government has the option of charging the Contractor for the
overtime hours worked at the Consultant’s overtime rate.
PART 2 WORKER PROTECTION
2.1 PERSONAL PROTECTION AND HYGIENE
A. All persons working on an Asbestos abatement site shall, when

present in the work area, wear disposable clothing with attached
foot and head covers and at minimum a half face air purifying
respirator equipped with high efficiency particulate air filters.
B. The Contractor shall ensure that all persons entering the work
area without exception:
1. Change from street clothes to protective clothing at

designated areas prior to starting the day's work.
2. Smoking is prohibited is all times. No eating or drinking

is to take place beyond the established critical barrier.
Prior to eating or drinking, the workers will be fully
decontaminated. Each worker will then dress in clean
overalls to eat or drink. These new coveralls can then be
worn back into the work area.
C. The Contractor shall require that each person entering the Work
Area shall wear an approved respirator and protective clothing.
There shall be no exceptions to this rule.
D. Protective clothing shall consist of disposable full-body clothing

of non-woven material comprised of heat and pressure-bonded
polyethylene fibers. Material shall be chemically and
biologically inert, low-linting and static free(unless laundered);
durable enough to resist abrasion, puncturing and tearing; highly
resistant to penetration of air-borne particulate when wet or dry.
Suits may be fabricated with integral head and foot covering.
Disposable clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to
prevent body contamination.
E. The Contractor shall require a minimum of a half-face negative

pressure respirator with high efficiency filters during the
removal and clean-up operations. Supply a sufficient quantity of
respirator filters so that workers can change filters as needed.
Require that respirators be wet-rinsed and filters discarded each
time a worker exits the work area. Require that new filters be
installed each time a worker re-enters the work area. Store
respirators and filters at the job site and protect them totally
from exposure to lead dust prior to their use.
F. Wearing of contact lenses in the contaminated atmosphere shall not

be permitted.
2.2 RESPIRATORS
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. The Contractor shall provide approved respirators to all workers

at no charge.
B. The Contractor shall require that each person entering the work
area shall wear an approved respirator. There shall be no
exceptions to this rule.
C. The Contractor shall instruct and train each worker involved in

Asbestos abatement or maintenance and repair of Asbestos-
containing materials in proper respiratory use and require that
each worker always wear a respirator, properly fitted on the face
in the work area from the start of any operation which may cause
airborne lead particles until the work area is completely
decontaminated.
D. The Contractor shall ensure that the employees will use

respiratory protection that is appropriate for the lead level
encountered in the work place or as required for other toxic or
oxygen-deficient situations encountered.
E. Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are written

directly into the Specifications, the following regulations and
standards have the same force and effect (and are made a part of
the Specifications by reference) as if copied directly into the
Specifications, or as if published copies were bound herewith.
Where there is a conflict in requirements set forth in these
regulations and standards, meet the more stringent requirement.
OSHA - U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health

Administration, Safety and Health Standards 29 CFR 1910,
Section 1001 and Section 1910.134. 29 CFR 1926.62.
ANSI - American National Standard Practices for Respiratory

Protection, ANSI Z88.2.
NIOSH - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
MSHA - Mine Safety and Health Administration
F. Air Purifying Respirators
1. Respirator Bodies: Provide half face or full face type

respirators. Equip full face respirators with a nose cup or
other anti-fogging device.
2. Filter Cartridges: Provide, at a minimum, HEPA type filters

labeled with NIOSH and MSHA Certification for
"Radionuclides, Radon Daughters, Dust, Fumes, Mists
including Asbestos-Containing Dusts and Mists" and color
coded in accordance with ANSI Z88.2. In addition, a
chemical cartridge section may be added, if required, for
solvents, etc., in use. In this case, provide cartridges
that have each section of the combination canister labeled
with the appropriate color code and NIOSH/MSHA
Certification.
3. Non-permitted respirators: Do not use single use,

disposable or quarter face respirators.
24000 AVILA ROAD
G. Fit Testing:
1. Initial Fitting: Provide initial fitting of respiratory

protection during a respiratory protection training course.
Fit types of respirator to be actually worn by each
individual. Allow an individual to use only those
respirators for which training and fit testing has been
provided.
2. On a Semi-Annual Basis: check the fit of worker's respirator
by having irritant smoke blown onto the respirator from a
smoke tube.
3. Upon Each Wearing: Require that each time an air-purifying
respirator is put on it be checked for fit with a positive
and negative pressure fit test in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions or ANSI Z88.2.
H. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL):
1. 8-Hour Time Weighted Average: (TWA) of lead to which any

worker may be exposed shall not exceed 0.1 f/cc.
I. Respiratory Protection Factor:
Respirator Type Protection Factor
Air purifying: 10
Negative pressure respirator
High efficiency filter
Half facepiece
Air purifying: 50
Negative pressure respirator
Full facepiece
Powered Air Purifying (PAPR): 50
Positive pressure respirator
Half or Full facepiece
Type C supplied air: 1,000

Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode
Half facepiece

Full facepiece

Full facepiece
Equipped with an auxiliary positive pressure
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA): 10,000

Positive Pressure respirator
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.3 DRESS AND EQUIPMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide approved protective clothing to all

workers, and to all official representatives of the Government,
State or other governmental entity, and the Consultant who may
inspect the job site.
B. Protective clothing shall consist of disposable full-body clothing

of non- woven material comprised of heat and pressure-bonded
polyethylene fibers. material shall be chemically and
biologically inert, low-linting and static free(unless laundered);
durable enough to resist abrasion, puncturing and tearing; highly
resistant to penetration of air-borne particulate when wet or dry.
Suits may be fabricated with integral head and foot covering.
Disposable clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to
prevent body contamination.
C. Disposable protective clothing shall be disposed of as Asbestos

waste every time the wearer exists from the work space/equipment
room to the shower room while proceeding to the clean area.
D. Additional safety equipment: Hard hats shall meet the

requirements of ANSI Standard Z89.1; eye protection shall meet the
requirements of ANSI Standard Z87.1 and foot protection shall meet
the requirements of ANSI Standard Z41.1; disposable PVC gloves as
necessary shall be provided to all workers and authorized
visitors. Non-skid footwear shall be provided to all abatement
workers.
2.4 WORKER PROTECTION PROCEDURES - TO BE POSTED IN CLEAN ROOM
Bilingual (English and other appropriate language[s] )Worker Protection

Procedures must be posted in the Clean Room. If the first language of
all Workers is English, the bilingual procedures are excepted.
A Each Worker and Authorized Visitor shall, upon entering the job
site: remove street clothes in the Clean Room and put on a
respirator and clean protective clothing before entering the
Equipment Room or the Work Area.
B. All Workers shall, each time they leave the Work Area: remove
gross-contamination from clothing before leaving the Work Area;
proceed to the Equipment Room and remove all clothing except
respirators: still wearing the respirator, proceed naked to the
showers; clean the outside of the respirator with soap and water
while showering; remove the respirator; thoroughly shampoo and
wash themselves.
C. Following showering and drying off, each Worker shall proceed

directly to the Clean Room and dress in their personal clothing.
Before reentering the Work Area, each Worker and Authorized
Visitor shall put on a clean respirator and shall dress in clean
protective clothing.
D. Contaminated protective clothing and work footwear shall be stored

in the Equipment Room when not in use in the Work Area. At
appropriate times or upon completion of Asbestos Abatement,
24000 AVILA ROAD
dispose of protective clothing and footwear as contaminated waste,
or launder in accordance with government regulations.
E. Workers removing waste containers from the Equipment

Decontamination Enclosure shall enter the Holding Area from
outside wearing a respirator and dressed in clean disposable
coveralls. No Worker shall use this system as a means to leave or
enter the Washroom or the Work Area.
F. The disposable clothing worn outside the Work Area shall be of

different color or markings from the disposable clothing worn
inside the Work Area.
G. Workers shall not eat, drink, smoke, or chew gum or tobacco while
in the Work Area.
H. Workers and Authorized Visitors with beards or who are unshaven

shall not enter the Work Area.
2.5 MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS AND HISTORIES
A. Before exposure to airborne Asbestos, the Contractor will provide

each employee providing labor or professional services at the
Project site with a current comprehensive medical exam, including
a history of respiratory and gastrointestinal diseases, meeting
the general definition outlined in 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 CFR
1910.134, [and] 29 CFR 1926.1101 and California Administrative
Code Title 8, CAC Section 5208, page 442.2.1 part (1)].
PART 3 PRODUCTS
3.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall furnish, provide and utilize the following

products in the Work as specified.
3.2 PROTECTIVE COVERING
A. Protective sheeting shall be 4 or 6 mil in thickness and conform

to ASTM E154, Kc-156, D-124B, D-2103 and D4379.
B. Polyethylene sheeting shall be fire resistive.
C. Polyethylene sheeting shall be opaque in color.
3.3 PROTECTIVE PACKAGING
A. Bags utilized for waste shall be a minimum of 6 mil in thickness

and properly labeled in accordance with EPA, OSHA, and DOT
regulations.
B. Appropriately labeled, sealable, impermeable drum containers.
3.4 TAPE
A. Duct Tape 2” or wider, or equal, and capable of sealing joints of

adjacent sheets of plastic, and for attachment of plastic sheet to
finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials, and
24000 AVILA ROAD
capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including
use of amended water.
3.5 CAUTION SIGNS
A. Before removing Asbestos, and at each separate work area, the

contractor performing abatement shall display caution signs as
required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 CFR 1926.1101 and/or other
pertinent state and local regulations.
3.6 SURFACTANT
A. Surfactant, or wetting agent, for amending water will be 50%

polyoxyethylene polyglycol ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether, or
equivalent, at a concentration of one (1) ounce per five (5)
gallons of water.
B. Surfactants containing the ingredient Methylene Chloride are not

acceptable.
3.7 ENCAPSULATING SEALER
A. Shall be a penetrating or bridging type, pollution-free, nontoxic,

with a Class A fire classification as specified herein.
Encapsulants with the ingredint Mwthylene Chloride are not
acceptable.
B. Shall be flexible when cured, resistant to weathering, oxidation,

aging and abuse.
C. Approved manufacturer for encapsulation of spray-applied or

trowel-applied materials include American Coatings Corporation.
Approved manufacturer for all other encapsulation work include
American Coatings, HB Fuller Company - Fosters Product Division,
or approved equal.
D. Shall be a water-dispensed coating, insoluble in water when cured.
E. Shall be used undiluted.
F. Shall have a written certification from the manufacturer that the

encapsulant is compatible with the replacement material and will
safely withstand temperatures of all surfaces on which the
encapsulation will be applied.
G. The Government, or the designated Consultant for the proposed

project, may at any time take random samples of encapsulant from
open containers or spray equipment for testing to insure product
quality and compliance with the Specifications.
H. Encapsulant to be applied to structural members before re-

application of spray-applied or trowel-applied fireproofing must
be a component of the fireproofing system when it was tested and
rated by the underwriters laboratory (UL), American Society for
Testing & Materials (ASTM), Factory Mutual (FM) or other building
code approved agencies.
3.8 LAGGING ADHESIVE
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Shall meet NFPA 90A Code, such as Arabol, Childers CP52, Insul-
Coustic 102, or equal.
3.9 GLOVEBAGS
A. The glovebag (typically constructed of 6 mil transparent regulate

plastic) has 2 inward-projecting longsleeve rubber gloves, one
inward-projecting waterwand sleeve, an internal tool pouch, and an
attached labeled receptacle for Asbestos Waste.
3.10 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide suitable tools for Asbestos removal and encapsulation..
B. Negative air pressure equipment: High-efficiency particulate air

(HEPA) filtration systems shall have filtration equipment in
compliance with ANSI Z9.2, local exhaust ventilation.
C. Manometer: Shall have a built-in alarm and contineous hard copy

read-out.
D. HEPA Vacuums: Shall comply with ANSI Z9.2, local exhaust

ventilation.
PART 4 EXECUTION
4.1 WORK AREA PREPARATION
A. Contractor must perform All work in accordance with, but not

necessarily limited to, 29 CFR 1926.1101 (OSHA regulations), 8CCR
5280 (Cal/OSHA).
B. Preparation procedures for removal of spray-applied or trowel-

applied materials; tank, boiler, breaching, flue, chiller,
miscellaneous equipment and pipe insulation; and other friable
materials:
1. Removal of the above or other friable Asbestos-Containing

materials, unless specified otherwise, shall be executed in
a “Contained” Work Area.
2. Contractor shall Isolate the Work Area for the duration of

the Project, completely sealing all openings including, but
not limited to, HVAC ducts, diffusers and grilles, skylights,
doorways, and windows, with six (6) mil polyethylene taped
securely to a clean surface. Spray adhesive used on finished
surfaces should be avoided where possible. Construct
barriers that enclose or separate Work Areas with wood or
metal framing members and sheathed with plywood.
3. HVAC systems shall be shut down. Contractor shall design

his Work Area preparation and engineering controls as
specified and/or as required to prevent damage to and
contamination of the affected HVAC system.
4. Contractor shall remove all Movable Objects from the Work

Area that are vulnerable to damage or contamination, or that
will impede or prevent the completion of the Work. All
Movable Objects removed from the Work Area shall be clean
24000 AVILA ROAD
before being moved to the designated storage area.
5. Clean and cover Fixed and Movable Objects that can remain in
the Work Area with six (6) ml polyethylene sheeting taped
securely in place. Special precautions shall be taken to
protect Fixed Objects vulnerable to damage or contamination.
6. All Fixed and Movable Objects requiring cleaning shall be

washed with amended water or cleaned with a HEPA filtered
vacuum.
7. All objects removed shall be adequately marked and charted

on a plan to ensure proper reinstallation upon completion of
the decontamination of the Work Area. The objects shall be
stored in a location designated by the Government, and in a
manner that will prevent contamination or damage to the
objects. Damaged and missing objects will be replaced by the
Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the
Government.
8. Seal and protect all light fixtures, computer systems

communication systems. lighted exit signs and other
electrical items, etc, that will remain within the Work Area
with 6 mil polyethylene taped securely. The polyethylene
cover shall be kept away from heat-generating electrical
devices where fire or damage to the device is possible.
Light fixtures and all other electrical items shall be
thoroughly cleaned before. covering. Make waterproof all
electrical conduit connections and other electrical devices
that will be exposed to moisture.
9. After Work Area abatement but prior to clearance testing,

the Contractor shall remove heating, ventilation and air
conditioning system filters, and pack them in protective
six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting for burial in the
approved Waste Disposal Facility.
10. After Work Area abatement but prior to clearance testing the
air handling and duct system shall be cleaned. The Contractor
shall possess the necessary skills or shall retain the
services of a professional company that is experienced in the
decontamination of air handling and duct systems.
11. Clean the proposed Work Areas before plasticizing floors and
walls, using HEPA vacuum equipment or wet-cleaning methods
as appropriate. Do not use methods that raise dust. such as
dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped with
HEPA filters.
12. Work Area (Containment): Contractor shall cover entire floor

with a minimum of two (2) six (6) mil protective coverings.
Cover wall and column surfaces with a minimum of two (2)
four (4) ml protective covering. Floor coverings shall
extend a minimum of 12' up vertical surfaces and behind wall
covers. All seams shall be staggered and securely taped.
Each layer shall be independently taped to the wall.
a. Contractor shall cover entire floor with a heavy duty

tarpaulin (reinforced polyethylene) followed by three
24000 AVILA ROAD
(3) layers of six (6) mil protective coverings and a
single ten (10) mil protective floater sheet. Cover
walls and columns with three (3) four (4) mil
protective covering. Floor coverings shall extend a
minimum of 12" up vertical surfaces and behind wall
coverings. Alt seams shall be staggered, adhesive
sprayed and securely taped.
13. Install 2' x 2' Plexiglas observation window(s) at strategic

location(s) In the "Containment" barrier to allow
observation of work from outside the Work Area. Do not
Install observation windows at locations accessible to
building occupants or the public.
14. Seal all wall, plumbing, duct and other cavities to prevent
Asbestos materials from falling into such cavities during
the Work.
15. The Contractor shall check regularly (at beginning, middle

and end of each shift as a minimum) all polyethylene
isolation and containment (protective) barriers for
punctures, loose seats, contact with heat-generating
devices, etc. Problem areas shall be repaired or mended
immediately.
16. Maintain existing emergency exits from the building.

Maintain a minimum of two (2) exits from Work Areas where
possible. The first exit shall be the Worker Decontamination
Enclosure System. The second exit may be the Equipment
Decontamination Enclosure System or a ripcord type,
emergency only exit in the plastic containment at a door,
window or other appropriate location. Exits, where possible,
shall be on opposite ends of the Work Area. All exits shall
be labeled in bright letters or signage. The second exit
shall be labeled “Emergency Exit Only". Establish
alternative exits satisfactory to fire officials where
existing building or Work Area emergency exits am
unavoidably blocked by activities of this project.
17. Provide and maintain appropriate fire extinguisher inside

and outside the Work Area. One 30-pound type 'ABC" fire
extinguisher is required for each 2,000 sq. ft of floor
area.
18. Install and maintain temporary emergency lighting with

battery backup power in all Work Areas. Work Areas with
natural lighting, and no night work to be performed, are
exempt from this requirement.
19. Shutdown of electric power during the wet removal or

encapsulation phase of the Project is mandatory unless
directed otherwise. Provide temporary power and lighting
when necessary, and ensure safe installation of temporary
power sources and equipment per applicable electrical code
requirements including appropriate Ground Fault protection.
Temporary light fixtures will be explosion proof. Provide
and maintain auxiliary diesel generator equipment where
existing facility power is Insufficient. Locate generator or
vent generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon
24000 AVILA ROAD
monoxide hazards to workers and the public. When power
shutdown is required, the Contractor shall check for
conditions where shutdown will pose a danger to the building
or to the building's components. Contractor shall take all
precautions necessary, including inspections and testing, to
Insure the safety of his employees and other building
occupants from electrical hazards during the course of the
Project. Existing fire, smoke detection and other life
safety Systems shall be kept in operation at all times, or,
the Contractor shall install and maintain a temporary system
or alternate acceptable to the Government and fire
officials.
20. The Contractor shall install and maintain Negative Air

Pressure Equipment during the abatement and decontamination
phases of the Project until the Clearance Test has passed. A
sufficient amount of air shall be exhausted by the unit(s) to
create a pressure of -0.02 inches of water within the Work
Area with respect to the area outside the Work Area. If only
one unit is necessary to provide the specified negative air
pressure in a Work Area, the Contractor shall have a backup
unit in place should the first unit fail, and for filter
changes. Install and maintain emergency self-starting diesel
generator back-up power for negative pressure equipment in
the event of power loss in the facility. Locate generator or
vent generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon
monoxide hazards to workers and the public. When more than
one negative air pressure unit is required, emergency power
back-up is required for only 50% of the units.
21. Install and maintain a manometer from the time abatement

begins until the Clearance Test has passed in Work Areas
where adjacent areas are occupied by unprotected workers,
other building users or the public and when dry removal
methods are required to be employed due to restrictive
project conditions. Report readings to the Environmental
Consultant at the start and end of each work shift.
22. Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours

in advance of when preparatory steps will be completed.
Asbestos Abatement Work shall not commence until: all
preparation requirements have been completed: all tools,
equipment. and materials are on hand; all required
submittals, notices and permits have been approved, and
until the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing
that Work may commence.
C. Preparation Procedures for abatement of limited scope shall be

appropriate for the restricted extent of the exposure. Consult
the Limited Asbestos Survey by RGA Environmental, dated October
23, 2009, to ascertain the materials involved (gray fireproofing,
pipe insulation, and floor tile with black mastic). When approved
by the Owner, the “glovebag” method may be used for abatement that
is localized and of limited scope, and debris cleanup.
1. Above removal, repair and debris cleanup activities unless

specified otherwise, shall be executed in an “isolated” Work
Area.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Contractor shall Isolate the Work Area for the duration Of
the Project completely seating all openings, including but
not limited to, HVAC ducts, diffusers and grilles,
skylights, doorways and windows, with six (6) mil
polyethylene sheet plastic securely taped to a clean
surface. Spray adhesive applied on finished surfaces should
be avoided where possible. As an option to isolating an
entire room or area, the Contractor may construct a single-
layer six (6) ml polyethylene Isolation barrier (Mini
Containment) around the pipe., equipment or debris being
worked on in accordance with procedures specified by 29 CFR
1926.50 for small scale, short duration projects. Work
Areas with permeable finishes and/or components will require
the covering of such items with one layer of tour (4) ml
polyethylene plastic or the Contractor shall use the Mini
Containment option.
3. Curtained Doorway; Contractor shall construct a Curtained

Doorway of clear plastic sheeting, using six (6) mil
polyethylene plastic, at entrances and exits to the Work
Area. If the Mini Containment option is used, move the
construction of the Curtained Doorway from the room entrance
to the Mini Containment itself.
4. HVAC systems shall be shut down. If the air handling system

cannot be shut down and there is an avenue for asbestos
fibers generated during abatement work to enter into the air
stream of the HVAC system, construct a single-layer six (6)
mil polyethylene plastic barrier (Mini Containment) around
the item(s) being abated. In addition contain/secure HVAC
System when possible without interfering with service to
areas outside the Work Area.
5. Shutdown of electric power during work unless directed

otherwise is mandatory where electrical hazards are
possible. Provide temporary power and lighting when
necessary, and ensure safe installation of temporary sources
and equipment per applicable electrical code requirements,
including appropriate Ground Fault protection. Temporary
light fixtures must be explosion proof. Provide and maintain
auxiliary diesel generator equipment where existing facility
power is insufficient. Locate generator or vent generator
exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon monoxide
hazards to workers and the public. When power shutdown is
required, the Contractor shall check for conditions where
shutdown will pose a danger to the building or to the
building's contents. Contractor shall take all precautions
necessary, including inspections and testing, to insure the
safety of his employees and other building occupants from
electrical hazards during the course of the Project.
Existing fire, smoke detection and other life safety systems
shall be kept in operation at all times or, the Contractor
shall install and maintain a temporary system or alternative
acceptable to the Government and fire officials.
6. Contractor shall check regularly (at the beginning, middle

and end of each shift as a minimum) all polyethylene
Isolation barriers for punctures, loose seats, contact with
heat-generating devices, etc. Problem areas shall be
24000 AVILA ROAD
repaired or mended immediately.
7. Contractor shall install and maintain Negative Air Pressure

Equipment during the abatement and decontamination phases of
the project until the Clearance Test has passed. A
sufficient amount of air shall be exhausted by the unit(s)
to create a pressure of negative 0.02 inches (-0.02 inches)
of water within the Work Area with respect to the area
outside the Work Area. if only one unit is necessary to
provide the specified negative air pressure in a Work Area,
the Contractor shall have a backup unit in place should the
first unit fail and for filter changes. When the "Mini
Containment" option is utilized the Contractor may
substitute a HEPA vacuum to create the specified negative
air pressure within the Work Area when standard Negative Air
Pressure Equipment volumes are too great.
8. Maintain existing emergency exits from the building.

Maintain a minimum of two (2) exits from the Work Area where
possible. The first exit shall be the Worker Decontamination
Enclosure system. The second exit, when possible, shall be
a second door, window, or other appropriate opening with a
rip cord emergency only exit seal Exits, where possible,
shall be on opposite ends of the Work Area. All exits shall
be labeled in bright letters or signage. The second exit
shall be labeled “Emergency Exit Only." Establish
alternative exits satisfactory to fire officials when
existing building Work Area emergency exits are unavoidably
blocked by activities of this project.
9. Provide and maintain appropriate type of fire extinguishers

in the Work Area. The size and number of extinguishers shall
be as required by local fire officials, but shall not be
less than one (1) fire extinguisher Inside and outside the
Work Area.
10. Provide temporary emergency lighting with battery backup

power In all Work Areas where none exists. Work Areas with
natural lighting, and no night work to be performed, are
exempt from this requirement.
11. Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-tour (24) hours

in advance of when preparatory steps will be completed.
preparation requirements have been completed; all tools,
equipment, and materials are on hand; all required
submittals 1 notices and permits have been approved, and
until the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing mat
Work Is to commence.
D. Preparation procedures for ceiling panel removal:
1. Panel removal activities may be executed in a non-isolated

Work Area when the use of a moveable decontamination
enclosure unit is employed, otherwise follow preparation
procedure specified in Article 4.01.
2. Government shall remove, where possible, all moveable

furniture, cabinets, etc., from underneath the area where
24000 AVILA ROAD
panels are being removed, and adjacent areas to allow access
for the moveable decontamination enclosure unit. Contractor
shall cover Fixed Objects with three (3) mil polyethylene
sheeting. Special precautions shall be taken to protect
items vulnerable to moisture or contamination.
3. Shutdown of electrical power during the work is mandatory in

areas where a possible electrical shock poses a hazard
unless directed otherwise. Provide temporary power and
lighting when necessary and ensure a safe installation of
temporary power sources and equipment per applicable
electrical code requirements including appropriate Ground
Fault protection. Temporary light fixtures shall be
explosive proof. Provide and maintain auxiliary diesel
generator equipment where existing facility power is
insufficient. Locate generator or vent generator exhaust in
a manner that will prevent carbon monoxide hazards to
workers and the public. When power shutdown is required, the
Contractor shall check for conditions where shutdown will
pose a danger to the building or to the building's
components. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary,
Including inspections and testing, to Insure the safety of
his employees and other building occupants from electrical
hazards during the course of the Project. Existing fire,
smoke detection and other life safety Systems shall be kept
in operation at all times or, the Contractor shall install
and maintain a temporary system or alternative acceptable to
the Government and fire officials.
4. HVAC systems shall be shut down while removal is in progress.
5. Maintain existing emergency and fire exits from Work Area or

establish alternative exits satisfactory to the Government
and fire officials.
6. Provide and maintain appropriate fire extinguishers in the

Work Area and adjacent areas. The size and number of
extinguishers shall be as required by local fire officials
but shall not be less than one (1) per Work Area.
7. Provide temporary emergency lighting with battery backup

power in all Work Areas where no emergency lighting is
provided. Work Area with natural lighting and no night work
to be performed are exempt from this requirement.
8. Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours

in advance Of when preparatory steps will be completed.
preparation requirements have been completed; all tools,
equipment, and materials are on hand; all required
submittals, notices and permits have been approved and until
the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing that the
Work may commence.
E. Preparation Procedures for ceiling debris removal:
1. Prepare Work Area in accordance with Article 4.01-A.
F. Preparation procedures for encapsulation of spray-applied or
24000 AVILA ROAD
trowel-applied materials:
1. Prepare Work Area in accordance with Article 4.01-A. The

following exceptions shall apply:
a. Wall covering may be reduced to a single layer.
G. Preparation procedures for removal of nonfriable Asbestos-

Containing roofing and “Transite” materials (in good condition.)
1. No Work Area preparation required.
4.2 DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS
A. Decontamination Enclosure Systems (Worker and Equipment) general

requirements:
1. Build suitable wood, metal or PVC framing as described

herein and as approved by the Environmental Consultant at
the shop drawing submittal stage. Portable prefab units, if
utilized, must be submitted for review and approval by the
Environmental Consultant before start of construction.
Submittal shall include, but not be limited to, a floor plan
layout complying with the schematic layouts bound herein,
showing dimensions, materials. sizes, thickness, plumbing,
and electrical outlets, etc.
B. Decontamination Enclosure System for asbestos abatement work in

"Contained" Work Areas:
1. Construct a Workers' Decontamination Enclosure System

contiguous to the Work Area consisting of three totally
enclosed chambers to conform with standard drawings bound
herein as follows:
a. An Equipment Room with an Air Lock to the Work Area

and a Curtained Doorway to the Shower Room.
b. A Shower Room with two Curtained Doorways, one to the

Equipment Room and one to the Clean Room. Plastic on
Shower Room and adjoining Equipment and Glean Rooms
shall be opaque. The Shower Room shall contain at
least one shower with hot and cold or warm water.
Careful attention shall be paid to the shower
enclosure to ensure against leaking of any kind. Trap
shower waste using filters having a maximum pore size
of 1.0 micron, and drain into a sanitary sewer.
Replace filter when they become clogged. Ensure a
supply of soap and disposable towels at all times in
the Shower Room.
c. A Clean Room with one Curtained Doorway into the

shower and one entrance or exit to non-contaminated
areas of the building. The Clean Room shall have
sufficient space for storage of the Workers street
clothes, towels, and other non-contaminated items.
Joint use of this space for other functions, such as
offices, storage of equipment, materials, or tools,
shall be prohibited.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Construct an Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System

consisting of two totally enclosed chambers as follows:
a. A Washroom with an Air Lock to a designated staging

area of the Work Area and a Curtained Doorway to the
Holding Room.
b. A Holding Room with a Curtained Doorway to The

Washroom and a doorway to an uncontaminated area.
C. Decontamination Enclosure System for asbestos-abatement work in

“Isolated" Work Areas:
1. Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System consisting of

two totally enclosed chambers, as follows:
a. An Equipment Room, consisting of a Curtained Doorway

to the Isolated Work Area and a Curtained Doorway to
the Shower Room.
b. A Shower Room, consisting of a Curtained Doorway to

the Equipment Room and a Curtained Doorway to an
uncontaminated area. Plastic on Shower Room and
adjoining Equipment and Clean Rooms shall be opaque.
The Shower Room shall contain at least one shower with
hot and cold or warm water. Careful attention shall be
paid to the shower enclosure to ensure against leaking
of any kind. Trap shower waste using filters having a
maximum pore size of 1.0 micron, and drain into a
sanitary sewer. Replace filter when they become
clogged. Ensure a supply of soap and disposable towels
at all times in the Shower Room.
2. Construction of an Equipment Decontamination Enclosure

System is optional.
a. A Washroom with an Air Lock to a designated staging

area of the Work Area and a Curtained Doorway to the
Holding Room.
b. A Holding Room with a Curtained Doorway to the

Washroom and a doorway to an uncontaminated area.
D. Decontamination Enclosure System for encapsulation of spray-

applied or trowel-applied materials:
1. Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System - Worker and

Equipment in accordance with Article 4.02.
E. Decontamination Enclosure System for nonfriable Asbestos-

Containing materials:
1. Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System - Worker and

Equipment in accordance with Article 4.02.
F. Movable Decontamination Enclosure Unit for ceiling panel removal

and ceiling debris removal:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. A Movable Decontamination Enclosure Unit shall be erected
for the ceiling panel removal and ceiling debris removal
work. The enclosure shall be of a scaffold frame type on
locked casters with six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting at
floor and all four sides, one side to serve as a Curtained
Doorway with a double-layer polyethylene sheeting.
Construction of enclosure to comply with EPA, OSHA and
local regulatory requirements. Install and operate negative
air equipment connected to or within the unit. Negative
pressure within the enclosure shall be sufficient to create
a high flow of air into me top of the enclosure.
a. Build suitable framing as described herein and as

approved by the Environmental Consultant at the shop
drawing submittal stage. Portable prefab units, If
utilized, must be submitted for review and approved by
the Environmental Consultant before start of
construction. Submittal shall Include, but not be
limited to, a floor plan layout complying with the
schematic layouts bound herein, showing dimension,
materials, size, thickness, plumbing, and electrical
outlets, etc.
4.3 DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
A. The Contractor shall assure that all employees, who work in areas
where exposure to Asbestos is expected, decontaminate whenever
exiting the work area and at the end of the work shift.
B. Decontaminating will consist of rinsing the whole body and

protective clothing with water from a water sprayer or portable
shower located in the two stage decontamination unit and then
disposing of the protective clothing.
C. All shower waste water will be filtered through a final stage 5

micron filter prior to disposal.
D. Disposable protective clothing shall be disposed of as Asbestos

waste every time the wearer exists from the work area.
4.4 REMOVAL PROCEDURES
A. Contractor shall utilize the OSHA (CFR 1926.1101), Cal/OSHA (8CCR

Sec. 5208) procedures for the removal of Asbestos-containing
materials.
B. Begin work by applying Ammended Water to Asbestos materials. The

Asbestos materials shall be sufficiently saturated without causing
excessive dripping. Spray materials repeatedly duringthe work
process to maintain a wet condition.
C. Asbestos materials shall be removed in manageable sections by a

multi-person team, some of whom are wetting and the remainder
removing and cleaning. Any material which falls to the floor shall
be wetted and picked up immediately. Material shall not be allowed
to dry out. Material drop shall not exceed 15 feet. For heights up
to 50 feet, provide inclined chutes or scaffolding to intercept
drop. For heights exceeding 50 feet , provide enclosed dust-proof
chutes. Before a second area can be started, removed material
24000 AVILA ROAD
shall be packed into approved and labeled packaging while It is
still wet. The outside of all containers shall be clean before
leaving the Work Area. Move containers to the Washroom (Shower
Room when Equipment Decontamination System is not required), wet-
clean each container thoroughly, and move to Holding Area pending
removal to uncontaminated areas.
D. Prevent build up of excess water and debris by regularly using a

HEPA vacuumed system to containerize debris and water.
E. Asbestos material debris, drippings, splatters, and overspray on

surfaces within accessible ceiling cavities and other accessible
areas shall be removed in the same manner and cleaned to the
degree as specified above.
F. The Work Area shall be kept orderly, clean and clear of work
materials, polyethylene sheeting, tape, cleaning material, and
clothing. and all other disposable material or items used in the
Work Area shall be packed into properly labeled protective
packaging and removed from the Work Area.
G. Protective packages and drums containing Asbestos materials shall

be cleaned and stored in the isolated Holding Area until that time
when the materials are to be loaded and hauled to the Hazardous
Waste Disposal Facility for burial. The packages and drums shall
be stored in piles no higher than four (4) feet, and in a manner
that will not result in damage to the packages or drums. Transport
bags in covered drums or carts from the Holding Area to the
transport.
H. Equipment removal procedures: Clean surfaces of contaminated

equipment thoroughly by wet-sponging or wiping before moving such
Items into the Washroom (Shower Room when Equipment
Decontamination System is not required) for final cleaning and
removal to uncontaminated areas. Ensure that personnel do not
leave Work Area through the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure.
I. Do not bag water used during abatement activities. Properly filter

and drain water into building sanitary drain unless prohibited by
local regulations. Filter shall have a maximum pore size of 1.0
micron.
J. Nonfriable Materials:
1. Resilient Floor Tile and Mastic (also applies to Resilient

Sheet Flooring)
a. Remove floor tile and mastic with wet methods and in a

manner that will not create debris. Mechanical equipment
or tools used with water are permissible providing that
friable debris will not be generated. Mechanical
equipment or tools used without the use of water will be
allowed only if they are the dustless type and if the
equipment has a self-contained bagging system and HEPA
filtration. Package floor tile and mastic in properly
labeled double six (6) mil lined containers or bags for
proper disposal according to applicable local, state and
federal rules & regulations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2 Transite Materials: Remove Transite materials with wet
methods and in a manner that will not create friable debris.
Do not use saws or other such mechanical equipment. Package
Transite materials in unlabeled double six (8) ml lined
containers or bags, or in accordance with the disposal
facilities requirements.
4.5 ENCAPSULATION OF ASBESTOS SPRAY-APPLIED OR TROWEL-APPLIED MATERIALS
A. Repair damaged and missing areas of existing spray-applied or

trowel-applied materials to obtain a suitable base for sealing and
to restore continuity of existing material. Use the specified
Asbestos-free replacement material. Prepare surfaces and apply
replacement material in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Remove damaged, loose, or hanging Asbestos material. Pack in

labeled, sealable plastic bags, six (6) mil minimum thickness, and
place in labeled containers for transport.
C. Seal filled containers. Clean external surfaces of containers

thoroughly by wet-sponging. Move containers to the Washroom
(Shower Room when Equipment Decontamination System is not
required). wet-clean each container thoroughly and move to Holding
Area pending removal to uncontaminated areas. Ensure that
containers are removed from the Holding Area Workers who have
entered from uncontaminated areas dressed In dean coveralls.
Ensure That Workers do not enter from uncontaminated areas into
the Washroom or the Work Area; ensure that contaminated Workers do
not exit the Work Area through the Equipment Decontamination
Enclosure System.
D. After proper preparation of the material, apply

bridging/penetrating type encapsulant to provide complete
encapsulation of the material (to substrate, if a penetrating type
encapsulant) in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
Apply encapsulant using airless spray equipment.
E. Consult with encapsulant manufacturer prior to proceeding with

Work.
F. Contractor shall be certified by the encapsulant manufacturer as

an approved applicator.
4.6 DECONTAMINATION OF WORK AREA
A. Decontaminated procedures for Contained Work Areas 1 excluding

Asbestos-Containing Material encapsulation work:
1. Remove all visible accumulations of Asbestos material and

debris. Wet-clean all surfaces within the Work Area to
remove Asbestos residue.
2. After cleaning, the Contractor shall perform a complete

visual Inspection of the Work Area to ensure that the Work
Area is free of any visible debris or residue.
3. Upon completion of his visual inspection. the Contractor

shall notify the Observation Service in advance that the
24000 AVILA ROAD
Work Area Is ready for Initial Review.
4. Upon proper notification, the observation Service will

review the Work Area for general conformance with the
Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work shall be
remedied by the Contractor until the Work Area is in
compliance, and at the Contractor's expense.
5. Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review by the

observation Service and after written notification, the
Contractor shall encapsulate surfaces where Asbestos
materials have been removed. Unless specified otherwise
encapsulate those portions of the items where the Asbestos-
Containing material was missing prior to the start of this
Contract. All surfaces within ceiling and other accessible
cavities where spray-applied or trowel-applied materials
have been removed shall also be encapsulated. Apply
encapsulant in sufficient amounts to render the affected
surface tacky to the touch. The encapsulant shall be
compatible with the existing substrate and replacement
materials and shall be rated to safely withstand the
temperature of the items to which ft will be applied.
Encapsulants to be applied to structural members prior to
reapplication of spray-applied or trowel-applied
fireproofing must be a component of the fireproofing system
when it was tested and rated by the Underwriters Laboratory
(UL), American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). Factory
Mutual (FM) or other building code approved testing agencies
6. Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work, me Contractor

shall notify the Environmental Consultant in advance that
the encapsulated surfaces are ready for Encapsulation
Review.
7. Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will

review the encapsulated surfaces for general conformance
with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work
shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is In
compliance and at the Contractor's expense.
8. Upon successful compliance with the Encapsulation Review by

the Environmental Consultant and after written notification 1
the Contractor shall remove the outer layer of plastic on
the walls, floors, and ceilings (where applicable). The
inner plastic layer and isolation barriers on vents,
grilles, diffusers, etc., shall remain In place.
9. Wet-clean the Work Area, wait twenty-four (24) hours to

allow for the settlement of dust, and again wet-clean, or
clean with HEPA vacuum equipment, all surfaces within the
Work Area. After completing of the second cleaning operation
the Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of
the Work Area to ensure that the Work Area Is tree of
contamination.
10. Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used in the Work
Area shall be included in the cleanup and shall be removed
from the Work Area via the Equipment Decontamination
Enclosure System at the appropriate time in the cleaning
24000 AVILA ROAD
sequence.
11. Upon completion of the second cleaning operation, the

Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-
four (24) hours in advance that the Work Area is ready for
Progress Review and Clearance Testing. Refer to appropriate
Article on Air Monitoring in this Section for Clearance
Testing standards. Contamination found during the Pre-
testing Review shall be remedied by the Contractor, at his
expense, prior to clearance testing.
12. Upon written notification from the Environmental Consultant

that the Work Area has passed the standard for Clearance
Testing, the Contractor shall apply, when included in the
Contract, the Asbestos-free replacement materials and
reestablish objects and systems as specified In these
specifications. The inner plastic layer and isolation
barriers may be removed by the Contractor at any time after
written notification.
13. Upon completion of the application of replacement materials,

or If no replacement materials are required, after the
removal of the inner plastic layer, isolation barriers and
the re-establishment of objects and systems the Contractor
shall notify the Environmental Consultant and/or Government
Representative twenty-four (24) hours In advance that the
Work Area is ready for Pre-final Review.
14. Upon notification 1 the observation Service and Government

Representative wilt review the Work Area. improper
application of replacement materials 1 unapproved damage to
the facility or Its contents or improper reestablishment of
objects and systems discovered during the Pre-final Review
shall be Itemized on a Punch List for correction by The
Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered
me Contractor this portion of the Contract shall be approved
In writing by the Observation Service and Government
Representative as complete. If deficiencies are noted
continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: It
deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government from
occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the
Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified
in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the
Government Representative Substantially Complete.
15. Upon correction of Punch List deficiencies, the Contractor

shall notify the Environmental Consultant and Government's
Representative in advance that the Work Area is ready for
Final Review.
16. Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and

Government Representative will review the corrected Punch
List deficiencies. If the deficiencies have been corrected
the Contract. or this portion of the Contract 1 shall be
approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant and
Government Representative as complete. If deficiencies have
not been properly corrected the Contractor shall repeat at
his expense procedures 15 and 16 until all deficiencies have
been corrected and approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do
24000 AVILA ROAD
not prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with
reconstruction work. the Contract or this portion of the
Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental
Consultant and the Government Representative Substantially
Complete.
B. Decontamination procedures for Isolated" Work Areas:
1. Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the

Work Area to ensure that the Work Area Is free of any
contamination.
2. If any evidence of Asbestos material or debris is

encountered, the Contractor shall remove the contaminants
and shall wet-clean all surfaces within the Work Area to
remove Asbestos residue.
3. Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used in the Work
Area shall be Included In the cleanup and shall be removed
from the Work Area at the appropriate time in the cleaning
sequence.
4. Upon completion of his visual inspection and any necessary

cleaning, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental
Consultant in advance that the Work Area is ready for
Initial Review.

6. Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review of the

Environmental Consultant and after written notification, the
Contractor shall encapsulate surfaces where Asbestos-
Containing Materials were removed. Unless specified
otherwise encapsulate those portions of the items where the
Asbestos-Containing Material was missing prior to the start
of this Contract. Apply encapsulant in sufficient amounts to
render the affected surface tacky to the touch. The
encapsulant shall be compatible with the existing substrate
and replacement materials and shall be rated to safely
withstand the temperatures of the surface to which it will
be applied. Do not encapsulate substrates from which
resilient flooring (tile or sheets), flooring mastic or
roofing materials have been removed. Encapsulants to be
applied to structural members prior to reapplication of
spray-applied or trowel-applied fireproofing must be a
component of the fireproofing system when It was tested and
rated by the Underwriters Laboratory (UL), American Society
for Testing Materials (ASIM), Factory Mutual (FM) or other
building code approved testing agencies.
7. Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work. the Contractor

shall notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24)
hours In advance that the encapsulated surfaces are ready
for Encapsulation Review and Clearance Testing.
24000 AVILA ROAD
shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is in
compliance and at the Contractors expense.
9. Upon successful compliance with, the Encapsulation Review of

the Environmental Consultant, the Work Area is ready for
Clearance Testing. Refer to the appropriate Article on Air
Monitoring in this Section for Clearance Testing standards.

Testing, the Contractor shall when included in the Contract,
apply Asbestos-free replacement materials and reestablish
objects and systems as specified in these Specifications.
The Isolation barriers may be removed by the Contractor at
any time after the written notification.
11. Upon completion of the application of replacement material,

or if no replacement materials are required, after the
removal of the isolation barriers and the re-establishment
of objects and systems, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and Government's Representative
twenty-four (24) hours in advance that the Work Area is
ready for Pre-final Review.

Government Representative will review the Work Area.
Improper application of replacement materials, unapproved
damage to the facility or its contents or improper re-
establishment of objects and systems discovered during the
Pro-final Review shall be itemized on a Punch List for
correction by the Contractor at his expense. If no
deficiencies are discovered the Contractor this portion of
the Contract shall be approved in writing by the
Environmental Consultant and Government Representative as
complete. If deficiencies are noted continue with the
subsequent procedures. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not
prevent the Government from occupancy or proceeding with
reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the
Contract shall be specified in writing by the Environmental
Consultant and the Government's Representative Substantially
Complete.
13. Upon correction of the Punch Lists deficiencies, the

Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and
Government Representative in advance that Work Area is ready
for Final Review.
14. Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and the

Government Representative will review the corrected Punch
List deficiencies. If alt deficiencies have been corrected
to the satisfaction of the Environmental Consultant and the
Government Representative, the Contract or this portion of
the Contract shall be approved in writing by the
Environmental Consultant and Government Representative as
completed. If deficiencies have not been property corrected
the Contractor shall repeat at his expense procedures 13 and
24000 AVILA ROAD
14 until all deficiencies have been corrected and approved.
NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Government
from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the
Government Representative Substantially Complete.
C. Decontamination procedures for encapsulation of spray-applied,

trowel-applied or other friable materials in a “Contained" Work
Area:
1. Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work, the Contractor

shall notify the Observation Service in advance that the
encapsulated surfaces are ready for Encapsulation Review.
2. Upon proper notification. the Environmental Consultant will

shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is In
3. Upon successful compliance with the Encapsulation Review by

the Environmental Consultant and after written notification,
the Contractor shall remove all visible accumulations of
Asbestos material debris, and wet-clean all surfaces within
the Work Area to remove any Asbestos residue.
4. After cleaning, the Contractor shall perform a complete

visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure that the Work
Area is free of any debris or residue.
5. Upon completion of his visual inspection, the Contractor

shall notify the Environmental Consultant in advance that
the Work Area is ready for initial Review.
6. Upon successful compliance with the Environmental Consultant

Initial Review and after written notification, the
Contractor shall remove the layer of plastic on the walls
and floors. The isolation barriers on vents 1 grilles,
diffuser, etc., shall remain in place.
7. After removal of the plastic covering, dean the Work Area,

vacuuming with HERA vacuum equipment all surfaces within the
Work Area. After the completion of the cleaning operation,
the Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of
the Work Area to ensure that it is free of contamination.
8. Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used In the Work
Area shall be included in the cleanup, and shall be removed
from the Work Area via the Equipment Decontamination
Enclosure at the appropriate time In the cleaning sequence.
9. Upon completion of the cleaning operation. the Contractor

shall notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24)
hours In advance that the Work Area is ready for review and
Clearance Testing. Refer to the appropriate Article on Air
Monitoring in this Section for Clearance Testing standards.
24000 AVILA ROAD
Testing, the Contractor shall remove the isolation barriers.
proceed with the re-establishment of objects and Systems and
when included In the Contract, apply Asbestos-free
replacement materials as specified in these Specifications.

or If no replacement materials are required, after the
removal of isolation barriers and the re-establishment of
objects and systems, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and Government's Representative
twenty-four (24) hours In advance that the Work Area is
ready for pre-final Review.

Government's Representative will review the Work Area.
Improper application of replacement materials or improper re-
establishment of objects and systems or unapproved damage to
the facility or is contents discovered during the Pre-final
Review shall be itemized on a Punch List for correction by
the Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are
discovered the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall
be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant and
Governments representative as complete. If deficiencies are
noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: If
occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work. the
In writing by the Environmental Consultant and the
Government's Representative Substantially Complete.
13. Upon correction of the Punch Listed deficiencies, the

Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and the
Government's Representative In advance that the Work Area is
ready for Final Review.
14. Upon notification the Environmental Consultant and the

Governments Representative will review the corrected Punch
List deficiencies. If all deficiencies have been corrected,
the Contract or this portion of the Contract. shall be
approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant and
Governments representative as complete. If deficiencies
have not been properly corrected, the Contractor shall
repeat, at his expense, procedures 13 and 14 until all
deficiencies have been corrected and approved. NOTE: If
D. Decontamination procedure for removal of nonfriable materials in

non-prepared Work Areas:
1. The Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of

the Work Area.
2. Asbestos debris encountered shall be removed.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Sealed drums and bags. and all equipment used in the Work
Area shall be included In the cleanup, and shall be removed
from the Work Area at the appropriate time in the cleaning
sequence.
4. Upon completion of his visual inspection and any necessary

cleaning, the Contractor shall notify the Environmental
Consultant that the Work Area is ready for Initial Review.

compliance, and at the Contractors expense.
6. Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review, the

Environmental Consultant shall conduct Clearance Testing.
7. Upon written notification from the Government's

Representative that the Work Area has passed the standard
for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall apply the
asbestos-free replacement materials, when included in the
contract, and re-establish objects and Systems as specified
in these Specifications.

or if no replacement materials are required, after the re-
establishment of objects and systems, the Contractor shall
notify the Environmental Consultant and the Governments
Representative within 24 hours, in advance, that the Work
Area is ready for Pre-final Review.

Governments Representative will review the Work Area.
Improper application of the replacement materials,
unapproved damage to the facility or Its contents or
Improper reestablishment of objects and systems shall be
itemized on a Punch List for correction by the Contractor at
his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered the Contract
or this portion of the Contract shall be approved in writing
by the Environmental Consultant as complete. If deficiencies
are noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: If
10. Upon correction of Punch List deficiencies the Contractor

shall notify the Environmental Consultant and Governments
Representative In advance that the Work Area is ready for
Final Review.

Governments Representative will review the corrected Punch
List deficiencies. If all deficiencies have been corrected.
the Contract or this portion of the Contract. shall be
approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant as
complete. If deficiencies have not been properly corrected,
24000 AVILA ROAD
the Contractor shall repeat, at his expense, procedures 10
and 11 until all deficiencies have been corrected and
approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the
Government from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction
work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be
specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the
Governments Representative Substantially Complete.
4.7 DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE
A. Asbestos waste materials shall be packed into approved labeled

protective packaging. The Contractor shall be responsible for
proper handling and disposal of the waste at an Government-
approved facility in accordance with EPA guidelines.
B. Hazardous Waste Transportation: Contractor shall submit to the

Government, for approval, the name, address, telephone number and
the EPA I.D. number of the waste transporter to be utilized for
this project.
C. Waste Disposal Facility: Contractor shall submit to the

Government, for approval, the name, class, address, telephone
number and the EPA I.D. number of the waste disposal facility to
be utilized for this project.
D. Contractor shall notify the Government at least 48 hours in

advance of the time when contaminated waste is to be removed from
the site.
E. Contractor shall hold the Government harmless for claims, damages,

losses, and expenses against the Government, including attorney’s
fees arising from asbestos spills on the site or en route to the
disposal site.
4.8 BUILDING CONTAMINATION
A. If it is determined by visual identification or air samples that

building contamination has occurred as a result of the negligence
and/or poor work practices of the Contractor, the Contractor
agrees to clean the affected premises at no charge to the
Government. The Contractor also agrees to accept all liability
for damages claimed or lawsuits brought by person(s) exposed to
such contamination.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the

Government and Consultant should other portions of the building
become contaminated with Asbestos as a result of the Contractors
poor work practices or other activities.
4.9 AIR MONITORING AND TESTING
A. Area Air Monitoring:
1. Throughout removal.encapsulation.and cleaning operations,

Area Air Monitoring shall be conducted by the Consultant to
ensure that the Contractor's engineering controls and work
practices are minimizing worker and public exposures to
airborne asbestos fibers. in accordance with applicable
codes, regulations. and ordinances Fiber counting shall be
24000 AVILA ROAD
done by the PCM Method No.7400 established by NIOSH, with
the following as minimum samplings recommended by the EPA:
2. The Consultant shall report the Area Air Monitoring results

to the Contractor on the following day If Area Air
Monitoring results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall
make changes in his engineering controls and work practices
to assure compliance with the following standards.
Unsatisfactory results are fiber counts within the Work Area
in excess of the Maximum Acceptable Level (0.1 fibers/cc) or
fiber counts outside the Work Area in excess of the
Benchmark
B. Personal Air Monitoring:
1. Initial and periodic 8 hour TWA and 30 minute excursion

limit air monitoring of Worker exposures to airborne
concentrations of Asbestos fibers shall be in accordance
with OSHA (CFR 1926.58) requirements.
2. Once OSHA sampling requirements are satisfied the Contractor

shall conduct, as a requirement of this Contract, not less
than one (1) personal air sample, twice per calendar week,
to determine 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA) exposures
and thirty (30) minute Excursion Limit exposures of workers
operating in each Work Area. Samples shall be collected
within the Workers' breathing zones. Samples shall be taken
for each ten (10) workers from the time preparation work is
started until the Work Area has passed Clearance Testing.
NOTE: Contract required personal sampling is not necessary
while the Contractor is conducting OSHA required sampling or
when Type C Respirators are in use.
3. The Contractor shall report Personal Monitoring results to

the Observation Service within 48 hours from the end of the
work shift. Worker exposures to airborne Asbestos
concentrations shall not exceed the Permissible Exposure
Limit (PEL) of a-hour time-weighted average (TWA} of 0.1
fibers (longer than 5 micrometers) per cubic centimeter of
air, or the 1f/cc 30 minute period Excursion Limit.
C. Clearance Testing:
1. Contained Work Areas: The Contractor should not be released

until final inspection and air testing are performed by the
Consultant using AHERA protocol (“Aggressive Sampling").
2. Isolated and Nonprepared Work Area: The Consultant shall

take a minimum of one (1) non-aggressive air sample of 3,000
liters, upon completion of each Work Area. The "Clearance"
sample will be analyzed by PCM Method No. 7400 and
determined "clean” before removal of isolation material from
the Work Area.
a. If the tests show that the Work Area has not been
decontaminated, the Contractor shall repeat the
cleaning and/or encapsulation application until the
Work Area is in compliance. For the purpose of this
Project, decontamination for clearance testing by PCM
24000 AVILA ROAD
Method No.7400 shall be defined as air samples showing
less than 0.01 fibers/cc. If the tests show that the
Work Area has not been decontaminated, the Contractor
shall repeat the cleaning and/or encapsulation
application until the Work Area is in compliance.
3. Clearance criteria for Transmission Electron Microscopy

(TEM) Analysis Method: Less than or equal to 70 structures
per square millimeter (mm2).
4. Clearance criteria for Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM)

Analysis Method: Less than or equal to 0.01 fibers per cubic
centimeter (f/cc).
NOTE: In The event that Clearance Testing by the Consultant

fails to meet the Clearance Criteria set forth in
these Specifications (i.e., not pass), the Contractor
shall be responsible for all additional time,
additional tests and project related expenses incurred
by the Government and Consultant.
4.10 STOPPING THE WORK
A. If, at any time, the Consultant decides that Work Practices are
violating pertinent regulations, these Specifications or, in his
opinion, endangering Workers or the public, he will immediately
notify the Contractor (followed up in writing) that operations
shall cease until corrective action is taken. and the Contractor
shall take such corrective action before proceeding with the Work.
Loss or Damages due to a Stop Work Order shall be borne by the
Contractor.
4.11 REPAIR AND PAINTING
A. Contractor shall leave all finished surfaces and other items in

Work Areas in the condition in which they were prior to the
commencement of the Project. Damage to finishes and other items
as the result of Work under this Contract shall be repaired or
replaced, painted or cleaned to the satisfaction of the
Government's Representative. Delays due to repair Work are not
cause for extension of the deadline for the completion of the
Project. Painting shall be in accordance with the requirements
set forth by the Project Manual. Repairs shall be in accordance
with standard construction methods for the item(s) in need of
repair. Submit for approval all repair materials and methods.
All costs for cleaning, painting, and repair as the result of the
Contractor's or his Subcontractors' activities shall be borne by
the Contractor.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 02 84 18
HANDLING OF HAZARDOUS LAMPS AND SIMILAR MATERIALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Perform removal and disposal of hazardous lamps, PCB containing

lighting ballasts light bulbs, exit signs, and associated
mercury-containing lamps. Contractor may encounter leaking PCB
ballasts.
B. Contractor to include in the bid sum all costs associated with

the removal and disposal of low radioactive Exit Signs and any
non-T-8 ballasts and fluorescent tubes. Bid price shall include
preparation of profile, chemist on premises, coordination of
paperwork with GSA, all packaging materials as required, packing,
loading, transportation, unloading and disposal. Broken
fluorescent tubes to be transported and disposed as waste mercury
as per CFR 49 regulations.
C. Coordinate with related work specified in Section 01 31 20 and

Section 02 41 13.
1.2 REFERENCES
A STATE OF CALIFORNIA CODE OF CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS (COCAL)
COCAL.............(2003) Subchapter 7, Group 16, Control of

Hazardous Substances.
B U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29CFR 1910.1000...Air Contaminants
40 CFR 260........Hazardous Waste Management System: General
40 CFR 261........Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 262........Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous

Waste
40 CFR 263........Standards Applicable to Transporters of

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264........Standards for Owners and Operators of Hazardous

Waste Treatment, Storage, and Disposal
Facilities
40 CFR 265........Interim Status Standards for Owners and

Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,
Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 268........Land Disposal Restrictions
24000 AVILA ROAD
40 CFR 270........EPA Administered Permit Programs: The

Hazardous Waste Permit Program
40 CFR 273........Standards For Universal Waste Management
40 CFR 761........Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) Manufacturing,

Processing, Distribution in Commerce, and Use
Prohibitions
49 CFR 178........Specifications for Packagings
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a hazardous materials disposal plan.
B. Closeout: Submit transporter certification of notification to EPA

of their PCB waste activities and EPA ID numbers.
1.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Submit a hazardous materials and lamp Disposal Plan with 45

calendar days after award of contract. The PCB and Lamp Disposal
Plan shall comply with applicable requirements of COSF, federal,
state, and local PCB and Universal waste regulations and address
the following issues:
1. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated, disposed

of, and recycled.
2. Names and qualifications of each Contractor that will be

transporting, storing, treating, and disposing of the
wastes. Include the facility location. Furnish two copies
of EPA and state PCB and mercury-containing lamp waste
permit applications and EPA identification numbers.
3. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of

personnel who will be working on-site with PCB and mercury-
containing lamp wastes.
4. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency

measures to be implemented.
5. Work plan and schedule for PCB and mercury-containing lamp

waste removal, containment, storage, transportation,
disposal and or recycling. Wastes shall be cleaned up and
containerize daily.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORK PROCEDURE
A. Furnish labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary for

the removal of hazardous materials, PCB containing lighting
24000 AVILA ROAD
ballasts, associated mercury-containing fluorescent lamps, and
high intensity discharge (HID) lamps in accordance with local,
state, or federal regulations. Do not expose PCBs to open flames
or other high temperature sources since toxic decomposition by-
products may be produced. Do not break mercury containing
fluorescent lamps or high intensity discharge lamps.
B. Ensure that work operations or processes involving PCB or PCB-

contaminated materials are conducted in accordance with 40 CFR
761, 40 CFR 262 40 CFR 263, and the applicable requirements of
this section, including but not limited to:
1. Obtaining suitable PCB and mercury-containing lamp storage

sites.
2. Notifying the Government prior to commencing the operation.
3. Reporting leaks and spills to the Government.
4. Cleaning up spills.
5. Inspecting PCB and PCB-contaminated items and waste

containers for leaks and forwarding copies of inspection
reports to the Government.
6. Maintaining inspection, inventory and spill records.
3.2 REMOVAL
A. As ballast are removed from the lighting fixture, inspect label

on ballast. Ballasts without a "No PCB" label shall be assumed to
contain PCBs and containerized and disposed of as required. "No
PCB" labeled lighting ballasts shall be dispose of as required by
COSF as normal demolition debris.
1. If the ballasts do not contain Di2-ethylhexylphthalate

(DEHP), dispose of them as normal construction debris. If
they do contain DEHP, dispose of them as hazardous material
in accordance with Federal, State, and COSF regulations.
2. As a basis of bid assume ballasts with "No PCB" labels do

not contain DEHP and may disposed of as normal construction
debris. If 1600 or more DEHP ballasts are disposed of in a
24 hour period, notify the National Response Team at 800-
424-8802.
B. Remove lighting tubes and lamps from the lighting fixture and
carefully place (unbroken) into appropriate containers (original
transport boxes or equivalent). In the event of a lighting tube
or lamp breaking, sweep and place waste in double plastic taped
bags and dispose of as universal waste as specified herein.
3.3 STORAGE FOR DISPOSAL
A. Conform to 49 CFR 178. Store PCB in containers approved by DOT

for PCB.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Store mercury containing lamps in appropriate DOT containers.

The boxes shall be stored and labeled for transport in accordance
with 40 CFR 273.
C. Label with the following:
1. Date the item was placed in storage and the name of the
cognizant activity/building.
2. "Caution Contains PCB," conforming to 40 CFR 761, CFR

Subpart C. Affix labels to PCB waste containers.
3. Label mercury-containing lamp waste in accordance with 40

CFR 273. Affix labels to all lighting waste containers.
3.4 DISPOSAL
A. Dispose of hazardous substances off Government property in

accordance with EPA, DOT, and local regulations at a permitted
site.
B. Federal regulations 40 CFR 761, and 40 CFR 263 require that

generators, transporters, commercial storers, and disposers of
PCB waste posses U.S. EPA identification numbers. The contractor
shall verify that the activity has a U.S. EPA generator
identification number for use on the Uniform Hazardous Waste
manifest. If not, the contractor shall advise the activity that
it must file and obtain an I.D. number with EPA prior to
commencement of removal work. For mercury containing lamp
removal, Federal regulations 40 CFR 273 require that large
quantity handlers of Universal waste (LQHUW) must provide
notification of universal waste management to the appropriate EPA
Region (or state director in authorized states), obtain an EPA
identification number, and retain for three years records of off-
site shipments of universal waste. The contractor shall verify
that the activity has a U.S. EPA generator identification number
for use on the Universal Waste manifest. If not, the contractor
shall advise the activity that it must file and obtain an I.D.
number with EPA prior to commencement of removal work.
C. Comply with disposal and transportation requirements outlined in

40 CFR 761 and 40 CFR 263. Before transporting the PCB waste,
sign and date the manifest acknowledging acceptance of the PCB
waste from the Government. Return a signed copy to the
Government before leaving the job site. Ensure that the manifest
accompanies the PCB waste at all times. Submit transporter
certification of notification to EPA of their PCB waste
activities (EPA Form 7710-53).
3.5 CERTIFICATE OF DISPOSAL OR RECYCLING
A. Conform to 40 CFR 761. Certificate for the PCBs and PCB items
disposed shall include:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. The identity of the disposal and or recycling facility, by
name, address, and EPA identification number.
a. Contractor shall coordinate with GSA for EPA number.
2. The identity of the PCB waste affected by the Certificate

of Disposal including reference to the manifest number for
the shipment.
3. A statement certifying the fact of disposal and or

recycling of the identified PCB waste, including the
date(s) of disposal, and identifying the disposal process
used.
4. A certification as defined in 40 CFR 761.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 03 53 73
CONCRETE INFILL OF PENETRATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install concrete infill of penetrations in existing

concrete walls and floors as indicated on the drawings and
specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit descriptive information for each type of

product indicated. Include material descriptions, chemical
composition, physical properties, test data, and mixing,
preparation, and application instructions.
B. Samples: Submit cured samples of overlay and patching materials.
C. Infill Program: Submit descriptions for each phase of the

concrete infill process, including protection of surrounding
materials and Project site during operations. Describe in detail
materials, methods, equipment, and sequence of operations to be
used for each phase of the Work.
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer that employs

workers trained and approved by manufacturer to apply concrete
patching and rebuilding materials.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site

to discuss the concrete infill program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE INFILL OF PENETRATIONS
A. Epoxy-Modified, Cementitious Bonding and Anticorrosion Agent: To

ensure positive bonding, provide products that consists of water-
insensitive epoxy adhesive, portland cement, and water-based
solution of corrosion-inhibiting chemicals that forms a
protective film on steel reinforcement, and manufactured by one
of the following (or equal).
1. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Corr-Bond.

2. Sika Corporation; Armatec 110 EpoCem.
3. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Sonoprep.
4. Tamms Industries, Inc.; Duralprep A.C.
B. Job-Mixed Patching Mortar: Provide 1 part portland cement

complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or III and 2-1/2 parts
24000 AVILA ROAD
fine aggregate complying with ASTM C 144, except 100 percent
passing a No. 16 sieve.
C. Epoxy Joint Filler: Provide 2-component, semirigid, 100 percent

solids, epoxy resin with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of at
least 80 per ASTM D 2240, as follows (or equal):
1. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; Groove & Crack Filler No. 250.
2. ChemCo Systems; CCS Grout, Control Joint or Control Joint - HB.
3. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco 700 or 800.
4. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Masterfill 300i.
5. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Rezi-Weld Flex.
6. Sika Corporation; Sikadur 51 NS or Sikadur 51 SL.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Accomplish infill work according to the approved program. Comply

with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for
application of products, including surface preparation.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install all shop fabricated metal components,

including metal fastenings and support structures.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of

Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal

fabrications, including paint products.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal

fabrication indicated. Include sections, and details of metal
fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory
items. Provide templates for anchors or bolts specified for
installation under other sections.
1.3 FABRICATORS QUALIFICATIONS
A. The Fabricators shall be firms experienced in successfully

producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this
Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required
units without causing delay in the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion

of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface
flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not
use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel
sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by
reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
2.2 TAMPER PROOF FASTENERS
A. Provide tamperproof fasteners in security areas and elsewhere

indicated on the drawings, or specified, including the following:
1. Removable and non-removable tamper-proof metal fasteners.
2. Thread adhesive.
3. Tools for installation and removal.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Tamper-proof Fasteners: Corrosion resistant, hardened, high-
strength, plated or stainless steel metal fasteners of size and
type best suited for intended application, having head design
requiring special tool of controlled availability for removal.
Submit the proposed fastener to the Contracting Officer for
approval prior to use.
C. Non-Removable screws shall be as follows:
1. Twist-off head type, dressed smooth.
2. Allen or similar recessed drive type, drilled to remove

drive surfaces, filled with body putty.
D. Removable screws shall be one of, but not limited to the

following products, or equal:
1. McGard "Intimidator" fasteners including, but not limited,

to screws, bolts, and nuts.
2. Avdel "Avsafe" fasteners.
3. Pinned "Allen" or "Torx" head socket fasteners.
4. Spanner head screws are not acceptable for use as removable

screws.
E. Tools: Provide 10 complete sets of manual drive tools required

for installation and removal of removable tamper-proof fasteners.
Package each set in an individual kit and deliver to Contracting
Officer.
F. Screw-thread Adhesive Sealant: Loctite No. 271 or equal.
2.3 NON-TAMPER PROOF FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where

built into exterior walls. Select fasteners that are suitable
for the application involved, and from among the following
types, grades, and classes:
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
E. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
F. Drilled-In Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors complying with

FS FF-S-325, Group VIII (anchors, expansion, nondrilling), Type I
(internally threaded tubular expansion anchor); and machine bolts
complying with FS FF-B-575, Grade 5.
24000 AVILA ROAD
G. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class, and
style as required.
H. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
2.4 SHOP PRIMER
A. Provide the manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast-curing,

lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for good
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility
with finish paint systems indicated, and subject to the approval
of the Contracting Officer.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and

shapes indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on
shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support.
Use type of materials indicated or specified for various
components of each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges.
C. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
D. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless

otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing
the work.
E. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
F. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS

recommendations and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and

develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces

smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after
finishing and contour of welded surface matches those
adjacent.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth,

using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed
fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-
head screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
24000 AVILA ROAD
H. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with
supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to
provide proper support for intended use.
I. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent

practicable to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
J. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as

indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
2.6 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS
A. Conform to ASTM B209 for sheet plate, ASTM B221 for extrusions
and ASTM B26 or ASTM B108 for castings, as applicable.
B. Provide aluminum extrusions at least 1/8-inch thick and aluminum

plate or sheet at least 0.050-inch thick.
C. Provide pre-finished aluminum angles at exposed wood corners.

Angles shall be single length pieces, without splices.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices

and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal
fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners
for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts,
lag bolts, machine screws, and other connectors as required.
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation

of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from
established lines and levels.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline

joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed
joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of
exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field
connections.
D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual

shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made,
methods used in correcting welding work.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.2 TOUCH UP PAINTING
A. After installation, touch-up paint field welds, bolted

connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous
metal. Use the same primer that was used in the shop.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 05 70 08
ALUMINUM INSET MOLDINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install aluminum inset moldings as indicated on the

drawings and specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings. Show details of

fabrication and installation. Indicate materials, finishes,
fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
C. Samples: Submit samples for the exposed finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM INSERT MOLDINGS
A. Insert moldings may be the product of a local fabricator that is

acceptable to the Contracting Officer; or subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Daniel Industrial Metals, Inc.

2. KDI Paragon, Inc.
3. P & P Artec.
4. Rippel Architectural Metals, Inc.
B. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

finisher for finish indicated, and not less than the strength and
durability of alloy and temper required by ASTM B221.
C. Fasteners: Same basic metal as fastened metal; concealed, unless

otherwise indicated, with Phillips flat-head screws for exposed
fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Finishes shall be anodized (clear or color), baked enamel, or

high performance organic finish as selected by the Contracting
Officer. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for
Architectural and Metal Products."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for

securing to in-place construction. Perform drilling, and fitting
required to install insert moldings. Set products accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation.
SECTION 05 70 08 Page 1
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 06 05 74
FIRE-RETARDANT PLYWOOD BACK PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install fire-retardant plywood back panels as

indicated on the drawings and specified.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AWPA C27 - Plywood - Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
B. PS 1 - "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial

Plywood."
C. PS 20 - 1970 American Softwood Lumber Standard
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for

handling, storing, installation and of fire retardant treated
material. Include certification by treating plant that treated
material complies with AWPA C27.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Comply with PS 1 "U.S Product Standard for Construction and

Industrial Plywood" for plywood panels.
B. For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire-

retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA C-D
PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, (or better) in thickness
indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than
[15/32][23/32] inch.
C. Treat plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA

C27, type A, with appropriate classification marking of
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Paint panels on the back side before installation using a good

grade house paint. Install panels securely affixed to the
structure. Use nails, toggle bolts, drilled-in anchors, or other
fastening device that is appropriate for the mounting surface.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 06 06 20
FINISH CARPENTRY AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish and install finish carpentry and trim as indicated on the

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade,

mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from
surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill
certificate that material has been inspected and graded in
accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a
concealed surface. Submit Samples for Approval with
Identification.
B. Fire-Retardant Marking: Mark each unit of fire-retardant treated

lumber and plywood with classification marking of Underwriters
Laboratory, Inc., or other testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Place marking on
surfaces, which will not be exposed after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCT QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Softwood Lumber Standards: Comply with PS 20 and with applicable

grading rules of the respective grading and inspecting agency.
Provide the species and product indicated on the drawings.
B. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 1/ANSI A199.I.
C. Hardwood Lumber Standard: Comply with National Hardwood Lumber

Association (NHLA) rules.
D. Hardwood Plywood Standard: Comply with PS 51.
E. Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific product

comply with specified provision of the following:
1. Woodwork Institute (WI) "Manual of Millwork." Formerly WIC-

Woodwork Institute of California.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide the species indicated on the drawings, or when

not so indicated, match the existing materials as closely as
practicable. Particle board is not acceptable.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed
dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and dressed lumber,
as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required
by PS 20 or to actual sizes as shown, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried

(KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of
manufacture until time of installation not greater than
values required by the applicable grading rules of the
respective grading and inspecting agency for the species
and product indicated.
3. Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried

(KD) lumber having a moisture content from time of
manufacture until time of installation within the ranges
required in the referenced woodworking standard.
B. Wood species and finish shall be as indicated on the drawings and

specified. Submit sample for approval.
C. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other

anchoring devised of the type, size, material, and finish
required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible, and complying with applicable Federal
Specifications.
2.3 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Where wood is indicated on the

drawings, provide materials complying with applicable standards
for pressure impregnation with fire-retardant chemicals and in
compliance with local building code.
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials with

surface burning characteristics not exceeding those
indicated below when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 for
not less than standard time period (10 minutes).
a. Flame Spread: 25.
b. Products: Subject to compliance with specified

requirements, provide one of the following:
1) "Dricon"; Koppers Company, Inc.
2) "Flameproof LHC"; Osmose Wood Preserving Co. Inc.
3) "Protex"; Hoover Universal Wood Preserving

Division.
2. Kiln-dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content

of 15% after treatment.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install the work plumb, level, true and straight with no

distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims.
B. Install carpentry to a tolerance of 1/8" (3.17mm) in 8'-0"

(2,438.4mm) for plumb and level countertops; and with 1/16"
(1.59mm) maximum offset in flush adjoining 1/8" (3.17mm) maximum
offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 06 40 23
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install all interior architectural woodwork indicated

on the drawings and specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. Product data and samples for each type of product and process
specified in this section and sample and incorporated into items
of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and
installation.
C. Fire-retardant treatment data for material impregnated by

pressure process to reduce combustibility. Include certification
by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements. Provide fire test response characteristics and
ratings information from plastic laminate Manufacturers.
D. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans

and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and
other components.
1. Apply Woodwork Institute (WI), formerly WIC - Woodwork

Institute of California, Certified Compliance Label to
first page of shop drawings.
E. Samples for verification or selection purposes of the following:
1. Submit plastic laminate samples for selection.
2. Submit a quantity of 4 samples for each item.
F. Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying

that products comply with specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Architectural woodwork shall comply with the "Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards," Guide Specifications and Quality
Certification Program, PREMIUM GRADE.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Single-Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility:
When practicable engage a qualified Manufacturer to assume
undivided responsibility for woodwork specified in this section,
including fabrication, finishing, and installation.
C. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved scheduled

for finish hardware to manufacturer of architectural woodwork;
coordinate shop drawings and fabrication with finish hardware
requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling

to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and

similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork
must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in
areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified
in "Project Conditions."
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork

Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum
temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its
storage and installation.
1. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been

attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or
minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of
installation through remainder of construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to

other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction
by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork;
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay
of Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying

the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with manufacture
of woodwork without field measurements.
2. Coordinate other construction to ensure that actual

dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that match the existing materials as

closely as practicable, and comply with requirements of the WI
24000 AVILA ROAD
woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and WI quality
grade indicated.
1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4
2. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
3. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1
5. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
a. Formaldehyde Emission Levels: Comply with

formaldehyde emission requirements of each voluntary
standard referenced
b. Medium Density Fiberboard: NPA 9.
c. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA FE.
2.2 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to approval by the Contracting Officer,

the laminate manufacturer and pattern shall be as specified in
the finish schedule of the architectural drawings.
2.3 LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK)
A. Quality Standard: Comply with WI Casework, Premium Grade,

Frameless Style A, Type I multiple self supporting units rigidly
joined together.
B. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.
C. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate shall match

the samples selected by the Architect.
2.4 LAMINATED PLASTIC COUNTERTOPS
A. Comply with WI - "Laminated Plastic Countertops, Splashes and

Wall Paneling," Premium Grade, colors and patterns matching the
samples approved by the Architect. Edge treatments shall be the
same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
2.5 PLASTIC LAMINATE FACED ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
A. Provide shelving made from one of the following materials, 3/4

inch thick. Do not use particleboard or MDF that contains urea
formaldehyde. Plastic laminate shall be as selected by the
Architect.
1. Particleboard with radiused and filled or solid-wood front

edge.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. MDF with radiused or solid-wood front edge.
3. MDO softwood plywood with solid-wood edge.
B. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102;

powder-coat finished steel or brass-finished steel.
C. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112 powder-coat

finished steel or brass finished steel.
D. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071;

powder-coat finished or brass-finished steel.
E. Adjustable Shelf Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04081 or B04091;

powder-coat finished or brass-finished steel.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced

quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to
relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication
and in installation areas.
B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details

indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Corners of edges of solid wood (lumber) members less than 1

inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch (1.59mm).
2. Edges of rails and similar members more than 1 inch in

nominal thickness: 1/8 inch (3.17mm).
C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware

application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent
possible.
D. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and

installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample
allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E. Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive

hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and
similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped
openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in
countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a
water-resistant coating.
2.7 FINISH HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide finish hardware and accessory materials

associated with architectural millwork as indicated on the
drawings.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Hardware Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.9 "American
National Standard for Cabinet Hardware" for items indicated by
reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard.
C. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish

that matches the existing finishes and complies with ANSI/BHMA
A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
D. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that

complies with product class requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
2.8 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for

each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended

by metal framing manufacturer.
B. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each
use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by

each substrate for secure anchorage.
1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and

inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as
required for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for

drilled-in-place anchors.
3. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into

concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.
2.9 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 1500, Premium Grade,

as approved by the Contracting Officer.
B. Woodwork shall be factory finished to the maximum practicable

extent. However regardless of whether factory applied or applied
after installation, the same requirements specified herein apply.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in

installation areas before installing.
B. Deliver metal inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into

substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated
work for completion and complete work as required, including back
priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with WI Premium Grade.
B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no

distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to
a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including
tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut
surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly

attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and
blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing
as required for a complete installation.
1. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are

required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching
final finish where transparent finish is indicated.
E. Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible,

using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber
available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in
adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at
corners.
3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate

defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair,
replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up

factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner

acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that
woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work specified in this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install firestopping as indicated on the drawings and

specified.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fireproofing Materials: Designed as a complete system to retard

the passage of heat and smoke for intended application.
B. System: Approved system as prescribed in California State Fire

Marshal standard 43-1.
A. Applicator: Company approved by manufacturer.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation

and installation instructions.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed

specified requirements.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Follow manufacturer's instructions for temperature, ventilation,

and other conditions for mixing and installing foam seals.
B. Follow manufacturer's precautions when using materials considered

toxic or otherwise hazardous.
C. Do Not Install Firestopping Until:
1. Spray applied fireproofing Work has been completed,

including repairs thereof.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Building is sufficiently enclosed or protected against

adverse weather conditions.
3. Supporting framing and surrounding construction is

thoroughly dry.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence work to permit firestopping materials to be installed

after adjacent and surrounding work is complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Firestopping:
1. Materials shall be listed in UL Building Materials

Directory.
2. When tested in accordance with ASTM E119 and E84, flame-

spread and smoke developed ratings shall not exceed 25.
B. Form materials to remain in place in the completed Work and

sealant used for firestopping Work shall be UL listed.
2.2 MINERAL-FIBER FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturer and Type: Semi-rigid mineral-fiber insulation;

minimum 4 pcf density.
1. U.S. Gypsum "Thermafiber Safing".
2. Manville "Pyro-Fiber".
3. Tremco "Cerablanket FS"
B. Support Clips: Custom design and fabricated from galvanized

sheet steel and as recommended by the firestopping manufacturer.
2.3 FOAM FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturer and Type: Two-component silicone elastomer.
1. Chase Technology Corp. "CTC PR-355 Chase-Foam"
2. Dow Corning Corp. "3-6548 Silicone RTV Foam"
3. General Electric Co. "Pensil 851 Silicone Foam Penetration

Sealant."
4. Products Research & Chemical Corp., Semco Div. "PR-855

Firestop Sealant."
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Accessories:
1. Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other

type recommended by foam manufacturer.
2. Primer, Sealant, and Solvent Cleaner: As recommended by

foam manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect openings and voids to be sealed to determine if

conditions are satisfactory for the proper installation of
firestopping.
B. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not commence Work until

such conditions have been corrected. Beginning application
indicates acceptance of conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose

material, and other matter which may adversely affect products or
performance.
B. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
C. Where firestopping is installed at locations which will remain

exposed in the completed Work, provide protection as necessary to
prevent damage to adjacent surfaces and finishes, and protect
firestopping as necessary against damage from other construction
activities.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare and install firestopping in accordance with the

manufacturer's printed instructions applicable to Project
conditions.
B. Mineral Fiber Firestopping:
1. Provide in units of sufficient thickness to allow

compression for a tight friction fit when installed.
2. Provide in units of width sufficient to fill the depth of

the void space using single width pieces only.
3. Install units with ends tight against terminal end

construction, and with intermediate joints well compressed
together and tight.
4. For vertical void spaces, provide support clips near each

and of each mineral-fiber unit, spaced at not over 24
inches (609.6mm) on centers.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Foam Firestopping:
1. Provide form materials as necessary to retain foam when

placed.
2. Prime contact surfaces when required by foam manufacturer.
3. Inject foam into void spaces with sufficient care and

attention to assure that foam develops full and complete
contact with adjoining surfaces, and that space is filled
free from air pockets.
4. Cure foam 24 hours, remove form materials not required to

remain, and inspect foam in place.
5. Provide additional foam or sealant as necessary to fill

insufficient depth of foam and remaining voids.
D. Electrical Cables for Conduits: Firestopping at penetrations of

electrical cables of conduits shall also comply with the
requirements of NFPA No. 70.
E. Finish surfaces of firestopping which is to remain exposed in the

completed Work to a uniform and level condition.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping

without damaging adjacent surfaces.
B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of

spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not

firestopping is indicated, and if indicated, whether such
material is designated as insulation, safing, or otherwise.
B. Insulation types specified in other Sections shall not be

installed in lieu of firestopping materials specified herein.
C. Interior Walls and Partitions:
1. Where a wall or partition is continuous past a structural

floor, such as at vertical shafts, and a space would
otherwise remain open between the wall face and perimeter
edge of the adjoining structural floor, provide
firestopping to completely fill such space for the full
depth of the structural floor, exclusive of supporting
girders or beams.
2. Provide firestopping whether or not there are clips,

angles, plates, or other members bridging or
24000 AVILA ROAD
interconnecting the wall and floor systems, and whether or
not such items are continuous.
3. Where the top edge of a fire-rated wall or partition abuts

and is at right angles to fluted-type metal decking, and
the construction is such that would otherwise leave the
flute spaces open, provide firestopping to completely fill
such open flute spaces for the full depth or width of the
wall or partition.
D. Penetrations:
1. Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct, or

other elements which pass through one or both outer
surfaces of a floor roof, wall, or partition.
2. Except for floors on grade, where a penetration occurs

through a structural floor or roof and a space would
otherwise remain open between the surfaces of the
penetration and the edge of the adjoining structural floor
or roof, provide firestopping to completely fill such
spaces, and for the full depth of the structural floor or
roof.
3. Where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions

of solid-type construction requiring protected openings,
provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around the
penetration, and for the full depth of the wall or
partition.
4. Where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions

of hollow-type construction requiring protected openings,
provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around the
penetration, on each side of the wall or partition, and for
a depth not less than the thickness of the wall or
partition finish materials.
5. These requirements for penetrations shall apply whether or

not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not
penetrations are to be equipped with escutcheons or other
trim.
E. Provide firestopping to fill miscellaneous voids and openings in

fire-rated construction.
F. To ensure proper installation, firestopped areas shall not be

covered or enclosed until inspection is complete and approval has
been received.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 07 92 10
SEALANTS AND CAULKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and apply sealants and caulking as indicated on the

A. Reference Standards:
1. All materials specified herein shall conform to the

requirements of the publications hereinafter listed, to the
extent that the requirements therein specified are not in
conflict with the provisions of this Section.
2. References to "ANSI" shall mean the American National

Standards Institute Publication A116.1-1967 "Two Component
Elastomeric Sealing Components for the Building Trade".
B. Qualifications of Manufacturers: Products used in the work of

this Section shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged
in the manufacture of similar items and with a history of
successful production acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Comply with provisions of Section 01 33 00.
1. Submit within 45 days after award of Contract:
a. A complete materials list showing all items specified

to be furnished and installed under this Section.
b. Sufficient data to demonstrate that all materials

meet or exceed the specified requirements.
c. Installation instructions and recommendations from

manufacturer showing procedures under which it is
proposed that materials will be installed.
d. Upon approval by the Contracting Officer, the

proposed installation procedures will become the
basis for inspection and acceptance or rejection of
actual installation procedures used on the work.
B. Samples: Submit separate samples for each type of sealant

material, together with manufacturer's data, all as necessary to
fully demonstrate functional and service ability characteristics
that comply with the specified requirements. Obtain approval
prior to delivery of materials to the job-site for material
24000 AVILA ROAD
substitutions. Samples of the sealant in concrete construction
expansion joints shall be applied between 1-inch thick concrete
blocks to the full size and shape of sealant in the joints
indicated. Conform to the provisions of Section 32 in the
GENERAL CONDITIONS of these Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. Colors for each sealant installation will be selected by the

Contracting Officer from standards colors normally available from
the manufacturer. Should such standard color not be available
from the approved manufacturer except at additional charge,
provide all such colors at no additional cost to the Government.
In concealed installations and in partially or fully concealed
installations, where so approved by the Contracting Officer, use
standard gray or black sealant.
1. Type D Sealant:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Adco Seal "No. B-100".
2) Pecora Corp. "BC-158".
3) PTI Sealants "No.707".
4) Tremco "Butyl Sealant".
b. Butyl rubber based sealant conforming to ASTM C920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 7.5.
2. Type E Sealant:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Pecora Corp. "AC-20 FTR".
2) Sonneborn Building Products "Sonolac".
3) Tremco "Acrylic Latex Caulk".
b. Latex acrylic based sealant conforming to ASTM C834.
3. Type H (Acoustical) Sealant:
a. Tape:
1) Manufacturers:
a) Norton Co. "Norseal V30 Series".
b) Arlon "Series 6A".
24000 AVILA ROAD
2) Polyvinylchloride foam tape with pressure

sensitive adhesive on one side, 3/4 inch
(19.05mm) wide by the thickness required to
accommodate unevenness of substrate and
completely fill openings between partition
framing and building floors and concrete or
masonry walls.
b. Compound:
c. Manufacturers:
1) Ohio Sealants "Sound Caulk (solvent type)".
2) Pecora Corp. "AC-20FTR".
3) Tremco "Acoustical Sealant".
d. Permanently resilient type manufactured specifically

for acoustical applications.
2.2 CAULKING MATERIALS
A. Caulking Compound: W.R. Grace & Co. "Hornflex Standard Gun

Grade" or "Thiokol" approved polysulfide sealant or equal.
B. Caulking Stop: Polyurethane for open joints of size 1-1/2 times

the joint width opening and depth no more than 3/8 inch (9.5mm)
for sealant bite.
C. Oakum: Untarred, picked (loose), fine hemp fibers.
2.3 BACKUP MATERIALS FOR SEALANTS
A. Primers and Bond Breakers: As recommended by the sealant

manufacturer in their published instructions.
B. Backer Rods and Other Backing Materials: Type as recommended by

the Sealant manufacturer.
1. Closed-cell resilient urethane or polyvinyl chloride foam;
2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam;
3. Closed-cell sponge of vinyl or rubber;
4. Polychloroprene tubes or beads;
5. Polyisobuthlene extrusion;
6. Oil-less dry jute.
C. Filler for Use with Asphalt Sealant: Asphalt impregnated, as per

ASTM D 1715.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Filler of Use with Elastomeric Sealer: Plain type as per ASTM D

1752 Type II or Type III.
E. Surface Covers: (Where Simple bond-prevention is necessary).
1. Polyethylene Tape, pressure-sensitive adhesive, required

only to hold tape to the construction material.
2. Aluminum foil conforming to MIL-SPEC-MIL-A-148E
3. Heavy wax paper conforming to Fed. Spec. UU-P-270
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Joint Cleaning: Joints, including those around doors and

windows, shall be free of foreign materials full depth of joint.
Joint surfaces to be clean, dry and free from grease, oil, wax or
other foreign matter, which would tend to impair adhesion. Clean
surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Priming: Joint surfaces to be primed in accordance with sealant

manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BACKUP MATERIAL
A. Use only the backup materials recommended by the Sealant

manufacturer and approved by the Contracting Officer for the
particular installation, compressing the backup material 25% to
50% to secure a positive and secure fit.
3.3 PRIMING
A. Use only the primer recommended by the Sealant Manufacturer and

approved by the Contracting Officer for the particular
installation. Apply primer in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.4 INSTALLATION SEALANTS
A. Equipment: Apply sealants under pressure with hand or power

actuated gun or other appropriate means. Guns shall have nozzle
of proper size and shall provide sufficient pressure to
completely fill joints as designed.
1. Fill all joints where no backing exists partially with

filler material (that is compatible with specified caulking
or sealant material).
a. Metal to Metal Joints: Minimum joint width of 1/4-

inch (6.35mm).
24000 AVILA ROAD
b. All Other Joints: Maximum 3/4-inch (19.05mm), unless
otherwise detailed.
c. Minimum joint depth shall be 1/4-inch (6.35mm), for

metal joints; 1/2-inch (12.7mm) for concrete,
masonry, and plaster work joints.
2. Finish all exposed joints smooth, flush with surfaces, or

recessed as shown.
3. Provide strippable masking for factory applied sealing

materials to prevent dirt contamination until parts are
assembled.
B. Cleaning Up:
1. Remove masking tape immediately after joints have been

tooled.
2. Clean adjacent surfaces free from sealants as the

installation progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
3. Remove excess caulking and sealants from adjacent surfaces

of joints, leaving the work in a neat and clean condition.
3.5 SCHEDULE
1. Type D: Interior wall penetrations for pipe and conduit

that will be concealed by escutcheons and other trim and
plate, and for lap joints in sheet metal.
2. Type E:
a. Joints, voids and penetrations not otherwise

specified for interior surfaces exposed to view and
requiring painting.
b. Bedding of fixtures, partitions, equipment and

accessories fastened to walls and floors, flanges and
escutcheons of items penetrating surfaces in kitchen
and food serving areas, dining areas, toilet rooms,
change rooms, and other areas requiring sanitary
conditions.
3. Type H: Perimeter joints around sound-retardant partitions

and electrical boxes and other penetrations in such
partitions.
4. Caulking Joint Compound: Use caulking compound only where

permitted by the Contracting Officer in joints where only
limited movement is expected.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 08 10 73
HOLLOW STEEL ACOUSTICAL DOOR FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install hollow steel acoustical door frames as

indicated on the drawings and specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate perimeter seals, door-bottom devices and

other hardware items to be assembled in the shop on Fabrication
drawings for the frames. Include on Installation drawings a
finish hardware schedule for each door and a hollow metal door
frame schedule for each door indicating profile, dimensions,
hardware reinforcement, and frame anchorage.
B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's catalog data including STC

ratings (if any), and UL fire rating, where applicable.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Storage of Frames: Frames shall be stored under cover on 4" wood

sills on floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage.
Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which create a
humidity chamber and promote rusting.
B. Assembled frames shall be stored in a vertical position, five

units maximum in a stack. Provide a 1/4" space between frames to
promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOLLOW STEEL ACOUSTICAL DOOR FRAMES
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, including

color selection by the Architect, provide products by one of the
following (or equal):
1. Amweld Building Products, Inc.

2. Ceco Door Products.
3. Curries Company.
4. Stiles Custom Metal Inc.
5. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
6. Door Components Inc.
7. Security Door Products Corp.
B. Hollow frames shall be 16 gage (1.6 mm) commercial quality carbon

steel or hot dipped galvannealed steels.
1. The void space in the hollow part of the frame shall be

filled and packed densely with fiberglass batt insulation
like that used in sound retardant partition construction.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Provide frames with profiles and dimensions as indicated, with

mitered reinforced corners, welded the full depth of frame and
trim, with exposed surfaces ground smooth and flush. Close
contact edges to hairline joints.
D. Furnish hardware reinforcement steel, drilled and tapped to

template requirements, and welded in place. Weld galvanized dust
covers over reinforcements.
E. Locate frame anchors near the top and bottom of doors and at
intermediate points not over 24 inches on center. Provide a
minimum of three anchors per jamb.
F. Provide floor anchor clips at each jamb with 2 inch vertical

adjustments on increments not exceeding 1/16 inch.
G. Weld a temporary angle spreader to the bottom of each jamb and

remove at the time of the frame installation.
H. Clean thoroughly all surfaces of all mill scale, rust, oil,

grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before the application
of the shop coat of paint.
I. For job site finishing, apply one shop coat of rust inhibitive
metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer applied to clean, dry,
and prepared surfaces by brush, dipping, or other approved method
to provide a continuous minimum dft of 0.9 mil (0.0009 inch).
2.2 SHOP PRIMING FOR JOB SITE FINISHING
A. All new frames and frame components shall be prepared for job
site finishing with the manufacturer’s standard with coat of rust
inhibiting prime paint in accordance with the ANSI A250.10 "Test
Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames."
B. Job site finishing shall be in accordance with Section 09 91 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspect hollow door frames and obtain approval before commencing

work.
B. Door frames must be plumb and true with not more than 1/32-inch
deviation in vertical alignment in 8 feet. Anchor to the wall in
accordance with the printed instructions of the manufacturer.
Fill the space between metal frame and stud partition solidly
with fiberglass insulation.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 08 14 00
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide wood doors, complete with finish hardware installed, as

indicated on the Drawings, and as specified.
A. Standards: All solid core doors to be of types sizes and

thickness hereafter specified or indicated on the Drawings,
conforming to NWWDA Industry Standard ISI-78 for glue block and
five ply construction.
B. Fire rated doors shall be listed by a nationally recognized

testing and certification agency in accordance with local
building codes acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.
The listing doors shall meet or exceed the requirements of UL10C,
NFPA 101 AND NFPA 80.
C. Manufacturer's Identification: All wood doors shall have the

door manufacturer's name permanently affixed on the door edge
located between the top of the door and the top hinge location.
D. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1. All products covered under this Section shall be produced

by a single manufacturer unless otherwise specified.
2. Manufacturer shall submit evidence of having not less than

5 years experience of successful production of wood doors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Flitch Samples: Submit samples for door units to receive

transparent finish for selection of wood species, grain and color
continuity for Contracting Officer's approval. Submit 8 1/2-inch
x 11-inch size sample on specified wood veneer. Completed work
shall match approved sample.
B. Product Data: To be submitted within 45 days after the

Contractor has received the "Notice to Proceed."
1. Complete materials list showing all items proposed to be

furnished and delivered under this Section.
2. Sufficient manufacturer's data to demonstrate that all such

items meet or exceed specified requirements.
3. A copy of the guarantee proposed to be furnished.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Submit WI certified compliance certificate indicating that
doors meet requirements of grades specified.
1.4 GUARANTEE
A. Upon delivery of the doors of this Section to the job-site, and

as a condition of their acceptance, deliver to the Contracting
Officer two copies of an agreement written on the door
manufacturer's standard form, signed by the door manufacturer and
the Contractor agreeing to replace or repair defective doors
which have warped (bow, cup, or twist) or which show
photographing of construction below in wood veneer faces, as
defined in NWMA Standard Door Guarantees, except the NWMA
provision for refunding the price received by the door
manufacturer for any defective door shall not apply.
B. The guarantee shall also include refinishing and reinstalling

which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective
doors. Guarantee shall be in effect for a period of five years
following date of acceptance.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Protect the materials and products of this Section

during transit, storage and handling to prevent deterioration,
damage or soiling.
B. Packaging: Package doors individually in cardboard prior to

shipping, complete with manufacturer's identification, kind of
door and location noted on the carton.
C. Delivery:
1. Deliver doors to the job-site after plaster and cement are

dry, and after the building has reached average prevailing
humidity of its locality.
2. Deliver prefinished doors in manufacturer's original

containers, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand
name, size, thickness, and identifying symbol on the
covering.
3. Seal all four edges of unfinished doors when delivered to

the job-site.
D. Storage:
1. Stack flat on 2" x 4" lumber, laid 12" from ends and across
center.
2. Under bottom door and over top of stack, provide plywood or

corrugated cardboard to protect door surfaces.
3. Store doors in area where there will be no great variations

in heat, dryness, and humidity.
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. Handling: Do not drag doors across one another; lift doors and
carry them into position.
1.6 REPLACEMENTS
A. In the event of damage to doors during the handling or

installation of doors, immediately make all repairs or
replacements necessary to the approval of the Contracting Officer
at no added cost to the Government.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. General: Flush wood doors of the types, designs, and thicknesses

shown on the Door Schedule on the Contract Drawings, non-labeled
or labeled as indicated on the drawings and required, and in
solid core.
B. Manufacturer: Ampco Architectural SLC/SC120, or equal products

by Brentwood, Eggers, Mohawk, Western Oregon, or Algoma Hardwoods
Inc. door with solid core of particleboard, or structural
fiberboard.
C. Materials:
1. Face Veneers: Premium Grade, birch, clear finish.
2. Edgebanding: Same species compatible with face veneers but

in solid stock.
3. Adhesives for face veneers: MWMA, Type I.
4. Warp Tolerances shall be in accordance with MWMA I.S.I.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General Fabrication:
1. Stiles, Rails and Edge Bands: Hardwood with a density of

27-pounds per cubic foot or greater. Dimensions must
comply with dimensions specified with each type of core
construction. The following defects are not allowed:
Loose knots, open holes, decay pockets, pitch pockets or
break pockets per ISI-73, paragraph 4.4.1.3.
2. Veneering:
a. On each side of solid core to consist of crossbanding

and face veneer.
b. Cross-banding shall be hardwood veneer not less than

1/10th inch thick before sanding, with grain at right
24000 AVILA ROAD
angles to grain of core, extending to finish edges of
door.
3. Face Veneers: Premium Grade birch.
4. Combined thickness of cross-banding and face veneers on

each side of door to be not less than 1/8 inch before
sanding.
5. All wood to be kiln-dried and properly seasoned.
6. All parts to be assembled by gluing with waterproof resin

glue under pressure.
7. Belt sand and prepare all doors to receive painter's

finish; no work shall show visible defects or mismatched
face veneers.
8. To avoid splintering, ease or slightly round edges and

corners of solid core wood doors.
9. Lock blocks to be minimum 6-inches wide including stiles.
B. Warp or Twist:
1. Not to exceed 1/4-inch at time of delivery or during the

building guarantee period of one year; as defined by the
National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association.
2. Any door with a warp or twist greater than 1/4-inch not

acceptable; to be promptly removed from the job-site by the
Contractor and shall be replaced with new door conforming
to the specified warp or twist limitations.
C. Fire Rated Doors:
1. All fire doors shall meet the requirements of recognized

fire door tests and bear certifying labels of an approved
independent testing agency.
2. Door shall be constructed that when installed as an

assembly and tested it will pass ASTM E-152 “Fire Test of
doors Assemblies,” and can be rated as required.
2.3 FACTORY FINISHING OF DOORS

Sheen, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
B. Doors shall be factory finished to the maximum practicable

24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with AWI quality standard for
sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed
surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of wood doors.
D. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for

grade, finish system, staining, effect, and sheen, with sheen
measured on 60 deg gloss meter per ASTM D523.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System No.2: Catalyzed lacquer, VOC compliant.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4. Effect: Closed grain (filled finish).
5. Sheen: Medium-gloss rubbed effect 35-45 deg.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine door frames and verify frames are of the correct type and
have been installed for proper hanging of corresponding doors.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DOORS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install labeled doors in accordance with NFPA-80.
C. Fitting of Doors in Place: Accurately fit, leaving equal

clearances at sides and top and allowing for painter's finish.
Maximum clearances to be as follows:
1. 1/16-inch between door and frame top and side edges except
as otherwise detailed.
2. 1/2-inch over floor coverings.
3. 3/16-inch over thresholds.
4. Undercut bottom edge of door 1-inch or as otherwise

indicated on the Contract Drawings.
D. Hang doors plumb and square so as to operate freely without

binding and sticking.
E. Do not field cut doors down to opening sizes smaller than those
for which doors were manufactured. Do not install door in frames
set out of plumb.
F. Machine doors for hardware in accordance with recommendations of

the Contracting Officer. Prepare doors at the factory to receive
the finish hardware specified in the door hardware schedule.
24000 AVILA ROAD
G. Receive and retain custody of finish hardware furnished for work

of this under Section 08 71 10 of these Specifications and except
as otherwise directed by the Contracting Officer, shall install
all such finish hardware in strict accordance with the
recommendations of the hardware manufacturer.
H. Adjustments:
1. Replace or rehang doors that are hinge-bound or do not

operate freely.
2. Remove and replace all damaged doors at no added cost to

the Government.
3.3 SALVAGE AND REPAIR OF EXISTING WOOD DOORS
A. Contractor shall salvage, repair, and reinstall existing wood

doors as indicated on the drawings and specified. Existing doors
shall be stripped, refurbished, stained, and finished to match
the new wood doors.
B. All existing doors will remain the property of GSA. Remove doors
and temporarily store them in a location on the premises as
directed by the Contracting Officer.
C. Finish hardware shall be adjusted, repaired or serviced as

necessary to ensure continued usefulness of the unit. After
servicing, clean and polish surfaces to a bright and shiny
condition.
D. Repair and refurbish existing wood veneers to "like new"

condition. Replace wood that is broken, cracked, rotted,
otherwise defective, or if they are missing. All voids, losses,
nicks or dents shall be repaired with an epoxy adhesive. Clean
and sandpaper surfaces smooth. Refinish doors to match the new
doors that are furnished and installed under these
specifications.
E. Reinstall salvaged and repaired doors, accurately fitted, and

properly hung to operate smoothly but not too loosely.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 08 71 10
FINISH HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door

hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors,
except special types of unique hardware specified in the same
sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily

limited to:
1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.

2. Wall or floor-mounted electromagnetic hold-open devices.
3. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping.
4. Door silencers or mutes.
C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing

requirements that relate to this Section, but may not be limited
to this listing.
1. Section 08 11 18 - Steel Doors and Frames.

2. Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors.
1.3 REFERENCES (Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date.)
A. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act (ACT) Accessibility

Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.
B. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
C. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
D. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows

2. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
3. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
E. CBC - California Building Code.
F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
G. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract

and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers'

technical product information for each item of door hardware,
installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and
finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with
requirements.
C. Submittal shall include hardware schedule organized vertically

into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating
complete designations of every item required for each door or
opening. Include following information:
1. Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item.
2. Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and

door schedule.
5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes

contained in schedule.
6. Mounting locations for hardware.
7. Door and frame sizes and materials.
8. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative

with address and phone number.
9. Keying information.
D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1.

Substitution requests must be made prior to bid date. Include
product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish samples
of any proposed substitution.
E. Wiring Diagrams: Provide product data and wiring and riser

diagrams for all electrical products listed in the Hardware
Schedule portion of this section.
F. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating

clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has
been fulfilled.
G. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be

factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check
shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions
are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with
indicated requirements.
H. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents,

including keying schedule, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers’
installation, adjustment and maintenance information.
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges,

closers, exit devices, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door and

finish hardware supplier shall be a direct factory contract
supplier, with warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity
that has a record of successful in-service performance for a
period of not less than 5 years. The firm shall have in their
employ a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is
available at all reasonable times during the course of the work
and for project hardware consultation at no additional cost to the
Owner, Architect, and Contractor.
1. The supplier shall be an authorized factory distributor of

the keying system specified.
2. The supplier is required to meet with Owner to finalize keying

requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.
3. All devices shall comply with the CCR, Title 24 and the
California Building Code, DSA/AC provisions and requirements
of Chapters 10 & 11B; NFPA; ADA.
4. The supplier shall stock parts for products supplied and be

capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found
defective within warranty periods.
C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of

commercial door hardware with five years documented experience.
D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated

openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door
hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for
given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper
latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals
whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.
1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated

doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels
indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit
Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire
Exit Hardware".
E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the
use of a key or special knowledge or effort.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate

locations (shop or field) for installation.
B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’

original containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark
packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware
schedule and in work.
C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture,

sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware

supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count
is correct.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of

sale from day of final acceptance as follows:
1. Locksets: Seven (7) years.
2. Closers: Ten (10) years, except electronic closers shall be

two (2) years.
3. Exit devices: Three (3) years.
4. All other hardware: Two (2) years.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of

specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for
Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and
replacement of door hardware.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to

beginning work of this section.
B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security

Contractor, Hardware Supplier, Installer, and Project Inspector.
C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation

procedures and coordination required with related work. Review
Agency and GSA keying standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes
A. Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley, McKinney
B. Locks, Latches Falcon None
C. Exit Devices Von Duprin None
D. Closers LCN None
E. Push, Pulls
& Protection Plates Ives Trimco, BBW, Quality
F. Flush Bolts Ives Trimco, BBW, Quality
G. Dust Proof Strikes Ives Trimco, BBW, Quality
H. Coordinators Ives Trimco, BBW, Quality
24000 AVILA ROAD
I. Stops Ives Trimco, BBW, Quality
J. Thresholds National Guard Pemko, Zero
K. Seals & Bottoms National Guard Pemko, Zero
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous

material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to
have non-rising pins.
1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:
a. Height:
1) Doors up to 41" wide: 4-1/2" inches.

2) Doors 42" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door

swings 180 degrees.
c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in

height. Add one for each additional 2 feet in height.
2. Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing

doors and interior key lock doors with reverse bevels.
B. Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches GSA – Federal Supply

Schedule Type 161 which meet Federal Specification FF-H-00106b and
FF-H-106C/GEN and are ADA compatible:
1. Chassis: Cylindrical design, zinc plated and dichromated

for rust resistance cold-formed steel.
2. Lever Trim: Accessible design, independent operation,

spring-cage supported, minimum 2” clearance from lever mid-
point to door face.
3. Locks shall be of such construction that when locked, the

door may be opened from within by using lever and without
the use of a key or special knowledge.
4. Rosettes: Minimum 3-1/2” diameter for coverage of ANSI/DHI

A115.18, 1994 door preparation, through-bolt lugs on both
spring cages to fully engage this pattern.
5. Furnish interchangeable core with 7 pins in keyway as

directed.
5. Springs: Full compression type.
6. Strikes: 16 gage curved lip stainless steel, bronze or

brass with 1” deep dust box (K510-066). Lips shall be of
sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing.
C. Exit devices: Von Duprin as scheduled.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that
device has completed over 1,000,000 cycles and can still
meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 1994 standards.
2. All internal parts shall be of cold-rolled steel with zinc

dichromate coating.
3. Compression spring engineering.
4. Non-handed basic device design with center case

interchangeable with all functions.
5. All devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners.
6. All latchbolts shall be deadlocking with ¾” throw and have a

self-lubricating coating to reduce friction and wear.
7. Device push bar must release when a force of 32 pounds, or

less, of pressure is applied when a force of 250 pounds is
applied to the door.
8. Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be

required.
9. All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate

underneath to prevent movement.
10. All Exit Devices to be sex-bolted to the doors.
11. Panic Hardware shall comply with UBC Standard 10-4 and shall
be mounted between 30" and 44" above the finished floor
surface. The unlatching force shall not exceed 15 lbs.
applied in the direction of travel. Panic hardware shall
comply with CBC Section 1003.3.1.9.
D. Closers: LCN as scheduled. Place closers inside building,

stairs, room, etc.
1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron

construction with double heat treated pinion shaft to
provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts
throughout the life of the installation. All door closers
shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a
BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification
showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000
cycles must be provided.
2. All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack
and pinion action with a shaft diameter of a minimum of
11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity
and durability under all closer applications.
3. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180

degrees.
4. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding

temperature range of 120 degrees F. to -30 degrees F.
without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to
properly close the door.
5. Drop brackets are required at narrow head rails.
24000 AVILA ROAD
6. Maximum effort to operate doors shall not exceed 5 lbs.,

such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to
hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door
operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When
fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the
door may be increased but shall not to exceed 15 lbs. when
specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be
adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force
and still close and latch the door. Door shall take at
least 3 seconds to move from an open position of 70 degrees
to a point of 3 inches from the latch jamb. Reference CBC
Sections 1133B.2.1, 1133B.2.5, 1133B2.5.1 & 1003.3.1.8.
7. Provide sex-bolted or through bolt mounting for all door

closers.
E. Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes: Automatic Flush Bolts shall be
of the low operating force design. Utilize the top bolt only
model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by
testing procedures.
1. Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical

openings as scheduled.
2. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.
F. Door Stops:
1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor mount

type with appropriate fasteners. Where floor mount type
cannot be used, provide overhead type.
2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from
the face of the wall or partition (Title 24, 1133B.8.6).
3. Overhead stops, if utilized, shall be made of stainless

steel and non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end
caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only
functions.
G. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates

with four beveled edges. Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW.
Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware
Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or
stainless to match other hardware.
H. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details.
1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled

surface of 1:2 maximum slope.
2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or

polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements
in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”.
3. Use 1/4” fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors

(SS/FHSL).
4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 1133B.2.4.1.
24000 AVILA ROAD
I. Seals:
1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C / UBC Standard 7-2

compliant. Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and
selected frame manufacturers' requirements.
2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected

door manufacturer. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly
complete and in full compliance with UL10C / UBC Standard 7-
2. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by
door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination
required.
3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide UL10C / UBC Standard 7-

2 compliant for use on “S” labeled Positive Pressure door
assemblies.
J. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3

for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light
seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.
2.3 KEYING
A. Furnish a keying system in the type as directed by the Owner,

Owner’s representative or Architect. Provide Falcon T Series 7
pin interchangeable lock cores as specified by the Owner.
Coordinate with Owner to determine if construction blanks are
required. Furnish permanent keys directly to the Owner.
B. Supply keys as follows:
1. Supply 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.
2. Supply 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Generally to be satin chrome (626) unless otherwise noted.
B. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware,

unless otherwise noted.
C. Aluminum items to be finished satin chrome except thresholds which

can be furnished as standard mill finish.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat
head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and
standard wood screws for wood.
B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread

type.
C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by

means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish.
D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete

or masonry.
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.
F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or

other adjacent work.
G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door
by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to
receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and requirements of DHI.
B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door

and Hardware Institute. Operating hardware will to be located
between 30" and 44" AFF.
D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and
reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper
installation and operation.
E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for

anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance
with industry standards.
F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber

sealant.
G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary

changes in hardware at no additional cost.
H. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to

route cable to connect electrified locks, panic hardware and fire
exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time
these items are installed so as to avoid disassembly and
reinstallation of hardware.
I. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security

contractor when the power is turned on for the testing of the
electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make
adjustments to solenoids, latches, vertical rods and closers to
insure proper and secure operation.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units
which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as
intended for the application made.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.
C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more

than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or
area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or
occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware
items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary
to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment.
D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of

hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the

completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the
Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and
re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of
doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel
in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace
hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty
design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a
written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial
nature) in the performance of the hardware.
3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2, and ADAAG for positioning

requirements for the disabled.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to inspect installation

and certify that hardware and it's installation have been
furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as specified herein.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the

requirements of the foregoing specifications.
B. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is

used with each door.
Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.)
FAL = Falcon Locks, Latches, strikes &

Cylinders
HAR = Harco Magnetic contact sensor
IVE = Ives Hinges, Bolts, Coordinators,
Dust Proof Strikes, Kick
Plates, Door Stops & Silencers
KAB = Kaba Mass Heavy Duty Security Deadbolts
LCN = LCN Door Closers
NGP = National Guard Products Thresholds, Gasketing &
Weather-stripping
SEN = Sentrol Magnetic Contact Switches
SDC = SDC Electric strikes
STA = Stanley Combination Lock
24000 AVILA ROAD
VON = Von Duprin Exit Devices, Electric Strikes
& Power Supplies
3.7 HARDWARE SETS:
Private Offices - (105A, 105B, 106A, 107A, 111A, 112A)
Hardware Set: 01
Ea. Hinge 5BB1 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 626 IVE

1 Ea. Entry/ Office Lock T511 F109-1 626 FAL
1 Ea. Door Stop FS436 626 IVE
1 Ea. Coat Hook 572 613 IVE
Conference Room - (108A & 108B)
Hardware Set: 02

1 Ea. Privacy T301 F76-1 626 FAL
1 Ea. Surface Closer 4041 EDA 626 LCN
File Room - (104A & 104B)
Hardware Set: 03

1 Ea. Classroom Lock T561 F84-1 626 FAL
Data / Utility - (114A)
Hardware Set: 04

1 Ea. Combination Lock OM500 Arrow or Falcon SFIC 626 OMI
1 Ea. I.C Core CB807 626 FAL
1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 421 NDKB BRZ NGP
Hallway #113 - (113A)
Hardware Set: 05
Ea. Hinge 5BB1SH 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE

1 Ea. Elec. Hinge 5BB1SH 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE
1 Ea. Exit Device 9927EO-F 626 VON
24000 AVILA ROAD
1 Ea. Exit Device 9927L-F E996L-06 626 VON
1 Ea. Rim Cylinder C953 “7” PIN 626 FAL
1 Ea. Split Astragal 9115NA/2 628 NGP
1 Ea. Closer Mtg. Bracket MB1/2 626 IVE
2 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 225 S AL NGP
2 Ea. Door Contact FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
CARD READER, DOOR CONTACTS & WIRING FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
HSDN #110 - (110A)
Hardware Set: 06

1 Ea. Storeroom Lock T581GD D “7” PIN F86-1 626 FAL
1 Ea Electric Strike 45-4S 630 SDC
1 Ea. Combination Lock CDX-09 5340-01-498-2759 KAB
1 Ea. Surface Closer 4041 626 LCN
1 Set Gasketing 110SA 628 NGP
1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 420 NA AL NGP
1 Ea. Door Contact 30000 HAR
CARD READER, DOOR CONTACT & WIRING FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
Exit Corridor Doors - (102A & 109A) 90 min. - Single Leaf
Hardware Set: 07
Ea. Hinge 5BB1SH 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE

1 Ea. Elec. Hinge 5BB1SH 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE
1 Ea. Exit Device 9875L-F E996L-06 626 VON
1 Ea. Mortise Cylinder C987 “7” PIN 626 FAL
1 Set Gasketing 110SA 628 NPG
1 Ea. Auto Door Bottom 420 NDKB BRZ NGP
1 Set Gasketing 450B BRN NGP
1 Ea. Door Contact FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
CARD READER, DOOR CONTACT & WIRING FURNISHED BY ACCESS CONTROL SUPPLIER
Exit Corridor Doors - (115A) 90 Min. – Pair of Doors
Hardware Set: 08A
24000 AVILA ROAD
Ea Hinge 5BB1HWSH 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 Ea Exit Device 9927-EO-F 626 VON
1 Ea Exit Device 9927L-F 996L 626 VON
1 Ea Mortise Cylinder 986 626 FAL
1 Ea Rim Cylinder 951 626 FAL
1 Ea. Astragal 115 NA 628 NGP
1 Ea. Coordinator COR x FL 628 IVE
1 Ea. Closer Mtg Brackets MB1/2 BLK IVE
2 Ea Surface Closer 4041 EDA 689 LCN
2 Ea Kick Plate 8400 10” X 2” LDW 630 IVE
2 Ea Floor Stop FS441 626 IVE
Hardware Set: 08B
Exit Corridor Doors - (115B) 90 Min. – Pair of Doors
6 Ea Wide Throw Hinge WT-FBB168 5”-0” x (Verify 652 IVE

Width in Field)
1 Ea Exit Device 9927-EO-F 626 VON
1 Ea Exit Device 9927L-F 996L 626 VON
1 Ea Mortise Cylinder 986 626 FAL
1 Ea Rim Cylinder 951 626 FAL
1 Ea. Astragal 115 NA 628 NGP
1 Ea. Coordinator COR x FL 628 IVE
1 Ea. Closer Mtg Brackets MB1/2 BLK IVE
2 Ea Surface Closer 4041 EDA 689 LCN
2 Ea Kick Plate 8400 10” X 2” LDW 630 IVE
2 Ea Floor Stop FS441 626 IVE
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 22 10
GYPSUM BOARD AND METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All labor, materials and equipment necessary for gypsum board and
framing as indicated on the Contract Drawings and in these
Specifications, including:
1. Taping, spackling and sanding of wallboard surfaces.
2. Metal framing for gypsum board.
B. References Standards:
1. GA216-85 for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
2. ASTM C-630.
3. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies, identical to

those indicated by reference to GA File Nos. in GA-600
"Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations
in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory" or in listing of other
testing and agencies acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Conform to conditions of SECTION 01 33 00 of DIVISION 1-GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B. Product Data:
1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this

Section.
2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to

prove compliance with specified requirements.
3. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures, when

approved by the GSA, will become the basis of accepting or
rejecting actual installation procedures used on the work.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for the erection of metal framing, and

furring, of curved ceiling systems. Indicate materials, lineal
and radial dimensions, sizes, thicknesses, spacings, and
fastening.
A. Labor: Use adequate number of skilled laborers who are

thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and
24000 AVILA ROAD
completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods
needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B. GA 214 - Gypsum wallboard finish shall conform to requirements of

GA 214, and as specified herein. Levels required for the Work are
described as follows:
LEVELS OF GYPSUM BOARD FINISH
Level Joints Interior Angles Accessories Fasteners Surface

1 Tape set in Tape set in joint Tool marks
compound compound and ridges
acceptable
2 Tape set in Tape embedded Covered by Covered by Free from
joint compound in joint one separate one excess joint
and one compound and coat of joint separate compound.
separate coat wiped to leave a compound coat of joint Tool marks
of joint thin coat of compound and ridges
compound compound over acceptable.
tape, and one
separate coat
3 After taping, After taping, Covered by 3 Covered by Smooth and
cover with two cover with one separate 3 separate free of tool
separate coats separate coat of coats of joint coats of joint marks and
of joint joint compound compound compound ridges *
compound
4 After taping, After taping, Covered by 3 Covered by Smooth and
cover with 2 cover with one separate 3 separate free of tool
separate coats separate coat of coats of joint coats of joint marks and
of joint joint compound compound compound ridges *
compound
5 After taping, After taping, Covered by 3 Covered by Skim coat of
cover with 2 cover with one separate 3 separate joint
separate coats separate coat of coats of joint coats of joint compound
of joint joint compound compound compound applied to
compound entire surface.
Surface free
from tool
marks and
ridges. *
*At completion of specified taping and finishing, install one coat

of high solids primer.
A. Environmental Requirements: During work operations of this

Section maintain temperatures within the building within the
range of 55 to 70 degrees F. Provide adequate ventilation in the
work areas to carry off excess moisture.
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Handling:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. To be arranged for delivery and storage of adequate
supplies of gypsum board materials to the job-site to
permit uninterrupted progress of the work.
2. Deliver materials and accessories to the job-site in their

original containers or bundles properly identified with
manufacturer's name and brand name. Store as directed by
the GSA and protect against damage during the extent of the
Contract.
3. Store gypsum board finish materials in flat area, protected

from moisture, on flat and solid supports off the floor
surface.
B. Protection:
1. Adequately protect all existing and/or new work in place

against damage.
2. Keep floor surfaces covered to prevent staining by

spackling materials.
C. Scaffolding: Provide scaffolding in accordance with Federal,

State, County, and City Safety Rules and Regulations and OSHA.
1. Avoid interference with work of other trades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Gypsum board and Accessories: Provide ICBO evaluation, or L.A.

Research Report number for gypsum board and accessories.
1. United States Gypsum (USG)
2. Genstar Gypsum Products
3. Georgia-Pacific Co.
4. National Gypsum Co. (Gold Bond)
5. Celotex Company
2.2 GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A. Wallboard: Provide fire-retardant wallboard, type X, 5/8"

(15.9mm) thick, or 5/8" (15.9mm) thick water resistant, type X,
as indicated on the drawings. All type X wallboard shall bear
the UL label for 1-hour fire rating.
1. Backing Board: For double layered application provide ASTM

C442 Type "X," or the same material as specified for
wallboard above.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs
bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16" (4.8mm) minimum
lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for
minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of the depth and gage
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard zee-shaped furring

members with slotted or nonslotted web, fabricated from hot-dip
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525, Coating
Designation G60; with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness
of 0.0179 inch (0.45mm) (26 gage), face flange of 1-1/4 inch
(31.8mm), wall-attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2mm), and of
depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.4 FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS
A. Suspended ceiling framing system shall support the finished

ceiling, light fixtures, air diffusers, and accessories, as
required. The suspension system shall provide a maximum
deflection of L/240. Carrying channels shall be fabricated from
minimum 0.0548 inch thick cold-rolled steel, 1-1/2 inch wide x
7/16 inch deep. Carrying channels for supports under ducts shall
be 2 inches in size as specified. Carrying channels shall be
fabricated from hot dip galvanized coated sheet.
1. Gypsum Wallboard Ceilings: Furring members shall be

fabricated from cold-rolled steel, 7/8 inch x 2-9/16
inches. Furring members shall be fabricated from hot-dip
galvanized coated sheet.
B. Framing Accessories: Provide all standard related accessories

including clips, web stiffeners, anchors, and similar items, of
the same manufacture and as required for a complete installation.
C. Splay Wires and Compression Struts: Approved manufacturers

acceptable to manufacturer of ceiling grids, gages and types as
required by building codes for ceiling types and weights specified.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion

resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten
steel framing and furring power members securely to substrates
involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturers for applications indicated.
B. Screws: Type "W" bugle head gypsum board screws, drill steel
conforming to ASTM C664, 1 1/4-inch (31.8mm) long, except where
longer length is required by Code.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Trim: Form from zinc-coated steel not lighter than 26 gage,
conforming to Fed. Spec. QQ-S-775, type I, class "d" or "e".
B. Casings: Provide casing wherever gypsum board abuts exposed

masonry or finished wood, and elsewhere at all free edges of
exposed gypsum wallboard. Casing shall be US Gypsum No. 200-4
metal trim, U-shaped.
C. Corner Reinforcement: "Perf-A-Bead", a metal corner

reinforcement of formed galvanized steel with 1-3/16-inch
(30.2mm) wide "Perf-A-Tape" wings to receive joint compound, as
manufactured by U.S. Gypsum, or equal.
D. Laminating Adhesive: Provide adhesive recommended for laminating

gypsum boards.
E. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Provide adhesive recommended for

laminating gypsum boards to security mesh.
1. In double layer applications, fasten base layers with

screws and face layer with adhesive and supplementary
fasteners.
F. Edge Beads at Perimeter of Ceilings: Angle shapes with wings not

less than 3/4" (19.05mm) wide, with concealed wing perforated and
exposed wing edge folded flat and factory finished white.
2.7 JOINTING SYSTEM
A. Materials: Reinforcing tape and compound, designed to be used

together as recommended by the wallboard manufacturer.
B. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by

its manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Project Conditions: Examine all parts of the work for any

conditions which would affect the soundness or correctness of
gypsum board work.
1. Verify all corrective work to be done before proceeding

with gypsum board construction operations.
B. Cooperation: Required, with all other trades involved in the

work of placing of work, building-in, and embedding into gypsum
board construction of all fixtures, anchors, backing, sleeves,
inserts; providing of openings, chases to the extent necessary
for proper and secure installation, attachments, and passing of
other work.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. All piping, conduit, and fixtures to be concealed by wallboard or
to penetrate gypsum board finish to be in place, tested, and
approved before start of application of wallboard.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to

comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that
apply to framing installation.
1. Ceiling Openings: Support members shall be provided as

required at ceiling openings for access panels, recessed
light fixtures, and air supply or exhaust. Support members
shall be not less than 1-1/2 inch main runner channels and
vertically installed suspension wires or straps shall be
located to provide at least the minimum support specified
for furring and wallboard attachment. Intermediate
structural members not a part of the structural system,
shall be provided for attachment or suspension of support
members.
2. Light fixtures and air diffusers shall be supported

directly from suspended ceiling runners. Wires shall be
provided at required locations to support the weight of
recessed or surface mounted light fixtures and air
diffusers.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at

terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment
services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings,
and similar construction to comply with details indicated and
with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none
available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by
United States Gypsum Co.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Apply gypsum board to framing and furring members in

accordance with ASTM C 840 or GA 216 and the requirements
specified herein.
1. In accordance with Contract Drawings and with the separate

boards in moderate contact but not forced in place.
2. At internal and external corners, conceal the cut edges by

overlapping covered edges of abutting boards.
3. Stagger the boards so that corners of any four boards will

not meet at a common point except in vertical corners.
B. Cutting: By scoring and breaking, or by sawing. Do all cutting

from the face side. Sandpaper cut edges for neat jointing in
finished work. Cutouts for pipes, fixtures, or other small
openings to be scored before knocking out or cut out with saw.
Openings are not to be punched out.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Ceilings: Secure boards along perimeters of ceilings, around

edges of openings to all furring. Place boards with long
dimensions perpendicular to supports, screw in place at 12-inches
(304.8mm) on center in the field and 8-inches (203.2mm) on center
along board edges. Locate screws not less than 1/8-inch (3.18mm)
from board edges.
D. Single layer Application: Place wallboard horizontally or

vertically in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for
the particular situation for minimum taping. Secure wallboard to
structural supports with gypsum board screws spaced 12-inches
(304.8mm) on center in the field and 8-inches (203.2mm) on center
staggered along each board edge. Use screws for fastening single
layer of wallboards.
E. Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base

layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer.
1. On partitions or walls apply base layer and face layers

vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layer
over supports and face layer joints offset at least 10
inches (254mm) with base layer joints.
2. Fasten base layers with screws and face layer with adhesive
and supplementary fasteners.
F. Fasteners: Firmly fasten boards to supporting framing member

with fasteners not cutting surface paper or fracturing the gypsum
core. Where a fastener has cut surface paper, provide another
fastener approximately 1-1/2-inches (38.1mm) from the defective
fastener and remove the defective fastener. Butt join vertical
joints of wallboard at supports and stagger on opposite faces of
partitions.
G. Casings or Trim: Provide at all exposed edges or ends of

wallboard and where intersecting with other materials. At
exterior corners of wallboard joints secure in place specified
corner reinforcements ready for taping compound.
H. Sealants: Where indicated on the Contract Drawings, provide a

bead of sealant where trim or casings abut adjacent construction.
3.4 JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISHING
A. General: Tape and finish gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C

840 or GA 214. Provide treatment for water-resistant gypsum
board as recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. Levels of
finish required shall be as follows:
1. Level 1: Plenum areas above ceilings, insides of shafts,

and other concealed areas. Taping to be as required for
fire rated assemblies.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Level 2: Water-resistand wallboard backing for high
moisture areas to be covered with a water resistant surface
other than tile, vinyl or paint, i.e. stainless steel
cladding etc.
3. Level 3: Backing for vinyl wall covering and adhered

acoustic tile. Also, provide where textured finish is
indicated.
4. Level 4: Exposed painted wallboard in classrooms, utility

rooms, and similar spaces not requiring Level 5 finish.
5. Inspect areas to be joint treated, verifying that the

gypsum wallboard fits snugly against supporting framework.
6. In areas where joint treatment and compound finishing will

be performed, maintain a temperature of not less than 55
degrees for 24 hours prior to commencing the treatment, and
until joint and finishing compounds have dried.
7. Apply the joint treatment and finishing compound by machine

or hand tool. Provide a minimum drying time of 24 hours
between coats, with additional drying time in poorly
ventilated areas.
B. Embedding compounds:
1. Apply to gypsum wallboard joints and depressed fastener

heads in a thin uniform layer.
2. Spread the compound not less than 3" (76.2mm) wide at

joints, center the reinforcing tape in the joint, and embed
the tape in the compound. Then spread a thin layer of
compound over the tape.
3. After this treatment has dried, apply a second coat of

embedding compound to joints and fastener heads,
spreading in a thin uniform coat to not less than 6
(152.4mm) " wide at joints, and feather edged.
4. Sandpaper between coats as required.
5. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to eliminate ridges and high

points.
C. Finishing Compounds: Provide smooth, non-textured finish.
1. After embedding compound is thoroughly dry and has been

completely sanded, apply a coat of finishing compound to
joints and depressed fastener heads.
2. Feather the finishing compound to not less than 12" wide.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. When thoroughly dry, sandpaper to obtain a uniformly smooth
surface, taking care to not scuff the paper surface of the
wallboard.
D. Fastener Heads: To be depressed slightly and to have at least 3

coats of spackle, each coat applied at same time as the spackling
of joint and to be dry before application of succeeding coats.
E. Where Gypsum Board is to Receive Vinyl Wall Coverings: Leave all

surfaces clean and in acceptable condition to receive subsequent
finish work of other trades.
3.5 CORNER TREATMENT
A. Internal Corners: Treat as specified for joints, except fold the

reinforcing tape lengthwise through the middle and fit neatly
into the corner.
B. External Corners: Round off corners where indicated on the

drawings.
1. Install the specified corner bead, fitting neatly over the

corner and securing with the same type fasteners used for
installing the wallboard.
2. Space the fasteners approximately 6" (152.4mm) on centers,

and drive through the wallboard into the framing or furring
member.
3. After the corner bead has been secured into position, treat
the corner with joint compound and reinforcing tape as
specified for joints, feathering the joint compound out
from 8" (203.2mm) to 10" (254mm) on each side of the
corner.
3.6 OTHER METAL TRIM
A. The Drawings do not purport to show all locations and

requirements for metal trim.
B. Carefully study the Drawings and the installation, and provide

all metal trim normally recommended by the manufacturer of the
gypsum wallboard approved for use in this work.
3.7 CAULKING
A. Caulk openings around pipes, and other items projecting through

gypsum board as specified in Section 07 92 10, "Sealants AND
CAULKING". Apply calking material with exposed surface flush
with gypsum board.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.8 FIRE-RESISTANT ASSEMBLIES
A. Wherever fire-rated gypsum board construction is indicated on the

drawings, provide materials and application methods, including
types and spacing of fasteners, in accordance with UL FRD.
3.9 PATCHING
A. Patch surface defects in gypsum board to a smooth, uniform

appearance, ready to receive finish as specified.
3.10 CLEANING UP
A. In addition to other requirements for cleaning, use necessary

care to prevent scattering gypsum wallboard scraps and dust, and
to prevent tracking gypsum and joint finishing compound onto
floor surfaces.
B. At completion of each segment of installation in a room or space,

promptly pick up and remove from the working area all scrap,
debris, and surplus material of this Section.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner

suitable to Installer, which ensures gypsum board construction
being without damage at the time of Completion.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 22 16
METAL FRAMING (NON-STRUCTURAL)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install non-load bearing metal framing as indicated

on the drawings and specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit a complete list of materials and accessories

to be used in the work, including descriptive data to show
compliance with this specification.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for:
1. Show layout, spacing, sizes, thickness, and types of cold-

formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and
anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show
reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental
framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices,
accessories, connection details, and attachment to
adjoining Work.
2. Special types of suspension systems if required due to

mechanical ducts, equipment, etc.; show calculations and
sizes of all members.
3. Head of wall details for fire rated partitions and

acoustical partitions. Coordinate fire rated partition
system with firestopping.
4. ICBO reports for the selected metal framing, fasteners,

mechanical anchorages and proprietary connections.
A. Codes: Comply with all pertinent requirements of California

Title 24, (CBC) including requirements of seismic zone 4,
essential facility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL FRAMING (NON-STRUCTURAL)
A. Steel Shapes (greater than 0.125 inch thickness): ASTM A 36.
B. Metal Studs (Typical Partition Studs): Fabricate from ASTM A 653

steel sheet having a minimum yield strength of 33,000 PSI; roll-
formed "C" shaped with prepunched webs for installation of
24000 AVILA ROAD
mechanical and electrical items. Minimum properties of studs and

depths as indicated on drawings.
1. Minimum gage: To provide deflection not to exceed L/240

with 5 psf minimum lateral load at partition height
required, but not less than:
a. 43 mil (18 gauge) at full height partitions, levels 4-7.
b. 16 gauge minimum for full height partitions.
c. Two 14 gauge minimum, typical, at door jambs.
d. 14 gauge king studs at cross corridor doors and all

doors greater than 3’6” wide.
2. Runners: Match studs; size for friction fit to studs; type

recommended by stud manufacturer for support of studs, and
for vertical abutment of drywall work at other work.
Provide top track with 2 inch long legs when set into
relieving channels.
3. Finish: Minimum G60 galvanize coating.
4. Head Tracks for Structure-Height Partitions: Provide

deflection compensating head track system.
5. Do not install shot pins into structural steel members

without the prior written approval.
6. Fire rated partitions: Coordinate head track configuration

with firestopping gap seal system specified in 07 84 00.
7. Acceptable products:
a. "SLP-TRK"; Sliptrack System, Inc.

b. "Fire Trak"; Fire Trak Corp.
c. "Verti-clip"; The Steel Network.
d. "The System"; Metal-Lite, Inc., for all partitions.
e. Other CSFM approved systems.
C. Resilient Channels: 24 to 26 gage galvanized steel, cap-shaped

with attachment to primary framing on one leg; flange for
attachment of drywall.
D. Direct Hung Suspension System: Chicago Metallic "640 Furring

System", or approved double web suspension system bearing ASTM C
635 Heavy-Duty classification.
E. Furring Members: ASTM C 645; minimum 25 gage, hat-shaped. Size

1-1/4 inch face width by 7/8 inch depth. Provide channels with
manufacturer's standard zinc protective coating, or be rolled
formed from galvanized steel.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Carrying Channels: ASTM C 754; main runner channels, 1-1/2

inches cold rolled, weighing 0.475 pound per foot. Provide
channels with manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive prime
finish.
G. Wire: ASTM A 641, carbon steel wire, galvanized, soft annealed,

with Class 1 coating; hanger wire for typical suspension system
minimum 12 gage; hanger wire for conventional suspension system
minimum 8 gage; wire for tying channels minimum 16 and 18 gage as
specified.
H. Clips: Provide manufacturer's standard wire type clips for

attaching furring channels to main runners in suspended drywall
ceilings.
I. "Zee" Shaped Furring Channels: Furring channels formed from

minimum 20 gage galvanized steel, 1 inch by 2 inches by 1 inch in
size, unless otherwise detailed.
J. Backing Plates (Blocking): One of the following:
1. 16 gage studs, 4 inches wide unless otherwise indicated.
2. Proprietary blocking system. Acceptable products include:
a. "Flush Mount Backing" Metal Lite, Inc.

b. "Notch-Tite Backing" Metal Lite, Inc.
c. “or equal.”
K. Screws: Products of, or as recommended by stud manufacturer:
1. Studs-to-runners: 3/8 inch Type S Pan Head.
2. Furring channels to studs: 3/8 inch Type S 12 Pan Head.
3. Furring channels and other metal members to structural

studs: 3/8 inch TEK Type screws.
L. Powder Driven Fasteners: Low velocity drive pins; minimum 9/64

diameter shank:
1. For attachment to concrete: Length of pin to provide

minimum 1-1/8 inch penetration in concrete.
2. For attachment to steel: Length of pin minimum 5/8 inch.
M. Fasteners for Hanger Wires: Type and size as required to meet

minimum load requirements specified; all fasteners ICBO approved.
N. Acceptable manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements:

Marino, Dietrich, Gold Bond, and SSMA member manufacturers, as
noted in ICBO ES Report ER-4943P.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal framing systems in accordance with ASTM C 754,

pertinent codes and regulations for rated construction and
recommendations of the manufacturer; securely anchor all members
in position.
B. Accurately lay out all partitions; coordinate the work of this

Section with that of other sections for concealed work.
C. Independently support partitions, furring and ceiling suspension

systems; do not attach ducts, pipes, etc. to supports. Do not
support from any electrical, HVAC, plumbing or sprinkler system
components. Do not drill or "shoot" into structural members in
any manner that would impair its structural integrity.
D. Install framing members to preclude direct physical contact with

conduits, pipe, and ducts; coordinate with installation of
sleeves for mechanical penetrations.
E. Erect framing in true planes to provide solid backing for finish

materials; tolerance limitations are specified under the various
finishes unless noted herein.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 50 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: This section includes supply and installation of

acoustical ceilings as indicated or specified, and as follows:
1. Armstrong 755B
2. Armstrong 1945
B. Salvage grid and HVAC register grilles, allowing them to remain

in place, and protected from damage or dislocation, and adjust or
repair salvaged components to accept new ceiling panels.
C. Existing ceiling tile shall become the property of the Contractor

and disposed of off Government property.
D. Hard lid (gypsum board) ceilings are specified in Section 09 22 10.
A. Design of ceiling suspension system, including related

components, shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements of
Uniform Building Code.
B. Framing shall comply with ASTM C635 "Standard Specification for

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and lay-in Panel
Ceilings".
C. Installation of suspended ceiling system shall be by applicators

approved by ceiling manufacturer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
B. Submit manufacturer data and complete materials list.
C. Submit shop drawings detailing ceiling layout, suspension methods

and interface with other ceiling and wall materials.
D. Samples: Submit one full size tile or acoustical panel of each

specified material including 12 inch (304.8mm) long samples of
suspension system components.
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, with

labels intact and store in location safe from damage by
construction operations and the elements.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Ceiling Suspension System shall be heavy-duty, consisting of two-

way exposed grid steel tee system, with members locked in place
to form a rigid grid.
B. In addition to ceiling loads, the system shall be designed for

lighting fixture loads when applicable. Design shall be in
accordance with the Uniform Building Code.
1. Main Runners (Heavy Duty): Armstrong 9/16" Ultima, Chicago

Metallic 540 System, USG Donn DX, or National Rolling Mills
ML 8000, or equal.
a. Length: 12 feet (3,657.6mm)
b. Height: 1-1/2 inches (38.1mm)
c. Allowable load per 4 foot (1,219.2mm) spacing: 16.3

lbs./lin. ft. (24.3kg/m)
d. Color: Factory White
2. Cross Tees (Heavy Duty): Armstrong, Chicago Metallic 540

System, USG Donn DX, or National Rolling Mills DCML, or
equal.
a. Length: 2 ft (609.6mm). and 4 ft (1,219.2mm).

b. Height: 1" (25.4mm) x 1-1/2" (38.1mm)
c. Allowable load per 2 foot spacing: 33.5 lbs./lin.
ft. (49.85kg/m)
d. Color: Factory White
3. Wall Angles and Trim:
a. Length: 12 feet (3,657.6mm)

b. Flange: 15/16 inches (23.8mm)
c. Metal: 24 gauge
d. Edges: Hemmed
e. Color: Factory White
4. Hold-Down Clips: Ceiling manufacturer's standard to fit

system furnished.
5. Hanger Wire: No. 12 gauge, galvanized annealed steel.
6. Edge Moldings:
a. Metal: Aluminum or steel with baked white enamel

finish.
C. Seismic Compression Posts: Provide seismic compression posts of a

telescoping design, manufactured from galvanized steel tubing,
24000 AVILA ROAD
incorporating an injection molded plastic bulb clip for gripping
the bulb on the 88 main tees. The post shall be fitted with a
spring steel clip for clasping the ceiling suspension wires. The
compression struts shall be adjustable, tested to withstand 500
(minimum) pounds of compressive load, and shall be Donn Compression
Post as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc., or equal.
D. Attachment devices: size for 5 times design load indicated in

ASTM c635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners - Limitations: fasteners shall

be limited as to location, placement, or time of use by
the Contracting Officer. Use powder actuated fasteners
only where permitted by the Contracting Officer. Use may
be limited to time of day outside of regular business hours
so as to avoid noise disturbance of building occupants.
2. The powder fastener system shall be of type suitable for

application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attachment of hangers of type indicated and with capability
to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing
per ASTM E1190, conducted by a qualified testing
laboratory. The installation of powder driven anchors
shall be subject to the noise limitations directed by the
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Acoustical Material: Tile lay-in panels shall be type IV Mineral

Fibre Material, Class A, conforming to ASTM E 1264.
1. Size: As indicated on the drawings.

2. NRC: 0.70
3. STC: 25-29
4. Light reflectance LR-0.89.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Secure hanger wires to structure above as indicated. Provide a

support wire at each of the four corners of each light fixture.
B. Space main runner tees as indicated. Main and cross tees shall
be mechanically locked in place to form a rigid grid system,
complete with wall angles and accessories. Suspend ceiling
straight and level to within 1/8 inch (3.18mm) in 12 feet
(3,657.6mm) in all directions. Bottom flange joints shall be
tight and flush.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Neatly cut and fit panels around fixtures, diffusers and abutting
construction. Provide wall angles at all vertical surfaces
adjoining ceiling unless otherwise indicated. Cope bottoms of
exposed tees for flush joints at wall angles.
D. Provide hold down clips for all lay-in panels except those panels
designated as mechanical access panels.
3.2 REMODELING - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
A. Renovations shall be first class in workmanship and render the

work as good as new. Clean and adjust acoustical ceilings for
proper use and appearance.
B. Repair and refurbish existing salvaged materials to "like new"

condition. Replace existing materials when they are broken,
cracked, otherwise defective, or if they are missing. Remove
existing materials that are not suitable for re-use.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 65 14
RUBBER BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL

sections, apply to work specified in this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install rubber base as indicated on the drawings and

specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit samples of base.
B. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when

approved by the Contracting Officer will become the basis for
accepting or rejecting installation procedures used on the Work.
A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver materials to the job-site and

store in their original unopened containers with all labels
intact and legible at time of use. Store materials at the job-
site, protected from weather, located where temperatures can be
maintained at a constant 70 degrees F. as recommended by the
manufacturer for storing as directed by the Contracting Officer.
B. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this

Section against damage before, during and after installation and
to protect installed work and materials of other trades.
A. Environmental Requirements: In areas to receive base maintain

temperatures between 50 and 90 degrees F. for not less than 48
hours before and after installation of base.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BASE MATERIALS
A. General: Top set type conforming to ASTM F1861, rubber.
1. 1/8-inch thickness and height as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Furnish premolded exterior and interior corner units.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Color shall be as noted on the drawings or as selected by
the Government from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. Adhesive shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the base

materials. Adhesive shall be waterproof and stabilized type.
Asphalt emulsions will not be acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine the areas and conditions under which base is to

be installed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until detrimental
conditions have been corrected.
B. Surfaces: Shall be smooth, and even.
C. General Workmanship: In accordance with best practices of the

trade to provide a complete and first class installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Contractor responsible for suitability of substrates to receive

base materials.
B. Fill cracks and irregularities with plastic filler as recommended

by manufacturers of the base materials.
C. Start of the installation of base will indicate acceptance of

surface conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials only after finishing operations, including

painting, have been completed.
B. Bond the top-set base to wall surface with adhesive, use

preformed base sections at all internal and external corners.
Install running base tightly on top of flooring with top edge
exactly even with top edges of premolded corners.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. After completion and prior to inspection, clean and remove excess

adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces, using neutral
cleaner as recommended by the base manufacturer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 65 21
VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnish and install vinyl composition tile flooring and

accessories is shown on drawings and specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's technical data for the vinyl composition

tile flooring and accessories to be furnished.
B. Submit manufacturer's standard color charts of vinyl composition

tile flooring, including accessories, showing full range of
colors and patterns available.
C. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance

practices for the vinyl composition tile flooring required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with specified requirements,

provide products of the manufacturer indicated on the finish
schedule on the drawings.
B. Provide colors and patterns as indicated on the drawings and

specified.
C. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8" (3.18mm) thick, homogeneous vinyl or

rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match
flooring, or as selected by Contracting Officer from standard
colors available; not less than 1" (25.4mm) wide.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Of width shown and of required thickness to

protect exposed edge of vinyl composition tile flooring. Provide
units of maximum available length, to minimize number of joints.
1. Material: Extruded aluminum with mill finish, unless

otherwise shown.
2. Type: Butt type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage.
E. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by

flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
F. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by

flooring manufacturer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
G. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex type as recommended by
flooring manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows:
1. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by

resilient flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks,
holes and depressions in subfloors.
2. Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent

adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with
vinyl composition tile flooring adhesives, paint, oils,
waxes and sealers.
B. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect

subfloor.
C. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring

manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in
compliance with manufacturer's directions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Where movable partitions are shown, install vinyl composition

tile flooring before partitions are erected.
B. Install vinyl composition tile flooring using method indicated in

compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend
vinyl composition tile flooring into toe spaces, door reveals,
and into closets and similar openings.
C. Scribe, cut, and fit vinyl composition tile flooring to permanent

fixtures, built-in furniture and cabinets, pipes, outlets and
permanent columns, walls and partitions.
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place

or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish
flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent
marking device.
E. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive

applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 68 04
CARPET TILE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Install carpet tile as indicated on the drawings and specified.

Carpet tile will be furnished by the Government. However,
adhesives, accessories, trim, and other materials that are
associated with carpeting must be provided by the Contractor.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned layout of carpet seaming and

details for binder bars. Include seaming diagrams.
B. Samples:
1. Submit 3 labeled carpet tiles with proper backing, Samples

from each dye lot of carpet required for the Work.
2. Trim and accessories: Submit 12-inch long Samples of each

type trim proposed for the Work.
C. Product Data: Submit the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer's published technical data fully

describing carpet materials, construction, and recommended
installation directions.
2. Technical data and installation instructions for each

adhesive and sealer material.
3. Carpet manufacturer's published instructions for

maintenance, care, cleaning and repair of carpet.
D. Certificate: Submit a certificate from carpet manufacturer that

materials supplied comply with fire hazard resistance standards
specified.
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirements:
1. All materials shall comply with the recommendations of the

ADA Accessibility Guide.
2. Comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District

(SCAQMD) limitation as to Volatile Organic Compound (VOC).
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Carpeting shall meet

requirements of federal, state and local regulatory agencies for
flammability, static control, or other properties as specified.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Carpet Installation: Comply with CRI 104 - Standard for

Installation of Textile Floor Covering Materials.
D. Each color of carpet shall be of the same dye lot.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A Carpet shall be cut, packaged and identified by the factory.

Distributor, dealer, or vendor cutting, re-packaging, and re-
labeling is not permitted.
B. Store material at least 24 hours at room temperature prior to

installation.
C. Deliver fire-rated materials with testing agency labels and

required fire classification numbers attached and legible.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Ventilation and Temperature: Verify areas to be carpeted are

ventilated to remove fumes from installation materials, and areas
are within temperature range recommended by the various material
manufacturers for Project site installation conditions.
B. Protection: Prohibit traffic on carpet for at least 12 hours

after installation. Cover carpet with heavy non-staining kraft
paper in areas where the Work of other trades is to be performed
and/or traffic and passage areas. Protect carpet from damage or
soiling. Maintain protection in place until Substantial
Completion.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Installer shall provide a 2 year labor warranty.
B. Manufacturer shall provide a 10 year material warranty.
C. Manufacturer shall provide a 10 year material warranty for

colorfastness and texture retention.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS FOR MAINTENANCE
A. Deliver extra materials for maintenance to Government. Furnish

2% extra materials matching the products installed, packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels.
1.8 INSTRUCTION
A. Before Substantial Completion of the Work, provide a 2 hour Owner

instruction period for proper maintenance of carpeting.
B. Instruction shall be provided by technical representative of the

carpet manufacturer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE (GOVERNMENT FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED)
A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, carpet tile

shall be Applause No. 28515 Fireworks, by C&A Tandus (or equal),
and have the following properties:
1. Carpet tile shall have flame spread rating of not greater

than 25 on the Steiner Tunnel Test (ASTM E84) or shall have a
critical radiant flux valve of not less than 0.22 watts per
square centimeter on the NBS Flooring Radiant Panel Test.
2. Carpet tile shall have a smoke development rating of not

greater than 450 when flaming, using the National Bureau of
Standards Smoke Chamber Test, or no greater than 200 when
using the Steiner Tunnel Test (ASTM E84).
3. Carpet tile shall not build up a static level exceeding 3.0

KV when tested by the AATCC Test Method 134.
B. Carpet tile backing shall be high performance as standard with

the carpet manufacturer. Carpet shall have the following
physical characteristics:
1. Approximate weight per square yard:
a. Loop pile construction: 24 – 30 oz.
b. Cut pile construction: 38 – 40 oz.
2. Approximate thickness (inches): 0.125
3. Backing Density (approximate): 18.0 lbs/cubic foot
4. Compression Set: 10 lbs
5. Compression Resistance: 7 lbs
C. Carpet tile shall meet the following minimum standards:
1. Dye Method: 100 percent Solution Dyed Method
2. Anti-Microbial Protection: Required both and top bottom.
3. Moisture impermeable: Carpet shall be unaffected by water

and moisture.
4. Calcium Chloride: Carpet shall be able to be installed

with 5 lbs. hydrostatic pressure or better (pounds) per
1000 square feet per 24 hours with a written documentation
from manufacturer, per CRI-104.
5. Stain and Soil Protection: BASF Zeftron 2000, 10 year

stain removal guarantee.
24000 AVILA ROAD
6. Fluorochemical Treatment: Minimum of 500 parts per

million: per CRI-102; after two hot extractions (AATCC171),
minimum 400 Parts Per Million per CRI TM-102.
7. Zippering Warranty: Carpet will not zipper or develop

continuous pile yarn runners in the body of the carpet for
a minimum of 20 years from the date of Substantial
Completion.
8. Edge Ravel: Carpet will not have continuous pile yarn

coming out at seams for a minimum of 20 years from the date
of Substantial Completion.
9. Texture Retention Warranty: The manufacturer warrants that

the carpet will substantially maintain its physical surface
texture against crushing, matting and walking out for 10
years from the date of Substantial Completion.
10. Color fastness to light: Carpet will not fade for 10 years
due to exposure to sunlight.
11. Color fastness to atmospheric: Carpet will not fade for 5

years due to atmospheric conditions.
12. GSA Certification: All carpet shall meet or exceed the

General Services Administration requirements.
13. Run Resistant Strength: Not less than 25 lbs., in

accordance with the Loop Pile Run Resistance test (TP 155-
86), wet or dry for a minimum of 20 years.
14. Indoor Air Quality: Carpet shall meet or exceed CRI and
EPA guidelines (green label certified and labeled).
15. Recycling Program: Carpet shall be eligible to qualify for

a close-loop recycling program (close-loop is a carpet that
upon recycling is turned back into carpet and no part of
the reclaimed carpet enters a landfill) either through the
carpet manufacturer or fiber manufacturer.
D. Carpet shall be from one dye lot, unless otherwise reviewed by

the Architect.
E. Carpet shall be cut, packaged, and identified by the factory.

Distributors, dealers and vendor cutting, re-packaging, and re-
labeling is not permitted.
F. Carpet Edge Strips: Provide A-600-SH Silver Clamp Down

manufactured by Universal Metals, or equal.
G. Adhesive: Water-resistant latex-based releasable adhesive

recommended by carpet manufacturer for direct glue-down carpet
installation. Where primers or sealers are furnished, verify
their compatibility with adhesive.
24000 AVILA ROAD
H. Patching Compounds: Cementitious type, Ardex SD-F, Durabond’s

Webcrete No. 95, or equal, as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, “Carpet Modules,” and
with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: Glue down and install carpet tile as

recommended by the product manufacturer, adhering every tile with
full-spread, using releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.
C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces,

permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets,
pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal
cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-
bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar
openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or

marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked
on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing

carpet tile:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface

blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-

beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16,

"Protection of Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations

and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of
construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 81 17
SOUND INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Encapsulated ceiling sound insulation (hush kits) is specified in

Section 09 84 37. When the work of Section 09 81 17 and Section
09 84 37 are inter-related, coordinate the related tasks to
ensure the proper completion of all inter-related work.
A. Furnish and install sound insulation as indicated on the drawings

and specified. Provide the sound transmission class (STC)
indicated on the drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and

installation instructions for each type of insulation required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one

of the following (or equal):
1. CertainTeed Corp.
2. Schuller Corp.
3. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Provide insulation

produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type I or II,
and as follows:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and

smoke developed values of 25 and 450, respectively.
2. Manufacturers: Provide U.S. Gypsum Co. "thermafiber" sound

attenuation blankets, having a 2-1/2 lb/cubic foot density,
semi-rigid, paperless, spun mineral fiber blanket.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Adhesive: Durabond 200 or 400 adhesive or equal as
recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Sealant shall be a nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,

nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant.
B. Outlet box pads shall be polybutene-butyl sheets, Lowry's

Electrical Box Pads as manufactured by Harry A. Lowry &
Associates, (818) 768-4661. Cover electrical boxes with pads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Require Installer to examine substrates and conditions under

which insulation work is to be performed. Do not proceed with
installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions

of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not
available or do not apply to project conditions, consult
manufacturer's technical representative for specific
recommendations before proceeding with work.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as shown over entire area to be

insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with
insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless

multiple layers are required to attain the required STC.
D. Where sound-rated drywall construction work is indicated, seal

construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints,
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical
sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions.
E. Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer's recommendations for

location of edge trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around
or through construction including sealing of partitions above
acoustical ceilings.
F. Stuff loose glass fiber insulation into hollow metal door frames,
and miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces that would impair the
sound attenuation of the assembly. Compact insulation to produce
a solidly filled void.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 84 37
ENCAPSULATED CEILING SOUND INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install encapsulated ceiling sound insulation as

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and

installation instructions for each type of insulation and vapor
retarder material required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ENCAPSULATED SOUND INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

"Ceiling Hush Kit" by Acoustic Standard Inc. or an "or equal"
product of one of the following:
1. CertainTeed Corp.
2. Knauf Fiber Glass Inc.
3. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
B. Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by

combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply
with ASTM C553, Class B-4; with nominal density of 1.5 lbs. per
cu. ft. and r-value of 4.13 at 75F (23.9C) and maximum flame
spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively;
passing ASTM E136 for testing and combustion characteristics.
C. Limp Barrier: Provide a flexible board insulation 1/2" thick.
D. Polyethylene bag shall be 1-mil polyethylene film of natural

color.
E. The hush kit shall be a sandwich-like assembly of the sound

insulation, limp barrier, and encapsulating polyethylene bag.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions

of installation in each case. Coordinate installation with
Section 09 81 17. Cut units and fit closely around ceiling
hangers and other obstructions.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 09 91 00
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and

finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces,
both new and existing. Surface preparation, priming, and finish
coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming
and surface treatment specified under other sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in

"schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically
indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an
item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is
not designated, the Contracting Officer will select from standard
colors or finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting exposed bare and covered

pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed
steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of
mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Repaint existing coated surfaces.
C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal

surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label

analysis, and application instructions for each material proposed
for use.
1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating

and finish system and application. Identify each material
by the manufacturer's catalog number and general
classification.
B. Samples: Provide samples of each color and material to be

applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on
representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each
separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing samples for review.
Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat

paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
SECTION 09 91 00 PAGE-1
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are
provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various
substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics
of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Contracting Officer of problems anticipated

using the materials specified.
C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade

sale paint material of the various coating types specified.
Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product
identification will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary names are used primarily to designate colors

and are not intended to imply that manufacturer named is
required or to exclude equal products of other
manufacturers.
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original,

unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and
label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a

well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F
(7.2 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to

be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F
(10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32.2 deg C).
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of

surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are
between 45 deg F (7.2 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist, when the relative
humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F (-
15 deg C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces

and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within
temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
1.6 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
basic designation only.
A. COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)
CID A-A-1558..................Paint, Stencil
B. FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
FS TT-P-19....................(Rev. D) Paint, Latex (Acrylic

Emulsion, Exterior Wood and
Masonry)
FS TT-P-29....................(Rev. J) (Int Am. 2) Paint, Latex

Base, Interior, Flat, White and
Tints
FS TT-E-509...................(Rev. C) Enamel, Odorless, Alkyd,

Interior, Semi-gloss, White and
Tints
FS TT-P-1511..................(Rev. B) Paint, Latex (Gloss and

Semi-gloss, Tints and White) (for
Interior Use)
FS TT-P-1728..................(Rev. A) (Am. 1) Paint, Latex Base,

Interior, Flat, Deep-Tone
C. MASTER PAINTERS INSTITIUTE
MPIR..........................Repainting Manual of the Master

Painter Institute
D. MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS (MIL)
DOD-P-15328...................(Rev. D) (Am. 1) Primer (Wash),

Pretreatment (Formula No. 117 for
Metals) (Metric)
MIL-P-24441...................(Rev. A) (Supp. 1) Paint, Epoxy-

Polyamide
24000 AVILA ROAD
MIL-P-28577...................(Rev. B) Primer, Water-Borne,
Acrylic or Modified Acrylic, for
Metal Surfaces
MIL-P-28578...................(Rev. B) Paint, Water-Borne,

Acrylic or Modified Acrylic, Semi-
gloss, for Metal Surfaces
E. MILITARY STANDARDS (MIL-STD)
MIL-STD-101...................(Rev. B) Color Code for Pipelines

and for Compressed Gas Cylinders
F. STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL (SSPC)
SSPC PA 1.....................1985 Shop, Field, and Maintenance

Painting
1.7 COLOR SELECTION
Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified. Where not

indicated or specified, colors shall be selected by the Contracting
Officer. Manufacturers' names and color identification are used for
the purpose of color identification only. Named products are
acceptable for use only if they conform to specified requirements.
Products of other manufacturers are acceptable if the colors
approximate colors indicated and the product conforms to specified
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to the specifications and standards referenced in PART 3. For

materials specified by reference to a specification which has a
Qualified Products List (QPL), the material provided shall have been
tested and approved for inclusion in the QPL.
2.1.1 Deep Tone Colors
Where deep tone colors are indicated or specified and a latex coating
is specified, use FS TT-P-1728, in lieu of FS TT-P-29.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES
Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or

otherwise protect, hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private
property, and other such items not to be coated that are in contact
with surfaces to be coated. Following completion of painting, workmen
skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed items. Restore
surfaces contaminated by coating materials, to original condition and
repair damaged items.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil,

disintegrated coatings, and other substances deleterious to
coating performance as specified for each substrate.
B. Previously painted surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and

repaired in preparation for repainting.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Coating Application
A. Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1

methods are applicable to all substrates, except as modified
herein. Thoroughly work coating materials into joints,
crevices, and open spaces. Touch up damaged coatings before
applying subsequent coats. Interior areas shall be broom clean
and dust free before and during the application of coating
material.
1. Drying Time: Allow time between coats, as recommended by

the coating manufacturer, to permit thorough drying.
Provide each coat in specified condition to receive the
next coat.
2. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or

intermediate coats to dry more than 30 days, or longer than
recommended by the manufacturer, before applying subsequent
coats. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface
preparation if primers or intermediate coats are allowed to
dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent
coatings. Each coat shall cover the surface of the
preceding coat or surface completely, and there shall be a
visually perceptible difference in shades of successive
coats.
3. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from

runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and
variations in colors.
4. Overcoating of previously painted surfaces shall comply

with MPIRM.
3.3.2 Equipment
Apply coatings with approved brushes, approved rollers, or approved

spray equipment, unless specified otherwise. Spray areas made
inaccessible to brushing by items such as ducts and other equipment.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.3.3 Thinning of Paints
Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when

thinning is mandatory for the type of paint being used. Obtain written
permission from the Contracting Officer to use thinners. The written
permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.
3.3.4 Coating Systems
A. Systems by Substrates: Apply coatings that conform to the

respective specifications listed in the following Tables:
Table
I Interior Metal Surfaces

II Building Systems Surfaces: Interior
III Interior Masonry and Wallboard Surfaces
B. Minimum Dry Film Thickness (DFT): Apply paints, primers,

varnishes, enamels, undercoats, and other coatings to a minimum
dry film thickness of 1.5 mil each coat unless specified
otherwise in the Tables. Coating thickness where specified,
refers to the minimum dry film thickness.
C. Coatings for Surfaces Not Specified Otherwise: Coat surfaces

which have not been specified, the same as surfaces having
similar conditions of exposure.
D. Existing Surfaces Damaged During Performance of the Work,

Including New Patches In Existing Surfaces: Coat surfaces with
the following:
1. One coat of primer.
2. One coat of undercoat or intermediate coat.
3. One top coat to match adjacent surfaces.
E. Existing Coated Surfaces To Be Repainted: Apply coatings

conforming to the respective specifications listed in the Tables
herein, except that pretreatments, sealers and fillers need not
be provided on surfaces where existing coatings are soundly
adhered and in good condition. Do not omit undercoats or
primers.
3.3.5 Repainting of Existing Door Frames:
Repaint existing door frames. Depending on the condition of the

existing coating, remove dust, grease, foreign matter, and all unsound
paint, spot prime, or prime the entire surface. Apply 2 top coats.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.4 COATING SYSTEMS FOR METAL
A. Primer: Apply specified ferrous metal primer on the same day that
surface is cleaned. If flash rusting occurs, re-clean the
surface prior to application of primer.
1. Inaccessible Surfaces: Prior to erection, use two coats of

the specified primer on metal surfaces that will be
inaccessible after erection.
2. Shop-primed Surfaces: Touch up exposed substrates and

damaged coatings to protect from rusting prior to applying
field primer.
3. Surface Previously Coated with Epoxy or Urethane: Apply

MIL-P-24441/1, Formula 150, 1.5 mils DFT immediately prior
to application of epoxy or urethane coatings.
4. Pipes and Tubing; The semitransparent film applied to

pipes and tubing at the mill is not to be considered a shop
coat. Apply specified ferrous metal primer prior to
application of subsequent coats.
5. Factory primed metal doors and frames shall be painted not

less than one undercoat and one finish coat.
B. Apply coatings of Table I. "DFT" means dry film thickness in mils.
3.5 COATING SYSTEMS FOR CEMENTITIOUS SUBSTRATES
Apply coatings of Table III.
3.6 ONSITE TOUCH UP OF WOODWORK

Medium Sheen, as approved by the Contraction Officer.
B. Woodwork shall be factory finished to the maximum practicable

C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with AWI quality standard for

sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed
surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of woodwork.
D. Medium Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for

grade, finish system, staining, effect, and sheen, with sheen
measured on 60 deg gloss meter per ASTM D523.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWI Finish System #2: Catalyzed lacquer, VOC compliant.
3. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Effect: Closed grain (filled finish).
5. Sheen: Medium-gloss rubbed effect 35-45 deg.
3.7 PIPING AND CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
Piping And Conduit Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed

Spaces: Provide in accordance with MIL-STD-101. Place stenciling in
clearly visible locations. On piping and conduits not covered by MIL-
STD-101, stencil approved names or code letters, in letters a minimum
of 1/2-inch (12.7mm) high for piping and a minimum of 2-inches (50.8mm)
high elsewhere. Stencil arrow-shaped markings on the piping and
conduit to indicate the direction of flow. Use black stencil paint,
CID A-A-1558.
3.8 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
In addition to meeting the previously specified requirements,

demonstrate the mobility of moving components, including but not
limited to swinging and sliding doors, cabinets, and windows with
operable sash, for inspection by the Contracting Officer. Perform this
demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of the coatings
have elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment.
TABLE - I
INTERIOR METAL SURFACES
SURFACE/ PRIMER DFT INTERMEDIATE DFT TOPCOAT DFT

AREA COAT
_____________________________________________________________________________
A. New MIL-P-28577 1.5 MIL-P-28578 1.5 MIL-P-28578 1.5

Steel on non-shop-
primed surfaces
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Exist- MIL-P-28577 1.5 N.A. MIL-P-28578 1.5

ing Spot Prime
Steel
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. New Pretreat Galva- DOD-P-15328

nized MIL-P-285771.5 N.A. MIL-P28578
Surfaces
_____________________________________________________________________________
24000 AVILA ROAD
TABLE - II
BUILDING SYSTEMS SURFACES: INTERIOR

AREA COAT
_____________________________________________________________________________
1. Mechanical, Electrical, and Miscellaneous Metal Items, Except

Hot Metal Surfaces and New Prefinished Equipment: Prefinishing
of new mechanical and electrical equipment is specified in the
section covering the particular item. Paint copper pipe
exposed in interior spaces.
A. Surfaces
Not Adjacent to 2 coats of same coating as used
Painted for coating metal in same space
Surfaces
MIL-P-28577 1.5 MIL-P-28578 1.5 MIL-P-28578 1.5

_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Surfaces Coating systems as specified.

Adjacent Color of topcoat to match adjacent surfaces.
to 1.5 mils dry film thickness for each coat.
Painted
Surfaces
_____________________________________________________________________________
C. New
Exposed MIL-P-24441/1 3.0 MIL-P-24441/3 3.0
Piping
_____________________________________________________________________________
2. Insulation and Surfaces of Insulation Coverings:
A. Plastic N.A. FS TT-P-19 1.5 FS TT-P-19 1.5

Foam
Insulation
_____________________________________________________________________________
B. Cloth and Glue size and N.A. Coating to

Paper primer rec- match
Covering ommended by adjacent
on material surfaces
Insulation manufacturer,1 coat each
_____________________________________________________________________________
24000 AVILA ROAD
TABLE - III
INTERIOR WALLBOARD SURFACES

AREA COAT
____________________________________________________________________________
A. Wallboard FS TT-P-19 1.5 N.A. FS TT-P-29 1.5

Ceiling &
Soffits
FS TT-P-19 1.5 N.A. FS TT-E-509, 1.5

Flat
FS TT-P-19 1.5 N.A. FS TT-P-1511, 1.5

Eggshell
____________________________________________________________________________
B. Wallboard FS TT-P-19 1.5 N.A. FS TT-P-1511 1.5

in Toilets
Semi Gloss
and Other Interior High-Humidity Areas
____________________________________________________________________________
TABLE - IV
INTERIOR WOOD DOORS
SURFACE/ PRIMER DFT INTERMED- DFT TOPCOAT DFT

AREA IATE COAT
_____________________________________________________________________________
A. Wood FS TT-P-001984 1.5 FS TT-P-1511 1.5 FS TT-P-1511 1.5

Doors
Semi-Gloss Semi-Gloss
Opaque
Finish
_____________________________________________________________________________
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 10 14 10
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install signage as indicated on the drawings and

specified.
B. New signage shall match the existing signage as closely as

practicable
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts

consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full
range of colors and finishes.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that
fail in materials or workmanship within a 5-year warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Match the existing materials as closely as practicable.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of

abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within
one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance
of other components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize
contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting

methods that comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
-- END OF SECTION --
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 10 22 15
SECURITY MESH WITHIN PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install security mesh within partitions as indicated

on the drawings and as specified.
B. Coordinate inspection of installation with Tenant. Tenant’s

approval of installation shall be required prior to drywall
installation. Comply with Tenant directives regarding
installation inspection and performance.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings of the security mesh prior to fabrication

and delivery to the job-site. Indicate dimensions, materials,
finishes and fastening details.
B. Submit manufacturer's detailed installation instructions and

descriptive data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SECURITY MESH WITHIN PARTITIONS
A. Security mesh shall be fabricated of high carbon, hard drawn,

alloy steel fabric as indicated on the drawings.
B. Secure the wire mesh to the framing with vandal resistant

fastenings.
C. Finish: Security mesh shall be supplied with the manufacturer's

standard rust inhibiting mill applied finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install the mesh within partitions; screwed with 1” washers to

metal framing as indicated on the drawings.
B. The mesh shall be affixed in a manner that will deter disassembly

with common hand tools such as hammers, pliers, or screw drivers.
Make the assembly difficult, if not impossible, to penetrate the
partition by head butting, kicking or punching. If utilized, all
fasteners, screws, and nuts shall be so set that they can be
accessed from the room side of the partition.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 10 44 12
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND BRACKETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets, and brackets as indicated

on the Contract Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for
complete and proper installation. Provide surface-mounted units
as indicated on the drawings.
Note that fire extinguisher cabinets, extinguishers, and brackets

will be located in the field where and as directed by the Fire
Protection Engineer.
1.2 UL LISTED PRODUCTS
A. Fire extinguishers shall be UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark"

for rating, and classification of extinguisher.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the manufacturer's descriptive and technical data for

approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide products by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., Potter-

Roemer Inc., Larsen's Manufacturing Co., or equal Design is based
on products by one of the above specified manufacturers will also
be acceptable.
B. Provide multi-purpose dry chemical for Class A-B-C fires, 15-lb

capacity, UL rating 4A-60BC, red enamel finish. Cabinets shall
be 20 gauge steel with door and trim of type 304 stainless steel,
No.4 finish surface mounted.
C. Brackets: Provide Potter-Roemer No. 3909, equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to the recommendations of the

manufacturer, and as directed by the Fire Protection Engineer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 21 13 13
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General

and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.
2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Fire-department connections.
4. Sprinklers.
5. Alarm devices.
6. Pressure gages.
7. Other fire sprinkler related appurtenances
A. Scope: Provide a complete wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system,

and associated equipment, ready for operation.
B. Description of Work: The work includes modifying the layout and

installation of an existing wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system to
afford complete fire protection throughout.
C. Compliance: The entire wet-pipe automatic sprinkler system shall

be designed in accordance with the specification. Any reference
to "authority having jurisdiction" shall be interpreted to mean
the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer. All material and
equipment used shall be listed or approved by UL, FM or another
nationally recognized testing agency approved by the GSA Regional
Fire Protection Engineer, for their intended use and service.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Design automatic sprinkler systems in accordance with

all required and advisory provisions of NFPA 13, including all the
Annexes, except where modified herein, by hydraulic calculations
for light hazard occupancy with uniform water distribution over
the design area. Each system shall be designed using the
area/density design approach as defined by NFPA 13. The room
design method shall not be used. Design and provide each system
to give full consideration to blind spaces, piping, electrical
equipment, ducts and other construction and equipment in
24000 AVILA ROAD
accordance with detailed working drawings to be submitted for

approval. Design systems for earthquake protection.
1. General Design Area Sizes and Densities
a. Provide the appropriate sprinkler design density based

on the occupancy hazard or commodity classification of
the space being protected in accordance with NFPA 13.
b. The discharge area shall be the hydraulically most

demanding 1,500 sq ft except as specifically noted
below. There shall be no reduction in area for the
use of quick response sprinklers.
2. Specific Design Area Sizes and Densities
a. Storage Rooms in excess of 1,500 sq. ft. [140 sq. m.]

shall be sprinkler protected in accordance to NFPA 13
Ordinary Hazard Group II.
b. Loading Docks shall be sprinkler protected in

accordance to NFPA 13 Ordinary Hazard Group II.
c. Trash collection rooms shall be sprinkler protected in

accordance to NFPA 13 Ordinary Hazard Group II.
d. Kitchens shall be sprinkler protected in accordance to

NFPA 13 Ordinary Hazard Group I.
e. Archives shall be sprinkler protected at a density of

.30 gpm/sq. ft. [12.2 l/sq. m.] over the most
hydraulically remote 1,500 sq. ft. [140 sq. m.] with
ordinary temperature rated sprinkler protected. Each
sprinkler shall cover no more than 100 sq. ft. [9.3
sq. m.]
f. Chemical Laboratories shall be sprinkler protected at

a density of .15 gpm/sq. ft. [6.1 l/sq. m.] over the
most hydraulically remote 3,000 sq. ft. [280 sq. m.]
g. Compact Mobile Shelving, Track file system storage

shall be sprinkler protected at a density of .30
gpm/sq. ft. [12.2 l/ sq. m.] over the most
hydraulically remote 1,500 sq. ft. [140 sq. m.] Each
sprinkler shall cover no more than 100 sq. ft. [9.3
sq. m.]
B. Total Combined Inside & Outside Hose Allowances: Hydraulic

calculations shall include an allowance of 250 gpm for hose
streams, added at the point of connection to the water supply.
C. Water Supply Information not available. Existing water supply

data to be determined by contractor if necessary
D. Sprinkler System Layout: Approved by GSA Regional Fire Protection

Engineer.
E. Other Design Criteria:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10

percent, including losses through water-service piping,
valves, and backflow preventers.
2. Maximum protection area per sprinkler shall be per NFPA 13

unless noted otherwise.
3. Velocities in all piping shall not exceed 20 ft/sec (6.1

m/sec).
4. Interior pipe coatings are specifically prohibited where not

listed for fire protection use.
5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement shall be

according to NFPA 13.
6. For SCIF rooms:
a. Use dielectric fittings to isolate SCIF room sprinkler

pipe from rest of sprinkler system.
b. Isolate hangers from building structure.
7. For Information Technology Equipment spaces:
a. Provide a separate control valve, waterflow switch and

tamper switch.
b. Use concealed sprinklers.
c. Provide a separate test connection.
8. For Detention/Holding Areas:
a. Use metallic link, “institutional” type sprinklers.
9. For Open office space:
a. Extended coverage sprinklers shall not be used.
10. For areas subject to temperatures below 40 degrees F:
a. Provide dry pendent or dry sidewall sprinklers.
b. Anti-Freeze systems shall not be installed.
c. Heat Tape systems shall not be installed.
F. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects

of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13.
1. Seismic Expansion Joints: Provide flexible piping systems

of a length that exceeds the maximum design movement of
seismic expansion joints. The use of 90 degree fittings in
pipe as shown in NFPA 13 is specifically prohibited.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals to be in accordance with Division 1, Submittal

Procedures unless otherwise indicated by this section.
B. Product Data: Submit six (6) bound sets of submittals to the

Project Manager for each type of product indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
and furnished specialties and accessories. Partial submittals will
not be acceptable and will be returned without review. Before any
work is commenced, the submittal must be approved by the GSA
Regional Fire Protection Engineer. Manufacturer's data shall be
provided for all products listed in Part 2 of this specification
and annotated to show the specific model, type and size of each
item:
C. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems, submit six (6) set
of drawings to the Project Manager that include all information as
required by NFPA 13. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform
sized sheets not less than 30 in by 42 in (760 by 1070 mm).
Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned
without review. Before any work is commenced, the submittal must
be approved by the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer. Include
plans, elevations, sections, details, isometric diagram of
sprinkler system riser piping showing all control valve locations,
and attachments to other work.
1. Layout indicating details, plan view, elevations and

sections of the system piping. Indicate the location of
sprinklers and piping in relation to the ceiling layout,
showing pipe lengths and sizes.
2. Detailed riser diagram including isometric diagrams showing

schematic of systems supply, supply connection, devices,
valves, pipe and fittings.
3. Provide three (3) sets of CAD based electronic shop drawings

to the Project Manager; each set shall include DWG and DWF
file formats, including all associated externally referenced
electronic files (Xref’s). These files shall contain
externally referenced files that have been inserted (do not
bind the Xref’s). Provide both DWG and DWF file formats on
three (3) separate recordable CD-R’s (do not use CD-RW’s or
DVD-R/RW’s). In addition, provide in each set a read only
PDF copy of each As-Built drawing for archiving purposes.
PDF files shall be created using the PDF Creator utility.
These three (3) CD-R’s shall be formatted, written to, and
the recording session closed in such a manner as to prevent
additional electronic file transfers to the recordable CD-
R’s.
D. Hydraulic Calculations. Submit name of hydraulic program and

comply with the following:
1. Where a single riser supplies water to more than one floor

or level, separate calculations shall be performed for the
hydraulically most demanding area of each floor or level
served.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Minimum operating pressure of any sprinkler shall be

according to NFPA 13 and appropriate UL listing or FM
approval.
E. Verification of Qualification. Prior to installation, submit

documentation, to the Project Manager, showing that the Contractor
has successfully installed automatic fire suppression sprinkler
systems of comparable size, type and design as specified herein or
that the Contractor has a firm contractual agreement with a
Subcontractor having such experience.
1. The data shall include the names and locations of at least

three installations where the Contractor, or Subcontractor,
installed such systems.
2. The Contractor, or Subcontractor, shall certify that each

system has performed satisfactorily for a period of not less
than one year.
3. The Contractor of Subcontract shall submit the NICET/PE

certification/license number and expiration date.
F. As Built Drawings:
1. General: Prepare and submit to the Project Manager six (6)

sets of detailed "As-Built Drawings". The drawings shall
show the system as installed, including all deviations from
both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings.
The drawings shall also include all information as required
by NFPA 13. The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized
sheets not less than 30 in by 42 in (760 by 1070 mm).
Submit these drawings within two weeks after the final
acceptance test of the system.
2. Provide three (3) sets of CAD based electronic as-built

drawings to the Project Manager; each set shall include DWG
and DWF file formats, including all associated externally
referenced electronic files (Xref’s). These files shall
contain externally referenced files that have been inserted
(do not bind the Xref’s). Provide both DWG and DWF file
formats on three (3) separate recordable CD-R’s (do not use
CD-RW’s or DVD-R/RW’s). In addition, provide in each set a
read only PDF copy of each As-Built drawing for archiving
purposes. PDF files shall be created using the PDF Creator
utility. These three (3) CD-R’s shall be formatted, written
to, and the recording session closed in such a manner as to
prevent additional electronic file transfers to the
recordable CD-R’s.
G. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Submit test certification,

to the Project Manager, for all pipe and fittings. Indicate and
interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: Not less than [ ] calendar days

prior to the final acceptance testing of the entire system, and
24000 AVILA ROAD
for use during the instruction period hereinafter specified,

provide six (6) bound copies of an Operation and Maintenance
Manual to the Project Manager. The manual shall include an index,
copies of all approved shop drawings and submittal materials
(updated to as-built), and a complete parts list of all
components. The manual shall also include, for each item, the
manufacturer's name, the serial number of the part, an ordering
number, if appropriate, and a physical description of the part.
The manual shall include all data relative to alarm valves,
waterflow switches and tamper switches.
A. Qualifications:
1. Layout and hydraulic calculation shall be performed by a

NICET Level III or IV Technician certified in Automatic
Sprinkler Systems Layout or a Registered Fire Protection
Engineer.
2. Installation shall be performed by a licensed sprinkler

contractor who is experienced in the layout and installation
of automatic sprinkler systems (minimum 3 years) of
comparable size and type.
Coordinate with 1.4C
3. Installer's responsibilities include layout, fabrication,

and installation of sprinkler systems. Layout calculations
shall be based on the fire pump test data provided.
4. Drawings shall be sealed by a licensed Professional Fire

Protection Engineer or be stamped by a NICET Level III or IV
Technician certified in Automatic Sprinkler Systems Layout.
B. Applicable References: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties,

accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the
latest editions of the following codes and standards:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), including all

amendments and annexes
a. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
b. NFPA 14, “Standpipe and Hose Systems”
2. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL)
a. “Fire Protection Equipment Directory"
3. Factory Mutual Global (FM)
a. Approval Guide
b. Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 2-2, “Installation

Rules For Suppression Mode Automatic Sprinklers”
4. American Standard for Testing Materials (ASTM)
24000 AVILA ROAD
a. ASTM A53/A53M, “Standard Specification for Pipe,

Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and
Seamless”
b. ASTM A47/A47M, “Standard Specification for Ferritic

Malleable Iron Castings”
c. ASTM A153, “Standard Specification for Zinc Coating

(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware”
d. ASTM A234/A234M, “Standard Specification for Piping

Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature Service”
e. ASTM A536, “Standard Specification for Ductile Iron

Castings”
f. ASTM A733, “Standard Specification for Welded and

Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless Steel
Pipe Nipples”
g. ASTM A795, “Standard Specification for Black and Hot-

Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless
Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use”
h. ASTM A865, “Standard Specification for Threaded

Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe Joints”
i. ASTM B75/B75M, “Standard Specification for Seamless

Copper Tube”
j. ASTM B88, “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper

Water Tube”
k. ASTM B584, “Standard Specification for Copper Alloy

Sand Castings for General Applications”
l. ASTM B633, “Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel”
m. ASTM F2014, “Standard Specification for Non-Reinforced

Extruded Tee Connections for Piping Applications”
5. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

a. AWWA C110, “Standard for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron
Fittings for Water”
b. AWWA C606, “Standard for Grooved and Shouldered

Joints”
6. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
a. ASME B1.20.1, “Pipe Threads, General Purpose”
b. ASME B16.1, “Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged

Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250”
24000 AVILA ROAD
c. ASME B16.3, “Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings”
d. ASME B16.4, “Gray Iron Threaded Fittings”
e. ASME B16.5, “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS

1/2 through 24”
f. ASME B16.9, “Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding

Fittings”
g. ASME B16.21, “Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe

Flanges”
h. ASME B16.22, “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder

Joint Pressure Fittings”
i. ASME B16.24, “Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and

Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 600, 900, 1500 and
2500”
j. ASME B18.2.1, “Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch

Series”
7. American Welding Society (AWS)
a. A5.8, “Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and

Braze Welding”
b. D10.12/D10.12M, “Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe”
8. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS)
a. SP-123, “Non-Ferrous Threaded and Solder-Joint Unions

for Use With Copper Water Tube”
9. Copper Development Association (CDA)
a. Copper Tube Handbook
10. Federal Specifications
a. TT-P-636
b. California Building Code (CBC)
C. Guarantee. The Contractor shall guarantee labor, materials, and

equipment provided under this contract against defects for a
period of one year after the date of final acceptance of this work
by the Government. Final Acceptance includes, but is not limited
to, the receipt of as-built drawings and operation and maintenance
manuals Contractor shall be able to provide qualified personnel
to site within a two (2) hour time frame and be available 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
D. Conflicts. The system shall be installed in accordance with the

drawings, specifications and referenced publications. Any
conflicts between these documents shall be brought to the
24000 AVILA ROAD
attention of the the Project Manager, and the GSA Regional Fire
A. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt

sprinkler service to facilities without prior approval of the GSA
Regional Fire Protection Engineer and the facility’s Senior
Property Manager:
1. Existing Sprinkler Equipment: Existing sprinkler equipment

shall be left in-service as indicated in the contract
drawings
2. When sprinkler interruption is necessary, a written plan for

putting the system back into service shall be submitted to
the GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer and the facility’s
Senior Property Manager.
3. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new system by

the Government, all existing equipment so indicated shall be
removed and all damaged surfaces shall be restored as herein
specified.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other

construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures,
HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
B. Sprinklers shall be located in center of ceiling tile in all

acoustical tile drop ceilings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 All products shall be UL listed or FM approved for Fire Protection

Service unless specifically allowed otherwise by this specification.
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be steel, ductile iron, or copper.
2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A795, in NPS 2 in (DN 50) and
smaller. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match
joining method.
B. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A795, Schedule 10 in pipe

greater than NPS 2 in (DN 50). Pipe ends may be factory or field
formed to match joining method.
C. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A795, Schedule

40 steel pipe with threaded ends.
D. Steel Couplings: ASTM A865, threaded.
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard

pattern.
F. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL listed.
G. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
H. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
I. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M and ASME B16.9.
J. Malleable Iron Fittings: ASMT B16.3, Class 150
K. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
2. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A47/A47M,

malleable-iron casting or ASTM A536, ductile-iron casting;
with dimensions matching steel pipe.
3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606

rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated by this
specification, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K drawn copper.
B. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure

fittings.
C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
D. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock

body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and
solder-joint or threaded ends.
E. Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:
1. Grooved-End, Copper Fittings: ASTM B75 (ASTM B75M), copper

tube or ASTM B584, bronze castings.
2. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions,

with design similar to AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing
sections, EPDM-rubber gasket suitable for fire protection
service, and bolts and nuts.
F. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections:
1. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM

F2014.
2.5 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8

inch (3.2 mm) thick.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face

Flanges: Full-face gaskets.
2. Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-

Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets.
B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel

unless otherwise indicated by this specification.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-

phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise
indicated by this specification.
D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding

materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of
steel pipe being welded.
2.6 VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175

psig (1200 kPa).
B. Ball Valves:
1. Standard: UL listed, except with ball instead of disc.
2. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with
threaded ends.
3. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body
with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
4. Valves NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
C. Bronze Butterfly Valves:
1. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
2. Body Material: Bronze.
3. End Connections: Threaded.
D. Iron Butterfly Valves:
2. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
3. Style: Lug or wafer.
4. End Connections: Grooved.
E. Check Valves:
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Type: Swing check.
3. Body Material: 2-1/2 (DN 65) inches or more: Cast iron.
4. Body Material: 2 inches or less (DN 50): Bronze with screw

ends
5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
F. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:
2. Body Material: Bronze.
G. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:
H. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:
1. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).minimum.
2. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.
b. Body Material: Bronze.
c. End Connections: Threaded.
3. Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.
b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
4. Valve Operation: Integral electrical, 115-V ac, prewired,

two-circuit, supervisory switch visual indicating device.
2.7 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES
B. Provide Angle Valves, Ball Valves, Globe Valves, Plug Valves
2.8 SPECIALTY VALVES
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig

(1200 kPa) minimum.
b. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250 psig (1725

kPa) minimum.
3. Size: Same as connected piping.
B. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:
2. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
3. Size: NPS ¾ (DN 20). .
2.9 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:
1. Use welded, threaded or grooved outlets only.
2. Mechanical fastened tees are not permitted.
3. Where welded outlets are used, cutouts shall be fastened to

the pipe from which they are cut.
B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:
2. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice,

sight glass, and integral test valve.
4. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
C. Sprinkler Inspector’s Test Fittings:
2. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight

glass.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
2.10 SPRINKLERS
1. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200

kPa) minimum.
2. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250

psig (1725 kPa) minimum.
3. Sprinklers with O-rings are not permitted.
B. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Characteristics: Nominal ½-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with

Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and 8.0 for “Ordinary”
temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated
by this specification or required by application.
2. Provide 1/2 inch NPS thread for K5.6 and 3/4 inch NPS thread
for K8.0.
C. Sprinkler Finishes:
1. Chrome plated.
2. Bronze.
3. Painted.
D. Special Coatings:
1. Corrosion resistant coating.
E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the

following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for
concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with
sprinklers.
1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, two piece, with 1-

inch (25-mm) vertical adjustment.
F. Sprinkler Guards:
1. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to

sprinkler.
2.11 ALARM DEVICES
A. Water-Flow Indicators:
1. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
2. Components: Two double-throw circuit switches for isolated

alarm and auxiliary contacts, complete with factory-set,
24000 AVILA ROAD
field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and

tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.
3. Type: Paddle operated with screw terminals.
4. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa)..
5. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
6. Time Delay Feature: from 0 to 45 seconds
B. Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Type: Electrically supervised with screw terminals.
2. Components: Double-pole, double-throw switch with normally

closed contacts.
3. Design: Signals that control valve is in other than fully

open position.
C. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:
1. Type: Electrically supervised with screw terminals.
2. Components: Double-throw switch with normally closed

contacts.
3. Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in

other than fully open position.
2.12 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Type: Liquid filled
B. Dial Size: 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.
C. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum
D. Water System Piping Gage: Include “WATER” or “AIR/WATER” label on

dial face.
2.13 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and

floor plates.
B. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: [Polished chrome-plated] [or]

[rough-brass] finish with set-screws.
C. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass

with chrome-plated finish.
D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with

[set-screw] [or] [spring clips].
E. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Escutcheons: [Polished chrome-plated]

[or] [rough-brass] finish with concealed hinge and set-screw.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: Chrome-plated finish with

[concealed] [exposed-rivet] hinge, [set-screw] [or] [spring
clips].
G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange [with holes for

fasteners].
H. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.
2.14 SLEEVES
A. Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, standard weight,

plain ends.
2.15 HANGERS
A. Materials available by product type. Provide materials to comply

with location and application requirements unless noted otherwise
on drawings and schedules.
1. Pipe rings - Malleable iron, carbon steel.
2. Clevis - Carbon steel.
3. Steel pipe clamps - Carbon steel, alloy, stainless steel.
4. Socket clamps - Carbon steel.
5. Beam clamps - Malleable/ductile iron, hardened steel, carbon

steel, forged steel.
6. Structural attachments - Carbon steel, malleable iron.
7. Ceiling plates/ceiling flanges - Plastic, cast iron,

malleable iron.
8. Concrete inserts and attachments – Malleable iron, carbon

steel; stainless steel body, fiberglass bars, polypropylene
disc (iron cross design).
9. Rod attachments - Carbon steel, malleable iron, forged

steel.
10. Pipe supports - Carbon steel, cast iron.
11. Pipe shields and saddles - Carbon steel, alloy steel,

stainless steel.
12. Pipe rolls - Cast iron, carbon steel.
13. Guides - Carbon steel; slides, carbon steel with PTFE slide
plates.
14. Engineered hangers - Carbon steel, stainless steel, chrome

molybdenum steel.
15. Powder driven studs – Not permitted
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Finishes: Provide finishes to comply with location and application

requirements unless noted otherwise on drawings and schedules.
1. Electro-plating galvanizing process per ASTM B633.
2. Hot Dipped galvanizing process per ASTM A153.
3. Epoxy paint.
4. Zinc-rich paint.
5. Copper
6. Standard primer shall meet Fed Spec TT-P-636.
2.16 SIGNAGE
A. Provide [plastic], [steel] or [aluminum ]signs for each valve and

to identify hydraulic design. Signs shall have white lettering on
a red background with holes for easy attachment. Enter pertinent
data for each system on the hydraulic placard.
2.17 SPRINKLER CABINET
A. Provide metal cabinet(s) as required containing a stock of spare

sprinkler heads of all types and ratings installed as well as any
special tools required for removal or replacement of the heads.
The number of spare sprinklers shall conform to NFPA 13. The
cabinet shall be located, in an area where the temperature will
not exceed 100 degrees F (38 degrees C), and approved by the GSA
Regional Fire Protection Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
A. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain,

and other accessories indicated at connection to water-
distribution piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at

connection to water supply.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and

diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping.
Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require

written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File
written approval with GSA Regional Fire Protection Engineer
before deviating from approved working plans.
B. Where required to be protected against damage from earthquakes,

install seismic restraints on piping in accordance with NFPA 13.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs

from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Reductions in pipe
sizes shall be made with tapered fittings, bushings shall not be
permitted.
D. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according

to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA
13. Trapeze type supports shall utilize angle iron. Use of pipe
for trapeze supports is prohibited.
E. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler

test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure
gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft
metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage
and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where
they will not be subject to temperatures below 40 degrees F.
Install pressure gages on both sides of every pressure reducing
valve.
F. Provide a check valve at the connection to the system riser(s) at

each floor connection.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples,

transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure
ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated by this
specification.
B. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end

piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN
65) and larger end connections.
C. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends
of steel pipe.
D. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of
pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.
E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according

to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join
pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe

threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with

threads that are corroded or damaged.
F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12,

using qualified processes and welding operators according to the
requirements and recommendations of NFPA 13.
1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do

not weld to galvanized-steel pipe.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Affix cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in

the walls of pipe for flow switches and non-threaded pipe
connections to the respective waterflow switch or pipe
connection near to the pipe from where they were cut.
G. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in

end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with
housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and
grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved
joints.
H. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's

"Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
I. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of

tube according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end
fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
J. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters

compatible with materials of both piping systems.
3.4 VALVE AND ALARM DEVICE INSTALLATION
A. Install water flow indicators and valve supervisory devices in

accordance with Division 28, GSA Address/Analog Fire Alarm
specification.
B. All valves shall be electronically supervised.
C. Valves must be accessible from floor level, and shall not be

installed above ceilings.
D. Where valves are installed above 6 ft. (2 m.) install chain

drives.
E. Operation of valve supervisory device shall generate a supervisory

signal upon no more than two complete turns of the valve wheel or
a closure of 20 percent, whichever is less.
F. For OS& valves, provide a roll cut “U” groove in the valve stem
the same size as the supervisory switch shaft.
3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Temperature Rating: Install ordinary temperature sprinklers,

unless modified herein the specification. Sprinklers installed in
higher ambient temperature areas shall be installed in accordance
with NFPA 13.
1. For sprinklers installed directly underneath skylights,

install intermediate temperature sprinklers.
2. Elevator Machine Rooms: Install intermediate temperature

sprinklers.
3. Emergency Generator Rooms: Install high temperature

sprinklers.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Sprinkler Guards: Provide mechanical guards as required to

prevent mechanical damage in accordance with NFPA 13, and as
follows:
1. All sprinklers installed below 7 ft. (2.1 m.)
2. All sprinklers installed in elevator machine rooms.
3. All sprinklers installed in electrical distribution rooms.
C. Corrosion Protection: Provide corrosion-resistant sprinklers in

locations where chemicals, moisture, or other corrosive vapors
sufficient to cause corrosion of such devices exist, and as
follows:
1. Install corrosion-resistant sprinklers in all showers.
2. Install corrosion-resistant sprinklers in all open parking

garages
3. Install corrosion-resistant sprinklers where exposed to the

exterior.
D. Quick Response Sprinklers:
1. Install in all areas where listed for use and in accordance

with NFPA 13.
2. Do not install in elevator machine rooms.
E. Flexible sprinkler fittings shall not be used.
3.6 DRAINS
A. Pipe drains to discharge at safe points outside of the building or

to sight cones attached to drains of adequate size to readily
carry the full flow from each drain under maximum pressure. Do not
provide a direct drain connection to sewer system or discharge
into sinks. Install drips and drains where necessary and required
by NFPA 13.
1. All drain discharge outlets on the outside of the building

shall be located no higher than 1 foot (0.3 meters) above
grade level.
2. Drains provided as part of floor control valves shall

discharge to an express drain located adjacent to the
sprinkler riser. Drains shall be of the combination
inspector's test/drain type.
3.7 SIGNAGE
A. Securely attach identification signs to control valves, drain

valves, and test valves. Locate hydraulic placard information
signs at each sectional control valve where there is a zone water
flow switch. Where more than one sprinkler zone is provided, signs
shall indicate the specific zone served by the valve.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.8 FIRESTOPPING AND FIREPROOFING
A. Firestop all holes for piping, or other penetrations which pass

through floor slabs, fire-rated walls, partitions with fire-rated
doors, vertical service shafts, or any fire-rated assemblies in
accordance with Division 7, Firestopping. Existing holes through
which new piping for this project passes shall be totally
firestopped in a manner that restores the fire protection rating
of the penetrated wall, floor, ceiling or other structure.
B. [Where structural fireproofing is disturbed, damaged, or destroyed

as a result of the sprinkler system installation, the contractor
shall be responsible for restoring the fire proofing to the
required fire resistance rating in an approved manner. This
restoration shall be done in accordance with the UL listing or FM
approval of the fireproofing materials, requirements of the
building, fire, and life safety codes in effect for the project,
and in accordance with Division 7, Applied Fireproofing.]
3.9 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing

through penetrations in concrete or masonry walls and floors.
B. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless
otherwise indicated by this specification.
C. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm)

annular clear space between sleeve and pipe. In seismic zones,
for pipe 2½ inch (65 mm) and smaller install sleeves that are
large enough to provide 1 inch (25 mm) annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe, for pipe larger than 2½ (65 mm) inch install
sleeves that are large enough to provide 2 inch (50 mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe.
D. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and Roofs: Provide

hot-dip galvanized steel, ductile-iron, or cast-iron sleeves.
Core drilling of masonry and concrete may be provided in lieu of
pipe sleeves when cavities in the core-drilled hole are completely
grouted smooth.
E. Sleeves in Other Than Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, and

Roofs: Provide 26 gauge galvanized sheet steel.
F. Escutcheon plates shall be installed where exposed piping

penetrates through walls, ceilings and floors.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Hydrostatically test wet-pipe sprinkler system, as required

by NFPA 13, in the presence of the GSA Regional Fire
Protection Engineer or their designated representative. The
Contractor and an authorized representative from each
supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the
preliminary test. Test waterflow alarms, tamper switches,
24000 AVILA ROAD
and all other devices for smooth and correct operation.

Test the waterflow alarms by flowing water through the
inspector's test connection. When tests are completed and
corrections made, submit signed and dated “Contractor’s
Material and Test Certificates” in accordance with NFPA 13,
with a request for final inspection and tests.
2. Test and adjust controls. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA

13.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-

department equipment.
B. Final Inspection and Testing: Advise the GSA Regional Fire

Protection Engineer when hydrostatic and alarm tests have been
completed and all necessary corrections made, so as to permit
final inspection and testing. Submit request for testing at least
15 calendar days prior to test date. A final acceptance test will
not be scheduled until operation and maintenance manuals have been
received by the Contracting Officer or designated representative.
1. At the final test, a material and test certificate must be

provided in accordance with NFPA 13.
2. Submit up-to-date red-lined shop drawings to the GSA

Regional Fire Protection Engineer or designated
representative at the final test. These drawings shall be
undamaged sets of prints of the shop drawings, with changes
from the original drawings marked in red. Up-to-date
drawings shall be maintained on site throughout
construction.
3. The final test shall be witnessed by GSA Regional Fire

Protection Engineer. The Contractor and an authorized
representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in
attendance at the final test.
4. Final testing shall include, but is not limited to, full

flow testing through both the main drain and the inspector's
test connection as well as testing of all waterflow and
tamper switches.
5. Provide all equipment, services and labor to properly

perform all required tests. The Regional GSA Regional Fire
Protection Engineer shall supervise all testing.
C Coordination of Installation:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. The Contractor shall coordinate this sprinkler system work

with other trades to avoid conflicts, assure system
completion and testing within the project schedule and to
assure a quality, workmanlike finished product. In occupied
buildings the Contractor shall coordinate all work with the
GSA Property Manager to limit the disruptions to government
business and activities. This may mean altered scheduling,
after hours work, and/or sequencing construction activities
to avoid disruptions to occupants of the building.
2. Disruptions to existing automatic sprinkler systems shall be

kept to a minimum or avoided. Sprinkler systems outside of
the construction project shall be kept in service at all
times in a method approved by the GSA Regional Fire
3. Delineate phasing of construction to ensure that

installations of new systems are expedited, and existing
systems are kept in service until the replacement system is
operational.
3.11 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory

finish.
C. Paint sprinkler pipe as required by Division 9, Painting.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 05 00.01
COMMON WORK REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Common Work Requirement for Mechanical is specifically applicable

to Division 23 Sections.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish materials and perform labor required to execute this work

as indicated on the drawings, as specified and as required to
complete the work of this section, except as otherwise herein
specifically excluded.
B. General provision:
1. Comply with all the specification sections of the project.
2. This Division is an integrated whole comprising

interrelated and interdependent Sections and shall be
considered in its entirety in determining requirements.
3. Applies to all Work and requirements of Division 23.
C. Provide a complete and operable installation, including all

labor, supervision, materials, equipment, tools, apparatus,
transportation, warehousing, rigging, scaffolding and other
equipment and services necessary to accomplish the work in
accordance with the intent and meaning of these drawings and
specifications.
1.3 WORK INCLUDED
A. The complete Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC)

including but not limited to these major items.
1. Coordinate work of this Section with related trades.
2. Verify applicable dimensions at the jobsite.
3. Air conditioning units.
4. Split air conditioning systems and related refrigerant

piping.
5. Air filters.
SECTION 23 05 00.10 PAGE 1

24000 AVILA ROAD
6. Duct systems; supply, return and exhaust complete with fire
dampers, combination fire-smoke dampers, and manual
dampers.
7. Diffusers, registers, terminal mixing and VAV boxes.
8. Mechanical equipment bases and roof curbs.
9. Exhaust, supply and return fans.
10. Furnishing and installation of miscellaneous hangers,

supports, sleeves, inserts, anchors and other auxiliary
equipment for systems under this Division.
11. Duct lining and insulation.
12. Heating, hot water, condensate drain, refrigeration piping,

fittings, valves and specialties, and insulation.
13. Installation and connection of Owner furnished equipment.
14. Temperature and Energy Management systems.
15. Shop drawings.
16. Equipment identification.
17. Equipment and systems adjustments and balancing.
18. Air, water and gas systems testing, adjusting and

balancing.
19. Written operating and maintenance instructions.
20. Record drawings.
21. Guarantee
22. The installation of condensate drain piping as detailed

herein including valves, fitting, and piping specialties.
23. The preparation and submission of complete Written

Operating and Maintenance Instructions for all equipment
and accessories installed in the scope of this Project for
each discipline under Division 23.
24. The Scope of Work for Division 23 shall be coordinated with

the scope of work with all other Divisions included in the
Project Contract Documents and Specifications.
25. All existing conditions and dimensions shall be verified in

the field prior to the fabrication and installation of any
new work for Division 23.

24000 AVILA ROAD
26. Coordinate work of this Section with related trades.
27. Complete water heating systems, including water heating

equipment, circulating pumps, connections.
28. Temperature and Energy Management systems.
29. Complete coordination with all other trades related to

mechanical systems installation.
30. Contractor to submit and pay all fees to all regulatory

agencies having jurisdiction on this project for all
necessary plan check and permit approvals. Contractor to
obtain all necessary approvals for plan checking,
installation and operating permits from all the regulatory
agencies applicable to this project and pay all the fees.
31. Contractor to obtain all necessary utility companies

connections approvals, and pay all utilities connection and
extension fees, costs, etc.
B. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for

all mechanical Work as specified and indicated, in accord with
provisions of Contract Documents. Completely coordinate with
Work of all other trades. Although such Work is not specifically
indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous
items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
C. Drawings, Use and Interpretation:
1. Drawings are only diagrammatic and indicate general

arrangement of systems and equipment, except when
specifically dimensioned or detailed. Contractor shall be
fully responsible to prepare to the scale final fabrication
drawings, shop drawings, conduct all systems fully
coordinated and make all mechanical and plumbing system
space coordination efforts.
2. For exact locations of building elements, refer to

dimensioned architectural and structural drawings.
3. Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned

drawings.
4. Piping and ductwork plans are intended to show size,

capacity, approximate location, direction and general
relationship of one work phase to another, but not the
exact detail or arrangement.
5. Field verify locations and arrangement of all existing

systems and equipment.
6. For any conflict in the Drawings and/or Specifications the

more stringent requirements shall apply. Any such conflict

24000 AVILA ROAD
shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer
for resolution prior to construction of such items.
D. Installation of all systems and equipment is subject to

clarification as indicated in reviewed Shop Drawings with field
coordination.
1. Generally, layout pipelines requiring gravity drainage

first; followed by large pipe mains, ductwork and
electrical conduit.
2. This procedure is intended to promote orderly installation,

but not to establish trade precedence.
3. Dimensions indicated are limiting dimensions.
4. Do not use equipment exceeding dimensions indicated on

detail drawings or arrangements that reduce required
clearances or exceed all of the specified maximum
dimensions.
5. Pipe hanger and support installation: See Section 23 05

29.
E. Description of systems: Furnish and install all materials

resulting, upon completion, in functioning systems in compliance
with performance requirements specified, and any modifications
resulting from reviewed Shop Drawings with field coordination.
F. Access: Provide access panels in ceilings, partitions,

enclosures, etc. as required to permit proper access to
mechanical equipment and devices. Avoid the need for access
panels by installing Work in accessible areas when possible.
Means to secure such access shall be provided whenever such
access is located within a secured area per the security plans.
G. The Contractor shall prepare color coded multi-disciplinary

overlay drawings including mechanical, plumbing, electrical,
structural, architectural, security systems, all communication
systems, fire suppression systems and all other building systems
and coordinate with all trades for complete installation and
operation of mechanical and plumbing systems. Contractor to
submit fully coordinated overlay drawings to Architect for review
and approval, prior to starting of any installation and
fabrication. Contractor to provide all necessary labor and
material to modify, reroute, relocate, rearrange, and redesign,
all necessary MEP and Fire Sprinkler systems and HS components to
make it fit and install them in the available attics, shafts,
wall, etc. spaces at no additional cost to owner. Contractor to
coordinated, relocate and adjust all necessary divisions, inlets
and outlets, lighting, sprinklers, lighting access panels, etc.
in at the ceiling surfaces to make it fit at no additional cost
to the owner.

24000 AVILA ROAD
H. This project’s bid documents includes mechanical and plumbing
design based on a particular specified equipment vendors, brand
and systems as indicated on the drawings and specifications.
However, if contractor elects to substitute with alternate
vendors equipments and systems other than used as basis of
design, then contractor shall be solely and completely
responsible for feasibility of substituted equipments related
redesign, rechecking and coordination of mechanical systems and
complete coordination with all other building systems including
architectural, structural, electrical, etc. and shall pay all
related redesign cost, impact cost on other trades, additional
installation cost, obtain building department approvals, pay
inspection fees and shall be fully responsible to pay all other
associated cost. Architect will review substituted equipment
submittal only one time. If subsequent reviews are requested by
the Contractor, they will be reviewed at $150/hour review cost.
I. All the exposed mechanical systems inside the building and

outside the building other than concealed shall be primed and
oil-painted. Color and finish as selected by the Architect. For
the purpose of this section: “Concealed” means hidden from sight
in chases, furred spaces, shaft, hung ceiling or embedded in
construction; “Exposed” means not installed underground or
concealed as defined.
J. The scope of work for Division 23 shall include everything

necessary and incidental to completing the Heating, Ventilating,
and Air Conditioning (HVAC), work indicated on the project
Contract Documents, including but not limited to the followings:
1. The installation of Air handling systems with fans, coils,

filters, humidifiers, and air terminal controllers.
2. The installation of all required air filters for all HVAC

systems included in the scope of this Project.
3. The installation of roof mounted, in-line, ceiling and

utility set Exhaust Fans for general or special system
exhaust requirements.
4. The installation of HVAC system ceiling Diffusers and

Ceiling Registers including volume dampers and mounting
frames to match the ceiling types on the Project.
5. The installation of all supply, return, exhaust and fresh

air ductwork for the entire project including manual volume
dampers, fire damper, combination fire/smoke dampers,
duct hanger and supports, sleeves, inserts and anchors and
all other required appurtenances for all new HVAC systems
installed of all duct and pipe installation under the scope
of work for this Division.
6. The installation of all duct and pipe insulation including

all rigid inserts, weather covers and water sealing.

24000 AVILA ROAD
7. The installation of condensate drain piping as detailed
herein including calves, fitting, and piping specialties.
8. The preparation and submission of complete Shop Drawings

for all equipment and material installed under the scope of
work for all disciplines specified under Division 23.
9. The installation of all Equipment Identification as

specified herein.
10. The complete Air test and Balancing for all HVAC systems
installed in the scope of the Project by an Independent
Test and Balance Contractor.
11. The complete air pressure and soap testing of all natural
gas piping installed in the scope of this project.
12. The preparation and submission of complete Written

Operating and Maintenance Instruction for all equipment and
accessories installed in the scope of this project for each
discipline under Division 23.
13. The preparation and submission of complete Record Drawings

for all work installed under Division 23.
14. The preparation and submission of One (1) Year Written

Guarantee in a form as stipulated in General Requirements.
15. The Scope of Work for Division 23 shall be coordinated with

the scope of work with all other divisions included in the
Project Contract Documents and Specifications.
16. Provide all necessary labor and material to provide fully

functional Mechanical & Plumbing systems.
1.4 DEFINITIONS (AS USED ON DIVISION 23 DRAWINGS AND HEREIN)
A. “Provide” means furnish, install and connect unless otherwise

described in specific instances.
B. “Piping” means pipes, fittings, valves and all like pipe

accessories connected thereto.
C. “Ductwork” means ducts, plenums, compartments, or casings

including the building structure, which are used to convey or
contain air.
D. “Extend”, “Submit”, “Repair” and similar words mean that the

Contractor (or his designated subcontractor) shall accomplish the
action described.
E. “Products”, “Materials” and “Equipment” are used interchangeably

and mean materials, fixtures, equipment, accessories, etc.

24000 AVILA ROAD
F. “Utility Areas” are defined as mechanical, electrical,
janitorial, and similar rooms or spaces which are normally used
or occupied only by custodial or maintenance personnel. “Public
Areas” are defined as the rooms or spaces which are not included
n the utility areas definition.
G. “Building Boundary” includes concrete walkways immediately

adjacent to the building structure.
H. “Below Grade” means buried in the ground.
I. “Substantial Mechanical Completion” means all components of all

systems are functioning but lacking in final adjustment.
J. “Pressure Rating Specified” (such as for valves and the like)

mean design working pressure for and with references to the fluid
which the device will serve.
1.5 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Concrete, Architectural Sheet Metal, Door and Exterior Wall

Louvers, Painting and Electrical.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Motor starters and disconnect switches, wiring and conduit,

except as otherwise specified: Division 26 Electrical.
2. Outside air intake, exhaust louvers and screens.
3. Installation of access doors and plaster frames for

registers and grilles.
4. Temperature control wiring, except as otherwise specified

herein: Division 26 Electrical and Sections 23 09 00 and
23 09 23.
5. Testing, adjusting and balancing of air/water systems,

Section 23 05 93.
C. This Section includes general administrative and procedural

requirements for mechanical installations.
1. Submittals
2. Coordination drawings
3. Record Documents
4. Maintenance manuals
5. Rough-ins
6. Mechanical installations

24000 AVILA ROAD
7. Cutting and Patching
1.6 SITE INSPECTION
A. Contractor shall familiarize himself with the conditions at the

site. No allowance will be made subsequently for any error
through negligence in observing the site conditions. Contractor
shall observe and make cost allowance for any mechanical and/or
electrical items that must be relocated to accommodate the
installation or servicing of any item covered under this
contract.
1.7 ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND CODES
A. References to Technical Societies, Trade Organizations,

Governmental Agencies is made in Division 23 in accordance with
the following abbreviations.
AFI - Air Filter Institute
AMCA - Air Moving & Conditioning Association
ARI - Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air

Conditioning Engineers
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials
AWSC - American Welding Society Code
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
CBC - California Building Code
CCR - California Code of Regulations
CEC - California Electrical Code
CFC - California Fire Codes
CMC - California Mechanical Code
CPC - California Plumbing Code
DSA - Division of the State Architect
FIA - Factory Insurance Association
NAFM - National Association of Fan Manufacturers
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

24000 AVILA ROAD
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
ORS - Office of Regulatory Services
OSHPD - Office of Statewide Health, Planning and Development
SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association
UFC - Uniform Fire Code
UL - Underwriter's Laboratories
UPC - Uniform Plumbing Code
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Materials and installation

shall comply with applicable local, state, and national codes and
ordinances. Rulings and interpretations of the enforcing
agencies shall be considered as part of the local codes. No
extras will be permitted for furnishing items required by the
local codes but not specified or shown on the drawings.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. UBC and California Amendments (California Building Code -

Part 2, Title 24, CCR).
2. UMC and California Amendments (California Mechanical Code -

Part 4, Title 24 CCR).
3. UPC and California Amendments (California Plumbing Code -

Part 5, Title 24 CCR).
4. Uniform Fire Code with State Amendments (California Fire

Code - Part 9, Title 24 CCR).
5. National Fire Protection Association's - National Fire

Code.
D. Nothing in these drawings and specifications is to be construed

to permit work in violation thereof. Ordinances, regulations and
codes are to be construed as minimum requirements.
E. The responsibility of the Architect to conduct construction

reviews of the Contractor's performance is not intended to
include the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on,
or near the construction site.
F. Ventilating, refrigeration and electrical equipment and

appliances are required to be approved by the Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., or other nationally recognized testing agency
and installed per the testing agency's specifications.

24000 AVILA ROAD
1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, fees, assessments,

complimentary drawings, required by any legally constituted
public authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Afford the owner's representative every facility for evaluating

the skill and competence of the mechanics and to examine the
materials. Concealed work shall be reopened when so directed
during the periodic visits.
A. Verifying Job Conditions: Examine all Drawings and

Specifications in a manner to be fully cognizant to all work
required under this Division. Adjoining work of other trades
shall be examined for interferences and conditions affecting the
work of this Division.
B. Visit site prior to bidding and investigate the existing

conditions which affects and will be affected by the work of this
Division. Become familiar with the working conditions and take
into account any special or unusual features peculiar to these
jobs. By the act of submitting the bid, the contractor will be
deemed to have complied with the foregoing, to have accepted such
conditions, and to have made allowance therefore in preparing his
bid.
C. The location of existing utility lines are shown in accordance

with reference data received by the Architect. The points of
connection are therefore approximate and the Bidder shall include
in his bid adequate funds to cover cost of connection regardless
of their exact location.
D. Exercise extreme caution during trenching operations. Repair the

damage caused by such operations to existing utility lines at no
cost to the Owner, whether the lines are shown on the drawings or
not.
1.10 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The Architect's decision will be final on interpretation of the

Drawings and Specifications.
B. The Drawings and Specifications are complimentary. Any work

called for on the Drawings and not mentioned in the
Specifications, or vice versa, shall be performed as though fully
set forth in both.
C. Piping, ductwork and other equipment shown as existing has been

taken from the Owner's drawings. Contractor shall verify exact
location in field before proceeding with the work.
D. Where codes, standards, drawings or specifications conflict, the

most stringent shall prevail, unless prior approval for variance

24000 AVILA ROAD
is obtained. Specific details on the drawings shall supercede
the specification in the event of a conflict.
E. Alternate support or seismic detail shall have prior approval by

the Architect; and the Contractor shall obtain agency approval
without any additional cost or time to the contract and without
any time penalty on the work schedule.
F. The Contract Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping,

ductwork and equipment.
1. For the purpose of clarity and legibility, drawings are

essentially diagrammatic to the extent that many offsets,
bends and special fittings and exact locations of items are
not specifically dimensioned. Diagrammatic drawings shall
be understood as schemes of required systems.
2. Drawings and specifications are intended to complement each

other. Where conflicts exist between the drawings and/or
specifications, request clarification.
3. “The Architect” and/or, “The Engineer” shall interpret the

drawings and the specifications, as to the true intent and
meaning thereof and the quality, quantity, and sufficiency
of the materials and workmanship furnished thereunder.
4. In case of conflicts not clarified prior to bidding

deadline, use the better quality, greater quantity or
larger size in preparing bids. After the contract is
awarded should the conflict require changes to the scope of
work, a credit for the greater quantity will be required.
5. Certain runs of piping or ductwork may be shown distorted

to avoid confusion. However, systems shall be grouped into
orderly function and relationship, consistent with code
requirements and working space.
6. Exact routing of systems, locations of fixtures, grilles,

thermostats and devices shall be governed by structural
conditions and obstructions. Ceiling installed devices
shall be located symmetrically with respect to room
centerline, lighting fixtures and type of ceiling system.
Architectural restraints shall be verified before roughing
in.
7. Building and room dimensions, location of doors,

parti¬tions and similar physical features shall be taken
from the Architectural Drawings at the approximate location
shown on the Mechanical Drawings.
8. Manufacturers' drawings and instructions shall be followed

in all cases and will become the basis for inspecting and
accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
utilized in the performance of the work. Where
manufacturer's instructions are in conflict with local

24000 AVILA ROAD
codes or governing ordinances, the architect shall be
notified for determination.
9. Mechanical drawings are generally diagrammatic, and do not

indicate necessary offsets, obstructions, or structural
conditions required for coordination with other trades.
The contractor shall be responsible for the correct placing
of his work and the proper location and connection of his
work in relation with work of other trades.
10. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to install the

work in such a manner that it will conform to the
structure, avoid obstructions, and maintain headroom.
11. Above items to be performed at no additional cost to the

Owner.
12. Manufacturer's drawings and instructions, when not in

conflict with governing codes, shall be followed in all
cases where the makers of devices and equipment furnish
directions or details not shown on the Drawings or
described in the Specifications.
13. Drawings are not intended to be scaled, but shall be

followed with sufficient accuracy to coordinate with other
work and structural limitations.
14. Work installed in a manner contrary to that shown on the

drawings shall be removed and reinstated when so directed
by the Architect. Discrepancies and questionable points
shall be immediately reported to the Architect for
clarification.
G. Modification of Contract Drawings:
1. In the event that substitute materials or equipment will

require, for proper installation, changes to the design as
indicated on the Contract Drawings, appropriate proposed
revision drawings in an approved format shall be submitted
for review. Such drawings shall be sufficiently complete
for the proper installation of the proposed substitute
materials or equipment and for construction by all
interested trades of the proposed revisions to the Contract
Documents.
2. The cost of the drawings, cost of drawing checking, and

approval by all legally constituted authorities having
jurisdiction shall be borne by the Contractor.
H. All provisions shall be deemed mandatory except as expressly

indicated as optional by the work “may” or “option”.
I. Contractor shall verify, at the site, the location of all

existing equipment, ductwork, piping, utilities, panel boards and
partitions affecting the installation of new work.

24000 AVILA ROAD
1.11 INSTALLATION OF THE WORK
A. Installation of mechanical work shall be coordinated with the

Project Construction Schedule. The contractor shall be totally
responsible for coordinating the layout of all building elements
to avoid conflict of the work of the structural, mechanical,
electrical systems, and architectural features of the building.
The cost of any extra work of any kind caused by a conflict due
to this lack of coordination, shall be borne by the Contractor.
1. Before proceeding with the work, the Contractor shall

examine all Contract Documents, check and verify all
dimensions and sizes that may affect the fitting of his
materials and equipment to other parts of the equipment,
structure and work of other Divisions.
2. Work installed, which interferes with the work of other

trades, shall be removed and reinstalled at the
Contrac¬tor's expense when so directed by the Architect.
3. It shall be understood that no extras to the Contract will

be permitted to accomplish the above results.
4. Notify the Architect of points of conflict between the work

and that of other trades so that the conflict may be
properly adjusted.
5. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials

installation with other building components.
6. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
7. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building

components during progress of construction, to allow for
mechanical installations.
8. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices

and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other
structural components, as they are constructed.
9. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of

mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow the
Work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
10. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned,

install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the
maximum headroom possible.
11. Coordinate connection of mechanical system with exterior

underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply
with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide
required connection for each service.

24000 AVILA ROAD
12. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform to
approved submittal data, including coordination drawings,
to greatest extend possible. Conform to arrangements
indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that
portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form.
Where coordination requirements conflict with individual
system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.
13. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb,

parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.
14. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing,

maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment
15. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed

behind finished surfaces.
16. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-

way priority to systems required to be installed at a
specific slope.
B. Coordinate field details with other trades to avoid construction

delays and maintain required clearances.
1. Equipment bases and supports: Furnish certified details

and drawings for approval before fabrication. Furnish all
parts necessary for each base, sub base and support.
2. Pipe sleeves and inserts: Furnish and install all pipe

sleeves and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured.
3. Roof, wall and floor openings: Furnish shop drawings

showing exact locations and sizes of openings through
roofs, walls and floors.
4. When changes in size of equipment bases and pads result in

additional design and construction costs, such costs shall
be borne by Contractor.
5. Moving of equipment: Investigate each space through which

equipment must be moved. Where necessary, equipment shall
be shipped from manufacturer in crated sections of size
suitable for moving through restricted spaces available.
C. Prepare and provide coordination drawings in accordance with

Division 1 to a scale of ¼” = 1’-0” or larger; detailing major
elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment and
materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and
building components. Indicate locations where space is limited
for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination
for the installations are of importance to the efficient flow of
the work, including but not necessarily limited to the following:

24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Indicate the proposed locations of piping, ductwork,
equipment, and materials. Include the following:
a. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
b. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment,

including tube removal, filter removal, and space for
equipment disassembly required for periodic
maintenance.
c. Equipment for connections and support details.
d. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
e. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
f. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and

bases.
2. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate

penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their
relationship to other penetrations and installations.
3. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate

installations, air outlets and inlets, light fixtures,
communication systems components, sprinklers, and other
ceiling-mounted items.
4. No extras will be allowed for changes made necessary by

interference with work of other trades. Areas of limited
clearance shall be laid out to 1/4” = 1’-0” scale with all
ducts, pipes, conduits, beams, etc., shown and shall be
signed by the General Contractor’s superintendent on the
job.
D. Examine other Divisions for work related to the work of this

Division, especially Division 26 Electrical and 23 09 23 Direct
Digital Control for HVAC.
E. Rough-In
1. Verify final locations of rough-ins with field measurements

and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be
connected.
2. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16

for rough-in requirements.
F. Delivery and Storage:
1. All material shall be delivered to the site with all labels

intact and identified to permit check against approved
material lists and for shop drawings. Lost or damaged
materials and equipment will be replaced by new at no

24000 AVILA ROAD
increase in contract cost. Damaged factory applied
finishes supplied with final finish under this division
shall be refinished as approved by the Architect, employing
workmen skilled in the work involved. Finishing materials
shall be obtained from the equipment or materials
manufacturer.
2. Protect materials against dirt, water, chemical and

mechanical damage both while storage and during
construction.
G. Substitution of materials and equipment:
1. Where no specific make of material or equipment is

men¬tioned, appropriate products of approved manufacturers
may be used, providing they conform to the requirements of
the system.
2. Materials and equipment may be followed by phrases

"simi¬lar to", "equal to", "as approved equal". In the
cases, if the Contractor desires to use any other brand or
manufac¬turer of the same quality, appearance and utility
to that specified, the Contractor shall comply with the
general conditions Section 01 60 00 requirements and other
sections of specifications as applicable.
3. Complete technical data including drawings, performance

specifications, cost data and tests of the article
propos¬ed for substitution, including the reason for
substitution.
4. Complete breakdown of costs, indicating the cost

differential to the Contract if the proposed substitution
is accepted.
5. Statement by the Contractor that the proposed substitution

is in full compliance with the Contract Documents and
applicable codes.
6. List of other trades which may be affected by the

substitution.
7. The Contractor shall be responsible for any effect upon

related work of any substitution and shall bear any
additional costs generated by any substitutions, including
the costs of the Architect/Engineers' additional services
thereby made necessary.
8. Acceptance or no exceptions taken by the engineer on any

substitution proposed by the contractor shall not be
construed as relieving the contractor from compliance with
the project’s specifications and performance requirements
nor departure there from. The contractor remains
responsible for details and accuracy for confirming and
correlating quantities and dimensions and for the selection

24000 AVILA ROAD
of fabrication processes, techniques and assembly,
coordination of his work with that of all other trades and
making any needed modifications consequent to the
substitution at his own cost and for performing the work in
a safe manner.
1.12 OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Openings have been indicated on the Architectural and Structural

Drawings, additional openings or holes required for the Work of
this Division and cost of same is an obligation to this Division.
1. Openings, cutting and patching to be in accordance with

that specified under Section 01 73 10.
2. At a time in advance of the work, verify the openings

indicated on Architectural and Structural Drawings. If the
work of this Division requires such, furnish new
instructions as to requirements for these openings,
sub¬ject to approval by the Architect.
B. Additional cutting and patching and reinforcement of construction

of building, required under the work of this Division, subject to
approval by the Architect, to be performed under the Division of
the Specification covering the particular materials, and the cost
of same shall be an obligation to this Division.
C. Core drilling of floor slabs and concrete walls for passage of

pipes, where authorized by the Architect, shall be provided under
the work of this Division.
1.13 SUBMITTALS
A. Before starting work, the Contractor shall furnish for the

approval of the Architect, shop drawings and itemized equipment
lists, complete in all details that he proposes to install. All
items shall be submitted at the same time. Conform to Division
01.
B. Submittals must be specific to this project with respect to model

number, capacities, performance, etc., generic submittals will
not be accepted.
C. Submittals shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the

following which are mandatory:
1. Draw Equipment Layouts to ¼” scale, including equipment,

piping accessories, and showing clearances for operating
and servicing.
2. Pumps, pump characteristic curves.
3. Schedule of pipe, fittings, valves, with manufacturer and

catalog number.

24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Specialties, valves, gauges and thermometers of all types.
5. Foundations, supports, hangers, inserts.
6. Earthquake supports and calculations.
7. Expansion loops, expansion joints, guides, and anchors.
8. Insulation.
9. Ventilation and air conditioning equipment, specialties and

the air control systems.
10. Fans, fan characteristic curves, fan tests.
11. Dampers, louvers, grilles, registers, diffusers.
12. Shop fabrication drawings and installation drawings of

ductwork and piping layouts. Submit for approval prior to
fabrication. Drawings shall indicate dimensions from
bottom of piping and ductwork to finish floor level.
13. Wiring diagrams, control panel board, motor starters and

controls for electrically operated equipment furnished by
mechanical trades.
14. Automatic control system diagrams.
15. Boilers, boiler feed systems, condensate pumps, breeching,

and accessories.
16. Water treatment components and accessories.
17. Exhaust, supply and return fans.
18. Access panels.
19. Hangers, inserts, supports, anchors.
20. Pipe, fittings and specialties.
21. Pipe isolators.
22. Roof flashing.
23. Expansion joints, guides and anchors.
24. Shop fabrications drawings and calculations.
25. Approved seismic drawings and calculations for applicable

piping equipment, or as required by ORS/DSA.
26. Special and miscellaneous products furnished under this

section and not listed herein.

24000 AVILA ROAD
1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
A. Record Set During the Work: At site, maintain at least one set
of Drawings as a Field Record Set. Also maintain at least one
copy of all Addenda, Modifications, approved submittals,
correspondence, and transmittals at site. Keep Drawings and data
in good order and readily available to Architect and Owner.
B. Changes: Clearly and correctly mark Record Drawings to show

changes made during the construction process at the time the
changed work is installed. No such changes shall be made in the
work unless authorized by the Architect.
C. Final Record Drawings: Conform to Division 01 requirements.
D. Preparation of Final Record Drawings: Contractor shall transfer

recorded changes in the work indicated on the Field Record Set to
the record set. Changes shall be neatly and clearly drawn and
noted by skilled draftsmen, and shown technically correct.
E. Approval: Prior to Architect's inspection for Substantial

Completion, submit the Final Record Drawings to the Architect for
review, and make such revisions as may be necessary for Final
Record Drawings to be a true, complete, and accurate record of
the work.
F. Manuals: Obtain data from the various manufacturers and submit

instruction, operation, and maintenance manuals as required and
to the extent required under other Sections.
G. Contents: Each manual shall have an index listing the contents.

Information in the manuals shall include not less than:
1. General introductions and overall equipment description,

purpose, functions and simplified theory of operation.
2. Specifications
3. Installation instructions, procedures, sequences, and

precautions, including tolerances for level, horizontal and
vertical alignment.
4. Grouting requirements.
5. List showing lubricants for each item of mechanical

equipment and recommended lubrication intervals.
6. Start-up and beginning operation procedures.
7. Operational procedures.
8. Shutdown procedures.

24000 AVILA ROAD
9. Maintenance and calibration procedures
10. Parts lists
11. Name, address and telephone number of each manufacturer's

local representative.
H. Manual Submittals: Unless otherwise specified, each submittal

shall include two copies of each manual, one of which will be
returned to the Contractor, marked to show the required review.
When approved, deliver four copies to Architect unless otherwise
specified.
I. “As-Built” drawings of ductwork and piping, including all elbows,

transitions, damper and valve locations shall be provided prior
to commencement of air and water balance.
1.15 STANDARDS
A. Compliance shall be in conformance with the requirements of

Section 01330. Submit proof of material and equipment
confor¬mance to the requirements of Regulations and Standards.
The label or listing of the specified agency will be acceptable
evidence. In lieu of the label or listing, the Contractor may
submit a written certificate from an approved, nationally
recognized testing organization, adequately equipped and
compe¬tent to perform such services, verifying that the items
have been tested and that the work conforms to the Regulations
and Standards, including the methods of testing utilized by the
testing agency.
1.16 QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials used in the

installation shall be new and in perfect condition when
installed. Articles provided for the same general purpose or use
shall be of the same make. Workmanship shall be of the best
quality and none but competent mechanics skilled in their trades
shall be employed. Furnish the services of an experienced
superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work,
together with all necessary journeymen, helpers and laborers
required.
1.17 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide products by manufacturers regularly engaged in the

manufacture of similar items with an acceptable history of
successful production and ability to render competent and
thorough technical services and spare parts through local
organizations.
1. Provide the names and addresses of the nearest ser¬vice and

maintenance organization and spare parts supplier.

24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Discontinued models will not be accepted by the owner even
if that model was specified. The architect must be
immediately notified if there is a conflict in this matter.
B. Materials and equipment shall be guaranteed by the manu¬facturer

to equal or exceed specified, submitted and pub¬lished ratings.
Equipment specified by manufacturer's number shall include all
accessories, controls and devices listed in manufacturers catalog
as standard with the equipment.
C. Provide a complete working installation with all equipment called

for in proper operating conditions. Drawings and Specifications
do not undertake to list every item or device of equipment to be
installed. When an item or device is necessary for the operation
of the equipment shown or specified, the items or devices shall
be provided with the equipment which will allow the system to
function properly.
1.18 SEISMIC DESIGN
A. Contractor shall be responsible for anchors and connections of

mechanical work to the building structure including calculations
for approval by ORS/DSA, as applies, for items or work, where
approval by ORS/DSA is deferred or where alternate support or
anchorage detail is proposed to prevent damage as a result of an
earthquake, including manufactured equipment, the connection and
integrity of shop fabricated and field fabricated materials and
equipment. The anchorage of all pipes, ducts, conduits,
fixtures, equipment, etc. shall withstand the lateral forces and
shall accommodate calculated building displacement as required by
the California Building Code, and local city/county codes.
(Building equipment and connections therefore shall be designed
to resist lateral seismic forces equal to 1.0 of equipment weight
to working allowable stress. Cantilever posts supporting
equipment shall be designed to resist lateral seismic forces
equal to 0.5 of equipment weight to allowable working stress.
Conform to the following:
1. In accordance with Title 24, 2007 CBC Section 1632A and Table No.
16A-O, details shall be provided for the seismic anchorage of all
mechanical and electrical equipment, anchorage details shall be
based upon appropriate design calculations.
2. For equipment weighing 400 pounds or more anchorage details and

appropriate design calculations shall be submitted as part of the
mechanical and electrical drawings. “Deferred Approval” items
will not be permitted unless specifically approved by the plan
check supervisor.
3. Exception: Attachments of equipment weighting less than 400

pounds and supported directly on the floor or roof structure,
furniture, or temporary or movable equipment and equipment
weighing less than 20 pounds that is supported by vibration
isolation devices suspended from the roof, wall or floor, need

24000 AVILA ROAD
not be detailed on the plans provided the following notes are
included on the mechanical and electrical plans.
4. The seismic anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment

shall conform to C.C.R. Title 24, 1998 CBC Section 1632A and
Table 16A-O. Anchorage details for roof/floor-mounted equipment
shall be shown on plans.
1.19 SHOP DRAWINGS, MATERIAL LISTS AND SUBMITTAL DATA
A. Comply with the requirements:
1. Material list: 8 copies of a complete list of material and

equipment, tabbed and according to main areas of work,
shall be submitted to the Architect within 30 days after
award of Contract. Submission shall include manufacturers'
names, catalog numbers and other data necessary for
identification. 5 copies will be returned to the
Contractor. If corrections are required, 6 additional
copies shall be resubmitted within 15 days. No material or
equipment is to be delivered to the job site until material
lists have been reviewed by the Architect. Contractor
shall note all items that replaced discontinued models or
items.
2. Submittal data: Printed catalog material and brochures

covering equipment and material shall be submitted as
follows: 8 copies shall be submitted for review; 5 copy
shall be returned to the Contractor, who shall review the
corrections, if so noted, and resubmit 8 copies for final
review. Assemble each brochure with tabbed separators for
each Specification Section where products are noted to be
submitted, with separate tabs for each product label.
3. Three copies of final submittal data will be returned to

the Contractor. The Contractor may submit additional
copies deemed necessary to correlate the work of other
trades.
a. Submittal data to include complete brochures

containing only items specified, indicating names of
manufacturers, catalog figure numbers, technical data
and requested information on each item.
b. Submittal data to be referenced to Section number and

paragraph numbers of the Specifications, and to
fixture and equipment indicated. Brochure not to
contain extraneous material not specified.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submission of shop drawings shall consist of 6 complete

sets, one of blue line prints and the other of sepia
transparency, indicating the required technical

24000 AVILA ROAD
information. One complete set of the sepia transparency
will be returned to the Contractor.
2. Shop drawings shall use the same nomenclature indicated on

the Drawings and must indicate locations where material or
equipment is to be installed.
3. Shop drawings shall be submitted covering equipment, piping

and ductwork in each equipment room.
4. Shop drawings shall be coordinated with all other trades

covered by Contract Drawings before submission to the
Architect.
5. Submit following material with all equipment room shop

drawings:
a. Manufacturer's specifications, including materials,

type, performance characteristics and capacity
ratings.
b. Certified dimension drawings, indicating size,

component parts and installation details.
c. Electrical wiring diagram and controls where

applicable.
d. Complete automatic control and wiring diagrams.
e. Equipment supports.
f. For items such as valves, hangers and accessories,

indicate specific items and where they are to be
used.
g. Supplementary framing including calculations.
6. Equipment and/or materials installed without the Contractor

receiving written approval from the Architect are subject
to removal and replacement by the Contractor with approved
materials, at no additional cost to the Owner, or delay of
job progress.
C. Submittals: Unless otherwise specified, specific items for which

the following requirements apply and for which submittals are
required shall be as specified in each section of Division 15.
1. Manufacturer's Data: Submittals for manufactured items

shall comprise manufacturer's descriptive literature,
drawings, diagrams, performance and characteristic curves,
and catalog cuts. these shall be identified by
manufacturer's name, trade name, model or catalog number,
name-plate data, size, layout dimensions, capacity, project
specification reference, applicable Federal, Military,

24000 AVILA ROAD
industry, and technical society publication references, and
any other additional information necessary to establish
contract compliance. Photographs of existing installation
and similar data submitted in lieu of manufacturer's
catalog data are not acceptable and will be returned
without approval.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit required shop drawings in one

complete package. Drawings shall be drawn to a minimum
scale of 1/4"; shall be a minimum of 30 x 42 in size; and
shall include wiring diagrams, plans, elevations, and
sections of equipment and control spaces identifying and
indicating proposed and existing locations, layouts, and
arrangement of items of equipment, control panels,
accessories, piping, ductwork, and any other items that
must be shown to assure a coordinated installation. Wiring
diagrams shall identify circuit terminals, and indicate the
internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Indicate
adequate clearances for operation, maintenance, and
replacement of operating equipment and devices. If any
equipment is disapproved, revise drawings to show
acceptable equipment resubmitted.
3. Standard Compliance: Where equipment or materials are

specified to conform with requirements of standards of
recognized technical or industrial organizations such as
Notional Electrical Manufacturers Association, American
Society for Mechanical Engineers (ASME), Underwriters'
Laboratories (UL), American Gas Association (AGA), or
American Refrigeration Institute (ARI), that use a label or
published listing as a method of indicating compliance,
proof of such conformance shall be submitted and approved.
The label or listing of the specified organization will be
acceptable evidence. In lieu of the label or listing,
submit a certificate from an independent testing
organization of suitable competence, stating that the item
has been tested and found to conform to the specified
standard.
4. Certificates of Conformance of Compliance: Certifications

shall be in the original and not pre-printed. The
certification shall not contain statements that could be
interpreted to imply that the project does not meet all
requirements specified, such as "as good as"; "achieve the
same end use and results as materials formulated in
accordance with the referenced publications"; "equal or
exceed the service and performance of the specified
material". The certification shall simply state that the
product conforms to the requirements specified.
5. Certified Test Reports: Certified Test Reports are reports

of tests conducted on previously manufactured materials or
equipment identical to that proposed for use. Before
delivery of materials and equipment proposed for use,

24000 AVILA ROAD
results of the tests shall be submitted in accordance with
the requirements for laboratory test results of this
Contract.
6. Factory Tests: Factory tests are tests required to be

performed on the actual materials or equipment proposed for
use. Submit results of the tests in accordance with the
requirements for laboratory test results of this Contract.
7. Permits and Certificates of Inspection: Furnish the

originals.
8. Testing procedures and test results required in this and

other sections.
9. Other data required by other sections of this Division.
D. Submit for review only the specific items required in this

section or other Sections of Division 23.
E. Submittal materials will be reviewed for substantial conformity

with the intent of the contract plans and specifications only.
Such review does not indicate approval of dimensions, quantities,
coordination with other trades, or work methods of the
contractor, which are indicated thereon.
F. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these

specifications.
G. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract and prior to
executing any fabrication or installation, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit to the Mechanical Engineer for review and
approval, complete Division 15 Shop Drawings and Submittals for
the Project. This shall include HVAC and Plumbing disciplines
under the scope of Division 15.
H. All submittals shall be bound in a neat ring type binder form and
shall contain a complete list, in index form for all equipment
and materials proposed for use on the Project. All submittals
shall be complete as one package and submitted at one time.
Partial or incomplete submittals will not be reviewed and will be
returned to the Contractor rejected for re-submittal.
I. All information contained in the Submittals and Shop Drawings

shall be properly identified by reference number to the item
number of paragraphs in the Contract Specifications and Drawing
Equipment Schedules. Any deviation or substitution shall be
clearly identified on the submittal page and noted as such.
J. All Equipment or materials fabricated or installed prior to

obtaining the Mechanical Engineers Shop Drawing and Submittal
review and approval are at the Contractors own risk. The
Contractor, at his own expense, shall be responsible for
correcting and / or removing all work installed or fabricated
prior to obtaining Shop Drawing and Submittal approvals.

24000 AVILA ROAD
K. In the event the Contractor obtains the Mechanical Engineers
approval for equipment other than that described herein, the
Contractor shall, at his own expense, make all required changes
in the supporting structures, buildings, related trade costs, and
piping necessary to accommodate the substituted equipment.
Complete Record Drawings shall be furnished to the Mechanical
Engineer indicated all details of the installation.
L. The following list is the minimum Shop Drawing and Submittal

package that the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the
Mechanical Engineer for review and approval. The Project Shop
Drawings and Submittals shall be complete in every aspect as
described in the paragraphs above. Partial or incomplete
submittals will not be reviewed and will be returned to the
Contractor rejected for re-submittal.
1. The installing Contractor shall prepare and submit for

approval the following Shop Drawing and Submittal package
as part of the Scope of Work for Division 26, HVAC:
a. Prepare prior to fabrication and installation, complete

field coordinated installation Shop Drawings for each
discipline included in Division 15 Scope of Work in this
Project.
b. All Shop Drawings shall be prepared using the manual

drafting method or using the latest release of AutoCAD
2000. Contractor submitted hand sketches are not
acceptable and will be returned to the installing
Contractor rejected.
c. All Shop Drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be

prepared in ¼ -inch. No exceptions.
d. Submission of shop drawings shall consist of 6 complete

sets, one of blue line prints and the others of sepia
transparency, indicating the required technical
information. One complete set of the sepia transparency
will be returned to the contractor.
e. The Contractors Shop Drawings shall detail all equipment

and piping systems including installed dimensions and
elevations. All Shop Drawings shall be complete in every
respect prior to submittal to the Mechanical Engineer.
f. The re-use of the Mechanical Engineers construction

drawings for the preparation of the installing Contractors
Field Shop Drawing Submittal is not acceptable.
g. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to submit

copies of the final approved and coordinated Field Shop
Drawings to all other trades for coordination with their
work so that grouped pipes, ducts, and conduit will not
interfere with each other.

24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Submit complete HVAC equipment and accessory submittals for each
and every piece of equipment installed on the Project including:
a. Air Conditioning Units – supply fan data, economizer data,

dimensioned arrangement drawings, air aide performance
data, gas heating performance data, refrigeration system
tonnage and performance data, motor horsepower(s), voltage,
and factory supplied accessories.
b. Exhaust Fans Systems – complete manufacturer computer

selections, dimensioned arrangement drawings, fan curves
and motor horsepower, voltage, and factory supplied
accessories.
3. Submit complete HVAC ductwork and accessory submittals for all

systems installed on the Project including:
a. Supply, return, exhaust, and fresh air ductwork including

rectangular duct gauges and joint methods, round duct type,
duct gauge, and joint methods, duct fittings – rectangular
and round, duct joint sealing method, supports and seismic
bracing details.
b. Duct system appurtenances including fire damper assemblies,

fire / smoke damper assemblies, manual volume dampers –
round and rectangular ducts, flexible ductwork, register
boxes, turning vanes, housings and plenums, roof flashing,
and duct instrument test ports.
c. Air distribution products including supply diffusers,

return / exhaust registers, mounting frames, and manual
dampers.
d. Duct insulation and duct liner including proposed

thickness, R-Value for each type, manufacturer & model and
installation methods.
e. Ductwork vibration isolation including fabric connections

at each unit or where passing through building seismic
separations where specified herein.
4. Submit complete HVAC, and accessory submittals for all systems

installed on the Project including:
a. Complete piping submittals including piping material –

schedule & type and ASTM grade, pipe fittings - type and
ASTM grade, joint methods, supports and seismic bracing
details.
b. Piping system appurtenances and accessories including each

type of valve(s), – grade, rating, catalog number and
manufacturer.

24000 AVILA ROAD
c. Piping system specialties including thermometers with
separable wells, pressure gauges, automatic air vents,
Pete’s Plugs, circuit balancing valves, strainers, check
valves, plug cocks, and butterfly valves.
d. Piping system expansion loops including joint type –

manufacturer, material & duty, pipe guides and anchors –
manufacturer & model number, material, duty and expansion
calculations.
e. Piping system flow or temperature measuring taps – quantity

and type, coordinated with Division 15975.
f. Pipe insulation including proposed thickness, R-Value for

each type, rigid inserts, manufacturer & model and
installation methods.
g. Piping vibration isolation including flex connections at

each unit or where passing through building seismic
separations where specified herein.
h. Piping installation appurtenances including sleeves,

fireproofing, caulking, waterproofing, roof flashing and
escutcheons.
1.20 CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK
A. Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work to be covered

up or enclosed until it has been inspected, tested and approved
by the Architect and proper inspector. Should any of his work be
covered up or enclosed before such inspection and test, he shall,
at his own expense, uncover the work and after it has been
inspected, tested and approved, make all repairs with such
materials as may be necessary to restore all his work and that of
other trades to its original and proper condition.
1.21 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Furnish and install necessary steel supports and seismic

res¬traints for fans, coils, receivers, tanks, piping and other
equipment for a complete installation and as approved by the
Architect. Supports shall be painted with one coat of rust
preventative paint after installation under work of this
Division.
1.22 BUILDING FOOTING CLEARANCES
A. Under no circumstances shall pipes, ducts or conduits be run

through footings. They shall cross below footings or through
sleeves above footings. Those running parallel to footings shall
have the minimum clearances from the cone of influence indicated
on the Structural Drawings or as required by Code.
1.23 DAMAGE BY LEAKS

24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the
premises caused by rain leaks through or around ducts or pipes,
leaks or breaks in piping, equipment or fixtures furnished and/or
installed by him for a period of 1 year from the date of
acceptance of the work by the Owner.
1.24 SUBSTITUTIONS AND CHANGES
A. The design has been based on data from certain manufacturers,

suitable for each application. Recommendations for alternative
manufacturers are made for each product, except when "no
substitutions permitted" is indicated.
B. It is the intent of the Owner to have this project constructed

with materials, products and system originally designed and
specified into the project.
C. Alternatives that may require the modification, realignment

and/or adjustment of other associated components, including
impact on other trades, shall be accomplished at no additional
cost or time to the contract and shall have the approval of the
Architect.
D. Substitutions shall be submitted addressing all features listed

in the specifications. Features that deviate from the plans and
specifications shall be clearly identified including
justification for deviations. TTG Engineers will review initial
submittal on substitutes only. Subsequent submittals made to
correct deficiencies in original submittals will be reviewed at
Contractor’s expense based on TTG Engineer’s hourly rate for
engineering services.
E. Should the Contractor elect to propose substitutions for the

Owner's interest, the substitutions shall be in compliance with
Division 01.
F. Acceptance or no exceptions taken by the engineer on any

substitution proposed by the contractor shall not be construed as
relieving the contractor from compliance with the project’s
specifications and performance requirements nor departure there
from. The contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy
for confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions and for
the selection of fabrication processes, techniques and assembly,
coordination of his work with that of all other trades and making
any needed modifications consequent to the substitution at his
own cost and for performing the work in a safe manner.
1.25 APPROVALS
A. The Architect will have the right to accept or reject equipment,

materials, workmanship, tests and determine when the Contractor
has complied with the requirements herein specified.
1.26 SELECTION AND ORDERING OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Immediately after award of the Contract and after the approval of
submittals by the Architect, the Contractor shall arrange for the
purchase and delivery of equipment and materials required, in
ample quantities and at the proper time. He shall deliver to the
Architect a complete list of equipment and materials ordered,
giving descriptions, plate numbers, brochures, name of the
wholesalers, date of the orders and approximate delivery dates.
1.27 LOCATIONS AND ACCESSIBILITY
A. Drawings show pipe and ductwork diagrammatically. Conform to

Drawings as closely as possible in layout work. Vary run of
piping, run and shape of ductwork and make offsets during
progress of work as required to meet structural and other
interferences as approved by Architect. Install piping and
ductwork to best suit field conditions after coordinating with
other trades. Run exposed piping and ductwork parallel to, or at
right angle to, building walls. Keep horizontal lines as close
to bottom of structures as possible. Conform to ceiling heights
established on Drawings.
B. Install equipment in such a manner as to be readily accessible

for maintenance and repairs. Install piping, ducts and conduit
in such a manner as to preserve headroom, avoid obstructions and
keep openings and passageways clear.
C. Installation at valves, thermometers, gauges, cleanouts, dampers,

controls, and water specialties, duct access doors or any other
indicating equipment or specialties requiring reading,
adjustment, inspection, maintenance shall be conveniently and
accessibly located with reference to the finished building.
D. Where wall and ceiling access doors are required but not shown,
such doors shall be furnished under other sections and as
directed by the Architect. Coordinate this requirement with
appropriate trade.
E. If changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are

required, they shall be made without additional charges.
F. In an existing area, where required, remove, reinstall, reconnect

or replace, etc., any existing work to accommodate new work
without any additional cost to the Owner. Material shall match
existing, unless otherwise specified or approved in writing by
the Architect.
G. Provide sheaves and belts if required, to Test, Adjust and

Balance Agency, to allow air moving equipment to meet flow
requirements specified at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.28 COORDINATION OF TRADES
A. Contractor shall coordinate all trades in the interest of

obtaining the most practical overall arrangement of equipment,

24000 AVILA ROAD
piping, conduit, and ducts and to maintain maximum headroom and
accessibility.
B. No extras will be allowed for changes made necessary by

interference between trades.
C. Submit Composite Drawings in accordance with Special Conditions.

Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections and details and
give complete information particularly as to the kinds and types
of materials and equipment, size and location of sleeves,
inserts, attachments, chases, openings, conduits, ducts, boxes,
lighting, structural interferences. Coordinate these Composite
Drawings and field layouts in the field for proper relationship
to work of applicable trades based on field conditions.
Contractor shall have competent personnel readily available for
coordinating, checking, and supervision of field layouts. The
procedures for submittals and resubmittals, and final
distribution shall be as specified in Division 01. Do not start
installation of work involved under Composite Drawings until the
Architect reviews applicable submittal. Discrepancies between
the Drawings and Composite Drawings shall be specifically noted
and identified on the Composite Drawings. Drawings for the
various trades involved shall be submitted as required and
reviewed prior to preparation of Composite Drawings.
1. Equipment Foundations and Bases: Furnish certified details

and drawings for approval before fabrication. Furnish
parts necessary for each foundation sub base and support.
2. Pipe Sleeves and Inserts: Furnish and install pipe sleeves

and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured.
3. Roof, Wall and Floor Openings: Furnish Shop Drawings

showing exact locations and sizes of openings through
roofs, walls and floors.
4. Concrete: Conform to Concrete Section of the

Specifications.
1.29 GUARANTEES
A. Contractor shall guarantee workmanship, equipment and materials

installed under his contract for a period of not less than one
(1) year from the date of Substantial Completion. Should any
defects occur during this period, the Contractor shall promptly
repair or replace the defective item and any other damage caused
to the building free of charge to the Owner, including cost of
labor and materials.
B. Guarantee included in this section to cover:
1. Faulty or inadequate design of equipment or

24000 AVILA ROAD
material installed.
2. Improper assembly or erection.
3. Defective workmanship or material.
4. Incorrect or inadequate operation or other failure.
C. He shall guarantee the complete and perfect operation of the

entire system and that equipment will be supported in such a way
as to be free of objectionable vibration and noise.
D. Furnish the parts and labor to replace any items found to be

defective in the refrigeration equipment within the guarantee
period.
E. In addition to other guarantees, furnish free maintenance for the

refrigeration equipment, including replacement of refrigerant and
oil, for a period of one (1) year. This shall include regular
monthly maintenance and "On Call" service if required.
F. For equipment bearing a manufacturer's warranty in excess of one

year, furnish a copy of the warranty to the Owner, who shall be
named as beneficiary.
1.30 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Provide adequate storage facilities for equipment and materials

on the site and shall make provisions to protect such materials
and equipment from damage.
1.31 CLOSING-IN OF UNINSPECTED WORK
A. Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the work, specifically

ductwork and piping, to be covered up or enclosed until it has
been inspected, tested, and approved by the Architect. Should
any of work be covered up or enclosed before such inspection and
test, he shall at his own expense, uncover the work and after it
has been inspected, tested, and approved, make repairs with such
materials as may be necessary to restore work to its original and
proper condition.
1.32 BUILDING FOOTING CLEARANCES
A. Under no circumstances shall pipes, ducts, or conduits penetrate

footings. They shall cross below footings or through sleeves
above footings. Those running parallel to footings shall have
the minimum clearance from the cone of influence indicated on the
Drawings or as required by Code.
1.33 DAMAGE BY LEAKS
A. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the

premises caused by rain leaks through or around ducts or pipes,

24000 AVILA ROAD
leaks or breaks in piping, equipment or fixtures furnished or
installed by him for a period of one (1) year from the date of
Substantial Completion.
1.34 EQUIPMENT LABELS
A. Equipment provided under this Section shall be provided with the

manufacturer's metal identification labels attached to each
individual piece of equipment showing complete performance
characteristics, size, model and serial number.
1.35 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Excavating, trenching and backfilling for utilities within the

building area shall be done in conformity with Division 2 -
Sitework. Piping shall be installed promptly after excavation in
order to keep the trenches open as short a time as possible.
B. Excavating, trenching and backfilling for utilities outside the

building area shall be done in conformity with Division 2 - Site
work.
C. Any existing underground piping and conduit that is encountered

shall be properly shored and protected from damage. Active
piping shall be left intact and undamaged.
1.36 PRELIMINARY OPERATION
A. Should the Owner request that any portion of the plant,

apparatus, or equipment be operated for the Owner's beneficial
use prior to the final completion and acceptance of the work, the
Contractor shall conform to Beneficial Occupancy Provisions of
the General Conditions. Such operation shall be under the
supervision and direction of the Contractor. Such preliminary
operation shall not be construed as an acceptance of any of the
work.
1.37 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Coordinate with Division 26 in making the line and low voltage

electrical connections and be responsible for the operation of
the equipment furnished under this section.
B. Voltage for electrical work will be included in Division 26.

However, any control wiring which is required that is not shown
on the control diagram shall be as described under this Section.
In the event that the Contractor chooses to provide equipment
that requires extra expense in the power or control wiring, he
shall pay additional electrical costs.
C. Safety switches, starters, circuit breakers, unless provided as a

portion of package equipment, and the electrical connections of
mechanical equipment to the electrical power service shall be
provided under Division 26.

24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Interconnecting wiring, safety switches, relays, controllers and
motor starters which are integral components of packaged
equipment shall be provided as an integral part of that
equipment.
E. All interconnecting power wiring and conduits shall be provided

by Division 26.
F. Control wiring shall be provided by Division 23, unless otherwise

G. Conduit for control wiring shall be provided by Division 26.
H. All motors, power driven equipment and automatic control

equipment, except motor starters as hereinafter set forth
required and connected with the work of this section of the
specifications are to be furnished and installed under Division
26.
I. All control low (24V) wiring conduits, CAC furnished by Division

26. Line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit and related switches and
relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of
motors and equipment including final connection, are to be
furnished and installed Division 15. Materials and installation
to conform to Class 1 or 2, CCR Title 24, Article E725, and as
restricted under the Division 26 Electrical of these
specifications.
J. Power wiring, conduit, outlets, disconnect switches and motor-

rated contractors, and making of final connections, except as
hereinafter specified, are to be furnished and installed under
the Division 26 Electrical of the specification.
K. Identify circuits and equipment as outlined in the Electrical

section of these specifications.
L. Coordinate requirements for underground conduit only between

buildings for control interlocks shown on the drawings. This
conduit to be furnished and installed under Division 26 of these
specifications.
M. Starters and disconnects will be provided under Division 23.
N. All line voltage control wiring and conduits shall be provided

under Division 26 – Electrical.
1.38 SUPPLEMENTARY FRAMING
A. Provide supplementary framing required for attachment of han¬ger,

supports and anchors. Fasten supplementary framing to structure
in an approved manner. Supplementary framing of structural angle
iron, channels and "I" beams properly designed to carry the
weight of piping and its contents and to withstand any thrust
exerted by the expansion or contraction of the piping.

24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Submit details of hangers, anchors, supplementary framing
including the proposed method of fastening of supplementary
framing to the base building structure and calculations used in
determining the proposed fastening method.
C. Structural work shall conform to applicable building codes.
D. Paint supplementary framing with one coat of rust preventive

paint after installation under work of this Division.
1.39 ADDITIONAL BALANCING DEVICES
A. Provide any additional apparatus, devices or equipment that may

be required to completely balance all the air and hydronic
systems. Such apparatus, devices or equipment shall be included
in the work at no additional cost to the Owner.
1.40 DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE OF MATERIALS, PROTECTION OF WORK
A. Properly store, adequately protect, and carefully handle

equipment and materials to prevent damage before and during
installation as recommended by the manufacturer and as approved
by the Architect. Items determined to be damaged or defective
shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. Determinations of the
Architect shall be final.
B. Protect materials against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical

damage both while in storage and during construction.
C. Cover materials in such a manner that no finished surfaces will

be damaged, marred or splattered with plaster or paint, and all
moving parts will be kept clean and dry.
D. Replace or refinish any damaged materials including fronts of

control panels, ductwork fittings, and shop-fabricated ductwork.
E. Keep cabinets and other openings closed to prevent entry of

foreign matter.
F. Refer to other sections of this Division for additional

requirements.
1.41 STANDARD PRODUCTS
A. Materials and equipment shall be essentially the standard

catalogued products of manufacturers regularly engaged in
production of such materials or equipment, and shall be their
latest standard designs that comply with the Specification
requirements. Materials and equipment shall duplicate items that
have been in satisfactory commercial of industrial use at least
two years prior to bid opening. Where two units of the same
class of equipment are required, these units shall be products of
a single manufacturer. The components thereof, however, are not
required to be exclusively of the same manufacturer. Each major
component of equipment shall have manufacturer's name, address,

24000 AVILA ROAD
model and serial number on a nameplate securely affixed in a
conspicuous place. The nameplate of the distributing agent will
not be acceptable.
1.42 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
A. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews,

keys, and other rotating parts located so that any person can
come in close proximity thereto shall be fully enclosed or
properly guarded. High temperature equipment and piping so
located as to endanger personnel or create a fire hazard shall be
properly guarded or covered with insulation of a type specified
herein. Provide items such as catwalks, ladders, and guard rails
where required for safe operation and maintenance of equipment.
1.43 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
A. Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required to

be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of
the material or equipment being installed, furnish printed copies
of these recommendations to the Architect prior to installation.
Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the
recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these
recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.
1.44 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Furnish an operation and maintenance manual covering the

stipulated mechanical systems and equipment as follows. Seven
copies of the manual, bound in the hardback binders or an
approved equivalent, shall be provided to the Owner and one copy
to the Architect. Furnish one complete manual prior to the time
that system or equipment tests are performed. Furnish the
remaining manuals before the contract is completed. The
following identification shall be inscribed on the cover:
1. Operation and Maintenance Manual
2. Building Number
3. Contractor
4. Contract Number
B. Provide a table of contents. Insert tab sheets to identify

discrete subjects. Instruction sheets shall be legible and
easily understood, with large sheets of drawings folded in. The
manual shall be complete in all respects for all equipment,
controls, accessories and appurtenances stipulated. Include as a
minimum the following:
1. System layout showing piping, valves and controls.
2. Wiring and control diagrams with data to explain detailed

operation and control of each component.

24000 AVILA ROAD
3. A control sequence describing start-up, operation and
shutdown.
4. Detailed description of the function of each principal

component of the system.
5. Procedure for starting.
6. Procedure for operating.
7. Shutdown instructions.
8. Installation instructions.
9. Adjustments, maintenance and overhaul instructions.
10. Lubrication schedule including type grade, temperature

range and frequency.
11. Safety precautions, diagrams and illustration.
12. Test procedures.
13. Performance data.
14. Parts lists, with manufacturer's names and catalog numbers.
15. Preventive maintenance schedule.
16. Service organization with name, address and telephone

number.
17. Valve identification chart and schedule.
18. ASME certificates.
19. Air balance report.
20. Hydronic balance report.
C. Provide operation and maintenance manuals for all mechanical and

electrical equipment. Product video taped instructions during
the training period for operating personnel at the time of final
inspection using factory startup engineers to show adjusting,
calibrating, testing, operating and servicing procedures for all
systems.
1. Furnish four (4) complete sets of video taped cassettes or

compact discs (CD) for each system and the equipment
requiring the instructions.
2. Contractor shall use the video taped instructions during

the training period for the building operating personnel.

24000 AVILA ROAD
1.45 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. For each designated system or equipment item, provide

instructions for guidance of operating and maintenance personnel.
Following approval of content, prepare these instructions in a
form and scale that will be readily legible when displayed in
appropriate locations, to be designated by the Owner. Meet the
following requirements:
B. For each system, include diagrams of equipment, piping, ductwork,

wiring and controls. Define control sequences.
C. For each equipment item, include starting, adjustment, operation,

lubrication, safety precautions and shutdown. Identify procedures
to be performed in event of equipment failure. Provide other
instructions recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Make final copies impervious to deterioration from exposure to

sunlight. Physically protect such copies by mounting them in
glazed frames, by plastic lamination, or by engraving in metal or
laminated plastic. For outside locations, protection shall be
weatherproof. Attach to structure or equipment as directed.
1.46 INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER PERSONNEL
A. When specified in other sections or herein, the Contractor shall

furnish, without additional expense to the Owner, the services of
competent instructors who will give full instruction to the
designated personnel in the adjustments, operation, and
maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements, of the
equipment or system specified. Each instructor shall be
thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation, and shall
be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first
regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted
and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The number
of man-days of instruction are specified, approximately half of
the time shall be for classroom instruction. All other time
shall be used for instruction with the equipment or system. When
significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system
are made under the terms of the contract, provide additional
instruction to acquaint the operating personnel with the changes
or modifications.
B. The following systems and equipment shall be required to be

furnished with operating instructions videocassette and number of
hours training:
1. Chilled water system, man-day (16 hours).
2. Hot water system, man-day (16 hours).
3. Air conditioning system, man-day (8 hours).

24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Miscellaneous exhaust equipment and systems, man-day (3
hours per system).
5. Direct-Digital Control System per HVAC Section 23 09 23

(minimum 24 hours).
1.47 BUILDING OCCUPANCY VENTILATION
A. Prior to move in by the occupants, the building shall have a

minimum period of two weeks with their systems running on full
exhaust and 100% outside air 24 hours a day to completely off gas
the furnishings.
B. The total ventilation of the buildings shall be scheduled with

the Architect.
1.48 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Contractor shall furnish difficult-to-obtain manufacturer unique

spare parts upon contract completion.
B. Contractor shall furnish any special tools required to service

equipment with the equipment. Provide a lockable metal toolbox
to secure tools.
1.49 WARRANTY
A. In addition to requirements of the Conditions of the Contract,

warrant all equipment, ratings, capacities, motor HP, etc., to
produce the specified and indicated performance at an elevation
of the project site above sea level.
1. Refer to Division 01 for procedures and submittal

requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment
specifications for warranty requirements.
2. Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship, equipment and

materials installed under his contract for a period of not
less than one year from the date of acceptance of the
installation. Should any defects occur during this period,
the Contractor shall promptly repair or replace the
defective item and any other damage caused to the building
free of charge to the Owner, including cost of labor and
materials.
3. Where periods more than one year are specified in the

specifications, such longer periods shall govern. However,
when any component fails at any time during this period,
the warranty period for such component and all other
components which are inactive because of said failure shall
be suspended. The warranty period for such components shall
resume to run for the remaining portion of this warranty
period when failed components are completely repaired and
in operation; however, in no case shall the resumed portion
of the warranty period be less than 3 months in duration.

24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Neither payment for work, nor total or partial occupancy of
work by the Owner, within or prior to the warranty period
specified, shall be construed as acceptance of faulty work
or shall condone any negligence or omission of Contractor
in doing the work.
5. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division

26, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three ring
binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.
6. Provide complete warranty information for each item to

include product or equipment to include date of beginning
of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and
names and addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures
for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
7. The Contractor shall require that the manufacturer of the

chiller shall furnish the parts and the labor to replace
any item found to be defective in the refrigeration
equipment, within the guarantee period.
8. In addition to other guarantees, the Contractor shall

furnish free maintenance for the refrigeration equipment,
including replacement of refrigerant and oil, for a period
of one year. This shall include regular monthly
maintenance and “On Call” service for a period of one year.
B. Warranty start on date of acceptance by the Owner.
1.50 QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials used in the

installation shall be new and in perfect condition when
installed. Articles provided for the same general purpose or use
shall be of the same make. Workmanship shall be of the best
quality and none but competent mechanics skilled in their trades
shall be employed. Furnish the services of an experienced
superintendent, who shall be constantly in charge of the work,
and who will remain on the project through completion together
with all necessary journeymen, helpers and laborers required.
A. Minimum head room for service access aisles shall be 6-feet, 6-

inches. Keep the following areas clear:
B. NEC required service areas for electrical equipment,
C. Tube and coil pull areas for,
1. Fire damper and smoke damper access.
2. Accessibility to valves.

24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Provide any code required or service required clearances over
equipment.
E. Particular attention shall be paid to noise and vibration

control. The extent of sound and vibration control efforts shall
be a function of the sensitivity of spaces adjacent to the
equipment rooms, whether above, below, or on the same level. For
critical applications, AHUs and return fans shall have a maximum
noise control (NC) level specified for both breakout sound level
and for sound radiated to the space.
F. All mechanical equipment needs to be isolated from the structure

with Neoprene pads and/or seismic restraint spring isolators.
All piping that is served by rotating equipment of any type
should be isolated from the building and suspended. The
suspension shall be done with spring hangers selected for size
and a static deflection of at least 1 inch.
G. The mechanical contractor is responsible to the general

contractor for the shop drawing layout of the following rooms and
details. Prior to construction, contractor shall submit shop
drawings to CM for review.
1. Concrete pads and foundations,
2. Equipment room layouts with actual equipment,
3. Roof layouts,
4. Trench locations and sizes,
5. Dimensioned floor drain locations,
6. Congested areas above ceilings adjacent to powerhouse or

equipment.
H. The contractor shall maintain record drawings during course of

project and give to Engineer for recording on CADD.
I. Painting is as specified elsewhere.
J. Structural steel used for supporting equipment in fan plenums or

outside shall be galvanized.
K. The mechanical contractor shall furnish wall and ceiling access

panels to the general contractor for installation. Show final
locations of panels on as-built drawings.
L. Concealed main isolation valves on all systems shall be numbered

and tagged with drawing reference to identify their locations.
M. Mechanical piping in mechanical rooms, boiler rooms, and

powerhouses shall be entirely painted for color coding. Use PVC
wrap-around labels to identify piping. All emergency shutoff

24000 AVILA ROAD
valves shall be identified with a permanent engraved tag hung
from valve with 1-inch high lettering.
N. Piping shall be stenciled at 25-foot intervals and at least once

in each separate space through which the pipe passes.
O. Provide laminated control drawings hung on a chain, mount on a

wall at each control system cabinet showing the functions in that
cabinet and how they tie into the system.
1.52 SLEEVES
A. Provide sleeves for piping passing through:
1. Masonry walls and floors.
2. Walls containing steam or condensate piping.
B. Penetration assemblies shall be provided to comply with the U.L.

Fire Resistance Directory requirements for through wall
penetrations. Designers shall specify penetration methods that
meet the fire and temperature rating required by the building
code. Fire barrier products shall be specified under Division 7.
Penetration details shall be shown on the architectural drawings
and shall be coordinated by the engineer. Contractor shall
submit details for approval under Division 7.
C. Floor sleeves in wet areas, including all mechanical equipment

rooms, shall extend a minimum of 1-inch above the floor to
prevent water entrance to the sleeved hole. Vertical pipe
supports must be extended to and be supported by the floor rather
than the sleeve.
1.53 INSTALLATION
A. Workmanship shall be in the best standard practice of the trade.
B. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions and recommendations unless otherwise noted or
specified.
C. Sequence, coordinate and integrate the various elements of

mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the
following requirements:
1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials

installation with other building components.
2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3. Arrange for chases, slots and openings in other building

components during progress of construction, to allow for
mechanical installation.

24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices
and sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other
structural components, as they are constructed.
5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of

mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of
the work. Give particular attention to large equipment
requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned,

install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the
maximum headroom possible.
7. Coordinate connection of mechanical system with exterior

underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply
with requirements of governing regulations, franchised
service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide
required connection for each service.
8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with

approved submittal data, including coordination drawings,
to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements
indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that
portions of the work are shown only in diagrammatic form.
Where coordination requirements conflict with individual
system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.
9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb,

parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing,

maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed

behind finished surfaces.
12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-

way priority to systems required to be installed at a
specific slope.
D. All valves shall be installed to be accessible by maintenance

personnel.
1.54 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurement sand

with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Division 2 through 17 for

rough-in requirements.
1.55 CUTTING AND PATCHING

24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 01.
B. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, the

following requirements apply:
1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching

of operations, protect adjacent installations.
C. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment

and materials required to:
1. Remove and replace defective work.
2. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of

the contract documents.
3. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
4. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
5. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and

restore work to provide for Architect/Engineer observation
of concealed work.
D. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment,

components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited
to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures
and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new
work.
E. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes and adjacent

materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.
F. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers

adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent
areas.
G. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using

new materials matching existing materials and experienced
installers. Installer’s qualifications refer to the materials and
methods required for the surface and building components being
patched. Refer to Division 1, for definition of “Experienced
Installer”.
1.56 SYSTEM OPERATIONAL TESTS
A. The Contractor shall inform the Owner one week prior to starting
this testing in order that the Owner’s Representative may be
present.
B. After balancing and prior to final inspection, the contractor

shall operate all systems continuously trouble free and stable
for a minimum period of fourteen consecutive days including
Saturday and Sunday. Each day shall be a minimum of an 8 hour

24000 AVILA ROAD
day. Should a problem arise, the 14 day period shall be
restarted and repeated until successfully operated for a full 14
days. A written report certified by the Owner’s Representative
shall indicate the successful completion of a stable and trouble
free 14 day period.
1.57 CLEANING
A. Cleaning shall be done as the work proceeds. Periodically remove

waste and debris to keep the site as clean as is practical.
B. Refer to Division 1 for general requirements for final cleaning.
C. Leave exposed parts of the mechanical work in a neat, clean and

usable condition, with painted surfaces unblemished and plated
metal surfaces polished.
D. Thoroughly clean all materials, equipment and appliances. Clean

and prepare all surfaces to be painted. Clean the entire
premises of unused materials, debris, spots and marks to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
E. Remove, thoroughly clean and replace all strainers and automatic

valves after the system has been put in operation until system is
clear of all foreign matter and repeat this operation after 10
days and again after the system has been in operation 30 days.
Submit certification that this operation has been completed.
1.58 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Locate openings and sleeves to permit neat installation of

piping, ductwork and equipment.
1.59 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES
A. Install all equipment in accord with manufacturer's

recommendations and in accordance with the equipment’s listing
(if applicable).
B. Access:
1. Install all equipment and devices to permit easy access for

maintenance.
2. Maintain easy access to all equipment and devices installed

as part of Division-15 Work, including but not limited to,
filters, motors, drives, valves, dampers, actuators, duct
smoke detectors, etc.
3. Relocate items which interfere with access.
4. When possible, install Work in accessible locations to

avoid the need for access panels.

24000 AVILA ROAD
5. Provide access panels in ceilings, partitions, enclosures,
etc. as required in order to achieve easy access to all
equipment and devices provided or installed under Division
26 Work. Provide additional access panels as required.
a. For walls, partitions, ceilings, enclosures, etc.:

Provide access panels as Work of Division-26.
Requirements for access doors/panels are specified in
Section 08310, "Access Doors".
b. For Hard Ceilings: Hard ceiling access doors are to

be provided. As part of Division-26 Work, provide
complete drawings and tabulation to General
Contractor indicating all required locations and
sizes of security ceiling access doors for devices
and equipment provided or installed under Division-26
Work.
c. Fire rating shall be maintained as designed.
6. Coordinate with Architect to achieve acceptable locations

of access panels.
7. Coordinate all access panel locations with other trades and

the General Contractor.
8. Where possible, avoid locating access panels in secure

areas.
C. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports.
1. Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as

indicated.
2. Check loadings and dimensions of equipment with Shop

Drawings.
3. Do not cut or weld to building structural members, unless

specifically indicated.
4. Provide all required equipment supports, including those

not detailed on architectural and mechanical Drawings.
5. Comply with Section 23 05 48 – Vibration and Seismic

Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
D. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated.
1. Where substitute equipment is used, revise indicated

supports to fit, at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations, floor

penetrations, and wall openings with Work of other Sections.

24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Install rain hoods and metal counter flashings as indicated and
as required to make all penetrations of mechanical work through
walls and roofs, water and weather-tight. Furnish all clamps,
waterproofing material and labor necessary.
G. Install floor mounted equipment on 6-inch high concrete pad, 6-

inches larger on each side than base of unit, unless otherwise
specified, indicated, or equipment manufacturer's recommendation
calls for. Coordinate size and location of equipment pads with
Work of other Sections.
H. In Mechanical Rooms, Mechanical Areas, Fan Rooms, etc.,

coordinate locations of floor drains, floor sinks, etc. with
locations of equipment and housekeeping pads. Locate drains to
properly serve equipment and to result in orderly routing of
drain piping, while minimizing tripping hazards, etc.
I. In areas other than mechanical rooms, do not install piping,

ductwork, or equipment in exposed manner unless indicated
otherwise.
1.60 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OWNER OR OTHER DIVISION
A. Provide rough-in and final connections to all equipment requiring

mechanical services.
B. Install all fittings, valves, and other items furnished as

integral part of equipment, but shipped loose.
A. Perform indicated tests to demonstrate workmanship, operation,

and performance.
1. Conduct tests in presence of inspectors of agencies having

jurisdiction, if required.
2. Furnish all lubricating materials required for test.
B. Repair or replace equipment and systems found inoperative or

defective and re-test.
1. If equipment or system fails re-test, replace it with

products which conform with Contract Documents.
2. Continue remedial measures and re-tests until satisfactory

results are obtained.
1.62 TESTING
A. General: Provide labor and test equipment including test pumps,

gages, instruments and other equipment required. Use test
quality pressure gages, instruments and other equipment required.
Use test quality pressure gages with range of approximately twice

24000 AVILA ROAD
test pressure. Use calibrated gages and instruments. Coordinate
with provisions of Section 15992.
B. Piping:
1. General: Remove from systems, during testing, equipment

which would be damaged by test pressure. Replace removed
equipment after testing. Systems may be tested in sections
as work progresses; however, any previously tested portion
shall become a part of any later test of composite system.
Correct leaks by remaking joints with new material;
makeshift remedies will not be permitted. Test time
accrues only while full test pressure is on system. Test
before backfilling, concealing, insulating or making
connections to potable water system.
2. Test Schedule: Test each section of systems at one and

one-half (1-1/2) times the maximum working pressure of that
section, but at not less than scheduled test pressure.
Obtain maximum working pressures from Architect if not
indicated on Drawings. Unless indicated otherwise,
scheduled tolerance is "no pressure loss", except that due
to temperature change, in 24 hour period
TEST SCHEDULE
System Test Medium Test Pressure Tolerance
Heating Water & Chilled Water Water 150 psig
Refrigerant Nitrogen 400 psig
Refrigerant Relief (Low Pressure) Nitrogen 50 psig
Refrigerant Relief (High Pressure) Nitrogen 400 psig
C. Valves:
1. General Service Valves: Test bonnets for tightness. Test

operate from closed-to-open-to-closed position while under
test pressure.
2. Automatic Valves: Test, including solenoid valves, water

regulating valves, pressure reducing valves, pressure
relief valves, safety valves and temperature and pressure
relief valves for proper operation at settings indicated.
3. Safety Valves: Test relief valves, safety relief valves,

safety valves and temperature and pressure relief valves 3
times.

24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Piping Specialties: Test thermometers, pressure gages, flow
measuring devices, and water meters for accurate indication;
automatic water feeders, air vents, trap primers, vacuum
breakers, and other specialties for proper performance.
E. Hangers and Supports: With systems in normal operation, test

hangers, supports and rods to insure they are plumb and
supporting proper share of load. Additionally support systems
and equipment that sway, crawl, or vibrate.
F. Ductwork:
1. Ductwork Design Pressure Classification: As specified in

Section 15890, “Ductwork”.
2. SMACNA 4-inch and 3-inch Ducts and Plenums:
a. Capping and testing in sections is permitted.
b. Perform leak test in accordance with procedures

contained in SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual." Measure total leakage with calibrated
orifice plate.
1) Test pressure shall equal duct design pressure

of +4-inch or +3-inch as applicable. Total
leakage shall not exceed 1% of design airflow
capacity in cfm.
c. Under test pressure, no audible leaks shall be

evident.
3. For ductwork and plenums other than those listed above:
a. Demonstrate leakage amount in air balance report.

Compare air flow rate of fan to that of sum of air
outlets.
b. Maximum leakage 1% of system design air flow rate.
G. Ductwork Specialties:
1. Verify fire dampers, fire/smoke dampers, and smoke dampers

are 100% open, unless damper is indicated to be closed
during normal operation.
2. Test airflow measuring units for accurate indication.
H. Water Chillers: Test proper operation of control functions

including operating thermostats, low-limits, capacity control,
and electrical interlock with auxiliary equipment.
I. Buried Pipe and Equipment Wrapping and Coating: Test surfaces

with standard 8,000 to 10,000 volt electrical holiday detector.

24000 AVILA ROAD
J. Other Materials and Equipment:
1. Rotation: Verify.
2. Motor Amperage: Verify operating motor amperage does not

exceed motor nameplate rating.
3. Pump Shut-Off Discharge Head: Verify actual head

corresponds to submittal data.
4. Test as specified; as recommended by equipment

manufacturer; and as otherwise necessary or directed to
assure they are complete, operable, and ready for use.
1.63 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Inspect all equipment and put in good working order.
B. Clean all exposed and concealed items: See Section 01740.
1. Clean air surfaces of all coils, fans (including fan wheels

and motors), air handler plenums and air filter frames.
2. Clean floor drains, cleanouts, and plumbing fixtures.
3. Clean specialties such as traps and strainers.
C. Ductwork: Blow-out ducts with fans before connecting terminal

units. Clean ducts before installing air outlets.
D. Equipment and Materials: Remove foreign materials including

dirt, grease, splashed paint, and plaster, etc. Restore damaged
finishes to original condition.
E. Piping: Flush clean interior of water piping. Upon completion

of flushing, completely drain systems at low points; remove,
clean, and replace strainer baskets and refill systems.
F. Heating Water System: After specified flushing, draining, and

refilling, boil out heating water system with one pound of
trisodium phosphate for each 60 gallons of water in system.
Allow system to reach design temperature and circulate water for
24 hours with all pumps running. Upon completion of boiling out,
completely drain system at all low points; remove, clean, replace
strainer baskets, refill system, and immediately add chemical
treatment.
G. Chilled Water System: After specified flushing, draining, and

refilling, cleanse system with one pound of trisodium phosphate
for each 60 gallons of water in system. Circulate water for 24
hours with all pumps running. Upon completion of process,
completely drain system at all low points; remove, clean, replace
strainer baskets, refill system, and immediately add chemical
treatment.

24000 AVILA ROAD
H. Adjusting: Adjust equipment and system components as indicated
or as otherwise required to result in intended system operation.
Thereafter, as a result of system operation, or as directed, make
readjustments as necessary to refine performance and to effect
complete system tune-up.
1.64 SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Furnish to Owner not later than when Owner takes possession of

equipment.
B. Definition of Special Tools: Identified in or otherwise implied

by, the manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals for the
furnished equipment, or which are otherwise required for the
operation, with the manufacturer's recommended procedures for
operation, adjustment and maintenance. Special tools do not
include those required for major repairs normally done by factory
trained or otherwise specialized service personnel, nor do they
include those normally found in the possession of Owner's on site
maintenance personnel.
1.65 MANUFACTURER'S START-UP ASSISTANCE
A. Where the services of a factory authorized service representative

are specified for the start-up of certain pieces of equipment,
arrange to have the manufacturer of such equipment perform start-
up and check-out service. Manufacturer shall provide a letter
which shall be on the manufacturer's letterhead, shall list the
equipment, shall certify that the equipment has been examined,
that it has been installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions, started up, adjusted, and checked out
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and is
operating properly. The letter shall be addressed to the Owner
and shall be signed by an authorized representative of the
manufacturer. Coordinate with provisions of Section 15992.
1.66 PUTTING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION - START UP
A. Prior to final acceptance, at time agreed to by Owner and

Architect, put all systems into satisfactory operation.
B. At first heating or cooling season following final acceptance,

start up systems not started due to lack of seasonal design load
or operation of the central system.
C. Operate all systems in good working order for period of fourteen

(14) working days.
D. Perform services in accordance with manufacturer's written start-

up instructions. Test control and demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.

24000 AVILA ROAD
E. Maintenance and Operation Training:
1. As a part of the maintenance and operating instructions,

review data in operating and maintenance manual, including
preventative maintenance schedule and procedures, and
procedures for obtaining repair parts and technical
assistance. Demonstrate all phases of operation including
start-up and shut-down.
2. Schedule minimum of 40 hours training with Owner, provide

at least seven (7)-day notice to Architect/Engineer.
1.67 COORDINATION WITH COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES
A. Submit start-up checklist form and procedure for review and

approval. Approval shall be given prior to initial equipment
start-up.
B. Upon completion of start-up procedure, submit report including:
1. Start-up checklist.
2. List of personnel performing start-up.
3. Equipment identification.
4. Date of start-up.
5. Description of equipment start-up problems or successful

operation.
1.68 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Refer to General and Special Conditions requirements of the

manual.
1.69 EXISTING EQUIPMENTS
A. Contractor shall be responsible to remove and cart away from the

project site all equipments planned to be demolished. Contractor
shall give the Owner an amount (US$) equivalent to the market
value of the equipments in their current condition. This $ amount
shall be specifically indicated on the price rate of the bid
documents.
END OF SECTION

24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 23 05 16
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Flexible pipe connectors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and

Equipment: Product and installation requirements for piping
hangers and supports.
2. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

Piping and Equipment: Product and installation requirements
for vibration isolators used in piping systems.
3. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Product and

installation requirements for piping used in hydronic
heating and cooling systems.
4. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Product and

installation requirements for piping used in refrigeration
systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.
3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.
4. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding

and Brazing Qualifications.
B. American Welding Society:
1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and

contraction of piping. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion
joints provide and adequately protect system.

24000 AVILA ROAD

B. Expansion Compensation Design Criteria:
1. Installation Temperature: 50 degrees F.
2. Hot Water Heating System Temperature: 210 degrees F.
3. Safety Factor: 30 percent.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for

submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including

flexible connectors, expansion joints, expansion compensators,
loops, offsets and swing joints. Include shop drawing information
for piping expansion compensation in shop drawings for piping
system.
C. Product Data:
1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and

pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose
wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot (meter) and per
assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid
structure, and total number of wires in braid.
2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure

rating, and maximum expansion compensation.
D. Design Data: Indicate criteria and show calculations. Submit

sizing methods sealed by a registered professional engineer.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special

procedures.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed

G. Welders’ Certificate: Include welders’ certification of

compliance with ASME Section IX, AWS D1.1.
H. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Indicate results of inspection by

manufacturer’s representative.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flexible

pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit adjustment instructions.

24000 AVILA ROAD

A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME

B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX
for welding materials and procedures.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products

specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this

section with minimum three years documented experience approved
by manufacturer.
C. Design expansion compensating system under direct supervision of

Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed in State of California.
1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation

meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this

section.
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and

handling requirements.
B. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping

bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings,

pipe end protection, and packaging in place until installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product

warranties and product bonds.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for leak free performance

of packed expansion joints.
1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare

parts and maintenance products.
B. Supply two 12 ounce (340 g) containers of packing lubricant and

24000 AVILA ROAD

cartridge style grease gun.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Metraflex.
2. Flexonics.
3. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
B. Steel Piping:
1. Inner Hose: Stainless Steel.
2. Exterior Sleeve: Double braided stainless steel.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig WSP and 450 degrees F.
4. Joint: As specified for pipe joints.
5. Size: Use pipe-sized units.
6. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center

line.
C. Copper Piping:
1. Inner Hose: Bronze.
2. Exterior Sleeve: Braided bronze.
3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa) WSP and 450 degrees F.
4. Joint: As specified for pipe joints.
5. Size: Use pipe sized units.
6. Maximum offset: 3/4 inch on each side of installed center

line.
2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS – BELLOWS TYPE, METAL
A. Pathway Bellows, Inc.
B. Yuba Industries, Adsco Div.
C. Flexonics Division, V.O.P.
D. U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Co.

24000 AVILA ROAD

E. Zellea Bros., Inc.
2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS – BELLOWS TYPE, NON-METALLIC
A. Garlock, Inc.
B. Mason Industries, Inc.
C. Resist Flex.
2.4 GROOVED END EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Gustin-Bacon Division, Aeroquip Corp.
B. Certain-Teed Products Corp.
C. Victaulic Company of America.
2.5 EXPANSION JOINTS – PACKED TYPE
A. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
B. YUBA Industries, Adsco Division.
C. Yarway Corp.
2.6 BALL JOINTS
A. Barco, Aeroquip Corp.
2.7 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS
A. Flexonics Division, V.O.P.
B. U.S. Flexible Metallic Tubing Co.
2.8 EXPANSION JOINTS – PACKLESS TYPE
A. Suitable for pressure and service.
B. Steel piping to 2-1/2 in.:
1. Stainless steel bellows.
2. Flanged or union ends.
3. Internally guided.
4. Anti-torque device.
5. Similar to Flexonics Model H Compensator.
C. Steel piping 3 in. and larger:

24000 AVILA ROAD

D. Copper piping up to 3 in.:
1. All bronze type with:
a. Two-ply bronze bellows.
b. Anti-torque device limit stops.
c. Internal guides.
d. Solder joint end.
2. Suitable for minimum:
a. 125 psi WSP and 400 deg. F.
b. 200 psi WOG and 250 deg F.
3. Similar to Flexonics Model HB Compensator.
E. Copper or Steel piping: (2 in. and under)
1. Low pressure compensators.
2. Two-ply bronze bellows.
3. Suitable for minimum:
a. 50 psi pressure.
b. 250 deg. F.
c. Maximum ½ in. expansion.
4. Similar to Flexonics Model L.
F. Non-Metallic Compensators, 2 in. and over:
1. Spool type expansion, flexible connector.
2. With tapped steel flanges, (Teflon) neoprene and nylon)

body.
3. Suitable for minimum 200 psi working pressure and 250 deg
F.
4. Similar to Garlock Garflex Style 8100.
2.9 BALL JOINTS
A. Connections:
1. 2 in. and smaller – threaded.

24000 AVILA ROAD

2. 2-1/2 in. and larger – weld end or flanged.
B. Body: steel, 250 psi suitable to 525F service temperature.
C. Capable of 360degree rotation and minimum of 15 degree angular

flexing movement.
D. Joints for normal underground service shall be malleable steel,

with chromium plated ball end.
E. Joints for highly corrosive under ground service shall be

malleable steel socket end and stainless steel ball end.
F. Similar to:
1. Barco standard series, threaded.
2. Barco Type N, welded.
2.10 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS
A. Construction:
1. Steel spider fastened to pipe.
2. Steel sleeve secured to structure.
3. Factory fabricated assembly.
B. Select guides and anchors to be capable of serving as seismic

braces if required:
1. See Section 23 05 48: Vibration and Seismic Controls for

HVAC Piping and Equipment.
2. Similar to Flexonics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME

B31.9.
B. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment

supported by vibration isolation. Refer to Section 23 05 48.
Provide line size flexible connectors.
C. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement.

Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and
anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless indicated
otherwise.
D. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure. Provide pipe guides to

24000 AVILA ROAD

direct movement only along axis of pipe. Erect piping so strain
and weight is not on cast connections or apparatus.
E. Provide support and anchors for controlling expansion and

contraction of piping. Provide loops, pipe offsets, and swing
joints, or expansion joints as indicated on Drawings. Refer to
Section 23 05 29 for pipe hanger installation requirements.
F. Provide grooved piping systems with minimum one joint per inch
pipe diameter instead of flexible connector supported by
vibration isolation. Grooved piping systems need not be anchored.
G. Provide expansion loops.
3.2 PROVISIONS FOR EXPANSION
A. Install piping to permit free expansion and contraction without

damaging piping or construction.
B. Provide offsets, expansion loops, anchors, guides and supports to

permit expansion, within stress limits of ANSI Code for Pressure
Piping for temperature ranges specified.
C. Where pipe loops or changes in direction of piping cannot be

employed to absorb expansion and contraction, provide mechanical
expansion joints.
D. Flexible pipe connections and expansion joints suitable to

connect the adjoining piping.
E. Rigidly anchor pipe to building structure.
F. Provide pipe guides so that movement takes place along axis of

pipe only.
G. Use swing or swivel joints for connections as specified in other

Sections for piping.
H. Branch connections to terminal heat transfer units shall have

strain on when cold, off when hot.
I. Make riser offsets in manner to avoid pocket forming due to

expansion.
J. Loops, bends, offsets:
1. Provide loops, bends and offsets as indicated on plans.
2. If additional required, because of job required relocation

of piping and equipment, design as follows:
a. Use spring type loop, U-bend, offset U-bend, L-bend,

or Z-bend.

24000 AVILA ROAD

b. Corner radii five to six times pipe diameters.
c. Join bends only by welding.
d. Submit design details for approval before

fabrication.
3. Loops with ball type joints may be used in lieu of rigid

elbows.
a. Submit design details for approval.
b. Base expansion calculations on temperatures listed

under performance requirements.
3.3 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Follow manufacturer’s published installation directions.
B. Provide anchors and alignment guides as indicated and as

specified herein.
C. Align expansion joints carefully with alignment guides and

supports. Follow joint manufacturer’s published instructions.
D. Exercise care in cutting pipe for final connection to expansion

joint. Set slip-sleeve in proper position of traverse for cold
condition.
E. Where expansion joints are in concealed locations, provide access

doors of size to permit inspection, servicing and replacement, as
approved.
3.4 ANCHORS AND GUIDES
A. Provide anchors for controlling direction and extent of pipe

expansion as required or as shown.
1. Details of anchor design, manner of fastening to pipe and

to building structural members or to independent concrete
block are indicated on drawings.
2. Submit details of anchoring methods differing from those on

drawings for approval before installation.
B. Alignment Guides:
1. Provide pipe alignment guides to guide expanding pipe to

move freely from anchor points to expansion joints, loops
or bends.
2. Locate where indicated on drawings, or elsewhere as

required, properly secured to maintain alignment with
centerline of pipe and preclude binding of spider in guide

24000 AVILA ROAD

housing.
3.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment

supported by vibration isolation.
B. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement.
C. Install one end immediately adjacent to isolated equipment and

anchor other end.
D. Factory Assembled Seismic Joints.
1. Two flexible metal hoses at right angles to each other:
a. Inner corrugated hose: stainless steel or bronze.
b. Outer stainless steel or bronze braid.
c. Suitable for service temperature and pressure.
d. End connections to suit piping system.
2. Movement permitted in three planes.
3. Minimum movement required.
4. Similar to Flexonics.
E. Division 26 responsibilities for Commissioning, including

requirements for demonstration and training.
3.6 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers’ field

services.
B. Furnish inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's

representative for final installation and certify installation is
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and connectors
are performing satisfactorily.

24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Pipe hangers and supports.
2. Hanger rods.
3. Inserts.
4. Flashing.
5. Equipment curbs.
6. Sleeves.
7. Mechanical sleeve seals.
8. Formed steel channel.
9. Firestopping relating to HVAC work.
10. Firestopping accessories.
1. Section 03 11 00 - Concrete Forming: Execution requirements

for placement of insert sleeves in concrete forms specified by
this section.
2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution

requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads
specified by this section.
3. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for

firestopping for placement by this section.
4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Protection: Product requirements

for sealant materials for placement by this section.
5. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and

execution requirements for painting specified by this section.

Piping and Equipment: Product and execution requirements for
vibration isolators.
24000 AVILA ROAD
7. Section 23 21 13 - Hydronic Piping: Execution requirements

for placement of hangers and supports specified by this
section.
8. Refer to all Structural drawings.
1.2 REFERENCES
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics

of Building Materials.
2. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials.
3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through

Penetration Firestops.
4. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation

of Rigid Pipe Hangers.
5. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint

Systems.
C. American Welding Society:
D. FM Global:
1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials &

Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property
Conservation.
E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry:
1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design

and Manufacturer.
2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and

Application.
3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and

Installation Practices.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials.
3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint

Systems.
5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
G. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
1. WH - Certification Listings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or

stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and
penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of
fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, UL 1479 to

achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent
construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.
1. Ratings may be 3-hours for firestopping in through-

penetrations of 4-hour fire rated assemblies unless
otherwise required by applicable codes.
A. Firestopping: Conform to applicable codes FM, UL, and WH for fire

resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority

having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location including

critical dimensions, sizes, and pipe hanger and support locations
and detail of trapeze hangers.
C. Product Data:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data

including load capacity.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics,

performance and limitation criteria.
D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and

sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to
seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent
assembly.
E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple

pipe, and riser support hangers. Indicate calculations used to
determine load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and
riser support hangers. Submit sizing methods, calculations sealed
by a registered professional engineer.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and

assembly of components.
2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation

instructions.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed

H. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH

listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional
engineer suitable for presentation to authority having
jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection
requirements.
I. Provide complete Duct Support Submittal including:
1. Complete rectangular duct construction details including

duct gauges, stiffening methods, field joints, all proposed
rectangular fittings, seismic restraints, and accessories.
2. Complete round spiral duct construction details including

duct gauges, field joints, all proposed round duct
fittings, seismic restraints, and accessories.
3. Complete rectangular and round duct appurtenances

including:
a. Double wall turning vanes.
b. Manual volume dampers – lined & wrapped ductwork.
c. Manual volume dampers above non-accessible ceilings.
d. Housings and plenums Field Fabrication Drawings.
e. Duct through roof details.
f. Combination Fire / Smoke damper assemblies.
24000 AVILA ROAD
g. Sheet metal lined register boxes.
h. Flexible ductwork.
i. Instrument test ports.
j. Manufacturer model numbers and technical cut sheet

shall be provided for all purchased products for
items listed above.
4. Submit appropriate SMACNA Plate or schedule where duct

construction is based on SMACNA Standards.
J. Provide complete Duct and Pipe Concrete Insert, Sleeves, and

Flashing Submittal including:
1. Concrete insert manufacturer, proposed insert model(s),

size, embedment, and installation details.
2. Duct and pipe sleeve manufacturer, sleeve gauge(s), Fire

Resistive UL Listing Number(s), and installation details.
3. Duct and pipe flashing manufacturer, flashing gauge(s),

sealing methods, and installation details.
A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL

1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive
pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature
T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.
1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings,

but not less than 1-hour.
2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature

T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-
hour.
a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is

not required.
B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor and Roof

Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and
products of combustion.
1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials

for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories.
2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having

jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of
two stories.
C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall

Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant
24000 AVILA ROAD
rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is

installed.
D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls:

ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage minimum positive pressure
differential to achieve fire resistant rating as indicated on
Drawings for floor assembly.
E. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke

developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
F. Perform Work in accordance with applicable authority AWS D1.1 for

welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.
G. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products

specified in this section with minimum three years documented
experience.

section with minimum three years experience approved by
manufacturer.
A. Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination.

section.
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for

transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled

with manufacturer's identification.
C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water,

chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions

affecting products on site.
B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate

material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.
C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum

3 days after installation of firestopping materials.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
1.12 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pipe hangers and

supports.
B. Section 01 78 36 - Warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson Inc.
2. B-Line System Inc.
3. Flex-Weld, Inc.
4. Glope Pipe Hanger Products Inc.
5. Michigan Hanger Co.
6. Superior Valve Co.
B. Hydronic Piping:
1. Conform to ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS
SP89.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel,

adjustable swivel, split ring.
3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon

steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel,

adjustable, clevis.
5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable

steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.
6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded

spacers and hanger rods.
24000 AVILA ROAD
7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and

Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods,
cast iron roll.
8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron
hooks.
9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded

steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded
steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel
yoke and cast iron roll.
11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe
saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier
or steel support.
13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Smaller: Cast
iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger:
Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and
concrete pier or steel support.
15. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated, carbon steel ring.
C. Refrigerant Piping:
1. Conform to ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP58, MSS SP69, MSS
SP89.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel,

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel,

adjustable, clevis.
4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded

spacers and hanger rods.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron
hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded

steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut,

nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
24000 AVILA ROAD
9. Copper Pipe Support: Copper-plated carbon-steel ring.
2.2 PIPE AND DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Pipe Support:
1. All piping shall be supported in such a manner that it is

securely attached to the structure of the building.
2. Attachment shall be capable of supporting the tributary

weight of the pipe and contents in any direction.
3. The maximum support spacing for vertical and horizontal

pipes shall be as required by the California Plumbing Code,
(UPC) Chapter 3, but not less than that indicated in the
table below for horizontal piping.
Maximum Spacing for Horizontal Pipes
Hanger Rod
Pipe Size Copper Steel Cast Iron Nat. Gas
Size
1/2” 3/8” 6’ 6’ - 6’
3/4” 3/8” 6’ 8’ - 6’
1” 3/8” 6’ 8’ - 6’
1-1/4” 3/8” 6’ 8’ - 6’
1-1/2” 3/8” 6’ 8’ 8’ 6’
2” 1/2” 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
2-1/2” 1/2” 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
3” 1/2” 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
4” 1/2” 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
6” 5/8” 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
8” 5/8” 8’ 8’ 8’ 8’
B. Duct Supports:
1. All ductwork shall be supported in such a manner that it is

securely attached to the structure of the building.
2. The attachment shall be capable of supporting the tributary

weight of the ductwork in any direction.
3. The maximum support spacing and hanger strap or angle for

vertical and horizontal ducts shall be as defined by the
California Mechanical Code (CMC) TABLE 6-E – Duct Supports
as indicated in the Tables below:
TABLE 6-E - DUCT SUPPORTS

Part I - VERTICAL DUCTS
MAXIMUM SIDE METAL STRAP OR MAXIMUM

OF ANGLE BRACKET DIAMETER OF STRAPS
RECTANGULAR ROUND DUCTS
DUCT
x 25.4 for mm
1
24” 1” x 1/8” (strap) 10” 0.047” (No. 18 gage)
24000 AVILA ROAD
galvanized steel 2” wide1

36” 1” x 1” x 1/8” angle 20” 0.058” (No. 16 gage)
1
galvanized steel 2” wide1
48” 1-1/8” x 1-1/8” x 40” 1/8” steel x 1-1/2” 1
1/8” angle 1
1
60” 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 60” 1/8” steel x 2”
1/8” angle 1
1
Over 60” 2” x 2” x 1/8” angle Over 60” 3/16” steel x 2”
1
PART II - HORIZONTAL DUCTS

2
18” 1” x 18 gage 10” Same gage as galvanized
steel duct, 1” wide or
2
30” 1” x 18 gage (No. 18 gage galvanized
steel wire) on 10’ center.
2
48” 1” x 1/8” 20” Same gage as galvanized
steel duct, 1” wide or No.8
gage galvanized steel wire)
tied to 1”
2
60” 1” x 1/8” 40” galvanized steel band around
duct on 10” centers.
60” Same gage as galvanized
steel duct, 1-1/2”
2
80 1” x 1/8” wide on 6’ centers.
Over 60” Same gage as galvanized
steel duct, 1-1/2”
wide on 4” centers.
Part III - HORIZONTAL DUCTS - TRAPEZE TYPE SUPPORTS
MAXIMUM
DIAMETER OF
ROUND DUCT OR HORIZONTAL SUPPORT HANGER
SIDE OF ANGLE3
RECTANGULAR
DUCT
36” 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x 1/4” round rod or 1” x 1” x 1/8” angle
1/8”
48” 2” x 2” x 1/8” 1/4” round rod or 1” x 1” x 1/8” angle
1
Spaced vertically not more than 6 feet (3658 mm) on centers.
2
Spaced horizontally not more than 8 feet (3048 mm) on centers.
3
Spaced not more than 8 feet (2438 mm) on centers.
C. Piping Arrangement:
1. Arrange all hangers and supports to prevent the

transmission of vibration from pipe and duct systems to the
building structure.
2. Arrange all hangers and supports to allow for expansion

and/or contraction of hangers and supports for all hot
24000 AVILA ROAD
utilities.
3. All hangers and supports shall be sized for applications

where insulation occurs to allow for the insulation product
installation to carry straight through without
interruptions in the insulation system integrity.
4. All non-insulated copper or brass pipe or tubing shall be

isolated from the ferrous hangers or supports with “Lemco –
Trisolators” or “Potter Roemer RP Isolators”.
5. All pipe and duct hangers and supports that are exposed to
weather shall be constructed of galvanized steel.
D. Pipe Hanger Schedule:
1. All piping systems hangers shall be as specified in the

“Pipe Hanger Schedule” below:
PIPE HANGER SCHEDULE
Pipe Utility Pipe Steel Pipe Copper Pipe Cast Iron Pipe
Size
Chilled Water ½” thru B-Line Fig. B-Line Fig. NA
8” B3108 B3108 Extended
Extended Clevis Hanger
Clevis Hanger
Heating Hot ½” thru B-Line Fig. B-Line Fig. NA
Water 8” B3108 B3108
Adjustable Adjustable
Steel Yoke Steel Yoke
Pipe Roll Pipe Roll
E. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Support Systems:
1. Piping shall be installed on trapeze type support systems

where pipe runs can be combined. Refer to Drawings for
specific trapeze support details including:
a. Maximum Dead Load on the trapeze support.
b. Maximum trapeze allowable span.
c. Hanger rod minimum size requirements.
d. Maximum installed length for hanger rods.
e. Vertical and diagonal bracing requirements.
f. Attach bolts and connection details.
2. All components of the trapeze pipe support system shall be

as manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the
following Figure numbers:
a. Figure B2417 Strut Mounted Pipe Guide.
24000 AVILA ROAD
b. Figure B3147A & B3147B Pipe Anchor.
c. Figure B32 12 Gauge Double Channels – Welded.
d. Figure N225 Spring Channel Nuts.
F. Wall Pipe Hanger Support Systems:
1. Piping shall be installed on wall type support systems

where pipe runs cannot be supported overhead.
2. All components of the wall pipe support system shall be as

manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the
a. Figure B3064 Adjustable Stud Bracket.
b. Figure B3065 Angle Iron Bracket.
c. Figure B3066 Medium Duty Angle Bracket – for loads up

to 1500#.
d. Figure B3067 Heavy Duty Angle Bracket – for loads up

to 3000#.
e. Figure B3188 Standard U-Bolt.
G. Floor Pipe Support Systems:
1. Piping shall be supported on floor pipe supports for all

vertical risers in Equipment Rooms.
2. All components of the floor pipe support system shall be as

manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the
a. Figure B3088 Base Stand.
b. Figure B30088T Threaded Base Stand.
c. Figure B3089 Pipe Support Adjuster.
d. Figure B3090 Pipe Support with U-Bolt.
e. Figure B3092 Adjustable Pipe Saddle Support with

Yoke.
H. Vertical Pipe Support or Guide Systems:
1. Piping installed in shafts or thru floor shall be supported

in a manner that is securely attached to the structure of
the building.
2. All pipe riser(s) shall be supported at the base and at the

top of the run with pipe supports designed to support one-
24000 AVILA ROAD
half of the installed pipe weight including the pipe

contents.
3. Pipe guides or floor supports shall be installed at each

penetration though the building structure.
4. All components of the vertical pipe support or guide system

shall be as manufactured by “B-Line Systems, Inc.”
utilizing the following Figure numbers:
a. Figure B3373 Standard Riser Clamp – Steel Pipe.
b. Figure B3373CTC Riser Clamp – Copper Pipe.
c. Figure B3373C Riser Clamp – Plastic Coated –

Refrigerant Pipe.
d. Figure B3281 thru B3287 Pipe Alignment Guide.
2.3 INSERTS
A. Cast-In-Place Concrete Inserts:
1. All Cast-In-Place concrete inserts shall be constructed of

steel or Malleable Iron.
2. All Cast-In-Place concrete inserts shall be as manufactured

by “B-Line Systems, Inc.” utilizing the following Figure
Numbers:
a. Figure BD 40 Pipe Sleeve Fastener.
b. Figure B2500 Light Duty Spot Insert.
c. Figure N2500 Steel Nut Insert.
d. Figure B3014 Malleable Iron Insert.
e. Figure B3014N Malleable Iron Insert Nut.
f. Figure B2505 thru B2508 Spot Insert.
B. Expansion and Drop-In Anchors:
1. All Expansion and Drop-In concrete inserts shall be

constructed of steel and shall carry ICBO approval numbers.
2. All Expansion and Drop-In concrete inserts shall be as

manufactured by “Hilti, Inc.” utilizing the following
products:
a. Hilti – HSL Anchor.
b. Hilti – Kwik Bolt II Anchor.
24000 AVILA ROAD
c. Hilti – HDI Anchor.
d. Hilti – HDI-L Anchor.
e. Hilti – Sleeve Anchor.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to pipe or

duct system expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous
insulation wrapping.
B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe.
C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
2.5 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and

supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts and suspended
ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end,
or continuous threaded.
2.7 INSERTS
A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and

expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment,
top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size
inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
2.8 FLASHING
A. Metal Flashing: 24 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage thick galvanized steel.
C. Lead Flashing:
1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead.
2. Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq. ft sheet lead.
D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with

roofing.
E. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements.
2.9 EQUIPMENT CURBS
A. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage galvanized steel shell and base,
24000 AVILA ROAD
mitered 3 inch cant, variable step to match root insulation, 1-

1/2 inch thick insulation, factory installed wood nailer.
Fabricate curb as indicated on the drawing.
2.10 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick

galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings,

and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick
galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.
D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel or wood.
E. Sealant: Acrylic; refer to Section 07 92 00.
2.11 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.
2. NMP Corporation.
B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of

interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and
pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when
tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
2.12 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.
2. B-Line Systems
3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division
4. Unistrut Corp.
B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes

1-1/2 inches on center.
2.13 FIRESTOPPING
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning Corp.
2. Fire Trak Corp.
3. Hilti Corp.
4. International Protective Coating Corp.
5. 3M fire Protection Products
6. Specified Technology, Inc.
B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple

manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system
description and performance requirements; provide only one type
for each similar application.
1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single or

multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and
compatible silicone sealant.
2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single or Multiple component

foam compound.
3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers:

Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos
fibers.
4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of

ceramic fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer
for smoke stopping.
5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical

device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer,
covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with
collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.
6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which

expands on exposure to surface heat gain.
7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
C. Color: Dark gray or Black.
2.14 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for

specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire
ratings.
B. Dam Material: Permanent:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Mineral fiberboard.
2. Mineral fiber matting.
3. Sheet metal.
4. Plywood or particle board.
5. Alumina silicate fire board.
C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners,

temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position
and retain materials in place.
D. General:
1. Furnish UL listed products.
2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or

floor being penetrated.
E. Non-Rated Surfaces:
1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring

escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering
openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed.
2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical

sealing device to continuously fill annular space between
piping and cored opening or water-stop type wall sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of

existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION

material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping
material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C. Install backing or damming materials to arrest liquid material

leakage.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-

actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION - INSERTS
A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.
B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete

slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts

carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.
D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush

with slab surface.
E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below
and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut
above flush with top of slab.
3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.5, ASME 31.9,

ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, MSS SP 89.
B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2 inch space between finished

covering and adjacent work.
D. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.
F. Support vertical piping at every floor.
G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation,

provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers.
H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal

piping.
I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or

sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.
J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of

supported pipe.
K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and

supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended
L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other
24000 AVILA ROAD
equipment for installation of insulation.
3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and

extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section
03 30 00.
B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts,

and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct supports of steel members, formed steel channel, steel

pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to
structure.
D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation

components are installed. Refer to Section 22 05 48.
3.6 INSTALLATION - FLASHING
A. Provide flexible flashing and metal Counterflashing where piping

and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and
roofs.
B. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes

penetrating equipment rooms for sound control.
C. Provide curbs for roof installations 14 inches minimum high above

roofing surface. Flash and counter-flash with sheet metal; seal
watertight. Attach Counterflashing to equipment and lap base
flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.
D. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top
edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange
section to face of curb.
3.7 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.
B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around

sleeves.
C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion

and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level.

Caulk sleeves.
E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall,

close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with
firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting
metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.
F. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.8 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING
A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and

openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and
other items, requiring firestopping.
B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of

firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for
compliance with required fire ratings.
C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve

required fire and smoke rating, to uniform density and texture.
D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its

uncompressed size.
E. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density,

filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal
junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
F. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating

required.
G. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.
H. Fire Rated Surface:
1. Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof

as follows:
a. Install sleeve through opening and extending beyond

minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element.
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between

sleeve and building element.
c. Pack void with backing material.
d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive

silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure
penetrated.
2. Where cable tray, bus, cable bus, conduit, wireway, trough,

and penetrates fire rated surface, install firestopping
product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Non-Rated Surfaces:
1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor,

ceiling, and roof opening as follows:

minimum of 1 inch on both sides of building element.
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch void between
24000 AVILA ROAD
sleeve and building element.
c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by

manufacturer.
2. Install escutcheons, floor plates or ceiling plates where

conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied
spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished
ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished
ceiling.
3. Exterior wall openings below grade: Assemble rubber links

of mechanical sealing device to size of piping and tighten
in place, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at

telecommunication rooms and data rooms. Apply sealant to
both sides of penetration to completely fill annular space
between sleeve and conduit.
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, 01 77 00 - Execution and

Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
B. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications

and submitted schedule.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements:

Requirements for cleaning.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

Requirements for protecting finished Work.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
3.12 SCHEDULES
A. Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing:

COPPER STEEL PIPE COPPER STEEL PIPE
PIPE SIZE TUBING MAXIMUM TUBING HANGER ROD
Inches MAXIMUM HANGER HANGER ROD DIAMETER
HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Inches
SPACING Feet Inches
Feet
1/2 5 7 3/8 3/8
24000 AVILA ROAD
3/4 5 7 3/8 3/8

1 6 7 3/8 3/8
1-1/4 7 7 3/8 3/8
1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8
2 8 10 3/8 3/8
2-1/2 (Note 2) 9 11 1/2 1/2
3 10 12 1/2 1/2
4 12 14 1/2 5/8
5 13 16 1/2 5/8
6 14 17 5/8 3/4
8 16 19 3/4 3/4
10 18 22 3/4 7/8
12 19 23 3/4 7/8
14 22 25 7/8 1
16 23 27 7/8 1
18 25 28 1 1
20 27 30 1 1-1/4
24 28 32 1-1/4 1-1/4
B. Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing:

MAXIMUM HANGER ROD
PIPE MATERIAL HANGER SPACING DIAMETER
Feet Inches
ABS (All sizes) 4 3/8
FRP (All Sizes) 4 3/8
Ductile Iron (Note 2)
PVC (All Sizes) 4 3/8
C. Note 1: Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for grooved end

piping systems.
D. Note 2: 20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for each

pipe section close to joint behind bell. Provide hanger at each
change of direction and each branch connection. For pipe sizes 6
inches and smaller, subjected to loadings other than weight of
pipe and contents, limit span to maximum spacing for water
service steel pipe.
24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Nameplates.
2. Tags.
3. Stencils.
4. Pipe markers.
5. Ceiling tacks.
6. Labels.
7. Lockout devices.
1. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Execution

requirements for painting specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping

Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each
product required.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and
color coding for mechanical identification and valve chart and
schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and
valve manufacturer's name and model number.
D. Samples: Submit two tags, labels, and pipe markers size used on
project.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation
instructions, special procedures, and installation.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged
valves; include valve tag numbers.

24000 AVILA ROAD

A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of
piping systems and accessories.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
section with minimum three years documented experience.

A. Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination.
section.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

B. Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive.
PRODUCTS
1.10 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Craftmark Identification Systems.
2. Safety Sign Co.
3. Seton Identification Products.

B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved
black letters on light contrasting background color.
1.11 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Seton.
b. Brady.
c. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters

on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-
1/2 inches diameter or square.
B. Metal Tags:

24000 AVILA ROAD

1. Manufacturers:
a. Seton.
b. Brady.
2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches

diameter or square with finished edges.
C. Information Tags:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Seton.
b. Brady.
2. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or

"Warning" and message; size 3-1/4 x 5-5/8 inches with
grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and
location in anodized aluminum frame with clear plastic shield.
Install at approved location.
1.12 STENCILS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Seton.
2. Brady.
3. Substitutions: Not permitted.

B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2

inch high letters.
2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe:

1-inch high letters.
3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4

inches high letters.
4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.

C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00, semi-gloss
enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1.
1.13 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B. Plastic Pipe Markers:

24000 AVILA ROAD

1. Manufacturers:
a. Seton.
b. Brady.
2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed

to fit around pipe or pipe covering. Larger sizes may have
maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Seton.
b. Brady.
2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive

backing and printed markings.
D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Seton.
b. Brady.
2. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,

minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for
direct burial service.
1.14 CEILING TACKS

A. Manufacturers:
1. Seton.
2. Brady.

B. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color-coded head.
C. Color code as follows:
1. HVAC equipment: Yellow.
2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red.
3. Plumbing valves: Green.

24000 AVILA ROAD

4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue.
1.15 LABELS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Seton.
2. Brady.

B. Description: Aluminum, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed
with printed identification.
EXECUTION
1.16 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for
identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil
painting.
1.17 INSTALLATION
A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and
painting.
C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical
fasteners, or adhesive.
D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion
and seal with clear lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering,
apply paint primer before applying labels.
E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags
consecutively by location.
F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below
finished grade, directly above buried pipe.
G. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment,
tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates.
Identify in-line pumps and other small devices with tags.
H. Identify control panels and major control components outside
panels with plastic nameplates.
I. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
J. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered
tags.
K. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control
schematic.
L. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers.
Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify
service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and
align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20
feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to
each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or
enclosure, and at each obstruction.
M. Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air
handling unit identification number and area served. Locate
identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration
of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.

24000 AVILA ROAD

N. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar
type panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to
equipment.

24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Testing adjusting, and balancing of air systems.
2. Testing adjusting, and balancing of hydronic refrigerating

systems.
3. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
4. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.
5. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.
1. Section 23 09 23 - Direct-Digital Control System for HVAC:

Requirements for coordination between DDC system and
testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
2. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC

Controls: Sequences of operation for HVAC equipment.
3. Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Associated Air Balance Council:
1. AABC MN-1 - National Standards for Testing and Balancing

Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems.
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting

and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-
Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems.
C. Natural Environmental Balancing Bureau:
1. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and

Balancing of Environmental Systems.
24000 AVILA ROAD

A. Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) work required
by this Section is indicated on Drawings and Schedules, and by
requirements of this Section; and is defined to include, but is
not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems, hydronic
and steam distribution systems, and associated equipment and
apparatus of mechanical work. The Work consists of setting speed
and volume (flow) adjusting facilities provided for systems,
recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting
reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by
Contract Documents. TAB Contractor to be contracted with General
Contractor.
B. Component types of testing, adjusting, and balancing specified in

this Section includes the following as applied to mechanical
equipment:
1. Fans and Air Conditioning Units.
2. Exhaust Fans
3. Air Distribution Systems.
4. Hot Water Boilers.
5. Pumps.
6. Piping Systems, Heating Water, Domestic Hot Water.
7. Terminal Units.
8. Air Conditioning Units, Split Systems and All Other

Mechanical and Plumbing Equipments.
C. Refer to Division-26 Sections for installation and start-up of

equipment to be tested, adjusted, and balanced.
D. Refer to Division-26 Sections for pressure testing of piping

and/or ductwork systems; not Work of this Section.
E. Refer to Division-16 Sections for electrical hook-up and wiring

of equipment to be tested, adjusted, and balanced; not Work of
this Section.
A. Tester's qualifications: Member of AABC or NEBB with at least

5-years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing
experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements
similar to those required for this Project, who is not Installer
of system to be tested, and is otherwise independent of the
Project.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. Standards Compliance: Comply with latest edition of "AABC
24000 AVILA ROAD

2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations

pertaining to measurements, instruments, and testing,
adjusting, and balancing, except as otherwise indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
B. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date

of each instrument.
C. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN-1 National Standards for

Total System Balance forms.
D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing,

adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve
specified performance.
E. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines

indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required.
Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy
of AABC National Project Performance Guaranty and Copy of NEBB
Certificate of Conformance Certification.
F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final

acceptance of Project.
G. Furnish reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder

manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs,
with cover identification at front and side. Include set of
reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to
correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
H. Within 60 calendar days after commencement of Division-26 Work,

submit the following for approval:
1. Name of testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) company.
2. Certificate of AABC or NEBB membership.
3. Copy of applicable AABC or NEBB standards.
4. Proof of satisfactory balancing Work with list of at least

three (3) projects of comparable type and size, including
following information:
a. Project name and location.
b. Gross floor area.
c. Number of terminal units.
24000 AVILA ROAD

d. Name of the engineering firm, name of the project
engineer and telephone number.
e. Name of the Owner, name of the chief operating

5. Sample blank forms to be used for TAB data recording and

reports.
6. List of TAB instruments and data sheets.
7. Biographical data on engineer who is to directly supervise

TAB work of this Project.
I. Within 30 calendar days after Architect's approval of TAB

company, TAB company shall review Contract Documents. Advise
Architect if any additional balancing devices (such as dampers,
balancing valves, "Pete's Plugs" Etc.) are required by TAB
company to properly perform specified and required TAB functions.
J. At least fifteen days prior to Contractor's request for final

inspection, submit three copies of final reports, on applicable
reporting forms per specs section 15010, 1.14.
1. Form of Final Reports:
a. Each individual final reporting form must bear:
1) Signature of person who recorded data.
2) Signature of TAB supervisor of reporting

organization.
b. Format per AABC. Bound 8-1/2" x 11".
2. Schedule testing and balancing of parts of systems which is

delayed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other
conditions beyond control of Contractor, as early as proper
conditions will allow, after consultation with the Owner.
3. Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execution

of those services.
K. Maintenance data: Include in maintenance manuals, copies of

certified test reports, identification of instruments, and data
on Engineer; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
L. Report Content:
1. Air Balance:
a. Fans:
1) Number, service, model, and size.
24000 AVILA ROAD

2) Delivery in CFM.
3) Static pressure: Suction, discharge, and total.
4) Voltage: Rated and actual.
5) Motor Amperage: Rated and actual.
6) Motor Sheave Diameter: Adjustable or solid.
7) Fan sheave diameter.
8) Motor RPM.
9) Fan RPM.
b. Fans Graphic Plot: For each fan, on its actual fan

curve, plot intersections of following lines:
1) CFM from traverse (or from airflow measuring

stations where installed).
2) Static pressure (or total pressure for fans so

rated).
3) Brake horsepower from amperes.
4) RPM
5) Position of fans variable adjustment (Blade

pitch, inlet vanes, and related information).
c. Filter banks, and outside air, return air, and

exhaust air CFM's.
d. Supply, exhaust, and return air outlets; arrange

following in columns:
1) Outlet location by room number or other suitable

means.
2) Include key plans if necessary to identify

location.
3) Supply outlet size.
4) Supply outlet deflection setting.
5) Supply outlet design CFM.
6) Supply outlet actual CFM.
7) Return or exhaust outlet size.
24000 AVILA ROAD

8) Return or exhaust outlet design CFM.
9) Return or exhaust outlet actual CFM.
10) Difference between supply and return/exhaust

CFM's.
e. Airflow Measuring Stations:
1) CFM
2) static pressure.
f. CV and VAV Terminal Units:
1) Design maximum CFM
2) Actual maximum CFM.
3) Design minimum CFM
4) Actual minimum CFM.
5) CV and VAV Box Gain Factors Report and

Calculations.
g. Duct Air Quantities: Mains, Branches, Outside Air

and Exhausts (Maximum and Minimum):
1) Duct sizes.
2) Number of pressure readings.
3) Sum of velocity measurements.
4) Average velocity.
5) Duct recorded airflow rate.
6) Duct design air flow rates.
h. Building Pressurization Data:
1) Outside air temperatures and humidities.
2) Outside wind velocity.
3) Building pressures plotted with respect to

systems.
4) Supply air, return air and exhaust airflow rates

for varying damper positions.
5) Locations of pressure measuring points, inside
24000 AVILA ROAD

and outside building.
i. Flow Measuring Station:
1) Identification/station.
2) Location.
3) Size.
4) Manufacturer.
5) Model.
6) Design flow rate.
7) Design pressure drop.
8) Actual/final pressure drop.
9) Actual/final flow rate.
10) Station calibrated setting.
2. Water Balance:
a. Each Flow Measuring Device and Balancing Device:
1) Device type, model and size.
2) Pressure differential.
3) GPM.
b. Each Heat Transfer Device: (Coil, heat exchanger, and

associated items):
1) Number, service, model and size.
2) GPM.
3) Entering water temperature.
4) Leaving water temperature.
5) Pressures: Inlet and outlet.
c. Heating Equipment Design Data:
1) Heat transfer rate.
2) Flow rates and pressure drops.
3) Entering and leaving water temperature.
24000 AVILA ROAD

d. Heating Equipment Recorded Data:
1) Element type and identification (location and

designation).
2) Entering and leaving temperatures.
3) Flow rates and pressure drops.
e. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Design Data:
1) Heat transfer rate.
2) Water pressure drop across coil.
3) Air static pressure drop.
4) Entering and leaving water temperatures.
5) Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb

temperatures.
f. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Recorded Data:
1) Element type and identification.
2) Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb

temperatures.
3) Entering and leaving water temperatures.
4) Water pressure drop across coil.
5) Water pressure drop across bypass valve.
6) Air static pressure drop.
7) Air and water flow rates.
8) Adjusted temperature rise or drop.
3. Sound Level Data:
a. Diagram or description of relationship of sound

source to measuring instrument.
b. Overall decibels (A) level.
c. Reading at each octave band frequency from 31.5 hertz

to 16 kilohertz.
d. Noise Criteria (NC) curves plotted and compares to

those recommended by ASHRAE or AABC publications.
24000 AVILA ROAD

e. Sound Level Recorded Data:
1) Air inlets and outlets.
2) CV and VAV terminal units.
3) Boilers.
4) VFD’s.
5) Fans.
6) AC units.
4. Vibration Test:
a. Location of Points:
1) Fan bearing, drive end.
2) Fan bearing, opposite end.
3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable).
4) Motor bearing, drive end.
5) Motor bearing, opposite end.
6) Casing (bottom or top).
7) Casing (side).
b. Test Readings:
1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement.
2) Vertical, velocity and displacement.
3) Axial, velocity and displacement.
c. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and

acceleration.
d. Unusual conditions at time of test.
e. Vibration source (if non-complying).
5. The TAB contractor shall compare the sum of the CV and VAV
box diffuser readings with the flow indicated by the box’s
controller prior to calibrating the box’s controller. If
the two readings agree within +/- 5%, the factory
calibration factors shall not be changed. If the readings
are not within +/- 5%, a documented trouble shooting
procedure consisting of checking and resolving the
24000 AVILA ROAD

a. Box size is per the approved submittal,
b. Manufacturer’s gain/flow factor has been correctly

entered into the controller,
c. Low pressure duct/connections are tight,
d. Velocity pressure connections at the box inlet and

controller are tight and undamaged,
e. Static pressure at the box’s inlet exceeds the

minimum required, and
f. Box flow measuring device is undamaged.
6. This procedure and results for carrying out steps a-f above
are to be retained by the Mechanical Contractor for
delivery to the owner/design consultant on request.
7. TAB contractor shall compile an Excel spreadsheet for all

terminal boxes, listing each box by its unique
identification number, the inlet flow area established by
the box manufacturer, the manufacturer’s gain factor for
the box, final TAB calibrated gain factor for the box if
field calibrated, and the ratio of the calibrated gain
factor to the manufacturer’s gain factor.
8. Require the TAB contractor to measure AHU supply and return

flow at the dirty differential pressure drop across the
pre-filter and final filter.
9. TAB shall show in their report all the individual velocity

measurements from duct or AHU traverses in grid format.
1.6 GENERAL
A. The Test and Balance Agency shall be provided with:
1. Within 30 days after selection -
a. Construction Drawings
b. Equipment Specifications
c. Written Contract
d. Equipment Submittals
2. As issued or received:
a. Change Orders
24000 AVILA ROAD

b. Equipment Manufacturer's Submittal Data
c. Mechanical/Air Conditioning Contractor's Shop

Drawings
d. Temperature Control Drawings
e. Reasonable Time
f. Completely Operable System
3. Before testing or balancing is started, the Contractor

shall adjust belts and sheaves, align all parts, oil and
grease bearings in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, clean exterior surfaces of coil tubes and
fins, flush interior of coil tubes until clean and check
mixing damper operation to insure free operation and
activation by the correct thermostat.
4. The contractor shall be responsible for certifying in

writing that the system, as scheduled for balancing, is
operational and complete. Completeness shall include not
only the physical installation, but the Contractor's
certification that the prime movers, fans, pumps,
refrigeration machines, boilers, are installed in good
working order, and that full load performance has been
preliminarily tested under the certification of the
Contractor. Before any testing and balancing is started, a
complete report shall be sent to the Test and Balance
Agency.
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for making all

modifications to rectify discrepancies reported by the
Balancing Agency as indicating non-compliance with the
contract documents.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents under provisions of Special Conditions

section.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and

schedule completion of work before Beneficial Occupancy of
Project.
B. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of

system with Fire Authority.
C. This project will be completed in phases. Provide a phasing plan

and schedule for work to be performed.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
24000 AVILA ROAD

A. A conference 2 weeks prior to commencing work of this Section.
1.10 REPORT FORMS
A. Within 60 calendar days after commencement of Division-15 Work,

submit the following for approval:
1. Name of testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) company.
2. Certificate of AABC or NEBB membership.
3. Copy of applicable AABC or NEBB standards.
4. Proof of satisfactory balancing Work with list of at least

three (3) projects of comparable type and size, including
following information:
a. Project name and location.
b. Gross floor area.
c. Number of terminal units.
d. Name of the engineering firm, name of the project

e. Name of the Owner, name of the chief operating

5. Sample blank forms to be used for TAB data recording and

reports.
6. List of TAB instruments and data sheets.
7. Biographical data on engineer who is to directly supervise

TAB work of this Project.
B. Within 30 calendar days after Architect's approval of TAB

company, TAB company shall review Contract Documents. Advise
Architect if any additional balancing devices (such as dampers,
balancing valves, "Pete's Plugs" Etc.) are required by TAB
company to properly perform specified and required TAB functions.
C. At least fifteen days prior to Contractor's request for final

inspection, submit three copies of final reports, on applicable
reporting forms.
1. Form of Final Reports:
a. Each individual final reporting form must bear:
1) Signature of person who recorded data.
2) Signature of TAB supervisor of reporting

organization.
24000 AVILA ROAD

b. Format per AABC. Bound 8-1/2" x 11".
2. Schedule testing and balancing of parts of systems which is

delayed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other
conditions beyond control of Contractor, as early as proper
conditions will allow, after consultation with the Owner.
3. Submit reports of delayed testing promptly after execution

of those services.
D. Maintenance Data: Include in maintenance manuals, copies of

certified test reports, identification of instruments, and data
on Engineer; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E. Submit reports on AABC National Standards for Total System

Balance.
F. Forms shall include the following information:
1. Title Page:
a. Company name
b. Company address
c. Company telephone number
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Architect
g. Project Engineer
h. Project Contractor
i. Project altitude
2. Instrument List:
a. Instrument
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
3. Air Moving Equipment:
24000 AVILA ROAD

a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Return air flow, specified and actual
f. Outside air flow, specified and actual
g. Total static pressure and total external, specified

and actual
h. Inlet pressure
i. Discharge pressure
j. Fan RPM
4. Exhaust Fan Data:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model
d. Air flow, specified and actual
e. Total static pressure and total external, specified

and actual
f. Inlet pressure
g. Discharge pressure
h. Fan RPM
5. Return Air/Outside Air Data:
a. Identification/location
b. Design air flow
c. Actual air flow
d. Design return air flow
e. Actual return air flow
f. Design outside air flow
24000 AVILA ROAD

g. Actual outside air flow
h. Return air temperature
i. Outside air temperature
j. Required mixed air temperature
k. Actual mixed air temperature
l. Design outside/return air ratio
m. Actual outside/return air ratio
6. Electric Motors:
a. Manufacturer
b. HP/BHP
c. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load.
d. RPM
e. Service factor
f. Starter size, rating, heater elements
7. V-Belt Drive:
b. Required driven RPM
c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d. Belt, size and quantity
e. Motor sheave, diameter and RPM
f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and

actual
8. Cooling Coil Data:
a. Identification/number
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
e. Air flow, design and actual
24000 AVILA ROAD

f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j. Water flow, design and actual
k. Water pressure drop, design and actual
l. Entering water temperature, design and actual
m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
n. Air pressure drop, design and actual
9. Heating Coil Data:
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
f. Water flow, design and actual
g. Water pressure drop, design and actual
h. Entering water temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j. Entering air temperature, design and actual
k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l. Air pressure drop, design and actual
10. Flow Measuring Station:
a. Identification/station
b. Location
c. Size
d. Manufacturer
24000 AVILA ROAD

e. Model
f. Design flow rate
g. Design pressure drop
h. Actual/final pressure drop
i. Actual/final flow rate
j. Station calibrated setting
11. Sound Level Report:
a. Location
b. Octave bands - equipment off
c. Octave bands - equipment on
12. Vibration Test:
a. Location of points:
1) Fan bearing, drive end
2) Fan bearing, opposite end
3) Motor bearing, center (if applicable)
4) Motor bearing, drive end
5) Motor bearing, opposite end
6) Casing (bottom or top)
7) Casing (side)
8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
9) Duct after flexible connection (suction)
b. Test readings:
1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement
2) Vertical, velocity and displacement
3) Axial, velocity and displacement

acceleration
d. Unusual conditions at time of test
24000 AVILA ROAD

e. Vibration source (if non-complying)
13. Duct Leak Test:
a. Description of ductwork under test
b. Duct design operating pressure
c. Duct design test static pressure
d. Duct capacity, air flow
e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak

factor
f. Test apparatus
1) Blower
2) Orifice, tube size
3) Orifice size
4) Calibrated
g. Test static pressure
h. Test orifice differential pressure
i. Leakage
14. Fans Graphic Plot: For each fan, on its actual fan curve,
plot intersections of following lines:
a. CFM from traverse (or from airflow measuring stations

where installed).
b. Static pressure (or total pressure for fans so

rated).
c. Brake horsepower from amperes.
d. RPM
e. Position of fans variable adjustment (Blade pitch,

inlet vanes, and related information).
15. Filter banks, and outside air, return air, and exhaust air
CFM's.
16. Supply, exhaust, and return air outlets; arrange following

in columns:
a. Outlet location by room number or other suitable
24000 AVILA ROAD

means.
b. Include key plans if necessary to identify location.
c. Supply outlet size.
d. Supply outlet deflection setting.
e. Supply outlet design CFM.
f. Supply outlet actual CFM.
g. Return or exhaust outlet size.
h. Return or exhaust outlet design CFM.
i. Return or exhaust outlet actual CFM.
j. Difference between supply and return/exhaust CFM's.
17. Airflow Measuring Stations:
a. CFM
b. Static pressure.
18. CAV Terminal Units:
a. Design maximum CFM
b. Actual maximum CFM.
c. Design minimum CFM
d. Actual minimum CFM.
e. CAV Box Gain Factors Report and Calculations.
19. Air Handling Equipment Installation Data:
a. Manufacturer, model and size.
b. Arrangement, discharge and class.
c. Motor type, horsepower, speed, voltage, phase, cycles

and full load amperes.
d. Location and final identification.
20. Air Handling Equipment Design Data:
a. Total air flow rate.
b. Static pressure.
24000 AVILA ROAD

c. Motor horsepower, speed, voltage and amperes.
d. Fan speed and brake horsepower.
e. Hydronic coil inlet and outlet, dry bulb

temperatures.
f. Initial filter air pressure drop.
21. Air Handling Equipment Recorded Data:
a. Total air flow rate.
b. Static Pressure.
c. Fan speed and brake horsepower.
d. Motor operating amperes.
e. Inlet and outlet, dry bulb temperatures.
f. Filter air pressure drop.
22. Duct Air Quantities: Mains, Branches, Outside Air and

Exhausts (Maximum and Minimum):
a. Duct sizes.
b. Number of pressure readings.
c. Sum of velocity measurements.
d. Average velocity.
e. Duct recorded air flow rate.
f. Duct design air flow rates.
23. Building Pressurization Data:
a. Outside air temperatures and humidities.
b. Outside wind velocity.
c. Building pressures plotted with respect to systems.
d. Supply air, return air and exhaust air flow rates for
varying damper positions.
e. Locations of pressure measuring points, inside and

outside building.
24000 AVILA ROAD

a. Identification/station.
b. Location.
c. Size.
d. Maufacturer.
e. Model.
f. Design flow rate.
g. Design pressure drop.
h. Actual/final pressure drop.
i. Actual/final flow rate.
j. Station calibrated setting.
k. Water Balance:
1) Pumps:
a) Number, service, model, and size.
b) GPM.
c) Pressures: Suction, discharge, and

total.
d) Voltage: Rated and actual.
e) Amperage: Rated and actual.
2) Each Flow Measuring Device and Balancing Device:
a) Device type, model and size.
b) Pressure differential.
c) GPM.
3) Each Heat Transfer Device: (Coil, and associated

items):
a) Number, service, model and size.
b) GPM.
c) Entering water temperature.
d) Leaving water temperature.
24000 AVILA ROAD

e) Pressures: Inlet and outlet.
4) Pump Design Data:
a) Flow rate and head pressure.
b) Pump speed and horsepower.
c) Pump efficiency.
5) Pump Recorded Data:
a) Discharge and suction pressures (full

flow and no flow).
b) Operating pressure and total dynamic

head.
c) Operating flow rate (from pump curves if

metering not provided or from variable
speed
d) Controller).
e) Motor operating amperes.
f) Balancing valve setting (full open, 60

percent open, etc.).
6) Expansion Tank Installation Data:
a) Manufacturer, size, capacity.
b) Pressure reducing valve setting.
c) Pressure relief valve setting.
7) Heating Equipment Design Data:
a) Heat transfer rate.
b) Flow rates and pressure drops.
c) Entering and leaving water temperature.
8) Heating Equipment Recorded Data:
a) Element type and identification (location

and designation).
b) Entering and leaving temperatures.
c) Flow rates and pressure drops.
24000 AVILA ROAD

9) Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Design Data:
a) Heat transfer rate.
b) Water pressure drop across coil.
c) Air static pressure drop.
d) Entering and leaving water temperatures.
e) Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb

temperatures.
10) Air Heating and Cooling Equipment Recorded Data:
a) Element type and identification.
b) Entering and leaving air dry and wet bulb

temperatures.
c) Entering and leaving water temperatures.
d) Water pressure drop across coil.
e) Water pressure drop across bypass valve.
f) Air static pressure drop.
g) Air and water flow rates.
h) Adjusted temperature rise or drop.
l. Sound Level Data:
1) Diagram or description of relationship of sound

source to measuring instrument.
2) Overall decibels (A) level.
3) Reading at each octave band frequency from 31.5

hertz to 16 kilohertz.
4) Noise Criteria (NC) curves plotted and compares

to those recommended by ASHRAE or AABC
publications.
5) Sound Level Recorded Data:
a) Air inlets and outlets.
b) CAV terminal units.
c) Air handling units.
24000 AVILA ROAD

d) Boilers.
e) VFD’s.
f) Fans.
g) AC units.
m. The TAB contractor shall compare the sum of the CAV

box diffuser readings with the flow indicated by the
box’s controller prior to calibrating the box’s
controller. If the two readings agree within +/- 5%,
the factory calibration factors shall not be changed.
If the readings are not within +/- 5%, a documented
trouble shooting procedure consisting of checking and
resolving the following shall be conducted prior to
calibrating the controller to verify:
1) Box size is per the approved submittal,
2) Manufacturer’s gain/flow factor has been

correctly entered into the controller,
3) Low pressure duct/connections are tight,
4) Velocity pressure connections at the box inlet

and controller are tight and undamaged,
5) Static pressure at the box’s inlet exceeds the

minimum required, and
6) Box flow measuring device is undamaged.
n. This procedure and results for carrying out steps a-f

above are to be retained by the Mechanical Contractor
for delivery to the owner/design consultant on
request.
o. TAB contractor shall compile an Excel spreadsheet for

all terminal boxes, listing each box by its unique
identification number, the inlet flow area
established by the box manufacturer, the
manufacturer’s gain factor for the box, final TAB
calibrated gain factor for the box if field
calibrated, and the ratio of the calibrated gain
factor to the manufacturer’s gain factor.
p. Require the TAB contractor to measure AHU supply and

return flow at the dirty differential pressure drop
across the pre-filter and final filter.
q. TAB shall show in their report all the individual

velocity measurements from duct or AHU traverses in
grid format.
24000 AVILA ROAD

1.11 PROCEDURES
A. General: Prior to commencement of balancing, review proposed

schedule, methods and instruments to be used in balancing with
the Engineer. Include descriptive data, procedure data and
sample forms.
B. Descriptive Data: Review contract documents, shop drawings

released for construction, design concepts and general function
of each system including associated equipment and operation
cycles. Confirm listing of flow and terminal measurements to be
performed; selection points for proposed sound measurements.
C. Procedure Data: Outline procedures for taking test measurements

to establish compliance with requirements. Specify type of
instruments to be used, method of instrument application (by
sketch) and correction factors. Verify access to valves, dampers
and equipment for testing and balancing.
D. Sample Forms: Submit forms showing application of procedures to

typical systems. Forms shall be of AABC format.
E. AABC test sheets required are as follows:
1. Air Moving Equipment Test Sheet.
2. Exhaust Fan Test Sheet (Supply, Return, Relief Fans).
3. Air Inlet and Outlet Test Sheet.
4. Water Balance Element Test Sheet.
5. Circulating Water Pump Data Sheet.
6. Duct Traverse Zone Totals Sheet.
7. Duct Traverse Readings Sheet.
1.12 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing Work until

Work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no
latent residual Work still to be completed.
B. Do not proceed until Work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and

balancing are clean and free from debris, dirt, and discarded
building materials.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow

measuring stations, balancing valves and rough setting.
24000 AVILA ROAD

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing,
adjusting, and balancing report inclusion in operating and
maintenance manuals.
A. Perform Work in accordance with AABC MN-1 National Standards for

Field Measurement and Instrumentation, NEBB Procedural Standards
for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.
C. Prior to commencing Work, calibrate each instrument to be used.

Upon completing Work, recalibrate each instrument to assure
reliability.
1.15 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing

of systems specified in this section with minimum three years
documented experience certified by AABC or Certified by NEBB.
B. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance

Engineer NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing and Adjusting
Supervisor registered professional engineer experienced in
performance of this Work and licensed is in State of California.
A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this

section.
1.17 SEQUENCING
A. Section 01 32 00 - Summary: Construction Progress Documentation.
B. Sequence balancing between completion of systems tested and Date

of Substantial Completion.
1.18 SCHEDULING
A. Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and

project conditions.
B. Schedule and provide assistance in final adjustment and test of

life safety system with Fire Authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by

original Installer for patching holes in insulation, ductwork and
housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes,
including access for test instruments, attaching jigs, and
24000 AVILA ROAD

similar purposes.
B. At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to

patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings.
2.2 TEST INSTRUMENTS
A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required, of

type, precision, and capacity as recommended in AABC standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing work.

Verify the following:
1. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal

condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and

operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for

electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install

temporary media in addition to final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.
13. Pumps are rotating correctly.
14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place or in normal

position.
15. Service and balancing valves are open.
3.2 TEST PROCEDURES
24000 AVILA ROAD

A. Examine installed Work and conditions under which testing is to
be done to ensure that Work has been completed, cleaned, and is
operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Tester.
B. Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as

indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable
standards of subparagraph "Codes and Standards" above.
C. Test, adjust and balance system during summer season for air
conditioning systems and during winter season for heating
systems, including period of operation at outside conditions
within 5 degrees F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design
condition, and within 10 degrees F dry bulb temperature of
minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does
not permit complete measurements, then take final readings when
seasonal operation does permit.
D. Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation

calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable
standards.
E. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been

cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by
original Installer.
F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions,

valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls
and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work.
Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent
G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant

system modifications, and resubmit test results.
H. Mark all damper and valve balancing device settings. The owner
reserves the right to require rebalancing of all balancing
devices not marked.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Furnish instruments required for testing, adjusting, and

balancing operations.
B. Make instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate

spot checks during testing.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent

of design.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent

and minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets
in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
24000 AVILA ROAD

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of
design.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing,

adjusting, and balancing.
B. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed

conditions.
C. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other

adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock
memory stops.
D. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not

been disrupted. If disrupted, verify correcting adjustments have
been made.
E. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of

services, preventing system balance.
F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards,

closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes,
and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
G. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded

in report. Recheck points or areas as selected and witnessed by
Owner.
H. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final

acceptance and submit report.
3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain required

or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site
altitude.
B. Make air quantity measurements in main ducts by Pitot tube

traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures

free from objectionable drafts.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to

extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or
sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers
located in ducts.
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds.

Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air
quantities by damper regulation.
24000 AVILA ROAD

G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities
recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units,

including filter and coil pressure drops, and total pressure
across fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air,

and exhaust dampers for design conditions.
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air,

and exhaust dampers to check leakage.
K. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at

extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum
airflow rate, full cooling, and at minimum airflow rate, full
heating.
L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and

exhaust air systems to obtain required relationship between each
to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure
near building entries.
M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume

controller to airflow setting indicated. Confirm connections
properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic
variable-air-volume temperature control.
N. Execute air systems balancing for each air system in accordance

with AABC specifications and as described herein.
O. Make tests with supply, return and exhaust systems operating and
doors, windows, closed or in their normal operating condition.
P. Test and adjust fan or blower speed to design requirements.
Q. Test and record motor full load amps. Record each installed
motor manufacturer.
R. Traverse main supply air ducts, using a pitot tube and manometer.
Calibrate the manometer to read two significant figures in
velocity pressure ranges. Take a minimum 16 readings per
traverse. The intent of this operation is to measure by traverse
the total air quantity supplied by the fan and to verify the
distribution of air to zones. A main duct is defined as any of
the following:
1. A duct serving 5 or more outlets.
2. A duct serving 3 or more branch ducts.
3. A duct serving a hydronic coil.
4. A duct emanating from a fan discharge or plenum and

terminating at one or more outlets.
24000 AVILA ROAD

S. Submit data in support of supply fans deliveries by the following
four methods. For return, relief and exhaust fans, methods 1 and
4 are sufficient:
1. By summation of the air quantity readings at inlets or

outlets.
2. By duct traverses of main supply ducts.
3. By rotating vane traverse across the filter or coil bank.
4. By plotting revolutions per minute and static pressure

readings on the fan curve. Air density corrections must be
indicated.
T. Test and record required and measured system static pressures;

filter differential, coil differential and fan total static
pressure.
U. Test and adjust systems for design recirculated airflow rates.
V. Test and adjust system for design outside airflow rates.
W. Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures.
X. Install one-inch roll media filters upstream of air filters to

impose 90 percent of the manufacturers recommended final filter
air pressure drop.
Y. Adjust main supply and return ducts to proper design flow rates.
Z. Inspect and confirm all fire dampers are open, all smoke dampers
and fire/smoke dampers are in their correct position, all duct
access doors are closed and fire damper fusible links are
accessible.
AA. Adjust zones to proper design, supply and return flow rates.
BB. Test and adjust each air inlet and air outlet and transfer duct
to within 10 percent of design requirements.
CC. Identify each air inlet, air outlet, transfer duct and transfer
wall opening as to location and area.
DD. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of diffusers,

grilles, registers and testing equipment. Use manufacturer's
rating on equipment to make required calculations.
EE. In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers, report

the required face and neck velocity, test face and neck velocity,
and required air pressure drop and flow rate. Test after
adjustments.
FF. Building Management System contractor shall set adjustments of

automatically operated inlet vanes, cones, plugs and all dampers
24000 AVILA ROAD

to operate as indicated in cooperation with balancing contractor.
GG. Adjust diffusers, grilles and registers to minimize drafts,

dumping, and to prevent "short circuiting" between supply and
return outlets.
HH. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to

extent that adjustments do not create objectional air motion or
sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices
such as dampers and splitters. Remove air slots on return air
troffers to achieve adequate relief and minimize pressure drop
into the ceiling plenum.
II. Vary total system air flow rates by adjustment of fan speeds or
fan volume-varying devices. Vary branch air quantities by damper
regulation.
JJ. Record installed fan drive assemblies; fan sheaves, motor

sheaves, belts and motors.
KK. For fans with two-speed motors, execute the entire Air Systems
procedure at both speeds.
LL. The final balanced condition of each area shall include testing
and adjusting of pressure conditions. Test and record building
pressurization levels in variable volume systems throughout full
range of fan delivery rates, under both heating and cooling
conditions. For multi-story buildings, test pressure conditions
at ground, intermediate and upper levels. Front doors, stair and
vestibule doors, exits and elevator shafts shall be checked for
airflow so that leakage does not cause excessive or abnormal
pressure conditions. Document abnormal building leakage
conditions noted.
MM. Complete balancing to achieve positive building pressure unless

otherwise instructed. A positive pressure relative to outside of
0.05 inch water gauge minimum and 0.10 inch water gauge maximum
shall be achieved, measure with negligible, outside wind
velocity.
NN. Provide a complete spreadsheet for all CAV boxes gain factor
calculation and analysis.
3.7 AIR BALANCING
A. General:
1. Balance so that outside airflow does not go below minimum

value at any time.
2. Verify proper automatic operation of automatic outside,

return, and exhaust air dampers throughout entire range of
operation.
3. Balance with filter pressure drop at midpoint between clean
24000 AVILA ROAD

and dirty filters. Artificially create required pressure
drop, if necessary, by blanking off coils.
4. Balance with doors and windows in their normal, closed

position.
5. Balance air in stairs and stair vestibules to maintain

pressure differentials required by code.
6. Balance main exhaust systems to maintain building indoor

pressure at approximately 0.05 inch WC positive relative to
outside ambient pressure. This may require different
return/exhaust air quantities than scheduled.
B. Balance air to following tolerances:
1. Each outlet and each inlet: Plus 10% to minus 10% of CFM
indicated on Drawings.
2. Each room with multiple supply outlets: 0% to plus 10% of

CFM indicated on Drawings.
3. Each Room: As inlet and outlet CFM's are balanced for

tolerance 1 above, balance the difference between SCFM and
ECFM as follows:
a. Equal air balance for a room where SCFM is equal to

ECFM: The difference between SCFM and ECFM is to be
no more than 5% of SCFM (or ECFM); except for
corridors (As listed in Criterion "d").
b. Positive air balance for a room where SCFM is larger

than ECFM: ECFM is to be 80 to 85% of SCFM.
c. Negative air balance for a room where ECFM is larger

than SCFM: ECFM is to be 110 to 115% of SCFM.
d. Corridor shall be balanced for equal air balance for

tolerance "2a" above, adding to SCFM the air coming
out of adjacent rooms of positive air balance, and
adding to ECFM the air going into adjacent rooms of
negative air balance.
e. NOTE: SCFM = room supply CFM which is the sum of air

in CFM supplied to the room as indicated on Drawings.
f. ECFM = room exhaust CFM which is the sum of air in

CFM exhausted and/or returned from the room as
4. Each Airflow Measuring Station: 0% to plus 10% of air

monitor CFM.
5. Each Fan: 0% to plus 10% of system CFM.
24000 AVILA ROAD

C. Adjust throw patterns of supply air outlets including slot
diffusers and air handling light troffers.
1. Adjust for draft free room air distribution.
2. Adjust as indicated. Where not indicated, adjust as

directed by Architect. Request such direction prior to
balancing.
3. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, adjust air outlets

to distribute air horizontally along ceiling and adjust
perimeter slot diffusers to blow away from building
perimeter.
D. System design static pressures are approximations. Make changes

in sheaves and belts as required for specified air balance.
Final adjustment of sheaves to result in sheave with additional
possible adjustment in both directions.
E. Inspect all rooms for room temperatures, drafts, and noise. Make
adjustments to correct any problems.
F. Operate each room thermostat to verify correct system response to

raising and lowering thermostat set points.
3.8 REQUIRED TESTING AND BALANCING SERVICES
A. Chapters referred to below are detailed in the "National

Standards Manual of Associated Air Balance Council" fifth
edition, 1989 including, but not limited to, those mentioned
herein.
B. Preconstruction Services Include:
1. Total System Test and Balance Schedule.
2. Preliminary Plan Review and Report - Chapter 26.
C. Performance Testing and Balancing of Air Conditioning Systems

Includes:
1. Supply Air Systems - General, Chapter 16.
2. Low Pressure Air Systems - Chapter 17.
3. Medium and High Pressure Air Systems - Chapter 18.
4. Return and Exhaust Air Systems - Chapter 19.
5. Hydronic Systems - Chapter 21.
6. Special Systems - where stated in specifications:
a. Sound - Chapter 11.
24000 AVILA ROAD

b. Vibration - Chapter 12.
c. Duct Leakage - Chapter 23.
7. Temperature Control System - Chapter 24.
8. Reports and Report Forms - Chapter 26.
3.9 WORK BY MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR
A. Preparation: Before any testing or balancing operations are

started, the Mechanical Subcontractor shall adjust belts and
sheaves, align parts, oil and grease bearings in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, clean exterior surfaces of coil
tubes and fins, flush interior of coil tubes until clean, and
check mixing damper operation to insure free operation and
activation by correct thermostat. Install filters and start up
equipment.
B. Certification: Mechanical Subcontractor shall certify in writing

that the system, as scheduled for balancing, is operational and
complete. Completeness shall include not only the physical
installation, but Mechanical Subcontractor's certification that
prime movers, fans, pumps, refrigeration machines, boilers, etc.,
are installed in good working order, and full load performance
has been preliminarily tested under certification of Mechanical
Subcontractors. Before any testing and balancing is started a
complete report shall be sent to Agency.
3.10 ON-GOING INSPECTION
A. Agency shall visit the job site a minimum of three times during
the early stages of fabrication to inspect duct installations,
and shall submit a report listing any deficiencies found and
making recommendations for Work to be performed or devices to be
added to allow for proper balancing.
3.11 TOTAL SYSTEM BALANCE
A. Each piece of equipment and the entire HVAC system shall be

adjusted to ensure proper function of all controls, proper
distribution of air, maintenance of temperatures, elimination of
drafts and vibration, and left in first class operating
condition.
B. Air System: System shall be adjusted to obtain the air volumes

as indicated, but shall be readjusted if required to obtain
design temperature in each room. The Mechanical Subcontractor
shall make drive changes, install additional dampers, vanes,
grille baffles, etc., as may be required on the job, at no extra
cost to Owner.
C. Noise: Wherever use of multi-louvers (in supply, exhaust, or

return air grilles) creates objectionable noise determined by the
engineer, 2" thick, 6 pcf density fiberglass board, foiled faced,
24000 AVILA ROAD

shall be installed in grille opening, slotted for the proper air
quantity, by Mechanical Subcontractor at no extra cost to the
Owner. (Not allowed in sensitive areas).
D. Method: Balance supply and return air systems (with AC units

operating) by first arriving at fan total air quantity, reading
air velocities at cooling coils at 55 degrees F, return air and
outside air openings; and a duct traverse. Fan RPM shall then be
adjusted for indicated or specified air quantities allowing for a
maximum of 2% for duct leakage. The quantity of air to each
outlet shall not be less than that indicated and not in excess of
10% of that amount. If so instructed by the Architect, further
balancing of temperatures shall be made and indicated by
thermometer or by temperature recorder.
E. Pilot Tube Traverse: Perform pivot tube traverse of all supply,

return, and exhaust systems. Except as otherwise specified
herein, pivot tube traverse shall be taken in branch ducts to
assure specified flow to all zones. Pivot tubes, associated
instruments, traversing and testing techniques shall conform to
the ASHRAE "Handbook of Fundamentals." Pivot tube traverse may
be omitted:
1. Where duct serves only a single room or space and the

design volume is less than 2000 CFM.
2. Where the duct design velocity and air quantity may be

determined by measurements of terminals served.
F. Test Holes: The test holes shall be provided in a straight duct

as far as possible downstream of elbows, bends, take-offs, and
other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of
flow measurements.
G. Wherever the use of multi-louvers (in supply, exhaust, or return

air grilles) creates objectionable noise, 2 inches thick, 6 pound
fiberglass board shall be installed in the grille opening,
slotted for the proper air quantity.
H. Balance the supply and return air systems (with the chillers
operating) by first arriving at the fan total air quantity,
reading air velocities at cooling coils at 55 degrees F, return
air and outside air openings; and a duct traverse. The fan RPM
shall then be adjusted for the specified air quantities allowing
for a maximum of 2 percent for duct leakage. The quantity of air
to each outlet shall not be less than that shown on the drawings
and not in excess of 10 percent of that amount. If so instructed
by the Architect, further balancing of temperatures shall be made
and indicated by thermometer or by temperature recorder.
I. Perform Pitot Tube Traverse of all supply, return and exhaust

systems.
1. Except as specifically indicated herein, Pitot tube

traverse shall be taken in branch ducts to assure specified
24000 AVILA ROAD

flow to all zones. Pitot tubes, associated instruments,
traversing, and testing techniques shall conform to the
ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
2. Pitot tube traverse may be omitted:
a. Where the duct serves only a single room or space and

its design volume is less than 2000 CFM.
b. Where duct's design velocity and air quantity may be

determined by measurements of terminals served.
3. Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible

downstream from elbows, bends, take-offs and other
turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of
flow measurements.
J. Furnished typewritten data for all supply fans tabulating:
1. Quantity of air in CFM at each air outlet or inlet.
2. Dry and wet bulb temperatures at each thermostat to the

nearest 1/10 of 1 degree.
3. Outdoor dry and wet bulb temperature, wind direction and

velocity, and barometric pressure at the time tests are
conducted.
4. RPM of fan or blower.
5. RPM of motor.
6. Ampere input of each motor (one reading on each phase leg).
7. No lead Amperage and Brake Horsepower calculations on all

motors 1/2 horsepower or larger.
8. Static pressure in inches water gauge at inlet of fan or

blower.
9. Duct Traverse data.
K. Furnish typewritten data for the Coils tabulating:
1. Entering and leaving water temperature.
2. Quantity of air in CFM.
3. Face velocity in FPM.
4. Dry and wet bulb air temperature entering and leaving coil.
5. Capacity of coil in BTUH.
24000 AVILA ROAD

6. Quantity of water circulated through coil in GPM.
L. Furnish typewritten data for the Pumps tabulating:
1. Quantity of water circulating in GPM.
2. Suction and discharge pressures in PSIG.
3. Ampere input of motor (one reading for each phase leg).
4. At no flow (valved off), measure suction pressure,

discharge pressure and motor amps (on each phase leg).
5. Calculated BHP.
M. Furnish typewritten data for the Cooling Tower tabulating:
1. Quantity of water circulated through Tower.
2. Temperature of entering and leaving water.
3. Capacity of Tower in BTUH.
N. Sound Test Procedures:
1. Sound level measurements shall be taken at times when the

building is occupied, or when activity in surrounding areas
and background noise levels in areas tested are at a
minimum and relatively free from sudden changes in noise
levels.
2. Measurements shall be taken with all equipment secured,

except that being tested.
3. The required sound levels shall be measured at any point

within a room not less than 6 feet from any air terminal or
room unit, and not closer than 3 feet from any floor, wall,
or ceiling surface.
4. Sound levels shall be measured with a General Radio Model

1982-9720 Sound Analysis System 30-140 dB Octave Band
Analyzer. The "A" scale shall be used to measure over-all
sound levels. The specified octave band levels shall be
determined with the above sound level meter set on "A".
O. Duct Pressure Testing:
1. Test apparatus shall be a high pressure portable blower

with an orifice flow measuring device. Each orifice
assembly is accurately calibrated with its own calibration
curve.
2. Contractor to close off and seal all openings in the duct

section to be tested.
24000 AVILA ROAD

3. Each section shall be tested at 2" W.G. Total allowable
leakage should not exceed 1 percent of the total CFM design
for that section being tested.
4. After all tests are complete, the test information will be

presented to the Architect for his approval.
P. The Contractor shall require tht the Air Balance Agency prepare a
complete set of full scale drawings showing actual duct runs and
outlet/inlet locations. Drawings shall be keyed to and furnished
with the Air Balance Report. The mechanical plans are not
acceptable for this purpose.
Q. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and

exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each
to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static pressure.
R. Check multi-zone units for motorized damper leakage. Adjust air

quantities with mixing dampers set first for cooling, then
heating, then modulating.
S. For variable air volume system powered units, set volume

controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections
properly made and confirm proper operation for automatic variable
air volume temperature control.
T. On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust air flow switches for proper
operation.
U. Ductwork Tests: All medium pressure ductwork and plenums shall

be tested in accordance with AABC National Standards for field
measurement and instrumentation volume one No. 81266 Bulletin
Section, 21 June 1968. The procedure shall include testing
ductwork for 1 minute at 12 inches S.P., then reducing pressure
to 7 inches S.P. and surveying all ductwork for audible leaks.
After leaks have been sealed, operate ductwork at 7 inches S.P.
and re-check in the presence of the Architect. In no case will
total air leakage in excess of 4 percent be allowed.
V. Ductwork and sheet metal fabrication drawings: Contractor shall

submit to the Architect for approval, 1/2 inch to 1 foot scaled
plan drawings of all parts of the building showing all duct
systems. Plans shall show all duct details, offset, transitions,
after coordination all other sections and existing conditions.
Drawings shall also include mechanical rooms with ductwork and
plenums complete. PARTIAL OR INCOMPLETE DRAWINGS WILL NOT BE
ACCEPTABLE.
3.12 SOUND TEST PROCEDURES
A. Test Conditions: Any deem necessary, sound level measurements

shall be taken at times when the building is unoccupied, or when
activity in surrounding areas and background noise levels in
areas tested are at a minimum and are relatively free from sudden
changes in noise levels. Measurements shall be taken with all
24000 AVILA ROAD

equipment secured, except that being tested. Test conditions
shall be as directed by the Engineer.
B. Measurements: Required sound levels shall be measured at any

point within a room not less than 6-feet from an air terminal or
room unit and no closer than 3-feet from any floor, wall, or
ceiling surface.
C. Test Instrument: Measure surface levels with General Radio Model

19829720 Sound Analysis System 30-140DB Octave Banck Analyzer;
"A" scale shall be used to measure overall sound levels.
Specified octave banks levels shall be determined with above
sound level meter set on "A."
3.13 DUCT PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING
A. General
1. High, medium, and low pressure ductwork systems tested

during construction prior to insulation. Test ducts
lengths a maximum of 100 feet at time for risers and 150
feet for horizontal ducts. All ductwork tested and
approved prior to installation of insulation.
2. Riser branches shall be isolated with seals, plugs, or

caps. Riser installed in shafts shall be tested in
sections to allow erection of shaft wall and duct
insulation as approved by Architect.
3. Tests shall be performed in presence of the Architect who

must verify recorded test data for test pressure and air
leakage for tested duct length.
4. Test equipment: Rotary blower, calibrated orifice section,

and gauge board.
5. Pressure test procedure:
a. Check and alert the Mechanical Contractor Division 15

of any required seals of all openings in duct and
plenum section to be tested.
b. Connect the test apparatus to test section using a

flexible duct connection or hose.
c. Close damper on blower suction side, to prevent

excessive build-up of pressure.
d. Start blower and gradually open damper on suction

side of blower.
e. Build-up pressure on test section to required limit.
f. Determine amount of air leakage by make-up air flow

measurements and make repairs as required.
24000 AVILA ROAD

g. Total allowable leakage shall not exceed 1% per
minute based upon the total operating CFM of the
system being tested. Total leakage is determined by
summation of leakage for each section of system
tested.
h. All negative pressure ducts, including return and

exhaust system, shall be tested by same procedure as
positive pressure supply ducts.
i. Report final results of duct testing.
6. All ductwork pressure and leak testing shall also comply

with section 15890.
B. Main Supply Ductwork Systems: Extending from the discharge of

supply fans to the inlet of air terminal units.
1. Test pressures: 5" WG.
2. The allowable leak measured in CFM varies depending upon

the length of duct tested and as follows:
a. Main duct maximum 1/2% of 1% of the designed CFM on

the total length and proportioned to the duct being
tested.
b. Branch duct or risers maximum 1/2% of 1% of the

designed CFM on the total length and proportioned to
the duct being tested.
C. Branch Ductwork Systems: Extending from the air terminal to

diffuser, if required, also return and exhaust air ducts.
1. Test pressures: 2" WG.
2. The allowable leak measured in CFM varies depending upon

the length of duct tested and as follows:
a. Main duct maximum 1/2% of the designed CFM on the

total length and proportioned to the duct being
tested.
b. Branch duct or risers maximum 1/2% of the designed

CFM on the total length and proportioned to the duct
being tested.
3. The allowable leakage shall not exceed 1% per minute based

upon the total peak operating CFM of system being tested.
Total leakage is determined by summation of leakage for
each section of the system tested.
24000 AVILA ROAD

D. Leak tests shall be performed and recorded separately for each
system for:
1. Main duct.
2. Branch duct or risers.
3. Complete system.
E. Test Failures: Notify General Contractor to repair duct system

if test pressure and leakage is not attained. Repairs and
sealings to be done with sheet metal and sealant by Mechanical
Contractor Division 15.
3.14 FINAL DRAWINGS
A. The Agency shall prepare a complete set of full scale drawings

showing actual duct runs and outlet/inlet locations. Drawings
shall be keyed to and submitted with Air Balance Report; the
Contract Mechanical Drawings are not acceptable for this purpose.
3.15 TOTAL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
A. Immediately on completion of the system testing and balancing,

the Agency shall conduct a 7-day continuous total system
performance and capacity test; the Contractor shall supply all
energy and consumables and/or materials required for the test.
B. General: Outdoor DB and WB air temperatures, and actual

operating data for this test shall be taken simultaneously and
hourly on all energy consuming equipment of cooling and heating
plants and on any air and/or water distribution equipment which
deviates more than 10% from design specifications.
C. Date Conversion and Reports: The data collected during this test
shall be converted to KWH per ton for cooling equipment and KWH
per MBH for the heating equipment and shall cover a minimum of
four points on the equipment operating curve. These points shall
be at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of full load test. Reports shall be
prepared and submitted for all data and conversion.
3.16 GENERAL PROCEDURE
A. Adjust air moving systems to 0 to plus 5 percent for supply

systems and plus or minus 5 percent for return and exhaust
systems from figures indicated as long as pressure relationships
are being maintained with adjacent spaces per OSHPD requirements.
B. Adjust hydronic systems to 0 to 10 percent plus of design

conditions indicated.
C. Permanently mark settings on valves, splitters, dampers and other

adjustment devices.
24000 AVILA ROAD

D. Take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or
that such disruption has been rectified.
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded

the Engineer.
F. At the completion of balancing procedures, allow for a minimum of

two days for the Engineer to witness test procedures and conduct
operational tests.
3.17 SITE VISITS
A. A review of the installation shall be made prior to commencing

balancing work and any additional dampers or valves required for
proper balance shall be reviewed with the Engineer and the
Contractor.
B. The Test and Balance Contractor shall visit the job site a
minimum of two times during the ductwork, equipment and piping
installations. Site Visit Reports shall be submitted to the
Engineer listing any deficiencies found. Identify in the report
any additional balancing valves or dampers required.
3.18 ACCEPTANCE
A. Mechanical systems shall not be considered ready for final

inspection until balancing results acceptable to the Engineer are
obtained.
B. If it is found that the specified airflows cannot be achieved on

portions of the system, the actual conditions shall be reported
to the Engineer for consideration of corrective action before
continuing the balancing procedure.
C. If measured flow at final inspection shows deviation of +5

percent or more, the report shall be rejected.
D. If report is rejected, systems shall be rebalanced and a new

certified report submitted.
3.19 BALANCING REPORT
A. Submit a draft copy of reports prior to final acceptance of

project. Provide copies of final report for inclusion in
Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
B. Provide reports in durable soft cover, 3-ring binder manuals,

complete with table of contents, indexing tabs and cover
identification at front and side.
C. Include types, serial number and dates of calibration of

instruments.
24000 AVILA ROAD

D. Record test data on a sepia made from the latest available
revised set of mechanical shop drawings and submit copies upon
completion of the balancing contract.
E. Install at each piece of mechanical equipment a "Data Register"

showing significant operating temperatures, pressures, amperes,
voltage, brake horsepower. "Data Register" shall be enclosed in
a hard, clear plastic holder securely attached to the equipment
or to a wall in the adjacent area.
F. Submit with report, fan and pump curves with operating conditions
plotted. Submit grille and diffuser shop drawings and diffusion
factors.
G. Report shall be indexed as follows:

Exhaust Capacities)
Air
Water
Summary
Summary
Procedure
Procedure
Instrumentation
Instrumentation
Drawings
Pump Data
Equipment Summary
Pump Curves
Fan Sheets
Flow Stations
Fan Curves
Coils
Fan Profile Data
Equipment Data
Static Data
Element Data Summary and Schematics
Air Monitoring Station Data (per system)
Traverse Data and Schedule Sound
Terminal Unit Summary Summary
Outlet Data Summary and Schematics Procedure

(per system)
Instrumentation
Building Pressurization Data
Drawings
Smoke Exhaust Mode Data
Profile
Stairway and Stair Vestibule
Pressurization Data Scale Readings
Smoke Control System Testing (Smoke Vibration

Control Zone Supply, Relief and
24000 AVILA ROAD

Fire/Smoke Damper Certification
Copy of Contractor's Certification
24000 AVILA ROAD

3.20 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust water systems, after air balancing, to obtain design

quantities.
B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings

and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance.
Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balance
on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements
in system.
C. Adjust systems to obtain specified pressure drops and flows

through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform
balancing by measurement of temperature differential in
conjunction with air balancing.
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open or

in normal position to heat transfer elements.
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of

balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or
shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point.
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow

requirements or individual system parts, simulate full flow in
one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts.
3.21 SCHEDULES
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing:
1. Fire Pumps.
2. Plumbing Pumps.
3. HVAC Pumps.
4. Water Tube Boilers.
5. Packaged Roof Top Cooling Units.
6. Fan Coil Units.
7. Fans.
8. Air Filters.

24000 AVILA ROAD

9. Air Terminal Units.
10. Air Inlets and Outlets.
B. Report Forms
1. Title Page:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
c. Telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Architect
g. Project Engineer
h. Project Contractor
i. Project altitude
j. Report date
2. Summary Comments:
a. Design versus final performance
b. Notable characteristics of system
c. Description of systems operation sequence
d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate

building pressurization
e. Nomenclature used throughout report
f. Test conditions
3. Instrument List:
a. Instrument

24000 AVILA ROAD

b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
4. Electric Motors:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model/Frame
c. HP/BHP and kW
d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
e. RPM
f. Service factor
g. Starter size, rating, heater elements
h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
5. V-Belt Drive:
b. Required driven RPM
c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d. Belt, size and quantity
e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM
f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and

actual
6. Pump Data:

24000 AVILA ROAD

b. Manufacturer
c. Size/model
d. Impeller
e. Service
f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW
h. Discharge pressure
i. Suction pressure
j. Total operating head pressure
k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures
l. Shut off, total head pressure
7. Combustion Test:
a. Manufacturer
b. Model number
c. Serial number
d. Firing rate
e. Overfire draft
f. Gas meter timing dial size
g. Gas meter time per revolution
h. Gas pressure at meter outlet
i. Gas flow rate
j. Heat input
k. Burner manifold gas pressure
l. Percent carbon monoxide (CO)

24000 AVILA ROAD

m. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2)
n. Percent oxygen (O2)
o. Percent excess air
p. Flue gas temperature at outlet
q. Ambient temperature
r. Net stack temperature
s. Percent stack loss
t. Percent combustion efficiency
u. Heat output
8. Air Cooled Condenser:
b. Location
c. Manufacturer
d. Model number
e. Serial number
f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
h. Number of compressors
9. Cooling Coil Data:
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer

24000 AVILA ROAD

f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual
g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual
h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual
j. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual
k. Air pressure drop, design and actual
10. Heating Coil Data:
b. Location
c. Service
d. Manufacturer
f. Water flow, design and actual
g. Water pressure drop, design and actual
h. Entering water temperature, design and actual
i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
j. Entering air temperature, design and actual
k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
l. Air pressure drop, design and actual
11. Fan Coil Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Identification/number
c. Location
d. Model number

24000 AVILA ROAD

e. Size
f. Air flow, design and actual
g. Water flow, design and actual
h. Water pressure drop, design and actual
i. Entering water temperature, design and actual
j. Leaving water temperature, design and actual
k. Entering air temperature, design and actual
l. Leaving air temperature, design and actual
12. Air Moving Equipment:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge
f. Air flow, specified and actual
g. Return air flow, specified and actual
h. Outside air flow, specified and actual
i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and

actual
j. Inlet pressure
k. Discharge pressure
l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
m. Number of Belts/Make/Size
n. Fan RPM

24000 AVILA ROAD

13. Return Air/Outside Air Data:
b. Design air flow
c. Actual air flow
d. Design return air flow
e. Actual return air flow
f. Design outside air flow
g. Actual outside air flow
h. Return air temperature
i. Outside air temperature
j. Required mixed air temperature
k. Actual mixed air temperature
l. Design outside/return air ratio
m. Actual outside/return air ratio
14. Exhaust Fan Data:
a. Location
b. Manufacturer
c. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Air flow, specified and actual
f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and

actual
g. Inlet pressure
h. Discharge pressure

24000 AVILA ROAD

i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
j. Number of Belts/Make/Size
k. Fan RPM
15. Duct Traverse:
a. System zone/branch
b. Duct size
c. Area
d. Design velocity
e. Design air flow
f. Test velocity
g. Test air flow
h. Duct static pressure
i. Air temperature
j. Air correction factor
16. Duct Leak Test:
a. Description of ductwork under test
b. Duct design operating pressure
c. Duct design test static pressure
d. Duct capacity, air flow
e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak

factor
f. Test apparatus
1) Blower
2) Orifice, tube size

24000 AVILA ROAD

3) Orifice size
4) Calibrated
g. Test static pressure
h. Test orifice differential pressure
i. Leakage
17. Air Monitoring Station Data:
b. System
c. Size
d. Area
e. Design velocity
f. Design air flow
g. Test velocity
h. Test air flow
b. Location
c. Size
d. Manufacturer
e. Model number
f. Serial number
g. Design Flow rate
h. Design pressure drop
i. Actual/final pressure drop

24000 AVILA ROAD

j. Actual/final flow rate
k. Station calibrated setting
19. Terminal Unit Data:
a. Manufacturer
b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct
c. Identification/number
d. Location
e. Model number
f. Size
g. Minimum static pressure
h. Minimum design air flow
i. Maximum design air flow
j. Maximum actual air flow
k. Inlet static pressure
20. Air Distribution Test Sheet:
a. Air terminal number
b. Room number/location
c. Terminal type
d. Terminal size
e. Area factor
f. Design velocity
g. Design air flow
h. Test (final) velocity
i. Test (final) air flow

24000 AVILA ROAD

j. Percent of design air flow
21. Sound Level Report:
a. Location
b. Octave bands - equipment off
c. Octave bands - equipment on
d. RC level - equipment on
22. Vibration Test:
a. Location of points:
1) Fan bearing, drive end
2) Fan bearing, opposite end
3) Motor bearing, center (when applicable)
4) Motor bearing, drive end
5) Motor bearing, opposite end
6) Casing (bottom or top)
7) Casing (side)
8) Duct after flexible connection (discharge)
9) Duct after flexible connection (suction)
b. Test readings:
1) Horizontal, velocity and displacement
2) Vertical, velocity and displacement
3) Axial, velocity and displacement

acceleration
d. Unusual conditions at time of test

24000 AVILA ROAD

e. Vibration source (when non-complying)
3.22 VENTILATION AIRFLOW CONFIRMATION
A. Before an occupancy permit is granted, the Contractor shall

document that the ventilation systems perform in accordance with
Title 8, Section 5142(b) of the California Safety Code (1987) to
provide the ventilation rates specified on the Drawings.
3.23 ADJUSTING
A. Recorded data shall represent actually measured or observed

condition.
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other

adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and
lock memory steps.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not

been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards,

closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes
and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded

the Architect.
F. Contractor shall balance, test and re-adjust and calibrate all

mechanical and plumbing system to operate at design standards and
condition at no additional cost to the owner.
3.24 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
A. Adjust distribution systems to provide required or design supply,

return and exhaust air quantities.
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of

entire cross sectional area of duct.
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures

free from objectionable drafts and noise.
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to

extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or

24000 AVILA ROAD

sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices
such as dampers and splitters.
F. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities

recorded at each outlet or inlet.
H. Contractor shall require to measure air system performance with

the pressure drop across filters at the value specified for dirty
filters with the use of variable frequency drive.
3.25 WATER BALANCING
A. Adjust water quantities to tolerance range of zero to plus 10% of

specified flow rates.
B. Verify proper response of pump VFD’s to differential pressure

control signal.
3.26 PRE-OCCUPANCY AND POST-OCCUPANCY VENTILATION PERIODS
A. Operate chilled water plant, heating water plant, and fan systems
to provide increased outside air ventilation rates to all
occupied spaces during the following periods:
1. For the 30-day period immediately preceding the date of

occupancy.
2. For the 3-month period beginning on the date of occupancy.
B. Operate all systems continuously on a 24-hour, 7-day basis during

the pre-occupancy and post-occupancy periods.
C. Operate all air handling systems providing ventilation air to

occupied spaces at an outside air ventilation rate as high as
possible, up to a maximum of 100%. Do not operate at ventilation
rates that would exceed the cooling and heating capacities of the
central plant equipment and AHU coils. Adjust the ventilation
rate percentage on a time-of-day basis if required to achieve the
maximum ventilation rate. For systems that are 100% outside air,
operate continuously at 100% outside air. Maintain temperatures
in the occupied spaces at normal design levels.

24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 23 07 00
HVAC INSULATION
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories.
2. HVAC equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.
3. HVAC ductwork insulation, jackets, and accessories.


requirements for painting insulation jackets and covering
specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-

Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
2. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and

Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
3. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and

Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric).
4. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber

Thermal Insulating Cement.
5. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber

Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
6. ASTM C450 - Standard Practice for Prefabrication and Field

Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS
Piping, Vessel Lagging, and Dished Head Segments.
7. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate

Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
8. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible

Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and

24000 AVILA ROAD

Tubular Form.
9. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe

Insulation.
10. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber

Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial
Applications.
11. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular

Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
12. ASTM C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters
of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and
Tubing (NPS System).
13. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed

Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation.
14. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block

and Board Thermal Insulation.
15. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation

for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
16. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the

Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
17. ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and

Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material).
18. ASTM C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low

Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation.
19. ASTM C1290 - Standard Specification for Flexible Fibrous

Glass Blanket Insulation Used to Externally Insulate HVAC
Ducts.
20. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
21. ASTM D4637 - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in

Single-Ply Roof Membrane.
22. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials.
23. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor

Transmission of Materials.
24. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability

of Materials Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

24000 AVILA ROAD

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors’:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and

Flexible.
C. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning

D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

Building Materials.
2. UL 1978 - Standard for Safety for Grease Ducts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics

and list of materials and thickness for each service, and
location.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of representative size illustrating

each insulation type.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers

published literature indicating proper installation procedures.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed

A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and

maximum smoke developed index of not exceeding 50 in accordance
with ASTM E84, UL 723, and NFPA 255.
B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for

inner and outer diameters.
C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with

ASTM C450.
D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this

24000 AVILA ROAD

manufacturer.

section.


with manufacturer's identification, including product density and
thickness.
C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt,

water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping.

B. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity

conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer.
C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for

minimum period of 24 hours.
1.10 WARRANTY

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.
C. Section 01 78 36 – Warranties.
PRODUCTS
1.11 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation

Products:
1. CertainTeed.
2. Knauf.

24000 AVILA ROAD

3. Johns Manville.
4. Owens-Corning.
B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products:
1. Aeroflex. Aerocell.
2. Armacell, LLC. Armaflex.
3. Nomaco. K-flex.
1.12 PIPE INSULATION
A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation.
1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F.
2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C1136, Type I, factory applied

reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing adhesive joints.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
B. TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric

insulation, tubular.
2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees

F.
C. TYPE P-6: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric

insulation, tubular.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F.

F.
D. TYPE P-11: ASTM C533; Type I, hydrous calcium silicate pipe

insulation, rigid molded white; asbestos free.

24000 AVILA ROAD

1.13 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS
A. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded
to aluminized film.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.
B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1784, One piece molded type

fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
2. Thickness: 30 mil.
3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
C. Aluminum Pipe Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.
2. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet.
3. Finish: Smooth.
4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with

factory attached protective liner.
6. Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick

aluminum.
D. Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System:
1. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on

mineral wool.
2. Glass Fiber Fabric:
a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.
b. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
c. Weave: 5 x 5.
3. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish:
b. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with

insulation, white color.

24000 AVILA ROAD

1.14 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel

insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based
on pipe size and insulation thickness.
D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard

maple. Inserts length: not less than 6 inches long, matching
thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.
E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane

insert with aluminum single piece construction with self-adhesive
closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.
F. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum
12 inch centers.
G. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing

Cement: ASTM C449/C449M.
H. Insulating Cement: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
I. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
1.15 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. TYPE E-2: ASTM C612; glass fiber, rigid board, noncombustible

with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket.
3. Density: 4.2 pound per cubic foot.
4. Jacket Temperature Limit: minus 20 to 150 degrees F.
B. TYPE E-7: ASTM C533; Type II, hydrous calcium silicate block
insulation, asbestos free.
C. TYPE E-8: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric
insulation, sheet.

24000 AVILA ROAD

F.
1.16 EQUIPMENT INSULATION JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic Equipment Jacket:
1. Product Description: ASTM D1784, sheet material, off-white

color.
2. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F.
3. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
4. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm-inches.
5. Thickness: 10 mil.
6. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
B. Aluminum Equipment Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.
3. Finish: Smooth.


aluminum.
C. Canvas Equipment Jacket: UL listed, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave

cotton fabric with fire retardant lagging adhesive compatible
with insulation.
D. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded
to aluminized film.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm-inches.
E. Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System:
1. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on

mineral wool.
2. Glass Fiber Fabric:

24000 AVILA ROAD

b. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.
c. Weave: 5 x 5.
3. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish:
b. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with

insulation, white color.
1.17 EQUIPMENT INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.
C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum
12 inch centers.
D. Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing

Cement: ASTM C449/C449M.
E. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
1.18 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. TYPE D-1: ASTM C1290, Type III, flexible glass fiber, commercial
grade with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil jacket
meeting ASTM C1136, Type II.
2. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.
B. TYPE D-2: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, with
factory applied reinforced aluminum foil facing meeting ASTM
C1136, Type II.
C. TYPE D-3: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, no facing.
D. TYPE D-4: ASTM C1071, Type I, flexible, glass fiber duct liner
with coated air side.

24000 AVILA ROAD

4. Maximum Air Velocity: 6,000 feet per minute.
E. TYPE D-5: ASTM C1071, Type II, rigid, glass fiber duct liner with
coated air side.
4. Maximum Air Velocity: 4,000 feet per minute.
F. TYPE D-6: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric
insulation, sheet.
2. Service Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 180 degrees

F.
G. TYPE D-7: ASTM C534, Type II, flexible, closed cell elastomeric
insulation, sheet laminated with white thermoplastic rubber
membrane.
2. Service Temperature Range: Range: Minus 58 to 180 degrees

F.
H. TYPE D-8: Inorganic blanket encapsulated with scrim reinforced

foil meeting UL 1978.
2. Weight: 1.4 pound per square foot.
3. Flame spread rating of 0 and smoke developed rating of 0 in

accordance with ASTM E84.
1.19 DUCTWORK INSULATION JACKETS
A. Aluminum Duct Jacket:
1. ASTM B209.

24000 AVILA ROAD

3. Finish: Embossed.


aluminum.
B. Vapor Retarder Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized

film.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
C. Canvas Duct Jacket: UL listed, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton

fabric with fire retardant lagging adhesive compatible with
insulation.
D. Outdoor Duct Jacket: Asphalt impregnated and coated sheet, 50

lb/square.
E. Membrane Duct Jacket: ASTM D4637; Type I, EPDM; non-reinforced,

0.060 inch thick, 48 inch wide roll; white color.
1.20 DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder Tape:
1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to

aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based
adhesive.
B. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
C. Adhesive: Waterproof, ASTM E162 fire-retardant type.
D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad head.
E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum
12 inch centers.
F. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84, NFPA 255, UL 723.
G. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad.
H. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.
I. Membrane Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

24000 AVILA ROAD

EXECUTION
1.21 EXAMINATION
A. Verify piping, equipment and ductwork has been tested before

applying insulation materials.
B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
1.22 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and

cover seams in least visible locations.
B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies

or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of one
hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing
insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and
interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of
assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour.
C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions,

flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and
expansion joints.
2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder

jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure
sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt
strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch
expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor
retarder mastic.
3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded

insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC
fitting covers.
D. Glass Fiber Board Insulation:
1. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring,

and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment
with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding

compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use
vapor retarder cement.
3. Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to

remove surface irregularities.
E. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation:

24000 AVILA ROAD

1. Wrap elbows and fitting with vapor retarder tape.
2. Seal butt joints with vapor retarder tape.
F. Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F:
1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets.

Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure
sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied
jacket and butt strips or both.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of

like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with
glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
3. Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.
G. Inserts and Shields:
1. Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install

galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and insulation.
2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between

support shield and piping and under finish jacket.
a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of

thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation;
may be factory fabricated.
b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating

material suitable for planned temperature range and
service.
3. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install

galvanized steel shield between roller and inserts.
H. Insulation Terminating Points:
1. Coil Branch Piping 1 inch and Smaller: Terminate hot water

piping at union upstream of the coil control valve.
2. Chilled Water Coil Branch Piping: Insulate chilled water

piping and associated components up to coil connection.
3. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and

components to prevent condensation.
I. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:
1. Push insulation on to piping.
2. Miter joints at elbows.
3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended

24000 AVILA ROAD

adhesive.
4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with

joints staggered.
5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like

material and thickness as adjacent pipe.
J. High Temperature Pipe Insulation:
1. Install in multiple layers to meet thickness scheduled.
2. Attach each layer with bands. Secure first layer with bands
before installing next layer.
3. Stagger joints between layers.
4. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom

side of horizontal piping.
K. Piping Exterior to Building: Provide vapor retarder jacket.

Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like
material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass
mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket
with seams located at 3 or 9 o’clock position on side of
horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on
bottom side of horizontal piping.
1.23 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.
B. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least

visible locations.
C. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound

to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder
cement.
D. Equipment Containing Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:
1. Insulate entire equipment surfaces.
2. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring,

and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment
with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.
3. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder

jackets. Secure factory-applied jackets with pressure
sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt
strips. Secure field-applied jackets with outward clinch
expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor
retarder mastic.

24000 AVILA ROAD

4. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and
interruptions.
E. Equipment Containing Fluids Over 140 degrees F:
1. Insulate flanges and unions with removable sections and

jackets.
2. Install insulation with factory-applied or field applied

jackets, with or without vapor barrier. Finish with glass
cloth and adhesive.
3. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and

interruptions.
F. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces:

Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
G. Equipment Located Exterior to Building: Install vapor barrier

jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement.
Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of
horizontal equipment.
H. Cover glass fiber, cellular glass or hydrous calcium silicate

insulation with aluminum jacket.
I. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do

not cover with insulation.
J. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning:

Install insulation for easy removal and replacement without
damage.
K. Prepare equipment insulation for finish painting. Refer to

Section 09 90 00.
1.24 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
A. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are finished inside

dimensions.
B. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and

other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges,

fire dampers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:

24000 AVILA ROAD

1. Provide with or without standard vapor retarder jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is

required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
D. Ductwork Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces

below 10 feet above finished floor: Finish with aluminum jacket.
E. External Glass Fiber Duct Insulation:
1. Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal

jacket joints with vapor retarder adhesive or tape to match
jacket.
2. Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples,

tape, or wires.
3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive

or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging.
Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
4. Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners

with vapor retarder adhesive.
5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper

operators to allow operation without disturbing wrapping.
F. External Elastomeric Duct Insulation:
1. Adhere to clean oil-free surfaces with full coverage of

adhesive.
2. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended

adhesive.
3. When application requires multiple layers, apply with

joints staggered.
4. Insulate standing metal duct seams with insulation of like

material and thickness as adjacent duct surface. Apply
adhesive at joints with flat duct surfaces.
5. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.
G. Duct Liner:
1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply

with SMACNA Standards for spacing.
3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.
4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.

24000 AVILA ROAD

5. Cut insulation for tight overlapped corner joints. Support
top pieces of liner at edges with side pieces.
H. Ducts Exterior to Building:
1. Install insulation according to external duct insulation

paragraph above.
2. Provide external insulation with vapor retarder jacket.

Cover with outdoor jacket finished as specified with
caulked aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side
of horizontal duct section.
3. Finish with aluminum duct jacket.
4. Calk seams at flanges and joints. Located major

longitudinal seams on bottom side of horizontal duct
sections.
I. Prepare duct insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section

09 90 00.
1.25 SCHEDULES
A. Cooling Services Piping Insulation Schedule:

INSULATION INSULATION
PIPING SYSTEM TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
inches
Condensate Piping from P-5 All sizes 0.5
Cooling Coils
Refrigerant Suction P-5 All sizes 0.5
Refrigerant Hot Gas P-5 All sizes 0.5

B. Heating Services Piping Insulation Schedule:

INSULATION
PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
TYPE inches
Heating Water Supply P-1 3 inches and smaller 1.0
and Return 141 to 200 4 inches and larger 1.5
degrees F

C. Equipment Insulation Schedule:

INSULATION
EQUIPMENT INSULATION THICKNESS
TYPE inches
Generator Exhaust Piping E-7 4.0
Generator Exhaust Muffler E-7 4.0

24000 AVILA ROAD

D. Ductwork Insulation Schedule:

INSULATION INSULATION
DUCTWORK SYSTEM TYPE THICKNESS
inches
Combustion Air D-2 1.5
Outside Air Intake D-2 1.5
Equipment Casings D-2 1.0
Supply Ducts (internally insulated) D-4, D-5 1.0
Return Ducts (internally insulated) D-4, D-5 1.0
Supply Ducts (externally insulated) D-2 1.5
Return Ducts (externally insulated) D-2 1.5
Duct Coils D-1 1.0
Supply Air (exterior to building on roof) D-7 2.0
Return Air (exterior to building on roof) D-7 2.0
Rectangular Supply Ducts Downstream of Variable D-2 1.5
Air Volume Boxes (externally insulated)
Round Supply Ducts Downstream of Variable Air D-2 1.5
Volume Boxes (externally insulated)
Transfer Air Ducts (internally insulated) D-5 1.0


24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 09 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Control panel enclosures.
2. Thermostats.
3. Alarm system.
4. Control air dampers.
5. Electric damper actuators.
6. Control valves.
7. Electric valve actuators.
8. Outside air measuring and modulation device.
9. Direct digital control system components.
10. Duct-mounted smoke detector.
B. Positive displacement meters.
C. Flow meters.
D. Pressure gages and pressure gage taps.
E. Thermometers and thermometer wells.
F. Static pressure and filter gages.
G. Circuit balancing valves.
H. Products Furnished but not Installed under this Section: Section

23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties; Installation of
thermometer wells and pressure gage tappings.
I. Complete integration with Facilities Control System – 23 09 93.
J. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment: Product requirements for electric motors.
24000 AVILA ROAD
Controls: Sequences of operation implemented using products
specified in this section.
3. Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product

requirements for thermometer sockets and gage taps for
placement by this section. Installation requirements for
piping products furnished in this section.
4. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Product

requirements for duct mounted thermometers. Installation
requirements for dampers and other duct mounted products
furnished in this section.
5. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Execution

requirements for electric connections specified by this
section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.

Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
1. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings.
2. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Pressure Fittings.
D. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings

for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron

Castings.
3. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.
4. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water

Tube.
5. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper

Water Tube (Metric).
6. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube
24000 AVILA ROAD
for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
7. ASTM D2737 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE)

Plastic Tubing.
E. American Welding Society:
1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and

Braze Welding.
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall Mounted

Room Thermostats.
2. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts

Maximum).
G. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate operating data, system drawings, wiring

diagrams, and written detailed operational description of
sequences. Coordinate submittals with information requested in
Section 23 09 93.
C. Product Data: Submit description and engineering data for each

control system component. Include sizing as required.
D. Samples: Submit two of each type of room thermostat and cover.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation

requirements for each control component.


procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control

components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit inspection period,

cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials, and calibration
24000 AVILA ROAD
tolerances.
A. Provide pneumatic tubing located in plenums with peak optical

density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater
than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when
tested in accordance with UL 1820.
B. Control Air Damper Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

specified in this section with minimum three years experience,
and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

manufacturer.

section.

B. Accept controls on site in original factory packaging Inspect for

damage.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of control components in piping systems

with work of Section 23 21 16.
B. Coordinate installation of control components in duct systems

with work of Section 23 33 00.
1.10 WARRANTY

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for each control system

component.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
24000 AVILA ROAD
Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of control system for one year

from Date of Occupancy.
C. Furnish complete service of controls systems, including

callbacks. Perform minimum of 10 complete normal inspections of
approximately 8 hours duration in addition to normal service
calls to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls. Submit written
report after each inspection.
D. Furnish four complete inspections per year to inspect, calibrate,

and adjust controls. Submit written report after each inspection.
E. Examine unit components semi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and

lubricate equipment.
F. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of

unit, and controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace
parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance
data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment.
G. Perform work without removing units from service during building

normal occupied hours.
H. Provide emergency call back service at all hours for this

maintenance period.
I. Maintain an adequate stock of parts, locally, for replacement or

emergency purposes. Ensure personnel availability to ensure
fulfillment of this maintenance service without unreasonable loss
of time.
J. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel

under supervision of manufacturer or original installer.
K. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or

subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner.

B. Furnish 2 of each type of thermostat and exposed sensor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL COMPONENT MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Johnson Controls, Inc.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
3. Automated Logic.
B. All controls manufacturers shall be BacNet compatible and shall

include all adapters as required.
2.2 CONTROL PANEL ENCLOSURES
A. Furnish for each system under automatic control with relays and
controls mounted in cabinet and temperature indicators, pressure
gages, pilot lights, push buttons and switches flush on cabinet
panel face.
B. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 4 steel enclosure.
C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by

key.
D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.3 THERMOSTATS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Johnson Controls.
2. Siemens Building Technology.
3. Automatic Logic.
B. Electric Room Thermostats:
1. Type: NEMA DC 3, 24 volts, with setback/setup temperature

control.
2. Service: cooling and heating.
3. Covers: Locking with set point adjustment.
C. Room Thermostat Accessories:
1. Thermostat Covers: Brushed aluminum.
2. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior

walls.
3. Thermostat Guards: Metal mounted on separate base.
4. Adjusting Key: Matching device.
24000 AVILA ROAD
5. Aspirating Boxes: for thermostats requiring flush
installation.
6. Provide universal clear guard cover similar to Johnson

controls.
D. Outdoor Reset Thermostat:
1. Remote bulb or bimetal rod and tube type, proportioning

action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable
setpoint.
2. Scale range: -10 to 70 degrees F.
E. Immersion Thermostat: Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube

type, proportional action with adjustable setpoint and adjustable
throttling range.
F. Air-stream Thermostats:
1. Remote bulb or bimetallic rod and tube type, proportional

action with adjustable setpoint in middle of range and
adjustable throttling range.
2. Averaging service remote bulb element: 7.5 feet.
3. Furnish with flange and shield.
G. Electric Low Limit Duct Thermostat:
1. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, automatic reset

switch tripping when temperature sensed across any 12
inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point.
2. Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet.
3. Furnish one thermostat for every 20 sq. ft of coil surface.
H. Electric High Limit Duct Thermostat:
1. Snap acting, single pole, single throw, automatic reset

switch tripping when temperature sensed across any 12
inches of bulb length is equal to or above set point.
2. Bulb length: Minimum 20 feet.
3. Furnish one thermostat for every 20 sq. ft of coil surface.
I. Fire Thermostats:
1. UL labeled, factory set in accordance with NFPA 90A.
2. Normally closed contacts, manual reset.
2.4 ALARM SYSTEM
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Manufacturers:
2. Siemens Building Controls.
3. Automated Logic.
B. Enclosure Construction: NEMA 250, Type 4.
C. Furnish alarm panel with individual indication, horn, silenced

acknowledge switch, and test switch.
D. At alarm condition indication, light flashes and alarm sounds.

Horn stops when acknowledge switch is pushed and system indicates
alarm conditions by continuous light until trouble condition has
cleared. Alarm sounds again when second alarm occurs before first
one has cleared.
E. Furnish remote panels with duplicate functions of primary panel.

Furnish alarm silence/acknowledge switch to acknowledge alarm
from each panel.
F. Furnish dry contacts at main alarm panel for use with remote
alarm monitoring system to indicate each alarm condition.
2.5 CONTROL AIR DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
3. Automated Logic.
B. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500.
C. Frames: Galvanized steel, welded or riveted with corner

reinforcement, minimum 12 gage.
D. Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches wide, 48

inches long, minimum 22 gage, attached to minimum 1/2 inch shafts
with set screws.
E. Blade Seals: Neoprene mechanically attached, field replaceable.
F. Jamb Seals: Stainless steel spring.
G. Shaft Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon sleeve, with thrust

washers at bearings.
24000 AVILA ROAD
H. Linkage Bearings: Graphite impregnated nylon.
I. Outside Air Damper Leakage: Maximum leakage rate of 3.0 cfm per
square foot at 1.0 inches wg pressure differential.
J. Damper Leakage: Less than 1/2 percent based on approach velocity

of 2000 fpm and 4 inches wg.
K. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg.
L. Temperature Limits: - 40 to 200 degrees F.
2.6 ELECTRIC DAMPER ACTUATORS
A. Manufacturers:
3. Automated Logic.
B. Operation: Reversing type proportional motor.
C. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 250 Type.
D. Mounting: Direct mount.
E. Stroke: 90 seconds end to end full stroke, 15 seconds return to

normal for spring return.
F. Protection: Electronic stall protection.
G. Control Input: 0-10 VDC or 0-20 mA DC.
H. Power: Nominal 24 volt AC.
I. Torque: Size for minimum 150 percent of required duty.
J. Duty cycle: rated for 65,000 cycles.
K. Accessories:
1. Cover mounted transformer.
2. Auxiliary potentiometer.
3. Damper linkage.
4. Direct drive feedback potentiometer.
5. Output position feedback.
24000 AVILA ROAD
6. Field selectable rotational, spring return direction, field
adjustable zero and span.
7. End switch.
2.7 CONTROL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Automated Logic.
B. Globe Pattern:
1. 2 inches and Smaller: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising

stem, renewable composition disc, screwed ends with back
seating capacity packable under pressure.
2. 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising

stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and
disc.
3. Hydronic Systems:
a. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees

F.
b. Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel.
c. Sizing: Size for 3 psig maximum pressure drop at

design flow rate.
d. Furnish two-way valves with equal percentage

characteristics. Furnish three way valves with linear
characteristics. Size two way valve actuators to
close valves against pump shut off head.
C. Ball Valves:
1. Threaded ends for 2-way valves 3 inches and smaller.

Threaded ends for 3-way valves 2 inches and smaller.
2. Forged brass body, chrome plated brass ball and blowout

proof stem and EPDM O-rings with minimum 600 psig rating.
3. Fluid Temperature Range: minus 20 to 250 degrees F.
4. Sizing: 3 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
5. Flow Characteristics: Furnish 2-way valves with equal
24000 AVILA ROAD
percentage characteristics. Furnish 3-way valves with equal
percentage characteristic through control port and linear
characteristic through bypass port.
6. Size 2-way valve actuators to close valves against pump

shut off head.
D. Butterfly Valves:
1. Service Pressure Rating: 125 psig at 250 degrees F.
2. Construction: ASTM A126 cast-iron or ASTM A536 ductile-iron

body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem,
field-replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
3. Body Style: Wafer, or Lug.
4. Disc: Bronze.
5. Resilient replaceable seat for service to 250 degrees F.
a. Size for 1 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow

rate.
E. Terminal Unit Control Valves:
1. Brass body, Class 250, nickel plated brass ball, with

optimizer insert for modulating applications, blow out
resistant stem, threaded ends.
2. Two or three way as indicated in schedule or on Drawings.
3. Integral actuator.
4. Spring return required for unit ventilator heating valves

and other terminal equipment with outside air.
5. Furnish non-spring return valves with manual override

capability built into actuator.
6. Minimum Fluid Temperature: 20 degrees F.
7. Maximum Operating Conditions: 250 degrees F.
8. Sizing: 4 psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate,

to close against pump shutoff head.
9. Flow Characteristics: Furnish two-way and three-way valves

with equal percentage characteristics.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.8 ELECTRIC VALVE ACTUATORS
A. Manufacturers:
3. Automated Logic.
B. Fully factory assembled. Size to operate with sufficient reserve

power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action
under every condition.
C. Motor: Permanent split-capacitor or shaded-pole type. Gear trains

completely oil immersed and sealed. Furnish spring-return motors
with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for
easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches,
auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.
D. Actuator: Direct-coupled type non-hydraulic designed for minimum

100,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. Furnish actuator with
rating of not less than twice thrust needed for actual operation
of valve.
1. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
2. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital

rotation-sensing circuitry.
3. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism.

Furnish external, manual gear release on non-spring-return
actuators.
4. Furnish spring-return actuators with manual override.

Complete manual override to take no more than 10 turns.
5. Power Requirements:
a. Two-Position Spring Return: 24 volt AC or DC, maximum

10 vA.
b. Modulating: 24 volt AC, maximum 15 vA.
24000 AVILA ROAD
6. Proportional Signal: 2 to 10 volt dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2
to 10 volt dc position feedback signal.
7. Temperature Rating: minus 22 to 140 degrees F.
8. Run Time: 200 seconds open, 40 seconds closed.
E. Size for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump

differential pressure, regardless of water loop system pressures.
2.9 OUTSIDE AIR MEASURING AND MODULATION DEVICE
A. Manufacturers:
3. Automated Logic.
B. Factory assembled damper, airflow monitor, actuator, and

accessories.
C. Damper and airflow measurement assembly sized to accommodate

minimum outside airflow as indicated on the Drawing and maximum
100% outside air flow.
D. Construction:
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Blades:
a. Modulating Air Control:
1) Style: Airfoil-Shaped, Single-Piece.
2) Action: Parallel.
3) Orientation: Horizontal.
4) Material: Heavy Gage 6063-T5 Extruded Aluminum.
5) Width: Maximum 5 Inches.
b. Stationary Sensing:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1) STYLE: AIRFOIL-SHAPED, SINGLE-PIECE.
2) ORIENTATION: HORIZONTAL.
3) MATERIAL: HEAVY GAGE 6063-T5 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM.
4) WIDTH: MAXIMUM 5-1/4 INCHES.
5) FINISH: ANODIZED.
3. Bearings: Self-lubricating molded synthetic sleeve, turning

in extruded hole in frame.
4. Seals:
a. Blade: Extruded rubber. Mechanically attached to

blade edge.
b. Jamb: Stainless steel, flexible metal compression

type.
c. Linkage: Concealed in frame.
d. Axles: Minimum 1/2 inch diameter plated steel, hex-

shaped, mechanically attached to blade.
e. Mounting: Vertical.
f. Electric Actuator: 24 V, 60 Hz, modulating, with

position feedback.
24000 AVILA ROAD
5. Digital Controller: Application specific controller.
Programming logic and calibration in nonvolatile EPROM.
Controller uses generic 0 - 10 vdc inputs and outputs for
interface to building automation system.
6. Air Straightener Section: 3 inches deep section contained

in 5 inch long sleeve attached to damper-airflow monitor
frame.
7. Finish: Mill aluminum.
E. Performance Data:
1. Temperature Rating: Withstand -40 to 140 degrees F.
2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 5 percent.
3. Leakage: Maximum of 2.0 cfm per square foot at 1.0 inches

wg pressure differential.
4. Measures from 15 percent to 100 percent of unit nominal air

flow.
5. Adjusts air flow for temperature variations.
6. Provides 2 to 10 volt DC signal corresponding to actual air

flow.
F. Accessories:
1. Actuator Heater: Allow actuator operation in ambient

temperatures to -40 degrees F.
2.10 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Temperature Sensors:
1. Type: Resistance temperature detector (RTD) or thermistor.
2. Accuracy:
a. Plus or minus 1 degree F for standard applications.

Where high accuracy is required, furnish accuracy of
plus or minus 0.2 degrees F.
b. Sensing Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 degree F.
c. Display Accuracy and Resolution: Minimum of plus or

minus 1 degree F.
3. Built-in communications port.
4. Space Sensors: Digital with LCD display, day-night override

button, and set point slide adjustment override options.
Set point slide adjustment capable of being software
24000 AVILA ROAD
limited by automation system to limit amount of room
adjustment.
5. Outside Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, furnish with

shield from direct sunlight.
6. Duct Temperature Sensors:
a. Rigid or averaging type as indicated in sequence of

operations. Averaging sensor minimum length: 5 feet
in length.
b. Duct Cross Sections Greater Than 10 square feet:

Furnish serpentine averaging element to sense
stratified air temperatures.
7. Piping Temperature Sensors: Furnish with separable brass

well.
B. Humidity Sensors:
1. Type: Capacitance or bulk polymer resistance.
2. Drift: Not to exceed 3 percent of full scale per year.
3. Room Sensors:
a. Sensing Range: 0 to 100 percent.
b. Accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent relative

humidity.
4. Duct Sensors:
a. Sensing Range: 0 to 100 percent.

b. Accuracy of plus or minus 5 percent relative

humidity.
c. Furnish with sampling chamber.
d. Element guard.
e. Mounting plate.
5. Outdoor Air Humidity Sensors:
a. Sensing Range: 20 to 95 percent relative humidity.
b. Suitable for ambient conditions of minus 40 to 170

degrees F.
c. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent relative humidity

at 77 degrees F.
24000 AVILA ROAD
d. Element guard.
e. Mounting plate.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Differential Pressure Switches:
1. Furnish as specified in sequences of operation for status

purposes in air and water applications.
2. Fully adjustable differential pressure settings.
3. UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA

minimum).
4. NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure.
5. Scale range and differential suitable for intended

application.
D. Static Pressure Sensor:
1. Non-directional sensor with suitable range for expected

input, and temperature compensated.
2. Accuracy: plus or minus 1 percent of full scale with

repeatability of 0.5 percent.
3. Output: 4 to 20 mA, 0-5 vDC, 0-10 vDC.
4. Building Static Pressure Range: minus 0.1 to 0.1 inches

water column, minus 0.25 to 0.25 inches water column, minus
0.5 to 0.5 inches water column, minus 1.0 to 1.0 inches
water column, jumper selectable.
5. Duct Static Pressure Range: 0 to 1 inches water column, 0

to 2.5 inches water column, 0 to 5 inches water column, 0
to 10 inches water column, jumper adjustable.
E. Static Pressure Sensors:
1. Differential pressure type.
2. Sensor range closely matched to system static pressure,

minus 0.5 to 0.5 inches water column, minus 1 to 1 inches
water column or 0 to 2.5 inches water column.
3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 5 percent of sensing range.
F. Carbon Dioxide Sensors:
1. Sensors designed for indoor carbon dioxide levels in

accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.
2. 4 to 20 ma. linear output over range of 0 to 2000 ppm of

carbon dioxide for interface to DDC control system.
3. For duct mounted sensors furnish airtight enclosure

complete with sampling tube.
24000 AVILA ROAD
G. Air Flow Switches:
1. Paddle or differential pressure type, as indicated in

sequences of operation.
2. UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA

minimum).
3. Appropriate scale range and differential adjustment.
4. Adjustable sensitivity.
H. Water Flow Switches:
1. Paddle type with stainless steel or bronze paddle.
2. UL Listed, SPDT snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA

minimum).
3. Appropriate scale range and differential adjustment.
4. Adjustable sensitivity.
6. Furnish vapor proof type for chilled water applications.
I. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multi-channel, dual-level

detectors, using solid-state sensors with 3 year minimum life,
maximum 15 minute sensor replacement, suitable over a temperature
range of 23 to 130 degrees F, calibrated for 50 and 100 ppm, with
maximum 120 second response time to 100 ppm carbon monoxide.
J. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using

solid-state infrared sensors, suitable over a temperature range
of 23 to 130 degrees F, calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with
continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output, and wall
mounted.
K. Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-

state zircon cell sensing, suitable over temperature range of
minus 32 to 1100 degrees F, calibrated for 0 to 5 percent, with
continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output, wall mounted.
L. Refrigerant Detectors: Dual-level detectors, using solid-state

sensors, with alarm preset for 300 ppm, alarm indicator light,
alarm silence light and button, alarm test light and button, and
trouble light. Provide auxiliary relay preset for 150 ppm.
M. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight

sensor lockout, sensitivity control, and 180 degree field of view
with vertical sensing adjustment, for flush mounting.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.11 DUCT-MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR
A. Manufacturers:
3. Automated Logic.
B. Product Description: NFPA 72, photoelectric type with the

following features:
1. Auxiliary SPDT relay contact.
2. Key-operated normal-reset-test switch.
3. Duct sampling tubes extending width of duct.
4. Visual indication of detector actuation.
5. Duct-mounted housing.
C. Furnish four-wire detector with separate power supply and signal

circuits.
2.12 LIQUID FLOW METERS
A. ASME MFC-3M, calibrated venturi orifice plate and flanges with

valved taps, chart for conversion of differential pressure
readings to flow rate, with pressure gage in case.
B. Annular element flow stations with meter set.
1. Measuring Station: Stainless steel nipple section or weld

insert type, rated to 275 psig at 400 degrees F, with
safety shut-off valves and quick coupling connections, and
permanent metal tag indicating design flow rate, reading
for design flow rate, metered fluid, line size, station or
location number. Accuracy of flow measuring elements shall
be plus or minus 0.55 to minus 2.30 percent.
2. Portable Meter Set: Dry single diaphragm type pressure gage

with 6 inch dial pointer, stainless steel wetted metal
parts, variable pulsation damper, equalizing valve, two
bleed valves, and master chart for direct conversion of
meter readings to flow rate, mounted in rust-proof carrying
case with two ten foot long rubber test hoses with brass
valves or quick connections for measuring stations.
2.13 PRESSURE GAGES
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. ASME B40.1, UL 393, 2 inch diameter drawn steel case, phosphor
bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, with
front recalibration adjustment, black scale on white background,
one percent mid-scale accuracy, scale calibrated in psi,
manufactured by Trerice or equal.
B. ASME B40.1, UL 393, 3-1/2 inch diameter cast aluminum case,

phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass
socket, front recalibration adjustment, black figures on white
background, one percent mid-scale accuracy, scale calibrated in
psi.
2.14 PRESSURE GAGE TAPS
A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 150 psig.
B. Needle Valve: Brass for maximum 275 psig.
C. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 1/4 inch

connections.
D. Syphon: Brass, 1/4 inch angle or straight pattern.
2.15 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS
A. ASTM E1, 7 inch scale, red appearing mercury, lens front tube,
cast aluminum case with enamel finish and clear glass or
polycarbonate window, brass stem, 2 percent of scale accuracy to
ASTM E77] scale calibrated in degrees F.
B. ASTM E1, 7 inch scale, adjustable angle, red appearing mercury,

lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish and clear
glass window, brass stem, cast aluminum adjustable joint with
positive locking device, 2 percent of scale accuracy to ASTM E77,
scale calibrated in degrees F.
2.16 DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. ASTM E1, 2-1/2 inch diameter dial in stainless steel case,

bimetallic helix actuated with silicone fluid damping, white with
black markings and black pointer hermetically sealed glass lens,
stainless steel stem, one percent of full scale accuracy,
calibrated in degrees F.
B. ASTM E1, 5 inch diameter dial in stainless steel case, adjustable

angle with front recalibration, bimetallic helix actuated with
silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black
pointer hermetically sealed glass lens, stainless steel stem, one
percent of full scale accuracy, calibrated in degrees F.
2.17 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or

without extensions as required, and with cap and chain.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Flange: 3 inch outside diameter reversible flange, designed to
fasten to sheet metal air ducts, with brass perforated stem.
2.18 TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plug: 1/4 inch or 1/2 inch brass fitting and cap for
receiving 1/8 inch outside diameter pressure or temperature probe
with [neoprene core for temperatures up to 200 degrees F.
B. Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing

two inch diameter pressure gages, two gage adapters with 1/8 inch
probes, two 1-1/2 inch dial thermometers.
2.19 STATIC PRESSURE GAGES
A. 3-1/2 inch diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black

figures on white background, front recalibration adjustment with
tubing, static pressure tips, manufactured by Dwyer.
B. Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black

figures, front recalibration adjustment with tubing, static
pressure tips, manufactured by Dwyer.
2.20 CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES & FLOW MEASURING METER
A. One-Half to Two Inches (1/2" - 2"):
1. Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, "Armstrong" CBV

I Circuit Balancing Valves with provision for connecting a
portable CBM-60 Differential (Ft. of Hd.) Pressure Meter.
Each meter connection shall have position shut-off valves.
2. The "Armstrong" CBV I Circuit Balancing Valves shall be

Globe style design and all metal parts of nonferrous,
pressure die-cast, nonporous Ametel Copper Alloy. Each
valve can be installed in any direction without affecting
flow measurement and shall provide four (4) functions:
a. Precise flow measurement.
b. Precision flow balancing.
c. Positive shut-off with no drip seat and teflon disc.
d. Drain connection with protective cap.
3. The CBV I Valves shall have four (4) 360 degree adjustment
turns of handwheel for maximum vernier-type setting with
"Hidden Memory" feature to program the valve with precision
Tamper-Proof Balancing Setting.
B. Two and One-Half to Six Inches (2-1/2" - 6"):
1. Furnish and install, as shown on the plans, "Armstrong" CBV

II Circuit Balancing Valves with provision for connecting a
24000 AVILA ROAD
portable CBM-60 Differential (Ft. of Hd.) Pressure Meter.
Each meter connection shall have position shut-off valves.
2. The "Armstrong" CBV II Circuit Balancing Valves shall be

Globe style design and provide three (3) functions:
a. Precise flow measurement.
b. Precision flow balancing.
c. Positive shut-off with no drip seat and teflon disc.
3. The CBV II Valves shall have eight (8) 360 degree

adjustment turns of handwheel for maximum vernier-type
setting with "Hidden Memory" feature to program the valve
with precision Tamper-Proof Balancing Setting.
C. Provide an "Armstrong" CompuFlo Meter for use with Armstrong CBV

Circuit Balancing Valves. The digital readout computerized meter
shall be pre-programmed with CBV valve curves and shall provide
five functions:
1. Direct flow readout.
2. Proportional balancing.
3. Computing valve opening (handwheel setting).
4. Differential pressure measurement.
5. Temperature measurement.
D. Each Compuflo Meter shall have automatic calibration and air

purging and furnished complete with all hoses, fittings and snap-
on connections necessary to carry out fast, accurate balancing.
2.21 FLOW INDICATORS (CIRCUIT SETTERS)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bell & Gossett, Model CB.
B. Furnish and install circuit setter with meter connections as

shown on plans and with manufacturer’s recommendations.
C. Valves to be designed to allow installing contractor to pre-set

balance points for proportional system balance prior to system
start-up in accordance with pre-set balance schedule.
D. All valves ½” to 3” pipe size to be of bronze body/brass ball

construction with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. Valves
to have differential pressure read-out ports across valve seat
area. Read-out ports to be fitted with internal EPT inserts and
check valves. Valve bodies to have ¼” NPT tapped drain/purge
port. Valves to have memory stop feature to allow valve to be
24000 AVILA ROAD
closed for service and then reopened to set point without
disturbing balance position. All valves to have calibrated
nameplates to assure specific valve settings. Valves shall be
designed for positive shut-off.
E. 1/2”–3” NPT connections 300 psig at 250۫ F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify air handling units and ductwork installation is complete

and air filters are in place before installing sensors in air
streams.
B. Verify location of thermostats and humidistats and other exposed

control sensors with Drawings before installation.
C. Verify building systems to be controlled are ready to operate.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Controls contractor shall provide all necessary DDC points,

hardware, software, sensor, transformers, low voltage wiring,
conduits and all necessary materials for all MEP systems.
B. The controls shall match the existing campus controls.
C. Install thermostats, after locations are coordinated with other

Work.
D. Install thermostats, 48 inches above floor. Align with light

switches.
E. Install freeze protection thermostats using flanges and element

holders.
F. Install outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors,

with sensing elements outdoors with sun shield.
G. Provide separable sockets for liquids and flanges for air bulb
elements. Refer to Section 23 21 16.
H. Install thermostats in aspirating boxes in public areas entrances

and as indicated on Drawings.
I. Install guards on thermostats in public areas entrances and as

J. Install control panels adjacent to associated equipment on

vibration free walls or freestanding supports. Use one cabinet
for more than one system in same equipment room. Install engraved
plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet
and engraved plastic nameplates on cabinet face. Label with
appropriate equipment or system designation.
K. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic

interlock controls when switch is in "hand" position.
L. Install conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section

26 05 03.
M. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
24000 AVILA ROAD
N. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before
strainers and on suction and discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.
O. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock

to isolate each gage. Provide syphon on gages in steam systems.
P. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short

couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inch for
installation of thermometer sockets.
Q. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
R. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls system

thermostat, transmitter, or sensor sockets. Where thermometers
are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted thermometers
are not required.
S. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 10 feet downstream of

mixing dampers, coils, or other devices causing air turbulence.
T. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
U. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to

service with largest appropriate scale.
V. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily

read from normal operating level. Indicate locations on
coordination drawings.
W. Locate test plugs adjacent to pressure gages and pressure gage

taps.
A. Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. After completion of installation, test and adjust control

equipment. Submit data showing set points and final adjustments
of controls.
C. Test pneumatic systems to system pressure maximum of 30 psig.

Check calibration of instruments. Recalibrate instruments out of
calibration. Replace defective instruments.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

Requirements for demonstration and training.
B. Demonstrate complete operation of systems, including sequence of

operation prior to Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner and

Construction Manager.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Provide manual to the attendees.
E. Section 01 82 00 – Demonstration and Training.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 09 23
DIRECT-DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Enterprise Energy Management System Requirements
1. LASC Requirements and Objective
a. VENDOR will create and host a LASC website (www.LASC-

Energy.com) for LASC, where individual users,
managers, as well as various departments, may login
and view their energy consumption, as well as the
status of their energy consuming processes, such as
HVAC, lighting, etc., against energy saving targets.
LASC Engineers will also be able to login to this
Enterprise Energy Management System (EEM) website and
have full two-way command over a limited and selected
number of points in their control systems, which
would eliminate the need to travel to a facility or
piece of equipment, provided they are included.
2. Functional Requirements
a. LASC will have the ability to create custom user

types (called “roles”) in the EEM platform, with
detailed control over access rights, and focused
graphing and reporting of relevant data for specific
users, similar but not exclusive to the following 3
user types:
1) BASIC USER, READ-ONLY, DASHBOARD WITH HIGH-LEVEL

INFO, INTUITIVE TO USE
2) MANAGEMENT USER, READ-ONLY, FINANCIALS, TRENDS,

TARGETS, TRACKING, ANALYSIS
3) TECHNICIAN USER, ABILITY TO CONTROL INPUTS AND

SYSTEMS, ADJUST SETTINGS.
b. LASC will have the administrative security settings

to create and control each level and user type. The
Basic User type is intended for venue managers to
monitor venue level performance against reduction
targets.
c. In addition, the EEM will keep a running list of end-

users’ total energy and financial savings, achieved
through the confirmation of equipment scheduling
adjustments.
24000 AVILA ROAD
d. Through the portal, there will be a 3D Geographical
Information System (GIS) representation of normalized
and forecasted functions; a satellite/map/figure of
the red, yellow, green and blue status of major
systems or pieces of equipment selected to monitor.
e. Users will have the option of exporting data by

simply clicking hyperlinks labeled “Print”, “Export
to Excel” and “Save/Print as PDF” to export data and
views from the EEM system. Data will be automatically
and properly formatted by the EEM system in a printed
friendly format – arranged for an 8.5” x 11” paper in
a way that is visually pleasing. The system will not
simply unload raw, unformatted data into an Excel
spreadsheet in a way that “Comma Separated Value”
(CSV) does, or simply print the current webpage to
PDF.
3. Financial Requirements
a. Energy and financial ratios will be developed and

displayed within the website’s analysis section
revealing hidden proportional relationships between
data variables, such as the cost of running
equipments under different operating parameters.
b. The EEM will provide simple and easy to use, real-

time and historical analysis of equipment scheduling
and efficiency, as well as detailed financial
analysis outlining the cost/savings associated with
every energy consuming process integrated into the
EMS. All financial calculations will be based on
LASCS' detailed rate structure with appropriate
utilities to provide end-users with the actual
cost/savings associated with all energy management
decisions. The system will provide a “before” and
projected “after” view, contrasting the financial
impacts of process control adjustments. Additional
information to be tracked and analyzed will include
theme park attendance, operational hours and weather
trends. When looking up data, LASC will have the
ability to customize time periods to their financial
calendar.
4. Environmental Requirements
a. The system will integrate Greenhouse Gas emissions

factors for different energy uses, in order to track
GHG emissions, and the ability to update those
factors as they change from time to time based on
LASC tracked variables. This GHG data will allow
carbon footprint calculations from the facility level
all the way up to the site level, and provide
trending over time. The system will also give the
ability to manipulate data points across time and
apply a factor or series of factors (rate, schedule,
24000 AVILA ROAD
weather, GHG ratios) in order to compare different
scenarios and outcomes.
b. LASC would like the ability to upload comparison

factors for graphing and comparison (attendance,
temperature, operating hours, utility rates…or any
spreadsheet, time-based parameter). LASC would also
like to see if it is possible to feed energy saving
savings information directly to their utilities for
rebate purposes, and to pull info from utilities for
rate schedules, demand response, etc.
5. Features and Functionality:
a. Multiple data sources networked together through the

EEM platform to an enterprise dashboard
b. Ability to provide feedback to the field via reports
c. The ability to execute; and then measure and verify

effectiveness of energy strategies which reduce
energy usage and ultimately save money.
d. Accomplish the majority of the functional

requirements previously outlined above
e. Built in scheduling logic and control of the HVAC and

control systems tied to the LASC scheduling systems;
to detect occupancy for the purposes of performing
Demand Control Ventilation (DCV) without having to
use hardware and discrete CO2 sensors.
f. Perform Demand Management (Demand Response) by

overriding the existing HVAC equipment room
temperature set points in order to more efficiently
cool and condition the theatres and other venues,
from an energy management standpoint. This will be
accomplished through the use of occupancy detection
to gauge load and/or “pre-cooling” strategies enacted
because of weather forecasts.
g. Integrate occupancy data feeds and “run-time”

counters on mechanical equipment in order to
coordinate and better perform Statistical
Preventative Maintenance (SPM)
h. Enable anonymous user (guest) login for viewing of

canned reports; possibly through links delivered via
e-mail, etc.
i. VENDOR shall use software-based Gateway applications

to connect LASCS existing open, proprietary and
legacy building control, metering, maintenance and
other systems together seamlessly; using a pure, web-
based (HTTP, XML, Web Services) architecture. The use
of replacement, "shadow" or hardware based field
24000 AVILA ROAD
devices or "hardware-based boxes" of any kind will be
unacceptable. VENDOR must be able to connect (two-way
control) into the majority of LASC systems.
6. IT / Network / Computer Requirements
a. All data and views will be fully accessible and

displayable via standard web pages using LASC
corporate standard Microsoft Internet Explorer 6, 7
or 8. No additional web-browser plug-in shall be
required of any kind (ActiveX), with the exception of
Adobe/Macromedia Flash plug-in, Microsoft Virtual
Earth, the Microsoft .NET based ChartFX Charting
control, the Crystal Reports viewer and JavaScript.
Server-side processing such as PHP or ASP.NET is
fine. The EEM portal is built using the .NET
framework 2.0.
b. All energy and financial analysis (reports, graphs,

charts, user calculators, etc.) must be 100%
accessible online through the EEM web-site. There
will be no software, of any kind, required by end-
users, with the exception of the components mentioned
above, in order to view energy consumption, energy
process status, or to view/perform energy and/or
financial analysis whatsoever.
c. VENDOR will use Gateway applications running on a

LASC web-application server/network which will
capture building control and other data. Equipment
interfaces between the third-party equipment and LASC
systems are the responsibility of VENDOR. All devices
must be approved by LASCS IT, especially as it
relates to network security and virus protection and
must pass LASCS IT security scan. LASCS IT will
provide access outside of their network for VENDOR
devices, but it is VENDORS responsibility to retrieve
and transmit the data from LASC sites to Vendor’s
data repository and central server(s). VENDOR must
provide support for their devices every day that LASC
is open, and procedures for LASCs personnel to follow
in the event of an equipment failure.
d. Data such as schedules and occupancy will be obtained

directly from LASC. LASC would also like to have the
EEM connect directly to LASC’s other relevant systems
such as CMMS for asset management and facility
maintenance. All data obtained through the EEM system
shall remain the property of LASC, even after
termination of any contract with VENDOR.
7. Computer Requirements
a. Vendor to include 1 complete set-up with LASC

computer requirements (Dell, HP or Compaq brand
recommended)
24000 AVILA ROAD
1) HARDWARE
a) Dual Core Processor
b) 1.0 GB RAM
c) Network Connection (100BaseT Ethernet

typical)
2) OPERATING SYSTEM(S)
a) Windows™ XP or Vista
3) GRAPHICS (OPTIONAL, BUT DESIRABLE)
a) NVIDEA GeForce graphics card
4) GATEWAY SERVERS
a) TBD
b. Network Addressing
1) STATIC IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENTS
2) ALLOW DIRECT IP ADDRESSING BETWEEN VENDOR SERVER

AND THE GATEWAY SERVERS IN EACH LASC LOCATION
c. Network Connectivity- Port 80 (default) access from

each Gateway servers. This can be changed to another
port if port 80 is already used)
d. External System Access
1) REMOTE EEM SERVER AND THE GATEWAY SERVERS

CONFIGURATION AND COMMISSIONING
a) Secure Terminal Services/Remote Desktop

connection (Port 3389)
2) REMOTE EEM SERVER SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND

DIAGNOSTICS
a) Secure Terminal Services/Remote Desktop

Connection (Port 3389)
b) User Account with Administrator rights on

VENDOR Gateway servers
8. Customized Applications:
a. The Vendor shall integrate all existing

infrastructure components into the systems network
database, including Electrical, Plumbing, Water, Gas
and other utilities, to provide specific customized
24000 AVILA ROAD
information to Administration, Maintenance and
Operations, IT and Security divisions of the LASC
campus. The system shall have spare capacity to add
for future components. Training shall be included for
each of the divisions in their specific applications.
9. Energy Savings and Facility Management Benefits:
a. Energy Management System will provide significant

savings beyond the installation of energy saving
devices with the integration and optimization of
systems operations. Vendor must demonstrate how and
where the proposed systems provided measurable energy
savings (minimum of 10%) over one year of operation
at other facilities. In addition, the systems
integrator shall show specific examples of manpower
reductions in Facility Operations and Maintenance at
other institutions as a direct result of the system
operation. The Vendor shall demonstrate payback
period for the system based to energy savings and
reduced management costs achieved at other
institutions.
10. Experienced Vendor:
a. Services shall be provided by an experienced service

provider (Vendor) with a proven track record of
minimum five years experience in similar
applications. The vendor shall provide at least two
references with similar facilities and systems. The
Vendor shall guarantee a yearly fee for services to
be fixed for five years, renewable on an annual
basis. The Vendor shall be Phoenix Energy
Technologies or approved equal.
B. Section includes control equipment and software.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC:

Control system components.

Controls: Sequences of operation implemented using products
specified in this section.
3. Section 25 50 00 - Integrated Automation Facility Controls:

For overall building automation and control systems.

section.
1.2 REFERENCES
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI MC85.1 - Terminology for Automatic Control.
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Special Note: The Direct Digital Control system shall be

completed by designed and built by the Contractor. (Refer also to
other section of the specifications and contract documents).
B. Install thermostats, humidistats, other sensors and provide all

interlock wiring and wiring from field devices to manufacturer’s
control panels, controllers, monitoring panels and other devices
for equipment specified elsewhere, and as indicated on the
drawings including:
1. Air handling units.
2. Exhaust Fans
3. VFD’s
4. All Mechanical and Plumbing equipments and systems.
5. Electrical equipment and system.
6. All Lighting Controls
C. Provide shutdown of certain mechanical equipment during loss of

normal utility power as described in Division 26 section “Power
Monitoring System”.
D. The system shall function on three levels, a management level,

Ethernet network based on TCP/IP protocol that also incorporates
BACnet interfacing capabilities, a high performance peer-to-peer
building level network and a DDC controller floor level network.
Access to any of these levels must be totally transparent to user
when accessing data or developing control programs.”
E. The BMS shall be capable of total integration of the facility

infrastructure systems with user access to all system data either
locally over a secure Intranet within the building or by remote
access by a standard Web Browser over the Internet.
F. The BMS shall communicate to third party systems such as

chillers, boilers, lighting control energy metering systems,
fire-life safety systems and other building management related
devices with open, interoperable communication capabilities.
G. All materials and equipment used shall be manufacturer’s latest

standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other
systems and not custom designed specially for this project.
H. Provide operational and maintenance manual from the manufacturer.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including

General and supplementary Conditions and Division-1 specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Products furnished but not installed under this section:
1. Valves, flow switches, flow sensors, thermo wells, and

pressure taps to be installed under Division 23.
C. Coordination with electrical:
1. Installation of all line voltage power wiring connection to

Division 15 equipment by division 16.
D. Each motor starter provided under Division 16, shall be furnished

with individual control power transformer to supply 120-volt
control power, control relay, and auxiliary contacts (one N.O.
and one N.C.) for use by this section.
E. Fire Alarm & Lighting control systems shall be furnished with

compatible gateways to allow integration to the BMS system. See
specifications for scope of work
F. Wiring of any electrical sub-metering devices furnished by BMS

Contractor.
A. Automatic temperature controls field monitoring and control

system using field programmable microprocessor based units with
communications to Building Automation and Control System
specified in Section 25 50 00.
B. Base system on distributed system of fully intelligent, stand-

alone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user
environment on token passing network, with central and remote
hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit.
C. Provide computer software and hardware, operator input/output

devices, control units, local area networks (LAN), sensors,
control devices, actuators.
D. Provide controls for variable air volume terminals, reheat coils,

unit heaters, fan coils, and all mechanical equipment when
directly connected to control units. Individual terminal unit
control is specified in Section 23 09 00.
E. Provide control systems consisting of thermostats, control

valves, dampers and operators, indicating devices, interface
equipment and other apparatus and accessories to operate
mechanical systems, and to perform functions specified.
F. Provide installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments,
24000 AVILA ROAD
and fine tuning necessary for complete and fully operational
system.
G. Work of this section includes engineering, furnishing, testing

and commissioning a completely operational Building Management
System. All items specified in these and related sections,
indicated on the drawings or reasonably inferred as necessary for
safe and proper operation shall be provided.
H. All necessary electrical work, including control wiring,

interlock wiring, devices and equipment shall be provided by the
BMS contractor. All power wiring required for BMS equipment,
including starters, circuit breakers, wiring conduit and fittings
shall be provided by the BMS contractor.
I. Provide integration to the lighting control system with signals

to lighting contactors and lighting relays. Provide integration
to the Fire Alarm system to allow monitoring of alarm, trouble,
and supervisory conditions
J. Install all sensors, thermostats, interlock wiring and other

devices and equipment that may be furnished with equipment
specified in other Division 15 sections.
K. Provide all testing, calibration, programming, debugging and

system adjusting as specified. Assist in the startup and
commissioning of each system.
L. Provide training for the owner’s operating personnel as

specified.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following:
1. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control-unit

locations and trunk data conductors.
2. Connected data points, including connected control unit and

input device.
3. System graphics showing monitored systems, data (connected

and calculated) point addresses, and operator notations.
Submit demonstration diskette containing graphics.
4. System configuration with peripheral devices, batteries,

power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections.
5. Description and sequence of operation for operating, user,

and application software.
6. Use terminology in submittals conforming to ASME MC85.1.
24000 AVILA ROAD
7. Coordinate submittals with information requested in Section
23 09 93.
C. Product Data: Submit data for each system component and software
module and operational and maintenance manual from the
manufacturer.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation

instruction for each control system component.

F. Submit 10 complete sets of documentation in the following phased

delivery schedule:
1. Valve schedule
2. Equipment data cut sheets
3. System schematics, including:
a. Sequence of operations
b. Point names
c. Point addresses
d. Point to point wiring
e. Interface wiring diagrams
f. Panel layouts
g. System riser diagrams
4. AutoCAD compatible as-built drawings
G. Upon project completion, submit operation and maintenance

manuals, consisting of the following:
1. Index sheet, listing contents in alphabetical order
2. Manufacturer's equipment parts list of all functional

components of the system, disk of system schematics,
including wiring diagrams
3. Description of sequence of operations
4. As-Built interconnection wiring diagrams
5. User’s documentation containing product, system

architectural and programming information.
6. Trunk cable schematic showing remote electronic panel
24000 AVILA ROAD
locations, and all trunk data
7. List of connected data points, including panels to which

they are connected and input device (valves, relays,
sensors, etc.)
8. Conduit routing diagrams
9. Copy of the warranty
10. Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions
11. Recommended spare parts list
H. Paragraphs D, E and F are required to be a single submittal.

Information shall be submitted in three ring binders, logically
divided into sections with a detailed table of contents for each
section. All information shall be either letter size or folded
tabloid size. If tabloid size floor plans are not legible,
include, along with the tabloid sheets, half size floor plans for
use in reviewing the plans. System graphics submittal shall be
submitted and approved prior to starting graphics installation.
I. Submit preprinted manufacturer’s descriptions and specification

sheets showing compliance with specifications including
performance, dimensions, ratings, applicable agency listings and
approvals, model numbers, accessories and other data for each
type of equipment and device, including:.
1. Other BMS equipment including DDC controllers, terminal

unit controllers, network controllers, file servers.
Provide project-specific schedule indicating use of each
device.
2. Sensors, transducers and other field devices. Provide

project specific schedule listing each type of sensor and
field device, manufacturer and model number, and use .(i.e.
Manufacturer Model XXX - air handler static pressure
sensor). Cross reference schedule to product data sheets.
3. Valves, damper and operators: Provide project specific

schedule listing each type of valve, damper operator,
manufacturer and model number, and use .(i.e. Manufacturer
Model XXX - VAV reheat terminal heating valve). Cross
reference schedule to product data sheets.
J. Submit project specific diagrams, charts and schedules including

the following.
1. Control diagrams: diagrams for each piece of equipment such

as air handlers or system such as chilled water system.
Diagrams shall include schematic representation of the
system showing all equipment, controlled or monitored
devices. All field devices shall be indicated, including
BMS point names, manufacturer and model number of devices.
Cross reference each field device and control component
24000 AVILA ROAD
with product data submittal required above. Diagrams shall
include point- to- point wiring diagrams indicating DDC
panel or unitary controller identification and terminations
and power connections.
2. Control panel drawings showing all equipment such as DDC

controllers, power supplies, battery backup, additional I/O
modules with dimensions panel construction.
3. Written sequences of operation.
4. Third party control system interface diagrams. Including

point to point wiring diagrams with clear indications of
BMS furnished devices and wiring and equipment supplier
furnished wiring and devices.
5. I/O point list with addresses for all devices. For each
system or individual piece of equipment show all control or
monitoring points, point type (analog in, digital out, etc)
field device reference and system point address.
6. Valve schedules showing each specific control valve and

operator, valve identification tag, valve use, valve
location, size, flow and pressure drop characteristics,
valve and operator part number. Cross reference with
control diagrams and product data.
7. Controller schedule showing each specific DDC controller

and unitary controller, manufacturer’s model number,
equipment served, controller location, controller power
requirement electrical panel used for power source, circuit
number and circuit electrical load. Where controllers are
required to be housed in control panels, provide diagrams
indicating panel dimensions, NEMA ratings, DDC modules,
power supplies and other equipment to be mounted in the
panels.
K. Submit project specific floor plans, sections and details showing

all BMS equipment locations, device identification and address,
coordinated with schedules and diagrams noted above. Drawings
shall also indicate BMS network routing and interface points with
other systems and trades. Submitted data shall include the
following:
1. Site plans showing the facility fiber optic fiber cable

routing. Indicate all splice points, terminations and
building entry points and interface devices.
2. Building floor plans showing all DDC controllers, unitary

controllers, network routing.
3. Electrical power distribution drawings, indicating location

of all equipment requiring electrical power, circuiting
information, motor sizes, materials used and connections to
building electrical panels. Obtain approval of Architect
before proceeding with the work. AutoCAD background
24000 AVILA ROAD
drawings of this project shall be provided by the Owner.
L. Startup and checkout procedures. Submit detailed procedures to be

used for starting the BMS and for checking operability of
hardware and software.
M. During the warranty period the contractor shall guarantee a two-

hour on-line response, and if required, a four-hour on-site
response time to all owner initiated calls involving defects due
to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship.
A. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
B. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in

this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment,
arrange for shipping control devices to unit manufacturer.

Requirements for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control

components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors.
1. Revise shop drawings to reflect actual installation and

operating sequences.
2. Submit data specified in "Submittals" in final "Record

Documents" form.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit interconnection wiring diagrams complete field

installed systems with identified and numbered, system
components and devices.
2. Submit keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures

indexed for each operator function.
3. Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning

materials recommended, and calibration tolerances.
D. Section 01 78 36 - Warranties.
A. The BMS shall be furnished and installed by the control systems

manufacturer only. The work shall be performed by skilled
technicians under the direction of experienced engineers and
technicians, all of whom shall be factory trained and certified
to be qualified for this work. Contractor shall have a minimum
of ten year’s experience in installing BMS of similar scope.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. BMS contractor shall be responsible for the complete design,

installation startup and proper operation of the BMS and shall
include debugging and proper calibration of each component in the
system.
C. All materials, equipment and software shall be standard

components, regularly manufactured for this and other systems and
not custom designed for this project. All systems and components
shall be thoroughly tested and proves in actual use for two
years.
D. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC

Regulation, Part 15, Section 15, Governing Radio Frequency
Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled.
E. BMS shall comply with UL 916 PAZX and 864 UUKL and be so listed
at the time of bid.
F. BMS vendor shall be capable of providing 24- hour per day, 365-
days peer year same day on- site service for the completed
system, with technicians and engineers capable of providing
routine service and emergency service on all system components.
G. The system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by the

manufacturers' local factory branch office. Bids by dealers,
wholesalers, distributors shall not be acceptable. The controls
contractor shall have factory-trained technicians to provide
instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 4
hours on-site upon receipt of request.
H. At the time of bid, all BMS Application Specific Controllers and

Programmable Equipment Controllers shall be listed as follows:
1. American Society for testing and materials, ASTM
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA
4. Underwriters Laboratory, UL 916 and 864 UDTZ
5. FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156
6. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA
7. Local building codes
I. The Manufacturer of the BMS digital controllers shall provide

documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9001 (Model for
Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation
and Servicing). Product literature provided by the BMS digital
controller manufacturer shall contain the ISO-9001 Certification
Mark from the applicable registrar.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.10 QUALIFICATIONS

experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of
Project.

by manufacturer.

section.
1.13 WARRANTY

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for direct digital

controls.

B. Furnish service and maintenance of control systems for two years

from Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Furnish complete service of controls systems, including

callbacks. Make minimum of 10 complete normal inspections of
approximately 8 hours duration in addition to normal service
calls to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls. Submit written
report after each inspection.
D. Furnish four complete inspections per year, one in each season,

to inspect, calibrate, and adjust controls. Submit written report
after each inspection.
E. Examine unit components semi-monthly. Clean, adjust, and

lubricate equipment.
F. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of

unit, and controls checkout and adjustments. Repair or replace
24000 AVILA ROAD
parts in accordance with manufacturer's operating and maintenance
data. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment.
G. Perform work without removing units from service during building

normal occupied hours.
H. Provide emergency call back service during working hours for this
maintenance period.
I. Maintain locally, near Place of the Work, adequate stock of parts

for replacement or emergency purposes. Have personnel available
to ensure fulfillment of this maintenance service, without
unreasonable loss of time.
J. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel

under supervision of manufacturer or original installer.
K. Do not assign or transfer maintenance service to agent or

subcontractor without prior written consent of Owner.

B. Furnish two printer ink cartridges and cartons of printer paper.
1.16 CONTROLS REQUIREMENTS AND OPERATIONAL GUIDELINES
A. Do not change (rotate) equipment operation based on run time.

Track and display run time, but the lead / lag staging shall be
user defined and easily changed.
B. BMS supplier shall provide method of filtering or dampening high

frequency variation in the output signals of fluid float
measuring devices.
C. Provide positive positioning devices (pilot positioners or

electronic actuators with internal positive positioning feed
back) when more than one device is driven by a common output
signal (dampers). These same positioning devices shall be used
when driving a single device, control valve etc., other than two
position devices (non-modulating devices)
D. Differential pressure switches, shall be used to prove chiller

flow. The switches shall be installed across the evaporator and
condenser bundles. The operating differential pressure with the
chiller running shall be mid-range of the specified differential
pressure switch.
E. Electric power (120V) to the DDC boxes shall be run to the DDC
boxes by the electrical contractor and the boxes served by each
breaker shall be identified in the panel directory. Provide min.
12” clearance in front of DDC controller for service.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. DDC boxes that close the damper to automatically calibrate the
transducer shall have a method of disabling the automatic
feature, manually commanding a calibration, and adjusting the
time between automatic re-calibration of the box.
G. Averaging air temperature sensors shall be used with an accuracy

of +/- 0.3 F over their full range. Use serpentine capillary
type air sensors with the length of tube to calculated at every
1’ long serpentine tube for every one square feet of duct/coil
cross section area. Averaging sensors shall be used for mixed
air and preheat air sensors.
H. Probe type temperature sensors shall be used with an accuracy of

+/- 0.3 F over their full range.
I. Air flow measuring stations shall be furnished and installed by

AHU manufacturer. Duct installed humidifiers shall be the
straight length of duct required between the humidifier
dispersion tube and duct fittings, the controlling limit humidity
sensor, any filter located downstream, and the high limit
humidistat.
J. The DDC system shall include a trend viewing utility that shall
have access to all data base points. It shall be possible to
display trend data in histogram (X-Y plots) format without
exporting the data to another application.
K. The output of the differential pressure transducers used to

control the speed of VSFD driven pumps shall be hard wired to the
DDC controller driving the pump, rather than the output being
passed through the network.
L. The global combination outdoor temperature/humidity sensor used

to supply the DDC input for calculation of enthalpy for control
of AHUs designed for economizer operation shall be a “HyCal”
model accurate to within 1% from 10 to 80% RH.
M. Integrator cards shall be provided for all mechanical,

electrical, and plumbing equipment by BMS supplier that makes all
the MEP equipment parameters available to the BMS system. All
MEP equipment parameters shall be mapped into the DDC system.
N. The AHU outside air cfm shall be a calculated by software point

that can be displayed and alarmed.
O. The BMS graphics shall have a display that lists all AHU
discharge air temperatures, their set points, chilled water valve
positions, outside air cfm, outside air set point, and the
economizer damper positions on a single display. Parameters
outside the user specified control tolerance shall change colors
and flash.
P. For the variable speed heating hot water pumps system, use the
following control sequence. Start the lead secondary pump when
any chiller is required. Modulate to maintain adjustable
differential pressure. When VSFD speed is greater than 95%
24000 AVILA ROAD
(adj.) for 10 minutes, start the second pump and command both
with same required speed. When VFD speed is less than 60% (adj.)
for 15 minutes, stop the second pump.
Q. Fire alarm system shutdown of the AHU and fire/smoke dampers

operation:
1. Upon signal from the fire alarm system the supply, the
return and all interlocked exhaust fans shall stop. All
outside air and relief dampers shall close. Al fire/smoke
and smoke dampers shall also close. The chilled water
valve shall close the preheat/hot water valve shall remain
under control.
2. Upon smoke detection by an area smoke detector zone, all

fire smoke dampers serving from that particular air
handling unit system shall shut down, including air
handlers, exhaust fans, etc. Closing and opening status of
all of the fire smoke dampers shall have indicator light at
the Fire alarm control panel in the facility Operator Room
in the Basement. Upon clearing of smoke and reset by Fire
Alarm system, all the fire/smoke dampers shall be remotely
reset through Fire Alarm Control Panel, located in the
Facility Operator Room. Only upon positive confirmation of
open conditions of all fire-smoke dampers of that
particular AH system, AH unit fan shall start. Fire/smoke
dampers shall close after 15 seconds time delay from the
fan shutdown and shall open 15 seconds prior to fan start.
This is to protect ductwork from possible damage if all
fire-smoke dampers are not fully open or close. Positive
open or close conditions of the fire dampers will confirmed
through two end-switches located at each fire-smoke damper.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Automated Logic.
3. Siemens.
B. All manufacturers shall be Lonworks compatible, provide all

adaption as required.
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. BMS system shall be a direct digital control (DDC) system with

local DDC controllers, unitary controllers, facility network,
building networks, central operator’s workstation, portable
operator interfaces and other equipment.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a
network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers.
C. Network Area Controllers (NAC’s) for distributed system

applications, databases and networking functions.
D. Programmable Equipment Controllers (PEC’s) for control of primary

mechanical systems and distributed system applications.
Controllers shall be fully programmable to create custom control
solutions.
E. Application Specific Controllers (ASC’s) for control of CAV

terminal units, fan coil terminal units, Unit Vent terminal
units, Heat Pump units and other terminal equipment.
F. Graphical User Interface (GUI), which includes the hardware and

software necessary for a user to interface with the control
system and devices.
G. The physical network shall use polarity insensitive twisted pair

wiring and support star, home run, multi-drop, loop, or a mixture
of these wiring topologies. The network shall communicate at a
minimum 119 Kbps.
H. All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall

be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or
controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not
be acceptable.
I. Communication and integration to the chiller control panels and

Variable Speed Drives shall be accomplished utilizing standard
communication interfaces between the equipment manufacturer and
the building management system contractor.
J. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at

the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not
exceed 15 seconds for network connected user interfaces. Maximum
acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point
of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60
seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces.
2.3 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC)
A. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface

between the field control devices, and provide global supervisory
control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC.
Unit may be a integrated into operator work station or a separate
panel. It shall be capable of executing application control
programs to provide:
1. Calendar functions
2. Scheduling
3. Trending
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Alarm monitoring and routing
5. Time synchronization
6. Integration of controller data
7. Network Management functions for all devices
B. The NAC shall provide multiple, concurrent user access to the

system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the
NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC
data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.
C. The NAC shall be capable to support standard Web browser access

via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 2
simultaneous users.
D. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing,

management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities
of equipment or application specific controllers.
1. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any

defined user location whether connected to a local network
or remote via dial-up, telephone connection, or wide-area
network.
2. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type

and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to:
a. To alarm
b. Return to normal
c. To fault
3. Provide for the creation of an unlimited number of alarm

classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of
alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.
4. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class,

object, group, or node.
5. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and

/or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall
be able to reset runtime or event count values with
appropriate password control.
E. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as

user defined:
1. Screen message text
2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients.

Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on:
24000 AVILA ROAD
a. Day of week
b. Time of day
c. Recipient
3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt

of email message
4. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s)
5. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm

printer
F. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a
minimum):
1. Time and date
2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.)
3. Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.)
4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued

acknowledgement.
5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.
G. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any

alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the
user.
H. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a

server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for
review by the user.
I. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by

user defined parameters.
J. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network

failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the
user.
K. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall

be provided and available for review by the user.
L. Data Collection and Storage
1. The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any
property of any object and store this data for future use.
2. The data collection shall be performed by log objects,

resident in the NAC that shall have, at a minimum, the
following configurable properties:
24000 AVILA ROAD
a. Designating the log as interval or deviation.
b. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for

time of day, day of week and the sample collection
interval.
c. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured

for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value.
This value, when reached, shall initiate logging of
the object.
d. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum

number of data stores for the log and to set whether
the log shall stop collecting when full, or rollover
the data on a first-in, first-out basis.
e. Each log shall have the ability to have its data

cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined
event or action.
3. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in

the NAC and the data shall be accessed from a server (if
the system is so configured) or a standard Web Browser.
4. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable

of being manipulated using standard SQL statements.
5. All log data shall be available to the user in the

following data formats:
a. HTML
b. XML
c. Plain Text
d. Comma or tab separated values
6. The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data
either locally (to itself), or remotely to a server or
other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure
the following archiving properties, at a minimum:
a. Archive on time of day
b. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the

buffer (size)
c. Archive when buffer has reached it’s user-defined

capacity
M. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities

performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer
size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or
when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide
24000 AVILA ROAD
the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another
NAC on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide
the following data:
a. Time and date
b. User ID
c. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or

delete objects, commands, etc.
N. The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its

database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-
defined time interval.
1. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently

saved database shall be stored in the NAC. The age of the
most recently saved database is dependent on the user-
defined database save interval.
2. The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML

format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired.
Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format
is supported.
2.4 PROGRAMMABLE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLERS (PEC)
A. Programmable Equipment Controllers (PEC’s) shall be stand-alone,

multi-tasking, real-time digital control processors with an
embedded network database.
B. The PEC’s shall communicate on the peer-to-peer building level

network. Provide a minimum of 72 MB random access memory in each
PEC.
C. The PEC must communicate peer-to-peer with the all of the network
application specific and programmable controllers sharing
alarming, trending, scheduling and totalization information.
D. Programming of the PEC shall be accomplished by using graphical

software that incorporates drag and drop capabilities. The PEC
software database must be able to execute all of the specified
mechanical system controls functions. The programming software
shall be able to bundle software logic to simplify control
sequencing. All values, which make up the PID output value,
shall be readable and modifiable at a workstation or portable
service tool. Each input, output, or calculation result shall be
capable of being shared/bound with any controller or interface
device on the network.
E. PEC’s shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes

defined by the user, to automatically perform calculations and
special control routines.
1. A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or

calculated data from any and all other PEC’s on the
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and

advisories to operator I/O devices.
F. Each PEC shall support firmware upgrades without the need to

replace hardware. The upgrades can be accomplished remotely over
the peer to peer network and/or by visiting each controller.
G. Each PEC shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, which

include communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all components.
The PEC shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any
detected component failures, low battery conditions or repeated
failure to establish communication.
H. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an

orderly shutdown of all PEC’s to prevent the loss of database or
operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be
incorporated for all critical controller configuration data and
battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock
and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours.
1. Upon restoration of normal power, the PEC shall

automatically resume full operation without manual
intervention.
2. All PEC’s control programming and databases must be stored

in Flash memory, therefore eliminating data loss, downtime
and re-load time.
I. Provide a separate PEC for each AHU or other HVAC system. All
system points shall reside on a single controller.
J. Historical data collection utilities shall be provided to

manually or automatically sample and store system data for
selected points. Any point, physical or calculated may be
designated for trending. Any point, regardless of physical
location in the network, may be collected and stored. Two methods
of collection shall be allowed either by a pre-defined time
interval or upon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals
of l minute to 7 days shall be provided. The PEC shall have a
dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data. All trend data shall
be available for transfer to a Workstation without manual
intervention.
2.5 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (ASC)
A. Each Application Specific Controller (ASC) shall operate as a

stand-alone compliant controller capable of performing its
specified control responsibilities independent of other
controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a minimum 10-BIT
microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, real time
digital control processor.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Network access shall be accomplished at the ASC room sensor or
the ASC. System node access shall be available from connecting
to the room sensor jack. Systems that do not have a system
access jack from the room sensor shall provide a dedicated
network jack next to each room sensor.
C. Controllers shall include all inputs and outputs necessary to

perform the specified control sequences. Analog and digital
outputs shall be industry standard signals such as 0-10V and 3-
point floating control allowing for interface to a variety of
industry standard modulating actuators. The ASC inputs and
outputs shall consist of industry standards types. Inputs shall
be electrically isolated from outputs, communications and power.
All inputs shall be provided with an auto-calibrate function to
eliminate sensing errors.
D. All controller sequences and operation shall provide closed loop

control of the intended application. Closing control loops over
the network is not acceptable.
E. The ASC must be mounted remotely from the room sensor. ASC’s,
that are wall mounted with integral room sensors, are not
acceptable.
F. The control program shall reside in the ASC. The application

program configuration information shall be stored in non-
volatile memory with no battery back up.
G. After a power failure the ASC must run the control application
using the current setpoints and configuration.
2.6 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE WORKSTATION HARDWARE (DESKTOP)
A. The desktop computer shall be an Intel Pentium IV based computer

(minimum processing speed of 2.5 GHz with 1000 MB RAM and a 250-
gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a 32X CD-ROM
drive, 3.5” floppy drive, a 100 MB Zip drive, 2-parallel ports,
2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A minimum 19”, 28-
dot pitch SVGA (1024 x 768) color monitor with a minimum 80 Hz
refresh rate shall also be included. Locate workstation as shown
on plans.
B. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type

with a minimum 600 x 600-dpi resolution and rated for 8 PPM print
speed minimum.
C. Provide a separate color printer for printing of dynamic trend

graph report, Excel reports, graphics and any other screen
displays.
2.7 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE WORKSTATION HARDWARE (LAPTOP COMPUTER)
A. The laptop computer shall consist of an Intel Pentium IV based

laptop computer (minimum processing speed of 2.0 GHZ with 1000 MB
RAM and a 40 -gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a
CD-ROM drive, a 3.5” floppy drive and appropriate connectors and
24000 AVILA ROAD
cables for communication connection to the NAC, system
controllers, Ethernet and BACnet network.
2.8 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE (GUI)
A. Operator workstations must be capable of supporting any compliant

product. The operator shall not be able to distinguish the DDC
points from different manufacturers when commanding, monitoring
points or acknowledging alarms.
B. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that

allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. The
GUI software shall run on a Windows 2000 XP operating system.
The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel, and
other Windows based software packages, while concurrently
annunciating on-line BMS alarms and monitoring information. If
the software is unable to display several different types of
displays at the same time, the BMS contractor shall provide at
least 2 operator workstations at location specified.
C. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the

following graphical features and functions:
1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing

package capable of generating a GIF, BMP, or JPG file
format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats shall not
be acceptable. In addition to, or in lieu of a graphic
background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned
pictures.
2. A gallery of HVAC and automation symbols shall be provided

including fans, valves, motors, chillers, AHU systems,
standard ductwork diagrams and symbols. The user shall
have the ability to add custom symbols to the gallery as
required.
3. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain

objects for text, real-time values, animation, color
spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links,
schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to
other graphic screens.
4. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object

shall be configurable for assignment to a layer. A minimum
of six layers shall be supported.
5. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules,

calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a
graphical manner.
a. Schedule times shall be adjusted using a graphical

slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the
operator.
b. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar,

without requiring any keyboard entry from the
24000 AVILA ROAD
operator.
6. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by

mouse command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall
be required.
7. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be

done by mouse command using a graphical slider to adjust
the value. No entry of text shall be required.
D. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the

operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password
access:
1. Create, delete or modify control strategies.
2. Add/delete objects to the system.
3. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop

parameters.
4. Enable or disable control strategies.
5. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a

printer.
6. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state.
7. Select points to be trended over a period of time and

initiate the recording of values automatically.
E. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system

to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system.
On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall
provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional
help information shall be available through the use of hypertext.
All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format.
F. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a

user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete
data. System security shall be selectable for each operator.
The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords
and security levels for all other operators. Each operator
password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for
viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen
editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged
off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected.
This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All
system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.
G. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the

operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network
connections, building management panels, and controllers. The
failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.
24000 AVILA ROAD
H. The system shall be provided with a dedicated alarm window or
console. This window shall notify the operator of an alarm
condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm
and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be
enabled or disabled by the system administrator.
1. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm

notification window shall supersede all other windows on
the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or
closed by the operator. This window shall notify the
operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm
notification windows or banners that can be minimized or
closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.
2.9 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS
A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of

clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™
or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software
(to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client
machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be
acceptable.
B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and
system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Web
page access and control shall be from system Network Area
Controllers, not from the Workstation. This prevents the problem
of no access to Web pages if the Workstation is turned off.
C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in
terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide
the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical
User Interface. Systems that require different views or that
require different means of interacting with objects such as
schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. The browser shall
include background refresh software to all real-time updates
without use of a refresh button. No additional software shall be
required at the remote Internet location other than a standard
web browser.
D. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following

functions:
1. User log-on identification and password shall be required.

If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page
shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and
encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall
be implemented.
2. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same

screens used for the Web browser client. Any animated
graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported
by the Web browser interface.
3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system

graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web
24000 AVILA ROAD
page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look
or format.
4. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network

Area Controller (NAC), without requiring any graphics to be
stored on the client machine. Systems that require
graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.
5. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update

automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the
Web page.
6. User’s shall have administrator-defined access privileges.

Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall
be able to perform the following:
a. Modify common application objects, such as schedules,

calendars, and set points in a graphical manner.
Schedule times shall be adjusted using a graphical
slider, without requiring any keyboard entry from the
operator. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical
calendar, without requiring any keyboard entry from
the operator.
b. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be

done by right-clicking the selected object and
selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up
menu. No entry of text shall be required.
c. View logs and charts
d. View and acknowledge alarms
7. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s

(as determined by the log-on user identification) home
page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just
their defined home page. From the home page, links to
other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if
allowed by the system administrator.
8. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support

hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on
Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator
(URL) for the desired link.
2.10 NETWORK MANAGEMENT
A. The Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall provide network

management of all networks. These networks include BACnet and
the management peer-to-peer building and floor levels of network
communication.
B. Network management shall include the following services: device

identification, device installation, device configuration, device
diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable binding.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. The Network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to
identify devices on the network, to reset devices, and to view
health and status counters within devices.
D. The network management database shall be resident in the Network

Area Controller (NAC), ensuring that anyone with proper
authorization has access to the network management database at
all times. Systems employing network management databases that
are not resident, at all times, and within the control system
shall not be accepted.
2.11 FIELD DEVICES
A. Provide automatic control valves, automatic control dampers,

thermostats, clocks, sensors, controllers, and other components
as required for complete installation. Except as otherwise
indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard control system
components as indicated by published product information,
designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Temperature Sensors
1. General: Provide platinum thermistor type duct, outside

air, duct averaging, remote probe, and immersion
temperature sensors with sensing elements and signal
transmitters. All sensors of a particular category shall be
of the same type manufacturer and shall have an
interchangeability of +0.1% at the reference temperature.
Sensors requiring field calibration are not acceptable.
Linearizing, ranging and resistance change versus
temperature curve interpretations, where required, shall be
made through software. Provide temperature transducers to
provide a 4-20 ma linear output corresponding to
temperature. Sensor shall be factory-calibrated and
provided with zero and span trimmers for output adjustment.
Overall system accuracy, including errors associated with
the sensor, lead wire and A to D conversion shall be
+0.5oF.
2. Duct Sensors: Provide flanged or threaded probe sensors

designed for duct mounting. Sensor shall be encapsulated
in a 12” long, probe. Sensors shall include junction box
for terminating sensor wiring and lagging protrusion where
installed in externally insulated ducts.
3. Immersion Sensors: Provide Immersion sensors with threaded

fitting for direct installation in a thermowell. The probe
shall be encapsulated in a stainless steel jacket and shall
be installed in a thermowell suitable for installation in a
threaded fitting. Sensors shall include a suitable
junction box for terminating sensor wiring. Thermowells
shall have pressure and temperature ratings suitable for
their application. Wells for insulated piping shall have a
2-1/2” lagging protrusion.
4. Averaging Sensors: Provide extended flexible probe
24000 AVILA ROAD
averaging sensors for coil discharge temperature
applications. Sensor probes shall be a minimum of 16’ long
and shall consist of multiple temperature sensors equally
spaced along the probe and wired to provide average
temperature sensing. Probe casing shall totally
encapsulate and waterproof the sensors and shall be
nominal 3/8” OD bendable steel. Sensors shall include a
suitable junction box for terminating sensor wiring.
5. Remote Probe Sensors: Provide remote probe sensors with

sensing elements encapsulated in a nominal 2” steel sheath
suitable for return air or strap-on mounting. Sensors
shall include a nominal 3’ lead section and a suitable
junction box for terminating sensor wiring.
6. Outside Air Sensors: Provide shielded, weatherproof

outside air sensors with sensing elements encapsulated in a
nominal 2” steel sheath suitable for outdoor applications.
Sensors shall include a waterproof junction box or conduit
body for terminating sensor wiring and a removable sun
shield.
7. Temperature Sensors: Temperature sensors shall be linear

precision elements with ranges appropriate for each
specific application. All ASC room sensors shall provide
for direct connection and access to the ACS network.
8. Space (room) sensors shall be available with setpoint

adjustment and override switch. Space sensor shall have a
portable service tool jack to allow communication with the
system. Digital room sensors shall have LCD display, day /
night override button, and set point slide adjustment
override options. The set point slide adjustment shall
have software limits by the automation system to limit the
amount of temperature setpoint adjustment.
9. Duct mounted averaging sensors shall utilize a sensing

element incorporated in a copper capillary with a minimum
length of 20 feet. The sensor shall be installed according
to manufacture recommendation and looped and fastened at a
minimum of every 36 inches.
10. Sunshields shall be provided for outside air sensors.
11. Thermo-wells for all immersion sensors shall be stainless

steel or brass as required for the application.
C. Humidity Sensors: Humidity sensors shall be of the solid-state

type using a capacitance-sensing element. The sensor shall vary
the output voltage with a change in relative humidity. Room
humidity sensors shall have a minimum range of 10% to 90% 5%.
Supply air humidity sensors shall have a range of 10% to 90%  5%.
D. Air Velocity Sensors: The sensor shall use differential pressure

to determine airflow rate and have repeatability within 1% of
24000 AVILA ROAD
reading and an accuracy of  5% of range. The velocity range
shall be from 0 to 3250 FPM. Brandt Instruments, Inc. model DSK
9000 Series or equal.
E. Pressure Sensors:
1. General: Provide pressure sensors and transducers for

measuring converting air, water and steam differential and
static pressures to analog output signals. Sensor /
transducer accuracy shall be +1.0% with linearity of +0.1%,
repeatability of +0.1% and hysteresis not exceeding +0.1%.
Transducers shall be factory-calibrated and shall have zero
and span trimmers for field calibration. Transducers shall
be provided with steel enclosures for panel mounting or a
NEMA 1 enclosure for remote mounting, direct or reverse
acting output, as required. Range shall be selected to
match the medium being monitored.
2. Water Pressure Transducers: Transducers shall include an

adjustable (0-10 seconds) electronic averaging circuit to
provide electronic snubbing of rapidly fluctuating
monitored media.
3. The differential pressure sensor shall be temperature

compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change
in differential pressure. Sensing range shall be suitable
for the application with linearity of 1.5% of full scale
and offset of less than 1% of full scale. Sensor shall be
capable of withstanding up to 150% of rated pressure
without damage.
F. CO2: The CO2 sensor shall be capable of monitoring CO2. The

sensor shall be shall produce a linear 0-10 VDC signal. The CO2
Sensor shall be provided in wall or duct mounted models, as shown
on the plans.
G. Adjustable Current Sensing Relays:
1. Use adjustable current sensing relays on motors to sense

loading and convert that data for status run of the fan,
pump, etc.
H. Switches and Thermostats:
1. The BMS Contractor shall furnish all electric relays and

coordinate with the supplier of magnetic starters for
auxiliary contact requirements. All electric control
devices shall be of a type to meet current, voltage, and
switching requirement of their particular application.
Relays shall be provided with 24 VAC coils and contacts
shall be rated at 10 amps minimum.
2. Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be

supplied by others.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Low Temperature Detection Thermostats: Shall be the manual
reset type. The thermostat shall operate in response to
the coldest one-foot length of the 20-foot sensing element,
regardless of the temperatures at other parts of the
element. The element shall be properly supported to cover
the entire downstream side of the coil with a minimum of
three loops. Separate thermostats shall be provided for
each 25 square feet of coil face area or fraction thereof.
4. Differential Pressure Switches: Pressure differential

switches shall have SPDT changeover contact, switching at
an adjustable differential pressure setpoint.
5. Current Sensing Relays: Motor status indications, where

shown on the plans, shall be provided via current sensing
relays. The switch output contact shall be rated for 30
VDC, .15 amps.
6. Flow Switches: Motor status indications, where shown on the

plans, shall be provided via flow switches. Flow switches
shall be of the paddle type equipped with SPDT contacts to
establish proof of flow.
I. Control Valves and Actuators
1. General: Control Valves up to 4 inches shall be sized for

a 3 to 5 psi pressure drop. Valves shall be packless,
modulating, electrically or magnetically actuated, with a
control rangeability of 100 to 1. These valves shall have
true linear flow characteristics in relationship to valve
opening.
2. ½ inch to 4 inch: Valves shall be equipped with hand

wheel, or manual position mounted dial adjacent to valve,
to allow manual positioning of valve in absence of control
power. (Valves with a rangeability of less than 200 to 1
shall utilize two valves in a 1/3 – 2/3 parallel
arrangement in order to achieve control rangeability).
3. 4 inches to 6 inches: Valves shall be modulating

electrically actuated, 2-way or 3-way as required, with a
rangeability of 50 to 1. Valve body shall be flanged and
shall be equipped with a hand wheel, or manual position
dial mounted adjacent to the valve, to allow manual
positioning of the valve in the absence of control power.
4. Butterfly Valves: 2-way and 3-way butterfly valves shall

be cast iron valve body, with stainless steel stem, and
available with disc seal for bubble-tight shut off.
5. Valve Actuators: Provide two-way and/or three-way valves

with electronic actuators of the type, body material, and
pressure class required for each application... Valve
pressure class and rating shall be selected based on
maximum pressure and temperature in the piping system. All
valves except those in the chiller / cooling tower and
24000 AVILA ROAD
boiler systems shall be electrically operated. Chiller /
cooling tower and boiler valves may be either pneumatic or
electric.
6. Performance: All valves shall conform to the following

minimum standards and selection requirements.
a. Maximum pressure drop at design flow shall be 5 psi.
b. Provide actuators with proper close-off rating for

each individual application.
c. The valve and actuator shall be suitable for

throttling control and tight shutoff against pump
shutoff head. All valves shall be certified by the
Contractor to shutoff bubble tight against full
system pump shutoff head.
d. All valves which operate in sequence with other

valves and dampers shall sequence properly without
overlap. Provide positive positions, oversized
operators, or balanced trim if required for proper
sequence control.
e. Valve schedules submitted for review shall clearly

show shift in operator span for all valves operated
in sequence and shutoff capability for all valves.
7. Valve Types:
a. Two-way Valves: Provide straight through union globe

valves. Valves ½” to 2” in size shall have bronze,
brass, stainless steel or approved corrosion
resistant bodies and screwed ends. Valves 2-1/2” and
larger shall have high-tensile cast iron or cast
steel bodies, bronze stainless steel or approved
corrosion resistant seats, and internal trim,
removable cage-type trim and flanged ends. All valve
stems shall be 316 or 416 stainless steel. Valves
shall be designed to provide equal percentage flow
characteristics at constant pressures with a
rangeability of 30 to 1. Low pressure valves shall
be provided with a renewable composition disc
compound which shall ensure tight seating.
b. Three-way Valves: Provide three-way mixing type

valves. Valves ½” to 2” in size shall have bronze,
brass, stainless steel, or approved corrosion
resistant brass bodies and screwed ends. Valves 2-
1/2” and larger shall have high-tensile cast iron or
cast steel bodies, bronze stainless steel or approved
corrosion resistant seats, and internal trim,
removable cage-type trim and flanged ends. All valve
stems shall be 316 or 416 stainless steel. Valves
shall provide constant system flow rate at all
operating conditions.
24000 AVILA ROAD
c. Butterfly Valves: Where indicated on the Drawings or
required by the Sequence of Control, utilize full lug
butterfly-type control valves rated for the same
operating pressure as the piping system in which such
valves are installed. Valves shall have equal
percentage flow characteristics and bubble-tight
shutoff against either side of the valve when the
flange is removed from the opposite side.
d. Small Valves: Small (3/4” and smaller) heating hot

water and chilled water valves shall be two-way or
three-way or straight-through equal-percentage type
with polished stainless steel stems, spring-loaded
Teflon or rubber packing, and back-seating feature to
allow the valve to be repacked under pressure without
shutting off the system.
8. Electric Actuators: Size to operate with sufficient

reserve power to provide smooth modulating action. Select
operator for full shutoff at maximum pump differential
pressure
a. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear

trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip
spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring
mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for
service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
b. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than 2-1/2

Inches. Size for running torque of 150 inch-pounds
(and breakaway torque of 300 inch-pounds.
c. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than 2-1/2

Inches: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150
inch-pounds.
9. Actuators shall be of the push-pull or rotary type of

modulating, 3-point floating, or 2-position control as
required by the application. The actuator shall use an
overload-proof synchronous motor or an electric motor with
end switches to de-energize the motor at the end of the
stroke limits. Control voltage shall be 24VAC, 0-20VDC, or
4-20ma as required. Actuators shall be available with
spring return to the normal position when required.
Actuators shall have a position indicator for external
indication of damper position. Actuators shall have manual
override capability without disconnecting damper linkage.
10. Electronic activators used for chilled water valves on air

handling units and any modulating dampers should be
positive positioning with internal feedback.
J. Automatic Damper Actuators:
1. Damper Operators; All dampers shall be electrically
24000 AVILA ROAD
operated.
2. Electronic Actuators: Provide fully proportioning

actuators of either the push-pull or rotary type, as
required. Actuator motor shall be of the low voltage
synchronous type and shall be non-overloading at a
continuous stall. Actuators shall be U.L. listed.
3. Selection: Size electronic actuators to operate their

appropriate dampers and valves with sufficient reserve
power to provide smooth modulating or two position action
as specified.
4. CAV Terminal Unit Actuators: Actuators shall be suitable

for use with the terminal unit controllers and dampers
provided for the project. Coordinate provisions for
actuators mounting with the terminal unit manufacturer.
K. Terminal Unit Controllers:
1. Terminal Unit controllers shall be stand alone EEPROM

based, configured to perform the specified sequences of
operation. Controllers shall have integral jacks for
connecting the portable operator’s workstation. Terminal
unit controllers shall operate on a network with minimum
communication rate of 9600 baud. Terminal unit controllers
shall operate independently of other controllers on the
network.
2. Each terminal unit (CAV terminal or fan coil unit) shall

have a dedicated controller mounted directly on the unit.
If higher level controllers are required for terminal unit
controllers, they shall be mounted in panel enclosures
located in electric closets or mechanical equipment rooms.
L. Panel Enclosures:
1. DDC Controllers, network controllers, and similar BMS

equipment located in fan rooms, equipment rooms or
electrical closets, including all necessary auxiliary
modules and power supplies shall be mounted in NEMA 1, 16
gauge welded galvanized steel enclosures with lockable
hinged door, tamper switch and internal maintenance light.
2. Each major control element such as each air handling unit,

the chilled water / condenser water system, the heating
water system, shall have a dedicated DDC panel enclosure
located in it’s mechanical room. Additional points such as
exhaust fan start / stop makeup air unit control points,
lighting I/O points and similar miscellaneous points may
share the DDC controller.
M. Room Thermostats:
1. Each Air Handler and CAV unit shall be provided with a room
thermostat:
24000 AVILA ROAD
- Accuracy: ± 1°F (±0.6°C)
- Operating Range: 35° to 115°F (2° to 46°)
- Range: 55° to 95°F (2° to 30°C)
- Set Point Modes: Independent Heating, Cooling
- Night Setback- Heating, Night Setback-Cooling
2. Each room temperature sensor shall include a terminal jack

integral to the sensor assembly to connect a portable
operator's terminal to control and monitor all hardware and
software points associated with the controller.
N. Water Flow Meters:
1. Turbine Meters.
a. The Sensor shall be accurate to within +1% of actual

flow between a flow velocity of one to 30 feet per
second. Repeatability and linearity should be +1% of
flow. The sensor should send an analog signal to a
local meter panel which provides a 4-20 mA output for
remote sensing. Flow sensor readings shall be
displayed at the local panel in gpm.
b. Each flow element shall be complete with ¼” SAE flare

safety shutoff instrument valves, and a permanent
metal tag showing design flow rates, meter readings
for design flow rates, metered fluid, line size and
tag number, station, or location number.
2. Insertion Flow Meters:
O. Flow meter shall consist of a flow sensor installed in a pipe

saddle or thread-o-let and an analog flow transmitter to provide
an analog signal to the BMS.
P. Flow sensor shall be of stainless steel and nonmetallic wetted

parts and shall be designed for hot tap installation in a 2” NPT
pipe saddle or thread-o-let. A six bladed wheel shall provide a
flow signal to the flow transmitter. The sensor shall be suitable
for pressures to 400 psi and temperatures to 220F.
1. Venturi Flow Meters:
Q. Provide one piece brass or cast iron venturi flow meters, screwed
for 3/4” through 2”, and weld neck for larger sizes. Meters shall
be rated far 300 psi. Unit shall have valve manifold for
connection to flow meter and quick disconnect valves for
calibration.
R. Liquid Level Switches:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Switches shall consist of a SPDT snap acting switch
operated by a sealed float mechanism. Switch body shall be
stainless steel float and arm.
S. Pressure Switches:
1. Differential Pressure Water Flow Switches: Switches shall

be double bellows type differential pressure switches with
stainless steel bellows directly actuating a snap acting
DPDT switch. Switches shall have visible set-point
adjustments. Switches exposed to weather shall be
weatherproof. Switch ranges and setpoints shall be
appropriate to the application.
2. Pressure Switches: Switches shall be bourdon tube operated

with a snap acting switch directly activated by the bourdon
tube. Switches shall have repetitive accuracy of +/- 1% of
the operating range and shall withstand 150% rated
pressure. Switch action shall be adjustable over the
operating pressure range. Switches shall have snap acting
DPDT contacts rated for the application. Switches exposed
to the weather shall be weatherproof.
3. Differential Pressure Air Flow Switches: Diaphragm operated

activating a SPDT snap switch. Diaphragm motion shall be
retrained by a calibrated spring that can be adjusted to
set the required differential set point. Switches shall be
rated for pressures up to 50” WC and shall have 16 gauge
galvanized steel housing.
4. Static Pressure High Limit Switches: Switches shall be duct

mounted and shall consist of a manual reset pressure
sensitive diaphragm operated switch which is adjustable for
positive or negative actuation.
5. Waterflow Switches: Switch shall be snap acting, SPDT

contacts packless sealed tube with switch in isolated
compartment and paddle convertible to suit pipe diameter.
Provide externally adjustable sensitivity to allow
adjustment without removing assembly from the pipe.
T. Current Transformers:
1. Provide current transformers with a 0.5 to 5 amp output and

a panel -mounted plug-in current metering relay. Relay
shall have adjustable setpoint and be capable of operating
either a momentary or latched output with SPDT contacts
rated at 10 amps at 25 VAC.
U. Smoke Detectors:
1. Smoke Detectors shall be furnished by Division 16 and

installed by Division 15.
2. Fire alarm functions shall be wired by Division 16.
24000 AVILA ROAD
V. Photoelectric Relays:
1. Conform to UL 773A.
2. Type: Solid-state, with SPDT dry contacts rated to operate

relay or contactor coils to which connected.
3. Time delay to prevent false operation.
4. Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to

high temperatures and equipped with sun-glare shield.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Fisher Pierce.
b. Intermatic, Inc.
c. Paragon Electric Co, Inc.
d. Rhodes: MH Rhodes, Inc. (Ripley Photocontrols).
e. Tork, Inc.
2.12 OPERATOR WORKSTATION
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dell Corporation.
2. Compaq Corporation.
B. Furnish each operator workstation consisting of the following:
C. Personal Computer: IBM PC compatible with sufficient memory and

hard drive storage to support graphics, reports, and
communication requirements. Furnish with the following minimum
configuration requirements:
1. Processor: Pentium 4 with HT Technology, 3.2 GHz.
2. Hard Drive: 160 Gigabyte.
3. Memory: 2 Gigabyte DDR SDRAM.
4. Drive 1: 48x CD-ROM 1.44 Megabyte 3.5 inch (89 mm).
5. Drive 2: 48x CD-ROM floppy drive.
6. Modem: Auto-dial telephone, 56,000 baud.
7. Ports: Required serial, parallel, network communications,

USB, and cables for proper system operation.
24000 AVILA ROAD
8. Expansion Slots: 1 used for LAN card, 1 available.
9. LAN Card: EtherNet - RJ45 (100 base-T minimum).
10. Mouse: two-button optical type wireless.
11. Keyboard: 104 key.
D. Monitor: Minimum of 17 inch (432 mm) color, flat panel display.
E. Operating System: Windows XP.
F. Printer: Furnish each operator workstation with color ink jet

printer and associated cables. Printer capable of minimum of 14
pages per minute (PPM) operation and compatible with standard
parallel or USB communications or network capable.
G. System Support: Minimum ten (10) work stations connected to

multi-user, multi-tasking environment with concurrent capability
to:
1. Access DDC network.
2. Access or control same control unit.
3. Access or modify same control unit database.
4. Archive data, alarms, and network actions to hard disk

regardless of what application programs are being currently
executed.
5. Develop and edit database.
6. Implement and tune DDC control.
7. Develop graphics.
8. Control facility.
2.13 PORTABLE OPERATOR'S TERMINAL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dell Corporation.
2. Compaq Corporation.
B. Furnish device capable of accessing system data and capable of

being connected to any point on system network or connected
directly to any controller for programming, set-up, and
troubleshooting. Portable Operators Terminal uses Read (Initiate)
and Write (Execute) Services as defined in Clauses 15.5 and 15.8,
respectively, of ASHRAE Standard 135, to communicate with BACnet
24000 AVILA ROAD
objects in internetwork. Objects supported include: Analog input,
analog output, analog value, binary input, binary output, binary
value, device.
C. Furnish IBM compatible notebook-style PC including software and

hardware required with:
1. Processor: Pentium 4, with HT technology 3.4 GHz.
2. Hard Drive: 60 Gigabyte.
3. Memory: 2 Gigabyte DDR SDRAM.
4. Drive 1: 24x CD Burner, DVD combination.
5. Wireless Card: internal 2100 (802.11 g).
6. Ports: Required serial, parallel, network communications,

USB, and cables for proper system operation.
7. LAN Card: EtherNet - RJ45 (100 base-T minimum).
8. Mouse: two-button optical type wireless.
9. Keyboard: integral to PC.
10. Screen: 15 inch UXGA TFT display, color.
11. Operating System: Windows XP.
12. Battery: 12 cell lithium ion.
2.14 CONTROL UNITS
A. Units: Modular in design and consisting of processor board with

programmable RAM memory, local operator access and display panel,
and integral interface equipment.
B. Battery Backup: For minimum of 100 hours for complete system

including RAM without interruption, with automatic battery
charger.
C. Control Units Functions:
1. Monitor or control each input/output point.
2. Completely independent with hardware clock/calendar and

software to maintain control independently.
3. Acquire, process, and transfer information to operator

station or other control units on network.
4. Accept, process, and execute commands from other control

unit's or devices or operator stations.
24000 AVILA ROAD
5. Access both data base and control functions simultaneously.
6. Record, evaluate, and report changes of state or value

occurring among associated points. Continue to perform
associated control functions regardless of status of
network.
7. Perform in stand-alone mode:
a. Start/stop.
b. Duty cycling.
c. Automatic Temperature Control.
d. Demand control via a sliding window, predictive

algorithm.
e. Event initiated control.
f. Calculated point.
g. Scanning and alarm processing.
h. Full direct digital control.
i. Trend logging.
j. Global communications.
k. Maintenance scheduling.
D. Global Communications:
1. Broadcast point data onto network, making information

available to other system controls units.
2. Transmit input/output points onto network for use by other

control units and use data from other control units.
E. Input/output Capability:
1. Discrete/digital input (contact status).
2. Discrete/digital output.
3. Analog input.
4. Analog output.
5. Pulse input (5 pulses/second).
6. Pulse output (0-655 seconds in duration with 0.01-second

resolution).
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Monitor, control, or address data points. Include analog inputs,
analog outputs, pulse inputs, pulse outputs and discrete
inputs/outputs. Furnish control units with minimum 30 percent
spare capacity.
G. Point Scanning: Set scan or execution speed of each point to

operator selected time from 1 to 250 seconds.
H. Upload/Download Capability: Download from or upload to operator

station. Upload/Download time for entire control unit database
maximum 10 seconds on hard-wired LAN or 60 seconds over voice
grade phone lines.
I. Test Mode Operation: Place input/output points in test mode to

allow testing and developing of control algorithms on line
without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. In
test mode:
1. Inhibit scanning and calculation of input points. Issue

manual control to input points (set analog or digital input
point to operator determined test value) from workstation.
2. Control output points but change only database state or

value; leave external field hardware unchanged.
3. Enable control-actions on output points but change only

data base state or value.
24000 AVILA ROAD
J. Local display and adjustment panel: Portable or integral to
control-unit containing digital display, and numerical keyboard.
Display and adjust:
1. Input/output point information and status.
2. Controller set points.
3. Controller tuning constants.
4. Program execution times.
5. High and low limit values.
6. Limit differential.
7. Set/display date and time.
8. Control outputs connected to the network.
9. Automatic control outputs.
10. Perform control unit diagnostic testing.
K. Points in "Test" mode.
2.15 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LAN):
A. Furnish communication between control units over local area

network (LAN).
B. LAN Capacity: Not less than 60 stations or nodes.
C. Break in Communication Path: Alarm and automatically initiate LAN

reconfiguration.
D. LAN Data Speed: Minimum 19.2 Kb.
E. Communication Techniques: Allow interface into network by

multiple operation stations and by auto-answer/auto-dial modems.
Support communication over telephone lines utilizing modems.
F. Transmission Median: Fiber optic or single pair of solid 24 gauge

twisted, shielded copper cable.
G. Network Support: Time for global point to be received by any

station, less than 3 seconds. Furnish automatic reconfiguration
when station is added or lost. In event transmission cable is
cut, reconfigure two sections with no disruption to system's
operation, without operator intervention.
2.16 OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Input/output Capability From Operator Station:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Request display of current values or status in tabular or
graphic format.
2. Command selected equipment to specified state.
3. Initiate logs and reports.
4. Change analog limits.
5. Add, delete, or change points within each control unit or

application routine.
6. Change point input/output descriptors, status, alarm

descriptors, and unit descriptors.
7. Add new control units to system.
8. Modify and set up maintenance scheduling parameters.
9. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of color

graphic displays.
10. Automatically archive select data even when running third

party software.
11. Capability to sort and extract data from archived files and
to generate custom reports.
12. Support two printer operations.
13. Alarm printer: Print alarms, operator acknowledgments,

action messages, system alarms, operator sign-on and sign-
off.
14. Data printer: Print reports, page prints, and data base
prints.
15. Select daily, weekly or monthly as scheduled frequency to

synchronize time and date in digital control units.
Accommodate daylight savings time adjustments.
16. Print selected control unit database.
B. Operator System Access: Via software password with minimum 30

access levels at work station and minimum 4 access levels at each
control unit.
C. Data Base Creation and Support: Use standard procedures for

changes. Control unit automatically checks workstation data base
files upon connection and verify data base match. Include the
following minimum capabilities:
1. Add and delete points.
2. Modify point parameters.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Change, add, or delete English language descriptors.
4. Add, modify, or delete alarm limits.
5. Add, modify, or delete points in start/stop programs, trend

logs, and other items.
6. Create custom relationship between points.
7. Create or modify DDC loops and parameters.
8. Create or modify override parameters.
9. Add, modify, and delete applications programs.
10. Add, delete, develop, or modify dynamic color graphic

displays.
D. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays:
1. Utilizes custom symbols or system supported library of

symbols.
2. Sixteen (16) colors.
3. Sixty (60) outputs of real-time live dynamic data for each

graphic.
4. Dynamic graphic data.
5. 1,000 separate graphic pages.
6. Modify graphic screen refresh rate between 1 and 60

seconds.
E. Operator Station:
1. Accept data from LAN as needed without scanning entire

network for updated point data.
2. Interrogate LAN for updated point data when requested.
3. Allow operator command of devices.
4. Allow operator to place specific control units in or out of

service.
5. Allow parameter editing of control units.
6. Store duplicate data base for every control unit and allow
down loading while system is on line.
7. Control or modify specific programs.
8. Develop, store and modify dynamic color graphics.
24000 AVILA ROAD
9. Data archiving of assigned points and support overlay
graphing of this data using up to four (4) variables.
F. Alarm Processing:
1. Off normal condition: Cause alarm and appropriate message,

including time, system, point descriptor, and alarm
condition. Select alarm state or value and alarms causing
automatic dial-out.
2. Critical alarm or change-of-state: Display message, stored

on disk for review and sort, or print.
3. Print on line changeable message, up to 60 characters in

length, for each alarm point specified.
4. Display alarm reports on video. Display multiple alarms in

order of occurrence.
5. Define time delay for equipment start-up or shutdown.
6. Allow unique routing of specific alarms.
7. Operator specifies when alarm requires acknowledgment.
8. Continue to indicate unacknowledged alarms after return to

normal.
9. Alarm notification:
10. Print automatically.
11. Display indicating alarm condition.
12. Selectable audible alarm indication.
G. Event Processing: Automatically initiate commands, user defined

messages, take specific control actions or change control
strategy and application programs resulting from event condition.
Event condition may be value crossing operator defined limit,
change of state, specified state, or alarm occurrence or return
to normal.
H. Automatic Restart: Automatically start field equipment on

restoration of power. Furnish time delay between individual
equipment restart and time of day start/stop.
I. Messages:
1. Automatically display or print user-defined message

subsequent to occurrence of selected events.
2. Compose, change, or delete message.
3. Display or log message at any time.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Assign any message to event.
J. Reports:
1. Manually requested with time and date.
2. Long term data archiving to hard disk.
3. Automatic directives to download to transportable media

including floppy diskettes for storage.
4. Data selection methods to include data base search and

manipulation.
5. Data extraction with mathematical manipulation.
6. Data reports to allow development of XY curve plotting,

tabular reports (both statistical and summary), and multi-
point timed based plots with not less than four (4)
variables displayed.
7. Generating reports either normally at operator direction,

or automatically under workstation direction.
8. Either manually display or print reports. Automatically

print reports on daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or
scheduled basis.
9. Include capability for statistical data manipulation and

extraction.
10. Capability to generate four types of reports: Statistical

detail reports, summary reports, trend graphic plots, x-y
graphic plots.
K. Parameter Save/Restore: Store most current operating system,

parameter changes, and modifications on disk or diskette.
L. Data Collection:
1. Automatically collect and store in disk files.
2. Daily electrical energy consumption, peak demand, and time

of peak demand for up to electrical meters over 2-year
period.
3. Daily consumption for up to 30 meters over a 2 year period.
4. Daily billable electrical energy consumption and time for

up to 1024 zones over a 10 year period.
5. Archiving of stored data for use with system supplied

custom reports.
24000 AVILA ROAD
M. Graphic Display: Support graphic development on work station with
software features:
1. Page linking.
2. Generate, store, and retrieve library symbols.
3. Single or double height characters.
4. Sixty (60) dynamic points of data for each graphic page.
5. Pixel level resolution.
6. Animated graphics for discrete points.
7. Analog bar graphs.
8. Display real time value of each input or output line

diagram fashion.
N. Maintenance Management:
1. Run time monitoring, for each point.
2. Maintenance scheduling targets with automatic annunciation,

scheduling and shutdown.
3. Equipment safety targets.
4. Display of maintenance material and estimated labor.
5. Target point reset, for each point.
O. Advisories:
1. Summary containing status of points in locked out

condition.
2. Continuous operational or not operational report of

interrogation of system hardware and programmable control
units for failure.
3. Report of power failure detection, time and date.
4. Report of communication failure with operator device, field

interface unit, point and programmable control unit.
2.17 LOAD CONTROL PROGRAMS
A. General: Support inch-pounds and S.I. metric units of

measurement.
B. Demand Limiting:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Monitor total power consumption for each power meter and
shed associated loads automatically to reduce power
consumption to an operator set maximum demand level.
2. Input: Pulse count from incoming power meter connected to

pulse accumulator in control unit.
3. Forecast demand (kW): Predicted by sliding window method.
4. Automatically shed loads throughout the demand interval

selecting loads with independently adjustable on and off
time of between one and 255 minutes.
5. Demand Target: Minimum of 3 for each demand meter; change

targets based upon (1) time, (2) status of pre-selected
points, or (3) temperature.
6. Load: Assign load shed priority, minimum "ON" time and

maximum "OFF" time.
7. Limits: Include control band (upper and lower limits).
8. Output advisory when loads are not available to satisfy

required shed quantity, advise shed requirements and
requiring operator acknowledgment.
C. Duty Cycling:
1. Periodically stop and start loads, based on space

temperature, and according to various On/Off patterns.
2. Modify off portion of cycle based on operator specified

comfort parameters. Maintain total cycle time by increasing
on portion of cycle by equal quantity off portion is
reduced.
3. Set and modify following parameters for each individual

load.
4. Minimum and maximum off time.
5. On/Off time in one-minute increments.
6. Time period from beginning of interval until cycling of

load.
7. Manually override the DDC program and place a load in an On

or Off state.
8. Cooling Target Temperature and Differential.
9. Heating Target Temperature and Differential.
10. Cycle off adjustment.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Automatic Time Scheduling:
1. Self-contained programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling

of building loads.
2. Support up to seven (7) normal day schedules, seven (7)

"special day" schedules and two (2) temporary day
schedules.
3. Special day’s schedule supporting up to 30 unique

date/duration combinations.
4. Number of loads assigned to time program; with each load

having individual time program.
5. Each load assigned at least 16 control actions for each day

with 1 minute resolution.
6. Furnish the following time schedule operations:
a. Start.
b. Optimized Start.
c. Stop.
d. Optimized Stop.
e. Cycle.
f. Optimized Cycle.
7. Capable of specifying minimum of 30 holiday periods up to

100 days in length for the year.
8. Create temporary schedules.
9. Broadcast temporary "special day" date and duration.
E. Start/Stop Time Optimization:
1. Perform optimized start/stop as function of outside

conditions, inside conditions, or both.
2. Adaptive and self-tuning, adjusting to changing conditions

unattended.
3. For each point under control, establish and modify:
a. Occupancy period.
b. Desired temperature at beginning of occupancy period.
c. Desired temperature at end of occupancy period.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Night Setback/Setup Program: Reduce heating space temperature set
point or raise cooling space temperature set-point during
unoccupied hours; in conjunction with scheduled start/stop and
optimum start/stop programs.
G. Calculated Points: Define calculations and totals computed from

monitored points (analog/digital points), constants, or other
calculated points.
1. Employ arithmetic, algebraic, Boolean, and special function

operations.
2. Treat calculated values like any other analog value; use

for any function where a "hard wired point" might be used.
H. Event Initiated Programming: Any data point capable of initiating

event, causing series of controls in a sequence.
1. Define time interval between each control action between 0

to 3600 seconds.
2. Output may be analog value.
3. Provide for "skip" logic.
4. Verify completion of one action before proceeding to next

action. When not verified, program capable of skipping to
next action.
I. Direct Digital Control: Furnish with each control unit Direct

Digital Control software so operator is capable of customizing
control strategies and sequences of operation by defining
appropriate control loop algorithms and choosing optimum loop
parameters.
1. Control loops: Defined using "modules" are analogous to

standard control devices.
2. Output: Paired or individual digital outputs for pulse

width modulation, and analog outputs.
3. Firmware:
a. PID with analog or pulse-width modulation output.
b. Floating control with pulse-width modulated outputs.
c. Two-position control.
d. Primary and secondary reset schedule selector.
e. Hi/Low signal selector.
f. Single pole double-throw relay.
24000 AVILA ROAD
g. Single pole double throw time delay relay with delay
before break, delay before make and interval time
capabilities.
1) Direct Digital Control Loop: downloaded upon

creation or on operator request. On sensor
failure, program executes user defined failsafe
output.
2) Display: Value or state of each of lines

interconnecting ddc modules.
J. Fine Tuning Direct Digital Control PID or floating loops:
1. Display information:
a. Control loop being tuned.
b. Input (process) variable.
c. Output (control) variable.
d. Set-point of loop.
e. Proportional band.
f. Integral (reset) Interval.
g. Derivative (rate) Interval.
1) Display Format: graphic, with automatic scaling;

with input and output variable superimposed on
graph of "time" versus "variable".
K. Trend logging:
1. Each control unit capable of storing samples of control

unit's data points.
2. Update file continuously at operator assigned intervals.
3. Automatically initiate upload requests and then stores data

on hard disk.
4. Time synchronize sampling at operator specified times and

intervals with sample resolution of one minute.
5. Co-ordinate sampling with specified on/off point- state.
6. Display trend samples on workstation in graphic format.

Automatically scale trend graph with minimum 60 samples of
data in plot of time versus data.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.18 HVAC CONTROL PROGRAMS
A. General:
1. Support Inch-pounds and S.I. metric units of measurement.
2. Identify each HVAC Control system.
B. Optimal Run Time:
1. Control start-up and shutdown times of HVAC equipment for

both heating and cooling.
2. Base on occupancy schedules, outside air temperature,

seasonal requirements, and interior room mass temperature.
3. Start-up systems by using outside air temperature, room

mass temperatures, and adaptive model prediction for how
long building takes to warm up or cool down under different
conditions.
4. Use outside air temperature to determine early shut down

with ventilation override.
5. Analyze multiple building mass sensors to determine

seasonal mode and worse case condition for each day.
6. Operator commands:
a. Define term schedule.
b. Add/delete fan status point.
c. Add/delete outside air temperature point.
d. Add/delete mass temperature point.
e. Define heating/cooling parameters.
f. Define mass sensor heating/cooling parameters.
g. Lock/unlock program.
h. Request optimal run-time control summary.
i. Request optimal run-time mass temperature summary.
j. Request HVAC point summary.
k. Request HVAC saving profile summary.
7. Control Summary:
a. HVAC Control system begin/end status.
24000 AVILA ROAD
b. Optimal run time lock/unlock control status.
c. Heating/cooling mode status.
d. Optimal run time schedule.
e. Start/Stop times.
f. Selected mass temperature point ID.
g. Optimal run-time system normal start-times.
h. Occupancy and vacancy times.
i. Optimal run time system heating/cooling mode

parameters.
8. Mass temperature summary:
a. Mass temperature point type and ID.
b. Desired and current mass temperature values.
c. Calculated warm-up/cool-down time for each mass

temperature.
d. Heating/cooling season limits.
e. Break point temperature for cooling mode analysis.
9. HVAC point summary:
a. Control system identifier and status.
b. Point ID and status.
c. Outside air temperature point ID and status.
d. Mass temperature point ID and status.
e. Calculated optimal start and stop times.
f. Period start.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Supply Air Reset:
1. Monitor heating and cooling loads in building spaces,

terminal reheat systems, both hot deck and cold deck
temperatures on dual duct and multizone systems, single
zone unit discharge temperatures.
2. Adjust discharge temperatures to most energy efficient

levels satisfying measured load by:
a. Raising cooling temperatures to highest possible

value.
b. Reducing heating temperatures to lowest possible

level.
a. Add/delete fan status point.
b. Lock/unlock program.
c. Request HVAC point summary.
d. Add/Delete discharge controller point.
e. Define discharge controller parameters.
f. Add/delete air flow rate.
g. Define space load and load parameters.
h. Request space load summary.
4. Control summary:
a. HVAC control system status (begin/end).
b. Supply air reset system status.
c. Optimal run time system status.
d. Heating and cooling loop.
e. High/low limits.
f. Deadband.
g. Response timer.
h. Reset times.
5. Space load summary:
a. HVAC system status.
24000 AVILA ROAD
b. Optimal run time status.
c. Heating/cooling loop status.
d. Space load point ID.
e. Current space load point value.
f. Control heat/cool limited.
g. Gain factor.
h. Calculated reset values.
i. Fan status point ID and status.
j. Control discharge temperature point ID and status.
k. Space load point ID and status.
l. Airflow rate point ID and status.
D. Enthalpy Switchover:
1. Calculate outside and return air enthalpy using measured

temperature and relative humidity; determine energy
expended and control outside and return air dampers.
a. Add/delete fan status point.
b. Add/delete outside air temperature point.
c. Add/delete discharge controller point.
d. Define discharge controller parameters.
e. Add/delete return air temperature point.
f. Add/delete outside air dewpoint/humidity point.
g. Add/delete return air dewpoint/humidity point.
h. Add/delete damper switch.
i. Add/delete minimum outside air.
j. Add/delete atmospheric pressure.
k. Add/delete heating override switch.
l. Add/delete evaporative cooling switch.
m. Add/delete air flow rate.
24000 AVILA ROAD
n. Define enthalpy deadband.
o. Lock/unlock program.
p. Request control summary.
q. Request HVAC point summary.
3. Control summary:
a. HVAC control system begin/end status.
b. Enthalpy switchover optimal system status.
c. Optimal return time system status.
d. Current outside air enthalpy.
e. Calculated mixed air enthalpy.
f. Calculated cooling cool enthalpy using outside air.
g. Calculated cooling cool enthalpy using mixed air.
h. Calculated enthalpy difference.
i. Enthalpy switchover deadband.
j. Status of damper mode switch.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.19 PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FEATURES
A. Trend Point:
1. Sample up to 60 points, real or computed, with each point

capable of collecting 20 samples at intervals specified in
minutes, hours, days, or month.
2. Output trend logs as line-graphs or bar graphs. Output

graphic on terminal, with each point for line and bar
graphs designated with a unique color, vertical scale
either actual values or percent of range, and horizontal
scale time base. Print trend logs up to 12 columns of one
point/column.
B. Alarm Messages:
1. Allow definition of minimum of 10 messages, each having

minimum length of 30 characters for each individual
message.
2. Assign alarm messages to system messages including point's

alarm condition, point's off-normal condition, totaled
point's warning limit, hardware elements advisories.
3. Output assigned alarm with "message requiring

acknowledgment".
4. Operator commands include define, modify, or delete; output

summary listing current alarms and assignments; output
summary defining assigned points.
C. Weekly Scheduling:
1. Automatically initiate equipment or system commands, based

on selected time schedule for points specified.
2. Program times for each day of week, for each point, with
one minute resolution.
3. Automatically generate alarm output for points not

responding to command.
4. Allow for holidays, minimum of 366 consecutive holidays.
a. System logs and summaries.
b. Start of stop point.
c. Lock or unlock control or alarm input.
d. Add, delete, or modify analog limits and

differentials.
24000 AVILA ROAD
e. Adjust point operation position.
f. Change point operational mode.
g. Open or close point.
h. Enable/disable, lock/unlock, or execute interlock

sequence or computation profile.
i. Begin or end point totals.
j. Modify total values and limits.
k. Access or secure point.
l. Begin or end HVAC or load control system.
m. Modify load parameter.
n. Modify demand limiting and duty cycle targets.
6. Output summary: Listing of programmed function points,

associated program times, and respective day of week
programmed points by software groups or time of day.
D. Interlocking:
1. Permit events to occur, based on changing condition of one

or more associated master points.
2. Binary contact, high/low limit of analog point or computed

point capable of being used as master. Master capable of
monitoring or commanding multiple slaves.
a. Define single master/multiple master interlock

process.
b. Define logic interlock process.
c. Lock/unlock program.
d. Enable/disable interlock process.
e. Execute terminate interlock process.
f. Request interlock type summary.
2.20 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Disconnect Switch: Factory-mount on equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
24000 AVILA ROAD
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify conditioned power supply is available to control units and

to operator workstation.
C. Verify field end devices, wiring, and pneumatic tubing is

installed prior to installation proceeding.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install control units and other hardware in position on permanent

walls where not subject to excessive vibration.
B. Install software in control units and in operator workstation.

Implement features of programs to specified requirements and
appropriate to sequence of operation. Refer to Section 23 09 93.
C. Install with 120 volts alternating current, 15 amp dedicated

emergency power circuit to each programmable control unit.
D. Install conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section

26 05 03.
E. Install electrical material and installation in accordance with

appropriate requirements of Division 26.
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers’ field

services.
B. Start and commission systems. Allow adequate time for start-up

and commissioning prior to placing control systems in permanent
operation.
C. Furnish service technician employed by system installer to

instruct Owner's representative in operation of systems plant and
equipment for 3 day period.
A. Section 01 82 00 - Demostration and Training
B. Furnish basic operator training for 4 persons on data display,

alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution commands
and log requests. Include a minimum of 80 hours instructor time.
Furnish training on site.
C. Demonstrate complete and operating system to Owner.
D. Training by Manufacturer’s representative.
E. Provide manual to attendees.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Provide website to practice training of installed system and
contractor shall be available to answer questions for one (1)
year.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 09 93
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sequence of operation for:
1. Central fan systems.
2. Exhaust fans.
3. Emergency generator with automatic dampers.
4. Excess pressure controls.
5. Heating Coils.
6. Heating water zone control.
7. Refrigeration systems.
8. Air terminal units.

For equipment, devices, and system components to implement
sequences of operation.

For equipment, devices, system components, and software to
implement sequences of operation.

For equipment, devices, system components, and software to
implement sequences of operation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate mechanical system controlled and control

system components.
1. Label with settings, adjustable range of control and

limits. Submit written description of control sequence.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Submit flow diagrams for each control system, graphically

depicting control logic.
3. Submit draft copies of graphic displays indicating

mechanical system components, control system components,
and controlled function status and value.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components

and set points of controls, including changes to sequences made
after submission of shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CENTRAL FAN SYSTEMS
A. Refer to Contract drawings.
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
A. Maintain constant supply air duct temperature of 55 degrees F by

cycling refrigeration system and signaling step capacity.
3.3 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
1. Refer to Sequence of Operation on drawings.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 21 13
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Heating water piping, above ground.
2. Equipment drains and over flows.
3. Unions and flanges.
5. Valves.

2. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Frames: Product

requirements for access doors for placement by this
section.
3. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product

requirements Painting for placement by this section.
4. Section 23 05 16 - Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC

Piping: Product and execution requirements for expansion
compensation devices use in heating and cooling piping
systems.
5. Section 23 05 23 - General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping:

Product requirements for valves for placement by this
section.

Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and
supports, sleeves, and firestopping for placement by this
section.

Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for Vibration
Isolation for placement by this section.
8. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for
24000 AVILA ROAD
placement by this section.
9. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements

for Piping Insulation for placement by this section.
10. Section 23 21 16 - Hydronic Piping Specialties: Product and

execution requirements for piping specialties used in
heating and cooling piping systems.
11. Section 23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps: Product and execution

requirements for pumps used in heating and cooling piping
systems.
12. Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment: Product and

execution requirements for cleaning and chemical treatment
of heating and cooling piping systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
2. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings.
3. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings.

Pressure Fittings.
7. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding

and Brazing Qualifications.
B. ASTM International:
1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel,

Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping

Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and High Temperature Service.
3. ASTM A395/A395M - Standard Specification for Ferritic

Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at
Elevated Temperatures.
4. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron

Castings.
24000 AVILA ROAD
5. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

Tube.
7. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper

Water Tube (Metric).
8. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand

Castings for General Applications.
9. ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of

Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping
Applications.
C. American Welding Society:

Braze Welding.
D. American Water Works Association:
1. AWWA C105 - American National Standard for Polyethylene

Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems.
2. AWWA C110 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and

Grey-Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in., for Water and
Other Liquids.
3. AWWA C111 - American National Standard for Rubber-Gasket

Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
4. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile-Iron

Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water.
E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry:
1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design

and Manufacturer.
2. MSS SP 67 - Butterfly Valves.

Application.
4. MSS SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded

Ends.
5. MSS SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and

Threaded Ends.
24000 AVILA ROAD
6. MSS SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded

Ends.
7. MSS SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
8. MSS SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and

Threaded.

10. MSS SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder

Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends.
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide

compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting
dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in
open systems.
B. Provide flanges, union, and couplings at locations requiring

servicing. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of
valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Do not use
direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or
other apparatus.
C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.1,

ASME B31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
D. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate

equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E. Use globe ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or

manual flow control services.
F. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of hot water pumps.
G. Use plug valves for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug

valves only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided.
H. Use butterfly valves in heating water systems interchangeably

with gate and globe valves.
I. Use only butterfly valves in chilled and condenser water systems

for throttling and isolation service.
J. Use lug end butterfly valves to isolate equipment.
K. Use 3/4 inch gate valves with cap for drains at main shut-off
valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at
equipment. Pipe to nearest floor drain.
L. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near pumps where piping
24000 AVILA ROAD
configuration does not absorb vibration.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate schematic layout of heating hot water

piping system, including equipment, critical dimensions, and
sizes.
C. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and

accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information.
2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve

data and ratings for each service.
3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog

information including load capacity.
D. Design Data: Indicate pipe size. Indicate load carrying capacity

of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.
E. Test Reports: Indicate results of heating hot water piping system

pressure test.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and

support methods, joining procedures and isolation.

H. Welders’ Certificate: Include welders’ certification of

compliance with ASME Section IX.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves,

equipment and accessories.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for

installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded
assembly views.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.1, ASME B31.9 code for
installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding
materials and procedures.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Perform Work in accordance with AWS D1.1 for welding hanger and
support attachments to building structure.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

specified in this section with minimum three years experience,
and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.
B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work

of this section with minimum three years experience approved by
manufacturer.

section.

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in

place. Inspect for damage.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings.

Maintain in place until installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by

temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating
parts of completed system.
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
1.12 COORDINATION
1.13 WARRANTY

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding

packing.
24000 AVILA ROAD

B. Furnish two packing kits for each size and valve type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch wall for sizes
12 inch and larger, black.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234/A234M,

forged steel welding type.
2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for

pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, 0.375 inch wall for sizes
12 inch and larger, black, grooved ends.
1. Fittings: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, or

ASTM A234/A234M carbon steel, grooved ends.
2. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings meeting ASTM F1476.
a. Housing Clamps: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile

iron, hot dipped galvanized, compatible with steel
piping sizes, rigid type.
b. Gasket: Elastomer composition for operating

temperature range from 60 degrees F to 230 degrees F.
c. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder

wrought copper.
2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with

notched and dimpled branch tube.
3. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or

tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F.
Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with
melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F.
D. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn, rolled grooved ends.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy, or ASME B16.22

wrought copper and bronze, or ASTM B584 bronze sand
castings, grooved ends.

iron, enamel coated, compatible with copper tubing
sizes, to engage and lock designed to permit some
angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.

Schedule of Pipe Fittings and Materials

Pipe Pressure Shut-Off
Service Material Pipe Fitting Rating Valve Type
Weight Joint Material PSI , SWP
Copper Soldered Cast Bronze 400 Ball Valve
‘L’ Tube or Wrought 200 Butterfly
Copper Valve
Heating Steel 40, Screwed Malleable or 400 Ball Valve
Hot Black Flanged Forged 200 Butterfly
Water Steel 40, Welded Valve
and Flue Black
Piping
Copper Soldered Cast Bronze 400 Ball Valve
‘L’ Tube or Wrought 200 Butterfly
Copper Valve
Drains Steel 40, Screwed Steel 400 Ball Valve
Overflow Galv. Solder Galvanized 400
s Copper L Bronze
Tube
Vents Steel 40, Screwed Malleable or NA NA
Black Forged
2.2 ASTM DESIGNATIONS FOR PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS
A. Pipe, as specified in schedule, shall conform to requirements

covered by following ASTM Designations:
1. Steel 40 or 80: ASTM A53, Grade B.
2. Copper Tube “K” and “L”: ASTM B88 Hard Drawn.
B. Fittings, as specified in schedule for various services, shall

conform to requirements covered by the following ASTM
Designations:
1. Malleable Iron: ASTM B16.23.
2. Steel Welding Type: ASTM A234.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Cast Brass, Solder-Joint: ASME B16.23.
4. Wrought Copper, Solder-Joint: ASME B16.29.
2.3 PIPE JOINTS
A. Unless otherwise specified, join pipe as follows:
1. All steel pipe two inches (2”) and smaller shall have
screwed joints.
2. Steel pipe two and one half inches (2½”) and larger shall
have welded joints.
3. All copper pipe shall have soldered joints made with 95-5
tin/antimony solder.
4. Galvanized Vent Pipe: Screwed “Durham” tarred drainage

fittings.
5. All joints in underground and under-floor distribution

piping shall be welded, irregardless of size.
B. Welding Exceptions: In locations such as risers in shafts or

mains in crowded corridors, where welding may be difficult,
permission may be given by Inspector of Record or Mechanical
Engineer to use screwed joints up to four inch (4”) in size.
Grooved fittings and victaulic fitting shall not be used for any
pipe joints.
C. Welding Process, Procedure:
1. All welding shall comply with the latest edition of the

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9,
Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures,
Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators. No
exceptions.
2. All welders shall be qualified and certified according to

the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9. Each
welding certification shall bear a date not more than six
(6) months prior to the date of starting the work of
Division 15.
3. Prior to any welding being executed, the Contractor shall

submit to the Mechanical Engineer evidence of compliance of
all welding procedures and each operators qualifications
according to ASME procedures and governing Codes. Each
welder, along with his individual qualifications, shall be
approved by the project Inspector of Record and the
Mechanical Engineer.
4. Use only welding type fittings and welding neck flanges.

The following exceptions may be used, only as approved by
24000 AVILA ROAD
the Mechanical Engineer:
a. Join “small” branches into mains with intersection

weld, instead of using welding type tee. “Small”
shall mean that branch is one size less than half the
size of main, which it intersects as: 13” branch
into 3” main, 12” into 4”, 2” into 6” or 4” into 10”.
b. Use only “Weldolet” or “Threadolet” type of welding

fittings for intersection welding of branches to
mains.
c. Branches for Intersection Welding: Accurately coped

and beveled in shop for field welding; cut openings
for these branches in mains to full inside diameter
of branches; remove cutting particles and oxides from
inside of pipes before welding branches in place.
5. Do not make direct welded connections to valves, expansion

joints, strainers, apparatus, other units, which are
intended to be removable.
6. Brass piping shall have screwed joints, for sizes two

inches (2”) and under; flanged two and one half inches
(2½”) and over.
D. Brazing Option: Brazing of threadless brass pipe to bronze

fittings with pre-inserted rings, will be acceptable in place of
screwed joints.
1. For brazing joints on threadless brass pipe and copper “B”

tube, copper tube Type “K” and “L”, use brazing alloy, 80%
copper, 15% silver, 5% phosphorous, which will flow freely
at 1300o F; Handy and Harmon “Sil-Fos”, or approved equal;
use flux and brazing method recommended by manufacturer of
brazing alloy.
2. Copper tube Type “K” and “L” shall have soldered or sweat
joints with solder-joint type or copper fittings. Flared
joints with flare type bronze fittings may be used where
approved for specific service. Solder shall be 95-5 or
equal.
3. Do not make brazed or soldered connections to valves,

expansion joints, strainers, apparatus, other units, which
are intended to be removable.
E. Screwed Joints:
1. For screwed joints use red or white lead and oil, or

approved pipe-joint compound; apply only on male threads.
2. Brass pipe shall have screwed joints, for sizes two inches
(2”) and under; flanged two and one half inches (2½”) and
24000 AVILA ROAD
over.
3. Cut pipe, nipples evenly, cut threads clean, remove burrs,

ream ends to full inside bore. Cut brass pipe with hacksaw
rather than with pipe cutter.
4. Do not use Stillson wrench for making brass pipe joints

tight; such pipe, bearing wrench marks, will not be
acceptable and shall be replaced at Contractor’s own
expense.
F. Refrigeration Pipe Joints:
1. Unless otherwise specified, join pipe as follows:
a. Brazing: “SIL-FOS” or “Easy-Flow.”
b. Soldering: 95-5 or “Sta-Bright”.
2. All brazing and soldering shall be in strict accordance

with Section 75 of the Refrigeration Service Engineers
Society Service Application Manual.
3. Dry nitrogen shall be circulated through tubes being brazed

to eliminate formation of copper oxide. No exceptions.
4. Refrigeration system connections shall be copper to copper

type properly cleaned and brazed. Use flux only where
necessary.
G. Joints of Dissimilar Metals: Provide with “EPCO” dielectric

valves isolation couplings of same size as pipe.
H. Pipe Preparation:
1. Pipe shall be carefully cleaned before installation. The

ends of threaded pipe shall be reamed out full-size with a
long taper reamer so as to be partially bell-mounted and
perfectly smooth.
2. All threads on black steel pipe shall be cut with new clean
dies, full thickness of the die and so that no more than
two (2) threads are left exposed on the pipe when the joint
is made up in the fitting or valve.
3. Copper, brass pipe and chromed, polished or painted

connections from fixtures shall show no tool marks.
Install with approved wrenches.
4. Thread lubricant shall be used for all threaded, joint

make-up and shall be applied to the make thread only.
Lubrication shall include threaded cleanout plugs.
2.4 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASME B16.4, cast

iron.
2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; flanged for

pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, rolled grooved

ends.
1. Fittings: ASTM A395/A395M and ASTM A536 ductile iron, or

ASTM A234/A234M carbon steel, grooved ends.

iron, hot dipped galvanized, compatible with steel
piping sizes, rigid type.

C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22 solder

wrought copper.
2. Joints: Solder, lead free, ASTM B32, 95-5 tin-antimony, or

tin and silver, with melting range 430 to 535 degrees F.
2.5 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 300, malleable iron, threaded.
2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with brazed joints.
3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated

steel threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious
isolation barrier.
B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger:
1. Ferrous Piping: Class 250, forged steel, slip-on flanges.
2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges.
3. PVC Piping: PVC flanges.
2.6 GATE VALVES
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Manufacturers:
1. Crane Valve, North America.
2. Hammond Valve.
3. Milwaukee Valve Company.
4. NIBCO, Inc.
5. Stockham Valves & Fittings.
B. GA-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body,
bronze trim, threaded union bonnet, non-rising stem, lock-shield
stem, inside screw with back-seating stem, solid wedge disc,
alloy seat rings, solder or threaded ends.
C. GA-2 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 70, Class 125, cast iron
body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, non-rising stem, hand-wheel,
outside screw and yoke, solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings,
flanged ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches
and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
2.7 GLOBE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
2. Hammond Valve.
4. NIBCO, Inc.
B. GL-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze body,
bronze trim, threaded union bonnet, hand wheel, Buna-N
composition disc, solder or threaded ends.
C. GL-2 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 85, Class 125, cast iron
body, bronze trim, hand wheel, outside screw and yoke, flanged
ends. Furnish chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and
larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.
2.8 BALL VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Hammond Valve.
4. NIBCO, Inc.
B. BA-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, 600 psi WOG, one piece
bronze body, chrome plated brass ball, full port, teflon seats,
blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with union, level
handle locking lever handle extended lever handle oval handle
with balancing stops.
C. BA-2 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 110, Class 150, bronze, two
piece body, type 316 stainless steel ball, full port, teflon
seats, blow-out proof stem, solder or threaded ends with union,
lever handle wing or tee handle locking lever handle extended
lever handle oval handle] with balancing stops.
2.9 PLUG VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. DeZURIK, Unit of SPX Corp.
2. Flow Control Equipment, Inc.
3. Homestead Valve.
B. PL-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 78, Class 150, semi-steel

construction, square port, full pipe area, pressure lubricated,
teflon packing, threaded ends. Furnish one plug valve wrench for
every ten plug-valves with minimum of one wrench.
C. PL-2 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 78, Class 150 semi-steel
construction, round square port, full pipe area, pressure
lubricated, teflon packing, flanged ends. Furnish worm gear-
operated.
2.10 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
2. Hammond Valve.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. NIBCO, Inc.
2.11 CHECK VALVES
A. Horizontal Swing Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Crane Valve, North America.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. NIBCO, Inc.
e. Stockham Valves & Fittings.
f. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
2. CK-1 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 150, bronze

body and cap, bronze seat, Buna-N disc, solder or threaded
ends.
3. CK-2 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, cast
iron body, bolted cap, bronze or cast iron disc, renewable
disc seal and seat, flanged ends.
B. Spring Loaded Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Crane Valve, North America.
b. Hammond Valve.
c. Milwaukee Valve Company.
d. NIBCO, Inc.
e. Stockham Valves & Fittings.
f. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
2. CK-6 2 inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80, Class 250, bronze

body, in-line spring lift check, silent closing, Buna-N
disc, integral seat, solder or threaded ends.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. CK-7 2-1/2 inches and Larger: MSS SP 71, Class 125, globe
style, cast iron body, bronze seat, center guided bronze
disc, stainless steel spring and screws, flanged ends.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Unistrut.
2. B-Line.
3. Flex-Weld, Inc.
B. Conform to ASME B31.1, ASME 31.9, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP
69, and MSS SP 89.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Carbon steel,

D. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 inches and Larger: Carbon
steel, adjustable, clevis.
E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches : Carbon steel,

adjustable, clevis.
F. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel
yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.
G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers

and hanger rods.
H. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and

Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast
iron roll.
I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron
hooks.
J. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp.
K. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and
cast iron roll.
24000 AVILA ROAD
L. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
M. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel
support.
N. Floor Support for Hot Pipe 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron
adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
O. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable
cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or
steel support.
P. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper

plated.
Q. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuous threaded.
R. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

project conditions.
B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-

excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous
pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open
ends with temporary plugs or caps.
E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to

Section 23 25 00.
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete


carrying pipe 4 inches and larger.

with slab surface.
and provide through-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut
above, flush with top of slab.
A. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9 ASTM F708 and MSS SP 89.
B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.
C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between

finished covering and adjacent work.
E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design

hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported
pipe.
F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping

independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation,

provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers.
H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and

supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended
J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other

equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and
fittings.
K. Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section

23 05 29.
3.5 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install heating water piping in accordance with ASME B31.1 ASME

B31.9.
B. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain

gradient.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with

use of space.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer

to Section 23 05 29.
F. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and

openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to
Section 23 05 29.
G. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 23 05 53.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without

stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. Refer to Section
23 05 16.
I. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
J. Slope hydronic piping and arrange systems to drain at low points.

Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe aligned.
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building

framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich
primer to welds.
L. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories,

ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
M. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
N. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 23 07 00.
A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field

inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B. Test heating water piping system in accordance with ASME B31.9

ASME B31.1.
3.7 SCHEDULES
A. Copper and Steel Pipe Hanger Spacing:

PIPE SIZE COPPER STEEL PIPE COPPER STEEL PIPE
Inches TUBING MAXIMUM TUBING HANGER ROD
MAXIMUM HANGER HANGER ROD DIAMETER
HANGER SPACING DIAMETER Inches
SPACING Feet Inches
Feet
24000 AVILA ROAD
1/2 5 7 3/8 3/8
3/4 5 7 3/8 3/8
1 6 7 3/8 3/8
1-1/4 7 7 3/8 3/8
1-1/2 8 9 3/8 3/8
2 8 10 3/8 3/8
2-1/2 (Note 1) 9 11 1/2 1/2
3 10 12 1/2 1/2
4 12 14 1/2 5/8
5 13 16 1/2 5/8
6 14 17 5/8 3/4
8 16 19 3/4 3/4
10 18 22 3/4 7/8
12 19 23 3/4 7/8
14 22 25 7/8 1
16 23 27 7/8 1
18 25 28 1 1
20 27 30 1 1-1/4
24 28 32 1-1/4 1-1/4
B. Plastic and Ductile Iron Pipe Hanger Spacing:

PIPE HANGER SPACING
PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM HANGER ROD

HANGER SPACING DIAMETER
Feet Inches
ABS (All sizes) 4 3/8
FRP (All Sizes) 4 3/8
Ductile Iron
(Note 2)
PVC (All Sizes) 4 3/8
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. Note 1: Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for grooved

end piping systems.
2. Note 2: 20 feet maximum spacing, minimum of one hanger for

each pipe section close to joint behind bell. Provide
hanger at each change of direction and each branch
connection. For pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, subjected
to loadings other than weight of pipe and contents, limit
span to maximum spacing for water service steel pipe.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 21 24
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section provides specification requirements for adjustable

frequency drives, variable speed drives or herein identified as
AC Drives for use with {NEMA B, NEMA D, NEMA A, NEMA E, Wound
Rotor, Synchronous} design AC motors.
B. The AC Drive manufacturer shall furnish, field test, adjust and

certify all installed AC Drives for satisfactory operation.
C. Any exceptions/deviations to this specification shall be

indicated in writing and submitted with the quotation.
D. All VFD’s on this project shall be of the same manufacturer.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
B. ANSI C84.1 - Voltages Tolerances for North America
C. CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91 - Industrial Control Equipment
D. IEC 68 Part 2-3 - Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Part 2:

tests - Test Ca: Damp Heat
E. IEC 146.1 - Semiconductor Converters-General Requirements and

Line Commutated Converters Part 1-1: Specifications of Basic
Requirements
F. IEC 664 - Insulation Coordination for Equipment Within Low-

Voltage Systems
G. IEC 447 - Man-Machine Interface Actuating Principles
H. IEC 439 Part 1 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear

Assemblies
I. IEC 947 - Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Components
J. IEC 364 - Electrical Installation of Buildings
K. IEC 204/NFPA 79 - Electrical Equipment of Industrial

Machines/Industrial Machinery
L. IEC 106 - Guide for Specifying Environmental Conditions for

Equipment Performance Rating
M. IEC 529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosure
24000 AVILA ROAD
N. IEC 1000 - Electromagnetic Compatibility
O. IEC 721 - Classification of Environmental Conditions
P. IEC 255-8 Overload Relays
Q. IEC 801-2,-3,-4,-5 - Immunity Tests
R. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
S. NEMA ICS, Part 4 Overload Relays
T. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
U. NEMA ICS 2-321 - Electrical Interlocks
V. NEMA ICS7 - Industrial Control and Systems Adjustable Speed

Drives
W. NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for
Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drives
X. UL 50 - UL Standard for Safety Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment
Y. UL 845 - UL Standard for Motor Control Center Construction
Z. UL 507 - UL Standard for Safety Electric Fans
AA. UL 508 - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment
BB. UL 508C - UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment
CC. UL 991 - UL Standard for Safety Tests for Safety Related Controls
employing Solid State Devices
DD. OSHA 1910.95 - AC Drive Controller Acoustical Noise
EE. Confirming to National Safe Transmit Association and

International Safe Transmit Association Test for Packages
Weighing 100 lbs or Over
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Six copies of approval drawings shall be furnished for Engineer’s

approval prior to factory assembly of the AC Drives. These
drawings shall consist of elementary power and control wiring
diagrams and MCC enclosure outline drawings. The enclosure
drawings shall include front and side views of the enclosures
with overall dimensions and weights shown, conduit entrance
locations and nameplate legends.
B. Standard catalog sheets showing voltage, horsepower, maximum

current ratings and recommended replacement parts with part
numbers shall be furnished for each different Horsepower rated AC
24000 AVILA ROAD
Drive provided.
C. Shop drawings must show and locate all locations of anchorages.

The manufacturer shall be responsible for any additional cost if
the delivered unit does not match the shop drawing.
A. The manufacturer of the AC Drive shall be a certified ISO 9001

facility.
B. The AC Drive and all associated optional equipment shall be UL

listed according to Motor Control Center UL listing UL 508. A UL
label shall be attached inside each enclosure as verification.
C. The AC Drive shall be designed, constructed and tested in

accordance with NEMA, NEC, VDE, IEC standards and CSA certified.
D. Every Power Converter shall be tested with an actual AC Induction

Motor 100% loaded and temperature cycled within an environment
chamber between 32o F and 104o F. Documentation shall be
furnished to verify successful completion at the request of the
engineer.
E. All Drive door mounted pilot devices shall be tested to verify

successful operation. Documentation shall be furnished upon the
request of the engineer.
F. The AC Drive shall be submitted to a Hi-Pot test with all

enclosed devices mounted and wired, prior to shipment.
PRODUCT
1.5 MANUFACTURERS
A. ABB, Graham, York/Toshiba, Robicon, MagniTech. Substitutions

must be submitted in writing three (3) weeks prior to original
bid date with supporting documentation demonstrating that the
alternative manufacturer meets all aspects of the specifications
herein.
B. Alternate control techniques other than pulse width modulated

(PWM) are not acceptable.
1.6 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The AC Drive shall convert the input AC mains power to an

adjustable frequency and voltage as defined in the following
sections.
B. The input power section shall utilize a full wave bridge design
incorporating diode rectifiers. The diode rectifiers shall
convert fixed voltage and frequency, AC line power to fixed DC
voltage. This power section shall be insensitive to phase
rotation of the AC line.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. The DC bus shall have external connections for standby battery
back-up or for linking multiple, AC Drives DC buses for
management of regeneration power.
D. The output power section shall change fixed DC voltage to

adjustable frequency AC voltage. This section shall utilize
insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) or intelligent power
modules (IPMs) as required by the current rating of the motor.
E. VFD’s motor transfer circuit shall include contacts for by-pass

switching from line to VFD and vice versa.
F. The line circuit breaker shall provide positive disconnect of

input power to the air handling unit. The circuit breaker shall
be UL listed and shall be equipped with thermal elements for
electrical protection and shall conform to National Electrical
code (NEC) fusing requirements. The line circuit breaker shall
be mounted in the cabinet of the VSD.
G. The Automatic Bypass Contactor Circuit shall provide both bypass

switching circuitry around the VSD and the motor starter
contactors. Because the Automatic Bypass Contactor circuit
contains motor starter contactors, a separate starter is not
needed to operate the motor in the Bypass mode. This shall
provide a method of operating the motor at full speed directly
from the incoming power source. The bypass contactor circuit
shall enable the user to operate the motor without the VSD by
reconfiguring the circuitry into a conventional constant speed
application, completely independent of the VSD.
H. When the front-mounted switch is transferred from the VSD to

Line, a series of contact closures shall permit the safe
circuitry change to bypass operation. After the contacts have
been closed, contactors shall energized thus starting the motor.
I. Motor overload protection shall be provided with manual bypass

contactor circuit. It shall be wired so that the motor shall
protect in either the VSD operation mode or the bypass mode. The
control safety circuit shall tie to the Bypass Circuit to insure
that the motor is not operated under alarm conditions (indicated
by opening of firestat, etc.).
J. Thermal Overload Relays: The thermal overload relays shall

provide protection of the motor in cases of motor stall. These
relays shall be mounted in the cablinet.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION
A. The AC Drive shall be mounted in a {Type 1, Type 12} MCC

enclosure with an integral disconnect device.
B. A mechanical interlock shall prevent an operator from opening the

AC Drive door when the disconnect is in the on position. Another
mechanical interlock shall prevent an operator from placing the
disconnect in the on position while the AC Drive door is open.
It shall be possible for authorized personnel to defeat these
24000 AVILA ROAD
interlocks.
C. Provisions shall be provided for locking all disconnects in the

off position with up to three padlocks.
D. Current limiting fuses shall be installed and wired to the AC

Drive input.
E. Provisions shall be made for accepting a padlock to lock the

enclosure door
F. 3% line reactors shall be installed on the line side conductor of

each phase ahead of the VFD.
1.8 MOTOR DATA
A. Refer to the drawings and schedules for motor data.
1.9 APPLICATION DATA
A. The AC Drive shall be sized to operate a Variable Torque load.
B. The speed range shall be from a minimum speed of 0.5 Hertz to a

maximum speed of 400 Hertz.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
A. The AC Drive shall be of construction that allows operation in a

pollution Degree 3 environment. The AC Drive shall meet IEC 664-
1 and NEMA ICS 1 Standards. AC Drives that are only rated for
Pollution Degree 2 environment shall not be allowed.
B. The AC Drive shall be designed to operate in an ambient

temperature from 0 to + 40 degrees C (+32 to 104 degrees F).
C. The storage temperature range shall be -25 to + 70 degrees C.
D. The maximum relative humidity shall be 95% at 40 degrees C, non-

condensing.
E. The AC Drive shall be rated to operate at altitudes less than or

equal to 3,300 ft (1000m). For altitudes above 3,300 ft, de-rate
the AC Drive by 1.2% for every 300 ft.
F. The AC Drive shall meet the IEC 68-2 Operational vibration

specification.
1.11 RATINGS
A. The AC Drive shall be designed to operate from an input voltage

of 400 15% Vac and 460 15% Vac.
B. The AC Drive shall operate from an input voltage frequency range

from 47.5 to 63 Hertz.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. The displacement power factor shall not be less than .95 lagging
under any speed or load condition.
D. The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed and load shall not
be less than 96%.
E. The {constant, variable} torque rated AC Drive overcurrent

capacity shall be {150%, 110%} for 1 minute.
F. The output carrier frequency of the AC Drive shall be randomly

modulated and selectable at 2, 4, or 10 kHz depending on Drive
rating for low noise operation. No AC Drive with an operable
carrier frequency above 10 kHz shall be allowed.
G. The output frequency shall be from .1 to 400 Hertz for Drives up

to 75 HP. At horsepower’s above 75 HP, the maximum output
frequency will be 200 Hertz.
H. The AC Drive will be able to develop rated motor torque at .5

Hertz (60 Hz base) in a Sensorless Flux Vector mode using a
standard induction motor without an encoder feedback signal.
1.12 PROTECTION
A. Upon power-up the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid

operation of memory, option module, loss of analog reference
input, loss of communication, dynamic brake failure, DC to DC
power supply, control power and the pre-charge circuit.
B. The AC Drive shall be UL 508C listed for use on distribution

systems with {5,000A or 10,000A rms, 22,000A rms, 65,000A rms}
available fault current. The Power Converter shall meet short
circuit withstandability of 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes as
defined by NEMA ICS 7.1.09 and have the value listed on the AC
Drive nameplate.
C. The Power Converter shall be protected against short circuits,

between output phases and ground; and the logic and analog
outputs.
D. The AC drive shall have a minimum AC undervoltage power loss

ride-through of 200 msec. The AC Drive shall have the user-
defined option of frequency fold-back to allow motor torque
production to continue to increase the duration of the power loss
ride-through.
E. The AC drive shall have a selectable ride through function which

will allow the logic to maintain control for a minimum of one
second without faulting.
F. For a fault condition other than a ground fault, short circuit or

internal fault, an auto restart function will provide up to 5
programmable restart attempts. The programmable time delay
before restart attempts will range from 1 second to 600 seconds.
G. The deceleration mode of the AC drive shall be programmable for
24000 AVILA ROAD
normal and fault conditions. The stop modes shall include free-
wheel stop, fast stop and DC injection braking.
H. Upon loss of the analog process follower reference signal, the AC

drive shall fault and/or operate at a user defined speed set
between software programmed low speed and high speed settings.
I. The AC drive shall have solid state I2t protection that is UL

listed and meets UL 508 C as a Class 10 overload protection and
meets IEC 947. The minimum adjustment range shall be from .45 to
1.05 percent of the current output of the AC Drive.
J. The AC Drive shall have a thermal switch with a user selectable

prealarm that will provide a minimum of 60 seconds delay before
overtemperature fault.
K. The AC Drive shall utilize bonded fin heatsink construction for

maximum heat transfer.
L. The AC drive shall have a programmable fold-back function that

will anticipate a controller overload condition and fold back the
frequency to avoid a fault condition.
M. The output frequency shall be software enabled to fold back when

the motor is overloaded.
N. There shall be 3 skip frequency ranges that can each be

programmed with a selectable bandwidth of 2 or 5 Hz. The skip
frequencies shall be programmed independently, back to back or
overlapping.
O. The AC Drive shall include Metal Oxide Varistors (MOVs) wired to

the incoming AC Mains.
1.13 ADJUSTMENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS
A. The AC drive shall self-configure to the main operating supply

voltage and frequency. No operator adjustments will be required.
B. Upon power-up, the AC drive will automatically send a signal to

the connected motor and store the resulting resistance data into
memory. The inductance data will be measured during no-load
operation when operating at a frequency between 20-60 Hz. The AC
Drive will automatically optimize the operating characteristics
according to the stored data.
C. The AC drive will be factory pre-set to operate most common

applications.
D. A choice of three types of acceleration and deceleration ramps

will be available in the AC Drive software; linear, S curve and U
curve.
E. The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable

from .1 to 999.9 seconds.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. The volts per frequency ratios shall be user selectable to meet
variable torque loads, normal and high torque machine
applications.
G. The memory shall retain and record run status and fault type of
the past 8 faults.
H. Slip compensation shall be a software enabled function.
I. The software shall have a NOLD (no load) function that will
reduce the voltage to the motor when selected for variable torque
loads. A constant volts/Hz ratio will be maintained during
acceleration. The output voltage will then automatically adjust
to meet the torque requirement of the load.
J. The AC drive shall offer programmable DC injection braking that

will brake the AC motor by injecting DC current and creating a
stationary magnetic pole in the stator. The level of current
will be adjustable between 50-150% of rated current and available
from 0.0-30 seconds continuously. For continuous operation after
30 seconds, the current shall be automatically reduced to 50% of
the nameplate current of the motor.
K. Sequencing logic will coordinate the engage and release

thresholds and time delays for the sequencing of the AC Drive
output, mechanical actuation and DC injection braking in order to
accomplish smooth starting and stopping of a mechanical process.
1.14 OPERATOR INTERFACE
A. The operator interface terminal will offer the modification of AC

drive adjustments via a touch keypad. All electrical values,
configuration parameters, I/O assignments, application and
activity function access, faults, local control, adjustment
storage, self-test and diagnostics will be in plain English.
There will be a standard selection of 4 additional languages
built-in to the operating software as standard.
B. The display will be a high resolution, LCD backlighted screen

capable of displaying graphics such as bar graphs as well as six
lines of twenty-one alphanumeric characters.
C. The AC drive model number, torque type, software revision number,

horsepower, output current, motor frequency and motor voltage
shall all be listed on the drive identification display as viewed
on the LCD display.
D. The display shall be configured to display one or two barographs

with numeric data that are selectable and scaleable by the
operator. A user defined label function shall be available. As
a minimum the selectable outputs shall consist of speed
reference, output frequency, output current, motor torque, output
power, output voltage, line voltage, DC voltage, motor thermal
state, drive thermal state, elapsed time, motor speed, machine
speed reference and machine speed.
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. A single keystroke scrolling function shall allow dynamic
switching between display variables.
F. The terminal keypad will consist of programmable function keys.

The functions will allow both operating commands and programming
options to be preset by the operator. A hardware selector switch
will allow the terminal keypad to be locked out from unauthorized
personnel.
G. The operator terminal will offer a general menu consisting of

parameter setting, I/O map, fault history, and drive
configuration. A software lock will limit access to the main
menu. The main menu will consist of keypad configuration, drive
configuration, general configuration, diagnostic mode and drive
initialization screens.
H. There will be arrow keys that will provide the ability to scroll
through menus and screens, select or activate functions or
increase the value of a selected parameter.
I. A data entry key will allow the user to confirm a selected menu,
numeric value or allow selection between multiple choices.
J. An escape key will allow a parameter to return the existing value

if adjustment is not required and the value is displayed. The
escape function will also return to a previous menu display.
K. A RUN key and a STOP key will command a normal starting and
stopping as programmed when the AC drive is in keypad control
mode. The STOP key must be active in all control modes.
L. The AC drive shall have 3 LEDs mounted on the front panel to

indicate functional status. A green LED will verify that the AC
drive power supply is on. A red LED indicator will indicated an
AC drive fault. A yellow LED indicator will designate a pending
fault condition.
M. The status LEDs shall be able to be remotely mounted up to 3

meters from the AC drive.
N. A user interface shall be available that is a Windows 3.1 based

personal computer, serial communication link or detachable
operator interface.
O. The Keypad and all door mounted controls must be {Type 1,Type 12}
rated.
1.15 CONTROL
A. External pilot devices shall be able to be connected to a

terminal strip for starting/stopping the AC Drive, speed control
and displaying operating status. All control inputs and outputs
will be software assignable.
B. 2-wire or 3-wire control strategy shall be defined within the

software. External relays or logic devices will not be allowed.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be
24Vdc.
D. The internal power supply incorporates an automatic current fold-

back that protects the internal power supply if incorrectly
connected or shorted. The transistor logic outputs will be
current limited and not be damaged if shorted or excess current
is pulled.
E. All logic connections shall be furnished on pull apart terminal

strips.
F. There will be 2 software assignable, analog inputs. The analog

inputs will be software selectable and consist of the following
configurations: 0-20 ma, 4-20 ma, 20-4 ma, x-20 ma (where x is
user defined) 0-5 v, 1-5 v or 0-10 v.
G. There will be 4 software assignable, isolated logic inputs that

will be selected and assigned in the software. The selection of
assignments shall consist of run/reverse, jog, plus/minus speed
(2 inputs required), setpoint memory, preset speeds (up to 2
inputs), auto/manual control, controlled stop, terminal or keypad
control, by-pass (2 inputs required), motor switching, and fault
reset.
H. There will be two software assignable analog outputs that can be

selected and assigned in the software. The analog output
assignments shall be proportional to the following motor
characteristics: frequency, current, power torque, voltage and
thermal state. The output signal will be selectable from 0-20 ma
or 4-20 ma.
I. Two voltage-free Form C relay output contacts will be provided.

One of the contacts will indicate AC drive fault status. The
other contact will be user assignable.
J. There shall be a hardware input/output extension module which

also provides interlocking and sequencing capabilities. The
module shall be fully isolated and housed in a finger safe
enclosure with pull apart terminal strips. The module will add 4
logic inputs, 2 analog inputs, 2 relay outputs and one analog
output. All of the I/O will be user assignable in the software
as previously defined.
K. The AC Drive door mounted control island shall include a power

ON, Drive RUN, Drive Fault Light and Hand-Off-Auto selector
switch with Manual Speed Potentiometer.
L. The AC Drive control island shall accept {% indicating analog,

absolute indicating digital} meters to display {Power, Amperes,
Voltage, Hertz}.
EXECUTION
1.16 GENERAL
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. On all outdoor applications installing contractor shall mount
drive where there is a minimum of 2" clearance between rear
surface of VFD and any solid surface which could inhibit flow of
air.
B. On outdoor installations of VFD’s installing contractor shall

also provide a sun shield to prevent direct solar radiation from
contacting the enclosure. Shield may be constructed of 16 Gage
galvanized steel or 24 Gage galvanized steel with welded angle
iron reinforcement. Shield shall not be supported from the VFD
enclosure.
C. All control signal conductors shall be a minimum of 18 gage

metallic shielded cable. Such conductors shall not be installed
in a conduit or raceway with AC power conductors.
D. A grounding wire shall be sized per NEC and bonded to the VFD
enclosure and to the motor being controlled. Metallic conduit
will not be deemed acceptable for this grounding requirement.
E. Motors for pumps shall be located above the jackshaft.
F. Pump drive package shall be supplied with a sheet metal cabinet

enclosing the jackshaft, coupling, sheaves and belts.
G. Pumps and jackshafts shall be mounted on steel base plate which

also supports the motor and drive.
H. Startup Service:
1. The supplier shall provide start-up service by a factory

trained service technician. The service technician shall
verify correct installation, start up the drive, and check
for proper operation. A certificate of start-up shall be
provided for owner review prior to technician's departure
from job site.
2. WARRANTY: The VFD shall be warranted by the manufacturer

for a period of 60 months from date of start-up. The
warranty shall include parts, labor, and all expenses
incurred by the manufacturer to provide factory authorized
service, repair, or replacement. A copy of this extended
warranty, with the effective dates left blank, shall be
submitted with the submittal data prior to shipping. All
dates will be inserted by the University at the time of
final acceptance.
I. Examination:
1. Verify that conditions allow recommended and code required

clearance prior to installation.
2. Verify mounting surface is suitable for controller

installation.”
J. When initialized, VFDs on cooling tower fans shall have
24000 AVILA ROAD
capability to lock out critical cooling tower speeds and prevent
the cooling tower fan from operating below its minimum speed.
1.17 INSPECTION
A. Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the

dimensions are as indicated.
B. Do not install AC Drive until the building environment can be

maintained within the service conditions required by the
manufacturer.
1.18 PROTECTION
A. Before and during the installation, the AC Drive equipment shall

be protected from site contaminants.
1.19 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in compliance with manufacturer's

instructions, drawings and recommendations.
B. The AC Drive manufacturer shall provide a factory certified

technical representative to supervise the contractor's
installation, testing and start-up of the AC drive(s) furnished
under this specification for a maximum total of 2 days. The
start-up service shall be quoted as a separate line item.
C. Do not install controller until building environment can be

maintained within the service conditions required by the
manufacturer.
D. Install controller where indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer’s written instructions and NEMA ICS 3.1.
E. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after

placing controller.
F. Install fuses in fusible switches.
G. Variable speed drives for all air handling units, provided by air
handling unit manufacturer on each air handling unit.
H. Variable speed drives for pumps and exhaust fans, provided by

Mechanical Contractor and installed and wired by Electrical
Contractor.
1.20 TRAINING
A. An on-site training course of 1 to 2 training days shall be

provided by a representative of the AC Drive manufacturer to
plant and/or maintenance personnel and quoted as a separate line
item.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 23 00
REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Refrigerant piping.
2. Unions, flanges, and couplings.
4. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators.
5. Valves.
6. Refrigerant strainers.
7. Refrigerant pressure regulators.
8. Refrigerant pressure relief valves.
9. Refrigerant filter-driers.
10. Refrigerant solenoid valves.
11. Refrigerant expansion valves.
12. Electronic expansion valves.
13. Refrigerant receivers.
1. Section 05 12 00 - Structural Steel Framing: Product

requirements for touch-up painting of structural steel.
2. Section 05 12 00 - Steel Joist Framing: Product requirements

for touch-up painting of steel joists.

4. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Frames: Access doors for

concealed valves and accessories.
5. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Product requirements

for painting for placement by this section.
24000 AVILA ROAD

Equipment: Product requirements for pipe hangers and
supports, sleeves, and firestopping for placement by this
section.

Piping and Equipment: Product requirements for Vibration
Isolation for placement by this section.
8. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment: Product requirements for pipe identification for
placement by this section.
9. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for

Piping Insulation for placement by this section.

section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers.
2. ARI 710 - Liquid-Line Driers.
3. ARI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line

Filters and Filter Dryers.
4. ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
5. ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants.

Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

Pressure Fittings.
2. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper

Tubes.
4. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure

Vessels.
D. ASTM International:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black

and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of

Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High
Temperature Service.

Tube.
4. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water

Tube (Metric).
5. ASTM B280 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for

Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
6. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of

Rigid Pipe Hangers.
7. ASTM B749 - Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy

Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products.
E. American Welding Society:

Braze Welding.
F. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry:
1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and

Manufacturer.

Application.

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 429 - Electrically Operated Valves.
A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide

compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting
dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems.
B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring

servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves
and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or
threaded connections to valves or equipment.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5,

ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89.
D. Provide receivers on systems 2 tons and larger, sized to

accommodate pump down charge.
E. Provide receivers on systems with piping runs exceeding 100 feet.
F. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near compressors where piping

configuration does not absorb vibration.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of refrigeration piping system,

including equipment, critical dimensions, and sizes.
C. Product Data:
1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and

accessories.
2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve

data and ratings for each service.
3. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog information

4. Refrigerant Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog

information including capacity, component sizes, rough-in
requirements, and service sizes for the following:
a. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators.
b. Refrigerant strainers.
c. Refrigerant pressure regulators.
d. Refrigerant pressure relief valves.
e. Refrigerant filter-driers.
f. Refrigerant solenoid valves.
g. Refrigerant expansion valves.
h. Electronic expansion valves.
D. Design Data: Indicate pipe size. Indicate load carrying capacity

of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.
E. Test Reports: Indicate results of refrigerant leak test piping

system pressure test].
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and

support methods, joining procedures and isolation.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed

H. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work,

verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves,

equipment and refrigerant accessories.

installation and changing components, spare parts lists, exploded
assembly views.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation

of refrigerant piping systems.
B. Perform Work in accordance with all applicable code AWS D1.1 for
welding hanger and support attachments to building structure.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

B. Fabricator or Installer: Company specializing in performing Work

of this section with minimum three years documented experience
approved by manufacturer.
C. Design Refrigerant piping system, hangers and supports under

direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design
of this Work and licensed in State of California.

section.

24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping

and receivers, seal prior to shipment. Maintain seal until
connected into system.
C. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in

place. Inspect for damage.
D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings.

Maintain in place until installation.
E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by

temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating
parts of completed system.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 31 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for

coordination.
1.13 WARRANTY

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for valves excluding

packing.
1.14 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

B. Furnish two refrigerant oil test kits each containing everything

required for conducting one test.

B. Furnish two packing kits for each size and valve type.
C. Furnish two refrigerant filter-dryer cartridges of each type.
24000 AVILA ROAD
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy

with melting range 1190 to 1480 degrees F (640 to 805
degrees C).
B. Copper Tubing to 7/8 inch OD: ASTM B88 or ASTM B88M, Type K,
annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast copper, compression type.
2. Joints: Flared.
2.2 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS
A. 2 inches (50 mm) and Smaller:
1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig malleable iron, threaded.
2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.
B. 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and Larger:
1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) forged steel, slip-on.
2. Copper Piping: Bronze.
3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene.
C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:
1. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron galvanized to engage and lock

designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction,
and expansion.
2. Sealing Gasket: C-shape elastomer composition for operating

temperature range from -30 degrees F to 230 degrees F.
3. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel

threaded end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation
barrier.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carpenter & Paterson Inc.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Creative Systems Inc.
3. Flex-Weld, Inc.
B. Conform to ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS
SP 89.
C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch: Malleable iron,

D. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel,
adjustable, clevis.
E. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel,

adjustable, clevis.
F. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel
yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.
G. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers

and hanger rods.
H. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and

Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast
iron roll.
I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron
hooks.
J. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp.
K. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel
bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and
cast iron roll.
L. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
M. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel
support.
N. Floor Support for Hot Pipe 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron
adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
O. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable
24000 AVILA ROAD
cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or
steel support.
P. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel rings, adjustable, copper

plated.
Q. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuous threaded.
R. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and

S. Sheet Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft, 0.039 inch thick.
2.4 REFRIGERANT MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
2. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
3. Sporlan Valve Co. Model
B. Indicators:
1. Port: Single or Double, UL listed.
2. Body: Copper or brass, flared or solder ends.
3. Sight glass: Color-coded paper moisture indicator with

removable element cartridge and plastic cap.
4. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
5. Maximum working temperature: 200 degrees F.
2.5 VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Sporlan Valve Co.
B. Diaphragm Packless Valves:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. UL listed, globe or angle pattern, forged brass body and bonnet

solder or flared ends.
2. Phosphor bronze and stainless steel diaphragms, rising stem and

hand wheel.
3. Stainless steel spring, nylon seats, disc with positive back

seating.
C. Packed Angle Valves:
1. Forged brass or nickel-plated forged steel, solder or flared

ends.
2. Forged brass seal caps with copper gasket, rising stem and seat
with back seating, molded stem packing.
D. Ball Valves:
1. Two piece bolted forged brass body with teflon ball seals and
copper tube extensions, brass bonnet and seal cap, chrome
plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals, soldered
or threaded ends.
2. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig
E. Service Valves:
1. Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable

valve core, integral ball check valve, flared or solder
ends.
F. Refrigerant Check Valves:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric Co.
b. Parker Hannifin Corp., Refrig. & Air Cond. Div.
c. Sporlan Valve Co.
d. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Globe Type:
a. Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap

with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc holder,
phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon
seat disc.
b. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
c. Maximum working temperature: 300 degrees F.
3. Straight Through Type:
a. Spring, neoprene seat.
b. Maximum working pressure: 500 psig.
c. Maximum working temperature: 250 degrees F.
2.6 REFRIGERANT STRAINERS
A. Manufacturers:
B. Straight Line or Angle Line Type:
1. Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable

cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire or monel
reinforced with brass.
C. Straight Line, Non-Cleanable Type:
1. Steel shell, copper plated fittings, stainless steel wire

screen.
2.7 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE REGULATORS
A. Manufacturers:
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Brass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting or pilot

operated with remote pressure pilot, adjustable over 0 to 80 psig
range, for maximum working pressure of 450psig.
2.8 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
B. Straight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene

seat, factory sealed and stamped with ASME UV and National Board
Certification NB; for standard 450 psig setting; selected to
ASHRAE 15.
2.9 REFRIGERANT FILTER-DRIERS
A. Manufacturers:
B. Replaceable Cartridge Angle Type:
1. Shell: ARI 710, UL listed, brass, removable cap, for maximum

working pressure of 500 psig.
2. Filter Cartridge: Pleated media with integral end rings,

stainless steel support, ARI 730 rating for two tons.
3. Filter/Dryer Cartridge: Pleated media with solid core sieve

with activated alumina, ARI 730 rating for two tons.
4. Wax Removal Cartridge: Molded bonded core of activated charcoal

with integral gaskets, desiccant ARI 710 moisture rating.
C. Permanent Straight Through Type:
1. ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter

core, for maximum working pressure of 500 psig.
2. Rating: ARI 710 flow capacity of two tons or ARI 730 flow
24000 AVILA ROAD
capacity of two tons.
2.10 REFRIGERANT SOLENOID VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
B. Valve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass or steel body and
internal parts, synthetic seat, stainless steel stem and plunger
assembly, integral strainer, with flared, solder, or threaded
ends; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig. Stem designed to
allow manual operation in case of coil failure.
C. Coil Assembly: UL 429, UL listed, replaceable with molded

electromagnetic coil, moisture and fungus proof, with surge
protector and color coded lead wires, integral junction box with
pilot light.
2.11 REFRIGERANT EXPANSION VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
B. Angle or Straight Through Type: ARI 750; design suitable for

refrigerant, brass body, internal or external equalizer, bleed
hole, mechanical pressure limit (maximum operating pressure MOP
feature), adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet
strainer, with non-replaceable capillary tube and remote sensing
bulb and remote bulb well.
C. Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to

determine available pressure drop across valve. Select valve for
maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees
F superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and
oversized at part load.
2.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Valve:
1. Brass bodies with flared or solder connection, needle valve

with floating needle and machined seat, stepper motor
drive.
2. Capacity: Nominal two tons.
3. Electrical Characteristics: 12 VA, 12 volts DC.
C. Evaporation Control System:
1. Electronic microprocessor based unit in enclosed case,

proportional integral control with adaptive superheat,
maximum operating pressure function, pre-selection
allowance for electrical defrost and hot gas bypass.
2. Electrical Characteristics: 12 VA, 220/115 volts, single phase,

60 Hz.
D. Refrigeration System Control: Electronic microprocessor based

unit in enclosed case, with proportional integral control of
valve, on/off thermostat, air temperature alarm (high and low),
solenoid valve control, liquid injection adaptive superheat
control, maximum operating pressure function, night setback
thermostat, timer for defrost control.
2.13 REFRIGERANT RECEIVERS
A. Internal Diameter 6 inch (150 mm) and Smaller: ARI 495, UL

listed, steel, brazed; 400 psig maximum pressure rating, with
taps for inlet, outlet, and pressure relief valve.
B. Internal Diameter 6 inch (150 mm) and Larger: ARI 495, welded
steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Section VIII;
400 psig with taps for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure
relief valve, and magnetic liquid level indicator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-

excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous
pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open
ends with temporary plugs or caps.
A. Provide inserts for placement in concrete forms.
B. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete


carrying pipe 4 inches (100 mm) and larger.

with slab surface.
and provide plate and nut recessed, grouted and flush with top of
slab.
A. Install hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5, ASTM

F708, and MSS SP 89.
B. Support horizontal piping hangers as scheduled.
C. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between

finished covering and adjacent work.
E. Install hangers to allow 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment.

Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of
supported pipe.
F. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser

piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
G. Where installing several pipes in parallel and at same elevation,

provide multiple pipe hangers or trapeze hangers.
H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping,

with sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.
I. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports in accordance with

Section 09 90 00. Finish paint exposed steel hangers and supports
in accordance with Section 09 90 00. Hangers and supports located
24000 AVILA ROAD
in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are

not considered exposed.
J. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other

equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and
fittings.
K. Install pipe hangers and supports in accordance with Section

23 05 29.
3.5 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain

gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with

use of space.
C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer

to Section 23 05 29.
E. Install pipe identification in accordance with Section 23 05 53.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without

stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.
G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
H. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide

traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers as required.
Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.
I. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing.
J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building

framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich
primer to welds. Refer to Section 05 12 00.
K. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories,

ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 90 00.
L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
M. Insulate piping and equipment; refer to Section 23 07 00.
N. Provide replaceable cartridge filter-dryers, with isolation

valves and bypass with valve.
O. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of

evaporator on suction line.
P. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with

refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator.
24000 AVILA ROAD
Q. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of

compressor, parallel to crankshaft.
R. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to

Section 26 05 03.
S. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.
T. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems

and for disposal of refrigerant.
U. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5.
3.6 INSTALLATION - REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES
A. Refrigerant Liquid Indicators:
1. Install line size liquid indicators in main liquid line

downstream of condenser.
2. When receiver is provided, install line size liquid indicators

in liquid line downstream of receiver.
3. Install line size liquid indicators downstream of liquid

solenoid valves.
B. Refrigerant Valves:
1. Install service valves on compressor suction and discharge.
2. Install gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.
3. Install gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and

outlet.
4. Install check valves on compressor discharge.
5. Install check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple

condenser systems.
6. Install refrigerant charging valve in liquid line between

receiver shut-off valve and expansion valve.
C. Strainers:
1. Install line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.
2. Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are

used, install single main liquid-line strainer.
3. On steel piping systems, install strainer in suction line.
4. Install shut-off valves on each side of strainer.
D. Install pressure relief valves on ASME receivers. Install relief
24000 AVILA ROAD
valve discharge piping to terminate outdoors.
E. Filter-Dryers:
1. Install permanent filter-dryers in low temperature systems.
2. Install permanent filter-dryer in systems containing hermetic

compressors.
3. Install replaceable cartridge filter-dryer vertically in liquid

line adjacent to receivers.
4. Install replaceable cartridge filter-dryer upstream of each

solenoid valve.
F. Solenoid Valves:
1. Install in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-

out or pump-down compressor control.
2. Install in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator

systems.
3. Install in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop

flow of oil and refrigerant into suction line when system
shuts down.
A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirement: Field

B. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.
C. Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig.

Perform final tests at 27 inches (92 kPa) vacuum and 200 psig
(1470 kPa) using electronic leak detector.
D. Repair leaks.
E. Retest until no leaks are detected.
3.8 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:

COPPER STEEL MINIMUM MINIMUM
PIPE SIZE TUBING PIPE HANGER ROD HANGER ROD
Inches (mm) MAXIMUM MAXIMUM DIAMETER DIAMETER
HANGER HANGER COPPER STEEL PIPE
SPACING SPACING TUBING Inches
Feet Feet Inches
1/2 (12) 5 7 3/8 3/8
3/4 (20) 5 7 3/8 3/8
24000 AVILA ROAD
1 (25) 6 7 3/8 3/8

1-1/4 (32) 7 7 3/8 3/8
1-1/2 (38) 8 9 3/8 3/8
2 (50) 8 10 3/8 3/8
2-1/2 (65) 9 11 1/2 1/2
3 (75) 10 12 1/2 1/2
4 (100) 10 12 1/2 5/8
5 (125) 10 12 1/2 5/8
6 (150) 10 12 5/8 3/4
3.9 DEMONSTRATION

B. Demonstrate operation and maintenance procedures.
C. Furnish services for manufacturer’s technical representative for

one 8 hour day to instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and
maintenance of refrigerant piping. Schedule training with Owner,
provide at least 7 days notice to Construction Manager of
training date.
D. Provide manuals for attendees.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 31 00
HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Duct Materials.
2. Insulated flexible ducts.
3. Single wall spiral round ducts.
4. Single wall spiral flat oval ducts.
5. Transverse duct connection system.
6. Casings.
7. Ductwork fabrication.
8. Duct cleaning.
1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product

requirements for concrete for placement by this section.

requirements for Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or
coating specified by this section.

Equipment: Product requirements for hangers, supports and
sleeves for placement by this section.
4. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Product

requirements for duct accessories for placement by this
section.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A90/A90M - Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of

Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy
Coatings.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-

Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
4. ASTM A568/A568M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet,

Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-
Rolled, General Requirements for.
5. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
6. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel,

Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-
Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability.
7. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet

and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength
Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability.
8. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and

Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
9. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm

Drain, and Culvert Pipe.
10. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Circular

Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.

B. National Fire Protection Association:

2. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air

Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
3. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire

Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:
1. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

Flexible.
1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Variation of duct configuration or sizes other than those of

equivalent or lower loss coefficient is not permitted except by
written permission. Size round ducts installed in place of
rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent
rectangular and round ducts.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Submit duct fabrication drawings, drawn to scale

not smaller than ¼ inch equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same
size as Contract Documents, indicating:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including

plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and
attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes

in plan view. For exhaust duct systems, indicate
classification of materials handled as defined in this
section.
3. Fittings.
4. Reinforcing details and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction details.
6. Penetrations through fire rated and other walls.
7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building

attachment, vibration isolation, and duct attachment.
C. Product Data: Submit data for duct materials, duct liner, duct
connectors.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of typical shop fabricated duct

fittings.
E. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date,

section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA
HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and
24000 AVILA ROAD
duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show

additional fittings used.
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and flexible.
B. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 96 standards.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS


manufacturer.

section.
B. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those
recommended by sealant manufacturers.
C. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct

sealant.
1.11 WARRANTY

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for ducts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCT MATERIALS
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet,

lock-forming quality, having G90 zinc coating of in conformance
with ASTM A90/A90M.
B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A1008/A1008M, ASTM A1011/A1011M, ASTM

A568/A568M.
C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14.

Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent
strength.
D. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304.
E. Concrete Ducts: ASTM C14; hub and spigot concrete sewer pipe with
ASTM C443 joints, rubber gaskets.
F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
G. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends,

threaded one end, or continuously threaded.
2.2 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Clevaflex.
2. Thermaflex.
B. Product Description: Two ply vinyl film supported by helical

wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor
barrier film.
1. Pressure Rating: 10 inches wg positive and 1.0 inches wg

negative.
2. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F.
4. Thermal Resistance: 4.2 square feet-hour-degree F per BTU.
2.3 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL ROUND DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. McGill AirFlow Corporation.
2. Semco Incorporated.
3. Tangent Air Corp.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Spiral Mfg. Co., Inc.
B. Product Description: UL 181, Class 1, round spiral lockseam duct

constructed of galvanized steel.
C. Construct duct with the following minimum gages:
Diameter Gauge
3 inches to 14 inches 26
D. Construct fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter Gauge
2.4 SINGLE WALL SPIRAL FLAT OVAL DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements Not

Permitted.
B. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct
24000 AVILA ROAD
constructed of galvanized steel; rated for 10 inches wg pressure.
C. Joints: Either fully welded or bolted flange with gasket material

in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
D. Construct duct with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Dimension Gauge
84 inches and larger 16
E. Construct fittings with the following minimum gauges:
Major Axis Fitting Dimension Gauge
62 inches and larger 16
2.5 DOUBLE WALL SPIRAL INSULATED ROUND DUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
B. Product Description: Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct

with light reinforcing corrugations, galvanized steel outer wall,
2 inch thick glass fiber insulation, solid galvanized steel inner
wall; fittings manufactured with solid inner wall.
C. Duct Coating: Polyvinyl chloride plastic, 4 mil thick on both

sides. Temperature range: minus 30 degrees F to 200 degrees F.
D. Construct round duct with the following minimum gages:
24000 AVILA ROAD
Diameter Gauge
E. Construct round fittings with the following minimum gages:
Diameter Gauge
2.6 TRANSVERSE DUCT CONNECTION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
B. Product Description: SMACNA "E" rated, SMACNA "F" rated, or

SMACNA "J" rated rigidity class connection, interlocking angle
and duct edge connection system with sealant, gasket, cleats, and
corner clips.
2.7 CASINGS
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and construct for
operating pressures indicated.
B. Reinforce access door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal
24000 AVILA ROAD
and vertical plenum supporting angles. Furnish hinged access

doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for
cleaning and inspection. Furnish clear wire glass observation
ports, minimum 6 x 6 inch size.
C. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward.

Furnish 16 gage back facing and 22 gage perforated front facing
with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch centers. Construct
panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb./cu ft minimum glass
fiber media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.
2.8 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA

HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as
indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing,
and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in

accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible (Round Duct Construction Standards), and as
indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing,
and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times
centerline duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular
elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes. Where acoustical
lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal
with glass fiber insulation.
D. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees

divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence
upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
E. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two

gages heavier than duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard.
Minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded.
Prime coat welded joints.
F. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does

not allow 45-degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical
tee connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

project conditions.
B. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating

transitions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
B. During construction, install temporary closures of metal or taped

polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from
entering ductwork system.
C. Use crimp joints with or without bead or beaded sleeve couplings

for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller.
D. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section

23 05 29.
E. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
F. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus

tape and draw bands.
G. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swing

so fan static pressure holds door in closed position.
H. Casings: Install floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete

curbs. Refer to Section 03 30 00. At floor, rivet panels on 8
inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated,
furnish liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported
at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal
shields.
3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install openings in ductwork where required to accommodate

thermometers and controllers. Install pitot tube openings for
testing of systems. Install pitot tube complete with metal can
with spring device or screw to prevent air leakage. Where
openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation
material inside metal ring.
B. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts

directly or with 5 feet maximum length of flexible duct held in
place with strap or clamp.
C. Connect air outlets and inlets to supply ducts directly or with

five foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible
duct to change direction.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 01 77 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final

cleaning.
B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to
remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air flow, clean one
half of system completely before proceeding to other half.
Protect equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt
24000 AVILA ROAD
with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
C. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect

equipment with potential to be harmed by excessive dirt with
filters, or bypass during cleaning. Install access openings into
ductwork for cleaning purposes.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Ductwork Material Schedule:
AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL
Supply (Heating Systems) Steel
Supply (System with Cooling Steel

Coils)
Return and Relief Steel
General Exhaust Steel, Aluminum
Outside Air Intake Steel
Combustion Air Steel
Intake and Exhaust Steel
B. Ductwork Pressure Class Schedule:
AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS
Constant Volume Supply 2 inch wg regardless of velocity.
Variable Air Volume Supply 2 inch wg regardless of velocity.

(downstream of VAV boxes)
Variable Air Volume Supply 4 inch wg

(upstream of VAV boxes)
Return and Relief 2 inch wg regardless of velocity.
General Exhaust 2 inch wg regardless of velocity.
Emergency Generation 1 inch wg

Ventilation
3.6 DUCT TESTING
A. All supply air ductwork and plenums downstream of the supply fans
and upstream of the terminal boxes shall be leak tested to shown
leaker is less than 1% of the design air flow.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. All return air ducts and plenum upstream of the return fan shall
be leak tested to show leakage is less than 1% of the design air
flow.
C. Provide results to the Construction Manager.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 36 00
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Constant volume terminal units.
2. Variable volume terminal units.
1. Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment: Product requirements for fan powered terminal
units for placement by this section.

Product requirements for control components to interface
with air terminal units.

Controls remote from unit.

Controls: Sequences of operation applying to units in this
section.

requirements for electrical connections to air terminal
units specified by this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 880 - Air Terminals.
2. ARI 885 -Procedure for Estimating Occupied Space Sound

Levels in the Application of Air Terminals and Air Outlets.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

Maximum).

24000 AVILA ROAD
1. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit data indicating configuration, general

assembly, and materials used in fabrication. Include catalog
performance ratings indicating airflow, static pressure, heating
coil capacity and NC designation. Include electrical
characteristics and connection requirements. Include schedules
listing discharge and radiated sound power level for each of
second through sixth octave bands at inlet static pressures of 1
inch to 4 inches wg.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit support and

hanging details, and service clearances required.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed


procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of units,

controls components.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive

literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data,
and parts lists. Include directions for resetting constant volume
regulators.
A. Test and rate air terminal units performance for air pressure
drop, flow performance, and acoustical performance in accordance
with ARI 880 and ARI 885. Attach ARI seal to each terminal unit.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

experience.

section.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Controls for

HVAC.
1.10 WARRANTY

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for air terminal units.

Requirements for extra materials.
B. Furnish two additional electric motors of each size of fan

powered terminal units.
PRODUCTS
1.12 SINGLE DUCT VARIABLE VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Anemostat Air Products.
2. Enviromental Technologies, Inc.
3. Krueger.
4. Titus.
B. Product Description: Variable air volume terminal units for

connection to central air systems, with electronic controls, and,
hot water heating coils.
C. Identification: Furnish each air terminal unit with

identification label and airflow indicator. Include unit nominal
airflow, maximum factory-set airflow and minimum factory-set
airflow and coil type.
D. Basic Assembly:
1. Casings: Minimum 20 gage galvanized steel.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Lining: Minimum 1 inch thick neoprene or vinyl coated glass

fiber insulation, 1.5 lb./cu ft density, meeting NFPA 90A
requirements and UL 181 erosion requirements. Face lining
with 2 mil Mylar film.
3. Plenum Air Inlets: Round stub connections, S slip and drive

connections for duct attachment.
4. Plenum Air Outlets: S slip-and-drive connections.
E. Basic Unit:
1. Configuration: Air volume damper assembly inside unit

casing. Locate control components inside protective metal
shroud.
2. Volume Damper: Construct of galvanized steel with

peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings; maximum
damper leakage: 2 percent of design air flow at 3 inches
inlet static pressure.
3. Mount damper operator to position damper normally open as

F. Attenuation Section: Line attenuation sections with 2 inch thick

insulation.
G. Round Outlet: Discharge collar matching inlet size.
H. Hot Water Heating Coil:
1. Construction: 1/2 inch copper tube mechanically expanded

into aluminum plate fins, leak tested under water to 200
psig pressure, factory installed.
2. Capacity: Based on 180 degree F entering water, 140 degree

F leaving water and 30 percent total air volume.
I. Automatic Damper Operator:
1. Electric Actuator: 24 volt with high limit with remote

temperature read and reset capability.
2. Velocity Reset Controller and Probe:
a. Pneumatic.
b. Calibration pressure taps for pressure independent

control to compensate for varying inlet static
pressure.
c. Minimum and maximum limits set at reset device.
d. Maintain airflow to within 5 percent of set point
24000 AVILA ROAD
with inlet static pressure variations up to 2 inches.
e. Reset span, adjustable 3 to 8 psi remaining constant

regardless of minimum or maximum setting. Reset start
point adjustable from 3-10 psi.
J. Sound Ratings: Not to exceed 20 NC at 10 psi static pressure.
K. Thermostat: Wall-mounted electric. Electronic type with

appropriate mounting hardware. Refer to Section 23 09 00,
23 09 23.
L. Controls: Actuators, space temperature sensors, and wiring shall

be furnished. Terminal manufacturer shall accept and factory
installed controllers provided by controls subcontractor.
M. Sequence of Operation: Refer to Section 23 09 93.
EXECUTION
1.13 EXAMINATION
A. Verify ductwork is ready for air terminal installation.
1.14 INSTALLATION
A. Connect to ductwork in accordance with Section 23 31 00.
B. Install ceiling access doors or locate units above easily

removable ceiling components.
C. Support units individually from structure. Do not support from

adjacent ductwork.
D. Support air terminal units connected by flexible duct

independently of flexible duct.
E. Install transition piece to match flexible duct size to inlet or

outlet of variable air volume terminal.
F. Install minimum of 5 ft of 1 inch thick lined ductwork downstream

of units. Refer to Section 23 31 00.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.15 ADJUSTING

Requirements for starting and adjusting.
B. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing

flow range modulation from 100 percent of design flow to 30
percent full flow. Set units with heating coils for minimum 50
percent full flow.
1.16 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 01 82 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements:

B. Demonstrate operation and maintenance procedures.
C. Furnish services for manufacturer’s technical representative for

one 8 hour day to instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and
maintenance of air terminal units. Schedule training with Owner
and provide at least 7 days notice to Construction Manager of
training date.
D. Provide manuals to all attendees.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Diffusers.
2. Registers
3. Grilles.
4. Door grilles.

Operators for adjustable louvers.

Operators for adjustable louvers.
3. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Volume dampers for

inlets and outlets.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:
1. AMCA 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters.

Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of

Air Outlets and Inlets.
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors:

Flexible.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit

schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location,
24000 AVILA ROAD
application, and noise level.
C. Samples: Submit two of each required air outlet and inlet type.
D. Test Reports: Rating of air outlet and inlet performance.


procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets

and inlets.
A. Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in

accordance with ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

Project.

section.
1.8 WARRANTY

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for air outlets and

inlets.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.1 PERFORATED FACE CEILING DIFFUSERS
A. Manufacturers:
2. E. H Price Company.
3. Krueger.
4. Nailor Industries, Inc.
5. Titus.
6. Tuttle and Bailey.
B. Type: Square perforated face with adjustable pattern, stamped,

multicore diffuser to discharge air in one-way, two-way, three-
way, four-way pattern with sector baffles where indicated.
C. Frame: Surface mount, Snap-in, Inverted T-bar, Spline type. In

plaster ceilings, furnish plaster frame and ceiling frame.
D. Fabrication: Steel with steel or aluminum frame and baked enamel

off-white finish.
2.2 CEILING SLOT DIFFUSERS (FLOW BAR)
A. Manufacturers:
3. Krueger.
5. Titus.
B. Type: Continuous slot, adjustable for left, right or vertical

discharge. For number of slots and width of slot refer to
schedule on the drawing.
C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions Steel with factory off-white

enamel finish.
D. Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw support clips for T
24000 AVILA ROAD
bar mounting and gasket mitered end border with end cap.
E. Plenum: Integral, galvanized steel, insulated.
2.3 CEILING EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Krueger.
5. Titus.
B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch

maximum spacing, with blades set at 45 degrees, vertical or
horizontal face as indicated on the drawings.
C. Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.
D. Fabrication: Steel with 20 gage minimum frames and 22 gage

minimum blades, steel and aluminum with 20 gage minimum frame, or
aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.
E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with

removable key operator, operable from face where not individually
connected to exhaust fans.
2.4 CEILING LINEAR EXHAUST AND RETURN GRILLES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Krueger.
5. Titus.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Type: Streamlined blades with 90 degree two-way deflection, 1/8 x

3/4 inch on 1/4 inch centers as indicated on the drawings.
C. Frame: 1 inch margin, extra heavy for floor mounting, with

countersunk screw mounting.

aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white baked enamel finish.
E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed blade type with

removable key operator, operable from face.
2.5 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Krueger.
5. Titus.
B. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable blades, 3/4 inch

minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing with spring or other
device to set blades, vertical or horizontal face, single or
double deflection.
C. Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.

aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white baked enamel finish.
E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated opposed blade type with removable

key operator, operable from face.
2.6 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Krueger.
24000 AVILA ROAD
5. Titus.
B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch

maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades,
vertical or horizontal face.
C. Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.

minimum blades, with factory off-white enamel finish.
E. Damper: Integral, gang-operated, opposed-blade type with

2.7 LINEAR WALL REGISTERS/GRILLES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Krueger.
5. Titus.
B. Type: Streamlined blades with 15 degree deflection, 1/8 x 3/4

inch on 1/4 inch centers.
C. Frame: 1 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket.
D. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory off-white enamel

finish.
E. Damper: Integral gang-operated opposed blade, damper with

2.8 DOOR GRILLES
A. Manufacturers:
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Krueger.
5. Titus.
B. Type: V-shaped louvers of 20 gage thick steel, 1 inch deep on 1/2

inch centers.
C. Frame: 20 gage steel with auxiliary frame to give finished

appearance on both sides of door, with factory prime coat finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

project conditions.
B. Verify inlet and outlet locations.
C. Verify ceiling systems are ready for installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection.
B. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles,

and registers, whether or not dampers are furnished as part of
diffuser, grille, and register assembly. Refer to Section
23 33 00.
C. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets

matte black.
A. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary

adjustments in position to conform to architectural features,
symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 23 81 26
SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Air handling unit.
2. Condensing unit.
1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Execution

requirements for concrete foundations specified by this
section.

Piping and Equipment: Vibration isolators.

Controls remote from unit.

Controls: Sequences of operation applying to units in this
section.
5. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Execution

requirements for connection to refrigerant piping specified
by this section.
6. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Flexible

connections.

Control systems remote from unit.
8. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections: Electrical

connection to units.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
1. ARI 210/240 - Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat

Pump Equipment.
2. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
3. ARI 340/360 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-

Conditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. ARI 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-

Conditioning Condensing Units.

Engineers:
1. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for

Testing Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation
for Removing Particulate Matter.
2. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings.
C. ASTM International:
1. ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray

(Fog) Apparatus.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
E. National Fire Protection Association:

1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit data indicating:
1. Cooling and heating capacities.
2. Dimensions.
3. Weights.
4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements.
5. Duct connections.
6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and

connection requirements.
7. Controls.
8. Accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly,

support details, connection requirements, and include start-up
instructions.
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify to meet or exceed specified

requirements.
E. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each

unit.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls

installed remotely from units.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive

literature, operating instructions, installation instructions,
and maintenance and repair data.
A. Performance Requirements: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less

than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with
compressors and evaporator coils when tested in accordance with
ARI 210/240, ARI 340/360.
B. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240, ARI

340/360, ARI 365.
C. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270.
D. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

experience.

section with minimum three documented experience approved by
manufacturer.

section.

24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Accept units and components on site in factory protective

containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect
for damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging,

unloading and transporting units.
1.9 Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry,
roofed location.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of condensing units with concrete pad.
B. Coordinate installation of air handling units with building

structure.
1.11 WARRANTY

Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish five year manufacturer’s warranty for compressors.

B. Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from

Date of Substantial Completion. Include maintenance items as
shown in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including
filter replacements, fan belt replacement, and controls checkout
and adjustments.
C. Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions

for this maintenance period. Furnish capability of response time
within 8 hours.

Requirements for maintenance materials.
PRODUCTS
1.14 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carrier Corp.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. The Trane Company.
3. York International.
B. Product Description: Split system consisting of air handling unit

and condensing unit including cabinet, evaporator fan,
refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit,
condenser, air filters, controls, air handling unit accessories,
condensing unit accessories, and refrigeration specialties.
1.15 FAN COIL UNIT
A. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Cabinet:
1. Panels: Constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel

finish. Access Panels: Located on both sides of unit.
Furnish with duct collars on inlets and outlets.
2. Insulation: Factory applied to each surface to insulate

entire cabinet. ½ inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber
with edges protected from erosion.
C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently

mounted with adjustable belt drive and high efficiency motor
complying with NEMA MG1, Type 1. Motor permanently lubricated
with built-in thermal overload protection. Furnish oversize
motor.
D. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto

aluminum fins. Factory leak tested under water. Removable, PVC
construction, double-sloped drain pan with piping connections on
both sides.
E. Refrigeration System: Single refrigeration circuits controlled by

factory installed thermal expansion valve.
F. Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber disposable media in metal

frames. 30 percent efficiency based on ASHRAE 52.1.
G. Fan Coil Unit Accessories:
1. Discharge Plenum: with construction and finish matching

unit casing. Integral grille of aluminum construction and
adjustable louvers.
2. Return Air Grille: mounted in return air opening of

aluminum construction and fixed louvers.
3. Mounting Subbase with construction and finish matching unit

casing.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. Vibration Isolators: Neoprene-in-shear type and as

specified in Section 23 05 48.
1.16 CONDENSING UNIT
A. General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing

units, consisting of casing, compressors, condensers, coils,
condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.
B. Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized

steel with manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. Designed
for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for
components and controls, and complete with removable panels for
required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors,
and drives.
C. Compressor: Single refrigeration circuit with rotary or hermetic

reciprocating type compressors, resiliently mounted, with
positive lubrication, and internal motor overload protection.
D. Condenser Coil: Constructed of copper tubing mechanically bonded

to copper fins, factory leak and pressure tested.
E. Controls: Furnish operating and safety controls including high

and low pressure cutouts. Control transformer. Furnish magnetic
contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.
F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically

and dynamically balanced. Wired to operate with compressor.
Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in
thermal overload protection. Furnish high efficiency fan motors.
G. Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories:
1. Controls to provide low ambient cooling to 0 or -20 degrees

F.
2. Time delay relay.
3. Anti-short cycle timer.
4. Disconnect switch.
5. Vibration isolators.
6. Hot gas bypass kit.
7. Coil with corrosion resistant coating capable of

withstanding salt spray test of 1000 hours in accordance
with ASTM B117.
8. Condenser Coil Guard: Condenser fan openings furnished with

PVC coated steel wire safety guards.
24000 AVILA ROAD
9. Suction and discharge pressure gauges.
H. Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following:
1. Charge of compressor oil.
2. Holding charge of refrigerant.
3. Replaceable core type filter drier.
4. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.
5. Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping.
6. Liquid line solenoid valve.
7. Charging valve.
8. Oil level sight glass.
9. Crankcase heater.
10. Hot gas muffler.
11. Pressure relief device.
I. Refrigerant: Furnish charge of refrigerant 410A.
1.17 CONTROLS
A. Thermostat: Remote space thermostat with single stage cooling.
B. Furnish interface to Building Automation and Control System

specified in Section 25 50 00, 23 09 23.
1.18 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted, non-fused type, interlocked

with access door, accessible from outside unit, with power
lockout capability.
EXECUTION
1.19 EXAMINATION

B. Verify concrete pad for condensing unit is ready for unit

installation.
1.20 INSTALLATION - AIR HANDLING UNIT
A. Connect air handling units to supply and return ductwork with
24000 AVILA ROAD
flexible connections. Refer to Section 23 33 00.
B. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to
condensate drainage system. Refer to Section 23 21 13.
C. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.
D. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with

Section 26 05 03.
E. Mount unit on vibration isolation.
1.21 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT
A. Install condensing units on vibration isolators.
B. Install units on concrete foundations.
C. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install

refrigerant specialties furnished with unit specified in Section
23 23 00.
D. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of

refrigerant.
E. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.
F. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing

unit, and field installed accessories.
G. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with

Section 26 05 03.
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for

manufacturer’s field services.
B. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of

operation, including routine servicing and checkout.
1.23 CLEANING

Requirements for cleaning.
B. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.
C. Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace

with permanent filters at Substantial Completion.
1.24 DEMONSTRATION
A. Section 01 82 00 - Demonstration and Training.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Demonstrate air handling unit operation and maintenance.
C. Demonstrate starting, maintenance, and operation of condensing

unit including low ambient temperature operation.
D. Furnish services of manufacturer's technical representative for

one 8 hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and
maintenance of units. Schedule training with Owner, provide at
least 7 days notice to Construction Manager of training date.
E. Provide manual to attendees.

Requirements for protecting finished Work.
B. Do not operate air handling units until ductwork is clean,

filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been test
run under observation.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 05 01
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. This section supplements all sections of this Division and shall

apply to all phases of work hereinafter specified, shown on the
drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of
electrical systems for the Project. The Work required under this
Division, is not limited to the Electrical Drawings. Refer to
Site, Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings that may
designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of the
Specifications is to provide a complete electrical system that
includes all documents that are a part of the Contract.
1. Work Included: Furnish all labor, material, services and

skilled supervision necessary for the construction,
erection, installation, connections, testing, and adjustment
of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein,
or shown or noted on the Drawings, and its delivery to the
Owner complete in all respects ready for use.
B. Contract Drawings: The Contract Drawings are shown in part

diagrammatic, intended to convey the Scope of Work indicating the
intended general arrangement of equipment, conduit and outlets.
Follow the contract drawings in laying out the work and verify
spaces for the installation of the materials and equipment based
on actual dimensions of equipment furnished. Where conflicts
occur, the most stringent application shall apply wherever a
question exists as to the exact intended location of outlets or
equipment obtain instructions from the Architect before proceeding
with the Work.
C. Equipment or Fixtures: Equipment and fixtures shall be connected

to provide circuit continuity in accordance with the
Specifications whether or not each piece of conductor, conduit, or
protective device is shown between such items of equipment or
fixtures, and the point of circuit origin.
D. Work Installed but Furnished under Other Sections: The Electrical

Work includes the installation or connection of certain materials
and equipment furnished under other sections. Verify installation
details. Foundations for apparatus and equipment will be
furnished under other sections unless otherwise noted or detailed.
A. Guarantee: Furnish a written guarantee for a period of two years

from date of substantial completion.
B. Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be
24000 AVILA ROAD
new and shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear

their label, or listed and certified by a nationally recognized
testing authority where UL does not have an approval. Custom made
equipment must have complete test data submitted by the
manufacturer attesting to its safety.
C. Codes and Regulations:
1. Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of

all apparatus and materials furnished under the requirements
of these specifications shall conform to the latest
publications or standard rules of the following:
a. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers –

IEEE
b. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association – NEMA
c. California Fire Code – CFC
d. California Building Code – CBC
e. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. – UL
f. National Fire Protection Association – NFPA
g. American Society for Testing and Materials – ASTM
h. American National Standards Institute – ANSI
i. American Standard Association – ASA
j. California Electrical Code – CEC
k. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association – IPCEA
l. California Code of Regulations, Title 24
D. The term "Code", when used within the specifications, shall refer
to the Publications, Standards, ordinances and codes, listed
above. In the case where the codes have different levels of
requirements the most stringent rules shall apply.
E. Seismic Design of Electrical Equipment:
1. All electrical prefabricated equipment is to be designed and

constructed in such a manner that all portions, elements,
sub-assemblies and/or parts of said equipment and the
equipment as a whole, including their attachments, will
resist a horizontal load equal to the operating weights of
those parts multiplied times the following factors:
2. Load is to be applied at the center of gravity of the part

and to be in any direction horizontally. Design stresses
shall be in accordance with the specifications for design of
24000 AVILA ROAD
the American Institute of Steel Construction. Anchorage,

support and/or attachment of said prefabricated equipment to
the structure should be in accordance with the details found
in the plans and specifications.
3. It is the entire responsibility of the Contractor to verify

the design of equipment so that the strength and anchorage
of the internal components of the equipment exceeds the
force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to
the supporting structure.
F. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Codes, Permits and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed

minimum requirements, the Contract Documents take
precedence. Where code conflicts occur, the most stringent
shall apply unless variance is approved. Where provisions
in the drawings and specifications differ in regard to code
application, size, quality, quantity or type of equipment,
Contractor shall include in the bid, costs for the most
costly provision either denoted in the specifications or on
the drawings. This provision shall apply as an amendment to
the California Public Contracts Code.
a. Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses,

fees and Code. Permits, licenses, fees, inspections
and arrangements required for the Work shall be
obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless
otherwise specified.
b. Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility

companies serving the Project. Make all arrangements
with the utility companies for proper coordination of
the Work.
2. Substitutions: The materials, products, and equipment

described in the Contract Documents establish a standard of
required function, dimension, appearance, and quality.
Architect may consider requests for substitutions of
specified equipment, materials, or products and then only
when request are submitted in accordance with the provisions
of the Contract Documents, Division 1, and are received by
the Architect a minimum of 21 days prior to the date
established for the receipt of the bid. No substitutions
will be considered after the date of the receipt of the bid
or contract award unless there is cause for a substitution
which complies in every respect to the provisions of the
Product Requirements and Substitutions, Section 01 60 00.
a. Acceptance or no exceptions taken by the engineer on

any substitution proposed by the contractor shall not
be construed as relieving the contractor from
compliance with the project’s specifications and
performance requirements nor departure there from. The
contractor remains responsible for details and
24000 AVILA ROAD
accuracy for confirming and correlating quantities and

dimensions and for the selection of fabrication
processes, techniques and assembly, coordination of
his work with that of all other trades and making any
needed modifications consequent to the substitution at
his own cost and for performing the work in a safe
manner.
G. Record Drawings: Comply with Section 01 78 10. Keep up to date,

monthly payments withheld if not updated.
H. Shop Drawings and Submittals: Submittals on all material prior to

installation.
1. Drawings shall be submitted, as required under Section 01 33

00.
2. Shop drawings shall be submitted on, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Equipment Wiring Connections
b. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
c. Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
d. Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
e. Panelboards
f. Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures
g. Wiring Devices
h. Interior Lighting
i. Fire Detection and Alarm
I. Cutting and Patching:
1. Obtain written permission from the Architect before core

drilling or cutting any structural members. Exact method
and location of conduit penetrations and/or openings in
concrete walls, floors, or ceilings shall be as approved by
the Architect.
2. All core drilling, cutting and patching for this work shall
be performed under this Section of the specifications. Use
craftsmen skilled in their respective sections for cutting,
fitting, repairing, patching of plaster and finishing of
materials including carpentry work, metal work or concrete
work required for this Work. Do not weaken walls,
partitions or floor with cutting. Holes required to be cut
in floors must be drilled without excessive breaking out
around the holes. Patching and/or refinishing shall be
24000 AVILA ROAD
determined by the Architect.
3. Use care in piercing waterproofing. After the part piercing

the waterproofing has been set in place, seal openings and
make absolutely watertight.
4. Seal all openings to meet the fire rating of the particular

wall floor or ceiling. Conform to Section 07 84 00.
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions:
1. The contractor shall visit the site and verify existing

conditions. Where existing conditions differ from the
drawings, adjustment shall be made and allowances included
for all necessary equipment to complete all parts of the
drawings and specifications.
2. Electrical circuits affecting work shall be de-energized

while working on or near them.
3. Arrange the work so that electrical power is available to

all electrical equipment within existing facility at all
times. Schedule all interruptions at the convenience of the
Owner, including exact time and duration. Provide temporary
power during all periods of interruption, which are deemed
excessive by the Owner. Costs of all premium time
(overtime) resulting from the scheduled power interruptions
and all costs for providing temporary power shall be
included in the cost of the Work.
B. Protection:
1. Protection of apparatus, materials and equipment. Take such

precautions as necessary to properly protect all apparatus,
fixtures, appliances, material, equipment and installations
from damage of any kind. The Engineer may reject any
particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus or
equipment scratched, dented or otherwise damaged.
2. Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and make

watertight and insect proof. Protect equipment outlets and
conduit openings with temporary plugs or caps at all times
that work is not in progress.
C. Sequencing and Scheduling:
1. Work lines and established heights shall be in strict

accordance with architectural drawings and specifications
insofar as these drawings and specifications extend. Verify
all dimensions shown and establish all elevations and
detailed dimensions not shown.
2. Lay out and coordinate all work well enough in advance to
24000 AVILA ROAD
avoid conflicts or interferences with other work in progress

so that in case of interference the electrical layout may be
altered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of
any work and without additional cost to the Owner.
Conflicts arising from lack of coordination shall be this
Contractor's responsibility. Maintain all code-required
clearances about electrical equipment. Unless specifically
noted otherwise, establish the exact location of electrical
equipment based on the actual dimensions of equipment
furnished.
1.4 WORK IN COOPERATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS
A. Examine the drawings and specifications and determine the work to

be performed by the electrical, mechanical and other sections.
Provide the type and amount of electrical materials and equipment
necessary to place this work in proper operation, completely
wired, tested and ready for use. This shall include all conduit,
wire, motor starters, disconnects, relays, time clocks and other
devices for the required operation sequence of all electrical,
mechanical and other systems or equipment. Where a conflict
occurs on drawings, the most stringent shall apply.
B. Provide conduit and wire for all controls and other devices, both
line and low voltage, described in this or other parts of the
contract documents. Install all control housings and back boxes
required for installing conduit and wire to the controls.
C. Install control wiring in separate conduit between each heating,

ventilating and air conditioning sensing device and its control
panel and/or control motor. Before installing any conduit for
heating, ventilating and air conditioning control wiring, verify
from the control manufacturer's shop drawings where these separate
conduit runs are required.
D. Plan all work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference

with other sections. Inform all parties concerned of openings
required for equipment or conduit required in the building
construction for Electrical Work and provide all special frames,
sleeves and anchor bolts as required. Coordinate the electrical
work with the mechanical installation. Promptly report to the
Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the
installation of this work which might prevent prompt and proper
installation, or make it unsuitable to connect with or receive the
work of other sections. Failure to so report shall constitute an
acceptance of the work of other sections as being fit and proper
for the execution of this work.
1.5 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT
A. Upon completion of all Electrical Work, the contractor shall

provide all testing as follows:
1. Operational Test: Test all circuit breakers, receptacles,

motors and all other electrical and communication equipment.
24000 AVILA ROAD
Replace all faulty devices and equipment discovered during

testing with new devices and equipment at no additional
cost, and that part of the system (or devices or equipment)
shall then be retested.
2. Secondary Grounding Resistance: Perform ground continuity

test between main ground system and equipment frame, system
neutral and/or derived neutral point.
3. Ground Fault System Test: Measure system neutral insulation

resistances to ensure no shunt ground paths exist.
4. All test procedure shall be performed by an independent

testing firm.
1.6 MAINTENANCE, SERVICING AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS, AND WIRING DIAGRAMS
A. Prior to substantial completion, the contractor shall submit the

number of copies per Section 01 78 20 and servicing instructions,
as well as an equal number of copies of complete wiring diagrams
all neatly bound in hard cover 3-ring binders with table of
contents and tabs for the following items or equipment: (See
Section 01 78 20 for Operation and Maintenance Data):
1. Equipment Wiring Connections
2. Lighting Control Devices
3. Panelboards
4. Wiring Devices
5. Interior Lighting
6. Fire Detection and Alarm
B. All wiring diagrams shall specifically cover the installed system

indicating zones, wiring, and components added to the system.
Typical drawings will not be accepted.
C. Include Product / calculations data with Maintenance and

Operations manuals. Include all testing reports with Maintenance
and Operation manuals.
1.7 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. After all requirements of the specifications and/or the drawings

have been fully completed representatives of the Owner will
inspect the Work. The Contractor shall provide competent
personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item of system, to
the full satisfaction of each representative. The Contractor
shall provide 40 hours of minimum scheduled operation and
maintenance training for The GSA choice of staff to be trained on
each system indicated in 1.6A above. See specific sections for
additional training/operation hours required for school personnel.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Provide manuals for attendees.
C. Final acceptance of the work will be made by the Owner after

receipt of approval and recommendation of acceptance from each
representative.
D. The Contractor shall furnish Record Drawings before final payment

of retention.
1.8 WARRANTIES
A. Guarantee all materials, equipment, apparatus and workmanship to

be free of defective material and faulty workmanship for period of
two years from date of Substantial Completion, Unless extended
guarantee periods are specified in individual sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Meetings
B. Invite GSA maintenance staff to attend all pre-installation

meetings.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Active electrodes.
2. Wire.
3. Grounding well components.
4. Mechanical connectors.
5. Exothermic connections.
1. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing: Bonding or welding

bars when reinforcing steel is used for electrodes.
2. Section 09 69 00 - Access Flooring: Grounding systems for

access flooring.
3. Section 26 41 00 - Facility Lightning Protection: Grounding

of lightning protection system.
4. Section 33 79 00 - Site Grounding: Site related grounding

components for buildings and facilities.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial

and Commercial Power Systems.
2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding

Electronic Equipment.
B. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical

Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.
1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
2. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding

electrodes:
1. Existing Metal underground water pipe.
2. Metal building frame.
3. Concrete-encased electrode.
4. Plate electrode.
A. Construct and test grounding systems for access flooring systems

on conductive floors accordance with IEEE 1100. Refer to Section
09 69 00.
A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms maximum.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures
B. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and

connections.
C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and

resistance of each electrode.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active

electrodes.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed

requirements.
A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components

and grounding electrodes.
A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC,

IEEE 142, and UL labeled.
B. Perform Work in accordance with the State.
C. Maintain one copy each document on site.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS

specified in this section with minimum three 3 years documented
experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this

section with minimum 3 years documented experience approved by
manufacturer.
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
B. Convene minimum one 1week prior to commencing work of this

section.
A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements


chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original
packaging.
D. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation.

Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities
needed for immediate installation.
1.12 COORDINATION
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements
B. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel

prior concrete placement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROD ELECTRODES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Erico, Inc.
2. O-Z Gedney Co.
3. Thomas & Betts, Electrical
4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product
B. Furnish materials in accordance with the State.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Product Description:
1. Material: Copper-clad steel.
2. Diameter: 3/4 inch 19 mm
3. Length: 10 feet 3.0 m
D. Connector: U-bolt clamp.
2.2 ACTIVE ELECTRODES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Erico, Inc.
2. O-Z Gedney Co.
4. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
2.3 WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Foundation Electrodes: 4 AWG.
C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor insulated.
D. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated.
2.4 GROUNDING WELL COMPONENTS
A. Well Pipe: 8 inches NPS (DN200) by 24 inches (600 mm) long

concretepipe with belled end.
B. Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.
2.5 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Erico, Inc.
2. ILSCO Corporation
3. O-Z Gedney Co.
5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and
bonding applications, in configurations required for particular
installation.
2.6 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Furnish materials in accordance with the State’s standards.
B. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools

for preparing and making permanent field connections between
grounding system components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

B. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before

driving rod electrodes.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils, surface contaminants at connection

points.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to

accommodate renovations.
B. Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods

compatible with existing electrical installations, or as
specified.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with IEEE 142.
B. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
C. Install 4AWG bare copper wire in foundation footing as indicated

on Drawings.
D. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure;

bond to ground.
E. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and

fountain structures.
F. Install grounding and bonding in patient care areas to meet

requirements of NFPA 99.
G. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated
24000 AVILA ROAD
conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway.
Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
H. Connect to site grounding system. Refer to Section 33 79 00.
I. Bond to lightning protection system. Refer to Section 26 41 00.
J. Install continuous grounding using underground cold water system

and building steel as grounding electrode. Where water piping is
not available, install artificial station ground by means of
driven rods or buried electrodes.
K. Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance

with NEC, including service equipment, distribution panels,
lighting panelboards, switch and starter enclosures, motor
frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current
carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
L. Install branch circuits feeding isolated ground receptacles with

separate insulated grounding conductor, connected only at
isolated ground receptacle, ground terminals, and at ground bus
of serving panel.
M. Accomplish grounding of electrical system by using insulated

grounding conductor installed with feeders and branch circuit
conductors in conduits. Size grounding conductors in accordance
with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground
bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting
fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal enclosures of
service equipment. Ground conduits by means of grounding bushings
on terminations at panelboards with installed number 12 conductor
to grounding bus.
N. Grounding electrical system using continuous metal raceway system

enclosing circuit conductors in accordance with NEC.
O. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to

energizing equipment.
P. Install Work in accordance with the States standards.
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, 01 70 00 - Execution and

Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Grounding and Bonding: Perform inspections and tests listed in

NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
D. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
E. Perform leakage current tests in accordance with NFPA 99.
24000 AVILA ROAD
F. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
G. When improper grounding is found on receptacles, check

receptacles in entire project and correct. Perform retest.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Conduit supports.
2. Formed steel channel.
3. Spring steel clips.
4. Sleeves.
5. Mechanical sleeve seals.
6. Firestopping relating to electrical work.
7. Firestopping accessories.
8. Equipment bases and supports.
1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Product

requirements for concrete for placement by this section.
2. Section 27 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Communications

Systems.
3. Section 28 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electronic

Safety and Security.
1.2 REFERENCES

2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Construction and Materials.
3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-

Penetration Fire Stops.
4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint

Systems.
B. FM Global:
24000 AVILA ROAD
1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials &

Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property
Conservation.
1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

Building Materials.
3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint

Systems.
5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
E. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):
1. WH - Certification Listings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or

stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and
penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of
fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, UL 1479 to

achieve fire ratings as noted on Drawings for adjacent
construction, but not less than 1 hour fire rating.
A. Firestopping: Conform to applicable code FM, UL, WH for fire

resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B. Firestopping: Provide certificate of compliance from authority

having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of

trapeze hangers.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Product Data:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data

2. Firestopping: Submit data on product characteristics,

performance and limitation criteria.
D. Firestopping Schedule: Submit schedule of opening locations and

sizes, penetrating items, and required listed design numbers to
seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent
assembly.
E. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of hangers and

supports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and

assembly of components.
2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation

instructions.

H. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH

listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional
engineer suitable for presentation to authority having
jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection
requirements.
A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL

1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10 inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum
positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and
temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than
1-hour.
1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings,

but not less than 1-hour.
B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor

Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and
products of combustion.
1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials

for penetrating items connecting maximum of three stories.
2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having

jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of
two stories.
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall
Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve fire resistant
rating as indicated on Drawings for assembly in which joint is
installed.
D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls:

ASTM E119 with 0.10 inch water gage (24.9 Pa) minimum positive
pressure differential to achieve fire resistant rating as
indicated on Drawings for floor assembly.
E. Surface Burning Characteristics: 25/450 flame spread/smoke

developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
F. Perform Work in accordance with standard.
G. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this

section with minimum 5 years documented experience approved by
manufacturer.
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation

meeting.

section.



chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original
packaging.

B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate

material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F (15 degrees C).
24000 AVILA ROAD
C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum
3 days after installation of firestopping materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Manufacturers:
2. Line Systems.
3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division.
4. Unistrut Corp
5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon

steel with free running threads.
C. Beam Clamps: Malleable Iron, with tapered hole in base and back
to accept either bolt or hanger rod. Set screw: hardened steel.
D. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to

fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.
E. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for

surface mounted conduits.
F. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees

F (85 degrees C). Self locking.
2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Manufacturers:
2. B-Line Systems.
3. Midland Ross Corporation, Electrical Products Division.
4. Unistrut Corp.
B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel with holes 1

1/2 inches on center.
C. Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
D. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage (2.8 mm) thick steel.

With holes 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) on center.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.3 SLEEVES
A. Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
B. Sleeves for conduits Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2

mm) thick galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for conduits Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls,

Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage (1.2
mm) thick galvanized steel.
D. Sleeves for conduits Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors
and Walls, and Fire Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves
including seals, UL listed.
E. Fire-stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.
2. NMP Corporation.
3. Substitutions: [Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
B. Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
C. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of

interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and
pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when
tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
2.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Dow Corning Corp.
2. Hilti Corp.
3. 3M fire Protection Products.
B. Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
C. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple

manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system
description and performance requirements; provide only one type
for each similar application.
1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Single
24000 AVILA ROAD
component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible
silicone sealant.
2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Single component foam

compound.
3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers:

Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos
fibers.
4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of

mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer
for smoke stopping.
5. Mechanical Firestopping Device with Fillers: Mechanical

device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer,
covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with
collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops.
6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which

expands on exposure to surface heat gain.
7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows.
D. Color: Dark gray.
2.6 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for

specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire
ratings.
B. Dam Material: Permanent:

Mineral fiberboard.
Mineral fiber matting.
Sheet metal.
C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners,

temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position
and retain materials in place.
D. General:
1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by

independent testing laboratory.
2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or

floor being penetrated.
E. Non-Rated Surfaces:
1. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring

escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering
openings in occupied areas where conduit is exposed.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish modular
mechanical type seal consisting of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space
between conduit and cored opening or water-stop type wall
sleeve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION

B. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
C. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION

material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping
material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-

actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
F. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or

cutting structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide expansion anchors,

powder actuated anchors and preset inserts.
2. Steel Structural Elements: Provide beam clamps, spring

steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and

expansion anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions:

Provide toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners.
5. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors and preset

inserts.
6. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws.
24000 AVILA ROAD
7. Wood Elements: Provide wood screws.
B. Inserts:
1. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.
2. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced

concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for

inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100 mm).
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts

flush with slab surface.
C. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance

with NEC.
D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or

conduit.
E. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.
F. Supports:
1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel

channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat
appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install
spring lock washers under nuts.
2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with

minimum of four anchors.
3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to

stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch (25 mm) off wall.
4. Support vertical conduit at floor.
G. Install Work in accordance with standards.
3.4 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING
A. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and

openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork,
conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B. Apply primer where recommended by manufacturer for type of

firestopping material and substrate involved, and as required for
compliance with required fire ratings.
C. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve

required fire and smoke rating to uniform density and texture.
D. Compress fibered material to maximum 40 percent of its

uncompressed size.
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density,
filling cavities and spaces. Place sealant to completely seal
junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
F. Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating

required.
G. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured. Dam

material to remain.
H. Fire Rated Surface:
1. Seal opening at floor, wall, partition, ceiling, and roof

as follows:

minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) on both sides of building
element.
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void

between sleeve and building element.
c. Pack void with backing material.
d. Seal ends of sleeve with UL listed fire resistive

silicone compound to meet fire rating of structure
penetrated.
2. Where conduit, penetrates fire rated surface, install

firestopping product in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
I. Non-Rated Surfaces:
1. Seal opening through non-fire rated wall, partition floor,

and ceiling:

minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) on both sides of building
element.
b. Size sleeve allowing minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) void

between sleeve and building element.
c. Install type of firestopping material recommended by

manufacturer.
2. Install escutcheons, floor plates or ceiling plates where

conduit, penetrates non-fire rated surfaces in occupied
spaces. Occupied spaces include rooms with finished
ceilings and where penetration occurs below finished
ceiling.
3. Interior partitions: Seal pipe penetrations at

telecommunication rooms, data rooms. Apply sealant to both
24000 AVILA ROAD
sides of penetration to completely fill annular space
between sleeve and conduit.
3.5 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts,

and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
B. Construct supports of steel members formed steel channel. Brace

and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
3.6 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking

rubber links.
B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and

fill with silicon foam.
C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around

sleeves.
D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion

and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall,

close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with
fire stopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close
fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of
penetration.
F. Install plastic stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications

and submitted schedule.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways,

outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes.
1. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems.
2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
3. Section 26 27 16 - Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures.
4. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.
5. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for

Communications Systems.
6. Section 27 05 36 - Cable Trays for Communications Systems.
7. Section 28 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic

8. Section 28 05 36 - Cable Trays for Electronic Safety and

Security.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing,

Zinc Coated.

Maximum).
2. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers,

and Box Supports.
3. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers,

and Box Supports.
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other

locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment
connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway
and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned.
Provide raceway to complete wiring system.
B. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and electrical

metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush
mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure
for large pull boxes.
C. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and electrical

metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush
mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure
for large pull boxes.
A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) unless otherwise

specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit for the following:
1. Flexible metal conduit.
2. Raceway fittings.
3. Conduit bodies.
4. Surface raceway.
5. Pull and junction boxes.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application

conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing
agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of Product.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents:
1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet,

pull, and junction boxes.

B. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing

above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
1.8 COORDINATION

project conditions.
B. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected

under Section 26 05 03.
C. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets

mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
PRODUCTS
1.9 METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell Wiring Devices.
2. Thomas & Betts Corp.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match

conduit.
1.10 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
3. The Wiremold Co.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.11 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carlon Electrical Products.
B. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC

jacket.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
1.12 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers:
3. Walker Systems Inc.
4. The Wiremold Co.
B. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel [or malleable

iron], [compression] [set screw] [indenter] type.
1.13 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Manufacturers:
2. Walker Systems Inc.
3. The Wiremold Co.
B. Product Description: Sheet metal channel with fitted cover,

suitable for use as surface metal raceway.
C. Size: 4x4 inch.
D. Finish: Gray enamel.
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. Fittings, Boxes, and Extension Rings: Furnish manufacturer's

standard accessories; match finish on raceway.
1.14 OUTLET BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Pass and Seymour Products.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight

of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch (13 mm) male
fixture studs where required.
2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2.
D. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Furnish gasketed

cover by box manufacturer. Furnish threaded hubs.
E. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26.
F. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover.
1.15 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Manufacturers:
3. Pass and Seymour Products.
B. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
C. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 26 27 16.
D. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 1; flat-flanged,

surface mounted junction box:
1. Material: Galvanized cast iron.
2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and

stainless steel cover screws.
24000 AVILA ROAD
EXECUTION
1.16 EXAMINATION

project conditions.
B. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of

raceway prior to rough-in.
1.17 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway

above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls
and patch surfaces.
B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned

outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank
cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations

remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or
provide access panel.
E. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and

methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as
specified.
F. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be

reinstalled.
1.18 INSTALLATION
A. Install Work in accordance with standards.
B. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section

26 05 26.
C. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in

accordance with Section 26 05 29.
D. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
E. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat

appearance.
1.19 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless

dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.
B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring
24000 AVILA ROAD
installation.
C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-

in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
D. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps.

Remove wire used for temporary supports
E. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping

systems.
F. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in

Section 26 05 29.
G. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
H. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and

perpendicular to walls.
I. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance

purposes.
J. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between raceway and surfaces

with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
K. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
L. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
M. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by

manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before
joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted
in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
N. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to

sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
O. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between

boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction,
as around beams. Install [hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate]
[factory elbows for] bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch
(50 mm) size.
P. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at

low points in conduit system.
Q. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except

sleeves and nipples.
R. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against

entrance of dirt and moisture.
S. Surface Raceway: Install flat-head screws, clips, and straps to

fasten raceway channel to surfaces; mount plumb and level.
24000 AVILA ROAD
Install insulating bushings and inserts at connections to outlets

and corner fittings.
T. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
1.20 INSTALLATION - BOXES
A. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting

heights as indicated on Drawings.
B. Adjust box location up to 10 feet (3 m) prior to rough-in to

accommodate intended purpose.
C. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified

in Section 26 27 26.
D. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings

and in unfinished areas only.
E. In Accessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no

more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from
removable recessed luminaire.
F. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of

masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve
neat opening.
G. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install

with minimum 6 inches (150 mm) separation. Install with minimum
24 inches (600 mm) separation in acoustic rated walls
horizontally.
H. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs.

Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
I. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box

between studs.
J. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or

reducing its effectiveness.
K. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling

outlet box.
L. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping

systems.
M. Support boxes independently of conduit.
N. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together.
Do not use sectional box.
O. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions

and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance
with Section 07 84 00.
B. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated

on Drawings and reflected ceiling plan.
C. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,

thermostats, and similar devices.
1.22 ADJUSTING

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished

wall material.
C. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
1.23 CLEANING

cleaning.
B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other

material.
C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Nameplates.
2. Labels.
3. Wire markers.
4. Conduit markers.
5. Stencils.

requirements for painting specified by this section.
2. Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications

Systems.
3. Section 28 05 53 - Identification for Electronic Safety and

Security.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product

required.
2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of

wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number,
location, and function.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation


B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged
24000 AVILA ROAD
devices; include tag numbers.
A. Perform Work in accordance with standard.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

experience.

by manufacturer.

B. Accept identification products on site in original containers.

Inspect for damage.
C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled

thickness.
D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt,

water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original
wrapping.

B. Install labels nameplates only when ambient temperature and

humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by
manufacturer.
PRODUCTS
1.8 NAMEPLATES
A. Furnish materials in accordance with standards.
B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved

black letters on white contrasting background color.
C. Letter Size:
1. 1/8 inch (3 mm) high letters for identifying individual

equipment and loads.
24000 AVILA ROAD
2. 1/4 inch (6 mm) high letters for identifying grouped

equipment and loads.
D. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
1.9 LABELS
A. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch (5 mm) white

letters on black background.
1.10 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve or tubing type wire

markers.
B. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder

number [as indicated on Drawings].
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on

schematic and interconnection diagrams, shop drawings and
drawings.
1.11 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS
A. Description: Nameplate fastened with adhesive.
B. Color:
1. 480 Volt System: Black lettering on white background.
2. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background.
C. Legend:
1. 480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS.
2. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.
1.12 LOCKOUT DEVICES
A. Lockout Hasps:
1. Anodized aluminum hasp with erasable label surface; size

minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches (184 x 75 mm).
EXECUTION
1.13 PREPARATION

24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil

painting.
1.14 INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B. Nameplate Installation:
1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and

control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant
mechanical fasteners.
3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control

components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant
mechanical fasteners.
4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets or

adhesive.
5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed

panelboard in finished locations.
6. Install nameplates for the following:
a. Panelboards.
b. Transformers.
c. Disconnects.
C. Label Installation:
1. Install label parallel to equipment lines.
2. Install label for identification of individual control

device stations.
3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear

lacquer.
D. Wire Marker Installation:
1. Install wire marker for each conduit or raceway longer than

6 feet.
2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking

at accessible locations along the cable run.
3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and

port designation [as indicated on Drawings].
24000 AVILA ROAD
E. Conduit Raceway Marker Installation:
1. Install conduit raceway marker for each conduit raceway

longer than 6 feet (2000 mm).
2. Conduit Raceway Marker Spacing: 20 feet (6000 mm) on

center.
3. Raceway Painting: Identify conduit using field painting in

accordance with Section 09 90 00.
a. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet

(2000 mm).
b. Color:
1) 480 VOLT SYSTEM: BLUE.
2) 208 VOLT SYSTEM: YELLOW.
F. Stencil Installation:
1. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 09 90 00.
G. Underground Warning Tape Installation:
1. Install underground warning tape along length of each

underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches (150
to 200 mm) below finished grade, directly above buried
conduit, raceway, or cable.
H. Install Work in accordance with standards
24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 26 22 00
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes two-winding transformers; shielded transformers;

autotransformers; and buck-and-boost transformers.
1. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical

Systems.
2. Section 26 22 03 - Low-Voltage Transformers For Nonlinear

Loads.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose

Type).
2. NEMA ST 20 - Dry Type Transformers for General

Applications.
B. International Electrical Testing Association:

1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit outline and support point dimensions of

enclosures and accessories, unit weight, voltage, kVA, and
impedance ratings and characteristics, tap configurations,
insulation system type, and rated temperature rise.
C. Test Reports: Indicate loss data, efficiency at 25, 50, 75 and

100 percent rated load, and sound level.

procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of

transformers.
24000 AVILA ROAD

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

specified in this section with minimum three years [documented]
experience.

B. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide

additional canvas or plastic cover to protect units from dirt,
water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to
transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish.
PRODUCTS
1.7 TWO-WINDING TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton.
2. General Electric.
3. Square ‘D’.
B. Product Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled,

dry type transformers, ratings as indicated on Drawings.
C. Primary Voltage: 480 volts, 3 phase.
D. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase.
E. Insulation system and average winding temperature rise for rated

kVA as follows:
1. 15-500 kVA: Class 220 with 115 degrees C rise.
F. Case temperature: Do not exceed 35 degrees C rise above ambient

at warmest point at full load.
G. Winding Taps:
1. Transformers 15 kVA and Larger: NEMA ST 20.
H. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20. Maximum sound levels are as follows:
24000 AVILA ROAD

1. 1-5 kVA: 30 dB.
2. 6-25 kVA: 40 dB.
3. 26-150 kVA: 42 dB.
4. 151-225 kVA: 43 dB.
5. 226-300 kVA: 47 dB.
6. 301-500 kVA: 51 dB.
I. Basic Impulse Level: 10 kV for transformers less than 300 kVA, 30

kV for transformers 300 kVA and larger.
J. Ground core and coil assembly to enclosure by means of visible

flexible copper grounding strap.
K. Mounting:
1. 1-15 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting.
2. 16-75 kVA: Suitable for wall, floor or trapeze mounting.
3. Larger than 75 kVA: Suitable for floor or trapeze mounting.
L. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations

brazed or welded.
M. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, Type 1 ventilated. Furnish lifting eyes or

brackets.
N. Isolate core and coil from enclosure using vibration-absorbing

mounts.
O. Nameplate: Include transformer connection data [and overload

capacity based on rated allowable temperature rise].
1.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Production test each unit according to NEMA ST20.
EXECUTION
1.9 EXAMINATION

project conditions.
B. Verify mounting supports are properly sized and located including

concealed bracing in walls.
1.10 EXISTING WORK
24000 AVILA ROAD

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned transformers.
B. Maintain access and adequate ventilation to existing transformers

and other installations remaining active and requiring access and
ventilation. Modify installation or provide access panel or
ventilation grilles.
C. Clean and repair existing transformers to remain or to be

reinstalled.
1.11 INSTALLATION
A. Set transformer plumb and level.
B. Use flexible conduit, in accordance with Section 26 05 33, 2 feet

(600 mm) minimum length, for connections to transformer case.
Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure.
C. Support transformers in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
1. Mount wall-mounted transformers using integral flanges or

accessory brackets furnished by manufacturer.
2. Mount floor-mounted transformers on vibration isolating

pads suitable for isolating transformer noise from building
structure.
3. Mount trapeze-mounted transformers as indicated on

Drawings.
D. Provide seismic restraints.
E. Install grounding and bonding in accordance with Section

26 05 26.
A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting,

testing, adjusting, and balancing.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.2.1.
1.13 ADJUSTING

B. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap

adjustments
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes distribution and branch circuit panelboards and

electronic grade branch circuit panelboards.
1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems.
3. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in

Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
1. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case

Switches.
2. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers,

Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000
Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
4. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control

Circuit and Pilot Devices.
5. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution

Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
6. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
7. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation,

Operation, and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts
or Less.
C. International Electrical Testing Association:
24000 AVILA ROAD
D. National Fire Protection Association:
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.
2. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters.
3. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions,

voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere
rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of

standard products.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards

and record actual circuiting arrangements.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing;

source and current prices of replacement parts and supplies; and
recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

experience.

Requirements for maintenance products.
B. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to

Owner’s current keying system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton.
2. GE Electrical.
3. Siemens.
4. Square D.
B. Product Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type pe

panelboard.
C. Panelboard Bus: Copper current carrying components, ratings as

indicated on Drawings. Furnish copper ground bus in each
panelboard.
D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: 10,000 amperes rms

symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms
symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated on
Drawings.
E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, circuit breakers with

integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air
conditioning equipment branch circuits.
F. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Trip units and auxiliary switches as

G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1, 5 ¾ inches deep, 20 inches wide,

cabinet box.
H. Cabinet Front: Surface hinged door with flush lock, metal

directory frame, finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton.
2. GE Electrical.
3. Siemens.
4. Square D.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and

appliance branch circuit panelboard.
C. Panelboard Bus: Copper current carrying components, ratings as

indicated on Drawings. Furnish insulated ground bus as indicated
on Drawings].
D. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200

percent rated, plated copper, solid neutral.
E. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 10,000 amperes rms

symmetrical for 208 volt panelboards; 14,000 amperes rms
symmetrical for 480 volt panelboards, or as indicated on
Drawings.
F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal

magnetic trip circuit breakers, with common trip handle for all
poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Do not use
tandem circuit breakers.
G. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1.
H. Cabinet Box: 6 inches (153 mm) deep, 20 inches (508 mm) wide.
I. Cabinet Front: Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps,

concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock keyed
alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect abandoned panelboards.
B. Maintain access to existing panelboard and load centers remaining

active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide
access panel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Install panelboards plumb.
C. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes.
D. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard; install

panelboards taller than 6 feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than
4 inches (100 mm) above floor.
E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
F. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit

panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to
24000 AVILA ROAD
balance phase loads.
G. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section

26 05 53.
H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to

accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: 5
empty 1 inch (DN27). Identify each as SPARE.
I. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section

26 05 26. Connect equipment ground bars of panels in accordance
with NFPA 70.

C. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS,

Section 7.6.
D. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section

7.5.
E. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS,

Section 7.16.1.
3.4 ADJUSTING

Requirements for starting and adjusting.
B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder;

rearrange circuits in panelboard to balance phase loads to within
20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire
branch circuits.
24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 26 27 16
ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hinged cover enclosures, cabinets, terminal

blocks, and accessories.

Systems.

Systems.
3. Section 27 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for

Communications Systems.
4. Section 28 05 33 - Conduits and Backboxes for Electronic

1.2 REFERENCES

Maximum).
2. NEMA ICS 4 - Industrial Control and Systems: Terminal

Blocks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard data for enclosures,

cabinets, and terminal blocks.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application

conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing
agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

experience.
24000 AVILA ROAD

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

B. Furnish two of each key.
PRODUCTS
1.6 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hoffman Electrical Products.
3. Reliance Electric.
B. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure.
C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by

key.
D. Furnish interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and

electrical components; finish with white enamel.
E. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
1.7 CABINETS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hoffman Electrical Products.
3. Reliance Electric.
B. Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable end walls.
C. Box Size: 24 inches (600 mm) wide x 6 inches (150 mm) deep.
D. Backboard: Furnish ¾ inch (19 mm) thick plywood backboard for

mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white.
E. Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed trim clamps, door with
concealed hinge, and flush lock [keyed to match branch circuit
panelboard]. Finish with gray baked enamel.
24000 AVILA ROAD

F. Knockouts: as required for conduit entry.
G. Furnish metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of

different systems and voltages.
H. Furnish accessory feet for free-standing equipment.
EXECUTION
1.8 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove abandoned cabinets and enclosures, including abandoned

cabinets and enclosures above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch
surfaces.
B. Maintain access to existing cabinets and enclosures and other

installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify
installation or provide access panel.
C. Clean and repair existing cabinets and enclosures to remain or to

be reinstalled.
1.9 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and

structural supports at each corner in accordance with Section
26 05 29.
B. Install cabinet fronts plumb.
1.10 CLEANING

cleaning.
B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful

materials.
C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage
24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles;

multioutlet assembly; and device plates and decorative box
covers.

Systems: Outlet boxes for wiring devices.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing

dimensions, colors, and configurations.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of each wiring device and wall plate
illustrating materials, construction, color, and finish.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

specified in this section with minimum three years [documented]
experience.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

B. Furnish two of each style, size, and finish wall plate.
PRODUCTS
1.6 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
24000 AVILA ROAD

1. Arrow Hart Wiring Devices.
2. Hubbell.
3. Pass and Seymour.
B. Single Pole Switch:
2. Hubbell.
3. Leviton.
C. Three-way Switch:
2. Hubbell.
3. Leviton.
1.7 RECEPTACLES
A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle:
2. Hubbell.
3. Leviton.
B. GFCI Receptacle:
2. Hubbell.
3. Leviton.
C. Product Description: NEMA WD 1, General-duty general use

receptacle.
D. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
24000 AVILA ROAD

E. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as indicated on Drawings.
F. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
G. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground

fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements.
1.8 WALL PLATES
A. Manufacturers:
2. Hubbell.
3. Pass and Seymour.
B. Decorative Cover Plate: Ivory plastic.
EXECUTION
1.9 EXAMINATION

project conditions.
B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
C. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by

wall plates.
D. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested,

and ready for connection to wiring devices.
1.10 PREPARATION
A. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
1.11 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices.
B. Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices

to remain active.
C. Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be

reinstalled.
1.12 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices plumb and level.
24000 AVILA ROAD

B. Install switches with OFF position down.
C. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.
D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to [outlet box with

bonding jumper] [and] [branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor].
E. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank

outlets in finished areas.
F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw

terminal. Install stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG
and smaller. When stranded conductors are used in lieu of solid,
use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not place
bare stranded conductors directly under device screws.
G. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction

boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on
surface mounted outlets.
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section

26 05 33 to obtain mounting heights as specified and as indicated
on drawings.
B. Install wall switch 48 inches (1.2 m) above finished floor.
C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches (450 mm) above finished

floor.
D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches (150 mm) above back

splash of counter.
E. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with underfloor raceway

service fittings provided under Section 26 05 39.
F. Coordinate installation of wiring devices with floor box service

fittings provided under Section 26 05 34.

B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.
C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper
operation.
D. Verify each receptacle device is energized.
24000 AVILA ROAD

E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
1.15 ADJUSTING

B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
1.16 CLEANING

cleaning.
B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and

accessories.

Systems.

Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
1. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-

Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each

luminaire not standard product of manufacturer.
C. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
D. Samples: Submit two color chips 3 x 3 inch (75 x 75 mm) in size

illustrating luminaire finish color where indicated in luminaire
schedule.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

experience.

24000 AVILA ROAD

B. Furnish two of each plastic lens type.
C. Furnish one replacement lamps for each lamp installed.
D. Furnish two of each ballast type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with

features, options, and accessories as scheduled.
B. Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.
2.2 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cooper Industries Inc.
2. General Electric Co.
3. Philips Electronic North America.
B. Product Description: [Electronic ballast] [rapid start] [instant

start] [less than 10 percent THD] [less than 20 percent THD]
[High-power-factor type electromagnetic ballast certified by
Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. to comply with ANSI C82.1],
suitable for lamps specified, with voltage to match luminaire
voltage.
2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. General Electric Co.
2. Lithonia Lighting.
3. Philips Electronics.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, and

accessories.
3.2 INSTALLATION
24000 AVILA ROAD

A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel
hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at
indicated height.
B. Support luminaires larger than 2 x 4 foot (600 x 1200 mm) size

independent of ceiling framing.
C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Drawings and

as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
D. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with

building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
F. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping

materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
G. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in

place.
H. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height [as indicated on

Drawings] [as scheduled].
I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
J. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under

Section 26 05 33 using flexible conduit as indicated on Drawings.
K. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire

with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within
luminaire.
L. Install specified lamps in each luminaire.
M. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section

26 05 26.

B. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect

for proper connection and operation.
3.4 ADJUSTING

B. Aim and adjust luminaires [as indicated on Drawings].
3.5 CLEANING
24000 AVILA ROAD

cleaning.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
C. Clean finishes and touch up damage.

Protecting finished work.
B. Relamp luminaires having failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 27 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Nameplates.
2. Wire markers.
3. Conduit markers.
4. Stencils.
5. Underground Warning Tape.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Administrative Requirements: Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product

required.
2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of

wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number,
location, and function.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation

1. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
2. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged

devices; include tag numbers.
A. Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling,

storing, and protecting products.
B. Accept identification products on site in original containers.

Inspect for damage.
C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled

thickness.
D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt,

water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original

24000 AVILA ROAD

wrapping.
A. Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products

on site.
B. Install nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity

conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by
manufacturer.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra

materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved

black letters on white contrasting background color.
B. Letter Size:
1. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment

and loads.
2. 1/4 inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and

loads.
C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch.
2.2 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Split sleeve type wire markers.
2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored

yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical
lines.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION

B. Prepare surfaces in stencil painting.
3.2 EXISTING WORK

24000 AVILA ROAD

A. Install identification on all equipment.
B. Replace lost nameplates.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B. Nameplate Installation:
1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and

control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant
mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control

components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant
mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets,

or adhesive.
5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed

panelboard in finished locations.
C. Underground Warning Tape Installation:
1. Install underground warning tape along length of each

underground conduit, raceway, or cable 6 to 8 inches
minimum below finished grade or as indicated on drawings,
and directly above buried conduit, raceway, or cable.

24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00
DATA COMMUNICATIONS / VOICE COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The communications cabling system at RVS/DHS/CIS is based on a

flexible design that will allow any communications connector to
be used for voice or data. All communications station cable is
terminated on RJ45 connectors at the faceplate and RJ45 patch
panels in the IDF Closets. The voice riser cable will be extended
from 66 blocks in the IDF Room to each IDF with one pair
terminated on each port of a voice riser patch panel. This system
will support add, moves and changes by simply moving a patch
cord.
B. Principal items of work shall include, but not limited to,

Customized Services, including:
1. Design services, which shall include the network

connectivity design. Design will be developed based on the
following:
a. Provide rack space to allow a 40% expansion of the

number of cable drops provided at time of initial
occupancy.
2. Connectivity design documentation shall include:
a. Drawing of logical network configuration.
b. A material list specifying quantity and

part/specification numbers.
c. Installation specifications.
d. Complete set of floor plans indicating entire system.
e. Cable Management Program, including:
1) CABLE SCHEDULE
2) CABLE TEST FORMS
3) CABLE LABELS
4) NETWORKING PLANNING CHARTS
5) DISKETTES CONTAINING DESIGN DATA BASE
3. Furnishing, installing, connecting and testing networking

system including all components, cabinets, terminals,
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 1

24000 AVILA ROAD
conduit and cabling system in accordance with design

services furnished under this Specification.
4. Supervision necessary to provide a complete and operable

system.
5. Design Services shall be in accordance with applicable

Electronic Industry Association (EIA) and Telecommunication
Industries Association (TIA) Standards.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 26 05 01: Basic Electrical Requirements
B. Section 26 05 33: Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
C. Section 26 05 33: Identification for Electrical Systems
D. Section 26 27 26: Wiring Devices
1.3 REGULATORY REFERENCES
A. The cabling system described in this document is derived from the

recommendations made in recognized telecommunications industry
standards. The following documents are incorporated by reference:
1. USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard
2. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526-14, Optical Power Loss Measurement of

Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant – OFSTP-14
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1, Commercial Building

Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General
Requirements

Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced
Twisted-Pair Cabling Components

Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3: Optical Fiber
Cabling Components
6. ANSI/TIA/EIA– 570-B, Residential Telecommunications Cabling

Standard
7. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 598, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
8. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606-A, Administration Standard for

Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Building
9. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607, Commercial Building Grounding and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 2

24000 AVILA ROAD
10. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant

Telecommunications Cabling Standard
11. BICSI-TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services

International
12. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70), National

Electrical Code (NEC)
13. NEMA 250
13. National Electrical Code (NEC) Articles 770 and 800
14. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) (IEEE C 2)
B. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in

conflict, then, as a general principle, the more stringent
requirement shall apply. However, in all cases where there
appears to be conflict or a specification is not clear to the
contractor, the USCIS Regional Coordinator or USCIS Technical
Representative must be contacted for clarification.
C. The contractor will abide by all applicable federal, state,

county and local building and safety regulations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300: Submittals.
B. Furnish catalog cuts, technical data and descriptive literature

on components. Data shall be clearly marked and noted to identify
specific ranges, model numbers, sizes and other pertinent data.
C. Shop drawings shall indicate equipment locations, wiring and

schematics, details, panel configurations, sizes and a point-to-
point wiring diagram of all circuits. Shop drawings shall
indicate interfaces to equipment furnished by others, identifying
numbers of wires, termination requirements, and other pertinent
details. Responsibility for each end of interfaces shall be noted
on shop drawings.
D. Entire system shall be supported by engineering documentation

including:
1. Floor plans indicating all components, conduit run, cable

type, cabinet, fill and rough-in requirements.
2. Riser diagrams indicating all devices, cabinets and the

point-to-point connections in a manner following floor plan
layout.
3. Detailed terminal cabinet layout diagrams must be submitted

for the terminal cabinet in each building designated
cabinet, to include the clear identification of switches,
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 3

24000 AVILA ROAD
copper and fiber optic patch panels, and cabinet expansion

areas. Diagrams must be submitted in AutoCAD .dxf or .dwg
format.
E. Each submittal shall be bound and shall contain an index

organized vertically by assembly and item number and horizontally
by columns. The first assembly shall be the major head end
equipment. The leftmost column shall be the item number; next
shall be the description, followed by the applicable
specification section number, and followed by the specified item,
which is followed by the submitted item. The rightmost column
shall be for notes, which shall be used to reference the reason
for submitting items other than as specified.
F. Each submittal shall contain product data sheets or catalog cut

sheets for each item listed in the Index. These shall be
arranged in the same order as the index and if more than one item
is shown, the submitted items shall be highlighted or marked with
an arrow. The product data shall be sufficiently detailed to
allow the Engineer to evaluate the suitability of the product and
to allow other trades to provide necessary coordination.
G. Drawings that are specific to this specification section shall be

included in the submittal. “A” size, (8-½”x ll”), and “B” size,
(ll”x17”), shall be bound into the manual. Larger drawings shall
be folded and inserted into transparent envelopes that are bound
into the manual.
H. Installation drawings which show devices from many specification

sections shall be submitted separately. Contractor shall submit
eight blue line copies and one reproducible copy of all such
installation drawings.
I. Contractor shall provide six copies of complete submittal

package.
J. Refer to customized services under this Specification for

additional requirements.
K. K. Operating and Servicing Manuals and Record Drawings:
1. Deliver required copies of “Operating and Servicing Manual”

for each system. Each manual shall be bound in a flexible
binder and data shall be typewritten or drafted.
2. Each manual shall include instructions necessary for proper

operation and servicing of system and shall include circuit
diagrams of systems, a wiring destination schedule for each
circuit leaving each rack, a schematic diagram of each
component, and replacement parts numbers. Each manual shall
also include as-built cable site plot plan indicating all
cables both underground and in each building, and as-built
coding used on each cable. Building floor plans shall
indicate route of all conduit and cable runs.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 4

24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Submit a transparency of plot plan and building plans,

indicating location of equipment, conduit and cable runs.
4. Contractor shall maintain one set of plot and building

plans labeled “Project Record Drawings” at site. Contractor
shall denote all completed wiring runs in red.
A. Ordinances and Regulations: The work of this Section shall

conform to California Code of Regulations, Part 3, and all other
applicable codes and standards.
B. Only a qualified Contractor holding licenses required by legally

constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the work shall
do work. Contractor shall have completed at least 5 projects of
equal scope to systems described herein and shall have been
engaged in business of supplying and installing specified type of
systems for at least 5 years. Use equipment manufacturer’s
certified installers.
C. If Contractor fails to repair or replace material or work

indicated above within 15 days of receiving written notice, the
Owner, with its own personnel or by Contract, may proceed with
repair or replacement and assess cost against Contractor, if
Contractor does not respond accordingly.
D. Persons skilled in trade represented by work, and in accordance

with all applicable building codes shall install system in
accordance with best trade practice.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. The warranty shall cover the failure of the cable plant system to
support current or future applications that are designed for the
link/channel specifications of TIA/EIA-568-B.
B. A minimum fifteen (15) year warranty covering application

assurance, product, cable, and labor.
C. Warranty needs to allow USCIS designated personnel to connect end

user equipment without going through a certified contractor.
D. Warranty needs to allow for new cable plant additions by the same
contractor or by another certified contractor of the installed
vendor’s equipment.
E. The warranty needs to be guaranteed by the hardware vendor not

the installation contractor.
F. If a warranty claim is initiated, USCIS reserves the right to

authorize certified installation contractors permission to fix
the cable plant. In the event that the installation contractor is
denied access then the hardware vendor will provide another
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 5

24000 AVILA ROAD
certified installation contractor for approval. This process will

continue until the cable plant issues are resolved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT STANDARDS
A. Where applicable all components installed under this Contract

shall be listed by UL.
B. All equipment and components shall be products of a single

manufacturer except otherwise approved by the Owner.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. PATCH PANELS
B. Patch panels, both fiber and copper are the approved methods of
providing connectivity between horizontal cables, Intra and
Inter-backbone copper, fiber backbone, and common network service
devices, such as switches, PBX, routers, and other electronics.
All patch panels are to be of a high-density to maximize rack
space.
C. Patch panel installation must adhere to manufacturer

specifications and installed utilizing all wire management
hardware, both front and back. Panels shall be installed to best
utilize both vertical and horizontal wire managers, and should be
separated by horizontal wire managers. There should be a minimum
of one horizontal wire manager for each horizontal patch panel
unless otherwise specified. Panels must be clearly marked as to
the outlet designation. Labels must be of permanent indelible
typed materials.
1. Copper Patch Panels
a. Each panel will be installed to provide the maximum

use of rack space. Each panel will be mounted in an
equipment rack that shall conform to the EIA-310
mounting-hole spacing standard.
b. Separate patch panels will segregate “A”, “B”, “C”

cables for each IMO jack. The upper patch panels will
be used for “A” only; the lower patch panels will be
used for “B” only on rack one. In addition, and
depending on the number of total cables, “C” cables
may also share a single standard 7-foot equipment
rack, swing gate or cabinet enclosure.
2. Fiber Optic Patch Panels
a. Optical fiber cable patch panels for workstation

connections (also called fiber cabinets) shall
provide SC or MTRJ couplers. Optical fiber cable
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 6

24000 AVILA ROAD
patch panels for backbone cabling (also called fiber

cabinets) shall provide SC or MTRJ couplers. The
color scheme and the port numbering scheme on the
patch panel shall be consistent in any given
installation to reduce confusion and to prevent
mistakes in making cross-connections. Fiber patch
panels shall be installed in standard increments of
six-position, ST, SC or MTRJ loads or interconnect
couplers, as required in each wiring closet and MDF.
D. Equipment Racks
1. Provide (1) standard 7’ x 19” two post rack with 10”

vertical (front and rear combo) wire management. The rack
shall be CPI #55053-703 or equivalent and for 10” vertical
management with hinged covers use CPI #30096-703 or
equivalent. The rack shall be.
2. Shall conform to the ANSI/TIA/EIA standards.
3. Conform to the standard EIA-310 mounting specification.
4. Provide pre-tapped 10-32 threading with rack unit markings

to indicate position.
5. Provide a flexible modular concept. • Provide vertical wire

management attached to side of rack with a minimum of one
pass through to go from front to back or vice versa.
6. Provide floor mounting hardware.
7. Match make and model within existing facilities, where

possible.
8. Provide and install one (1) single-sided shelf in the

Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (For single-sided
shelf use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 40074-700 or
equivalent.)
9. Provide and install two (2) 20amp Power Distribution Units

with 6’ in the Data/Utility Room equipment rack. (For PDU
unit use Wiremold R5BZ20-15 or equivalent.)
10. The equipment racks require 2U and 1U horizontal wire

management with hinged covers as specified in elevation
drawings with quantities. Total quality: 8 (2U) and 2 (1U)
(For horizontal management use CPI, Chatsworth Products,
Inc. 30530-719 and 30529-719 or equivalent.)
E. Faceplate Configuration
1. Workstations that are not connected to an optical fiber

cable typically utilize a single-gang faceplate that can
support up to six connection ports. When data only is
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 7

24000 AVILA ROAD
installed in the faceplate, a dual, RJ-45 module shall be

installed in the top position. If a dual gang faceplate is
used, the dual RJ-45 module shall be installed in the top
left position. When voice and data are installed in the
same faceplate, the dual RJ-45 information outlet shall
conform to the configuration as outlined in drawings. Voice
shall be installed at the bottom, data at the top positions
of all information outlets. Blank inserts shall be
installed in all remaining positions.
2. Workstations that are connected to optical fiber cables

shall have a double-gang faceplate and junction box
installed that can support up to 12 connection ports.
F. Ladder rack:
1. Estimate at 20’ to 18’ ladder cable running shall be

installed in RWC Room. Use CPI Universal Cable Runway
#10250-718 or equivalent and Radius Bend 10723-718 or
equivalent, associated with mounting and installation
products.
2. Provide Ladder Rack within the IDF’s to route cable to or

from sleeves, risers, ducts, cable trays to termination
fields within equipment racks or mounted on walls. This
cable ladder system shall be contained within the confines
of the IDF.
3. IDF cable ladder may be mounted horizontally or vertically

over equipment racks. Vertical ladder will be used to
support riser cable from floor to ceiling as it passes
between floors. The Cable Runway system shall be mounted to
walls, the top of equipment rack, or hung with threaded
rods for bracing and support. Refer to Local building Codes
for additional seismic bracing for code compliance.
4. In the IDF’s, the ladder rack system shall be bonded to the

Telecommunications Ground Bus with 6 AWG stranded green
ground wire.
G. COPPER CABLE INSTALLATION
1. The contractor shall provide, place, terminate, certify and

provide required documentation of all Unshielded Twisted
Pair (UTP) cables as specified through work assignments
under this SOW.
2. All cable terminations to be installed by technicians

certified by the equipment vendor. (Keystone style modular
jacks)
3. Data and Voice Horizontal Cabling need to be of the

appropriate color as specified in USCIS Structured Cable
Plant Standard.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 8

24000 AVILA ROAD
a. All cable, equipment, and materials shall meet

applicable ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B, National Electrical
Code (NEC) 770, Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802 and Underwriters
Laboratory (UL) Verification Program standards. All
cable equipment and materials must be manufactured by
facilities that are International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) 9001 registered and certified.
b. Shall be CAT 6 rating in accordance with

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2
c. Four-pair, 100-Ohm, 24 American Wire Gage (AWG).
d. Will be part of a 15 year minimum warranty on the

Structured Cable Plant.
e. The cable should have contiguous, 2-foot segment-

length markers printed on the cable jacket. The
markings must also show the applicable performance
CAT 6, as well as the fire rating of the cable being
installed.
f. The finished cable shall be 100% plenum rated in

accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 800,
UL 444, NFPA 262, (UL 910), and applicable Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) standards.
g. All horizontal cables rated at CAT 6 must have a

jacket color of white.
h. If building is not new then use previously set

standard for jacket color.
4. The contractor shall provide one 10-foot CAT-6 patch cord

for each workstation outlet installed.
a. Patch cords should be 8-position 8-conductor

manufactured assemblies using stranded cables meeting
CAT-6 specifications.
b. Phone line cords are typically provided with end user

station equipment, and are not included in this
specification.
c. For each drop location, all information outlet

terminations shall follow the ANSI/TIA/EIA T568B pin
assignments.
d. Workstations to IMO patch cords are to be black in

color.
e. 4-pair, UTP standard cable, RJ-45 connectors in both
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 9

24000 AVILA ROAD
ends.
5. The contractor is responsible for installing stranded

copper patch cables from the patch panel into the
electronic hardware in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
and Remote Wiring Closet (TR). The patch cords should be of
varied lengths to maintain a neat and functional finished
product.
a. Patch cords should be 8-position 8-conductor

manufactured assemblies using stranded cables meeting
CAT-6 specifications.
b. 100% of Data “A” ports will be patched.
c. Provisions should be made to patch approximately 30%

of the Data “B” ports. The requirements for Data “B”
ports will be determined by the on-site
representative.
d. Cables shall be neatly routed and appropriately

fastened with Velcro wherever possible at all racks
and patch panels, and shall be dressed in a
functional and visually pleasing fashion, observing
bend radius requirements at all times.
e. MDF and TR patch cords need to be of the appropriate

color as specified in this document and the USCIS
Structured Cable Plant Standard.
f. Ty wraps are NOT acceptable for use in any part of

the cable plant installation. Velcro shall be
utilized.
Patch Cable Color Chart
Specification
Data A Ports
Blue
Data B Ports
Red
Voice A Ports White

Voice B Ports White
Servers Purple
Fax / Special Use Yellow
6. Separate patch panels will segregate “Data A” and “Data B”

cables. The upper patch panels will be used for “Data A”,
only; the lower patch panels will be used for “Data B”
only. Patch cables shall meet the same specifications as
defined in the Copper Cable Specification Section.
7. Voice and data at each information outlet shall be

identically numbered, where practical (e.g. cable IDs for
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 10

24000 AVILA ROAD
voice and data shall match at each location).
8. Cable labels shall conform to the USCIS Structured Cable

Plant Standard.
9. Ensure that proper cable loops are maintained on every drop

as stated in the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard
10. Additional drops may be requested from the date of award,

whereas the USCIS will issue a change request or addendum
for any changes, additions or modifications in this scope
of work.
H. Copper Cable Specifications
1. All cable, equipment, and materials shall meet applicable

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A, National Electrical Code (NEC) 770,
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
802 and Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Verification Program
standards.
2. All cable equipment and materials must be manufactured by

facilities that are International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) 9001 registered and certified as
follows:
a. Data cables will be CAT 6.
b. Data cable shall be terminated on CAT 6 compliant

patch panels.
c. Voice cables will be CAT 6.
d. Voice cables shall be terminated on CAT 6 compliant

patch panels.
e. Four-pair, 100-Ohm, 23-24 American Wire Gauge (AWG).
f. The cable should have contiguous, two-foot segment-

length markers printed on the cable jacket. The
markings must also show the applicable performance
CAT 6 rating, as well as the fire rating of the cable
being installed.
g. The finished cable shall be 100% plenum rated in

accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 800,
UL 444, NFPA 262, (UL 910), and applicable CSA
standards.
h. All CAT-6 horizontal cabling must be white in color.

(Drop location faceplates shall be white in color or
match electrical plate décor.)
i. All data horizontal cross-connects and main cross-
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 11

24000 AVILA ROAD
connects are to be stranded CAT 6 and blue (A ports)

or red (B ports) in color to denote Data
connectivity. (CAT 6 jacks at the drop location will
match patch cable designation.)
j. All “C” horizontal cross-connects (“C”) and main

cross-connect patch cables are to be stranded CAT 6
and white in color to denote Voice connectivity. (CAT
6 jacks at the drop location will match patch cable
designation.)
k. If a port on the “C” patch panel is used for data

connectivity then use a red patch cable.
l. All copper intra-closet feeds must be grey in color

and terminate on appropriate hardware as deemed by
USCIS Technical representative outlined in Attachment
B.
I. DATA FIBER CABLE INSTALLATION
1. Fiber optic cable shall be used for all backbone links

where applicable.
2. One 12-strand multimode optical fiber cable shall be

installed from the MDF to each TR to provide data backbone
connectivity.
3. All ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1 requirements for fiber cable

installation and termination will be observed.
4. All strands of each fiber cable shall be terminated at each

end of the cable.
5. 62.5/125 - µm optical plenum (OFNP) or optical fiber riser

(OFNR).
6. Maximum attenuation: 3.5/1.0 db Km at 850/1300nm.
7. Minimum bandwidth: 200/500 mHz Km at 58/1300 nm.
8. The fiber will be terminated in a standard rack-mounted

fiber optic distribution box.
9. All fiber connections in the distribution boxes shall be

T568SC.
10. The contractor is responsible for installing fiber patch

cables from the distribution boxes into the electronic
hardware in the MDF and each TR.
11. Fiber patch cords shall be multimode, duplex, 3 meters in

length, SC to SC and or SC to LC (Please See USCIS
technical representative).
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 12

24000 AVILA ROAD
12. Provisions should be made to patch each TR to the MDF. Two

fiber patch cables are therefore required for each TR. One
to patch the electronic equipment to the fiber distribution
box in the TR and one to patch the electronic equipment to
the fiber distribution box in the MDF.
13. Provisions should be made to supply approximately 30%

additional fiber patch cords for future requirements and/or
maintenance spares.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 13

24000 AVILA ROAD

J. DATA FIBER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
1. All fiber cable shall be 12-strand multimode 62.5x125 μm

optical fiber.
2. All fiber cable shall be of interlocking armor construction

eliminating the need for conduit or plenum rated inner
duct.
3. Fiber cable shall be colored orange to denote multimode

fiber.
4. Plenum rated fiber cable is required by the USCIS for

backbone cables routed within buildings.
5. Outside plant fiber cable shall have a water block

construction and meet the requirements for compound flow
and water penetration.
K. Inner Duct: All fiber cable shall be installed in one and one-
quarter inch (1-1/4") inner diameter high-density polyethylene
innerducts with pre-installed one-quarter inch diameter polyester
pull ropes. The innerducts are to be orange in color and are to
be of corrugated design to be installed in larger conduit.
Provide 3 innerduct in all 4" data system conduits, 1 innderduct
in all 2" data systems conduits. The innerduct shall conform to
shall conform to material standards for fiber-optic innerducts,
including Placitc Pipe Institute Standards.
L. Power strips shall be 10 outlet with surge protection /

suppression, rack mountable.
2.3 KEYS AND LOCKS
A. Contractor shall provide to DHS/ US CIS all keys and locks for
all cabinets and equipment for access to service equipment.
2.4 COMMUNICATION DISTRIBUTION CABLE TRAY
A. Distribution cable tray shall be installed above the accessible

ceiling for the creation of main pathways for the management of
high volumes of cable through corridors, and for access and
egress.
B. Construction: Cable tray shall be the wire basket type

manufactured of ASTM A510 high strength steel wires or equal,
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 14

24000 AVILA ROAD

and comply with NEMA VE1 of the proposed IEC 61537 standards. The
cable tray shall be UL (Underwriters Laboratory) listed.
C. Dimensions: The cable tray shall be a minimum of 18 in wide, with

a depth of 67 in. Narrower cable tray may be used for locations
with lower volumes.
D. Support Requirements; A trapeze-style support shall be used along

the span of the cable tray. The trapeze shall be constructed of
channel stock (i.e. Unistruct) and 5/8 in. threaded rod. The
trapeze support elevation should allow a minimum of 12 in between
the top edge of the cable tray and the slab above. Appropriate
threaded rod anchors shall be selected and approved by the
Project Structural Engineer. Trapeze supports shall be placed a
minimum of every 10ft. and at cable tray intersections and
terminations. Seismic bracing for the cable tray as required by
code, shall be installed along cable tray routes. Coordination of
lateral and oblique bracing locations shall be coordinated with
the other disciplines whose equipment and systems share the area
above the suspended ceiling.
E. Bonding and Grounding Requirements: The cable tray shall be

bonded to the Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar in the IDF(s)
on the same floor. All non-contiguous segments of the Cable tray
shall be bonded together using 6AWG stranded copper wire, with
crimp-on lugs bolted to each segment of the cable tray to ensure
electrical continuity throughout the length of the cable tray
system.
F. Firestopping Requirements: Cable trays that penetrate fire-rated

walls shall be equipped with wall penetration sleeves at each
location, and have appropriate fire stopping materials installed
after the placement of cable has been completed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 15

24000 AVILA ROAD

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Cabling System shall be installed in accordance with best trade

practice by persons skilled in trade represented by the work, and
in accordance with local building codes and applicable provisions
of the California Electrical Code.
B. All electrical materials and equipment installed shall be of new

manufacture, and approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(UL), and shall bear the UL label.
C. Location of outlet boxes and equipment on drawings is

approximate, unless dimensions are indicated. Drawings shall not
be scaled to determine position and routing of raceways, drops
and outlet boxes. Location of outlet boxes and equipment shall
conform to architectural features of the building and other work
already in place, and must be ascertained by Contractor in the
field prior to start of work.
D. The maximum pulling tensions of the specified cables shall not be

exceeded and proper radius of all cable bends shall be
maintained.
E. Conduit types shall be limited to rigid metal conduit, electrical

metallic tubing and schedule 40 PVC, as permitted under section
26 05 33. Flexible metallic conduit shall not be used.
F. No section of conduit run shall be longer than 100 feet and

contain more than two 90 bends between pull points or pull boxes.
G. The inside radius of a conduit bend shall be at least 6 times the

internal diameter of the conduit. When the conduit size is
greater than 2 inches, the inside radius shall be at least 10
times the internal diameter of the conduit. For fiber optic
cable, the inside radius of a conduit bend shall be at least 10
times the internal diameter of the conduit.
H. Conduit shall be sized as per table 4.4-1 of -EIA/TIA-569

standard.
I. Conduit shall be reamed to eliminate sharp edges and terminated

with an insulated bushing.
J. Pull boxes shall not be used for splicing cable.
K. A pull box shall be placed in a conduit run where:
1. The length is over l00 ft.

SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 16

24000 AVILA ROAD

2. There are more than two 90-degree bends.
3. If there is a reverse bend in the run.
Boxes shall be placed in a straight section of conduit and not

used in lieu of a bend. The corresponding conduit ends should be
aligned with each other. Conduit fittings shall not be used in
place of pull boxes.
L. Where a pull box is used with raceway(s), the pull box shall:
1. For straight pull through, have a length of at least 8

times the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway;
2. For angle and U pulls:
a. Have a distance between each raceway entry inside the

box and the opposite wall of the box of at least 6
times the trade-size diameter of the largest raceway,
this distance being increased by the sum- of the
trade-size diameters of the other raceways on the
same wall of the box.
b. Have a distance between the nearest edges of each

raceway entry enclosing the same conductor of at
least:
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 17

24000 AVILA ROAD

3. Six times the trade-size diameter of the raceway
4. Six times the trade-size diameter of the larger raceway if

they are of different sizes.
5. For a raceway entering the wall of a pull box opposite to a

removable cover, have a distance from the wall to the cover
of not less than the trade-size diameter of the largest
raceway plus 6 times the diameter of the largest conductor.
M. All conduit shall be clearly labeled at both ends designating the

closet by number, which includes the sequential numbering of the
conduit originating at that closet. Conduit length shall also be
indicated on the label. Pull-boxes shall be labeled on the
exposed exterior.
N. Drawings generally indicate work to be done, but do not indicate

all bends, transitions or special fittings required to clear
beams, girders or other work already in place. Contractor shall
carefully investigate conditions where conduits and raceways are
to be installed, and furnish and install required fittings.
O. Contractor shall return all project record documents (Drawings

and Specifications) to the District at completion of the work.
Drawings shall be marked by Contractor to indicate all additions,
deletions, or changes, including changes to Cable Schedule. It is
intended that these marked-up Drawings constitute the “as-built”
configuration of the work. Where no changes have occurred,
Contractor shall mark such Drawings “No Change”.
3.2 TOPOLOGY/CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Data Network - General
1. User Stations
a. Ethernet (UTP)
b. Category 6 to Data Outlets.
c. All data cabling will be home run to the IDF

cabinets, from outlet to Category 6 patch panels.
d. All Category 6 data cables will be installed in

conduit and or cable tray as shown in floor plans.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 18

24000 AVILA ROAD

e. Patch Panel shall be labeled to designate drop
location and count/ follow scheme and sequence as per
the outlet scheme
f. Above mentioned shall be provided by the contractor

unless otherwise directed by DHS/ USCIS.
2. Backbone
a. The twelve-strand multi-mode fiber optic cable will

be meet most of the connectivity between
communication closets.
b. All strands will be terminated with SC or MTRU-STYLE

connectors in accordance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-
B.1specifications.
c. Copper backbone cabling provides a redundant

connectivity option in the event of a catastrophic
failure.
d. Above mentioned shall be provided by the contractor

unless otherwise directed by the District
3. IDF Build-Out
a. Provide one cabinet mountable ten-outlet power strip

with surge protection/suppression to be mounted in
IDF.
b. Cabinet mounted Category 6 patch panels, wire

management and electronics
c. Ladder will be used to transition from the conduits

entering the IDF room to the IDF cabinets.
d. Active equipment shall be configured, labeled and

installed to support multiple networks and with IP
addressing provided by contractor.
e. Above mentioned shall be provided by the contractor

unless otherwise directed by the DHS/USCIS
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 19

24000 AVILA ROAD

3.3 LABELING AND MARKING
A. Contractor shall complete Cable Location Chart and mount it near

distribution panel in each wiring closet.
B. Contractor shall mark all distribution panels, cables and cover

plates with computer-generated labels. Each drop shall be labeled
with the same identifier on the receptacle faceplate, inside the
junction box, on the cable at the jack, on the cable at the patch
panel, on the termination side of the patch panel and on the
patch side of the patch panel. Cable markers shall be located
within 2” of the end of the cable jacket and shall be directly
readable. Panel labels shall be computers generated and printed
by a laser jet printer. Use the appropriate label forms for jack
plate or insert labels as required.
C. Labeling and marking shall be done as per latest EIA/TIA

standards.
3.4 CABLE SYSTEM
A. Contractor shall bond # 6 ground wire to distribution cabinet,

and bond cabinet to grounding rods located in nearest signal
vault for ground continuity. Continuity shall be checked with an
ohmmeter between adjacent components. Contractor shall certify to
DHS/USCIS that ohmmeter readings are no greater than one ohm.
B. Equipment racks/cabinets shall be grounded to building ground.
3.5 OUTLETS AND DROPS
A. All individual cable drops shall be terminated on faceplate with

data connectors.
B. All cables from overhead raceways shall be neatly dressed behind

distribution panels to provide adequate working space in back of
panels.
C. Contractor shall terminate data pairs of each cable on

distribution panels with design specified connectors.
3.6 CERTIFICATION, TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION
A. Before the Contract is considered complete, Contractor shall

demonstrate performance of system in presence of the Inspector.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 20

24000 AVILA ROAD

B. Unshielded twisted pair cables shall be tested for compliance
with Category 6 Performance Standards, in accordance with EIA/TIA
test procedures.
C. Fiber optic cables shall meet all EIA/TIA performance standards

and shall be tested in accordance with all applicable standards.
D. The Owner Inspector may order any changes, adjustments, or

further tests deemed necessary to assure that systems are
complete and operational in accordance with this Specification.
E. Contractor shall provide all test and reception gear required to

prove performance, as outlined, and all costs of test and
documentation will be borne by Contractor.
F. Contractor shall make a final test of all cable runs between wall
faceplate and distribution panel (s). All grid and backbones will
be tested. Tests shall be made as outlined in industry accepted
methods.
G. All test information shall be recorded on Cable Test Form(s). At

completion of project, these forms and any TDR or OTDR printouts
will be given to DHS/USCIS.
H. The network switches shall be installed and tested by factory

trained and certified technicians. Fundamental connectivity must
be demonstrated by performing and documenting a link integrity
test from each Intermediate and Workgroup switch and the Backbone
switch. This testing shall consist of a ping test being conducted
from a device a random port on each switch in the network.
Unsuccessful ping tests must be diagnosed and rectified resulting
in a successful ping test. The completion of these tests must be
documented and submitted in spreadsheet form identifying the
closet and rack location of each switch along with the test
results for that switch.
3.7 COMPLETION
A. Contractor’s work shall be considered complete after the

following have been accomplished:
1. All system testing has been completed, Contractor certifies

that entire system is in working order, and Cable Test
Forms have been submitted to DHS/USCIS.
2. All system labels have been put in place.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 21

24000 AVILA ROAD

3. All construction debris and scrap materials have been
removed from project site.
4. All marked up, project record documents have been returned

to the Owner.
5. All unused customer material has been returned to the

Owner.
6. The Owner’s Inspector has inspected and accepted the

installation.
3.8 SPECIFIC SITE REQUIREMENTS “ATTACHMENT A”
A. The provided Scope of Work includes the installation of Category

6 horizontal cabling as specified in the above standard. The
proposal submitted MUST include a cable plant installation and
solution to meet the provided requirements. The manufacturer of
the conductivity hardware is responsible for the warranty of the
complete installation. The proposed cable plant solution must
meet the minimum 15-year application assurance warranty to
include product, cable, etc. and labor.
B. Provide a component (material) list of the items included in the

submitted proposal. This document will be used when reviewing the
proposal to clarify that all of the requested items have been
included. Also provided a description of the cable plant solution
proposed, channel solution, warranty details meeting the
specified criteria and certification from manufacturer of
conductivity hardware, which will warranty complete installation.
C. Provide and install data and voice copper cabling to 70 drops

locations. (67 quad & 3 voice only wall phones) * HSDN
requirements list separately below in section.
D. Estimate of 20’ of 18” ladder cable runway shall be installed in

RWC / IDF Telecommunication Room. (For ladder cable runway use
CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. Universal Cable Runway 10250-718
or equiv. and Radius Bend 10723-718 or equiv. with associated
mounting and installation products, butt splices, corner and
mounting brackets, etc.)
E. Provide and install one (1) standard 7’ x 19” two post rack with
10” vertical (front & rear combo) wire management in the RWC /
Telecommunication Room. (For equipment rack use CPI, Chatsworth
Products, Inc. 55053-703 or equiv. and for 10” vertical
management with hinged covers use CPI 30096-703 or equiv.)
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 22

24000 AVILA ROAD

F. Provide and install one (1) single-sided shelf in the
Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (For single-sided shelf
use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 40074-700 or equiv.)
G. The equipment racks require 2U & 1U horizontal wire management

with hinged covers as specified in elevation drawings with
quantities. Total quantity: 8 (2U) & 2 (1U) (For horizontal
management use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 30530-719 & 30529-
719 or equiv.) * Additional wire management assemblies have been
added to the provided total which are not displayed in the below
Visio elevation drawings.
H. The horizontal cabling for the modular furniture assemblies will

be routed in a provided power / communication pole or conduit
raceway system within a wall or column installed by the
electrical contractor. * Please note that sufficient cable length
should be installed at these locations to accommodate routing
through the modular furniture assemblies for termination. Provide
components (loom tubing, spiral wrap, etc.) for the transition
from the wall or column into the furniture assemblies.
I. The installation dates for modular furniture will need to be

coordinated with the construction schedule and onsite
representative.
J. All horizontal cabling routed through ceiling space to the

designated RWC / Telecommunication Room. Horizontal cabling shall
be supported by J-hooks staggered approximately within four feet
(4’) on center (max. distance of 5’ spacing). Use Caddy CAT64,
32, 21 and 12 or equiv. for horizontal cabling support. Leave 20%
capacity in J-hooks for future growth.
K. Install triplex data and voice cables within the FDNS space.
Terminate the cables on 48 port performance compliant 2U patch
panels for “A”, “B” and “C” locations in the Telecommunication
Room equipment rack. (Total quantity: 6 – 48 port patch panels)
L. Install and terminate three (3) Category 6 single voice cables

(wall phones) on a 24 port performance compliant 1U patch panel
for “W” locations (Wall) in the Telecommunication Room equipment
rack. (Total quantity: 1 – 24 port patch panel)
M. One (1) - 100 pair plenum CAT 3 cable to be installed between RWC
/ (IDF) Telecommunication Room and the CSC PBX / Voice Closet on
the 2nd floor and terminated on a two (2) - 48 port patch panels
for voice cross-connect between closets. (center pins 4 & 5 -
white / blue & blue / white) (Total quantity: 2 – 48 port patch
panels & 1 – 110FT)
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 23

24000 AVILA ROAD

N. One (1) - 12-strand armored plenum multimode 62.5x125 μm optical
fiber cable to be installed and terminated with SC connectors on
SC duplex panels between RWC / Telecommunication Room and the
Server / Computer Room on the 2nd floor. Provide one (1) 1U
enclosure for fiber optic terminations in the Server / Computer
Room and one (1) 1U enclosure in the Telecommunication Room
equipment rack. * Please see the on-site contact for the exact
locations and preferred routing of fiber optic backbone cabling.
O. Provide the listed fiber optic jumpers. SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM

fiber optic jumpers 3M in length - Quantity: 2; SC – LC Duplex
62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 15M in length - Quantity: 2; SC – SC
Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 15M in length - Quantity: 2;
SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length -
Quantity: 2.
P. All equipment hardware mounted in racks and cabinet must utilize

concealed routing for both vertical and horizontal cable
management to provide a clean patching environment. * Please
provide manufacture specific patch cables for channel performance
with solution installation. Patch cable quantity: 100% - “A” 40
(7’ blue) & 40 (5’ blue), 30% - “B” ports 20 (5’ red), 100% - “C”
ports 80 (5’ white) at the equipment rack and 100 (10’ black) for
the drop location. Also provided the list of spare patch cables
for additional equipment connections: 20 (25’ black)
Q. Installer contractor is responsible for providing labeled patch

cables. This is for identification of patch cables routed in the
Telecommunication Room. The number labeling sequence should be
consecutive, 0001 – 1000, with duplications for both ends. *
Please see the on-site contact regarding labeling and
identification which may be different than the listed sequence.
R. See drawing E701 detail #5 for IDF rack elevation. NOTE:

Additional components may be specified in the above details that
are not shown in the or layout drawings. The provided elevation
layouts for components and the positioning are critical for the
deployment of equipment hardware.
S. Installation contractor is required to sleeve for horizontal

cabling for wall penetrations that are not provided by the
electrical contractor.
T. Fire stopping of all horizontal penetrations is required by the

installer contractor and must meet specifications, UL ratings and
installation requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, NFPA, ASTM, and
NEC, local and state codes.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 24

24000 AVILA ROAD

U. Grounding / bonding of equipment racks, ladder tray, etc. is
required to the provided TMGB, TGB, etc. or equivalent by the
electrical contractor. Please reference standards and
manufacturer requirements for installation.
V. Identification for the labeling of the telecommunication closets

and cable #’s will be clarified prior to installation of cable
plant.
W. Installer contractor is responsible for installing network

hardware and PDU units in the equipment racks and routing of
patch cables in the vertical and horizontal wire management.)
X. Network Electronics, UPS and PBX (Phone system) are not included
in this S.O.W.
Y. Utilize Velcro fasteners for cable plant installation. Tie wraps

are not acceptable for any application of the installation.
Provide two (2) Panduit HLS-75R0 or equivalent - ¾” x 75’ roll of
Velcro separately for patch cable installation.)
Z. Installer contractor is responsible for removing the abandoned

cables within the space back to the place of termination (ex.
telecom closet). Place blank cover plates on the existing wall
outlets which are not utilized. *Please see the on-site contact
regarding questions in the identification of these cables.
AA. IMPORTANT NOTE: The special requirements listed below are for the
HSD Network slotted for the FDNS space.
BB. One (1) - 6-strand armored plenum multimode 62.5x125 μm optical

fiber cable to be installed and terminated with SC connectors on
a SC duplex panel between FDNS / HSDN Secure Room and the Server
/ Computer Room on the 2nd floor. Provide one (1) 1U enclosure for
fiber optic terminations in the Server / Computer Room and one
(1) wall-mount enclosure in the HSDN Secure Room, which will be
mounted below ceiling on the back wall. * Please see the on-site
contact for the exact locations and preferred routing of fiber
optic backbone cabling.
CC. Install a total of six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in
color) in the EMT conduit raceway system installed within the
wall space of the HDSN secure space. The six (6) Category 6 UTP
plenum cables (white in color) will originate from the single-
gang, flush mount box and will be routed to three (3) different
locations within the Secure Room space. Terminate the six (6)
Category 6 modules (gray in color) into the one 6-port flush
mount, single-gang plate. These six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 25

24000 AVILA ROAD

cables are point to point within the room only and do not utilize
patch panels or incorporate the star topology.
DD. Install two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cable (white in color) into
the three (3) open wall mount boxes. Terminate a Category 6
module (gray in color) in 2-port flush mount, single-gang covers
at the three (3) locations.
EE. Identify the cables in the wall boxes and label the faceplates
with #1 - #6 for identification of the six (6) point to point
cables.
FF. Install a total of two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in
color) from the HSDN Secure Room space to the Telecommunications
Closet. The two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color)
will be utilized for the required POTS line for the HSD Network.
Leave the cables un-terminated at both ends and label accordingly
and to and from point to point locations for identification.
These cables will be terminated be the service provider during
the circuit installation and extension.
GG. Provide Category 6 UTP patch cables (gray in color) in 10’ in

length. Quantity: 6 (for wall to computer connection)
HH. Provide Category 6 UTP patch cables (gray in color) in 20’ in

length. Quantity: 6 (for HSDN switch connection into cabinet)
These patch cables will routed into the cabinet and plugged
directly into the network switch providing the HSDN connection to
the point to point locations installed.
II. Provide SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length.

Quantity: 2
JJ. Provide SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 2M in length.

Quantity: 2
KK. Please note that the HSD Network shall be installed separately
from standard network drop locations and shall NOT share conduit
raceways, etc. A distance of approximately 24” should separate
outlets and termination points per security standard
requirements.
3.9 TECHNICAL DELIVERABLES
A. The contractor shall ensure all documentation meets the

requirements, as specified in the ANSIITIAIEIA 606 Standards.
Where a conflict may exist between the ANSIITIAIEIA 606 and the
USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard documentation, the USCIS
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 26

24000 AVILA ROAD

Structured Cable Plant Standard documentation shall prevail.
Contractor shall provide two hardcopies and softcopies of the
following to the USCIS OCIO Regional Coordinator and USCIS
Technical Representative:
B. Letter of certification from the installing organization.
C. Letters of certification from each installation technician for

the appropriate cabling system being installed.
D. Completed Contractor Information Form.
E. Implementation report.
F. Detailed materials list.
G. Cable plant test certification letter.
H. Electronic copper cable test results (soft copy only) in Fluke

Networks Linkware format (.f1w). (Full plot data). See USCIS
Structured Cable Plant Standard for an example.
I. Electronic Fiber-optic cable test results (soft copy only) in

Fluke Networks Linkware format (.flw). (Full plot data). See
USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard for an example.
J. Certification summary reports for both fiber-optic and copper

cables in csv format.
K. Documentation on Structured Cable Warranty pertaining to site and

procedures to claim warranty service.
L. As-built site drawings soft and hard copy. Including a laminated

11 x 17 floor plan with corresponding jack locations in each
closet. Hand written documentation not accepted.
3.10 PROJECT UPDATES
A. If requested by the USCIS On-Site Representative, the

contractor's lead technician will provide a daily verbal
briefing. This briefing will include, but is not limited to, work
status, milestone status, and any issues.
B. The contractor will be required to participate in an End of

Project Conference Call. The contractor's Project Manager and
Lead Technician will participate. The conference call will be
scheduled by the Regional Coordinator and will take place
approximately two days prior to the contractor leaving the site.
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 27

24000 AVILA ROAD

The objective of the conference call will be to confirm that all
parties agree that the job is complete according to this
Statement of Work and the CIS Structured Cabling Standard and to
address any issues that were not previously identified.
3.11 SITE CLEANUP
A. The contractor is responsible for coordination with the site

general contractor or property/facility management contractor for
the removal of all debris resulting from the work being performed
by the contractor on a daily basis.
3.12 LICENSES AND PERMITS
A. The contractor is responsible for acquiring any and all permits

as required.
B. The contractor is responsible for maintaining all required

federal and local licenses and privilege permits.
3.13 SITE ACCESS
A. The contractor is responsible for coordinating with the USCIS on-

site representative or the general contractor for site access
privileges and required individual safety training.
PART 4 - WARRANTY
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 28

24000 AVILA ROAD

4.1 WARRANTY
A. The warranty shall cover the failure of the cable plant system to
support current or future applications that are designed for the
link/channel specifications of TIA/EIA568-B.
B. A minimum fifteen (15) year warranty covering application

assurance, product, cable, and labor.
C. Warranty needs to allow USCIS designated personnel to connect

end user equipment without going through a certified contractor.
D. Warranty needs to allow for new cable plant additions by the same
contractor or by another certified contractor of the installed
vendor's equipment.
E. The warranty needs to be guaranteed by the hardware vendor not

the installation contractor.
F. If a warranty claim is initiated, USCIS reserves the right to

authorize certified installation contractors permission to fix
the cable plant. In the event that the installation contractor is
denied access then the hardware vendor will provide another
certified installation contractor for approval. This process will
continue until the cable plant issues are resolved
SECTION 27 20 00 / 27 30 00 PAGE 29

24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 27 51 16
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes amplifier and control equipment, input

equipment, and reproducer equipment.
A. Public address system for voice.
B. Features:
1. Interface to telephone system.
2. One-way paging by zone.
3. Distribution of background music.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection

requirements. Indicate layout of equipment mounted in racks and
cabinets, component interconnecting wiring, and wiring diagrams
of field wiring to speakers and remote input devices.
C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical

characteristics and connection requirements for each component.
D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field

testing and inspection.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site,

adverse findings, and recommendations.
A. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of speakers,

control equipment, and outlets for input/output connectors.
24000 AVILA ROAD

adjusting, operating, and extending system, and repair procedures
and spare parts documentation.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

project.
B. Supplier: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with

minimum three 3 years documented experience.
C. Installer: Authorized installer of specified manufacturer with

service facilities within 100 miles of project.
A. Administrative Requirements: Pre-installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum 1week prior to commencing work of this section.
A. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Maintenance service.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of public address equipment for 1

year from Date of Substantial Completion.
PRODUCTS
Scope of work to provide new speakers as shown in the plans and connect
the new speakers to the existing P.A. system in the building, which
will include complete programming for these speakers.
1.8 SPEAKERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Sound F027W, or equal.
B. Product Description: 8 inches loudspeaker, 70,7V/25V transformer

and screw type grille.
C. Power Rating: 5 watts.
D. Frequency Range: 100 Hz - 10KHz ±.
E. Sound Pressure Level: 96 dB at 3 feet (0.9 M) with 1 watt input.
F. Magnet: 5 ounces magnet weight.
G. Dispersion: 105 degrees, 97db peak.
24000 AVILA ROAD
1.9 ENCLOSURE/MOUNTING RING/TILE BRIDGE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Atlas Sound 51-8, or equal
B. Product Description: 12 ¾ inch round, painted steel white finish

with uniform perforations.
C. Speaker Backbox: Insulated with sound-deadening material.
1.10 MATCHING TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Atlas sound LT-72, or equal.
B. Product Description: Matching transformer tapped from 0.25 to 5

watts, with primary/secondary ratio to match amplifier to speaker
impedances.
EXECUTION
1.11 EXISTING WORK
A. Extend existing public address and music installations using

materials and methods compatible with existing installations, or
as specified.
1.12 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Coordinate locations of outlet boxes specified

in as indicated on Drawings on ceiling.
B. Connect reproducers to amplifier with matching transformers.
C. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26

05 53.
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing,

B. Measure and record sound power levels at designated locations.
A. Quality Requirements: Manufacturer's field services.
B. Include services of technician employed by manufacturer to

supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, system
testing, and Owner training.
C. Verify installation is complete and performs according to

1.15 ADJUSTING
A. Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and

balancing.
B. Adjust transformer taps for appropriate sound level.
C. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
A. Furnish 1 hour of instruction each for 2 persons, to be conducted

at project site with manufacturer's representative.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 28 13 00
ACCESS CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Application Software
B. Access Control System
C. Access Control, Relay Control, and Alarm Monitoring controllers
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 26 05 01 - Basic Electrical Requirements.
B. Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
C. Section 26 27 16 – Electrical Cabinets and Enclosures
D. Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
E. Section 01 35 54 – GSA Security Regulations
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the latest issue of

all industry standards, publications, or regulations referenced
in this section and with the following references as applicable.
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
2. UL294 – Standard for Access Control Systems
3. NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm Code
4. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. System shall be UL-Listed.
1.5 NEW SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Kantech Intelligent System Controller shall be a modular and

network capable access control system.
A. Manufacturer: The security management, access control system

shall be from Kantech who specializes in access control systems
with a minimum of 10 years experience. Manufacturer shall offer
24000 AVILA ROAD
factory training, operator and administrator training for the

customer on the software specified. The manufacturer shall sell
their products through a network of authorized, trained dealers,
installers who may be capable of installing, servicing and
supporting Kantech products specified for this project. This
shall enable the owner to receive multiple bids from qualified
and trained installers on the Kantech Product line. All
Installers must meet the requirements as specified below.
B. Installer: Must be a “current” (which also extends into the

future for at least such time as will cover the project including
the guarantee period) and “direct” authorized dealer of Kantech.
The contractor must provide a letter of proof of dealership from
Kantech. Technicians and/or installers who will work on field
from the authorized dealer must show proof of Training on Kantech
Operator and Administrator Training. The Installer must also be
representative from a company specializing in intrusion detection
and access control systems with a minimum of three years
experience on systems of similar size and scope.
C. Insurance Certificates: Provide copy of Card Access/Alarm

Contractor's current liability insurance certificate with bid.
D. Service Capability: Submit with Bid documentation that the Card

Access/Alarm Contractor has competent design, installation,
service and maintenance personnel and facilities with reasonable
stock of service parts within fifty air miles of the job site.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer’s Data:
1. Submit three (6) copies of:
a. Product Data Sheets
b. Installation Instructions
2. Authorized Dealer Certificate and Certified Training

Certificates of installers who will be working on this
project.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Submit three (6) copies shop drawings, including:
a. Layout of equipment on supplied AutoCad drawings.
b. Field Controller equipment location wall layouts,

including size requirements.
2. Detailed wiring diagrams of Field Controllers, Door

Details, and head-end devices.
24000 AVILA ROAD
3. Load calculations of all security equipment for proper

sizing of electrical provided by the customer and standby
emergency generator circuits.
C. As-Built Drawings
1. Update Shop Drawings to create final As-Built Drawings.

Submit 3 copies and digitally in AutoCad 14 or later format
on a CD (3 copies).
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Operation Data: Include three (3) copies of the software

Administrator and Operator Manuals.
B. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance and repair procedures.
1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Owner will provide, on-site, a secure, dry, locked storage area

for all equipment delivered under this scope of work.
1.10 WARRANTY AND SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. All equipment, materials, and labor shall be guaranteed for a

period of 24 months from the date of final acceptance by the
Owner.
B. Provide any software maintenance updates or upgrades at no

additional cost to the Owner for this period.
C. Perform two (2) scheduled preventative maintenance site visits

per year during the warranty period.
D. Response Times – Normal business hours shall be 7 AM to 5 PM

Monday through Friday. Calls for service before noon shall be
responded to on-site before the end of the day. Calls after noon
shall be responded to on-site by noon the following business day.
E. Provide extra costs for time outside of normal business hours if

the Owner requires emergency service (during bid).
F. Submit an all-inclusive Annual Maintenance Agreement cost for

years 3 and 4 (during bid).
G. Submit normal and after hours labor costs and typical costs for
equipment for items not covered under the Warranty, like: Acts of
God, vandalism, misuse (during bid).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
24000 AVILA ROAD
Scope of work to provide complete Kantech access control system for 4

doors as shown on plans and connect new access control panel to
existing access control network system.
2.1 BASIC CENTRAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Communications Interface to Field Controllers Supported
1. RS-232
2. RS-485
3. TCP/IP
B. Control Panel Specifications
1. The control panel shall incorporate microprocessor-based,

digital technology, using high speed processing for maximum
reliability.
C. Distributed Intelligence
1. The system shall use distributed intelligence architecture,

with controllers operating independently of one another.
D. Stand Alone Operation
1. All database information required for stand-alone operation

shall be stored at the control panel level. All decision-
making shall be performed at the control panel, eliminating
the need for degraded mode operation.
2. Proprietary software programs and control logic information

used to coordinate and drive system hardware shall be
stored in Flash Downloadable Read Only Memory.
2.2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
A. Host Computer to Controller Communication Protocols
1. Communications between the computer and the controller

shall be accomplished and shall be encrypted using a 64-bit
cipher feedback method (Kantech Standards). The encryption
shall be full time and not require any programming or key
setting to operate.
2. The system shall utilize RS232 up to 100' for hardwired

applications.
3. The system shall utilize RS485 up to 4000' (4-wire

hardwired). Longer distances are allowed with a
communications multiplexer / amplifier, if applicable.
24000 AVILA ROAD
4. The system shall utilize TCP/IP for communicating over

dedicated or shared Ethernet networks.
5. All of the communications protocols shall be supported

simultaneously on the system.
B. Host Computer to Controller Communication Transmission

Methods/Hardware
1. Communications between the computer and the controller

shall be able to use any or all of the following methods:
a. Hardwired
b. Leased line modem
c. Fiber Optic
d. Microwave
e. RF
f. Ethernet 10/100/1000
g. Dial-Up modem
C. Proprietary Network Interface Hardware
1. The controller shall be interfaced to an industry standard

personal computer running proprietary software with the
addition of an opto-isolated network communications
interface board. The Interface Board will accept RS232,
RS485 or TCP/IP communications interface.
D. Maximum System Wide Capacities
1. The following shall be the maximum system wide capacities.

The actual number shall be dependent upon the mix of
controllers that make up the system.
a. Doors: Unlimited
b. Supervised Alarm Inputs: Unlimited
c. Control Relays: Unlimited
d. Controllers: Unlimited
e. Users: Unlimited
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.3 SYSTEM SOFTWARE (Provided by Contractor)
2.4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
A. Controllers
1. The access controller shall be a Kantech KT-200. Each

controller shall have the following common features.
B. Controller Board
1. The controller board shall be microprocessor based,

incorporating Flash ROM (firmware) downloadable from the
Host Computer, RAM (User Information, System Setups, Event
Transaction Buffer) and a Clock/Calendar. The ROM shall be
modularly upgradeable in the field for enhancements to
system features. All powered connections to the controller
board shall be protected by fuses. Each door connection
shall consist of terminals for two readers, one 10 Amp
rated Form C dry output relay for lock control, and one
input for monitoring a status switch, a request-to-exit
device, and a tamper switch. There shall be status
indicator lights for active relays, as well as diagnostic
indicator lights to aid in system troubleshooting. There
shall be dedicated alarm output relay/s for external
reporting of the following conditions: Alarm; Duress;
Tamper; and Trouble.
C. Enclosure
1. The controller enclosure shall be a key/new/lockable

Hoffman Enclosure with wire management utilized metal
cabinet designed for surface mounting. It shall have a
tampered, removable hinged door with a high security key
lock. It shall have conduit knockouts to allow from 1/2" to
2" EMT conduit to be used for wire entry into the cabinet.
D. Internal Power Supply
1. The controller shall have an internal power supply that

will accept 50 Hz/ 200 - 240 VAC, or 60 Hz/100 - 120 VAC.
The primary side of the power supply shall be protected
with a fuse. The power supply shall provide 12 VDC power to
the controller board, internal battery charger, selected
card readers, and reader interface boards.
E. Standby Battery
1. The controller shall have an internal standby battery that

is capable of running the system during AC power
interruptions. It shall be recharged by a charging circuit
incorporated into the controller board. It shall (2) GELL
type batteries (12V, 7AH)
24000 AVILA ROAD
2.5 CARD READER/KEYPAD SPECIFICATIONS
A. Proximity Card Readers
1. The controller shall be capable of using proximity readers

that output a standard XSF or 26 Bit Wiegand data format.
The readers can have a short or long read range and be
unidirectional or bi-directional.
2. The proximity readers shall be IO Prox P325W26.
3. Provide flush mount single gang box or equal.
2.6 DOOR CONTACT
A. All door contacts shall be in ABS plastic enclosure. Hermetically

sealed reed switch encapsulated in polyurethane, DPDT switch with
1ft. lead length.
B. The device shall be a GE 1076D-N, or equal.
2.7 CARDS
A. Proximity cards shall be Kantech dual encoded card format (xsf)

or match to existing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install wiring for detection and signal circuit conductors in

conduit. Use 22 AWG minimum size conductors.
C. Make conduit and wiring connections to existing door hardware

devices as required.
A. Test in accordance with Kantech Electronics testing procedures.
24000 AVILA ROAD
SECTION 28 16 00
INTRUSION DETECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes intrusion detection devices, alarm control

panel, signaling devices, and signal wiring.
1. Section 08 71 10 – Finish Hardware.
2. Section 01 35 54 – GSA Security Regulations
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
2. NFPA 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and

Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
3. Underwriters Laboratories Standard 2050, “Standard for

Safety of national Industrial Security Systems”.
4. Underwriters Laboratories Standard 634, “Standard for

Connectors & Switches for use with Burglar-Alarm Systems”.
5. Executive Order 12829, “National Industry Security

Program”.
6. Executive Order 12958, as amended, “Classified National

Security Information”.
7. 6 CFR, Part 7, “Department of Homeland Security, Classified

National Security Information”.\
8. 32 CFR, Part 2001/2004, Implementing Directive for EO

12958, as amended.
A. Intrusion Detection System: Protect building and selected areas

from intrusion during SECURE hours.
B. Alarm Sequence of Operation:
1. Actuation of intrusion detecting device causes the

following operations:
24000 AVILA ROAD
a. Local alarm signaling devices sound and display with

non-coded signal.
C. Non-coded signal transmits to remote station equipment.
D. Location of actuated device indicates on control panel.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures:
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system wiring diagram showing each device

and wiring connection.
C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing electrical

characteristics and connection requirements.
D. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified field

testing and inspection.
E. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate activities on site,

adverse findings, and recommendations.
A. Verify project closeout.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of intrusion

detection equipment.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s standard

operating and maintenance instructions.
A. Provide wiring materials located in plenums with peak optical

density not greater than 0.5, average optical density not greater
than 0.15, and flame spread not greater than 5 feet (1.5 m) when
tested in accordance with NFPA 262.
B. Perform Work in accordance with State standard.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of
project.
B. Installer: Certified security system installer with service

facilities within 100 miles of Project.
24000 AVILA ROAD
A. Project Closeout: Maintenance service.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of intrusion detection system for

one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
A. Project Closeout: Spare parts and maintenance products.
B. Furnish six keys of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTROL PANEL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bosch Model D7412GV2-D, or equal.
B. Product Description: Modular control panel with surface wall-

mounted enclosure.
C. Power supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules, relays,

and alarm signaling devices. Furnish battery-operated emergency
power supply with capacity for operating system in standby mode
for 24 hours.
D. System Supervision: Furnish electrically supervised system, with

supervised alarm initiating and alarm signaling circuits.
Component or power supply failure places system in alarm mode.
E. Initiating Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and

trouble indication.
F. Signal Circuits: Supervised [zone coded] signal module,

sufficient for signal devices connected to system; occurrence of
single ground or open condition places circuit in trouble mode
and does not disable circuit from transmitting alarm.
G. Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised,

capable of transmitting alarm and trouble signals over telephone
lines to central station receiver.
H. Auxiliary Relays: Furnish sufficient SPDT auxiliary relay

contacts [for each detection zone] to provide accessory functions
specified.
I. Occupied/Unoccupied Selector: Key pad function.
J. Zone Bypass Switch: Key pad function.
K. System Bypass Switch: Key pad function.
24000 AVILA ROAD
L. Alarm Reset: Key-accessible reset function resets alarm system

out of alarm when alarm initiating circuits have cleared.
M. Lamp Test: Manual lamp test function causes alarm indication at

each zone at control panel.
N. Entry and Exit Time Delays: Adjustable.
O. Provide D928 Dual Phone Line Switcher to allow control panel to

operate over and supervise two separate phone lines.
2.2 ENTRY/EXIT KEYPAD
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bosch D1260, White finished, or equal.
2.3 MAGNETIC SWITCH
A. Manufacturers:
1. Harco Model Magnasphere HSD. (No substitution.)
B. Product Description: Brushed anodized silver furnished with 36”

stainless steel conduit with cable by Harco. Provide required
bracket to magnetic door switch.
2.4 MOTION DETECTOR
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bosch Model DS937, or equal.
B. Product Description: Infrared type motion detector.
2.5 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Manufacturers:
1. West Penn Wire Model 224, or equal.
B. Product Description: Power limited cable, copper conductor, 300

volts insulation rated 105 degrees C.
C. Cable Located Exposed in Plenums: Power limited cable classified

for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300 volts
insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handling
ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.
24000 AVILA ROAD
B. Verify surfaces to receive detection devices are ready for

installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install 18 AWG minimum size conductors for detection and signal

circuit conductors. Install wiring in conduit.
B. All alarm system installation shall conform to the requirements

of MD No. 11046 / Open Area Standard for Collateral Classified
Information.
C. Make conduit and wiring connections to door hardware devices.
D. Install engraved plastic nameplates per DHS requirements.
A. Quality Requirements: Execution and Closeout Requirements: Field

B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and manufacturer’s

recommendations.
A. Quality Requirements: Manufacturer’s field services.
B. Furnish services of technician to supervise installation,

adjustments, final connections, system testing, and Owner
training.
A. Furnish 1 hour of instruction each for two persons, to be

conducted at project site with manufacturer's representative.
24000 AVILA ROAD

SECTION 28 31 00
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Scope: This work includes designing and providing a new,

complete, multiplex/addressable fire alarm system as described
herein for the new RVS DHS/CIS 1st Floor Expansion-Chet Holifield
Federal Building. The system shall include all wiring, raceways,
pull boxes, terminal cabinets, outlet and mounting boxes, control
equipment, alarm and supervisory signal initiating devices, alarm
notification appliances, and all other accessories and
miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even
though each item is not specifically mentioned or described. The
existing master fire alarm control panel with a UUKL Listed Stair
Tower Pressurization Smoke Control System Control Panel is
located in the Fire Command Center. New fire alarm terminal
cabinets (FATC) and/or new remote fire alarm control panels
(FACP) are required at each floor at both riser locations shall
be field located and shown on the shop drawings. If the
contractor’s proposed system requires additional remote fire
alarm control panels, they shall be provided adjacent to the
floor FATCs. Where remote fire alarm control panels are provided,
control circuits and power supplies for notification appliance
circuits may be located in the remote fire alarm control panels.
B. Extent of the Work: The system shall be installed in accordance

with the specifications and referenced publications.
C. Repair Service/Replacement Parts: Repair services and

replacement parts for the system shall be furnished under this
contract and be available for a period of 10 years after the date
of final acceptance of this work by the Government. On-site
service during the guarantee period shall be provided within 24
hours after notification. All repairs shall be completed within
48 hours after notification. Prices for labor and materials
shall be maintained at the installation rate plus 10% for a
minimum of 3 years.
D. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 26 & 28 sections for:
1. Cable
2. Wire
3. Raceways

24000 AVILA ROAD

4. Connectors
E. Other Divisions: Refer to the Division 7 section for work

related to Firestopping.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All components of each system shall

be furnished by a single manufacturer, shall be of current design
and shall be in regular and recurrent production.
B. Provide design, materials and devices for a protected premises

fire alarm system, complete, conforming to National Fire
Protection Association Standard 72, 2007 Edition, except as
otherwise or additionally specified herein. The design shall be
shown on shop drawings to be submitted to GSA for review and
approval prior to the purchase of materials and any installation
of the system at the job site.
C. Approved Equipment: Provide materials, equipment and devices

that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing
laboratory, such as Underwriters' Laboratories or Factory Mutual
Laboratories, and listed or approved for fire protection service
when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification.
D. Installer Requirements: Design shall be performed and

certified/stamped by a full-time employee of the Installer who
shall be either a NICET Level III or IV Fire Alarm Technician or
a California Registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer.
Fire Alarm Technicians performing the new installation shall be
NICET Level II or higher. Installer shall have an office, which
has been in existence for at least 3 years, within a 120
kilometer (75 mile) radius of the jobsite. Installation shall be
accomplished by an electrical contractor with a minimum of five
years experience in the installation of fire alarm systems. The
Contracting Officer may reject any proposed installer who cannot
show evidence of such qualifications. The services of a NICET
Level II or higher Fire Alarm Technician provided by the control
equipment manufacturer or factory authorized distributor shall be
provided to supervise installation, adjustments, and conduct all
tests of the system.
E. Service Organization: The contractor shall furnish evidence that

the fire alarm equipment supplier has an experienced and
effective service organization which carries a stock of repair
parts for the system to be furnished. Should the contractor fail
to comply with the service requirements of this section, the
government will then have the option to make the necessary
repairs and back charge the contractor without any loss of
warranty or guarantee as provided by the contract documents.

24000 AVILA ROAD

F. Guarantee: The contractor shall guarantee labor, materials, and
equipment provided under this contract against defects for a
period of one year after the date of final acceptance of this
work by the government and the receipt of as-built drawings and
schematics of all equipment.
G. Applicable Publications: Provide a system conforming to the

requirements of the latest edition of the following publications
including all amendments to these publications:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials
b. E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of

Building Construction and Materials
2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME):
a. A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (2000

edition)
b. C62.41 Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage

A.C. Power Circuits
3. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO).
a. Uniform Building Code (1997 edition)
b. Uniform Fire Code (2000 edition)
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 70 National Electric Code (NEC - 2008 edition)
b. 72 National Fire Alarm Code (2007 edition)
c. 101 Life Safety Code (2009 edition)
5. Testing Services or Laboratories: Construct all fire alarm

and fire detection equipment in accordance with the latest
edition of the following publications from Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. (UL), or Factory Mutual Engineering
Corporation (FM):
6. UL 228 - Door Holding Devices
a. UL 464 - Audible Signal Appliances, Fifth Edition

24000 AVILA ROAD

b. UL 864 - Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling
Systems, Sixth Edition
c. UL 1638 - Visual Signaling Appliances Standard
d. UL 1971 - Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired
e. UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory
f. UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory
g. FM P7825 Approval Guide
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the

drawings the equipment, devices, and functions shall be defined
as follows:
1. Alarm Signal: A signal which indicates a state of

emergency requiring immediate notification of the fire
department and of the building occupants. These are
signals such as the operation of a manual pull station, the
activation of a waterflow switch in a sprinkler system the
operation of a heat detector, or the operation of a
pressure switch in a fire suppression system caused by the
flow of fire extinguishing agent (e.g. kitchen fire
extinguishing system, C0 2 , etc.).
2. Supervisory Signal: A signal which indicates the

impairment of a fire protection system which may prevent
its normal use. These are signals from switches, such as a
tamper switch; a low air pressure switch; the receipt of an
alarm signal from a smoke detector that has gone through
alarm verification, the receipt of an alarm signal from an
elevator smoke detection control panel or a computer room
smoke detection panel, the operation of a duct smoke
detector, operation of a high air pressure switch; a
generator phase reversal switch; a generator power failure
switch; a generator running switch; a fire pump phase
reversal switch; a fire pump loss of power switch; or a
fire pump running switch.
3. Trouble Signal: A signal which indicates that a fault,

such as an open circuit or ground, has occurred in the fire
alarm system or in a separate sub-system, whose control
panel is monitored by the fire alarm system.
4. Multiplex System: A system in which multiple signals are

transmitted via the same conduction path to a remote fire

24000 AVILA ROAD

alarm control panel and fire alarm control panel, decoded
and separated so that each signal will initiate the
specified response.
5. Hard Wired System: A system in which alarm and supervisory

initiating devices are directly connected, through
individual dedicated conductors, to a central control panel
without the use of multiplexing circuits or devices.
6. Notification Appliance Circuit: A circuit to which

notification appliances are connected to visually and
audibly indicate an alarm evacuation signal.
7. Interface Device: An addressable device which

interconnects hard wired systems or devices to a multiplex
system.
8. Remote Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP): A control panel,

remote from the fire alarm control panel, that receives
inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices; may
supply power to detection devices and interface devices;
may provide transfer of power to the notification
appliances; may provide transfer of condition to relays or
devices connected to the control panel; and reports to and
receives signals from the fire alarm control panel.
9. Master Fire Alarm Control Panel (MFACP): A master control

panel having the features of a fire alarm control panel and
to which all fire alarm control panels are interconnected.
The panel has central processing, memory, input and output
terminals, voice communication system microphones,
firefighter’s telephone, video display units (VDUs) and
printers.
10. Class A Wiring: A circuit that is monitored for integrity

such that a single break, a single wire-to-wire short, or a
single loss of carrier condition will be indicated by a
trouble signal on the FACP no matter where the break, short
or loss of carrier condition occurs and will allow all
functions of the affect circuit to remain operational. In
accordance with NFPA 72, this would be Style 6 or 7 wiring
for signaling line circuits, and style Z for notification
appliance circuits
11. Class B Wiring: A circuit that is monitored for integrity

such that a single break, a single wire-to-wire short, or a
single loss of carrier condition will be indicated by a
trouble signal on the FACP no matter where the break, short
or loss of carrier condition occurs, but which would
prohibit devices beyond the fault, short or carrier loss

24000 AVILA ROAD

from remaining operational. In accordance with NFPA 72,
this would be Style 4 wiring for signaling line circuits,
Style B for initiating device circuits, and Style Y for
notification appliance circuits.
12. Signaling Line Circuit: A circuit to which any combination

of circuit interfaces, control panels, or transmitters are
connected and over which multiple system input signals or
output signals, or both, are carried.
13. Tamper Switch: A valve monitor switch as indicated in NFPA

72.
14. Initiating Device: A system component that originates

transmission of a change of state condition, which
initiates an appropriate response via the fire alarm
system.
15. Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet (FATC): A steel cabinet,

painted red, with locking, hinge-mounted door in which
terminal strips are securely mounted. Minimum size is 200
mm x 200 mm (8 inch x 8 inch).
1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. General: System shall be a complete, supervised, non-coded,

addressable multiplex fire alarm system conforming to NFPA 72.
The system interconnected riser loops, network circuit and audio
risers shall have Style 7 supervision, with the return portion of
the loop located remote from the supply portion of the loop. The
system shall have two Style 4 signaling line circuits (or one
style 6) and two Style Y notification appliance circuits for each
floor. Any single impairment of the system shall not affect the
system on more than one-half of any floor. The system shall
operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating
device. The system shall remain in the alarm mode until all
initiating device(s) are reset and the fire alarm control panel
is manually reset and restored to normal. The system shall
provide the following functions and operating features:
1. The FACP and remote fire alarm control panels shall provide
power, annunciation, supervision and control for the
system.
2. Style B initiating device circuits.
3. Style 4 signaling line circuits for each floor. A single

signaling line circuit shall not serve more than three
floors, and shall have an isolation module at each floor,
when serving more than one floor.

24000 AVILA ROAD

4. Style 7 signaling line circuits for the network and audio
risers.
5. Style Y notification appliance circuits.
6. Provide electrical supervision of the primary power (AC)

supply, presence of the battery, battery voltage, and
placement of system modules within the control panel.
7. Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate

upon a single break or open condition, or ground fault
which prevents the required operation of the system. The
trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary
power (AC) supply, absence of a battery supply, low battery
voltage, or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules.
Provide a non latching trouble alarm silence feature which
will silence the audible trouble signal, without affecting
the visual indicator. After the system returns to normal
operating conditions, the trouble signal shall again sound
until the trouble is acknowledged. A smoke detector in the
process of being verified for the actual presence of smoke
shall not initiate a trouble condition.
8. Provide a notification appliance silencing switch which,

when activated, will cause the audible notification
appliances to cease operating, but not affect the visible
notification appliance or liquid crystal display or the
automatic notification of the central station service.
This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a
subsequent alarm.
9. Provide alarm verification capability for smoke detectors.
10. Provide capability via separate switches in a locked

portion of the main FACP to bypass the automatic
notification appliance circuits, air handler shutdown,
elevator recall, elevator shunt trip operation, door holder
release, and door unlocking (future use) features.
Operation of this programmed switch shall indicate this
action on the FACP display and printer output.
11. Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory

functions. Supervisory functions shall override trouble
functions.
12. The system shall be capable of being programmed in the

field. All programmed information shall be stored in
non-volatile memory.
13. The system shall be capable of operating, supervising,


24000 AVILA ROAD

and/or monitoring both addressable and non-addressable
alarm and supervisory devices.
14. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system

capacity, as to the number of addressable devices which may
be in alarm simultaneously.
15. Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating

an action in another emergency control device or system,
such as an HVAC system or elevator system, the addressable
fire alarm relay shall be within 3 feet of the emergency
control device.
16. An alarm signal (manual pull station, waterflow switch,

heat detector, kitchen hood suppression system) shall
automatically initiate the following functions:
a. Transmission of an alarm signal to a U.L. listed

Central Station.
b. Visual indication of the device operated on the fire

alarm control panel (FACP), and on the graphic
annunciator. Indication on the graphic annunciator
shall be by floor, and type of device.
c. Continuous actuation of alarm notification appliances

on the floor of fire alarm origin, the floor above
the floor of fire alarm origin, and the floor below
the floor of fire alarm origin, but not those in
elevator cabs or stairwell (floor of alarm
programming requirements to be field verified with
final determination at system acceptance test).
d. Visual indication of the device operated on the LCD

annunciator in the GSA Field Office, and in the
Basement Building Engineer’s Office.
e. Operate remote common alarm relays (by floor) form C

contacts, to be monitored by the Building Automation
System.
f. Recording of the event via the system printer.
g. Release of power to electric locks on doors which are

part of the means of egress (future use).
h. Operation of a heat detector or a sprinkler waterflow

switch in an elevator machinery room shall operate
the local shunt trip circuit breaker(s) to shut down
power to the elevators in accordance with ANSI A17.1,

24000 AVILA ROAD

in addition to a, b, c, d, e, and f above.
i. Operation of a waterflow switch shall activate the

stairwell pressurization system in addition to a, b,
c, d, e, f, and g above.
17. A supervisory signal (smoke detector, duct detector, valve

tamper switch, computer room FACP or fire pump operation)
shall automatically initiate the following functions:
a. Transmission of a supervisory signal to a U.L. listed

Central Station.
b. Visual indication of the device operated on the fire

alarm control panel (FACP), and on the graphic
annunciator. Indication on the graphic annunciator
shall be by floor, and type of device.
c. Recording of the event via the system printer.
d. Visual indication of the device operated on the LCD

e. Operate a remote common supervisory relay form C

contact to be monitored by the Building Automation
System.
f. Operation of a smoke detector in an elevator lobby,

elevator machine room, or other location associated
with the automatic recall of elevators, shall recall
the elevators and broadcast the recall message in the
elevator cars, in addition to a, b, c, and d above.
g. Operation of an area smoke detector adjacent to a

door equipped with an automatic closer or magnetic
holder shall release the door in addition to a, b, c,
and d above.
h. Operation of a duct smoke detector shall shut down

the appropriate air handlers on the floor of the duct
detector in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to
a, b, c, and d above.
i. Operation of an area smoke detector adjacent to a

stairwell door shall activate the stairwell
pressurization system in addition to a, b, c, and d
above.
18. A trouble condition (loss of power, wiring fault) shall


24000 AVILA ROAD

automatically initiate the following functions:
a. Transmission of a trouble signal to a U.L. listed

Central Station.
b. Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP,

and on the graphic annunciator. Indication on the
graphic annunciator shall be by floor.
c. Operate a remote common trouble relay form C contact

to be monitored by the Building Automation System.
d. Recording of the event via the system printer.
e. Visual indication of the device operated on the LCD

19. The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation

of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP
shall be ten seconds.
20. The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the

trouble condition and its indication at the FACP shall not
exceed thirty seconds.
21. Audible and visual alarm notification devices shall be

powered from separate circuits.
22. Audible and visual alarm notification devices shall be

separately silenceable.
1.5 OVERVOLTAGE AND SURGE PROTECTION
A. Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection: For systems having

circuits located outdoors, all communications equipment shall be
protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit.
All cables and conductors, which serve as communications links,
shall have surge protection circuits installed at each end that
meet the following waveform[s]:
1. A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak

voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1: Refer to Section "SUBMITTALS" for basic information

relating to submittal requirements. Submit 6 complete sets of
submittals. Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will

24000 AVILA ROAD

be returned without review. Before any work is commenced, the
submittal must be approved by the GSA Region 9 Safety and
Environmental Management Branch Fire Protection Engineer.
Manufacturer's data shall be annotated and provided for the
following:
1. Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
2. Storage Batteries
3. Battery Charger
4. Cabinet
5. Addressable Interface Devices
6. Terminal Cabinets/Assemblies
7. Addressable Relays
8. Speaker/Strobe Unit
9. Fire Alarm Speaker
10. Visual Alarm Signal Strobe
11. Smoke Detector
12. Amplifiers
13. Tone Generators
14. Digitized Voice Generators
15. Remote Fire Alarm Control Panel
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings not smaller than 760 mm (30
inches) by 1070 mm (42 inches). As a minimum, the shop drawing
submittal shall include the following:
1. Provide point-to-point wiring diagrams showing:
a. The terminals used for all field device connections

to all panels the system, including all
interconnections between the equipment or systems
which are supervised or controlled by the system.
b. All connections from the main FACP to all remote fire

alarm control panels or auxiliary power supplies.

24000 AVILA ROAD

c. All internal panel wiring connections and jumper
positions.
d. All terminal cabinet wiring.
e. All points of connection for owner furnished

equipment, i.e. telephone lines or BAS interface.
2. Provide a complete description of the system operation,

including a sequence of operation matrix.
3. Provide a complete list of device addresses and

corresponding descriptor readouts.
4. Provide scaled floor plans showing the location of all

devices, panels, equipment, power sources, raceways and
conductors. Show the strobe candela rating for all visual
alarm appliances.
5. Provide a riser drawing showing all fire alarm panels,

terminal cabinets, and interconnection wiring. Show all
field devices and circuit layouts for all floors. Indicate
the wiring sequence of all devices and their connections to
the control equipment.
6. Provide device mounting details and elevations for all

equipment to be installed.
7. Provide battery calculations for all panels showing both

the alarm and supervisory power requirements used to size
the batteries. Manufacturer’s data sheets showing ampere-
hour requirements for each system component shall be
submitted with the calculations.
8. Provide circuit load calculations to indicate that there is

at least 15% spare capacity for notification appliance
circuits, and 15% spare capacity for signaling line and
initiating device circuits.
9. Provide amplifier circuit load calculations to indicate

that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to
simultaneously drive all fire alarm speakers at their 1/2
watt tap plus 25% spare capacity.
10. Provide voltage drop calculations for all strobe

notification appliance circuits. Show formula used and
individual calculations of types and number of devices on
each circuit. Voltage drop shall not exceed ten percent of
the nominal circuit calculations, i.e. 2.4 volts.

24000 AVILA ROAD

11. Provide power supply calculations for all external loads
powered from this system, including door holders, door
closers, damper motors, door strikes, etc.
12. Provide load information (and calculations, where

necessary) for all circuits connected to fire alarm control
relay contacts.
13. Provide load calculations for all new circuits connected to

the 120 VAC emergency distribution panel. Voltage drop
shall not exceed three percent at the farthest load.
14. Submit annotated catalog data showing manufacturer's name,

model, voltage, and catalog numbers for all fire alarm
equipment and installation components, including wire and
cable.
15. Provide a color code schedule for all field wiring

circuits.
16. Provide the stamp, seal or registration number, and

signature of designer or engineer meeting the requirements
of Part 1.02.D.
C. The acceptance testing will not be permitted until the shop

drawings are approved.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General: Provide operation and maintenance manuals not less than

thirty days prior to the final acceptance testing of the entire
system and after the preliminary testing has been completed. The
manuals shall be used during the instruction period hereinafter
specified. Provide six bound copies of an Operation and
Maintenance Manual. The manual shall include an index, copies of
all approved shop drawings and submittal materials, and a
complete parts list of all components. The manual shall also
include, for each item, the manufacturer's name, the serial
number of the part, an ordering number, if appropriate, and a
physical and electrical description of the part. Following the
acceptance test, drawings and submittal materials shall be
updated as necessary to reflect as-built conditions.
B. Record Drawing Software Copy: Provide two (2) sets of floppy

diskettes or CD-ROM's containing CAD based drawings in both DWG
and DXF format of all as-built drawings and schematics.
1.8 INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES
A. Instructor: Include in the project the services of an instructor


24000 AVILA ROAD

who shall have received specific training from the manufacturer
for the training of other persons regarding the inspection,
testing and maintenance of the system provided.
B. Qualifications: Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar

with all parts of this installation and shall be NICET Level III
or higher. The instructor shall be trained in operating theory
as well as in practical operation and maintenance work.
C. Required Instruction Time: Provide two 4 hour classes of

instruction after final acceptance of the system. The
instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such
dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer.
After each class, the contractor shall submit the sign in sheet
with the date, time and names of all attendees, to the
D. Required Instruction Material: The instructor shall train the

Government employees and building maintenance contractor
employees, as designated by the Contracting Officer, in the care,
adjustment, maintenance, and operation of the fire alarm and fire
detection system. Provide specific training in the operation of
all panels, the calibration of all detectors, and in the
programming of all panel software, databases and other
programming functions.
1.9 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. General: Prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer six sets

of detailed "As Built Drawings" on CAD. The drawings shall
include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all
devices and equipment, both factory and field wired. Include a
riser diagram and drawings showing the as-built location of all
devices and equipment. The drawings shall show the system as
installed, including all deviations from both the project
drawings and the approved shop drawings. The drawings shall be
prepared on uniform sized sheets not less than 760 mm (30 inches)
by 1070 mm (42 inches). These drawings shall be submitted within
two weeks after the final acceptance test of the system and two
weeks prior to the instruction of government employees.
1.10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DEVICE LOCATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Alarm Control Panel(s) - FACP
1. Locate FACP in data/utility room.
B. Addressable Control Relays
1. Locate at each HVAC fan controller for shutdown, where


24000 AVILA ROAD

shutdown is required by NFPA 90A and NFPA 92A.
C. Addressable Monitor Modules
1. Locate 1 at each conventional heat detector on attic.
D. Notification Appliances - Speakers
1. Locate throughout the building to provide a minimum sound

level of 70 dBA, or 15 dBA above ambient, whichever is
higher.
2. Locate speakers at a maximum coverage of 900 sq. ft. per

speaker.
3. Locate speakers so that all rooms within the building are

not more than 1 doorway from a speaker.
E. Notification Appliances - Strobes
1. Locate in all public areas of the building, including

lobbies, reception areas, and waiting rooms.
2. Locate in all common areas of the building, including

corridors, open office areas, building core spaces and
conference rooms.
3. Locate in all high noise areas (ambient noise level exceeds

90 dBA).
F. Spot Smoke Detectors
1. Locate at all main and remote FACP
2. Locate in the main telephone equipment (PBX) room
3. Locate throughout the entry lobby space ceilings on the

ground floor.
G. Duct Smoke Detectors
1. Coordinate duct smoke detector locations with mechanical

contractor to ensure there are no non-addressable duct
smoke detectors installed on the project. Replace any with
addressable duct smoke detectors as required.
2. Locate per NFPA 90A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

24000 AVILA ROAD

2.1 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULES
A. The addressable interface (AI) monitor device shall provide an

addressable input interface to the FACP for monitoring
normally-open or normally-closed contact devices such as
waterflow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump
monitoring, independent smoke detection systems, etc. The
initiation device circuits shall be Style B.
B. The addressable interface (AI) relay device shall provide an

addressable relay with one fused form C (SPDT) contact for output
control functions.
2.2 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Fire Alarm Speakers:
1. Provide fire alarm speakers conforming to UL 464 having a

minimum of three (3) tap settings and separate terminations
for each "in" and "out" connection. Tap settings shall
include taps of 1/4, 1/2 and 1 watt. Speakers shall
utilize the 1/2 watt tap in the system. Speakers shall
have an output rating of 84 dBA at 3 000 mm (10 feet) as
determined by the reverberant room test; data on peak
output as determined in an anechoic chamber is not
suitable. All speakers shall be capable of installation on
standard 100 mm (4 inch) square electrical boxes. Where
speakers and strobes are provided in the same location,
they may be combined into a single wall or ceiling mounted
unit.
2. Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled

steel having a minimum thickness of sixteen (16) gauge and
equipped with mounting holes and other openings as needed
for a complete installation. All fabrication marks and
holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and
neat appearance for each plate. Each plate shall be primed
and painted.
3. Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same

location, they may be combined into a single unit.
B. Visual Alarm Signals:
1. Provide synchronized strobe light visual alarm signals

which operate on a supervised twenty-four (24) volt D.C.
reverse polarity circuit. The strobe lens shall comply
with UL 1971 and conform to the Americans with Disabilities
Act. The strobe shall have a xenon flash tube.

24000 AVILA ROAD

2. The strobe light pattern shall be designed and listed for
the specific installation location, either wall mounted or
ceiling mounted. Each strobe shall be clearly labeled
"FIRE" on a minimum of two sides. The lettering shall be
horizontal for ceiling mounted locations and vertical for
wall mounted locations.
3. The strobe flash output shall be a minimum of 15 candela

and a maximum of 110 cd, based on UL standard 1971. The
installed strobe’s candela rating shall be based upon the
actual size of the room or area to be covered, in
accordance with NFPA 72.
C. Connections:
1. Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance.

Terminals shall be designed to accept the size conductors
used in this project without modification.
2.3 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Provide addressable photoelectric

smoke detectors as follows:
1. Provide analog photoelectric smoke detectors utilizing the

photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in
accordance with UL 217 and 268. Smoke detectors shall be
listed for use with the fire alarm control panel.
2. Provide self-restoring type detectors which do not require

any readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal
operation. Detectors shall be UL listed as Smoke-Automatic
Fire Detectors.
3. Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic

screen which prevents the entrance of insects or air born
materials. The screen shall not inhibit the movement of
smoke particles into the chamber. All components shall be
rust and corrosion resistant. Vibration shall have no
effect on the detector's operation.
4. Provide twist lock bases for the detectors. The detectors

shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of
springs. Provide companion mounting base equipped with
screw terminals for each conductor. Terminate field wiring
on the fixed terminals.
5. The detector shall have a visual indicator to show

actuation.

24000 AVILA ROAD

6. The detector address shall identify the particular unit,
its location within the system, and its sensitivity
setting. Detectors shall be of the low voltage type rated
for use on a 24 VDC system.
B. Duct Smoke Detectors: Duct smoke detectors shall be

photoelectric type and be provided in supply ductwork in
accordance with NFPA 90A.
1. Provide duct smoke detector sampling tubes which are

installed across the longitudinal cross section of the duct
and protrude out past the end of the duct.
2.4 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (MFACP)
A. General: The existing Main Fire Alarm Control Panel is located

at basement Fire Control Center.
2.5 REMOTE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS (FACP):
A. General: Provide complete remote control panels fully enclosed

in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein. All
operations required for testing or for normal care and
maintenance of the control panels shall be performed from the
front of the enclosure. If more than a single panel is required
at a location to form a complete control panel, the panel
enclosures shall match exactly. Each control panel shall provide
power, supervision, control and logic for its portion of the
entire system, utilizing solid state, modular components,
internally mounted and arranged for easy access. Each control
panel shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt, 60 hertz,
emergency building power supply. Provide each panel with
supervisory functions for power failure, internal component
placement, and operation.
B. Cabinet: Install remote control panel components in cabinets

large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow
ample gutter space for interconnection of all panels as well as
all field wiring. The enclosure shall be identified by an
engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the
nameplate shall say Remote Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall not
be less than 25 mm (1-inch) high. Provide prominent rigid
plastic or metal identification plates for all lamps, circuits,
meters, fuses and switches. The cabinet shall be provided in a
sturdy steel housing, complete with backbox, hinged steel door
with cylinder lock, and surface mounting provisions.
C. Control Modules: Provide power and control modules to perform

all functions of the remote control panel. Provide audible
signals to indicate any alarm or trouble condition. The alarm

24000 AVILA ROAD

signals shall be different from the trouble signal. Connect all
circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw-type
terminals with each terminal marked for identification. Locate
diodes and relays, if any, on screw terminals in the remote
control panel. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at
less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other voltage
shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10% of nominal voltage.
Circuits shall be arranged so that there is 25% spare capacity
for any circuit.
D. All control functions for the system shall take place at the main
Fire Alarm Control Panel.
E. Non-Interfering: Power and supervise each circuit such that a

signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals
from any other device.
F. Memory: Provide each control panel with non-volatile memory and

logic for all functions. The use of long life batteries,
capacitors or other age-dependent devices shall not be considered
as equal to non-volatile processors, PROMS or EPROMS.
G. Field Programmability: Provide control panels that are fully

field programmable for control, initiating, supervisory and
trouble functions of both input and output. The system program
configuration shall be menu driven. All system changes shall be
password protected and shall be accomplished using personal
computer based equipment.
2.6 AMPLIFIERS, PREAMPLIFIERS, TONE GENERATORS:
A. General: Any amplifiers, preamplifiers, tone generators,

digitized voice drives and all other hardware necessary for a
complete, operational voice/alarm signaling service conforming to
NFPA 72 shall be housed in a remote fire alarm control panel,
fire alarm terminal cabinet, or in the main fire alarm control
panel. The system shall automatically operate and control all
building fire alarm speakers, speakers in the stairs and speakers
within elevator cabs. Each amplifier panel shall have two
channels; one to broadcast a message and the other for paging.
Provide one spare amplifier, equal in size to the largest
amplifier used, at each amplifier cabinet.
B. Construction: All amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid

state components and shall be provided with output protection
devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient
up to ten (10) times the highest rated voltage in the system.
C. Inputs: Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from

the tone generator, digitized voice driver and panel mounted

24000 AVILA ROAD

microphone. Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance,
balanced line type. Both microphone and tone generator input
shall be operational on any amplifier.
D. Tone Generator: The tone generator shall be of the modular, plug-

in type with securely attached labels to identify the component
as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it
produces. The tone generator shall produce a slow whoop tone,
which shall slowly ascend from low (500 hertz) to high (1200
hertz), and be constantly repeated until interrupted by either
the digitized voice message, the microphone input or the alarm
silence mode as specified. Each slow whoop cycle shall last
approximately four (4) seconds. The tone generator shall be
single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel
such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup
generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed
panel and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay.
E. Protection Circuits: Each amplifier shall be constantly

supervised for any condition which could render the amplifier
inoperable at its maximum output. Failure of any component shall
cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier,
illumination of a visual "amplifier trouble" indicator on the
main fire alarm control panel, appropriate logging of the
condition on the system printer and other actions for trouble
conditions as specified.
2.7 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. Batteries: Provide sealed, maintenance-free, lead-calcium

batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACP.
Batteries shall contain suspended electrolyte. The battery
system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means
of a solid state battery charger. Provide an automatic transfer
switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the
failure of primary power. Batteries shall have lead bolt-on or
wing-nut-type terminals. Batteries with fast-tab terminals are
unacceptable.
B. Capacity: Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to

operate all signaling line circuits, initiating device circuits,
and notification appliance circuits in normal or supervisory
(non-alarm) mode for a period of 24 hours. Following this period
of operation on battery power, the batteries shall have
sufficient capacity to operate all components of the system in
alarm mode for a period of 30 minutes.
C. Battery Charger: Provide a solid state, fully automatic,

variable charging rate battery charger. The charger shall be
capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and

24000 AVILA ROAD

D. Battery Cabinet: Provide a separate locked cabinet for the main

fire alarm control panel batteries. Remote fire alarm cabinets
may contain the batteries internal where space permits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Locate all fire alarm system devices as required by par. 1.11

above.
B. Coordinate all work with other trades to provide a complete and

functional system.
C. Perform all pretesting with interfaces to other trades installed

and operational.
3.2 ELECTRIC POWER
A. General: Provide primary power for the new main FACP from an
emergency breaker panel in the basement. Power shall be 120 VAC
service, transformed through a two-winding, isolation type
transformer and rectified to low voltage DC for operation of all
circuits and devices. Provide new emergency power risers for
powering the remote FACPs and all auxiliary power supply panels.
Provide a new NEMA 1 "General Purpose Enclosure" with separate
circuit breakers for each floor where power is required. The
circuit breakers shall be painted red, marked "FACP", and provide
with a lockable handle or cover.
3.3 SYSTEM FIELD WIRING
A. Wiring Within Cabinets, Enclosures, Boxes, Junction Boxes and

Fittings: Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the
sides and back of any box, enclosure or cabinet. All conductors
which are terminated, spliced, or otherwise interrupted in any
enclosure, cabinet, mounting or junction box shall be connected
to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal in accordance with the
wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with
approved pressure type terminal blocks, which are securely
mounted. The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be
prohibited.

24000 AVILA ROAD

B. Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinets (FATC): Provide a terminal cabinet
at the base of any circuit riser, on each floor at each riser,
and where indicated on the drawings. Terminal size shall be
appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected. All
conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing
all conductors, their labels, their circuits and their
interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal
cabinet.
C. Alarm Wiring: All wiring shall be new. T-taps are permitted in

Style 4 circuits with interconnections occurring on terminal
strips.
1. Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop

problems. Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate
at less than 21.6 volts. Circuits operating at any other
voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10% of
nominal voltage.
2. Install all conductors in rigid metal conduit or electrical

metallic tubing. The use of flexible conduit not exceeding
a six foot length shall be permitted in initiating device
circuits and notification appliance circuits. Run conduit
or tubing concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on
the drawings.
3. Signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field

wiring shall be solid copper, No. 18 AWG size conductors at
a minimum.
4. Visual alarm signal and audible appliance circuits shall be

solid copper No. 12 AWG size conductors at a minimum.
Speaker circuits shall be solid copper No. 16 AWG size
conductors at a minimum.
5. Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the

manufacturer. For shielded wiring, the shield shall be
grounded at only one point, which shall be in or adjacent
to the FACP, and shall be carried through continuously at
each termination location, without grounding.
6. Circuits to fan shutdown systems and door locking systems

shall terminate in terminal cabinets within 3 feet of the
controllers for those systems. The completion of those
circuits from the terminal cabinets to the appropriate
system shall be provided under this Division.
7. Power wiring, operating at 120 VAC minimum, shall be No. 12

AWG size THHN solid copper, minimum.

24000 AVILA ROAD

D. Conductor Terminations: No specific color coding is required for
any circuit; however, labeling of any circuit at terminal blocks
in fire alarm terminal cabinets (FATC), main fire alarm control
panel (MFAP), and remote fire alarm control panels (RFAP) shall
be provided at each conductor connection. Each conductor or
cable shall have a shrink-wrap label to provide a unique and
specific designation. Each FATC, MFAP and RFAP shall contain a
laminated drawing which indicates each conductor, its label,
circuit and terminal. The laminated drawing shall be neat, using
12 point lettering minimum size, and mounted within each cabinet,
panel or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or
terminals.
3.4 FIRESTOPPING
A. General: Firestop all holes for conduit, piping, or other

penetrations which pass through floor slabs, fire-rated walls,
partitions with fire-rated doors, vertical service shafts, or any
fire-rated assemblies in accordance with Section 07270,
Firestopping.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES
A. FACP: Locate the new FACP in the Data/Utility Room at first

floor. Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 1
800 mm (6 feet) above the finished floor or center the cabinet at
1 600 mm (5-1/2 feet), whichever is lower. All conductor
terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing all
conductors, their labels, their circuits and their
interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP.
B. Notification Appliance Devices: Locate new notification

appliance devices as described herein. Mount assemblies on walls
2 000 mm (80 inches) above the finished floor or 150 mm (6
inches) below the ceiling, whichever is lower. Ceiling mounted
speaker/strobes candela ratings shall conform to NFPA 72.
C. Smoke Detector: Locate new detector as described herein on a 100

mm (4 inch) mounting box. Detectors located on the ceiling shall
be installed not less than 100 mm (4 inches) from a side wall to
the near edge. Those located on the wall shall have the top of
the detector at least 100 mm (4 inches) below the ceiling, but
not more than 300 mm (12 inches) below the ceiling. In the case
of solid joist construction, the detectors shall be mounted on
the bottom of the joists. On smooth ceilings, detectors shall be
installed not over 9 100 mm (30 feet) apart in any direction.
Closer spacing shall be used when recommended by the detector
manufacturer or required by NFPA 72. In raised floor spaces, the
smoke detectors shall be installed to protect 20 903 100 square
mm (225 square feet) per detector. Install smoke detectors no

24000 AVILA ROAD

closer than 1 500 mm (5 feet) from air handling supply outlets.
Heat detectors shall be installed in strict accordance with their
UL listing. Heat detectors, provided to meet ANSI A17.1
requirements for elevator power disconnect, shall be located
within 600mm (24 inches) to each sprinkler head in the elevator
machinery room.
3.6 TESTS
A. Megger Tests: After all wiring has been installed, and prior to
making any connections to panels or devices, all wiring shall be
megger tested for insulation resistance, grounds, and/or shorts.
Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a
minimum of 250 VDC. Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation
shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC. The tests shall be
witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded
for use at the final acceptance test.
B. Loop Resistance Tests: Measure and record the resistance of each

circuit with each pair of conductors in the circuit short-
circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin. The
tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test
results recorded for use at the final acceptance test.
C. All Notification Appliance Circuit Preliminary and Final

Acceptance Tests shall be performed outside of normal building
business hours. The Contracting Officer will advise the
Contractor of acceptable testing times.
D. Preliminary Testing: Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that

all devices and circuits are functioning properly. Tests shall
meet the requirements of Paragraph 3.07 of this section. After
preliminary testing is complete, provide a letter certifying that
the installation is complete and fully operable. The letter
shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested
in place and functioned properly. The letter shall also state
that all panel functions were tested and operated properly. The
letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the
preliminary tests. The Contractor and an authorized
representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in
attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary
adjustments. The Construction Manager must be present at the
preliminary test.
E. Final Acceptance Testing: Notify the Contracting Officer in

writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing.
Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the
test date. A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until
the O&M Manuals are provided to the Contracting Officer and the
following are provided at the job site:

24000 AVILA ROAD

1. Marked-up red line drawings of the system as actually
installed
2. Megger test results
3. Loop resistance test results
4. Complete program printout including all input/output

addresses
The final tests shall be witnessed by a Fire Protection Engineer

from the GSA Region 9 Safety and Environmental Management Branch,
the Building Engineer and the GSA Project Manager. At this time,
any and all required tests shall be repeated at the discretion of
the Government. Following acceptance of the system, as-built
drawings and Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals shall be
delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance.
3.7 MINIMUM SYSTEM TESTS
A. General: Test the system in accordance with the procedures

outlined in NFPA 72. The required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit

conductors and ground. The tests shall be accomplished at
the preliminary test with results available at the final
system test.
2. Verify that all fire alarm control panels are in the normal
condition as detailed in the manufacturer's operating and
maintenance manual.
3. Test each initiating and indicating device and circuit for

proper operation and response at the control panel.
4. Test the system for all specified functions in accordance

with the contract documents and the manufacturer's
operating and maintenance manual.
5. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by

test, the secondary power system is capable of operating
the system for the time period and in the manner specified.
6. Determine that the system is operable under trouble

conditions as specified.
7. Visually inspect all wiring.
8. Test the battery charger and batteries.

24000 AVILA ROAD

9. Verify that all software control and data files have been
entered or programmed into the FACP. Hard copy records of
the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.
10. Verify that red-line drawings are accurate.
11. Measure the current in circuits to assure there is the

calculated spare capacity for the circuits.
12. Measure voltage readings for circuits to assure that

voltage drop is not excessive.
13. Disconnect the verification feature for smoke detectors

during tests to minimize the amount of smoke or test gas
needed to activate the detector.
14. Measure the voltage drop at the most remote appliance on

each notification appliance circuit.
3.8 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS
A. Interchangeable Parts: All spare parts furnished shall be

directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the
installed system. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and
identified by nameplate, tagging, or stamping. Spare parts shall
be delivered to the GSA Building Engineer.
B. Spare Parts: Provide the following spare parts and accessories:
1. 2 Audio-Visual devices of each type and candela rating

installed
2. 1 Smoke detector of each type installed
3. 1 Addressable interface module of each type installed
4. 1 Box of fuses for each fused circuit
C. Parts List: Furnish a list, in duplicate, of all other parts and

accessories which the manufacturer of the system recommends to be
stocked for maintenance.
D. Parts Guarantee: The contractor shall agree to furnish

replacement parts at the same price as parts furnished under this
contract for a period of 3 years after acceptance of the system,
with a maximum inflation rate of 5% yearly not to exceed the
parts normal retail price.
3.9 KEYS

24000 AVILA ROAD

A. General: Keys and locks for all equipment shall be identical.
Provide not less than six keys of each type required. All keys
shall be CAT 104.

Department of Homeland Security
U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services

U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS)
Office of the Chief Information Officer
STRUCTURED CABLE PLANT

SCOPE OF WORK
For The
CSC Laguna Niguel, CA – FDNS 1st Floor

IT Service Request Number (ITSR): N/A
June 29, 2009
Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this deliverable.
2 Version B
Table of Contents
PART 1 – BACKGROUND 3
1.1 Background 3
PART 2 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 3
2.1 General Requirements 3

2.2 Installation Address 3
2.3 Period of Performance 3
2.4 Regulatory References 3
2.5 Copper Cable Installation 4
2.6 Copper Cable Specifications 5
2.7 Data Fiber Cable Installation 6
2.8 Data Fiber Cable Specifications 6
2.9 Test and Acceptance 6
2.10 Technical Deliverables 7
2.11 Contractor Personnel 7
2.12 Project Updates 8
2.13 Site Cleanup 8
2.14 Facility Damage 8
2.15 Licenses and Permits 8
2.16 Site Access 8
PART 3 – WARRANTY 8
3.1 Warranty 8
ATTACHMENT A: Specific Site Requirements
ATTACHMENT B: Project Summary Page
3 Version B
PART 1 - BACKGROUND
1.1 BACKGROUND
The Department of Homeland Security (DHS) U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services
(USCIS) Office of the Chief Information Officer (OCIO) is responsible for management of
the structured cable plant for USCIS initiated projects. In addition, OCIO provides Local
Area Network (LAN), Wide Area Network (WAN) and cable plant design in accordance
with USCIS standards.
PART 2 – GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to

furnishing and installing Telecommunications Cabling.
B. All cables and related terminations, support and grounding hardware shall be
furnished, installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the contractor as
detailed in this document and the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard
C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are

provided in this document. Installation details, cable routing, if applicable are
provided as an attachment to this document.
D. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor,
equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to
complete the installation of this structured cabling system in compliance with the
specifications and drawings.
2.2 INSTALLATION ADDRESS
California Service Center
Chet Holifield Federal Building

24000 Avila Road
Laguna Niguel, CA 92607
2.3 ESTIMATED PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE
The dates given are current at the writing of this SOW. The actual installation dates may
deviate from below due to construction schedule changes. The USCIS OCIO Regional
Coordinator will report any updates to these dates.
1. The estimated Period of Performance is 06/05/09 – 09/01/09.
2.4 REGULATORY REFERENCES
C-1 Version B
A. The cabling system described in this document is derived from the

recommendations made in recognized telecommunications industry standards. The
following documents are incorporated by reference:
1. USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 526-14, Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed
Multimode Fiber Cable Plant – OFSTP-14
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements
Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components
Cabling Standard Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components
6. ANSI/TIA/EIA– 570-B, Residential Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
7. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 598, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
8. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606-A, Administration Standard for Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Building
9. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
10. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant
Telecommunications Cabling Standard
11. BICSI-TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International
12. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA-70), National Electrical Code
(NEC)
13. NEMA 250
14. National Electrical Code (NEC) Articles 770 and 800
15. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) (IEEE C 2)
B. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then, as a
general principle, the more stringent requirement shall apply. However, in all cases
where there appears to be conflict or a specification is not clear to the contractor, the
USCIS Regional Coordinator or USCIS Technical Representative must be contacted
for clarification.
C. The contractor will abide by all applicable federal, state, county and local building
and safety regulations.
2.5 COPPER CABLE INSTALLATION
A. The contractor shall provide, place, terminate, certify and provide required
documentation of all Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cables as specified through
work assignments under this SOW.
B. All cable terminations to be installed by technicians certified by the equipment

vendor. (Keystone style modular jacks)
C. Data and Voice Horizontal Cabling need to be of the appropriate color as specified
in USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard.
D. The contractor shall provide one 10-foot CAT-6 patch cord for each workstation
outlet installed.
C-1 Version B
1. Patch cords should be 8-position 8-conductor manufactured assemblies

using stranded cables meeting CAT-6 specifications.
2. Phone line cords are typically provided with end user station equipment,
and are not included in this specification.
3. For each drop location, all information outlet terminations shall follow the
ANSI/TIA/EIA T568B pin assignments.
4. Workstations to IMO patch cords are to be black in color.
E. The contractor is responsible for installing stranded copper patch cables from the
patch panel into the electronic hardware in the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) and
Remote Wiring Closet (TR). The patch cords should be of varied lengths to maintain
a neat and functional finished product.
1. Patch cords should be 8-position 8-conductor manufactured assemblies

using stranded cables meeting CAT-6 specifications.
2. 100% of Data “A” ports will be patched.
3. Provisions should be made to patch approximately 30% of the Data “B”
ports. The requirements for Data “B” ports will be determined by the
on-site representative.
4. Cables shall be neatly routed and appropriately fastened with Velcro
wherever possible at all racks and patch panels, and shall be dressed in
a functional and visually pleasing fashion, observing bend radius
requirements at all times.
5. MDF and TR patch cords need to be of the appropriate color as specified
in this document and the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard.
6. Ty wraps are NOT acceptable for use in any part of the cable plant
installation. Velcro shall be utilized.
F. Separate patch panels will segregate “Data A” and “Data B” cables. The upper patch
panels will be used for “Data A”, only; the lower patch panels will be used for “Data
B” only. Patch cables shall meet the same specifications as defined in the Copper
Cable Specification Section.
G. Voice and data at each information outlet shall be identically numbered, where
practical (e.g. cable IDs for voice and data shall match at each location).
H. Cable labels shall conform to the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard.
I. Ensure that proper cable loops are maintained on every drop as stated in the USCIS
Structured Cable Plant Standard
J. Additional drops may be requested from the date of award, whereas the USCIS will
issue a change request or addendum for any changes, additions or modifications in
this scope of work.
2.6 COPPER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
C-1 Version B
A. All cable, equipment, and materials shall meet applicable ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-A,
National Electrical Code (NEC) 770, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE) 802 and Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Verification Program standards.
B. All cable equipment and materials must be manufactured by facilities that are
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) 9001 registered and certified as
follows:
1. Data cables will be CAT 6.

2. Data cable shall be terminated on CAT 6 compliant patch panels.
3. Voice cables will be CAT 6.
4. Voice cables shall be terminated on CAT 6 compliant patch panels.
5. Four-pair, 100-Ohm, 23-24 American Wire Gauge (AWG).
6. The cable should have contiguous, two-foot segment-length markers
printed on the cable jacket. The markings must also show the applicable
performance CAT 6 rating, as well as the fire rating of the cable being
installed.
7. The finished cable shall be 100% plenum rated in accordance with the
requirements of NEC Article 800, UL 444, NFPA 262, (UL 910), and
applicable CSA standards.
8. All CAT-6 horizontal cabling must be white in color. (Drop location
faceplates shall be white in color or match electrical plate décor.)
9. All data horizontal cross-connects and main cross-connects are to be
stranded CAT 6 and blue (A ports) or red (B ports) in color to denote
Data connectivity. (CAT 6 jacks at the drop location will match patch
cable designation.)
10. All “C” horizontal cross-connects (“C”) and main cross-connect patch
cables are to be stranded CAT 6 and white in color to denote Voice
connectivity. (CAT 6 jacks at the drop location will match patch cable
designation.)
11. If a port on the “C” patch panel is used for data connectivity then use a
red patch cable.
12. All copper intra-closet feeds must be grey in color and terminate on
appropriate hardware as deemed by USCIS Technical representative
outlined in Attachment B.
2.7 DATA FIBER CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Fiber optic cable shall be used for all backbone links where applicable.
B. One 12-strand multimode optical fiber cable shall be installed from the MDF to each
TR to provide data backbone connectivity.
C. All ANSI/TIA/EIA – 568-B.1 requirements for fiber cable installation and termination
will be observed.
D. All strands of each fiber cable shall be terminated at each end of the cable
E. The fiber will be terminated in a standard rack-mounted fiber optic distribution box.
C-1 Version B
F. All fiber connections in the distribution boxes shall be T568SC.
G. The contractor is responsible for installing fiber patch cables from the distribution
boxes into the electronic hardware in the MDF and each TR.
H. Fiber patch cords shall be multimode, duplex, 3 meters in length, SC to SC and or

SC to LC (Please See USCIS technical representative).
I. Provisions should be made to patch each TR to the MDF. Two fiber patch cables are
therefore required for each TR. One to patch the electronic equipment to the fiber
distribution box in the TR and one to patch the electronic equipment to the fiber
distribution box in the MDF.
J. Provisions should be made to supply approximately 30% additional fiber patch cords
for future requirements and/or maintenance spares.
2.8 DATA FIBER CABLE SPECIFICATIONS
A. All fiber cable shall be 12-strand multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber.
B. All fiber cable shall be of interlocking armor construction eliminating the need for
conduit or plenum rated inner duct.
C. Fiber cable shall be colored orange to denote multimode fiber.
D. Plenum rated fiber cable is required by the USCIS for backbone cables routed within
buildings.
E. Outside plant fiber cable shall have a water block construction and meet the
requirements for compound flow and water penetration.
2.9 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE
A. The installation contractor shall complete all testing of the cable plant, under the
following criteria:
1. The installation contractor is responsible for providing all personnel,

equipment, instrumentation, and supplies that are necessary to perform
the required testing. (Permanent Link Test Required)
2. All work shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B, NEC 770, and IEEE 802 standard
specification quality (as applicable) and will be subject to review and
acceptance by the authorized USCIS representatives.
3. Any work that does not meet or exceed these standards will be reported
to the contractor who must take immediate action to correct the
deficiency at no additional cost to USCIS.
C-1 Version B
B. All installed copper cables shall be tested with a Fluke Level III or higher cable tester
to certify that the cable conforms to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B requirements.
C. At the completion of the installation and termination of cable, the contractor will test
all cabling as set forth by the applicable standards as specified in this SOW.
D. Testing shall verify that the final termination of all cabling is operational and meets
the operational specifications for each type of wiring as specified in the USCIS
Structured Cable Plant Standards and this SOW.
E. The contractor is responsible for replacing any cable that does not pass testing as
prescribed by the applicable USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standards and as
specified in this SOW.
F. After the fiber cable has been installed and terminated, the contractor shall test the
fiber cable to insure that it will function properly, and that all applicable specifications
have been met.
G. All fiber terminations shall be tested according to the USCIS Structured Cable Plant
Standard.
2.10 TECHNICAL DELIVERABLES
The contractor shall ensure all documentation meets the requirements, as specified in the
ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 Standards. Where a conflict may exist between the ANSI/TIA/EIA 606
and the USCIS Structured Cable Plant Standard documentation, the USCIS Structured
Cable Plant Standard documentation shall prevail. Contractor shall provide two
hardcopies and softcopies of the following to the USCIS OCIO Regional Coordinator and
USCIS Technical Representative:
1. Letter of certification from the installing organization.

2. Letters of certification from each installation technician for the
appropriate cabling system being installed.
3. Completed Contractor Information Form.
4. Implementation report.
5. Detailed materials list.
6. Cable plant test certification letter.
7. Electronic copper cable test results (soft copy only) in Fluke Networks
Linkware format (.flw). (Full plot data). See USCIS Structured Cable
Plant Standard for an example.
8. Electronic Fiber-optic cable test results (soft copy only) in Fluke
Networks Linkware format (.flw). (Full plot data). See USCIS Structured
Cable Plant Standard for an example.
9. Certification summary reports for both fiber-optic and copper cables in
csv format.
10. Documentation on Structured Cable Warranty pertaining to site and
procedures to claim warranty service.
11. As-built site drawings soft and hard copy. Including a laminated 11 x 17
floor plan with corresponding jack locations in each closet. Hand written
documentation not accepted.
C-1 Version B
2.11 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL
A. The contractor will provide a lead technician to be on site at all times while work is in
progress.
B. For continuity and logistics, the USCIS recommends that the same lead technician
oversee this project from inception through completion.
C. All cable terminations need to be performed by a certified installer for the

appropriate cabling system being installed.
D. The contractor shall be certified by the Structured Cabling Vendor in order that the
final installation be certified in accordance with the Vendors warranty requirements.
2.12 PROJECT UPDATES
A. If requested by the USCIS On-Site Representative, the contractor’s lead technician

will provide a daily verbal briefing. This briefing will include, but is not limited to, work
status, milestone status, and any issues.
B. The contractor will be required to participate in an End of Project Conference Call.

The contractor’s Project Manager and Lead Technician will participate. The
conference call will be scheduled by the Regional Coordinator and will take place
approximately two days prior to the contractor leaving the site. The objective of the
conference call will be to confirm that all parties agree that the job is complete
according to this Statement of Work and the CIS Structured Cabling Standard and to
address any issues that were not previously identified.
2.13 SITE CLEANUP
The contractor is responsible for coordination with the site general contractor or
property/facility management contractor for the removal of all debris resulting from the
work being performed by the contractor on a daily basis.
2.14 FACILITY DAMAGE
The contractor is responsible for any damage incurred while in the process of performing
work including, but not limited to, damaged voice and/or data hardware, damaged ceiling
tiles and walls, and scratched furniture. Any damage should be reported immediately to
USCIS technical representative.
C-1 Version B
2.15 LICENSES AND PERMITS
A. The contractor is responsible for acquiring any and all permits as required.
B. The contractor is responsible for maintaining all required federal and local licenses
and privilege permits.
2.16 SITE ACCESS
The contractor is responsible for coordinating with the USCIS on-site representative or
the general contractor for site access privileges and required individual safety training.
PART 3 – WARRANTY
3.1 WARRANTY
A. The warranty shall cover the failure of the cable plant system to support current or
future applications that are designed for the link/channel specifications of TIA/EIA-
568-B.
B. A minimum fifteen (15) year warranty covering application assurance, product,

cable, and labor.
C. Warranty needs to allow USCIS designated personnel to connect end user

equipment without going through a certified contractor.
D. Warranty needs to allow for new cable plant additions by the same contractor or by
another certified contractor of the installed vendor’s equipment.
E. The warranty needs to be guaranteed by the hardware vendor not the installation
contractor.
F. If a warranty claim is initiated, USCIS reserves the right to authorize certified

installation contractors permission to fix the cable plant. In the event that the
installation contractor is denied access then the hardware vendor will provide
another certified installation contractor for approval. This process will continue until
the cable plant issues are resolved.
C-1 Version B
Attachment A
Specific Site Requirements
1. The provided Scope of Work includes the installation of Category 6 horizontal

cabling as specified in the above standard. The proposal submitted MUST include
a cable plant installation and solution to meet the provided requirements. The
manufacturer of the conductivity hardware is responsible for the warranty of the
complete installation. The proposed cable plant solution must meet the minimum
15-year application assurance warranty to include product, cable, etc. and labor.
2. Provide a component (material) list of the items included in the submitted
proposal. This document will be used when reviewing the proposal to clarify that
all of the requested items have been included. Also provided a description of the
cable plant solution proposed, channel solution, warranty details meeting the
specified criteria and certification from manufacturer of conductivity hardware,
which will warranty complete installation.
3. Provide and install data and voice copper cabling to 70 drops locations. (67 quad & 3
voice only wall phones) * HSDN requirements list separately below in section.
4. Estimate of 20’ of 18” ladder cable runway shall be installed in RWC / Telecommunication
Room. (For ladder cable runway use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. Universal Cable
Runway 10250-718 or equiv. and Radius Bend 10723-718 or equiv. with associated
mounting and installation products, butt splices, corner and mounting brackets, etc.)
5. Provide and install one (1) standard 7’ x 19” two post rack with 10” vertical (front & rear
combo) wire management in the RWC / Telecommunication Room. (For equipment rack
use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 55053-703 or equiv. and for 10” vertical
management with hinged covers use CPI 30096-703 or equiv.)
6. Provide and install one (1) single-sided shelf in the Telecommunication Room equipment
rack. (For single-sided shelf use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 40074-700 or equiv.)
7. Provide and install two (2) 20 amp Power Distribution Units with 6’ in the Training Switch /
Rack Room equipment rack. (For PDU unit use Wiremold R5BZ20-15 or equiv.)
8. The equipment racks require 2U & 1U horizontal wire management with hinged covers as
specified in elevation drawings with quantities. Total quantity: 8 (2U) & 2 (1U) (For
horizontal management use CPI, Chatsworth Products, Inc. 30530-719 & 30529-719 or
equiv.) * Additional wire management assemblies have been added to the provided
total which are not displayed in the below Visio elevation drawings.
9. The horizontal cabling for the modular furniture assemblies will be routed in a provided
power / communication pole or conduit raceway system within a wall or column installed
by the electrical contractor. * Please note that sufficient cable length should be
installed at these locations to accommodate routing through the modular furniture
assemblies for termination. Provide components (loom tubing, spiral wrap, etc.)
for the transition from the wall or column into the furniture assemblies.
10. The installation dates for modular furniture will need to be coordinated with the
construction schedule and onsite representative.
11. All horizontal cabling routed through ceiling space to the designated RWC /
Telecommunication Room. Horizontal cabling shall be supported by J-hooks staggered
approximately within four feet (4’) on center (max. distance of 5’ spacing). Use Caddy
CAT64, 32, 21 and 12 or equiv. for horizontal cabling support. Leave 20% capacity in J-
hooks for future growth.
12. Install sixty-seven (67) Category 6 triplex data and voice cables within the FDNS space.
Terminate the cables on 48 port performance compliant 2U patch panels for “A”, “B” and
“C” locations in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. (Total quantity: 6 – 48
port patch panels)
C-1 Version B
13. Install and terminate three (3) Category 6 single voice cables (wall phones) on a 24 port
performance compliant 1U patch panel for “W” locations (Wall) in the Telecommunication
Room equipment rack. (Total quantity: 1 – 24 port patch panel)
14. One (1) - 100 pair plenum CAT 3 cable to be installed between RWC /
Telecommunication Room and the CSC PBX / Voice Closet on the 2nd floor and
terminated on a two (2) - 48 port patch panels for voice cross-connect between closets.
(center pins 4 & 5 - white / blue & blue / white) (Total quantity: 2 – 48 port patch
panels & 1 – 110FT)
15. One (1) - 12-strand armored plenum multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber cable to be
installed and terminated with SC connectors on SC duplex panels between RWC /
Telecommunication Room and the Server / Computer Room on the 2nd floor. Provide
one (1) 1U enclosure for fiber optic terminations in the Server / Computer Room and one
(1) 1U enclosure in the Telecommunication Room equipment rack. * Please see the on-
site contact for the exact locations and preferred routing of fiber optic backbone
cabling.
16. Provide the listed fiber optic jumpers. SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M
in length - Quantity: 2; SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 15M in length -
Quantity: 2; SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 15M in length - Quantity:
2; SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length - Quantity: 2.
17. All equipment hardware mounted in racks and cabinet must utilize concealed routing for
both vertical and horizontal cable management to provide a clean patching environment.
* Please provide manufacture specific patch cables for channel performance with
solution installation. Patch cable quantity: 100% - “A” 40 (7’ blue) & 40 (5’ blue),
30% - “B” ports 20 (5’ red), 100% - “C” ports 80 (5’ white) at the equipment rack and
100 (10’ black) for the drop location. Also provided the list of spare patch cables
for additional equipment connections: 20 (25’ black)
18. Installer contractor is responsible for providing labeled patch cables. This is for
identification of patch cables routed in the Telecommunication Room. The number
labeling sequence should be consecutive, 0001 – 1000, with duplications for both
ends. * Please see the on-site contact regarding labeling and identification which
may be different than the listed sequence.
19. See Attachment C (Visio drawings – separate PDF File) for the closet elevations
and layouts for the equipment racks, cabinets, cable runway, patch panel, wire
management, quantities, etc. NOTE: Additional components may be specified in
the above details that are not shown in the Visio elevation or layout drawings. The
provided elevation layouts for components and the positioning are critical for the
deployment of equipment hardware.
20. Installation contractor is required to sleeve for horizontal cabling for wall penetrations that
are not provided by the electrical contractor.
21. Fire stopping of all horizontal penetrations is required by the installer contractor and must
meet specifications, UL ratings and installation requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B,
NFPA, ASTM, and NEC, local and state codes.
22. Grounding / bonding of equipment racks, ladder tray, etc. is required to the provided
TMGB, TGB, etc. or equivalent by the electrical contractor. Please reference standards
and manufacturer requirements for installation.
23. Identification for the labeling of the telecommunication closets and cable #’s will be
clarified prior to installation of cable plant.
24. Installer contractor is responsible for installing network hardware and PDU units in
the equipment racks and routing of patch cables in the vertical and horizontal wire
management.)
25. Network Electronics, UPS and PBX (Phone system) are not included in this S.O.W.
26. Utilize Velcro fasteners for cable plant installation. Tie wraps are not acceptable
for any application of the installation. Provide two (2) Panduit HLS-75R0 or
equivalent - ¾” x 75’ roll of Velcro separately for patch cable installation.)
C-1 Version B
27. Installer contractor is responsible for removing the abandoned cables within the
space back to the place of termination (ex. telecom closet). Place blank cover
plates on the existing wall outlets which are not utilized. *Please see the on-site
contact regarding questions in the identification of these cables.
28. IMPORTANT NOTE: The special requirements listed below are for the HSD Network
slotted for the FDNS space.
29. One (1) - 6-strand armored plenum multimode 62.5x125 μm optical fiber cable to be
installed and terminated with SC connectors on a SC duplex panel between FDNS /
HSDN Secure Room and the Server / Computer Room on the 2nd floor. Provide one (1)
1U enclosure for fiber optic terminations in the Server / Computer Room and one (1) wall-
mount enclosure in the HSDN Secure Room, which will be mounted below ceiling on the
back wall. * Please see the on-site contact for the exact locations and preferred
routing of fiber optic backbone cabling.
30. Install a total of six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) in the EMT conduit
raceway system installed within the wall space of the HDSN secure space. The six (6)
Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) will originate from the single-gang, flush
mount box and will be routed to three (3) different locations within the Secure Room
space. Terminate the six (6) Category 6 modules (gray in color) into the one 6-port flush
mount, single-gang plate. These six (6) Category 6 UTP plenum cables are point to point
within the room only and do not utilize patch panels or incorporate the star topology.
31. Install two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cable (white in color) into the three (3) open wall
mount boxes. Terminate a Category 6 module (gray in color) in 2-port flush mount,
single-gang covers at the three (3) locations.
32. Identify the cables in the wall boxes and label the faceplates with #1 - #6 for identification
of the six (6) point to point cables.
33. Install a total of two (2) Category 6 UTP plenum cables (white in color) from the HSDN
Secure Room space to the Telecommunications Closet. The two (2) Category 6 UTP
plenum cables (white in color) will be utilized for the required POTS line for the HSD
Network. Leave the cables un-terminated at both ends and label accordingly and to and
from point to point locations for identification. These cables will be terminated be the
service provider during the circuit installation and extension.
34. Provide Category 6 UTP patch cables (gray in color) in 10’ in length. Quantity: 6 (for wall
to computer connection)
35. Provide Category 6 UTP patch cables (gray in color) in 20’ in length. Quantity: 6 (for
HSDN switch connection into cabinet) These patch cables will routed into the cabinet
and plugged directly into the network switch providing the HSDN connection to the point
to point locations installed.
36. Provide SC – LC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 3M in length. Quantity: 2
37. Provide SC – SC Duplex 62.5 MM fiber optic jumpers 2M in length. Quantity: 2
38. Please note that the HSD Network shall be installed separately from standard
network drop locations and shall NOT share conduit raceways, etc. A distance of
approximately 24” should separate outlets and termination points per security
standard requirements.
* The above provides only the necessary fiber optic and copper cabling, patch cables and
fiber optic jumpers to support the network connection requirements for the HSD Network
deployment. All network equipment, cabinet, router, UPS and PDU units, etc. are items
which are not included in this S.O.W. and are provided by others.
C-1 Version B
Attachment B
Project Summary Page
Site Specific Information

Site name: Chet Holifield Federal Building ITSR number: N/A
Address 1: 24000 Avila Road Project name: FDNS
Address 2: 1st Floor Security
requirements: Existing Facility
City, State: Lagune Niguel, CA Period of
performance: 06/05/09 - 09/01/09
Zip code: 92607 Installation Dates: 07/15/09 - 09/01/09
Points Of Contact
USCIS OCIO Regional Coordinator USCIS Technical Representative
Name: Mile Manning Name: Gary Chambers
Voice: 802-872-4625 Voice: 802-872-4160
Cell: 802-839-9218 Cell: 802-399-5011
E-Mail: [email protected] E-Mail: [email protected]
Cable Installation Requirements

Cable type: CAT 6 Rack: Add New Rack(s)
Data Patch panel: NEW Number of rack(s) needed: 1
Voice Patch panel: New Patch Panel Cabinet: N/A
Estimated cable pull length: T.B.D. Number of cabinet(s) needed: 0
Cable tray installed? N/A J hooks required? Yes
Drop Specifics
Dual Data/Dual Voice: Quad Data/Dual Voice:
Dual Data/Single Voice: 67 Quad Data/No Voice:
Dual Data/No Voice: 3 (HSDN Build-out only) No Data/Single Voice:
No Data/Dual Voice: Wall Mount Phones: 3
Data (6) HSDN: 1 (HSDN Build-out only) Total Drops: 70
* Please provide a Unit Price Cost for the installation of a triplex drop and single voice
wall phone outlet for additional locations for layout design.
Unit Price for Additional Triplex Drop = $

Unit Price for Additional Single Voice Drop = $
C-1 Version B
Attachment C
Telecommunication Room Layout
See attached closet layouts and elevations for the above S.O.W.
• RWC / Telecommunication Room Elevation / 1st Floor

• RWC / Telecommunication Room Layout / 1st Floor
C-1 Version B
C-1 Version B
Attachment D
Proposed FDNS Floor Layout
C-1 Version B
st
Wall Phone
3'-0"
54" AFF Emergency Shutdown

Button with protective
cover to prevent
W accidental hit
FRONT
8'-9"
CR
7'-9"
L5 20R
4'-3"
L5 20R D
3'-1"
3'-3"
10'-3"
8'-0"
18'-3"
0 ft. 1 ft. 2.4 in. 2 ft. 4 ft.

st
Total Drops
67 2D/1V
3 Wall Phones
Comp Room
152 sqft
RWC
10
11
12
7
8
9
45
2
3
4
5
6
44
43
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
ORTRONICS
C
A
T
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5
41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
40
ORTRONICS
C
A
T
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5
39
38
37
36
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
35
ORTRONICS
C
A
T
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5
34
33
32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
31
ORTRONICS
C
A
T
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5
30
29
Catalyst 3750 SERIES

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SYST 1X 15X 17X 31X 33X 47X 1 3

RPS
MASTR
STAT
DUPLX
28
SPEED
STACK 2 4
MODE 2X 16X 18X 32X 34X 48X
27
26
Catalyst 3750 SERIES

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
SYST 1X 15X 17X 31X 33X 47X 1 3

RPS
MASTR
STAT
DUPLX
25
SPEED
STACK 2 4
MODE 2X 16X 18X 32X 34X 48X
24
23
22
21
20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
19
ORTRONICS
C
A
T
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5
18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
17
ORTRONICS
C
A
T
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5
16
15
14
13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
11
ORTRONICS
C
A
T
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Wall Phone Patch Panel
7
ORTRONICS
C
A
T
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 5
0V 0V 0V
- 25 - 25 -25
A A A
0
0
-20R 3
-20R 3
-20R 3
4
L5
L5
L5
A
A
M M M
NE NE NE
-2 5 0V -2 50V -2 50V
A A A
0
0
-20 R 3
-20 R 3
-20 R 3
3
L5
L5
L5
A
A
NEM N EM NEM
2
AVR Trim
I Overlo ad
Test
Smart-UPS
O n Line On Batte ry
2 2 0 0 Load O B attery
Char ge
AVR Boost Repl ace Battery
1
w w w. a p cc. c om

First Floor Expansion Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

First Floor Expansion Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

First Floor Expansion Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

REQUEST

ISSUE DATE: APRIL 19, 2010

PROPOSAL DUE DATE MAY 11, 2010

SUBMIT TO : GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION

TASK ORDER RFP NO.: 9P3PSLC101037

GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION

SENSITIVE BUT UNCLASSIFIED

TASK ORDER REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL

PROJECT TITLE: “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION”

SECURITY/WORK HOURS RESTRICTIONS:

SITE VISIT DATE(S)/INSTRUCTIONS: 04/22/2010, 10 A.M. (PDT)

DEADLINE FOR SUBMISSION OF QUESTIONS: 04/27/2010, 2:00 P.M. (PDT)

DEADLINE FOR PROPOSAL SUBMISSION: 05/11/2010, 2:00 P.M. (PDT)

SOURCE SELECTION FACTORS:

Quality of Equipment and Materials

Systems Schematic and Description. List equipment/systems:

Other (Specify Non-Price Factor)

ANTICIPATED WORK START DATE: TBD

ANTICIPATED REQUIRED COMPLETION TIME: 90 days from NTP

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AMOUNT (PER DAY): $755.33

RFP VOLUMES AND ATTACHMENTS:

VOLUME I: OFFER FORMS

DESCRIPTION/STATEMENT OF WORK/PERFORMANCE STANDARDS (REFERENCE ATTACHMENTS AS APPROPRIATE):

WARNING : DO NOT QUALIFY YOUR PROPOSAL

A BID GUARANTEE IS REQUIRED WITH YOUR PROPOSAL. SEE REQUIREMENTS IN VOLUME I

ESTIMATED COST RANGE OF THIS PROJECT IS BETWEEN $500,000 AND $1,000,000.

HEATHER CANEY, CONTRACTING OFFICER

“PROPERTY OF THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT.

Bid Guarantee/Bid Bond

1. Task Order Offer Form

NOTE: Electronic Commerce IS a permitted method of submission, modification, revision,

Contracting Officer, at [email protected], followed up with submission of the original documents

U.S. General Services Administration

1. FAR 52.228-1 BID GUARANTEE (SEP 1996)

2. FAR 52.204-8 ANNUAL REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS (FEB 2009)

FAR CLAUSE # TITLE DATE CHANGE

3. METHOD FOR AWARD

(1) SPECIALIZED EXPERIENCE

(2) PAST PERFORMANCE

6. FAR 52.215-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS-COMPETITIVE ACQUISITION (JAN 2004)

(a) Definitions. As used in this provision-

SPECIALIZED EXPERIENCE / PAST PERFORMANCE REFERENCE

21 DESCRIPTION OF WORK, PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN

TASK ORDER OFFER FORM

PROJECT TITLE: “RVS, DHS CIS FIRST FLOOR EXPANSION”

General Services Administration General Services Administration

3. OFFEROR (Company Name)

4. OFFEROR PHONE NUMBER 5. OFFEROR FAX NUMBER

6. OFFEROR DUNS NUMBER 7. OFFEROR TAX ID NUMBER

0001 LUMP SUM BID $___________________________

Write in Price for Lump Sum Bid work:

11. SIGNATURE 12. DATE

2. FAR 52.211-12 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - CONSTRUCTION (Apr 1984)

3. FAR 52.236-27 SITE VISIT (CONSTRUCTION) (Feb 1995)

(b) The organized site visit has been scheduled for—

10:00 - 11:30 A.M.

(c) Participants will meet at—

Chet Holifield Federal Building

24000 Avila Road, Suite 4100

Laguna Niguel, CA 92677